Siemens SINUMERIK 840D sl Function Manual Download Page 1322 | Manualshive

Page: 1322 / 2184

background image

Detailed description

2.7 Structure and functions of the basic program

Basic logic functions: PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl)

48

Function Manual, 11/2006, 6FC5397-0BP10-2BA0

2.7.1

Startup and synchronization of NCK PLC

Loading the basic program

The basic program must be loaded with the S7 tool when the PLC is in the Stop state. This

ensures that all blocks in the basic program will be initiated correctly the next time they are

called. An undefined state may otherwise develop on the PLC (e.g., all PLC LEDs flashing).

Startup,

The synchronization of NCK and PLC is performed during startup. The system and user data

blocks are checked for integrity and the most important basic program parameters are

verified for plausibility. In cases of errors, the basic program produces an alarm (visible on

HMI) and switches the PLC to the Stop state.
A warm restart is not provided, i.e., following system initialization, the operating system runs

organization block OB 100 and always commences cyclic execution at the start of OB 1.

Synchronization

The PLC is synchronized with the HMI and NCK and CP during powerup.

Sign-of-life

After a correct initial start and the first complete OB1 cycle (initial setting cycle) the PLC and

NCK continuously exchange sign of life signals. If the signoflife signal from the NCK fails to

arrive, the PLC/NCK interface is neutralized and the signal "NCK CPU ready" in DB 10 is set

to zero.

2.7.2

Cyclical mode (OB 1)

General

The NCK PLC interface is processed completely in cyclic mode. From a chronological

viewpoint, the basic program runs ahead of the user program. In order to minimize the

execution time of the basic program, only the control/status signals are transmitted cyclically;

transfer of the auxiliary functions and G functions only takes place on request.
The following functions are performed in the cyclic part of the basic program:

•

Transmission of the control/status signals

•

Distribution of the auxiliary functions

•

M decoding (

M00

-

M99

),

•

M, S, F distribution

•

Transmission of the MCP signals via the NCK (on the SINUMERIK 840D only)

•

Acquisition and conditioning of the user errors and operating messages.

«
...
1320
1321
1322
1323
1324
...
»

Summary of Contents for SINUMERIK 840D sl

Page 1: ... basic program solution line P3 sl 14 Reference point approach R1 15 Spindles S1 16 Feeds V1 17 Tool compensation W1 18 NC PLC interface signals Z1 19 Appendix A 20 SINUMERIK SINUMERIK 840D sl 840Di sl 840D 840Di 810D Basic Functions Function Manual 11 2006 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 Valid for Control SINUMERIK 840D sl 840DE sl SINUMERIK 840Di sl 840DiE sl SINUMERIK 840D powerline 840DE powerline SINUMERI...

Page 2: ...ommissioning and operation of a device system may only be performed by qualified personnel Within the context of the safety notes in this documentation qualified persons are defined as persons who are authorized to commission ground and label devices systems and circuits in accordance with established safety practices and standards Prescribed Usage Note the following Warning This device may only b...

Page 3: ...f Publications The Internet version of DOConCD DOConWEB is available under http www automation siemens com doconweb Information about training courses and FAQs Frequently Asked Questions can be found in internet under http www siemens com motioncontrol under menu option Support Target group This publication is intended for Project engineers Technologists from machine manufacturers System startup e...

Page 4: ...le of the Function Manual the SINUMERIK controls as well as the software and the version for which this version of the Function Manual is applicable and the overview of the individual functional descriptions The description of each function is a separate book Appendix with list of abbreviations and terms An overview of the functions described in this Function Manual is on the third page The functi...

Page 5: ...is contained in the setting data SD42800 SC_SPIND_ASSIGN_TAB 0 Spindle number converter Data types The following elementary data types are used in the control system Type Meaning Value range INT Signed integers 2147483646 2147483647 REAL Figures with decimal point acc to IEEE 2 2 10 308 1 8 10 308 BOOL Boolean values TRUE FALSE TRUE 0 FALSE 0 CHAR 1 ASCII character corresponding to the code 0 255 ...

Page 6: ...the following Internet address http www siemens com automation service support Questions about the manual If you have any queries suggestions corrections in relation to this documentation please send a fax or e mail to the following address Fax 49 0 9131 98 63315 Email mailto docu motioncontrol siemens com A fax form is available at the end of this document SINUMERIK Internet address http www siem...

Page 7: ...97 0BP10 2BA0 Valid for Control SINUMERIK 840D sl 840DE sl SINUMERIK 840Di sl 840DiE sl SINUMERIK 840D powerline 840DE powerline SINUMERIK 840Di powerline 840DiE powerline SINUMERIK 810D powerline 810DE powerline Software Version NCU system software for 840D sl 840DE sl 1 3 NCU system software for 840D sl DiE sl 1 0 NCU system software for 840D 840DE 7 4 NCU system software for 840Di 840DiE 3 3 NC...

Page 8: ...ommissioning and operation of a device system may only be performed by qualified personnel Within the context of the safety notes in this documentation qualified persons are defined as persons who are authorized to commission ground and label devices systems and circuits in accordance with established safety practices and standards Prescribed Usage Note the following Warning This device may only b...

Page 9: ...2 3 Activate DEFAULT memory 33 2 2 4 Read write PLC variable 34 2 2 5 Access protection via password and keyswitch 37 2 2 5 1 Access protection via password and keyswitch 37 2 2 5 2 Password 39 2 2 5 3 Keyswitch settings DB10 DBX56 4 to 7 40 2 2 5 4 Parameterizable protection levels 41 3 Supplementary conditions 43 4 Examples 45 5 Data lists 47 5 1 Machine data 47 5 1 1 Drive specific machine data...

Page 10: ...Table of contents Basic logic functions Various NC PLC interface signals and functions A2 4 Function Manual 11 2006 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 ...

Page 11: ...function interface on the other The data interface contains status and control signals auxiliary functions and G functions while the function interface is used to transfer jobs from the PLC to the NCK This Description describes the functionality of interface signals which are of general relevance but are not included in the Descriptions of Functions Asynchronous events Status signals PLC variable ...

Page 12: ...Brief description Basic logic functions Various NC PLC interface signals and functions A2 6 Function Manual 11 2006 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 ...

Page 13: ...ction interface Data interface The data interface is used for component coordination PLC user program NC HMI operator components MCP Machine Control Panel Data exchange is organized by the basic PLC program Cyclic signal exchange The following interface signals are transferred cyclically i e in the clock grid of the OB1 by the basic PLC program NC and operator panel front specific signals Mode gro...

Page 14: ...xis spindle e g followup mode servo enable etc Control signals to drive bytes 20 21 NC to PLC Status signals from axis spindle e g position controller active current controller active etc Control signals from drive bytes 93 94 Function interface The function interface is generated by function blocks FB and function calls FC Function requests e g to traverse axes are sent from the PLC to the NC via...

Page 15: ...ns Several Control Panels on Multiple NCUs Decentralized Systems B3 DB10 DBX108 2 HMI CPU1 Ready HMI an MPI The HMI CPU1 is ready and registers itself cyclically with the NC Operator unit connection via MPI interface DB10 DBX108 3 HMI CPU1 Ready HMI at BTSS The HMI CPU1 is ready and registers itself cyclically with the NC Operator unit connection via OPI interface DB10 DBX108 6 611D Ready Group si...

Page 16: ...alarm pending The NC signals that at least one NC alarm is pending The channelspecific interface can be scanned to see which channels are involved and whether this will cause a processing stop DB21 DBX36 6 channelspecific NCK alarm pending The NC sends this signal to the PLC to indicate that at least one NC alarm is pending for the affected channel See also DB21 DBX36 7 NCK alarm with processing s...

Page 17: ...rd at the same time DB19 DBX0 1 1 AND DB19 DBX0 2 1 key disable Screen darkening via keyboard automatic screen saver If no buttons are pressed on the operator panel front within the assigned time default 3 minutes MD9006 MM_DISPLAY_BLACK_TIME time for screen darkening the screen is automatically darkened The screen lights up again the first time a button is pressed following darkening Pressing a b...

Page 18: ...file to be transmitted from the user list DB19 DBB14 control of V24 interface HMI Embedded only Description byte to specify the PLC index of the axis channel or TO number for the standard control file The standard control file is processed in accordance with the job in the interface signal DB19 DBB12 DB19 DBB15 control of the V24 interface HMI embedded only Description byte to specify the line in ...

Page 19: ...ng NC channel with the currently active path acceleration The path distance to go is then deleted and the block change to the next part program block is enabled 2 1 7 Signals to axis spindle DB31 DBX1 0 drive test travel enable If machine axes are traversed by special test functions such as function generator an explicit drive test specific enable is requested for the movement DB31 DBX61 0 1 drive...

Page 20: ... is determined by the current spindle mode Control mode Speed setpoint 0 Positioning mode See above Axis disable DB31 DBX1 4 follow up mode Follow up mode is only effective in conjunction with the NC PLC interface signal DB31 DBX2 1 servo enable DB31 DBX2 1 DB31 DBX1 4 Function 1 Ineffective Normal operation machine axis in closed loop control mode 0 1 Followup 0 0 Hold Function Follow up During f...

Page 21: ...nterface signals have to be set for the hold function DB31 DBX2 1 0 servo enable DB31 DBX1 4 0 follow up mode Feedback DB31 DBX61 3 0 follow up mode active During hold clamping or zero speed monitoring are active Notice With the hold function once the servo enable has been set the setpoint actual value difference is corrected directly by the position controller i e without following the axial acce...

Page 22: ... SRVLWLRQ FRQWUROOHU WR SUH FODPSLQJ SRVLWLRQ ZKHQ VHWWLQJ VHUYR HQDEOH Figure 2 2 Trajectory for clamping and hold 1 1 6 ROORZ XS PRGH 5HPRYH 6 6HUYR HQDEOH 7HUPLQDOV LVFRQQHFW WHUPLQDOV 6HW 6 6HUYR HQDEOH 6HTXHQFH 3RVLWLRQ VKLIW UHVXOWLQJ IURP FODPSLQJ LV PRYHPHQW JHQHUDWHG IURP SURJUDPPHG SRVLWLRQ 7UDMHFWRU LI LQ 1 RQO 5HWXUQ XVLQJ 5 326 LI SDUW SURJUDP LV DFWLYH LQ 8720 7 PRGH 3DWK IROORZHG LI...

Page 23: ... the setpoint position to the actual position 3 Deactivate external servo enable and cancel external speed setpoint Axis spindle stops 4 Canceling followup mode DB31 DBX2 1 1 servo enable DB31 DBX1 4 0 follow up mode NC synchronizes to current actual position The next traversing movement begins at this position Note Followup mode does not have to be canceled because it only has an effect in combin...

Page 24: ...top coarse DB31 DBX1 5 1 6 position measuring system 1 2 2 measuring systems can be connected to one machine axis e g Indirect motor measuring system Direct measuring system on load Only one measuring system can be active at any one time All closed loop control positioning operations etc involving the machine axis always relate to the active measuring system 3RVLWLRQ UHIHUHQFH YDOXH IURP QWHUSRODW...

Page 25: ...nced by PLC user program by means of the following NC PLC interface signals DB31 DBX2 1 servo enable DB31 DBX21 7 pulse enable DB31 DBX93 5 drive ready DB10 DBX56 1 EMERGENCY STOP NCK internal Alarms that trigger cancellation of the servo enable on the machine axes Alarms which cancel the servo enable are described in References DA Diagnostics Manual Canceling the servo enable when the machine axi...

Page 26: ... as the actual speed has reached the zero speed range the drive servo enable is canceled Interface signal DB31 DBX61 6 0 position controller active The position actual value of the machine axis continues to be acquired by the control At the end of the braking operation the machine axis is switched to follow up mode regardless of the corresponding NC PLC interface signal Zero speed and clamping mon...

Page 27: ... 1 B6723B7 0 0 6 592B 6 B B7 0 0 67 1 67 B9 2B72 DFW S Figure 2 5 Canceling the servo enable when the machine axis is in motion DB31 DBX2 2 Delete distance to go Spindle reset axis spindle specific Delete distance to go is effective in AUTOMATIC and MDA modes only in conjunction with positioning axes The positioning axis is decelerated to standstill following the current brake characteristic The d...

Page 28: ...ction Manual Basic Functions Spindles S1 Chapter Spindle modes axis mode Chapter Programmable Gears Gear Stages for Spindles and Gear Change Parameter set changeover when machine axis is in motion The response to a parameter set changeover depends on the consequential change in the closed loop control circuit gain factor Kv MD32200 MA_POSCTRL_GAIN KV Factor KV Factor Identical servo gain factors o...

Page 29: ...e ignored 2 1 8 Signals from axis spindle DB31 DBX61 0 drive test travel request If machine axes are traversed by special test functions such as function generator an explicit drive test specific enable is requested for the movement DB31 DBX61 0 1 drive test travel request The movement is carried out once the movement is enabled DB31 DBX1 0 1 drive test travel enable DB31 DBX61 3 follow up mode ac...

Page 30: ...ne axis has covered the parameterized traversing distance for lubrication MD33050 MA_LUBRICATION_DIST distance for lubrication by PLC 2 1 9 Signals to axis spindle digital drives DB31 DBX20 1 ramp function generator fast stop not on 810D A fast stop is requested for the drive The drive is then stopped without a ramp function speed setpoint 0 Servo enable is maintained DB31 DBX20 2 torque limit 2 n...

Page 31: ...te successful motor selection For example in the case of star delta switchover on the SIMODRIVE 611D or 611U a message or signal must be provided when the motor contactor has switched The pulses are then enabled by the drive DB31 DBX21 6 integrator disable n controller not on 810D The PLC user program inhibits the integrator of the speed controller for the drive The speed controller is thus switch...

Page 32: ...generator fast stop is active The drive is thus brought to a standstill without the ramp function with speed setpoint 0 DB31 DBX92 2 torque limit 2 active not on 810D The drive signals back to the PLC that torque limit 2 is active for the axis spindle The torque limit value is defined with the drive parameters DB31 DBX92 3 speed setpoint smoothing active not on 810D The PLC user program requests s...

Page 33: ...The speed controller has thus been switched from PI to P controller DB31 DBX93 7 pulses enabled The pulse enable for the drive module is available The axis spindle can now be traversed DB31 DBX94 0 motor temperature prewarning The motor temperature has exceeded the warning threshold If the motor temperature remains at this level the drive will be stopped after a defined time drive MD and the pulse...

Page 34: ...wing for the tolerance band set in drive machine data MD1426 MD_SPEED_DES_EQ_ACT_TOL tolerance band for nsoll nist message and that it is within the tolerance band DB31 DBX94 7 variable signaling function not 810D Using the variable signaling function it is possible to monitor digitally for any axis any variable from SIMODRIVE 611 to check if it violates a certain threshold and to signal as an int...

Page 35: ... language to be displayed following control ramp up The language can be changed in the DIAGNOSTICS operating area on the HMI user interface Once the control has ramped up the foreground language will be restored Display resolution MD9004 MM_DISPLAY_RESOLUTION display resolution The number of places after the decimal point for the position display of the axes is defined in the display resolution Th...

Page 36: ...nwinding from the curve Involute interpolation allows trajectories along an involute 5 Φ Φ 6WDUW SRLQW QG SRLQW DVH FLUFOH DVH FLUFOH FHQWHU Figure 2 6 Involute unwound from base circle Programming A general description of how to program involute interpolation can be found in References PG Programming Manual Fundamentals In addition to the programmed parameters machine data are relevant in two ins...

Page 37: ...tly on the involute defined by the starting point interpolation takes place between the two involutes defined by the starting and end points see illustration below The maximum deviation of the end point is determined by the machine data MD21015 MC_INVOLUTE_RADIUS_DELTA end point monitoring for involute 5 6WDUW SRLQW QG SRLQW DVH FLUFOH 0D GHYLDWLRQ Figure 2 7 MD21015 specifies the max permissible ...

Page 38: ...rogrammed angle of rotation is then also limited automatically and the interpolated path ends at the point at which the involute meets the base circle This for example makes it easier to program an involute which starts at a point outside the base circle and ends directly on it Tool radius compensation 2 1 2 D tool radius compensation is the only tool radius compensation function permitted for inv...

Page 39: ...ade if only involute sections are used which have radii of curvature that change over a relatively small area 2 2 3 Activate DEFAULT memory GUD start values The DEF REDEF NC commands can be used to assign default settings to global user data GUD These default settings must be permanently stored in the system if they are to be available after certain system states e g RESET The memory space for thi...

Page 40: ...dressed provided that the limit is selected according to the appropriate data format i e a DWORD for a 4byte limit a WORD for a 2 byte limit etc The memory is accessed via the data type and the position offset within the memory area Access from NC To allow the NC to access PLC variables from a part program quickly variables are provided in the NCK The PLC uses a function call FC to read and write ...

Page 41: ...ed directly in the communications buffer the user must remember that intermediate changes in values occur as a result of multiple access operations where a variable is evaluated several times or when variables are linked i e it may be necessary to store values temporarily in local variables or R parameters or to set up a semaphore The user s programming engineer is responsible for coordinating acc...

Page 42: ...REAL EPSILON 0 00001 N20 A_DBR 0 145 145 N30 G4 F2 N40 STOPRE N50 DBR A_DBR 0 N60 IF ABS DBR 145 145 1 0 EPSILON GOTOF ENDE N70 MSG error N80 M0 N90 END N99 M30 Activation The maximum number of simultaneously writable output variables is adjustable via MD28150 MC_MM_NUM_VDIVAR_ELEMENTS number of elements for writing PLC variables Example A WORD is to be transferred from the PLC to the NC The posit...

Page 43: ... variable outputs are collected and transferred to the DPR communications buffer with the approach block analogous to writing of analog and digital outputs Other status transitions have no effect in this respect 2 2 5 Access protection via password and keyswitch 2 2 5 1 Access protection via password and keyswitch Access authorization Access to functions programs and data is useroriented and contr...

Page 44: ... End user Skilled operator without programming knowledge less than the protection level 0 to 3 established by the end user 6 Keyswitch position 1 End user Trained operator without programming knowledge Example Program selection only tool wear entry and work offset entry 7 Keyswitch position 0 End user Semi skilled operator Example no inputs and program selection possible only machine control panel...

Page 45: ...vanced Delete password Access rights assigned by means of setting a password remain effective until they are explicitly revoked by deleting the password Example HMI Advanced DIAGNOSTIC operating area softkey DELETE PASSWORD References BAD Operator s Guide HMI Advanced Note Access rights and password status set deleted are not affected by POWER OFF ON Maximum number of characters A password may con...

Page 46: ...h protection levels 4 to 7 are assigned The keyswitch comprises a number of keys in a variety of colors which can be set to different switch positions 6ZLWFK SRVLWLRQ 5HWUDFWLRQ SRV 3URWHFWLRQ OHYHO 3RVLWLRQ LW 3RVLWLRQ RU LW 3RVLWLRQ RU RU LW 3RVLWLRQ RU RU LW EODFN JUHHQ NH UHG NH RU H Figure 2 10 Switch positions 0 to 3 Switch positions Switch position 0 has the most restricted access rights Sw...

Page 47: ...t the same time switch position 3 i e the keyswitch position with the least restricted access rights will be activated internally by the NC 2 2 5 4 Parameterizable protection levels Parameterizable protection level The parameter level can be freely parameterized for a variety of functions and data areas The protection level is set via operator panel machine data designated as follows MM_USER_CLASS...

Page 48: ...Detailed description 2 2 Functions Basic logic functions Various NC PLC interface signals and functions A2 42 Function Manual 11 2006 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 ...

Page 49: ...Basic logic functions Various NC PLC interface signals and functions A2 Function Manual 11 2006 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 43 Supplementary conditions 3 There are no supplementary conditions to note ...

Page 50: ...Supplementary conditions Basic logic functions Various NC PLC interface signals and functions A2 44 Function Manual 11 2006 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 ...

Page 51: ... setting for parameter set 4 MD32200 MA_POSCTRL_GAIN 4 AX1 0 25 Servo gain setting for parameter set 5 MD32200 MA_POSCTRL_GAIN 5 AX1 0 125 Servo gain setting for parameter set 6 MD31050 MA_DRIVE_AX_RATIO_DENOM 0 AX1 3 Denominator load gearbox for parameter set 1 MD31050 MA_DRIVE_AX_RATIO_DENOM 1 AX1 3 Denominator load gearbox for parameter set 2 MD31050 MA_DRIVE_AX_RATIO_DENOM 2 AX1 3 Denominator ...

Page 52: ...ine must be specified separately for each parameter set according to the applicable syntax rules Changeover In order to switch over the position control gain the PLC user program selects the 4th parameter set for machine axis X1 Request by PLC user program DB31 DBX9 0 DBB9 2 3 controller parameter set A request to change over to the 4th parameter set is sent for machine axis AX1 The parameter set ...

Page 53: ...Y Delay time nset nact signal 1428 TORQUE_THRESHOLD_X Threshold torque 1429 TORQUE_THRESHOLD_X_DELAY Delay time nd ndx signal 1602 MOTOR_TEMP_WARN_LIMIT Maximum motor temperature 1603 MOTOR_TEMP_ALARM_TIME Time for motor temperature alarm 1604 LINK_VOLTAGE_WARN_LIMIT DC link under voltage warning threshold 5 1 2 Memory specific machine data Number Identifier MM_ Description HMI Advanced HMI Embedd...

Page 54: ...E Protection level write fine 9204 USER_CLASS_WRITE_TOA_SC Protection level change total tool offsets 9205 USER_CLASS_WRITE_TOA_EC Protection level change tool setup offsets 9206 USER_CLASS_WRITE_TOA_SUPVIS Protection level change tool monitoring limit values 9207 USER_CLASS_WRITE_TOA_ASSDNO Change D No assigned to a tool edge 9208 USER_CLASS_WRITE_MAG_WGROUP change wear group magazine location ma...

Page 55: ...e third RPA area 9239 USER_END_WRITE_RPA_3 End of the third RPA area 9240 USER_CLASS_WRITE_TOA_NAME Change tool designation and duplo 9241 USER_CLASS_WRITE_TOA_Type Change tool type 9460 PROGRAMM_SETTINGS Resetproof data storage for settings in the PROGRAM operating area 9461 CONTOUR_END_TEXT String to be added to end of contour on completion of input 9478 TO_OPTION_MASK Variants of tool offsets 9...

Page 56: ...tifier MC_ Description 21015 INVOLUTE_RADIUS_DELTA NC start disable without reference point 21016 INVOLUTE_AUTO_ANGLE_LIMIT Automatic angle limitation for involute interpolation 27800 TECHNOLOGY_MODE Technology in channel 28150 MM_NUM_VDIVAR_ELEMENTS Number of write elements for PLC variables 28530 MM_PATH_VELO_SEGMENTS Number of storage elements for limiting path velocity in block 5 1 5 Axis spin...

Page 57: ... 3 1 Signals to NC DB number Byte Bit Description 10 56 7 Keyswitch setting 0 to 3 5 3 2 Signals from NC DB number Byte Bit Description 10 103 0 Remote diagnostics active HMI alarm is pending 10 103 5 AT box ready 10 103 6 PCU temperature limit 10 103 7 Operator unit battery alarm 10 104 7 NCK CPU Ready 10 108 1 HMI CPU2 Ready HMI to OPI or MPI 10 108 2 HMI CPU1 Ready HMI to MPI 10 108 3 HMI CPU1 ...

Page 58: ...6 RS232 OFF job byte of PLC 19 12 7 RS232 ON job byte of PLC 19 13 5 Unload part program 19 13 6 Load part program 19 13 7 Part program selection 19 14 7 File system active passive for HMI Embedded always active 19 16 7 File system active passive for HMI Advanced always passive 19 44 0 Mode change disable 5 3 4 Signals from operator panel front DB number Byte Bit Description 19 20 1 Screen is dark...

Page 59: ...ndling status 19 26 7 Select Part program handling status 19 42 0 FC9 Measure in JOG mode 19 45 0 FC9 Out Active 19 45 1 FC9 Out Done 19 45 2 FC9 Out Error 19 45 3 FC9 Out StartErr 5 3 5 Signals to channel DB number Byte Bit Description 21 6 2 Delete distancetogo channelspecific 5 3 6 Signals from channel DB number Byte Bit Description 21 36 6 Channelspecific NCK alarm is active 21 36 7 NCK alarm ...

Page 60: ...le DB number Byte Bit Description 31 60 4 60 5 Referenced synchronized 1 Referenced synchronized 2 31 61 3 Followup mode active 31 64 6 64 7 Traverse command minus plus 31 61 3 Followup mode active 31 61 4 Axis spindle stops 31 61 5 Position controller active 31 61 6 Speed control loop active 31 61 7 Current controller active 31 1 2 Parameter set switchover feedback 31 76 0 Lubrication pulse 31 92...

Page 61: ...C PLC interface signals and functions A2 Function Manual 11 2006 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 55 DB number Byte Bit Description 31 94 3 Md Mdx 31 94 4 nact nmin 31 94 5 nact nx 31 94 6 nact nset 31 94 7 Variable signaling function 31 95 0 UDC link warning threshold ...

Page 62: ...Data lists 5 3 Signals Basic logic functions Various NC PLC interface signals and functions A2 56 Function Manual 11 2006 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 ...

Page 63: ...clic signal exchange 7 D Darken screen 10 Data channel high speed 32 DB10 DBX103 0 9 DBX104 7 9 DBX108 1 9 DBX108 2 9 DBX108 3 9 DBX108 6 9 DBX108 7 9 DBX109 0 10 DBX109 6 9 DBX109 7 10 DBX56 1 19 DBX56 4 38 DBX56 5 38 DBX56 6 38 DBX56 7 38 DB19 DBB12 11 12 DBB13 12 DBB14 11 12 DBB15 11 12 DBB16 12 DBB17 12 DBB24 12 DBB25 12 DBB26 12 DBB27 12 DBX 0 3 11 DBX 0 4 11 DBX0 0 10 DBX0 1 10 11 DBX0 2 11 ...

Page 64: ...5 7 27 DB31 DBX69 1 23 DB31 DBX60 5 17 DB31 DBX69 2 23 DB31 DBX9 0 43 44 DBX9 1 43 44 DBX9 2 43 44 DC link undervoltage warning threshold 27 DC link voltage 27 DClink 27 Default passwords 37 Delete distance to go 13 Display resolution 28 Drive test travel enable 13 Drive test travel request 22 F Followup mode active 22 Foreground language 28 H High speed data channel 32 HMI alarms 9 HMI CPU1 Ready...

Page 65: ...K alarm is active 10 NCK alarm with processing stop 10 NCK battery alarm 10 NCK CPU Ready 9 P Password 36 resetting 37 setting 36 PLC NCK interface 7 Position controller active 22 Position measuring system 18 Protection levels 38 R Ramp up function completed 26 Read write PLC variable 32 Recall alarms 11 S Screen bright 10 Servo enable 18 Signals Alarm signals 9 Axis spindle specific DB31 8 Channe...

Page 66: ...Index Basic logic functions Various NC PLC interface signals and functions A2 60 Function Manual 11 2006 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 ...

Page 67: ...97 0BP10 2BA0 Valid for Control SINUMERIK 840D sl 840DE sl SINUMERIK 840Di sl 840DiE sl SINUMERIK 840D powerline 840DE powerline SINUMERIK 840Di powerline 840DiE powerline SINUMERIK 810D powerline 810DE powerline Software Version NCU system software for 840D sl 840DE sl 1 3 NCU system software for 840D sl DiE sl 1 0 NCU system software for 840D 840DE 7 4 NCU system software for 840Di 840DiE 3 3 NC...

Page 68: ...ommissioning and operation of a device system may only be performed by qualified personnel Within the context of the safety notes in this documentation qualified persons are defined as persons who are authorized to commission ground and label devices systems and circuits in accordance with established safety practices and standards Prescribed Usage Note the following Warning This device may only b...

Page 69: ...onitoring 23 2 1 5 2 Zero mark monitoring 24 2 1 5 3 Zero mark monitoring for incremental encoders 25 2 1 5 4 Zero mark monitoring for absolute encoders 26 2 1 5 5 Customized error reactions 28 2 1 5 6 Monitoring of hardware faults 30 2 1 6 Measuring system monitoring systems with PROFIBUS drives 30 2 1 7 Limit switches monitoring 31 2 1 7 1 Hardware limit switches 31 2 1 7 2 Software limit switch...

Page 70: ... 68 4 2 1 Definition and activation of protection zones 68 5 Data lists 79 5 1 Machine data 79 5 1 1 NC specific machine data 79 5 1 2 Channelspecific machine data 79 5 1 3 Axis spindlespecific machine data 80 5 2 Setting data 81 5 2 1 Axis spindlespecific setting data 81 5 3 Signals 82 5 3 1 Signals to channel 82 5 3 2 Signals from channel 82 5 3 3 Signals to axis spindle 83 Index 85 ...

Page 71: ...otection zones Function With the help of protection zones elements of the machine e g spindle chuck tool changer tool holder tailstock movable probe etc and the workpiece can be protected against collisions During automatic execution of part programs in the AUTOMATIC or MDI mode the NC checks at the start of every part program block whether a collision between protection zones can occur upon movin...

Page 72: ...Brief Description 1 2 Protection zones Basic logic functions Axis monitoring protection zones A3 6 Function Manual 11 2006 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 ...

Page 73: ...etween the set and actual path Unequal dynamic response of the feed drives Unequal drive dynamic responses lead to path deviations especially on contour changes Circles are distorted into ellipses by unequal dynamic responses of the two feed drives Nonlinear signal distortions Nonlinear signal distortions are caused by Activation of the current limitation within the machining area Activation of th...

Page 74: ...610 MA_VELO_FFW_WEIGHT factor for the velocity feedforward control MD32800 MA_EQUIV_CURRCTRL_TIME Equivalent time constant current control loop for feedforward control MD32810 MA_EQUIV_SPEEDCTRL_TIME equivalent time constant speed control loop for feedforward control In the acceleration phase the following error initially increases when traversing along a machine axis After a time depending on the...

Page 75: ...The following error monitoring only operates with active position control and the following axis types Linear axes with and without feedforward control Rotary axes with and without feedforward control Position controlled spindles Fault If the configured tolerance limit is exceeded the following alarm appears 25050 Axis Axis identifier Contour monitoring The affected axis spindle is stopped via the...

Page 76: ...7 B B7 0 0 0 B 03B326B72 0 0 B67 1 67 B326B72 0 0 B6723B 0 7B 2 56 0 0 B6723B 0 7B 1 0 0 B326 7 21 1 B7 0 FODPSLQJ LQ SURJUHVV DFW VWRS ILQH VLJQDO DFW VWRS FRDUVH VLJQDO FWXDO YDOXH 6HWSRLQW 9 RU V IIHFWLYH WROHUDQFH IRU HUR VSHHG DQG FODPSLQJ PRQLWRULQJ 2 1 2 2 Positioning monitoring Function At the end of a positioning operation Set velocity 0 AND DB31 DBX64 6 64 7 motion command minus plus 0 c...

Page 77: ...arge can be selected relatively short small must be selected relatively long MD32200 MA_POSCTRL_GAIN servo gain factor MD36020 MA_POSITIONING_TIME small must be selected relatively long large can be selected relatively short Effectivity The position monitoring only operates with active position control and the following axis types Linear axes Rotary axes Position controlled spindles Fault If the c...

Page 78: ...ing operation is completed DB31 DBX60 6 60 7 position reached with exact stop coarse fine 1 The position monitoring function is deactivated and is replaced by the zero speed monitoring Zero speed monitoring monitors the adherence to the standstill tolerance If no new travel request is received the machine axis must not depart from the standstill tolerance Effectivity The zero speed monitoring only...

Page 79: ...hted with a common factor depending on the parameter set MD36012 MA_STOP_LIMIT_FACTOR exact stop coarse fine and standstill factor Because the factor applies in common for all three position tolerances the relationship between the values remains constant 2 1 2 5 Clamping monitoring Clamping monitoring For machine axes that are mechanically clamped upon completion of a positioning operation larger ...

Page 80: ...e motion block of the clamped axis until the clamped axis can once again be traversed If the clamping is released before stopping the path motion is not stopped Parameterization MD36052 MA_STOP_ON_CLAMPING H01 Special function for clamped axis Note The NC detects whether an axis is clamped based on the servo enable state of the axis DB31 DBX2 2 0 no servo enable axis is clamped DB31 DBX2 2 1 servo...

Page 81: ... 6HUYR HQDEOH 3DWK YHORFLW 7XUQ URWDU WDEOH GHJUHHV LV FODPSLQJ SUHVVXUH 1 1 Figure 2 2 Release axis clamp if MD36052 MA_STOP_ON_CLAMPING H01 The part program blocks N310 and N410 refer to the following programming example N100 G0 X0 Y0 Z0 A0 G90 G54 F500 N101 G641 ADIS 1 ADISPOS 5 N210 G1 X10 Edit N220 G1 X5 Y20 N310 G0 Z50 Retract N410 G0 A90 Turn rotary table N510 G0 X100 Approach N520 G0 Z2 N6...

Page 82: ...apid travers blocks prior including intermediate blocks to retain the reference to the initiating part program block Parameterization MD36052 MA_STOP_ON_CLAMPING H03 Special function for clamped axis Prerequisites for the PLC user program The axis is removed from the clamp as soon as a travel command is pending The axis may be removed from the clamp even if only during positioning G0 The following...

Page 83: ...oes not have to be clamped during positioning of the other axes It can be seen whether the axes are being positioned depending on whether rapid traverse G0 is programmed The stop command is therefore not set immediately at the beginning of the block containing the axis but at the beginning of the next machining block traversing block that is not traversed with rapid traverse The axis is clamped if...

Page 84: ... 1 1 Figure 2 4 Set axis clamp if MD36052 MA_STOP_ON_CLAMPING H04 Constraints Continuous path mode For the above mentioned functions Automatic stopping for removal of the clamp Optimized releasing of the axis clamp via travel command Automatic stopping for setting of the clamp the Look Ahead function must be active Part program blocks without path motion e g M82 M83 interrupt continuouspath mode a...

Page 85: ... would not be necessary because stopping occurs anyway MD36052 MA_STOP_ON_CLAMPING H04 Generates a stop irrespective of M83 which is executed as a function of feedrate override 0 The axis is thus stopped before the first machining block Note MD36052 MA_STOP_ON_CLAMPING H01 or H04 Both functions can be used irrespective of the clamping of axes MD36052 MA_STOP_ON_CLAMPING H01 Generates a Look Ahead ...

Page 86: ...ce with interface signal Clamping active Behavior upon releasing of the clamp If the axis was moved by the clamping process it is returned by the NC to the position setpoint after releasing of the clamp and setting of the servo enable state Repositioning depends on whether Follow up mode was activated for the axis Without follow up mode Repositioning by position controller With follow up mode Repo...

Page 87: ...with analog setpoint interface 9 HHGIRUZDUG FRQWURO YDOXH ULIW YDOXH DSSOLHV RQO WR DQDORJ GULYHV 7R VSHHG FRQWUROOHU 6SHHG VHWSRLQW PRQLWRULQJ 3RVLWLRQ FRQWUROOHU ROORZLQJ HUURU Figure 2 5 Speed setpoint calculation The speed setpoint monitoring ensures by limiting the control or output signal 10V for analog setpoint interface or rated speed for digital drives that the physical limitations of the...

Page 88: ...ing The affected axis is stopped via the configured braking ramp in follow up mode MD36610 MA_AX_EMERGENCY_STOP_TIME Maximum time for braking ramp when an error occurs Note Upon reaching the speed setpoint monitoring the position feedback loop of the axis becomes non linear due to the limitation Contour errors result if the axis is involved in generating the contour 2 1 4 Actual velocity monitorin...

Page 89: ...s 25030 Axis Axis identifier Actual velocity alarm limit The affected axis is stopped via the configured braking ramp in follow up mode MD36610 MA_AX_EMERGENCY_STOP_TIME Maximum time for braking ramp when an error occurs 2 1 5 Measuring system monitoring systems with SIMODRIVE 611D 2 1 5 1 Encoder limit frequency monitoring Function The encoder limit frequency monitoring checks that the encoder fr...

Page 90: ...ier Encoder Encoder number Frequency exceeded The affected axis is stopped via the configured braking ramp in follow up mode MD36610 MA_AX_EMERGENCY_STOP_TIME Maximum time for braking ramp when an error occurs Note If the encoder limit frequency is exceeded the position controlled machine axis must be re referenced References FB1 Function Manual Basic Functions Reference Point Approach R1 2 1 5 2 ...

Page 91: ...y of the actual values Monitoring starts with the first zero mark signal once the encoder has been switched on fault counter 0 The function checks whether the number of incremental signals is plausible after each zero mark if equidistant zero marks or after every second zero mark if distance coded zero marks This is the case for example if the number of incremental signals from straight line axis ...

Page 92: ...ers use the absolute values supplied by the measuring system to check the plausibility of the actual value During the check the NC compares the cyclic position value held in the position control cycle clock based on the incremental information from the encoder with a new position value generated directly from the absolute and incremental information and checks that the calculated position differen...

Page 93: ...response Alarm 25022 If the absolute value transfer is interrupted alarm 25022 appears Axis Axis identifier Encoder Encoder number Warning Error fine identification There is no further alarm response Note In the event of a fault the adjustment of the absolute encoder is lost and the axis is no longer referenced The absolute encoder must be readjusted References FB1 Function Manual Basic Functions ...

Page 94: ...orkpiece is assessed using appropriate synchronized action commands Effectivity Customized monitoring can be activated in parallel to or as an alternative to standard zero mark monitoring depending on the setting in machine data MD36310 MA_ENC_ZERO_MONITORING Zero mark monitoring MD36310 Meaning 0 Customized monitoring is active standard zero mark monitoring is deactivated 0 Customized monitoring ...

Page 95: ... the cyclic position value held in the position control cycle clock based on the incremental information from the encoder and a new position value generated from the encoder s absolute and incremental information Power on and the selection deselection of parking positions triggers a zero reset reset does not reset the counter VA_ABSOLUTE_ENC_ERR_CNT n ax Contains the current number of errors detec...

Page 96: ...braking ramp when an error occurs Alarm 25001 If a hardware fault is detected in the passive measuring system alarm 25001 appears Axis Axis identifier Hardware fault passive encoder There is no further alarm response Notice For hardware faults the referencing status of the machine axis is reset DB31 DBX60 4 60 5 0 referenced synchronized 1 2 2 1 6 Measuring system monitoring systems with PROFIBUS ...

Page 97: ... Overview of the end stops and possible limit switch monitoring 6RIWZDUH OLPLW VZLWFK DFWLYDEOH YLD 3 6RIWZDUH OLPLW VZLWFKHV 0HFKDQLFDO WUDYHUVLQJ OLPLW DUGZDUH OLPLW VZLWFKHV 0 5 1 6723 2 1 7 1 Hardware limit switches Function A hardware limit switch is normally installed at the end of the traversing range of a machine axis It serves to protect against accidental overtravelling of the maximum tr...

Page 98: ...spindle is involved in interpolation with other axes spindles these are also braked according to their configured braking behavior The traversing keys of the affected machine axis are blocked based on the direction 2 1 7 2 Software limit switch Function Software limit switches serve to limit the traversing range of a machine axis Per machine axis and per traversing direction two 1st and 2nd softwa...

Page 99: ...mit switch is not started With transformation Different reactions occur depending on the transformation type Behavior as above or The part program block with a programmed traversing motion that would lead to overrunning of the software limit switch is started The affected machine axis stops at the active software limit switch The other machine axes participating in the traversing motion are braked...

Page 100: ...to the limits during the traversing of the axes The following versions are available Working area limitation in BKS The coordinate data for limiting the working area refer to the basic coordinate system Working area limitation in WKS ENS The coordinate data for limiting the working area refer to the workpiece coordinate system WKS and settable zero system ENS Both the working area limitation monit...

Page 101: ...zed only in certain transformations Condition for a possible evaluation is that the orientation of the tool with respect to the base coordinate system cannot be changed by the transformation With standard transformations the condition is only fulfilled for the inclined axis transformation Effectivity The monitoring of the working area limitation is active immediately after the successful referenci...

Page 102: ...sformation The axis is positioned at the working area limitation and then stopped General Activation of the working area limitation If the actual position of an axis after activation is located ouutside of the working area limitation it is stopped with the maximum permissible acceleration without jerk limitation Overrunning of the working area limitation in JOG mode If the position of the working ...

Page 103: ...king area limits of each axes are adjusted through setting data or programmed through part program instructions Working area limitation through setting data The adjustments are done through the immediately effective axis specific setting data SD43420 SA_WORKAREA_LIMIT_PLUS Working area limitation plus SD43430 SA_WORKAREA_LIMIT_MINUS Working area limitation minus Programmed working area limitation ...

Page 104: ...ion in positive or negative direction is active Programmed working area limitation The activation of the total working area limitation in BKS is done through the part program instruction WALIMON Working area limitation ON or WALIMOF Working area limitation OFF Changing the working area limitation Working area limitation through setting data HMI user interface Operating area Parameter Automatic mod...

Page 105: ...he values for all axes in the channel and the coordinate system for which the working group limitation group will apply The number of the working area limitation groups is set in the machine data MD28600 MC_MM_NUM_WORKAREA_CS_GROUPS Working area limits The working area limits of each axis are defined by the following channel specific system variables System variable Significance AC_WORKAREA_CS_PLU...

Page 106: ...by calling one of the following G commands WALCS1 Activating working area limitation group No 1 WALCS10 Activating working area limitation group No 10 Deactivation The deactivation of the active working area limitation in WKS ENS is done in the part program by calling the G command WALCS0 Changing the working area limitation Working area limits AC_WORKAREA_CS_PLUS_ENABLE WALimNo ax AC_WORKAREA_CS_...

Page 107: ...annel x _N_COMPLETE_WAL Values of the system variables for all channels Note The values of the system variables for the definition of the working area limitations in WKS ENS are also component of the file _N_INITIAL_INI Limitations secondary conditions Rotating frame active If a rotating frame is active all geometry axes must have been referenced for the activation of the working area limitation i...

Page 108: ...pletely surround the element to be protected The activation and deactivation of protection zones also takes place via part program instructions Protection zone monitoring by the NC is channelspecific i e all the active protection zones of a channel monitor one another for collisions Definition of a protection zone It is possible to define 2dimensional or 3dimensional protection zones as polygons w...

Page 109: ...e orientation of the protection zones is determined by the plane definition abscissa ordinate in which the contour is described and the axis perpendicular to the contour vertical axis The orientation of the protection zones must be the same for the tool and workpiecerelated protection zones 2 2 2 Types of protection zone Machine defined and channel defined protection zones Machine defined protecti...

Page 110: ...of files for channel specific protection zones Coordinates The coordinates of a protection zone must always be programmed as absolute values with respect to the reference point of the protection zone When the protection zone is activated via the part program it is possible to apply a relative offset to the reference point of the protection zone Examples In the following figures some examples for p...

Page 111: ...ction Manual 11 2006 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 45 7RROUHODWHG SURWHFWLRQ RQH 7RROUHODWHG SURWHFWLRQ RQH RUNSLHFH UHODWHG SURWHFWLRQ RQH 6 Figure 2 9 Example of a milling machine 0 3 RUNSLHFH UHODWHG SURWHFWLRQ RQH IRU WDLOVWRFN Figure 2 10 Example of a turning machine with relative protection zone for tailstock ...

Page 112: ...inition beginning Channel specific protection zones CPROTDEF Machine or NC specific protection zone NPROTDEF Contour description for protection zone End of definition EXECUTE Definition of the working plane The desired working plane to which the contour description of the protection zone refers must be selected with G17 G18 G19 before start of the definition It may not be changed before the end of...

Page 113: ... in the selected working plane The first traversing movement is the movement to the contour The last point in the contour description must always coincide with the first point of the contour description In the case of rotationsymmetrical contours e g spindle chuck the whole contour must be described not merely the contour to the turning center The valid protection zone is the zone left of the cont...

Page 114: ...ular segments in the counter clockwise direction A protection zone cannot be described by a complete circle A complete circle must be divided into two half circles The sequence G2 G3 or G3 G2 is not permitted A short G1 block must be inserted between the two circular blocks Constraints During the definition of a protection zone the following functions must not be active or used Tool radius compens...

Page 115: ...ectly so that the definition of protection areas can also be performed directly in the system variables The same supplementary conditions apply for the definition of the contour of a protection zone as for a protection zone definition via part program instructions System variables The protection zone definitions cover following system variables System variable Type Significance Activation type The...

Page 116: ...ORD n i SC_PA_CONT_ORD n i REAL End point of the contour i ordinate value SN_PA_CENT_ABS n i SC_PA_CENT_ABS n i REAL Center point of the circular contour i absolute abscissa value SN_PA_CENT_ORD n i SC_PA_CENT_ORD n i REAL Center point of the circular contour i absolute ordinate value SN_ are system variables for NC and machine specific protection zones SC_ are system variables for channel specifi...

Page 117: ...ection zone can take place through Part program instruction Automatically after the control powers up PLC user program For activation through the PLC user program the protection zone must be first preactivated via a part program The preactivation deactivation and activation of all protection zones always takes place channel specifically A protection zone can also be active in multiple channels sim...

Page 118: ... program RESET response The activation status of a protection zone is retained even after NC RESET and program end Memory requirements The memory requirement of the persistent memory is determined with following machine data MD18190 MN_MM_NUM_PROTECT_AREA_NCK Number of available machine defined protection zones MD28200 MC_MM_NUM_PROTECT_AREA_CHAN Number of available channel defined protection zone...

Page 119: ...n offset can be entered in 0 to 3 dimensions The offset refers to Workpiece related protection zones Machine zero Tool related protection zones Tool holder reference point F Note A protection zone cannot be activated in a single channel with different offsets simultaneously Activation via PLC user program A protection zone preactivated in the part program can be activated in the PLC user program P...

Page 120: ...ly for this Preactivation in the part program is only useful for these protection zones For protection zones that are known only in the part program and not in the PLC user program only activation in the part program makes sense Automatic activation after the control powers up The configuration for automatic activation of a protection zone after the control powers up is performed via the following...

Page 121: ...must also be set to the operative state by the PLC In contrast to AUTOMATIC mode a change in the NC PLC interface signals Make preactivated protection zones operative only has an effect on stationary axes in the geometry system This means If an inoperative protection zone is made operative once a motion has been started it is not evaluated until the axes have stopped possibly resulting in the outp...

Page 122: ...alarm 10700 NCK protection zone in v or MDI violated or 10701 channel specific protection zone in AUTOMATIC or MDI violated is given 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Y W RU SUHDFWLYDWHG SURWHFWLRQ RQH QRW DFWLYDWHG E 3 FDVH RU SUHDFWLYDWHG SURWHFWLRQ RQH DFWLYDWHG E 3 RU IRU DFWLYDWHG SURWHFWLRQ RQH DIWHU UHOHDVH RI SURWHFWLRQ RQH FDVH 3URWHFWLRQ RQH Figure 2 14 Behavior of the path velocity when entering a pr...

Page 123: ...nowledgment is required for each of these protection zones With NC start the individual protection zones can then be enabled one after the other Application for temporary enabling Drilling a turned part The drill is allowed to enter the protection zone of the spindle chuck Monitoring of overlaid motion On preparation of the NC blocks part of the offsets of geometry axes resulting from the overlaid...

Page 124: ...e of the geometry axes is limited in all directions by the protection zones with the same effect as they had at the start point 6WDUW SRLQW QG SRLQW RI WKH PRWLRQ ZLWK FRQWLQXRXV 2 0D D LDO SDWK ZLWK 2 ZLWK D VLQJOH D LV Figure 2 15 Motion boundaries of axes When the geometry axes have completed their movements end of interpolation the alarm is automatically reset and the final position checked to...

Page 125: ...JOG mode by means of software limit switches or the working area limitation The protection zones are an additional limiting element on the traversing motion of the geometry axes If the traversing motion of an axis is limited because it has reached a protection zone then a selfresetting alarm Protection zone reached in JOG is generated The alarm text specifies the violated protection zone and the r...

Page 126: ...ving The enabling signal is canceled if a motion is started that does not lead into the enabled protection zone If the current position is located in other active protection zones or the limit for other protection zones must be crossed with the motion that has been started then alarms 10702 10703 or 10706 10707 are output The PLC interface signal Temporary enabling of protection zones can be set a...

Page 127: ...larm is displayed during the traversing motion of the positioning axes Alarm 10704 Protection zone monitoring is not guaranteed Axis exchange If an axis is not active in a channel because of an axis replacement the position of the axis last approached in the channel is taken as the current position If this axis has not yet been traversed in the channel zero is taken as the position Machine related...

Page 128: ...Detailed description 2 2 Protection zones Basic logic functions Axis monitoring protection zones A3 62 Function Manual 11 2006 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 ...

Page 129: ...earbox MD31060 MA_DRIVE_AX_RATIO_NUMERA Numerator load gearbox MD31070 MA_DRIVE_ENC_RATIO_DENOM Denominator measuring gearbox MD31080 MA_DRIVE_ENC_RATIO_NUMERA Numerator measuring gearbox MD32810 MA_EQUIV_SPEEDCTRL_TIME equivalent time constant speed control loop for feedforward control Encoder resolution The corresponding machine data is described in References FB1 Function Manual Basic Functions...

Page 130: ...Supplementary conditions 3 1 Axis monitoring functions Basic logic functions Axis monitoring protection zones A3 64 Function Manual 11 2006 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 ...

Page 131: ...AREA_CS_GROUP 3 Define working area limitation groups Additionally 2 working area limitation groups will be defined Working area limitation group 1 In the first working area limitation group the axes in the ENS coordinate system will be limited X axis in the plus direction 10 mm X axis in the minus direction No limitation Y axis in the plus direction No limitation Y axis in the minus direction 25 ...

Page 132: ...itation group 2 In the second working area limitation group the axes in the WKS coordinate system can be limited X axis in the plus direction 10 mm X axis in the minus direction No limitation Y axis in the plus direction 34 mm Y axis in the minus direction 25 mm Z axis in the plus direction No limitation Z axis in the minus direction 600 mm A axis in the plus direction No limitation A axis in the ...

Page 133: ...006 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 67 N83 AC_WORKAREA_CS_LIMIT_PLUS 2 Z 600 N90 AC_WORKAREA_CS_PLUS_ENABLE 2 A FALSE N92 AC_WORKAREA_CS_MINUS_ENABLE 2 A FALSE Activate working area limitation group 2 In order to activate the working area limitation group 2 following instruction must exist in the part program N100 WALCS2 ...

Page 134: ...ension One channelspecific protection zone for the workpiece without limitation in the third dimension One channelspecific toolrelated protection zone for the toolholder without limitation in the third dimension The workpiece zero is placed on the machine zero to define the protection zone for the workpiece When activated the protection zone is then offset by 100mm in the Z axis in the positive di...

Page 135: ...01 X 80 Z40 Contour description 3 Contour element G01 X80 Z40 Contour description 4 Contour element G01 X80 Z0 Contour description 5 Contour element EXECUTE AB End of definition Protection zone for workpiece CPROTDEF 2 TRUE 0 0 0 Definition beginning Protection zone for tool holder G01 X0 Z 50 Contour description 1 Contour element G01 X 190 Z 50 Contour description 2 Contour element G03 X 210 Z 30...

Page 136: ... chuck contour element 8 SN_PA_CONT_TYP 0 9 0 Contour type i 0 not defined Protection zone for spindle chuck contour element 9 SN_PA_CONT_ORD 0 0 100 Endpoint of contour i ordinate value Protection zone for spindle chuck contour element 0 SN_PA_CONT_ORD 0 1 100 Endpoint of contour i ordinate value Protection zone for spindle chuck contour element 1 SN_PA_CONT_ORD 0 2 100 Endpoint of contour i ordi...

Page 137: ... value Protection zone for spindle chuck contour element 2 SN_PA_CENT_ORD 0 3 0 Midpoint of contour i ordinate value Protection zone for spindle chuck contour element 3 SN_PA_CENT_ORD 0 4 0 Midpoint of contour i ordinate value Protection zone for spindle chuck contour element 4 SN_PA_CENT_ORD 0 5 0 Midpoint of contour i ordinate value Protection zone for spindle chuck contour element 5 SN_PA_CENT_...

Page 138: ...t geometry axis Protection zone for tool holder SC_PA_LIM_3DIM 0 0 Type of limitation in the third dimension 0 no limitation Protection zone for workpiece tool holder 0 SC_PA_LIM_3DIM 1 0 Type of limitation in the third dimension 0 no limitation Protection zone for tool holder SC_PA_PLUS_LIM 0 0 Value of limitation in positive direction in the third dimension Protection zone for workpiece SC_PA_PL...

Page 139: ...Protection zone for tool holder contour element 4 SN_PA_CONT_TYP 1 5 0 Contour type i 0 not defined Protection zone for tool holder contour element 5 SN_PA_CONT_TYP 1 6 0 Contour type i 0 not defined Protection zone for tool holder contour element 6 SN_PA_CONT_TYP 1 7 0 Contour type i 0 not defined Protection zone for tool holder contour element 7 SN_PA_CONT_TYP 1 8 0 Contour type i 0 not defined ...

Page 140: ...r i ordinate value Protection zone for tool holder contour element 8 SN_PA_CONT_ORD 1 9 0 Endpoint of contour i ordinate value Protection zone for tool holder contour element 9 SN_PA_CONT_ABS 0 0 0 Endpoint of contour i abscissa value Protection zone for workpiece contour element 0 SN_PA_CONT_ABS 0 1 40 Endpoint of contour i abscissa value Protection zone for workpiece contour element 1 SN_PA_CONT...

Page 141: ...i ordinate value Protection zone for workpiece contour element 2 SN_PA_CENT_ORD 0 3 0 Midpoint of contour i ordinate value Protection zone for workpiece contour element 3 SN_PA_CENT_ORD 0 4 0 Midpoint of contour i ordinate value Protection zone for workpiece contour element 4 SN_PA_CENT_ORD 0 5 0 Midpoint of contour i ordinate value Protection zone for workpiece contour element 5 SN_PA_CENT_ORD 0 ...

Page 142: ...a value Protection zone for workpiece contour element 6 SN_PA_CENT_ABS 0 7 0 Midpoint of contour i abscissa value Protection zone for workpiece contour element 7 SN_PA_CENT_ABS 0 8 0 Midpoint of contour i abscissa value Protection zone for workpiece contour element 8 SN_PA_CENT_ABS 0 9 0 Midpoint of contour i abscissa value Protection zone for workpiece contour element 9 SN_PA_CENT_ABS 1 0 0 Midpo...

Page 143: ...6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 77 Activation Table 4 4 Part program excerpt for activating the three protection zones for spindle chuck workpiece and toolholder NPROT 1 2 0 0 0 Protection zone Spindle chuck CPROT 1 2 0 0 100 Protection zone Workpiece with 100mm offset in the Z axis CPROT 2 2 0 0 0 Protection zone Toolholder ...

Page 144: ...Examples 4 2 Protection zones Basic logic functions Axis monitoring protection zones A3 78 Function Manual 11 2006 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 ...

Page 145: ...CHANGE_MODE Protection zone for switchover of geo axes 18190 MM_NUM_PROTECT_AREA_NCK Number of files for machinerelated protection zones 5 1 2 Channelspecific machine data Axis monitoring Number Identifier MC_ Description 20150 GCODE_RESET_VALUES n Reset G groups 21020 WORKAREA_WITH_TOOL_RADIUS Allowance for tool radius with working area limitation 24130 TRAFO_INCLUDES_TOOL_1 Tool handling with ac...

Page 146: ...ements for active protection zones DRAM 5 1 3 Axis spindlespecific machine data Axis monitoring Number Identifier MA_ Description 30310 ROT_IS_MODULO Modulo conversion for rotary axis and spindle 30800 WORK_AREA_CHECK_TYPE Type of checking of working area limits 32200 POSCTRL_GAIN n Servo gain factor 32250 RATED_OUTVAL Rated output voltage 32260 RATED_VELO Rated motor speed 32300 MAX_AX_ACCEL Axis...

Page 147: ...2 ENC_FREQ_LIMIT_LOW Encoder limit frequency resynchronization 36310 ENC_ZERO_MONITORING Zero mark monitoring 36400 CONTOUR_TOL Tolerance band contour monitoring 36500 ENC_CHANGE_TOL Maximum tolerance for position actual value switchover 36510 ENC_DIFF_TOL Measuring system synchronism tolerance 36600 BRAKE_MODE_CHOICE Deceleration behavior on hardware limit switch 36620 SERVO_DISABLE_DELAY_TIME Cu...

Page 148: ...d protection zone 8 21 9 0 Activate machinerelated protection zone 9 21 9 1 Activate machinerelated protection zone 10 21 10 0 Activate channelspecific protection zone 1 21 10 7 Activate channelspecific protection zone 8 21 11 0 Activate channelspecific protection zone 9 21 11 1 Activate channelspecific protection zone 10 5 3 2 Signals from channel Axis monitoring functions None Protection zones D...

Page 149: ...chinerelated protection zone 10 violated 21 278 0 Channelspecific protection zone 1 violated 21 278 7 Channelspecific protection zone 8 violated 21 279 0 Channelspecific protection zone 9 violated 21 279 1 Channelspecific protection zone 10 violated 5 3 3 Signals to axis spindle Axis monitoring functions DB number Byte Bit Description 31 1 4 Follow up operation 31 1 5 1 6 Position measuring system...

Page 150: ...Data lists 5 3 Signals Basic logic functions Axis monitoring protection zones A3 84 Function Manual 11 2006 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 ...

Page 151: ...etpoint 19 Zero speed 11 C Contour error 7 Coordinate system 41 D DB 31 DBX1 4 13 19 DBX1 5 21 22 DBX1 6 21 22 DBX12 0 30 DBX12 1 30 DBX12 2 31 DBX12 3 31 DBX2 2 13 14 DBX2 3 13 19 DBX39 0 53 55 56 DBX60 2 22 DBX60 3 22 DBX60 4 29 DBX60 5 29 DBX60 6 11 19 DBX60 7 11 19 DBX64 6 11 DBX64 7 11 DB21 DBX10 0 to DBX11 1 52 DBX272 0 to 273 1 52 DBX274 0 to 275 1 52 DBX276 0 to DBX277 1 52 DBX278 0 to DBX...

Page 152: ...36100 31 MD36110 31 MD36120 31 MD36130 31 MD36200 21 MD36210 20 MD36220 20 MD36300 22 MD36302 23 MD36310 24 25 MD36400 8 MD36600 30 MD36610 9 11 12 13 21 22 23 25 26 28 N Nonlinear signal distortions 7 O Orientation 41 P Protection zone Activate 49 Deactivation 49 Definition 44 47 Enable 53 Restrictions 58 Protection zones 5 40 data storage 49 Protection zone definition Example 65 Protection zone ...

Page 153: ...C5397 0BP10 2BA0 Valid for Control SINUMERIK 840D sl 840DE sl SINUMERIK 840Di sl 840DiE sl SINUMERIK 840D powerline 840DE powerline SINUMERIK 840Di powerline 840DiE powerline SINUMERIK 810D powerline 810DE powerline Software Version NCU system software for 840D sl 840DE sl 1 3 NCU system software for 840D sl DiE sl 1 0 NCU system software for 840D 840DE 7 4 NCU system software for 840Di 840DiE 3 3...

Page 154: ...ommissioning and operation of a device system may only be performed by qualified personnel Within the context of the safety notes in this documentation qualified persons are defined as persons who are authorized to commission ground and label devices systems and circuits in accordance with established safety practices and standards Prescribed Usage Note the following Warning This device may only b...

Page 155: ... possible dynamic response on each axis 27 2 3 5 Smoothing the path velocity 29 2 3 6 Dynamic response adaptation 33 2 3 7 Technology G group 41 2 4 LookAhead 44 2 5 NC block compressor COMPON COMPCURV CAD 50 2 6 Combine short spline blocks 53 3 Supplementary conditions 55 3 1 Rounding and repositioning REPOS 55 3 2 Smoothing the path velocity 57 4 Examples 59 4 1 Example of jerk limitation on the...

Page 156: ...Table of contents Basic logic functions Continuouspath Mode Exact Stop LookAhead B1 4 Function Manual 11 2006 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 ...

Page 157: ...is reaches the exact stop state as soon as its following error is less than the specified position difference exact stop limit LookAhead LookAhead is a function for optimizing the continuous path mode Smooth machining of workpieces is necessary to ensure a high quality surface finish For this reason path velocity variations should be avoided during machining whenever possible Without LookAhead the...

Page 158: ...whereas with high frequency changes only the reduced dynamic response limit values act due to the automatic dynamic response adaptation NC block compressor When a workpiece design is completed with a CAD CAM system the CAD CAM system generally also compiles the corresponding part program to create the workpiece surface To do so most CAD CAM systems use linear blocks to describe even curved section...

Page 159: ...no exact curve characteristic but only a tolerance band can be specified within which the spline curve should lie As in the case of the linear interpolation even while processing of splines so short blocks can result hence the path velocity must be reduced in the interpolation of these spline blocks This is alao the case when the spline actually has a long smooth curve The Combine short spline blo...

Page 160: ...Brief Description Basic logic functions Continuouspath Mode Exact Stop LookAhead B1 8 Function Manual 11 2006 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 ...

Page 161: ...on Reset Response K1 2 1 2 Block change and positioning axes If path axes are traversed in continuous path mode in a part program traversing positioning axes can also simultaneously affect both the response of the path axes and the block change A detailed description of the positioning axes can be found in References FB2 Function Manual Extended Functions Positioning axes P2 2 1 3 Block change del...

Page 162: ... transition to the next block occurs only when all axes involved in the traversing motion have reached their programmed target position with subject to the selected exact stop criterion This results in the following response All path axes and non modal special axes involved in the traversing motion are decelerated at the end of the block until they reach a standstill The program run time is consid...

Page 163: ...nated as an exact stop The machine axis reaches the exact stop state as soon as its following error is less than the specified position difference exact stop criterion Parameter assignment The tolerance windows of the exact stop criteria are specified with the following machine data MD36010 MA_STOP_LIMIT_FINE exact stop fine MD36000 MA_STOP_LIMIT_COARSE exact stop coarse Note Tolerance window The ...

Page 164: ...levant machine axes are not taken into consideration for exact stop criterion Interpolator end Thus depending on the dynamic response of the machine axes this can result in a relatively large smoothing of the contour at the block changes in comparison to the exact stop criteria Exact stop coarse and Exact stop fine Activation of an exact stop criterion An exact stop criterion is activated in the p...

Page 165: ...ghing and finishing Assignable specification of the active exact stop criterion The active exact stop criterion can be permanently specified for the part program commands of the first G group irrespective of the exact stop criterion programmed in the part program This specification can be made independently for each of the following part program commands Rapid traverse G0 Machining commands G1 G2 ...

Page 166: ...am blocks before and after rapid traverse blocks can be parameterized via the following channel specific machine data MD20552 MC_EXACT_POS_MODE_G0_TO_G1 value exact stop condition for G00 G01 transition Value Meaning 0 no additional stop at block transition 1 Stop at block transition Behavior according to G601 Exact stop window fine 2 Stop at block transition Same behavior as in the case of G602 e...

Page 167: ...quired to comply with the exact stop criterion Improved cutting conditions because of the more constant velocity Continuouspath mode is suitable if A contour must be traversed as quickly as possible e g with rapid traverse The exact contour may deviate from the programmed contour within a specific tolerance for the purpose of obtaining a continuous contour Continuous path mode is suitable if A con...

Page 168: ... of the positioning axes is reached The time taken to position a spindle programmed with syntax SPOS is longer than the travel time of the path axes The block change is carried out when the exact stop fine of the positioning spindle is reached The current block contains traversing commands for geometry axes and the following block traversing commands for synchronized axes or alternatively the curr...

Page 169: ...requested velocity MD10110 The machine data is not evaluated MD10110 MN_PLC_CYCLE_TIME_AVERAGE average PLC acknowledgement time 2 3 2 Velocity reduction according to overload factor Velocity reduction according to overload factor The function lowers the path velocity in continuouspath mode until the nontangential block transition can be traversed in one interpolation cycle while respecting the dec...

Page 170: ...xact stop with interpolator end This is undesirable for continuouspath mode so the factor must be set to greater than 1 0 For startup and installation please note that the factor must be reduced if the machine is likely to be subject to vibrations during angular block transitions and rounding is not to be used The block transitions are always rounded irrespective of the set overload factor by sett...

Page 171: ...unding according to path criterion Blending Rounding means that an angular block transition is changed to a tangential block transition by a local change to the programmed feedrate Rounding replaces the area in the vicinity of the original angular block transition including transitions between blocks inserted by the CNC by a continuous contour In this case it is not only the geometry axes that are...

Page 172: ...and therefore no rounding Rounding is also used if the traversal of the block transition requires a velocity that lies below the permissible velocity at the end of the block according to G64 see overload factor This means that very small knees in the contour e g 0 5 degrees can be overtraveled directly No intermediate rounding blocks An intermediate rounding block is not inserted in the following ...

Page 173: ...pecial axis then every path must always have its own rounding area There are no practical means of achieving this exactly Therefore on the basis of the specific meaning of the contour geometry axis the following procedure is applied Rounding behavior with synchronized paths Original path for Result for Geometry axes Orientation axis synchronized axis rounding path Smooth Smooth Defined path is tra...

Page 174: ...ves with a large degree of curvature and therefore cause a corresponding reduction in velocity Parameterization of the path criterion ADISPOS is programmed in the same way as ADIS but must be used specifically for movements in rapid traverse mode G00 ADIS and ADISPOS are preset in the part program For example ADIS 0 3 indicates a path criterion with a rounding distance of 0 3 mm ADISPOS is the sam...

Page 175: ...0 N7 X52 1 In blocks with short distances distance 4 ADIS and 4 ADISPOS respectively the rounding distance is reduced so that a traversable part of the original block is retained The remaining length depends on the axis path and is approximately 60 of the distance still to be traversed in the block ADIS or ADISPOS is therefore reduced to the remaining 40 of the distance to be traversed This algori...

Page 176: ...peration is otherwise identical to G641 References PG Programming Manual Fundamentals Extensions G643 is not used to generate a separate rounding block but axisspecific blockinternal rounding movements are inserted The expansions described below refine the response with G642 and G643 and rounding with contour tolerance is introduced When rounding with G642 and G643 the maximum permissible deviatio...

Page 177: ...with G642 the following contour tolerance is used SD42465 SC_SMOOTH_CONTUR_TOL maximum contour tolerance when rounding The remaining axes are rounded using the axisspecific tolerances in the machine data MD33100 When rounding geometry axes with G643 the following contour tolerance is used SD42465 SC_SMOOTH_CONTUR_TOL maximum contour tolerance when rounding The remaining axes are rounded using the ...

Page 178: ...h angular tolerance specification Restriction for protection zones with active radius compensation and tool orientation Although tool radius compensation is applied for a tool orientation which is not perpendicular to one of the three datum planes of the basic coordinate system the protection zones are not rotated onto the corresponding plane For G643 the following must apply in the machine data M...

Page 179: ...is specified instead This prevents the participating axes being accelerated into the rounding area during rounding with G641 G642 However in certain cases this setting can cause the rounding blocks to be traversed too slowly especially in large rounding areas 1xx No velocity profile for G641 2xx No velocity profile for G642 Note See also MD28530 MC_MM_PATH_VELO_SEGMENTS number of memory elements f...

Page 180: ...d to its maximum value With this setting neither the maximum deviations nor the rounding distance are checked The resulting deviations or rounding distances are determined exclusively by the dynamic limits of the respective axis and the current path velocity While with 3xxx the rounding distance results exclusively from the dynamic response data of the respective axis in the other cases the distan...

Page 181: ...c response If the programmed feedrate cannot be achieved the path velocity is brought to the parameterized axial limit values and the limit values of the path velocity acceleration jerk This can lead to repeated braking and acceleration on the path If a short acceleration takes place during a machining function with high path velocity and is thus followed almost immediately by braking the reductio...

Page 182: ...le Use of the machine data to input the resonance frequencies of the participating axes MD32440 MC_LOOKAH_FREQUNECY smoothing frequency for LookAhead Only accelerations in velocity which clearly excite machine resonances should be removed Use of machine data to take into account the programmed feedrate for smoothing MD20462 MC_LOOKAH_SMOOTH_WITH_FEED path smoothing with programmed feedrate MD20460...

Page 183: ...head MD20465 MC_ADAPT_PATH_DYNAMIC adaptation of the dynamic path response The minimum value for all axes involved in the path is always calculated If vibration is excited in the mechanical system of this axis and if the corresponding frequency is known this MD should be set to a value smaller than this frequency The required resonance frequencies for example can be calculated using the built in m...

Page 184: ...CY AX3 10Hz The path involves the 3 axes X AX1 Y AX2 Z AX3 The minimum value of MD32440 for these 3 axes is thus 10 Hz This means that any acceleration which is completed within a period of t2 t1 2 10Hz 200 ms is examined The time t2 is the time after which following acceleration from velocity v1 the velocity returns to this velocity v1 The extending of the execution time is also only considered w...

Page 185: ...lues This adaptation factor can be set for each channel for traversing motions with acceleration without BRISK and with SOFT jerk limiting Traversing motions with acceleration without jerk limiting MD20465 MC_ADAPT_PATH_DYNAMIC 0 adaptation of the dynamic path response The adaptation factor acts on the acceleration Traversing motions with acceleration with jerk limiting MD20465 MC_ADAPT_PATH_DYNAM...

Page 186: ...ions from this value or functions that cause the path axes to decelerate e g auxiliary function outputs to the PLC greatly reduce the desired action Exact stop G60 In addition the dynamic response adaptation is not active under the following boundary conditions Programmed rapid traverse G0 Changes in the override value Stop requests during motion e g NC STOP NC RESET Active function Velocity relat...

Page 187: ...asts less than tadapt despite the reduced acceleration The permitted reduction was fully utilized 2 The time needed to change the velocity is greater than tadapt No dynamic response adaptation is required Example 1 Effect of dynamic response adaptation acceleration mode BRISK Parameter assignment Machine data MC_ADAPT_PATH_DYNAMIC 0 1 5 MC_LOOKAH_SMOOTH_FACTOR 1 0 See note MA_LOOKAH_FREQUENCY AX1 ...

Page 188: ...Path velocity profile with adaptation of dynamic response Interval t0 t1 and t2 t3 The acceleration process between t0 t1 and the deceleration process between t2 t3 are lengthened in time due to an adaptation of the acceleration to time tadapt01 or tadapt23 Interval t4 t5 The acceleration process between t4 t5 is executed with an acceleration reduced by the maximum adaptation factor of 1 5 However...

Page 189: ...SK Parameter assignment Machine data MC_ADAPT_PATH_DYNAMIC 0 3 MC_LOOKAH_SMOOTH_FACTOR 80 MA_LOOKAH_FREQUENCY AX1 20 Hz TAX1 1 20 Hz 50 ms MA_LOOKAH_FREQUENCY AX2 20 Hz TAX2 1 20 Hz 50 ms MA_LOOKAH_FREQUENCY AX3 20 Hz TAX3 1 20 Hz 50 ms Y W W W W W W Y Y Figure 2 10 Path velocity profile optimized for time without smoothing or dynamic adaptation response Y W W W W W W Y Figure 2 11 Path velocity p...

Page 190: ...MIN TAXn 1 20 Hz 50 ms and is therefore executed with an acceleration reduced by an adaptation factor of 3 Interval up to t1 The acceleration up to t1 left over after path smoothing is stretched to the time period up to t1 by the dynamic response adaptation Conclusion This example shows the interaction of path smoothing and dynamic response adaptation in continuous path mode Only those acceleratio...

Page 191: ... The path velocity characteristic has been obtained through deselection of path dynamic response adaptation and path smoothing This corresponds to the following parameter settings MC_ADAPT_PATH_DYNAMIC 1 1 MC_LOOKAH_SMOOTH_FACTOR 0 With path dynamic response adaptation without path smoothing 7LPH LQ LQWHUSRODWLRQ F FOHV 6PRRWKHU SDWK YHORFLW GXH WR ORZHU SDWK MHUN The path velocity characteristic ...

Page 192: ..._LOOKAH_SMOOTH_FACTOR 0 same meaning as MC_LOOKAH_SMOOTH_FACTOR 100 Installation and startup The basic prerequisites for starting up the path dynamic response adaptation function are as follows Determination of the natural frequency of the path axes for parameter assignment of dynamic response adaptation MD32440 MA_LOOKAH_FREQUENCY smoothing frequency for LookAhead Determination of the dynamic res...

Page 193: ...APD factor that was determined via all the path axes as the value for the dynamic response adaptation MD20465 MC_ADAPT_PATH_DYNAMIC 1 FAPD 2 3 7 Technology G group Dynamic response settings for technology G groups Different settings can be stored and programmed for five different machining sections e g tapping roughing smoothing and smooth finishing For example roughing can be performed optimized ...

Page 194: ...ith the following setting MD10712 MN_NC_USER_CODE_CONF_NAME_TAB 0 DYNPOS list of reconfigured NC codes MD10712 MN_NC_USER_CODE_CONF_NAME_TAB 1 MD10712 MN_NC_USER_CODE_CONF_NAME_TAB 2 DYNSEMIFIN MD10712 MN_ NC_USER_CODE_CONF_NAME_TAB 3 Configuring the dynamic response values The values for each technology group are stored in the following machine data Axis MD32300 MA_ MAX_AX_ACCEL n axis accelerati...

Page 195: ...1 1 sets all five field elements to value 1 unit of measurement metric or inch depending on axis type and reference system 2 Read in archive files from software versions earlier than SW 7 2 Activate parameter sets for dynamic response By programming G codes the machine data affecting dynamics are activated and assigned as follows Active parameter set G CODE of group 59 technology Index 0 Value for...

Page 196: ...al path transitions was available With the LookAhead function it is possible to plan the acceleration and deceleration phase with approximately tangential path transitions in order to achieve a higher feedrate with shorter distances Deceleration to velocity limits is possible with LookAhead such that violation of the acceleration and velocity limit is prevented 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 HHG SURJUDPP...

Page 197: ... calculated automatically and can if required be limited by a machine data The standard setting is 1 which means that LookAhead only considers the following block for velocity control Because LookAhead is especially important for short blocks relative to the deceleration path the number of blocks required is of interest for LookAhead braking see fig below It is enough to consider the path length t...

Page 198: ...ed maximum value of the velocity profile is limited by the maximum path velocity With this function it is possible to initiate a speed reduction in the current block taking override into account such that the lower velocity of the following block can be achieved If the reduction in velocity takes longer than the travel time of the current block the velocity is further reduced in the following bloc...

Page 199: ...ded If velocity reductions across block boundaries are required already at 100 override a point must be set in the lower override range as well The number of override points used per channel is specified in the machine data MD20430 MC_LOOKAH_NUM_OVR_POINTS number of override switch points for LookAhead The associated points are stored in the machine data MD20440 MC_LOOKAH_OVR_POINTS prepared overr...

Page 200: ..._LOOKAH_USE_VELO_NEXT_BLOCK 1 Block cycle problem Block cycle problems are encountered in cases where the traversing distances of the NC blocks to be processed are so short that the LookAhead function has to reduce the machine velocity to provide enough time for block processing In this situation constant braking and acceleration of path motion may occur Velocity fluctuations of this type can be d...

Page 201: ...ored by LookAhead If an axis is to be interpolated that should on the other hand be made stationary by axis specific feed stop or axis disable LookAhead does not stop path movement before the block in question but decelerates in the block itself If this response is not wanted an axis specific feed stop can be transferred to a channel via the PLC to stop the path immediately See also FB1 Function M...

Page 202: ...COMPCAD is processor and memoryintensive It should only be used if surface quality enhancement measures cannot be incorporated in the CAD CAM program The programming is described in References PGA Programming Manual Work Preparation The compressor for orientation transformation is described in References FB3 Function Manual Special Functions 3 to 5Axis Transformation F2 The following three machine...

Page 203: ...gle for compressor 36 MD20170 MC_COMPRESS_BLOCK_PATH_LIMIT max path length of an NC block with compression 20 MD20172 MC_COMPRESS_VELO_TOL max allowed tolerance of the path feedrate with compression 100 MD32310 MA_MAX_ACCEL_OVL_FACTOR AX1 overload factor for axial jumps in velocity Value for G64 operation MD32310 MA_MAX_ACCEL_OVL_FACTOR AX2 Value for G64 operation MD32310 MA_MAX_ACCEL_OVL_FACTOR A...

Page 204: ...The rounding function G642 and jerk limitation SOFT can be used to achieve further improvements in surface quality These commands must be entered at the start of the program COMPCAD SOFT G642 COMPOF terminates the compressor function All blocks are compressed for which a simple syntax is sufficient N G1X Y Z F where is a number and X Y Z are axis names Including blocks with e g extended addresses ...

Page 205: ...ated for following cases independent of each other BSPLINE active BSPLINE ORICURVE active CSPLINE active The activation is done using machine data MD20488 MC_SPLINE_MODE setting for spline interpolation Bit Value Meaning 0 Overview of short spline blocks in the case of BSPLINE not active 0 1 Overview of short spline blocks in the case of BSPLINE active 0 Overview of short spline blocks in the case...

Page 206: ... memory is established by the machine data MD28070 MC_MM_NUM_BLOCKS_IN_PREP number of blocks for block preparation Example An NC program with BSPLINE interpolation is an example A higher path velocity is reached through the following setting MD20488 MC_SPLINE_MODE Bit 0 1 N10 G1 G64 X0 Y0 Z0 F10000 N20 G91 BSPLINE BSPLINE interpolation with overview of short spline blocks active N30 X0 001 Y0 001 ...

Page 207: ...tioning occurs as follows in the event of a subsequent REPOS operation depending on the current REPOS mode REPOS mode RMB Block start of interrupted traversing block RMI Block end of interrupted traversing block RME Block end of interrupted traversing block RMN Block end of interrupted traversing block Example Two traversing blocks N10 and N20 with programmed rounding G641 In the rounding area the...

Page 208: ...logic functions Continuouspath Mode Exact Stop LookAhead B1 56 Function Manual 11 2006 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 1 1 QWHUUXSWLRQ SRLQW 5 326 PRGH 50 5 326 PRGH 50 50 501 5 326 VWDUWLQJ SRLQW 5RXQGLQJ DUHD 3URJUDPPHG WUDYHUVLQJ GLUHFWLRQ Figure 3 1 Example of Rounding and REPOS ...

Page 209: ...7 3 2 Smoothing the path velocity Several blocks with SOFT and BRISK Smoothing of the path velocity is only effective in continuouspath mode with LookAhead over several blocks with SOFT and BRISK but not with G0 The cycle times of the control must be parameterized such that the preprocessing is provided with enough blocks to be able to analyze an acceleration process ...

Page 210: ...Supplementary conditions 3 2 Smoothing the path velocity Basic logic functions Continuouspath Mode Exact Stop LookAhead B1 58 Function Manual 11 2006 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 ...

Page 211: ...000 G64 SOFT Continuous path mode with SOFT acceleration characteristics N1004 G0 X 20 Y10 N1005 G1 X 20 Y0 Straight N1010 G3 X 10 Y 10 I10 Block transition with jump in path curvature straight circular N1011 G3 X0 Y0 J10 Block transition with continuous path curvature N1020 G2 X5 Y5 I5 Block transition with jump in path curvature circular circular N1021 G2 X10 Y0 J 5 ...

Page 212: ...Examples 4 1 Example of jerk limitation on the path Basic logic functions Continuouspath Mode Exact Stop LookAhead B1 60 Function Manual 11 2006 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 ...

Page 213: ...ch points for LookAhead 20450 LOOKAH_RELIEVE_BLOCK_CYCLE Relief factor for the block cycle time 20460 LOOKAH_SMOOTH_FACTOR Smoothing factor for LookAhead 20462 LOOKAH_SMOOTH_WITH_FEED Smoothing takes feedrate into account 20465 ADAPT_PATH_DYNAMIC Adaptation of path dynamic response 20480 SMOOTHING_MODE Rounding behavior with G642 G643 G644 20488 SPLINE_MODE Setting for spline interpolation 20490 I...

Page 214: ...tor for velocity jump 32431 MAX_AX_JERK Maximum axis jerk for path motion 32432 PATH_TRANS_JERK_LIM Maximum axial jerk of a geometry axis at block boundary 32433 SOFT_ACCEL_FACTOR Scaling of acceleration limitation for SOFT 32434 G00_ACCEL_FACTOR Scaling of acceleration limitation for G00 32435 G00_JERK_FACTOR Scaling of axial jerk limitation for G00 32440 LOOKAH_FREQUENCY Smoothing limit frequenc...

Page 215: ...L Max contour deviation on rounding 42466 SMOOTH_ORI_TOL Max deviation of the tool orientation on rounding 42470 CRIT_SPLINE_ANGLE Limit angle for spline and polynomial interpolation and compressor 5 3 Signals 5 3 1 Signals from channel DB number Byte Bit Description 21 36 3 All axes stationary 5 3 2 Signals to axis spindle DB number Byte Bit Description 31 60 6 Position reached with exact stop co...

Page 216: ...Data lists 5 3 Signals Basic logic functions Continuouspath Mode Exact Stop LookAhead B1 64 Function Manual 11 2006 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 ...

Page 217: ...terpolator end 11 L LookAhead 14 42 Block cycle problem 46 Following block velocity 44 Number of blocks 43 Override 44 Selection and deselection 46 Velocity profiles 44 M MD settings NC block compressor 48 MD10110 16 MD10712 40 42 MD12030 44 45 MD12100 43 45 MD18360 48 MD20150 9 39 MD20170 47 48 MD20172 48 MD20400 44 MD20430 45 MD20440 45 MD20450 46 MD20460 29 30 31 33 MD20462 29 30 MD20465 30 32 ...

Page 218: ...6010 11 MD36012 12 N NC block compressor COMPON COMPCURV COMCAD 47 O Orientation axes 18 Overload factor 17 P Path criterion 20 POS 15 R Rounding with contour tolerance 23 S SD42465 23 24 SD42466 23 24 SD42470 48 Spline 6 Spline blocks 6 Spline interpolation 6 SPOS 15 Synchronized axes 15 20 V Velocity reduction according to overload factor 16 ...

Page 219: ...lid for Control SINUMERIK 840D sl 840DE sl SINUMERIK 840Di sl 840DiE sl SINUMERIK 840D powerline 840DE powerline SINUMERIK 840Di powerline 840DiE powerline SINUMERIK 810D powerline 810DE powerline Software Version NCU system software for 840D sl 840DE sl 1 3 NCU system software for 840D sl DiE sl 1 0 NCU system software for 840D 840DE 7 4 NCU system software for 840Di 840DiE 3 3 NCU system softwar...

Page 220: ...ommissioning and operation of a device system may only be performed by qualified personnel Within the context of the safety notes in this documentation qualified persons are defined as persons who are authorized to commission ground and label devices systems and circuits in accordance with established safety practices and standards Prescribed Usage Note the following Warning This device may only b...

Page 221: ...cific 13 2 2 1 Detailed Description 13 2 2 1 1 General Information 13 2 2 2 Activation 14 2 2 2 1 Parameterization 14 2 2 3 Programming 14 2 3 Acceleration matching ACC axis specific 15 2 3 1 Detailed Description 15 2 3 1 1 General Information 15 2 3 2 Activation 15 2 3 3 Programming 15 2 4 Acceleration margin channel specific 17 2 4 1 Detailed Description 17 2 4 1 1 General Information 17 2 4 2 A...

Page 222: ...l specific 26 2 10 1 Detailed Description 26 2 10 1 1 General Information 26 2 10 2 Activation 27 2 10 2 1 Parameterization 27 2 10 3 Programming 27 2 11 Jerk limitation with path interpolation SOFT channel specific 28 2 11 1 Detailed Description 28 2 11 1 1 General Information 28 2 11 1 2 Maximum jerk value axis specific 30 2 11 1 3 Maximum jerk value channel specific 30 2 11 2 Activation 30 2 11...

Page 223: ...rogramming 42 2 18 Kneeshaped acceleration characteristic curve 43 2 18 1 Detailed Description 43 2 18 1 1 Adaptation to the motor characteristic curve 43 2 18 1 2 Effects on path acceleration 45 2 18 1 3 Substitute characteristic curve 46 2 18 2 Activation 48 2 18 2 1 Parameterization 48 2 18 2 2 Commissioning 49 2 18 3 Programming 49 2 18 3 1 Channel specific activation DRIVE 49 2 18 3 2 Axis sp...

Page 224: ...Table of contents Basic logic functions Acceleration B2 6 Function Manual 11 2006 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 5 2 Setting data 62 5 2 1 Channelspecific setting data 62 5 3 System variables 62 Index 63 ...

Page 225: ...characteristic The knee shaped acceleration characteristic means that in the case of machine axes featuring a motor in particular stepper motors with a torque characteristic that is highly dependent upon speed acceleration can be set at the level required to ensure optimum utilization of the motor whilst at the same time protecting it against overload 1 2 Features Acceleration Axis specific functi...

Page 226: ...on Acceleration with jerk limitation SOFTA Programmable maximum jerk value for single axis interpolation Programmable maximum jerk value for path interpolation Channel specific functions Acceleration profile that can be selected via part program instruction Acceleration with jerk limitation SOFT Adjustable jerk limitation Adjustable path jerk for specific real time events Specific maximum value fo...

Page 227: ... the case of acceleration without jerk limitation jerk infinite the maximum value is applied for acceleration immediately As regards acceleration with jerk limitation it differs in the following respects Advantages Shorter processing times with the same maximum values for velocity and acceleration Disadvantages Increased load on the machine s mechanical components and risk of inducing high frequen...

Page 228: ...ity value t Time The following features of the acceleration profile can be identified from the figure above Time t0 Sudden acceleration from 0 to amax Interval t0 t1 Constant acceleration with amax linear increase in velocity Time t1 Sudden acceleration from 2 amax with immediate switchover from acceleration to braking Note The sudden acceleration can normally be avoided by specifying a constant v...

Page 229: ...s that are of relevance for the path are not exceeded Exceeding of maximum value It is possible for the maximum value to be exceeded in connection with specific machining situations see Section Acceleration matching ACC and System variable AC_PATHACC 2 1 2 Activation 2 1 2 1 Parameterization Programming The maximum values are parameterized for specific axes using machine data MD32300 MA_MAX_AX_ACC...

Page 230: ...ck 2 1 3 2 Single axis acceleration without jerk limitation BRISKA Syntax BRISKA axis axis Function The BRISKA part program instruction is used to select the without jerk limitation acceleration profile for single axis movements JOG JOG INC positioning axis reciprocating axis etc G group Effective Modal Axis Value range Axis identifier for channel axes Axis specific initial setting Acceleration wi...

Page 231: ...eleration and braking In order to avoid this sudden acceleration a channel specific constant travel time can be programmed The constant travel time defines the time taken to traverse between the acceleration and braking phases at constant velocity MD20500 MC_CONST_VELO_MIN_TIME minimum time with constant velocity Note The constant travel time is ineffective Active function Look Ahead In traversing...

Page 232: ...ration phase with sudden acceleration 1 amax Interval t1 t2 Acceleration 0 constant velocity using the parameterized constant travel time Time t2 Start of braking phase with sudden acceleration 1 amax The times t0 t1 and t2 indicate the characteristic that would have been produced had no constant travel time been defined 2 2 2 Activation 2 2 2 1 Parameterization Function The constant travel time i...

Page 233: ... than 0 and less than or equal to 200 of the maximum value programmed in the machine data Effective Effective Acceleration matching is effective for all types of interpolation in AUTOMATIC and MDA operating modes as well as with dry run feed Ineffective Acceleration matching is ineffective in JOG and JOG REF reference point approach operating modes Acceleration matching is also ineffective if the ...

Page 234: ... machine axis Axis Value range Axis identifier for the channel s machine axes Adjustment factor Value range 0 adjustment factor 200 Unit Per cent Deactivate ACC axis 100 Effective Modal Reset response The behavior during channel RESET or M30 can be controlled via MD32320 MA_DYN_LIMIT_RESET_MASK Bit 0 0 The programmed ACC value is reduced to 100 with channel RESET M30 Bit 0 1 The programmed ACC val...

Page 235: ...rgin may be set aside for overlaid movements e g within the context of the Rapid lift away from the contour function path acceleration can be reduced by a programmable factor When for example a factor of 0 2 is applied preprocessing will only use 80 of the maximum possible path acceleration 20 is set aside as an acceleration margin for overlaid movements 2 4 2 Activation 2 4 2 1 Parameterization P...

Page 236: ...SD42500 SC_SD_MAX_PATH_ACCEL maximum path acceleration The value specified in the setting data is only taken into account if it is smaller than the path acceleration calculated during preprocessing The limitation must be activated for specific channels using setting data SD42502 SC_IS_SD_MAX_PATH_ACCEL TRUE 2 5 2 Activation 2 5 2 1 Parameterization Parameterization Parameterization is carried out ...

Page 237: ...justed for the situation by programming the setting data Limit value Value range 0 Unit m s2 Application Part program Static synchronized action 2 5 3 2 Switch ON OFF Syntax SC_IS_SD_MAX_PATH_ACCEL value Functionality The path acceleration limitation can be activated deactivated by programming the setting data Parameter Value Value range TRUE FALSE Application Part program Static synchronized acti...

Page 238: ...within the context of the Safely Integrated function the path acceleration can be set for the real time events specified above using a channel specific system variable AC_PATHACC path acceleration Real time event acceleration will only be active for the duration of the change in velocity in respect of one of the real time events specified above Limitation If the specified path acceleration exceeds...

Page 239: ... during preprocessing for the channel such as contour curvatures corners kinematic transformation limitations etc Real time event path acceleration is ineffective if the programmed value is smaller than the path acceleration calculated during preprocessing for the path section concerned Programming For information about programming system variables in the part program or synchronized actions see C...

Page 240: ...the machining process must be set lower than the machine s performance capability officially allows because of the supplementary conditions associated with the specific process concerned For time optimized traversing of the machine axes with programmed rapid traverse part program instruction G00 a specific maximum value can be programmed for the axis specific acceleration JOG setup mode This funct...

Page 241: ... Function Compared with acceleration without jerk limitation acceleration with jerk limitation results in a certain degree of time loss even when the same maximum acceleration value is used To compensate for this time loss a specific maximum value can be programmed for the axis specific acceleration as far as traversing of the machine axes with active jerk limitation SOFT SOFTA is concerned The ma...

Page 242: ...l 11 2006 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 2 8 2 Activation 2 8 2 1 Parameterization Function The maximum value for acceleration with active jerk limitation SOFT SOFTA is parameterized using the axis specific machine data MD32434 MA_SOFT_ACCEL_FACTOR scaling of the acceleration limitation with SOFT 2 8 3 Programming The function is not programmable ...

Page 243: ...ction with non tangential block transitions a higher level of axis specific acceleration can be enabled Excessive acceleration is parameterized using a factor calculated in relation to the axis specific maximum value This is used to generate the maximum value for axis specific acceleration with non tangential block transitions that is taken into account by the path planning component during prepro...

Page 244: ...aximum value Effective axial acceleration Path acceleration radial acceleration 2 MD32300 MA_MAX_AX_ACCEL 1 1 DSDWK 1 DUDGLDO Figure 2 3 Radial and path acceleration on curved contours The channel specific machine data MD20602 MC_CURV_EFFECT_ON_PATH_ACCEL influence of path curvature on dynamic path response can be used to set the proportion of the axis specific acceleration that is to be taken int...

Page 245: ...ion margin is set as follows 0 0 B 859B 7B21B3 7 B D UDGLDO P V 0 0 B0 B B P V ป Linear motions The acceleration margin referred to above is ineffective in the case of linear motions linear interpolation without active kinematic transformation 2 10 2 Activation 2 10 2 1 Parameterization Function The proportion of maximum available axis acceleration to be taken into account as an acceleration margi...

Page 246: ...onstant acceleration i e acceleration with jerk limitation jerk infinite value is the assumed acceleration profile In the case of acceleration with jerk limitation linear interpolation is applied in respect of acceleration from 0 to the maximum value Advantages Minimal load on the machine s mechanical components and low risk of high frequency and difficult to control mechanical vibrations thanks t...

Page 247: ...me The following features of the acceleration profile can be identified from the figure above Interval t0 t1 Constant jerk with rmax linear increase in acceleration quadratic increase in velocity Interval t1 t2 Constant acceleration with amax linear increase in velocity Interval t2 t3 Constant jerk with rmax linear decrease in acceleration quadratic decrease in excessive velocity until maximum val...

Page 248: ...re not exceeded Exceeding of maximum value It is possible for the maximum value to be exceeded in connection with specific machining situations see following Section System variable AC_PATHJERK 2 11 1 3 Maximum jerk value channel specific Function As well as it being possible to set the maximum jerk value for specific axes it can also be assigned as a channel specific path parameter using the foll...

Page 249: ...itions If the acceleration mode is changed in a part program during machining BRISK SOFT a block change is performed at the point of transition with an exact stop at the end of the block even in continuous path mode 2 12 Jerk limitation with single axis interpolation SOFTA axis specific 2 12 1 Detailed Description 2 12 1 1 General Information Overview The maximum jerk value can be set for each spe...

Page 250: ...430 MA_JOG_AND_POS_MAX_JERK maximum axis jerk 2 12 3 Programming Syntax SOFTA Axis Axis Functionality The SOFTA part program instruction is used to select acceleration with jerk limitation for single axis movements positioning axis reciprocating axis etc G group Effective modal Axis Value range Axis identifier for channel axes Axis specific initial setting Acceleration with jerk limitation can be ...

Page 251: ...10 SC_SD_MAX_PATH_JERK maximum path jerk The value specified in the setting data is only taken into account in the channel if it is smaller than the path jerk calculated during preprocessing The limitation must be activated for specific channels using setting data SD42512 SC_IS_SD_MAX_PATH_JERK TRUE 2 13 2 Activation 2 13 2 1 Parameterization Function Parameterization is carried out for specific c...

Page 252: ...ted for the situation by programming the setting data Jerk value Value range 0 Unit m s3 Application Part program Static synchronized action 2 13 3 2 Switch ON OFF Syntax SC_IS_SD_MAX_PATH_JERK value Functionality The path jerk limitation can be activated deactivated by programming the setting data Parameter Value Value range TRUE FALSE Application Part program Static synchronized action ...

Page 253: ...vents will only be active for the duration of the change in velocity in respect of one of the real time events specified above Limitation As the jerk is not a physical variable of any relevance to the drive no limit is imposed on the jerk set Effective Effective Path jerk for real time events is only enabled in AUTOMATIC and MDA operating modes in conjunction with the following real time events NC...

Page 254: ...or information about programming system variables in the part program or synchronized actions see Chapter Programming 2 14 2 Activation Function The function does not need to be activated 2 14 3 Programming Syntax AC_PATHJERK path jerk Functionality The path jerk for real time events is set via the channel specific system variables Jerk value Value range Path jerk 0 Unit m s3 Application Part prog...

Page 255: ... of the machine axes with programmed rapid traverse part program instruction G00 a specific maximum value can be programmed for the axis specific jerk JOG setup mode This function does not affect jerk in respect of a rapid traverse override in JOG setup mode 2 15 2 Activation 2 15 2 1 Parameterization Function The maximum value for axis specific jerk with programmed rapid traverse is parameterized...

Page 256: ...le the programmable controller has to decelerate movement of the geometry axes significantly in order to ensure compliance with the parameterized axis dynamics For the purpose of reducing avoiding deceleration in connection with block transitions without constant curvature a higher level of axis specific jerk can be enabled The excessive jerk is parameterized using a dedicated axis specific maximu...

Page 257: ...g as possible without having an unacceptable impact on contour accuracy The filter should also have as balanced a smoothing effect as possible i e if the same contour is traversed forwards and backwards the contour smoothed by the filter should be as similar as possible in both directions To enable the jerk filter to be optimally matched to the machine conditions various filter modes are available...

Page 258: ...I I 1 V I 1 V 1 where fZ Numerator natural freq fN Denominator natural freq DZ Numerator damping DN Denominator damping Since a vibration capable filter setting is not expected to yield useful results in any case as with the jerk filter s 2nd order filter PT2 low pass filter PT2 mode there is no setting option for the denominator damping DN The denominator damping DN is permanently set to 1 The ba...

Page 259: ...ata MD32410 MA_AX_JERK_TIME time constants for the axial return filter With SW 5 1 and higher it is also possible to control the jerk limitation in the position controller with a new filter based on a smoothing method that incurs few contour errors MD32402 AX_JERK_MODE 1 2nd order filter default corresponds to SW 1 to SW 4 4 MD32402 AX_JERK_MODE 2 Sliding mean value generation New jerk filter with...

Page 260: ...a lower higher denominator natural frequency than the numerator natural frequency you can increase decrease the amplitude response at high frequencies An amplitude response increase at high frequencies can be justified in most cases as the controlled system generally possesses a lowpass characteristic itself i e the amplitude response drops at high frequencies anyway 2 17 2 Activation 2 17 2 1 Par...

Page 261: ...um utilization of the motor characteristic curve it is necessary to reduce the acceleration once a certain speed is reached 0UHG 0 1P Q QPD QUHG 0PD Figure 2 5 Torque characteristic curve of a motor with torque characteristic that is highly dependent upon speed 1 Torque decrease zone nred Speed above which reduced torque has to be assumed nmax Maximum speed Mmax Max torque Mred Torque at nmax corr...

Page 262: ... following figures show typical velocity and acceleration characteristic curves for the respective types of characteristic Constant characteristic YUHG YPD YPD YUHG DPD DUHG Y D Y W Figure 2 6 Acceleration and velocity characteristic with acceleration reduction 0 constant Hyperbolic characteristic YPD YUHG DUHG DPD YUHG YPD Y D Y W Figure 2 7 Acceleration and velocity characteristic with accelerat...

Page 263: ...characteristic curve is generated on the basis of the types of characteristic for the axes that are of relevance for the path If axes with different types of characteristic curve are interpolated together the acceleration profile for the path acceleration will be determined on the basis of the reduction type that is most restrictive The following order of priorities applies whereby 1 top priority ...

Page 264: ...aracteristic curve provides the best possible compromise between maximum velocity and constant acceleration Substitute characteristic curve with linear path sections Limitation to this value is applied if the programmed path velocity is greater than that at which 15 of the maximum acceleration capacity is still available v15 a Consequently 15 of the maximum acceleration capacity motor torque alway...

Page 265: ...teristic curve Curved path aN Normal acceleration aers Substitute characteristic curve constant acceleration vers Substitute characteristic curve velocity r Path radius Block transitions with continuous path mode If continuous path mode is active non tangential block transitions result in axial velocity jumps when the programmed path velocity is used for traversing As a result the path velocity is...

Page 266: ...Part program block with block number Nxy 2 18 2 Activation 2 18 2 1 Parameterization Function The knee shaped acceleration characteristic curve is parameterized for specific axes using the following machine data MD32000 MA_MAX_AX_VELO maximum axis velocity MD35220 MA_ACCEL_REDUCTION_SPEED_POINT speed for reduced acceleration MD35230 MA_ACCEL_REDUCTION_FACTOR reduced acceleration MD32300 MA_MAX_AX_...

Page 267: ...eleration profile via the part program instructions Abrupt acceleration changes BRISKA Acceleration with jerk limitation SOFTA is not possible Path interpolation If the knee shaped acceleration characteristic curve is parameterized for a machine axis that is of relevance for a programmed path but the DRIVE part program instruction has not been activated then a substitute characteristic curve with ...

Page 268: ...ax DRIVEA Axis Axis Functionality The knee shaped characteristic curve is activated for all single axis interpolations positioning axis reciprocating axis etc for specific axes using the part program instruction G group Effective modal Axis Value range Axis identifier for channel axes Reset response The channel specific default setting is activated via a reset MD20150 MC_GCODE_RESET_VALUES 20 Depe...

Page 269: ...ns to note 3 2 Kneeshaped acceleration characteristic curve 3 2 1 Active kinematic transformation Key statement The knee shaped acceleration characteristic curve is not taken into account in connection with an active kinematic transformation The control switches to acceleration without jerk limitation BRISK and a substitute characteristic curve is adopted for path acceleration ...

Page 270: ...Supplementary conditions 3 2 Kneeshaped acceleration characteristic curve Basic logic functions Acceleration B2 52 Function Manual 11 2006 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 ...

Page 271: ...be adapted to take account of various events and the resulting change in acceleration Part program excerpt schematic Acceleration selection in accordance with fast input 1 A_IN 1 N53 ID 1 WHEN A_IN 1 1 DO AC_PATHACC 2 MA_MAX_AX_ACCEL X Test override profile simulates external intervention N54 ID 2 WHENEVER AC_TIMEC 16 DO AC_OVR 10 N55 ID 3 WHENEVER AC_TIMEC 30 DO AC_OVR 100 Approach N1000 G0 X0 Y0...

Page 272: ...esult of override modification AC_OVR in accordance with real time acceleration AC_PATHACC N53 N55 4 Brake to block end velocity for intermediate smoothing block in accordance with acceleration default ACC N2200 5 Speed limitation as a result of smoothing see 9 6 Accelerate to 100 of path velocity AC_OVR in accordance with acceleration default ACC N2300 7 Decelerate as a result of override modific...

Page 273: ...t of various events and the resulting change in jerk Part program excerpt schematic Setting of path acceleration and path jerk in the event of external intervention N0100 AC_PATHACC 0 N0200 AC_PATHJERK 4 MA_MAX_AX_JERK X MA_MAX_AX_JERK Y 2 Synchronized actions for the purpose of varying the override simulates external intervention N53 ID 1 WHENEVER AC_TIMEC 16 DO AC_OVR 10 N54 ID 2 WHENEVER AC_TIM...

Page 274: ...Y P V 51 0 51 0 1 1 Figure 4 2 Switching between path jerk specified during preprocessing and AC_PATHJERK Acceleration profile SOFT 1 Jerk according to MA_MAX_AX_JERK 2 Jerk according to AC_PATHJERK 3 Jerk according to MA_MAX_AX_JERK approach block end velocity 4 Velocity limit due to arc 5 Jerk according to AC_PATHJERK ...

Page 275: ...s the connection between specific velocity and acceleration related machine data and the contour sections they influence Part program N90 F5000 SOFT G64 Continuous path mode acceleration with jerk limitation N100 G0 X0 Y0 Z0 Rapid traverse N110 G1 X10 Straight line N120 G3 CR 5 X15 Y5 Circular arc radius 5 mm block transition tangential N130 G3 CR 10 X5 Y15 Circular arc radius 10 mm block transiti...

Page 276: ...sic logic functions Acceleration B2 58 Function Manual 11 2006 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 LV YHORFLW 0 0 B B29 B 725 0 3 7 B75 16B 5 B 0 0 B B 62 7B B 725 LV DFFHOHUDWLRQ 0 0 B B 5 1 1 1 1 Figure 4 4 X axis Velocity and acceleration characteristic ...

Page 277: ...teristic curve example only X axis MD35220 MA_ACCEL_REDUCTION_SPEED_POINT X 0 4 MD35230 MA_ACCEL_REDUCTION_FACTOR X 0 85 MD35242 MA_ACCEL_REDUCTION_TYPE X 2 MD35240 MA_ACCEL_TYPE_DRIVE X TRUE Y axis MD35220 MA_ACCEL_REDUCTION_SPEED_POINT Y 0 0 MD35230 MA_ACCEL_REDUCTION_FACTOR Y 0 6 MD35242 MA_ACCEL_REDUCTION_TYPE Y 1 MD35240 MA_ACCEL_TYPE_DRIVE Y TRUE Z axis MD35220 MA_ACCEL_REDUCTION_SPEED_POINT...

Page 278: ...0 Path motion Z with DRIVE N20 BRISK Switchover to BRISK N25 G1 X120 Y70 Path motion Y Z with substitute characteristic curve N30 Z100 Path motion Z with BRISK N35 POS X 200 FA X 500 Positioning motion X with DRIVEA N40 BRISKA Z Activate BRISKA for Z N40 POS Z 50 FA Z 200 Positioning motion Z with BRISKA N45 DRIVEA Z Activate DRIVEA for Z N50 POS Z 100 Positioning motion Z with DRIVE N55 BRISKA X ...

Page 279: ...movements 5 1 2 Axis spindlespecific machine data Number Identifier MA_ Description 32000 MAX_AX_VELO Maximum axis velocity 32300 MAX_AX_ACCEL Maximum axis acceleration 32310 MAX_ACCEL_OVL_FACTOR Overload factor for velocity jump 32320 DYN_LIMIT_RESET_MASK Reset behavior of dynamic limits 32400 AX_JERK_ENABLE Axial jerk limitation 32402 AX_JERK_MODE Filter type for axial jerk limitation 32410 AX_J...

Page 280: ...35230 ACCEL_REDUCTION_FACTOR Acceleration reduction factor 35240 ACCEL_TYPE_DRIVE DRIVE acceleration characteristic curve ON OFF 35242 ACCEL_REDUCTION_TYPE Type of acceleration reduction 5 2 Setting data 5 2 1 Channelspecific setting data Number Identifier SC_ Description 42500 SD_MAX_PATH_ACCEL Max path acceleration 42502 IS_SD_MAX_PATH_ACCEL Analysis of SD 42500 ON OFF 42510 SD_MAX_PATH_JERK Max...

Page 281: ...RISK 11 BRISKA 12 D DRIVE 48 DRIVEA 49 J Jerk limiting Smoothing method 40 M MD20150 12 30 49 MD20500 13 14 MD20600 29 MD20602 25 26 MD20610 17 MD32000 47 MD32300 11 22 23 24 25 47 MD32310 23 24 MD32400 40 41 MD32402 41 MD32410 40 MD32420 12 30 31 MD32430 30 31 MD32431 29 36 MD32432 37 MD32433 22 MD32434 21 22 23 36 MD32435 36 MD35220 44 47 MD35230 44 47 MD35240 48 MD35242 42 47 S SD42500 17 SD425...

Page 282: ...Index Basic logic functions Acceleration B2 64 Function Manual 11 2006 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 ...

Page 283: ...system software for 840D sl 840DE sl 1 3 NCU system software for 840D sl DiE sl 1 0 NCU system software for 840D 840DE 7 4 NCU system software for 840Di 840DiE 3 3 NCU system software for 810D 810DE 7 4 Brief description 1 Detailed description 2 Constraints 3 Examples 4 Data lists 5 SINUMERIK SINUMERIK 840D sl 840Di sl 840D 840Di 810D Basic logic functions Diagnostic tools D1 Function Manual 11 20...

Page 284: ...ommissioning and operation of a device system may only be performed by qualified personnel Within the context of the safety notes in this documentation qualified persons are defined as persons who are authorized to commission ground and label devices systems and circuits in accordance with established safety practices and standards Prescribed Usage Note the following Warning This device may only b...

Page 285: ...y 22 2 5 Service display PROFIBUS DP 840Di 34 2 6 Communication log 38 2 7 PLC status 39 2 8 Other diagnostics tools 40 2 9 Identifying defective drive modules 41 3 Constraints 45 4 Examples 47 5 Data lists 49 5 1 Machine data 49 5 1 1 Drive specific machine data 49 5 1 2 NC specific machine data 50 5 1 3 Axis spindlespecific machine data 50 5 2 Setting data 51 5 2 1 Axis spindle specific setting ...

Page 286: ...Table of contents Basic logic functions Diagnostic tools D1 4 Function Manual 11 2006 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 ...

Page 287: ...drive interface of machine axes Integrated diagnostic tools The following information is displayed via the HMI user interface Display of alarms and messages from the control system or drives in plaintext Status displays for Interface signals from NC HMI PLC and I O modules Data blocks PLC flags timers and counters Inputs and outputs of the PLC Service displays Nominal values actual values and stat...

Page 288: ...uating speed and position control loops and regulating torque in the time and frequency range without external measurement equipment Fast Fourier Transformation FFT for analysis of the control loop setting and machine kinematics Circularity test Archiving drive and control data By means of the DAC configuration the 611D drive modules enable the output of all important control loop variables of the...

Page 289: ...active or not yet acknowledged alarms and messages are displayed in the Diagnostics operating area Alarm log The alarm log contains the alarms that have occurred and the time Detailed information on the individual alarms can be found in References DA Diagnostics Manual or in the case of systems with HMI Advanced see Online Help Note The corresponding explanations for alarms and messages which the ...

Page 290: ...nced Note The currently active alarms in the NCK are read via the operator panel interface It is not possible to set alarms externally in the NCK Alarms with an alarm ID in the 60000 to 60999 range can be activated in a part program Data backup On Power ON the alarm handler data are reinitialized completely since they are not stored in the buffered SRAM Compatibility As of SW 4 As of SW 4 1 and la...

Page 291: ...NCSTARTCLEAR The alarm is cleared in the channel in which the alarm occurred by starting a program The alarm can also be cleared by means of a Reset CLEARHIMSELF The alarm is not cleared by an operator input or action but explicitly by a clearAlarm programmed in the NCK source code BAGRESETCLEAR The alarm is cleared by a BAGRESETCLEAR command or by executing a Reset in every channel of this mode g...

Page 292: ...rator s Guide BEM HMI Embedded Operator s Guide Note On HMI Advanced it is possible to switch between the displays using the vertical soft key for Part view Overall view The data in the partial view are updated at significantly shorter intervals General In principle the following service displays are available Axis spindle service displays Drive service displays Profibus DP service displays Note S...

Page 293: ...tion is used for checking the setpoint branch e g position setpoint speed setpoint spindle speed setpoint prog checking the actual value branch e g actual position value measuring system 1 2 actual speed value optimizing the position control loop e g following error control deviation servo gain factor checking the whole control loop of the axis e g by comparing the position setpoint and the actual...

Page 294: ...al The difference between the position setpoint at the position controller input and the actual position value of active measuring system 1 or 2 Unit mm inch or degrees Contour deviation The current contour deviation is displayed with this value variations of the following error caused by settling operations on the speed controller due to load changes The contour deviation results from the differe...

Page 295: ... active Position actual value measuring system 1 2 The actual position of the axis as measured via measuring system 1 2 The position is displayed in the machine coordinate system no work offsets or tool offsets included Unit mm inch or degrees Position reference value Specified position transferred from the interpolator to the position control Unit mm inch or degrees compensation value meas system...

Page 296: ...OTOR_MAX_SPEED speed for maximum useful motor speed Speed setpoint Speed setpoint transferred to the drive speed setpoint from position controller and feed forward control Unit 100 corresponds to the maximum speed setpoint 10 V for an analog interface maximum speed for SIMODRIVE 611 digital Spindle speed setpoint prog Speed setpoint programmed by the user Unit rpm e g Input S1000 display 1000 rpm ...

Page 297: ...en programmed for the Synchronous spindle function Unit mm inches degrees References FB2 Function Manual Extension Functions Synchronous Spindle S3 Current gear stage The current actual gear stage is displayed here With axes this is only displayed if a spindle is assigned to the axis This display corresponds to IS DB31 DBX16 0 to 16 2 Actual gear stage References FB1 Function Manual Basic Function...

Page 298: ...chine data MD34110 MA_REFP_CYCLE_NR and MD20700 MC_REFP_NC_START_LOCK Display corresponds to IS DB31 DBX60 4 and 60 5 Referenced synchronized 1 or 2 References FB1 Function Manual Basic Functions Reference Point Approach R1 QEC learning active Indicates whether or not the learning process for quadrant error compensation for the axis is active Fixed stop reached Indicates whether or not the axis ha...

Page 299: ...gnals of drive status References FBSI Description of Functions Safety Integrated Safe input signals of the drive Displays the safe input signals of the drive DMP on drive bus defined for the Safety Integrated function The status of these input signals should correspond to the Safe input signals of axis status References FBSI Description of Functions Safety Integrated Safe output signals of the axi...

Page 300: ...URO SDUDPHWHU VHW RQWRXU GHYLDWLRQ ROORZLQJ HUURU H J IURP GLUHFW PHDVXULQJ V VWHP EV FRPSHQVDWLRQ YDOXH 0HDVXULQJ V VWHP FWXDO SRVLWLRQ YDOXH RI PHDVXULQJ V VWHP FWXDO SRVLWLRQ YDOXH RI PHDVXULQJ V VWHP FWLYH PHDVXULQJ V VWHP 6HUYR JDLQ IDFWRU FDOFXODWHG 6SHHG VHWSRLQW ROORZLQJ HUURU 9DOXH LV GLVSOD HG LQ XVHU LQWHUIDFH WDOLF IRQW LQH LQWHUSRODWRU HUN OLPLWDWLRQ QDPLF UHVSRQVH DGDSWDWLRQ HHG IRUZ...

Page 301: ...ined as 6HUYR JDLQ IDFWRU 6SHHG VHWSRLQW ROORZLQJ HUURU P PLQ PP HIDXOW a following error of 1 mm must be measured with KV 1 and constant velocity at a feedrate of 1 m min If the desired servo gain KV factor does not correspond to the actual factor the possible causes and remedial optimization options are as follows Speed or torque feedforward control is activated A higher servo gain factor is dis...

Page 302: ...our monitoring Speed setpoint limiting Speed setpoint MD36210 MA_CTRLOUT_LIMIT maximum speed setpoint Positioning monitoring following error MD36010 MA_STOP_LIMIT_FINE exact stop fine Measuring system changeover not available difference between actual position value measuring system 1 and 2 MD36500 MA_ENC_CHANGE_TOL maximum tolerance for actual position value measurement Clamping monitoring follow...

Page 303: ... positioning Compare position setpoint with actual position value of measuring system 1 2 and absolute compensation value of measuring system 1 or 2 The cam is not detected by the PLC during referencing Check status display referenced An incorrect reference point value was displayed The wrong measuring system may have been used for referencing Large fluctuations in the actual speed value are occur...

Page 304: ...lay are not necessary for connecting drives via the PROFIBUS DP For SINUMERIK 840Di the drives are defined as PROFIBUS nodes The appropriate service data is displayed in 840DiStartup in the menu Diagnostics PROFIBUS Application The diagnostic options are used for checking the status of enabling and control signals e g pulse enable drive enable motor selection setpoint parameter set checking the st...

Page 305: ...as yes or no instead of 0 and 1 For additional information refer to References IAD Installation Guide Explanations Terms Drive enable terminal 64 63 The display corresponds to the status of terminal 64 63 on the SIMODRIVE611 digital infeed regenerative feedback unit State 1 Central drive enable State 0 Central drive disable Display corresponds to machine datum MD1700 MD_TERMINAL_STATE status of bi...

Page 306: ...able Indicates whether the pulse enable from the PLC is available for the drive State 1 The pulses for the drive module have been disabled by the PLC State 0 Pulse enable for this drive is activated by the PLC Display corresponds to IS DB31 DBX21 7 Pulse enable References FB1 Function Manual Basic Functions Various Interface Signals A2 Speed controller enable NC This display indicates whether the ...

Page 307: ...he axis spindle can therefore not be traversed State 1 The drive module pulses are enabled The axis spindle can now be traversed Display corresponds to IS DB31 DBX93 7 Enable pulses References FB1 Function Manual Basic Functions Various Interface Signals A2 Drive ready Display of the current status of the selected drive State 0 The drive is not ready State 1 The drive is ready Display corresponds ...

Page 308: ...it Volts Speed setpoint The displayed speed setpoint represents the unfiltered total setpoint value It consists of the position controller output component and the speed feedforward branch Unit rpm Display corresponds to machine data MD1706 MD_DESIRED_SPEED speed setpoint value Speed actual value The displayed real value represents the unfiltered actual speed value Unit rpm Display corresponds to ...

Page 309: ...s of software version 6 3 and later References FB1 Function Manual Basic Functions Various Interface Signals A2 2 Torque Limit Display of active torque limit State 0 Torque limit 1 is active State 1 Torque limit 2 is active Display corresponds to IS DB31 DBX92 2 Torque limit 2 active References FB1 Function Manual Basic Functions Various Interface Signals A2 Integrator disabling This display indic...

Page 310: ...ecific monitoring and evaluating functions are disabled This allows the encoder to be withdrawn without initiating an alarm Setpoint parameter set drive Indicates which of the 8 drive parameter sets of the SIMODRIVE 611 digital are to be activated by the PLC Display corresponds to IS DB31 DBX21 0 to 21 Parameter set selection A B C References FB1 Function Manual Basic Functions Various Interface S...

Page 311: ...es FB1 Function Manual Basic Functions Various Interface Signals A2 Actual motor star delta Display indicating which of the motor data sets is currently active At the moment the motor data record is used for the star delta switchover on main spindle drives The following assignment applies Motor selection Application Coding Motor 1 MSD Star 0 0 Motor 2 MSD Delta mode 0 1 Motor 3 reserved 1 0 Motor ...

Page 312: ...Interface Signals A2 Heatsink temperature warning Warning signal output by drive State 0 The heat sink temperature monitoring has not responded State 1 The heatsink temperature monitoring has responded Display corresponds to IS DB31 DBX94 1 Heatsink temperature prewarning References FB1 Function Manual Basic Functions Various Interface Signals A2 Motor temperature warning Warning signal output by ...

Page 313: ...threshold setting Status display of drive State 0 In the stationary condition i e ramp up procedure completed the torque setpoint is greater than the threshold torque State 1 In the stationary condition the torque setpoint has not reached the threshold torque The threshold torque corresponds to the machine data MD1428 MD_TORQUE_THRESHOLD_X threshold torque Display corresponds to IS DB31 DBX94 3 Md...

Page 314: ... nx message Display corresponds to NST DB31 DBX94 5 nis nx References FB1 Function Manual Basic Functions Various Interface Signals A2 Actual speed set speed Status display of drive State 0 The actual speed value is outside the speed tolerance band after a new speed setpoint was defined State 1 The actual speed value has reached the speed tolerance band after a new speed setpoint was defined The s...

Page 315: ...unction MD1623 MD_PROG_SIGNAL_THRESHOLD Threshold variable signal function MD1624 MD_PROG_SIGNAL_HYSTERESIS Hysteresis variable signal function MD1625 MD_PROG_SIGNAL_ON_DELAY ON Delay variable signal function MD1626 MD_PROG_SIGNAL_OFF_DELAY OFF Delay variable signal function Diagnostics for alarms This information is also provided as a diagnostic tool for diagnosing the causes of alarms such as Ra...

Page 316: ...the individual colors Green Function is OK Red Failure or no communication at the moment Gray Function is not available for the present communication Diagnostic screen PROFIBUS DP Configuration The diagnostic screen PROFIBUS Configuration provides general information on PROFIBUS DP The following parameters are displayed Table 2 1 Diagnostic screen PROFIBUS Configuration Function subfunction Explan...

Page 317: ...trolled by the NC PLC e g I O modules or an axis controlled by the PLC Active on the bus Displays whether the DP slave has been detected on the bus Green lamp DP slave has been detected on PROFIBUS DP and the data exchange with the assigned component NC or PLC operates Red lamp Failure or no communication Sync with NC Displays whether DP slave operates on the bus synchronously to the NC Green lamp...

Page 318: ... operates on the bus synchronously to the NC Green lamp DP slave operates on PROFIBUS DP synchronously to the NC i e the equidistant data exchange takes place Gray lamp DP slave is not assigned to the NC but to the PLC Red lamp Failure or no communication Slots No Slot number within DP slave I O address I O address in the I O address space of the PLC assigned to this slot For NC axes setpoint and ...

Page 319: ...Current slot status Green lamp Cyclic communication Red lamp No cyclic communication as yet Message frame failures The display shows the number of message frame failures since the NC was booted This value indicates the quality fault susceptibility of the PROFIBUS DP line Encoder 1 Slave slot Configurable assignment Status Current slot status Green lamp Cyclic communication Red lamp No cyclic commu...

Page 320: ...tics operating area This error list assists developers of OEM applications in localizing sporadic errors The list has no relevance for normal operation Logbook The logbook display selected by means of soft key Logbook in the Diagnostics operating area automatically lists details of all alterations to the control that are relevant for the system e g changes in access level For SINUMERIK 840Di the l...

Page 321: ...tatus display operation and changing PLC signals refer to the Operator s Guide for the relevant HMI software Status display The status of the following data can be displayed on the operator panel Interface signals from the machine control panel Interface signals to the machine control panel Interface signals between the NCK and PLC Interface signals between the HMI and PLC Data blocks DB 0 127 Fla...

Page 322: ...ortant values for the position speed and current control for archiving drive and control data and for analyzing the stated physical properties For handling and complete range of functions see References IAD Installation Guide Archiving of data The PCIN software package can be used to archive machine data setting data part programs etc A description of how to use this can be found in the associated...

Page 323: ...ivate the function To do this connect the drive so as to exclude the module Since this internal modification to the machine configuration can result in damage to the machine if implemented incorrectly the axes are prevented from moving If Safety Integrated has been activated for the modules concerned you must disable it manually safety logged EMERGENCY STOP scheme Remove drive module at NC end A d...

Page 324: ...ESET Example The 2axis module with drive numbers 1 and 2 must be removed from a drive grouping Note Before activating the function the module in question must be removed from the drive bus configuration SIMODRIVE 611 digital To do this connect the drive bus so as to exclude the module If Safety Integrated has been activated for the modules concerned you must disable it manually safety logged EMERG...

Page 325: ...RIVE_MODULE_TYPE 1 0 DRIVE_MODULE_TYPE 2 0 DRIVE_MODULE_TYPE 3 2 DRIVE_MODULE_TYPE 4 2 DRIVE_MODULE_TYPE 5 1 DRIVE_MODULE_TYPE 6 9 Alarms 300020 Drive 1 removed for diagnostics and 300020 Drive 2 removed for diagnostics are displayed Internally simulated drives are used for all axes which had settings on the removed drive numbers If the controller is engaged for the drives that are still installed...

Page 326: ...Detailed description 2 9 Identifying defective drive modules Basic logic functions Diagnostic tools D1 44 Function Manual 11 2006 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 ...

Page 327: ...Basic logic functions Diagnostic tools D1 Function Manual 11 2006 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 45 Constraints 3 No supplementary conditions apply ...

Page 328: ...Constraints Basic logic functions Diagnostic tools D1 46 Function Manual 11 2006 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 ...

Page 329: ...Basic logic functions Diagnostic tools D1 Function Manual 11 2006 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 47 Examples 4 No examples are available ...

Page 330: ...Examples Basic logic functions Diagnostic tools D1 48 Function Manual 11 2006 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 ...

Page 331: ... 1604 LINK_VOLTAGE_WARN_LIMIT DC link under voltage warning threshold 1620 PROG_SIGNAL_FLAGS Bits variable signal function 1621 PROG_SIGNAL_NR Signal number variable signal function 1622 PROG_SIGNAL_ADDRESS Address variable signal function 1623 PROG_SIGNAL_THRESHOLD Threshold variable signal function 1624 PROG_SIGNAL_HYSTERESIS Hysteresis variable signal function 1625 PROG_SIGNAL_ON_DELAY ON Delay...

Page 332: ...es KB 13030 DRIVE_MODULE_TYPE Module identifier SIMODRIVE 611 digital 5 1 3 Axis spindlespecific machine data Number Identifier MA_ Description 32200 POSCTRL_GAIN n Servo gain factor 32250 RATED_OUTVAL Rated output voltage 32260 RATED_VELO Rated motor speed 36010 STOP_LIMIT_FINE Exact stop fine 36030 STANDSTILL_POS_TOL Zero speed tolerance 36050 CLAMP_POS_TOL Clamping tolerance 36210 CTRLOUT_LIMIT...

Page 333: ... 5 2 1 Axis spindle specific setting data Number Identifier SA_ Description 43510 FIXED_STOP_TORQUE Fixed stop clamping torque 5 3 Signals 5 3 1 Signals to axis spindle DB number Byte Bit Description 31 16 0 16 2 Actual gear stages A B C 31 21 0 21 2 Parameter set selection A B C 31 21 3 21 4 Motor selection A B 31 21 7 Pulse enable ...

Page 334: ...tup mode active 31 92 1 Rampup function generator quick stop 31 92 2 Torque limit 2 active 31 92 3 Speed setpoint smoothing active 31 93 0 93 2 Active parameter set A B C 31 93 3 93 4 Active motor A B 31 93 5 Drive Ready 31 93 6 Speed controller integrator disabled 31 93 7 Pulses enabled 31 94 0 Motor temperature prewarning 31 94 1 Heat sink temperature prewarning 31 94 2 Ramp up function complete...

Page 335: ... 27 DBX93 7 25 DBX94 0 30 DBX94 1 30 DBX94 2 31 DBX94 3 31 DBX94 4 31 DBX94 5 32 DBX95 7 30 DB31 DBX94 6 32 Diagnostic tools D1 5 Interrupts 7 Diagnostics 11 Drive service display 22 L Logbook 38 M MD11412 8 MD13030 41 42 43 MD1401 14 MD1417 32 MD1418 31 MD1426 31 32 MD1428 31 MD1604 25 MD1620 MD_PROG_SIGNAL_FLAGS 33 MD1621 MD_PROG_SIGNAL_NR 33 MD1622 MD_PROG_SIGNAL_ADDRESS 33 MD1623 MD_PROG_SIGNA...

Page 336: ...1 2006 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 MD36300 21 MD36400 20 MD36500 20 MD37010 16 N NCK alarm handler 7 O of defective drive modules Identification 41 P PCIN 40 PLC status 39 R Ramp up phase 33 S Service display PROFIBUS DP 34 Servo gain factor Kv 19 V Version 38 Z ZK1 Messages 33 ...

Page 337: ...10 2BA0 Valid for Control SINUMERIK 840D sl 840DE sl SINUMERIK 840Di sl 840DiE sl SINUMERIK 840D powerline 840DE powerline SINUMERIK 840Di powerline 840DiE powerline SINUMERIK 810D powerline 810DE powerline Software Version NCU system software for 840D sl 840DE sl 1 3 NCU system software for 840D sl DiE sl 1 0 NCU system software for 840D 840DE 7 4 NCU system software for 840Di 840DiE 3 3 NCU syst...

Page 338: ...ommissioning and operation of a device system may only be performed by qualified personnel Within the context of the safety notes in this documentation qualified persons are defined as persons who are authorized to commission ground and label devices systems and circuits in accordance with established safety practices and standards Prescribed Usage Note the following Warning This device may only b...

Page 339: ...OC 27 2 2 Travel to fixed stop with analog drives 31 2 2 1 SIMODRIVE 611 digital VSA HSA 31 2 2 2 Travel to fixed stop with hydraulic drives SIMODRIVE 611 digital HLA module 35 2 3 Travel to fixed stop with analog drives 36 2 3 1 SIMODRIVE 611 analog FDD 36 2 3 2 SIMODRIVE 611 analog FDD 39 2 3 3 Diagrams for travel to fixed stop with analog drives 42 3 Supplementary conditions 45 4 Examples 47 5 ...

Page 340: ...Table of contents Basic logic functions Travel to fixed stop F1 4 Function Manual 11 2006 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 ...

Page 341: ...ented for axes as well as for spindles with axistraversing capability The function can be implemented for several axes simultaneously and parallel to the motion of other axes Torques or the power can be adjusted to a specific setting Travel with limited torque power Force Control FOC can be activated The travel to fixed stop functions can be enabled from synchronized actions Block search with calc...

Page 342: ...Brief Description Basic logic functions Travel to fixed stop F1 6 Function Manual 11 2006 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 ...

Page 343: ...r 1 selected FXS Machine axis identifier 0 deselected The commands are modal The clamping torque is set with command FXST Machine axis identifier Torque adjusted It is in of the static torque for VSA of the drive MD1118 MOTOR_STANDSTILL_CURRENT or in of the engine torque for HSA drives MD1130 MOTOR_NOMINAL_POWER entered The command is used for setting the width of the fixed stop monitoring window ...

Page 344: ... function may also be selected for several machine axes simultaneously The FXST and FXSW commands are optional The travel path and the command which activates that function must be programmed in one block exception Synchronized actions Examples With machine axis identifiers X250 Y100 F100 FXS X1 1 X250 Y100 F100 FXS X1 1 FXST X1 12 3 X250 Y100 F100 FXS X1 1 FXST X1 12 3 FXSW X1 2 mm X250 Y100 F100...

Page 345: ...l to fixed stop Selection The NC detects that the function travel to fixed stop is selected via the command FXS x 1 and signals the PLC via the NST DB31 DBX62 4 Activate travel to fixed stop that the function has been selected If the machine data MD37060 FIXED_STOP_ACKN_MASK Monitoring of PLC acknowledgments for travel to fixed stop is set correspondingly the acknowledgement of the PLC via the NST...

Page 346: ...actual and expected following error has exceeded the value set in machine data MD37030 MA_FIXED_STOP_THRESHOLD Threshold for fixed stop detection has exceeded FIXED_STOP_BY_SENSOR 1 External sensor signals the NC via the PLC with the NST DB31 DBX1 2 Sensor fixed stop the state Fixed stop reached FIXED_STOP_BY_SENSOR 2 The Fixed stop reached status is active either when the status has been detected...

Page 347: ...ly when the axis leaves the fixed stop position Enabling the fixed stop alarms With the machine data MD37050 MA_FIXED_STOP_ALARM_MASK enabling the fixed stop alarms can be established as follows MD 37050 0 Fixed stop not reached suppress Alarm 20091 MD 37050 2 Fixed stop not reached suppress alarm 20091 and fixed stop aborted suppress alarm 20094 MD 37050 3 Fixed stop aborted suppress alarm 20094 ...

Page 348: ...o fixed stop still active is output and the axis is not moved If an axis has reached the fixed stop and is then moved out of this position by more than the value specified in SD FIXED_STOP_WINDOW Fixed stop monitoring window from the position then the alarm 20093 Standstill monitoring has triggered at the stop is given the function Travel to fixed stop for this axis is deselected and the system va...

Page 349: ...ding on the machine data MD37060 MA_FIXED_STOP_ACKN_MASK the acknowledgement of the PLC is awaited through resetting of the NST DB 31 DBX3 1 Enable travel to fixed stop and or DB 31 DBX1 1 Acknowledge fixed stop reached is waited for The axis will then change to position control The followup mode of the position setpoints is ended and a synchronization to the new actual position is carried out A p...

Page 350: ...ng action when the machine is restarted The rise time of the torque corresponds to the time needed by the current controller of the drive to reach the limitation again If the pulses are deleted when a deselection is active waiting for PLC acknowledgments the torque limit will be reduced to zero If the pulses are reactivated during this phase torque is no longer built up Once the deselection has be...

Page 351: ... the new actual position As soon as the fixed stop is reached the function remains operative even after RESET Function abort A function abort can be triggered by the following events EMERGENCY STOP With an 840D control the NC and drive are disconnected from the supply after EMERGENCY STOP i e the PLC must react With an 840Di control the NC and drive are disconnected from the supply after EMERGENCY...

Page 352: ...the program is output The program can be continued after pressing NC Start to acknowledge At the start of the target block FXST x and FXSW x are set to the same value as they would have during normal program processing Block search without calculation The commands FXS FXST and FXSW are ignored FOC FOCON FOCOF is activated modally It is already active in the approach block SERUPRO Block search with...

Page 353: ...up to the programmed end point Caution SERUPRO approach does not really take the statementFXS into account The approach to the programmed end position of the FXS block is only simulated without torque limitation The user can log the turning on and turning off of FXS in the parts program If necessary the user can start an ASUB in order to activate or deactivate FXS in this SERUPRO ASUP AA_FXS and V...

Page 354: ...s 1 to 5 HVHOHFW EORFN ZLWK 6 6 FWLYDWH WUDYHO WR IL HG HQG VWRS 6HW YHORFLW 5HFRUG FKDQJH DFFHOHUDWLRQ DFFRUGLQJ WR 0 0 B B 7HUPLQDO FODPS LV VWLOO DFWLYH ZLWKRXW FKDQJHRYHU RI WHUPLQDO FODPS 6 L HG VWRS UHDFKHG 7HUPLQDO FODPS DFWLYH 7DUJHW SRVLWLRQ GHVHOHFWHG UHFRUG 6 QDEOH WUDYHO WR IL HG VWRS 7HUPLQDO FODPS DFWLYH 6 FNQRZOHGJH IL HG VWRS UHDFKHG Figure 2 2 Diagram for FXS with a digital drive ...

Page 355: ...RO operation This means that other program branches can be processed which will produce different results due to the simulation If after the SERUPRO process axis Y is traversed again then variables AA_FXS and VA_FXS are assigned the same values again VA_FXS Real machine status Variable VA_FXS always describes the real machine status In this way the actual existing machine status of the correspondi...

Page 356: ...below This sequence is comparable to the program fxsSeruproAsup mpf Every axis is taken into account and the torque last programmed before the search target is applied The user can treat FXS separately in a SERUPRO ASUP The following then applies Every FXS action executed in SERUPRO ASUP automatically takes care of AA_FXS X VA_FXS X This deactivates FXS REPOS for axis X Deactivate FXS REPOS FXS RE...

Page 357: ...ng axisspecific setting data are provided for the Travel to fixed stop function SD43500 SA_FIXED_STOP_SWITCH selection of travel to fixed stop SD43510 SA_FIXED_STOP_TORQUE clamping torque for travel to fixed stop SD43520 SA_FIXED_STOP_WINDOW fixed stop monitoring window The setting data are effective only when the axis has reached the fixed stop The status of the setting data is displayed via the ...

Page 358: ...ing value 1 2 For further information please refer to the Planning Guide SIMODRIVE ThreePhase Motors for Feed and Main Spindle Drives and to the appropriate document regarding the hydraulic module FBHLA References FBHLA Description of Functions HLA module Status query in the parts program System variable AA_FXS x indicates the status of the travel to fixed stop function It has the following coding...

Page 359: ...l traversing motion NST DB31 DBX1 3 Axis spindle disable NST DB31 DBX2 1 Controller enable Actual position at fixed stop System variable AA_IM x can determine the actual position of the machine axis e g for test purposes after successful travel to fixed stop Combination with other functions Measure with deletion of distance to go command MEAS and travel to fixed stop cannot be programmed at the sa...

Page 360: ...digital HLA module please see References FB2 Function Manual for Extended Functions Compensation K3 Section Electronic weight compensation MD37052 With the machine data MD37052 MA_FIXED_STOP_ALARM_REACTION does not result in disconnection of the drive from the power supply when an alarm is generated while the NST DB11 DBX6 3 Mode group ready remains active Bit value 0 The alarms have an effect on ...

Page 361: ...e blocking at stop as follows Bit 0 0 Travel to fixed stop aborted Bit 0 1 Travel to fixed stop is interrupted i e the drive becomes powerless Once the pulse blocking is canceled again the drive will press at the limited torque again The torque is actuated steplike At the fixed stop the drive can be controlled either via NST DB31 DBX21 7 Pulse enable Or Drive monitor 663 pulse enable The NC evalua...

Page 362: ...1 is met If on the one hand FXS should be interrupted and on the other hand Travle to fixed stop the following settings are required MD37002 MA_FIXED_STOP_CONTROL Bit 0 0 and MD1012 MD_FUNC_SWITCH Bit 2 0 Programming FXS in synchronized actions The function is not available for analog axes PLC acknowledgment cannot be awaited Select FXS 1 The following signal interfaces are set Message to PLC NST ...

Page 363: ...on of FXS may not initiate a motion stop Modify the torque FXST The clamping torque can already be modified when approaching the stop The torque limit FXST acts in addition to the acceleration limitation with ACC The new torque taking into account the ramp MD37012 MA_FIXED_STOP_TORQUE_RAMP_TIME becomes active one interpolation cycle after the change in the drive A change of the effective torque ca...

Page 364: ...gram end If already programmed it is effective with FXST set torque force FXST can be programmed irrespectively of FOCON it comes into effect however only after the function has been activated Programming The programming of the axis is carried out in square brackets The following are permissible Geometry axis identifiers Channel axis identifiers Machine axis identifiers Example N10 FOCON X Modal a...

Page 365: ...ynchronized actions The language commands FOC FOCON FOCOF can also be programmed in synchronized actions as the commands for travel to fixed stop Determine FOC status The activation status can be read at any time via the status variable AA_FOC If FXS is also activated the status is not changed 0 FOC not active 1 FOC modal active 2 FOC block related active Determine torque limit status The system v...

Page 366: ...raversing motion occurs If the acceleration limitation is not adapted accordingly the end of block position is possibly reached later than specified in MD36040 MA_STANDSTILL_DELAY_TIME The machine data MD36042 MA_FOC_STANDSTILL_DELAY_TIME is introduced for this and monitored in this status Possible application link and container axes All axes that can be traversed in a channel i e also link axes a...

Page 367: ...FXST x is transferred to the drive via the digital interface and this limits its effective torque In addition the acceleration is reduced accordingly in the NC automatically acc to FXST x Fixed stop reached As soon as the axis reaches the fixed stop the axial contour deviation increases If the threshold entered in the machine data MD37030 FIXED_STOP_THRESHOLD is exceeded or the NST signal DB31 DBX...

Page 368: ...avel to fixed stop and DB31 DBX62 5 Fixed stop reached are reset Depending on the machine data MD37060 FIXED_STOP_ACKN_MASK the acknowledgement of the PLC is awaited through resetting of the NST DB 31 DBX3 1 Enable travel to fixed stop and or Acknowledge fixed stop reached is waited for DB 31 DBX1 1 The axis will then change to position control The followup mode of the position setpoints is ended ...

Page 369: ... DBX21 7 will not abort the function As a result the drive will press against the fixed stop again without any further operating action when the machine is restarted The rise time of the torque corresponds to the time needed by the current controller of the drive to reach the limitation again If the pulses are deleted when a deselection is active waiting for PLC acknowledgments the torque limit wi...

Page 370: ...esented for digital drive SIMODRIVE 611 digital 0 B6723B7 5 6 2 0 0 B B 0 B6723B 1 B72548 6 QDEOH WUDYHO WR IL HG VWRS DFNQRZOHGJH 7HUPLQDO FODPS LV VWLOO DFWLYH ZLWKRXW VKLIWLQJ RI WHUPLQDO FODPS 6HOHFW UHFRUG ZLWK 6 6 FWLYDWH WUDYHO WR IL HG HQG VWRS 7HUPLQDO FODPS DFWLYH FXUUHQW OLPLWDWLRQ 6HW YHORFLW 7UDFNLQJ HUURU 6 L HG VWRS UHDFKHG 7HUPLQDO FODPS DFWLYH 6 L HG VWRS UHDFKHG 5HFRUG FKDQJH W K...

Page 371: ...rce control takes place Positioning from the NC is no longer possible in this case NC When traveling to fixed stop the NC evaluates a torque force limit acting in addition to the limits set on the drive Current Force torque Power pullout power Setup mode Note For relevant explanations on velocity control and force control as well as details about adaptations for SIMODRIVE 611 digital or digital HL...

Page 372: ... limitation is activated by the control via a PLC output which acts on terminal 96 of the actuator thus ensuring that a fixed clamping torque is available on the axis Setpoints can be injected via terminals 56 14 or 24 20 Programmable clamping torque In this case the PLC switches the drive actuator from speedcontrolled into currentcontrolled operation as soon as the fixed stop is reached Activatio...

Page 373: ...on is automatically reduced in the NC according to the value in the machine data MD37070 FIXED_STOP_ANA_TORQUE is automatically reduced The axis now traverses to the target position at the programmed velocity Fixed stop reached As soon as the axis reaches the fixed stop the axial contour deviation increases If the recorded threshold in the machine data MD37030 FIXED_STOP_THRESHOLD is exceeded or t...

Page 374: ...P_ACKN_MASK the acknowledgement of the PLC is awaited through resetting of the NST Enable travel to fixed stop DB31 DBX3 1 awaited and then a block change is executed Deselection The NC detects that the function has been deselected on the basis of commandFXS x 0 and specifies a speed or current setpoint of 0 i e zero clamping torque Then the NC resets IS Activate travel to fixed stop DB31 DBX62 4 ...

Page 375: ...m Caxis operation The control system has to switch the spindle into C axis mode before the Travel to fixed stop function is selected The PLC does this by activating one of the programmable terminals E1 D9 e g terminal E1 of the drive actuator Selection The NC detects that the function travel to fixed stop is selected via the command FXS x 1 and signals the PLC via the IS Activate travel to fixed s...

Page 376: ...putting a speed setpoint corresponding to the value set in the machine data MD37070 FIXED_STOP_ANA_TORQUE The speed controller forces the drive to the torque limit by means of this continuously applied setpoint The NC then deletes the remaining distancetogo and forces the position setpoint to follow The controller enabling command remains active The NC then outputs IS Fixed stop reached DB31 DBX62...

Page 377: ...fies a speed or torque setpoint of 0 i e zero clamping torque Then the NC resets the NST Activate travel to fixed stop DB31 DBX62 4 and Fixed stop reached DB31 DBX62 5 D If torquecontrolled operation is activated the PLC must first select the unassigned gear stage in which the torque limitation is effective and switch the drive over to speedcontrolled operation a speed setpoint of 0 is applied by ...

Page 378: ...hows the sequence of the following error and interface signals for FXS selection fixed stop is reached on analog drives 6HW YHORFLW 6HOHFW UHFRUG ZLWK 6 6 FWLYDWH WUDYHO WR IL HG HQG VWRS 7HUPLQDO FODPS DFWLYH FXUUHQW OLPLWDWLRQ 7UDFNLQJ HUURU W 7DUJHW SRVLWLRQ 6 QDEOH WUDYHO WR IL HG VWRS 5HFRUG FKDQJH DFFHOHUDWLRQ DFFRUGLQJ WRB 0 0 B B 0 B6723B 1 B72548 PV ZLWK 96 PV ZLWK 6 KDQJHRYHU W KDQJHRYHU...

Page 379: ...ace signals for FXS selection fixed stop is not reached on analog drives FWLYDWH SRVLWLRQ FRQWUROOHU 5HFRUG ZLWK 6 6 FWLYDWH 6 5HFRUG ZLWK 6 167 FWLYDWH 6 7UDFNLQJ HUURU 0 B6723B7 5 6 2 9 B 6 9 B 6 9 B 6 DLW IRU GHOHWH GLVWDQFH WR JR 3UHYLRXV KLVWRU 9 B 6 L HG VWRS GHWHFWHG 9 B 6 LV QRW DW IL HG VWRS 9 B 6 7UDFNLQJ HUURU 9 B 6 L HG VWRS FRUUHFWO DSSURDFKHG L HG VWRS QRW FRUUHFWO DSSURDFKHG Figure ...

Page 380: ...06 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 FXS deselection The following diagram shows the sequence of the following error and interface signals for FXS Deselection on analog drives 7UDFNLQJ HUURU 0RWRU FXUUHQW 5HFRUG ZLWK 6 6 FWLYDWH 6 6 6 UHDFKHG 5HFRUG FKDQJH 67 RU 0 B6723B72548 B 0 B6723B7 5 6 2 Figure 2 6 Diagram for FXS deselection with analog drive ...

Page 381: ...Basic logic functions Travel to fixed stop F1 Function Manual 11 2006 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 45 Supplementary conditions 3 There are no supplementary conditions to note ...

Page 382: ...Supplementary conditions Basic logic functions Travel to fixed stop F1 46 Function Manual 11 2006 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 ...

Page 383: ...l motion to POS Y 150 direction of the stop started N11 IDS 2 WHENEVER once the stop has been recognized AA_FXS Y 4 DO AA_FXS Y 4 the torque is FXST Y 30 increased to 30 N12 IDS 3 WHENEVER after reaching the stop AA_FXS Y 1 DO the torque becomes dependent FXST Y R0 on R0 controlled N13 IDS 4 WHENEVER deselection in dependence R3 1 AND on R3 and AA_FXS Y 1 DO reverse FXS Y 0 FA Y 1000 POS Y 0 N20 F...

Page 384: ...AA_FXS or a separate flag here R1 in the condition will ensure that the function is not activated more than once programming example parts program fragment N10 R1 0 N20 IDS 1 WHENEVER R1 0 AND AA_IW AX3 7 DO R1 1 FXS AX1 1 FXST AX1 12 Blockrelated synchronized actions By programming a blockrelated synchronized action travel to fixed stop can be connected during an approach motion Programming examp...

Page 385: ...FIXED_STOP_TORQUE_RAMP_TIME Virtual time until reaching the new clamping torque when traveling to fixed stop 37020 FIXED_STOP_WINDOW_DEF Default for fixed stop monitoring window 37030 FIXED_STOP_THRESHOLD Threshold for fixed stop detection 37040 FIXED_STOP_BY_SENSOR Fixed stop detection via sensor 37050 FIXED_STOP_ALARM_MASK Enabling the fixed stop alarms 37052 FIXED_STOP_ALARM_REACTION Reaction t...

Page 386: ...W Clamping torque when traveling to fixed stop extended to a torque greater than 100 43520 FIXED_STOP_TORQUE Fixed stop monitoring window 5 3 Signals 5 3 1 Signals to axis spindle DB number Byte Bit Description 31 1 1 Acknowledge fixed stop reached 31 1 2 Sensor for fixed stop 31 1 3 Axis spindle disable 31 2 1 Controller enable 31 3 1 Enable travel to fixed stop 5 3 2 Signals from axis spindle DB...

Page 387: ...MD37052 12 22 MD37060 9 10 12 13 24 25 29 33 34 35 36 37 38 MD37070 33 34 36 37 MD37080 26 Modal activation FOCON FOCOF 26 R REPOS Offset 18 S SD43500 20 SD43510 20 SD43520 20 SERUPRO 16 SERUPRO ASUP 18 T Travel to fixed stop Analog drives 32 Analog drives diagrams 38 Analog drives FXS deselection 40 Analog drives FXS selection 38 analog drives SIMODRIVE 611A FDD 32 analog drives SIMODRIVE 611A MS...

Page 388: ...Basic logic functions Travel to fixed stop F1 Function Manual 11 2006 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 52 ...

Page 389: ...5397 0BP10 2BA0 Valid for Control SINUMERIK 840D sl 840DE sl SINUMERIK 840Di sl 840DiE sl SINUMERIK 840D powerline 840DE powerline SINUMERIK 840Di powerline 840DiE powerline SINUMERIK 810D powerline 810DE powerline Software Version NCU system software for 840D sl 840DE sl 1 3 NCU system software for 840D sl DiE sl 1 0 NCU system software for 840D 840DE 7 4 NCU system software for 840Di 840DiE 3 3 ...

Page 390: ...ommissioning and operation of a device system may only be performed by qualified personnel Within the context of the safety notes in this documentation qualified persons are defined as persons who are authorized to commission ground and label devices systems and circuits in accordance with established safety practices and standards Prescribed Usage Note the following Warning This device may only b...

Page 391: ... value routing 35 2 3 3 Configuration of drives 41 2 3 4 Adapting the motor load ratios 42 2 3 5 Speed setpoint output 46 2 3 6 Actual value processing 49 2 3 7 Adjustments to actual value resolution 52 2 4 Closed loop control 59 2 4 1 General 59 2 4 2 Parameter sets of the position controller 63 2 4 3 Extending the parameter set 65 2 5 Optimization of the control 69 2 5 1 Position controller inje...

Page 392: ...Table of contents Basic logic functions Velocities Setpoint Actual Value Systems Closed Loop Control G2 4 Function Manual 11 2006 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 ...

Page 393: ...ontrol G2 Function Manual 11 2006 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 5 Brief description 1 The description of functions explains how to parameterize a machine axis in relation to Actual value measuring systems Setpoint system Operating accuracy Travel ranges Axis velocities Control parameters ...

Page 394: ...Brief description Basic logic functions Velocities Setpoint Actual Value Systems Closed Loop Control G2 6 Function Manual 11 2006 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 ...

Page 395: ...oder limit frequency The maximum axis velocity is defined in machine data MD32000 MA_MAX_AX_VELO maximum axis velocity The maximum permissible spindle speed is defined via machine data MD35100 MA_SPIND_VELO_LIMIT maximum spindle speed For more information see References FB1 Function Manual Basic Functions Spindles S1 As well as limiting using MD32000 the control limits the maximum path velocity in...

Page 396: ...hort blocks Example Interpolation cycle 12 ms N10 G0 X0 Y0 mm N20 G0 X100 Y100 mm Path length programmed in block 141 42 mm Vmax 141 42 mm 12 ms 0 9 10606 6 mm s 636 39 m min The following restriction applies to the minimum path or axis velocity 9 ಥ PLQ RPSXWDWLRQDO UHVROXWLRQ QFU PP RU GHJUHHV LQWHUSRODWLRQ F FOH V The computational resolution is defined via machine data MD10200 MN_INT_INCR_PER_M...

Page 397: ... MN_INT_INCR_PER_DEG computational resolution for angular positions 1000 incr degree is assigned its default values the following range of values can be programmed with the specified resolution Range of values for path feedrate F and geometry axes Metric system Inch system 0 001 F 999 999 999 mm min mm rev degrees min degrees rev 0 001 F 399 999 999 inch min inch rev Range of values for feedrate f...

Page 398: ...ution Table 2 1 Traversing ranges of axes G71 mm degrees G70 inch degrees Range Range Linear axes X Y Z etc 999 999 999 399 999 999 Rotary axes A B C etc 999 999 999 999 999 999 Interpolation parameters I J K 999 999 999 399 999 999 The unit of measurement of rotary axes is always degrees If the computational resolution is increased decreased by a factor of 10 the ranges of values change according...

Page 399: ...ol system Actual value resolution and computational resolution The positioning accuracy of the control depends on the actual value resolution encoder increments mm or degrees and the computational resolution internal increments mm or degrees The coarse resolution of these two values determines the positioning accuracy of the control The input resolution interpolator and position control cycle sele...

Page 400: ... RU GHJUHHV QWHUQDO LQFUHPHQWV PP RU GHJUHHV SODFHV DIWHU GHFLPDO SRLQW ORVW QFRGHU HV 1R FWXDO YDOXH UHVROXWLRQ HQFRGHU LQFUHPHQWV PP RU GHJUHHV 0RWRU 6SHHG VHWSRLQW UHVROXWLRQ 7ULJJHU GHYLFH 6FDOLQJ H DPSOH 0DFKLQH GDWD LQSXW DQG GLVSOD LQ FP ZLWK PHWULF EDVLF V VWHP J IRU 0 326B 07B3 86 VW VRIWZDUH OLPLW VZLWFK SOXV FP IRU WKH IRU WKH 0 6 1 B 7256B86 5B Q VHOHFWHG ZLWK 0 6 1 B86 5B B0 6 RQO HII...

Page 401: ...computational resolution Resolutions Differences Resolutions e g resolutions of linear and angular positions velocities accelerations and jerk must be differentiated as follows Input resolution Data is input via the control panel or parts programs Display resolution Data is displayed via the control panel Computational resolution Data input via the control panel or parts program is displayed inter...

Page 402: ...s limited to the computational resolution by rounding the product of the programmed value with the computational resolution to an integer number To make the rounding clear powers of 10 should be used for the computational resolution Example of rounding Computational resolution 1000 increments mm Programmed path 97 3786 mm Effective value 97 379 mm Example of programming in the 1 10 μm range All th...

Page 403: ...s2 Angular acceleration 1 rev s2 1 rev s2 Linear jerk 1 m s3 1 inch s3 Angular jerk 1 rev s3 1 rev s3 Time 1 s 1 s Position controller servo gain 1 s 1 s Rev feedrate 1 mm rev 1 inch rev Compensation value linear position 1 mm 1 inch Compensation value angular position 1 degree 1 degree The units listed below are used for storage The control always uses these units internally irrespective of the b...

Page 404: ...low you to set the adaptation between the newly selected input output units and the internal units QSXW RXWSXW XQLWV IRU PDFKLQH DQG VHWWLQJ GDWD RQYHUVLRQ RI LQWHUQDO XQLWV QWHUQDO XQLWV 8VHU GHILQHG 0 6 1 B 7256B86 5B Q 0 6 1 B 7256B86 5B B0 6 R WKH LQSXW RXWSXW XQLWV FRUUHV SRQG WR WKH VWDQGDUG EDVLF V VWHP LQFK RU PHWULF 1R HV The following applies Selected input output unit MD10230 internal u...

Page 405: ... Bit No 2 must be set in the machine data MD10220 MN_SCALING_USER_DEF_MASK MD10220 MN_SCALING_USER_DEF_MASK H4 bit no 2 as hex value The scaling factor for the linear velocities is to differ from the standard setting For this the Bit No 2 must be set in the machine data MD10220 MN_SCALING_USER_DEF_MASK MD10220 MN_SCALING_USER_DEF_MASK H4 bit no 2 as hex value The scaling factor is calculated using...

Page 406: ...0 Example 2 In addition to the change in Example 1 the machine data input output of linear accelerations must be in ft s2 instead of m s2 initial state The internal unit is mm s2 0 6 1 B86 5B B0 6 0 6 1 B 7256B86 5B Q 0 6 1 B 7256B86 5B IW PP V V ය ය ය PP V PP V ELW QR DQG ELW QR IURP H DPSOH DV KH YDOXH Index 4 defines the linear acceleration in the Scaling factors of physical quantities list ...

Page 407: ...offsets FRAMES etc and the associated displays Supplements The setting MD10260 MN_CONVERT_SCALING_SYSTEM 1 greatly simplifies a change in the measuring system HMI user interface Softkey in the Machine operating area for changing the measuring system Automatic conversion of active NC data when the measuring system is changed Data backup is performed with the actual measuring system identifier The m...

Page 408: ...nel specifically via the initial setting reset of the G groups in the machine data MD20150 MC_GCODE_RESET_VALUES 12 When changing the measuring system via the relevant soft key on the HMI these initial settings are automatically predefined to appropriate settings for the new measuring system with G700 or G710 With the axis specific machine data MD31200 MA_SCALING_FACTOR_G70_G71 factor for converti...

Page 409: ...ata MD10240 Data exchange with the PLC of interface signals containing dimension information e g feedrate for path and positioning axes is always carried out in the selected basic system Supplements G700 G710 extends the functionality of G70 G71 as follows 1 The feedrate is interpreted in the programmed measuring system G700 length parameters inch feedrates inch min G710 length parameters mm feedr...

Page 410: ...arts programs are implemented with a metric setting with MD10240 MN_SCALING_SYSTEM_IS_METRIC 1 N100 R1 0 R2 0 N120 G01 G70 X1 F1000 N130 MA_LUBRICATION_DIST X 10 N140 NEWCONF N150 IF AA_IW X MA_LUBRICATION_DIST X N160 R1 1 N170 ENDIF N180 IF AA_IW X 10 N190 R2 1 N200 ENDIF N210 IF R1 0 OR R2 0 N220 SETAL 61000 N230 ENDIF N240 M30 Note Alarm 61000 is not output if G70 is replaced by G700 in block N...

Page 411: ...me of interpretation This is the only way to achieve a defined and reproducible positioning behavior of a synchronized action Example 1 N100 R1 0 N110 G0 X0 Z0 N120 WAITP X N130 ID 1 WHENEVER R1 1 DO POS X 10 N140 R1 1 N150 G71 Z10 F10 Z 10 mm X 10 mm N160 G70 Z10 F10 Z 254 mm X 254 mm N170 G71 Z10 F10 Z 10 mm X 10 mm N180 M30 Example 2 The definition is made here by programming G71 in the synchro...

Page 412: ...y decimal places MCS G G G G Feedrates G G P P Positional data X Y Z P P P P Interpolation parameters I J K P P P P Circle radius CR P P P P Polar radius RP P P P P Pitch P P P P Programmable FRAME P P P P Settable FRAMES G G P P Basic frames G G P P Work offsets external G G P P Axial preset offset G G P P Operating range limit G25 G26 G G P P Protection zones P P P P Tool offsets G G P P Length ...

Page 413: ...suring system The actual change in the measuring system is made by writing all the necessary machine data and subsequently activating them with a RESET Machine data MD10240 MN_SCALING_SYSTEM_IS_METRIC and the corresponding G70 G71 G700 G710 settings in machine data MD20150 MN_GCODE_RESET_VALUES are switched automatically and consistently for all configured channels The value of machine data MD2015...

Page 414: ...n zones Machine data Jog and handwheel factors After the changeover all of the above data is available in physical quantities Data for which no unique physical units are defined is not converted automatically This includes R parameters GUDs Global User Data LUDs Local User Data PUD Program global User Data Analog inputs outputs Data exchange via FC21 The user is prompted to take the current valid ...

Page 415: ...ted to the new measuring system according to the input on switchover Reference point The reference point is retained It is not necessary to repeat referencing Input resolution and computational resolution The input computational resolution is set in the control via machine data MD10200 MN_INT_INCR_PER_MM Default settings Metric system Inch system 1000 0 001 mm 0 0001 Example 1 inch 25 4 mm 0 0001 ...

Page 416: ...ons always refer to mm Data backup Data sets which can be read separately from the control and have access to data relevant to the measuring system receive an INCH or METRIC identifier during the read action depending on machine data MD10260 MN_CONVERT_SCALING_SYSTEM The identifier corresponds to machine data MD10240 MN_SCALING_SYSTEM_IS_METRIC This records the measuring system in which the data w...

Page 417: ... necessary to specify an effective radius reference radius for each of the rotary axes involved You can do this by programming the modal NC address FGREF axis name reference radius The unit of the reference radius depends on the G70 G71 G700 G710 setting In order to include the axes in the calculation of the path feedrate they must all be specified in the FGROUP command In order to ensure compatib...

Page 418: ...e illustrates the effect of FGROUP on the path and the path feedrate N100 R1 0 N110 FGROUP X A N120 G91 G1 G710 F100 Feedrate 100 mm min or 100 deg min N130 DO R1 AC_TIME N140 X10 Feedrate 100 mm min Path 10 mm R1 6 s approx N150 DO R2 AC_TIME N160 X10 A10 Feedrate 100 mm min Path 14 14 mm R2 8 s approx N170 DO R3 AC_TIME N180 A10 Feedrate 100 degrees min Path 10 degrees R3 6 s approx N190 DO R4 A...

Page 419: ...egrees min Path 10 degrees R7 6 s approx N280 DO R8 AC_TIME N290 X0 001 A10 Feedrate 2540 mm min Path 10 mm R8 0 288 s approx N300 FGREF A 360 2 PI Set 1 degree 1 inch via the effective radius N310 DO R9 AC_TIME N320 X0 001 A10 Feedrate 2540 mm min Path 254 mm R9 6 s approx N330 M30 Note The variable AC_TIME contains the time from the start of the block in seconds It can only be used in synchroniz...

Page 420: ...ing structure can be configured for every closed loop controlled axis spindle 75 287B7 3 6 08 7 21 1 B7 3 6 08 7 21 180B 1 6 0 ORVHG ORRS FRQWURO 6SHHG VHWSRLQW RXWSXW 6SHHG VHWSRLQW URXWLQJ FWXDO YDOXH SURFHVVLQJ FWXDO YDOXH URXWLQJ SRVLWLRQ PHDVXULQJ V VWHP FWXDO YDOXH SURFHVVLQJ 0RWRU QFRGHU QFRGHU Figure 2 1 Block diagram of a control loop Setpoint output A setpoint can be output for each axis...

Page 421: ...of encoder monitoring see References FB1 Function Manual Basic Functions Axis Monitoring Protection Zones A3 Switching between measuring systems One can switch between the two measuring systems through the following NC PLC interface signals DB31 DBX1 5 position measuring system 1 DB31 DBX1 6 position measuring system 2 References FB1 Function Manual Basic Functions Various Interface Signals A2 It ...

Page 422: ...YPE n type of actual value acquisition As soon as the standard machine data have been loaded the axes become simulation axes The setpoint and actual value can be set to the reference point value with reference point approach The machine data MD30350 MA_SIMU_AX_VDI_OUTPUT output of axis signals with simulation axes can be used to define whether the axis specific interface signals are to be output o...

Page 423: ...that need to be parameterized for digital and analog drives are not assigned Prerequisite for routing All NC machine axes must be uniquely defined in machine data MD10000 MN_AXCONF_MACHAX_NAME_TAB n machine axis name This name must be unique throughout the system all mode groups and channels References FB1 Function Manual Basic Functions Axes Coordinate Systems Frames K2 Mode Group Channel Program...

Page 424: ...S line for ProfiSafe at PLC end 5 PROFIBUS DP link module NCU 573 2 and higher 6 MD30110 MA_CTRLOUT_MODULE_NR n setpoint assignment Drive number module number The number of the module in the bus segment via which the output is to be addressed is entered here The logical drive number of the axis module can be set via machine data MD13010 MN_DRIVE_LOGIC_NR n for SINUMERIK 810D Range of values 0 15 S...

Page 425: ... segment via which the encoder is addressed is entered here Depending on the SINUMERIK version certain bus segments are preassigned Local bus similar to SINUMERIK FM NC for example 0 611D I O bus 1st DCM e g SINUMERIK 810D 1 Local I O bus 2 611D I O bus 2nd DCM 3 Reserved for virtual buses 4 PROFIBUS DP NCU 573 2 and higher PROFIBUS line for ProfiSafe at PLC end 5 PROFIBUS DP link module NCU 573 2...

Page 426: ...in accordance with input selected X3 X6 MD30240 MA_ENC_TYPE n type of actual value acquisition Enter the encoder type used here MD30242 MA_ENC_IS_INDEPENDENT n To prevent actual value corrections influencing the actual value of an encoder defined in the same axis the latter must be declared independent 0 Encoder is independent 1 Encoder is dependent MD index for actual value routing The coding of ...

Page 427: ...uired on drive module 4 4th slot index 3 The logical drive number of this module is 7 Encoder number 1 2 Therefore actual values are acquired via a direct and indirect measuring system 0 5 9 B 2 B15 0 1 B02 8 B15 1 38 6 02 5 9 2 86 0 1 B 1387B15 0 1 B6 0 17B15 6 02 5 9 2 86 1 38 0 5 9 B 2 B15 0 75 287B15 0 75 287B02 8 B15 0 75 287B6 0 17B15 FWXDO YDOXH DVVLJQPHQW IRU D LV QSXW DOVR XVHG E 6 02 5 9...

Page 428: ...talled you can also configure encoders that are connected to other drives SINUMERIK 810D with axis expansion interface Integrated drive no 4 should be assigned to machine axis X1 Motor measurement channel X414 Pulse interface X304 Measurement channel no 6 should be assigned to machine axis X1 X416 as direct measuring system The logical number of the drive is set automatically to 4 0 5 9 B 2 B15 0 ...

Page 429: ...e the drive in the Diagnostics operating area on the operator panel HMI Human Machine Interface The following machine data are automatically parameterized for each real drive MD13010 MN_DRIVE_LOGIC_NR n logical drive number MD13000 MN_DRIVE_IS_ACTIVE n activate SIMODRIVE 611 digital drive MD13030 MN_DRIVE_MODULE_TYPE n module identifier MD13040 MN_DRIVE_TYPE n drive type identifier MD13020 MN_DRIV...

Page 430: ...owing machine data are used instead of MD13000 to MD13040 MD13050 MN_DRIVE_LOGIC_ADDRESS n drive address MD13060 MN_DRIVE_TELEGRAM_TYPE n Message frame type for drives connected to PROFIBUS DP MD13070 MN_DRIVE_FUNCTION_MASK n DP functions used for drives connected to PROFIBUS DP Allows adaptation of certain nonstandardized PROFIBUS control bits of the SIMODRIVE 611 universal MD13080 MN_DRIVE_TYPE_...

Page 431: ...load gear The motor load gear supported by SINUMERIK is configured via the following machine data MD31060 MA_DRIVE_AX_RATIO_NUMERA Numerator load gearbox MD31050 MA_DRIVE_AX_RATIO_DENOM Denominator load gearbox The transmission ratio is obtained from the numerator denominator ratio of both machine data The associated parameter sets are used automatically as default by the control to synchronize th...

Page 432: ...tchover and activate it On switchover during a movement compensations cannot be ruled out due to jumps in the scaling factors These are not monitored for violation of the maximum acceleration Encoder directly on tool Another connection option is possible for a tool side encoder on the intermediate gear by configuring machine data MD31044 MA_ENC_IS_DIRECT2 Encoder not directly on tool The following...

Page 433: ...l partially cancels the status Axis referenced synchronized If the position reference to the machine tool etc has been lost it must first be restored through appropriate adjustment or referencing of the lost reference point This is especially important for the functions Travel to fixed stop Referencing to Bero Cam and Zero marker Caution The control cannot detect all possible situations that can l...

Page 434: ...ition control Speed setpoint adjustment SINUMERIK 840D 810D In the case of speed setpoint comparison the NC is informed which speed setpoint corresponds to which motor speed in the drive for parameterizing the axial control and monitoring This comparison is carried out automatically SINUMERIK 840D with PROFIBUS DP It is necessary to change machine data MD32250 MA_RATED_OUTVAL n rated output voltag...

Page 435: ...parison Maximum speed setpoint With SINUMERIK 840D 810D the maximum speed setpoint is the largest value which can be output on the SIMODRIVE 611 digital drive due to the maximum speed set in drive machine data MD1401 2401 MD_MOTOR_MAX_SPEED maximum useful motor speed MD1401 corresponds to the maximum motor speed on the spindle drive The desired speed at the spindle is reached via the mechanical ge...

Page 436: ... at 80 to 95 For axes which reach their maximum velocity at around 80 of the speed setpoint range the default setting 80 of machine data MD32000 MA_MAX_AX_VELO maximum axis velocity should be applied With SINUMERIK 840D 810 machine data MD36210 MA_CTRLOUT_LIMIT n maximum speed setpoint and MD1405 2405 MD_MOTOR_SPEED_LIMIT motor monitoring speed must agree Note For more information about setpoint a...

Page 437: ...tly at the machine indirectly at the motor the following machine data must be parameterized to calculate the actual value resolution Machine data Linear axis Linear axis Rotary axis Linear scale or as direct measuring system Encoder on motor Encoder on machine and or tool Encoder on motor Encoder on machine and or tool MD30300 MA_IS_ROT_AX 0 0 0 1 1 MD31000 MA_ENC_IS_LINEAR n MD31010 MA_ENC_GRID_P...

Page 438: ...tor MD31080 MA_DRIVE_ENC_RATIO_NUMERA n Measuring gear numerator MD31000 MA_ENC_IS_LINEAR n Direct measuring system linear scale MD31010 MA_ENC_GRID_POINT_DIST n Distance between reference marks on linear scales MD31020 MA_ENC_RESOL n Encoder pulses per revolution for rotary encoder MD31040 MA_ENC_IS_DIRECT n Encoder is connected directly at the machine MD34320 MA_ENC_INVERS n Length measurement s...

Page 439: ... gear denominator MD31066 MA_DRIVE_AX_RATIO2_NUMERA Intermediate gear numerator MD31044 MA_ENC_IS_DIRECT2 Encoder on intermediate gear MD32000 MA_MAX_AX_VELO Maximum axis velocity MD34080 MA_REFP_MOVE_DIST Reference point distance MD34090 MA_REFP_MOVE_DIST_CORR Reference point offset Note These machine data can be activated in parts programs with the command NEWCONF or via the HMI operator panel u...

Page 440: ...UHVROXWLRQ QFRGHU LQFUHPHQWV PP QWHUQDO LQFUHPHQWV PP For incremental encoders with rotary axis the following applies FWXDO YDOXH UHVROXWLRQ RPSXWDWLRQDO UHVROXWLRQ QFRGHU LQFUHPHQWV GHJUHHV QWHUQDO LQFUHPHQWV GHJUHHV The internal pulse multiplication factor provided by the measuring system logic module is 2048 For raw signal generators on 840D with SIMODRIVE 611 digital 128 For raw signal generat...

Page 441: ...crements Linear axis with rotary encoder on motor n n n 1 B 6B 1 5B 1 B 6B 1 5B 6B527B 1 B5 62 6 5 B3 7 5 9 B 1 B5 7 2B180 5 5 9 B 1 B5 7 2B 120 5 9 B B5 7 2B180 5 5 9 B B5 7 2B 120 0 0RWRU 6SLQGOH 1XPEHU RI PRWRU UHYROXWLRQV 1XPEHU RI HQFRGHU UHYROXWLRQV 1R RI PRWRU UHYV 1R RI VSLQGOH UHYV RDG JHDU 0HDV JHDU QFRGHU DOO VFUHZ 7DEOH Figure 2 7 Linear axis with rotary encoder on motor In order to ad...

Page 442: ...300 MA_IS_ROT_AX 0 MD31000 MA_ENC_IS_LINEAR 0 0 MD31040 MA_ENC_IS_DIRECT 0 0 MD31020 MA_ENC_RESOL 0 2048 MD31030 MA_LEADSCREW_PITCH 10 MD31080 MA_DRIVE_ENC_RATIO_NUMERA 0 1 MD31070 MA_DRIVE_ENC_RATIO_DENOM 0 1 MD31060 MA_DRIVE_AX_RATIO_NUMERA 0 5 MD31050 MA_DRIVE_AX_RATIO_DENOM 0 1 MD10200 MN_INT_INCR_PER_MM 10000 PP LQFU PP QWHUQDO LQFUHPHQWV PP QFRGHU LQFUHPHQWV PP Result 1 encoder increment cor...

Page 443: ...5 7 1 B5 62 1 B 6B 1 5 0 1R RI VSLQGOH UHYV 1R RI HQFRGHU UHYV RDG JHDU 6SLQGOH 0HDV JHDU DOO VFUHZ 7DEOH QFRGHU Figure 2 8 Linear axis with rotary encoder on the machine In order to adapt the actual value resolution to the calculation resolution the control calculates the quotients from the internal increments mm and the encoder increments mm as follows 5 9 B 1 B5 7 2B180 5 Q 17B 1 5B3 5B00 6 5 B...

Page 444: ...LRQV 1XPEHU RI PRWRU UHYROXWLRQV 0RWRU Figure 2 9 Rotary axis with rotary encoder on motor In order to adapt the actual value resolution to the calculation resolution the control calculates the quotients from the internal increments degree and the encoder increments degree as follows Example for rotary axis with encoder on motor Rotary axis with rotary encoder 2048 Impulse on motor internal multip...

Page 445: ...V QWHUQDO LQFUHPHQWV GHJUHHV QFRGHU LQFUHPHQWV GHJUHHV Result 1 encoder increment corresponds to 0 017166 increments of the internal unit The encoder resolution is thus coarser than the computational resolution by a factor of 58 Rotary axis with rotary encoder on the machine 6B527B Q Q 1 B 6B 1 5B 1 B5 62 5 9 B 1 B5 7 2B180 5 9 B 1 B5 7 2B 120 5 1 B 6B 5 7 0 1R RI ORDG UHYV 1R RI HQFRGHU UHYV 5HVR...

Page 446: ...B 5 7 1 B 6B 5 7 1 B 6B 5 7 1 B 6B 5 7 5 9 B B5 7 2 B180 5 5 9 B B5 7 2 B 120 0 1XPEHU RI PRWRU UHYROXWLRQV 1XPEHU RI HQFRGHU UHYROXWLRQV 1R RI PRWRU UHYV 1R RI VSLQGOH UHYV QFRGHU 0HDV JHDU 0RWRU RDG JHDU QWHUPHGLDWH JHDU 7RRO 1R RI ORDG UHYV 1R RI VSLQGOH UHYV 5RWDWLQJ WRRO 7RRO Figure 2 11 Intermediate gear with encoder directly on the rotating tool In order to adapt the actual value resolution...

Page 447: ... spindle position control is illustrated below 0 B 5 B 1 0 B 5 B02 0 B 5 B7 0 0 326 75 B 1 Q 0 32B7 3 0 1B0 7 B 1 0 1B0 7 B7 0 Q 0 5 7B 203B 1 0 B027 21B 5 0 1 B B32 Q 0 1 B 203B 1 Q 0 6 Q 0 6 B 725 Q 0 B02 0 B 7 9 7 21B02 0 9 2B B 7 Q 0 B 1 57 0 48 9B63 75 B7 0 Q 0 48 9B 855 75 B7 0 Q LQH LQWHUSRODWLRQ HUN OLPLWDWLRQ QDPLF UHVSRQVH DGDSWDWLRQ HHG IRUZDUG FRQWURO ORVHG ORRS FRQWURO 6SHHG VHWSRLQW ...

Page 448: ...terpolation type A differential FIPO not only performs cycle matching but also calculates a mean value smoothing from an IPO cycle The cubic FIPO type 3 supplies the best contour accuracy in addition to the cycle adaptation Kv factor To ensure that only low contour deviations occur in continuous path mode a high servo gain factor Kv MD32200 MA_POSCTRL_GAIN n is required However if the servo gain f...

Page 449: ...ntrol quality A high servo gain factor Kv for an axis can be maintained which guarantees optimum disturbance suppression of the axis The function is activated via machine data MD32900 MA_DYN_MATCH_ENABLE dynamic response adaptation Axes are adapted via machine data MD32910 MA_DYN_MATCH_TIME n dynamic response adaptation time constant With this MD the equivalent time constant of the position contro...

Page 450: ... constant of the position control loop of an axis is calculated according to the following formula No feedforward control is active 0 326 75 B 1 V ป 76SDUHV Speed feedforward control 0 48 9B63 75 B7 0 ป 76SDUHV Torque feedforward control 0 48 9B 855 75 B7 0 ป 76SDUHV Note If a geometry axis is subject to dynamic response adaptation the same dynamic behavior is also required of all other geometry a...

Page 451: ...A_STOP_LIMIT_FACTOR n MD36000 MA_STOP_LIMIT_COARSE MD36010 MA_STOP_LIMIT_FINE Exact stop limits and zero speed window MD36030 MA_STANSTILL_POS_TOL Equivalent time constant current control loop for torque feedforward control MD32800 MA_EQUIV_CURRCTRL_TIME n Equivalent time constant speed control loop for speed feedforward control MD32810 MA_EQUIV_SPEEDCTRL_TIME n Time constant for dynamic response ...

Page 452: ...stage is assigned its own parameter set The appropriate parameter set is activated depending on the NC PLC interface signal DB31 DBX16 0 16 2 actual gear stage DB31 DBX16 0 16 2 actual gear stage Active parameter set 000 1 Gearbox stage 2 Index 1 001 1 Gearbox stage 2 Index 1 010 2 gear stage 3 Index 2 011 3 gear stage 4 Index 3 100 4 gear stage 5 Index 4 101 110 111 5 gear stage 6 Index 5 For mor...

Page 453: ... such as backlash compensation feedforward control factor exact stop limits and zero speed window New parameter sets Until now it has been possible to change the gear ratio and other control loop parameters such as achievable control servo gain by switching over the servo parameter set The already existing machine data with parameter set coding are extended as follows Parameter set coding modifiab...

Page 454: ...rrent control loop MD32800 MA_EQUIV_CURRCTRL_TIME Equivalent time constant speed control loop MD32810 MA_EQUIV_SPEEDCTRL_TIME Time constant for dynamic response adaptation MD32910 MA_DYN_MATCH_TIME Threshold value for velocity monitoring MD36200 MA_AX_VELO_LIMIT Advantages The indirect switchover of a single function e g MD32452 not 1 The parameter set dependent function is only relevant if requir...

Page 455: ...ing on the parameter set If the default setting in machine data MD32610 MA_VELO_FFW_WEIGHT is changed to something other than 1 0 the feedforward control factor is also changed depending on the parameter set If the default setting in machine data MD36012 MA_STOP_LIMIT_FACTOR is changed to something other than 1 0 the exact limit stops and the zero speed window are also changed depending on the par...

Page 456: ... MD32452 MA_BACKLASH_FACTOR 4 AX1 5 0 Parameter set 5 MD32452 MA_BACKLASH_FACTOR 5 AX1 6 0 Parameter set 6 In parameter set 1 index 0 of the first axis AX1 a backlash compensation factor with the value 1 0 has the following effect 1 0 MD32450 0 01 mm or inch or degrees The backlash compensation is twice as large in parameter set 2 three times as large in parameter set 3 etc The maximum value is 10...

Page 457: ...nt setpoint for the feedforward control according to the weighting of machine data MD32950 MA_POSCTRL_DAMPING The function is used predominantly for axes with strong tendency to vibrate Functionality The positional deviation is injected in the NC in the position controller cycle of the higher level position control loop in the NC The difference in position between a direct and an indirect measurin...

Page 458: ...chine data MD32950 MA_POSCTRL_DAMPING can be set on the basis of step responses for example If the control approaches the stability limit vibration inclination increases then the parameter is too large Supplementary condition 1 The functional expansion is available for all control variants which use SIMODRIVE 611 digital drives 2 The function can only be used on axes with two encoders MD30200 MA_N...

Page 459: ...etting the positioning slightly overshooting and reducing the amplitude of these overshoots by way of position setpoint signal smoothing and jerk limitation Setting a speed controller with reference model instead of PI behavior only possible with 840D Setting the filter time to zero and setting the feedforward control factor to a value less than 100 Sacrificing the feedforward control and bringing...

Page 460: ...sponse of archives that contain only changes compared with the default settings no default value can be set for these new values 3 and 4 in the new software versions Activation of feedforward control Parts programs can be used to activate and deactivate the feedforward control for all axes using instructions FFWON and FFWOF which does not affect machine data MD32630 FFW_ACTIVATION_MODE Control res...

Page 461: ...ting was MD32620 MA_FFW_MODE 2 1 Set MD32620 MA_FFW_MODE 4 2 Set MD32610 MA_VELO_FFW_WEIGHT 1 3 Reset MD32800 MA_EQUIV_CURRCTRL_TIME This also applies when you load an older archive into the control system e g from a previous version For example when changing MD32620 MA_FFW_MODE from 1 to 3 MD32810 MA_EQUIV_SPEEDCTRL_TIME may not simply retain its old value but must be reset Otherwise no improveme...

Page 462: ...data 1500 1503 Another option would be to trace the speed setpoint and actual value at a constant acceleration using an oscilloscope and to measure the follow on time of the speed actual value This initial value e g 1 5 ms is then entered MD32810 MA_EQUIV_SPEEDCTRL_TIME 0 0015 The axis then travels to and fro and the operator monitors a greatly magnified characteristic of the position actual value...

Page 463: ...CH_TIME and for jerk MD32410 MA_AX_JERK_TIME which also reduces the axis speed Identical axis data within an interpolation group All the axes within an interpolation group must have identical settings in the following data MD32200 MA_POSCTRL_GAIN MD32620 MA_FFW_MODE MD32610 MA_VELO_FFW_WEIGHT MD32810 MA_EQUIV_SPEEDCTRL_TIME or MD32800 MA_EQUIV_CURRCTRL_TIME MD32400 MA_AX_JERK_ENABLE MD32402 MA_AX_...

Page 464: ...trol Programming sample of a selection of the speed feedforward control with new balancing and default setting FFWON and FFWOF are active MD32620 FFW_MODE X1 3 New mode for speed feedforward control MD32630 FFW_ACTIVATION_MODE X1 1 FFWON and FFWOF are active in NC program FFWON now enables the speed feedforward control in the program with all axes of the channel with the same settings as X1 FFWOF ...

Page 465: ...o strongly that the existing vibrations neutralize the gain in contour accuracy In this case it would be worth trialing the use of dynamic stiffness control as an alternative MD32640 MA_STIFFNESS_CONTROL_ENABLE Example of torque feedforward control Programming sample of a selection of the torque feedforward control with new balancing and default setting FFWON and FFWOF are active MD32620 MA_FFW_MO...

Page 466: ... 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 For more information about the effect of the feedforward control relating to the speed and torque position controller setpoints please refer to References FB2 Function Manual Extended Functions Compensations K3 Chapter Description of machine data Note The setting of the feedforward control must be the same for all axes of an interpolation group ...

Page 467: ... filter can be monitored by means of the effective servo gain factor KV which is displayed on the Axis service screen form The filtering effect rounds the position setpoints slightly thus reducing the path accuracy so that with increasing filter time a smaller effective servo gain factor KV is displayed Advantages The filter available since software version 1 which is set via MD32400 MA_AX_JERK_EN...

Page 468: ...e sufficient For reasons of compatibility the default setting is MD32402 MA_AX_JERK_MODE 1 Note For new machines the new filter is generally recommended MD32402 MA_AX_JERK_MODE 2 Only if very high filter times are needed and contour accuracy plays a minor part e g as sometimes occurs when positioning axes can the old filter be more advantageous Fine adjustment The fine adjustment of the position s...

Page 469: ...vice screen form displays smaller values than would be appropriate based on the filter effect Path accuracy is better than the displayed servo gain KV suggests Therefore on resetting MD32400 MA_AX_JERK_MODE 1 to MD32400 MA_AX_JERK_MODE 2 the displayed servo gain KV can be reduced while retaining the same filter time although the path accuracy improves Axes that interpolate with each other must be ...

Page 470: ...r between setpoint and actual positions down to zero in a finite settable time period when the appropriate machine data are set accordingly Caution When the proportional plus integral action controller is active overshoots occur in the actual position In this instance you must decide whether this effect is admissible or acceptable for the application in question Expert knowledge of control enginee...

Page 471: ...data MD32220 MA_POSCTRL_INTEGR_ENABLE set value 1 MD32210 MA_POSCTRL_INTEGR_TIME integral time sec Effect of integral time Tn 0 The control error is corrected quickly however the control loop can become instable Tn The control error is corrected more slowly 4 Find the appropriate compromise for Tn for your application using these two extreme cases as outer limits Tn must not be set too close to th...

Page 472: ...position setpoint has been recorded by servo trace When traversing in JOG mode the characteristic of the individual data shown in the following figure was then drawn Set machine data MD32220 MA_POSCTRL_INTEGR_ENABLE 1 MD32210 MA_POSCTRL_INTEGR_TIME 0 003 MD32200 MA_POSCTRL_GAIN 1 5 0 Parameter set selection 0 UDSKLF 7U LV 7U LV UDSKLF 7U LV 7U LV 7U ROORZLQJ HUURU 7U FWXDO SRVLWLRQ PHDVXULQJ V VW ...

Page 473: ... the transport of the pulse enable signal via servo and interpolator requires 2 to 3 interpolator cycle clocks In the worst case the PLC needs another two PLC cycles With hanging axes and linear motors this is often slow System variable for enabling the drive power Since the function must be available for all kinds of drives in the same form also for non electrical drives the variable is given the...

Page 474: ...tary conditions The functional expansion is available for digital drives in all control variants providing synchronized actions Control response with POWER ON RESET REPOS etc After POWER ON the value 0 is supplied while communication with the drive is not yet established Then the system variable VA_DPE always specifies the pulse enable value acquired at the beginning of the interpolation cycle The...

Page 475: ...to operate drives that might cause problems using the position control Advantages Compared with the existing method deceleration axes the expansion of the position controller algorithm provides the following advantages The structure of the interpolation and control is extended only slightly Thus this axis automatically has all the properties of a normal axis Traversing on the path also becomes pos...

Page 476: ...nly activated if dynamic stiffness control is inactive MD32640 MA_STIFFNESS_CONTROL_ENABLE 0 If the low pass filter is active the modeled following error is larger than usual during acceleration phases It can therefore be necessary to increase machine data MD36400 MA_CONTOUR_TOL above the standard value in order to prevent activation of axial contour monitoring alarm 25050 If the adjustable dead z...

Page 477: ...Basic logic functions Velocities Setpoint Actual Value Systems Closed Loop Control G2 Function Manual 11 2006 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 89 Supplementary conditions 3 No supplementary conditions apply ...

Page 478: ...Supplementary conditions Basic logic functions Velocities Setpoint Actual Value Systems Closed Loop Control G2 90 Function Manual 11 2006 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 ...

Page 479: ...Basic logic functions Velocities Setpoint Actual Value Systems Closed Loop Control G2 Function Manual 11 2006 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 91 Examples 4 No examples are available ...

Page 480: ...Examples Basic logic functions Velocities Setpoint Actual Value Systems Closed Loop Control G2 92 Function Manual 11 2006 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 ...

Page 481: ...L_SYSCLOCK_TIME_RATIO Factor for position control cycle 10080 SYSCLOCK_SAMPL_TIME_RATIO Division factor of position control cycle for actual value acquisition 10200 INT_INCR_PER_MM Computational resolution for linear positions 10210 INT_INCR_PER_DEG Computational resolution for angular positions 10220 SCALING_USER_DEF_MASK Activation of scaling factors 10230 SCALING_FACTORS_USER_DEF n Scaling fact...

Page 482: ...ve type 30110 CTRLOUT_MODULE_NR n Setpoint assignment Drive number module number 30120 CTRLOUT_NR n Setpoint assignment Setpoint output on drive module module 30130 CTRLOUT_TYPE n Output type of setpoint 30134 IS_UNIPOLAR_OUTPUT n Setpoint output is unipolar 30200 NUM_ENCS Number of encoders 30210 ENC_SEGMENT_NR n Actual value assignment Drive type 30220 ENC_MODULE_NR n Actual value assignment Dri...

Page 483: ...ED_VELO n Rated motor speed 32450 BACKLASH n Backlash 32500 FRICT_COMP_ENABLE Friction compensation active 32610 VELO_FFW_WEIGHT Feedforward control factor for speed feedforward control 32620 FFW_MODE Feedforward control mode 32630 FFW_ACTIVATION_MODE Activate feedforward control from program 32650 AX_INERTIA Moment of inertia for torque feedforward control 32711 CEC_SCALING_SYSTEM_METRIC System o...

Page 484: ... 2006 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 Number Identifier MA_ Description 36400 AX_JERK_ENABLE Axial jerk limitation 36410 AX_JERK_TIME Time constant for axial jerk filter 36500 ENC_CHANGE_TOL Max tolerance for position actual value switchover 36510 ENC_DIFF_TOL Measuring system synchronism tolerance 36700 ENC_COMP_ENABLE n Interpolatory compensation ...

Page 485: ...107 7 24 DB31 DBX1 5 30 DBX1 6 30 Display resolution 13 Drive configuration 37 Dynamic response adaptation 55 E Encoder coding 44 Encoder directly on tool 39 F Fine Interpolation 53 FIPO 53 Following error compensation feedforward control Speed feedforward control 62 Function overview of inch metric switchover 26 Data backup 25 Rounding machine data 26 Synchronized actions 21 I Inch measuring syst...

Page 486: ... 50 61 MD31044 39 43 45 MD31050 38 44 45 48 51 57 59 MD31060 38 44 45 48 51 57 59 MD31064 39 45 MD31066 39 45 MD31070 44 45 48 50 MD31080 44 45 48 50 MD31090 25 MD31200 19 MD32000 7 42 45 MD32100 41 MD32200 54 57 65 66 73 MD32210 72 73 MD32220 72 73 MD32250 41 MD32400 66 70 MD32402 66 69 70 MD32410 66 70 MD32450 59 60 MD32452 57 59 60 MD32610 57 59 60 64 65 66 MD32620 63 64 65 66 67 68 MD32630 64 ...

Page 487: ...tiplication factor 46 R Resolutions 12 Rotary axis with rotary encoder on motor 50 With rotary encoder on the machine 51 S Scaling 12 Scaling of machine and setting data 14 Servo gain factor 54 55 Setpoint output 29 Setpoint system 28 Setpoint actual value system Configuration of drives for SINUMERIK 840Di 37 Simulation axes 30 Speed control loop 52 Speed setpoint adjustment 41 Speed setpoint outp...

Page 488: ...Index Basic logic functions Velocities Setpoint Actual Value Systems Closed Loop Control G2 100 Function Manual 11 2006 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 ...

Page 489: ...e for 840D sl 840DE sl 1 3 NCU system software for 840D sl DiE sl 1 0 NCU system software for 840D 840DE 7 4 NCU system software for 840Di 840DiE 3 3 NCU system software for 810D 810DE 7 4 Brief description 1 Detailed description 2 Supplementary conditions 3 Examples 4 Data lists 5 SINUMERIK SINUMERIK 840D sl 840Di sl 840D 840Di 810D Basic logic functions Auxiliary Function Output to PLC H2 Functi...

Page 490: ...ommissioning and operation of a device system may only be performed by qualified personnel Within the context of the safety notes in this documentation qualified persons are defined as persons who are authorized to commission ground and label devices systems and circuits in accordance with established safety practices and standards Prescribed Usage Note the following Warning This device may only b...

Page 491: ...unctions 29 2 2 5 Parameterization 30 2 2 5 1 Parameter Group assignment 30 2 2 5 2 Parameter Type address extension and value 30 2 2 5 3 Parameter Output behavior 31 2 2 5 4 Examples 32 2 3 Type specific output behavior 34 2 4 Programmable output duration 36 2 5 Priorities of the output behavior 38 2 6 Auxiliary function output to the PLC 39 2 7 Programming 40 2 8 Auxiliary functions without bloc...

Page 492: ...Output behavior 56 4 Examples 59 4 1 Defining auxiliary functions 59 5 Data lists 63 5 1 Machine data 63 5 1 1 NC specific machine data 63 5 1 2 Channelspecific machine data 63 5 2 Signals 64 5 2 1 Signals to channel 64 5 2 2 Signals from channel 64 5 2 3 Signals to axis spindle 66 5 2 4 Signals from axis spindle 67 Index 69 ...

Page 493: ...n on using auxiliary function output in synchronized actions is to be found in References FBSY Function Manual Synchronous Actions Predefined auxiliary functions Predefined auxiliary functions activate system functions The auxiliary function is also output to the NC PLC interface The following auxiliary functions are predefined Type Function Example Meaning M Miscellaneous i e special function M30...

Page 494: ...ined for the master spindle of a channel If a 2nd spindle is assigned to a channel a corresponding user defined auxiliary function must be defined that extends the predefined auxiliary function Type Function Example Meaning M Miscellaneous i e special function M2 3 2 spindle Spindle right S Spindle function S2 100 2 spindle Spindle speed 100 e g rpm T Tool number T2 3 User specific auxiliary funct...

Page 495: ...ely for each auxiliary function group This becomes active if no auxiliary function specific output behavior has been defined Group membership also affects output of an auxiliary function after block search For more detailed information on auxiliary function output to the NC PLC interface see References FB1 Function Manual Basic Functions Basic PLC Program P3 1 2 Overview of auxiliary functions M f...

Page 496: ...can be used to set whether an output of the M function should be undertaken for the end of the part program M17 M2 and M30 to the PLC MD20800 MC_SPF_END_TO_VDI subprogram end to PLC For the predefined M function M40 M45 only limited redefinition of the output specification is possible The predefined auxiliary functions M0 M1 M17 M30 M6 M4 M5 cannot be redefined M function specific machine data MD1...

Page 497: ...xiliary function group 3 by default Without an address extension the S functions refer to the master spindle of the channel S function specific machine data MD22210 MC_AUXFU_S_SYNC_TYPE Output time of the S functions H functions H aux function Address extension Value Value range Meaning Value range Type Meaning Number8 2147483648 2147483647 INT 0 99 Any 0 3 4028exp38 2 3 4 REAL Any 3 Remarks The f...

Page 498: ...c tool names for active tool management INT Selection of the tool 1 Remarks Tool names are not output to the PLC 1 Application Tool selection Remarks Identification of the tools optionally via tool number or location number References FBW Function Description Tool Management FB1 Function Manual Basic Functions Tool Offset W1 When T0 is selected the current tool is removed from the tool holder but ...

Page 499: ...et D0 D function specific machine data MD22250 MC_AUXFU_D_SYNC_TYPE Output time of the D functions DL functions DL additive tool offset Address extension Value Value range Meaning Value range Type Meaning Number8 0 6 INT Selection of the additive tool offset 1 Remarks The additive tool offset selected with DL refers to the active D number Application Selection of the additive tool offset with refe...

Page 500: ... 001 999 999 999 REAL Path feed 6 Remarks Application Path velocity Remarks F function specific machine data MD22240 MC_AUXFU_F_SYNC_TYPE output time of F functions FA functions FA axial feedrate Address extension Value Value range Meaning Value range Type Meaning Number8 1 31 Axis number 0 001 999 999 999 REAL Axial feedrate 6 Remarks Application Axial velocity Remarks F function specific machine...

Page 501: ...ary functions is an integer The PLC user program must interpret the value transferred according to the machine data setting 5 If the tool management is active the meaning of the address extension can be parameterized Address extension 0 means the value must be replaced by that of the master spindle number i e it is equivalent to not programming the address extension Auxiliary functions M19 Positio...

Page 502: ...Brief description 1 2 Overview of auxiliary functions Basic logic functions Auxiliary Function Output to PLC H2 14 Function Manual 11 2006 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 ...

Page 503: ...m function is activated and the auxiliary functions are output to the NC PLC interface Definition of a predefined auxiliary function The parameters of a predefined auxiliary function are stored in machine data and can be changed in some cases All parameters of an auxiliary function have the same index MD22040 MC_AUXFU_PREDEF_GROUP Index Pre defined auxiliary function groups MD22050 MC_AUXFU_PREDEF...

Page 504: ... 1 0 0 0 0 1 Spindle stop 8 M 1 5 2 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 Position spindle 9 M 1 19 2 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 Axis mode 10 M 1 70 2 2 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 Automatic gear stage 11 M 1 40 4 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 Gear stage 1 12 M 1 41 4 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 Gear stage 2 13 M 1 42 4 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 Gear stage 3 14 M 1 43 4 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 Gear stage 4 15 M 1 44 4 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 Gear stage 5 16 M 1 45 4 0 0 0 1 0 ...

Page 505: ...de The value 70 is always output to the PLC 3 The value is set via the machine data MD22254 MC_AUXFU_ASSOC_M0_VALUE additional M function for program stop 4 The value is set via the machine data MD22256 MC_AUXFU_ASSOC_M1_VALUE additional M function for conditional stop 5 The value is set via the machine data MD10714 MN_M_NO_FCT_EOP M function for spindle active after reset 6 The value is set via t...

Page 506: ...22050 MC_AUXFU_PREDEF_TYPE Index Pre defined auxiliary function type Address extension MD22060 MC_AUXFU_PREDEF_EXTENSION Index Pre defined auxiliary function extension Value MD22070 MC_AUXFU_PREDEF_VALUE Index Pre defined auxiliary function value Syntax type address extension value Parameter Type The identifier of an auxiliary function is defined via the type e g Type Identifier M Additional funct...

Page 507: ...dle of the channel N40 M2 3 Spindle right for the 2nd spindle of the channel Grouping together auxiliary functions To assign an auxiliary function for all spindles of a channel to the same auxiliary function group the value 1 is entered for the address extension parameter Example For all the spindles of the channel the auxiliary function M3 machine data index 6 corresponding to the table in the Se...

Page 508: ...it0 Output duration one OB1 cycle normal acknowledgment An auxiliary function with normal acknowledgment is output to the NC PLC interface at the beginning of the OB1 cycle The auxiliary function specific change signals indicate to the PLC user program that the auxiliary function is valid The auxiliary function is acknowledged as soon as organization block OB1 has run once This corresponds to a co...

Page 509: ...unctions with quick acknowledgment it cannot be guaranteed that the PLC user program will respond in synchronism with the block Note Parameterization of the output behavior of auxiliary functions as quick auxiliary functions is only possible in conjunction with user defined auxiliary functions Bit2 No predefined auxiliary function A predefined auxiliary function is treated like a user defined auxi...

Page 510: ...on and output relative to movement Output prior to motion The traverse movements path and or block related positioning axis movements of the previous part program block end with an exact stop The auxiliary functions are output at the beginning of the current part program block Traverse movements of the current part program block path and or positioning axis movements are started after acknowledgme...

Page 511: ...ormed after acknowledgment of the auxiliary functions by the PLC Output duration one OB1 cycle normal acknowledgment after one OB1 cycle Output duration one OB40 cycle quick acknowledgment after one OB40 cycle 2 1 5 Examples of output behavior Inputs The following figures illustrate the differing behavior regarding Output and acknowledgment of the auxiliary function Spindle response speed change T...

Page 512: ...397 0BP10 2BA0 0 W Y 0 W Y 0 W Y 0 W Y LV PRWLRQ 4XLW GLWLRQ ORFN FKDQJH 6SLQGOH UHVSRQVH LV PRWLRQ 4XLW GLWLRQ ORFN FKDQJH 6SLQGOH UHVSRQVH LV PRWLRQ 4XLW GLWLRQ ORFN FKDQJH 6SLQGOH UHVSRQVH LV PRWLRQ 4XLW GLWLRQ ORFN FKDQJH 6SLQGOH UHVSRQVH 0 6 B2XWSXW RSWLRQ 0 6 B2XWSXW RSWLRQ 0 6 B2XWSXW RSWLRQ 0 6 B2XWSXW RSWLRQ Figure 2 1 Output behavior 1 ...

Page 513: ...HVSRQVH LV PRWLRQ ORFN FKDQJH 4XLW GLWLRQ 6SLQGOH UHVSRQVH LV PRWLRQ 4XLW GLWLRQ ORFN FKDQJH 6SLQGOH UHVSRQVH LV PRWLRQ ORFN FKDQJH 4XLW GLWLRQ HIDXOW VHWWLQJ HIDXOW VHWWLQJ LV PRWLRQ ORFN FKDQJH 4XLW GLWLRQ 6SLQGOH UHVSRQVH HIDXOW VHWWLQJ 6SLQGOH UHVSRQVH 0 B2XWSXW RSWLRQ 0 B2XWSXW RSWLRQ 0 6 B2XWSXW RSWLRQ 0 B2XWSXW RSWLRQ 0 6 B2XWSXW RSWLRQ 0 W Y 0 W Y 0 W Y 0 Y 0 W Y W Figure 2 2 Output behavi...

Page 514: ...nual 11 2006 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 LV PRWLRQ ORFN FKDQJH GLWLRQ 6SLQGOH UHVSRQVH HIDXOW VHWWLQJ 0 6 B2XWSXW RSWLRQ LV PRWLRQ ORFN FKDQJH GLWLRQ 6SLQGOH UHVSRQVH HIDXOW VHWWLQJ 0 B2XWSXW RSWLRQ LV PRWLRQ GLWLRQ ORFN FKDQJH HIDXOW VHWWLQJ 0 B2XWSXW RSWLRQ 6SLQGOH UHVSRQVH 4XLW 0 4XLW 0 W W W 4XLW 6 Y Y Y Figure 2 3 Output behavior 3 ...

Page 515: ...ry functions Extension of predefined auxiliary functions refers to the parameter Address extension The address extension defines the number of the spindle to which the auxiliary function applies User specific auxiliary functions User specific auxiliary functions relate exclusively to user functions User specific auxiliary functions do not activate system functions 2 2 2 Maximum number of user defi...

Page 516: ...predefined auxiliary functions refers to the address extensions parameter The number of the spindle that the auxiliary function refers to is entered in the address extension parameter The relevant predefined auxiliary functions can be extended for the following system functions Type Address extension 1 System function Value Tool change M 1 6 Spindle right M 1 3 Spindle left M 1 4 Spindle stop M 1 ...

Page 517: ...ALUE n 3 Auxiliary function spindle right for the third spindle of the channel MD22010 MC_AUXFU_ ASSIGN_TYPE m M MD22020 MC_AUXFU_ASSIGN_EXTENSION m 3 MD22030 MC_AUXFU_ ASSIGN_VALUE m 3 2 2 4 User specific auxiliary functions Function User specific auxiliary functions have the following characteristics User specific auxiliary functions only activate user functions No system functions can be activa...

Page 518: ...ction groups see section Auxiliary function groups 2 2 5 2 Parameter Type address extension and value Function A user defined auxiliary function is programmed via the parameters Type MD22010 MC_AUXFU_ASSIGN_TYPE Index type of auxiliary function Address extension MD22020 MC_AUXFU_ASSIGN_EXTENSION Index auxiliary function extension Value MD22030 MC_AUXFU_ASSIGN_VALUE Index auxiliary function value S...

Page 519: ...value parameter is not defined in user specific auxiliary functions The value is generally used to activate the corresponding PLC user function Grouping together auxiliary functions If all the auxiliary functions of the same type and address extension are assigned to the same auxiliary function group a value of 1 must be entered for the value parameter Example All user specific auxiliary functions...

Page 520: ...acknowledgment Output prior to motion Machine data Machine data index Value MD22000 MC_AUXFU_ASSIGN_GROUP 0 5 MD22010 MC_AUXFU_ASSIGN_TYPE 0 M MD22020 MC_AUXFU_ASSIGN_EXTENSION 0 2 MD22030 MC_AUXFU_ASSIGN_VALUE 0 3 MD22035 MC_AUXFU_ASSIGN_SPEC 0 H21 Parameterization M4 Machine data index 1 2 user defined auxiliary function auxiliary function group 5 Type and value M4 spindle left Address extension...

Page 521: ...on group 5 Type and value M5 spindle stop Address extension 2 as appropriate for the 2nd spindle of the channel Output behavior Output duration one OB1 cycle normal acknowledgment Spindle response following acknowledgment Output at block end Machine data Machine data index Value MD22000 MC_AUXFU_ASSIGN_GROUP 2 5 MD22010 MC_AUXFU_ASSIGN_TYPE 2 M MD22020 MC_AUXFU_ASSIGN_EXTENSION 2 2 MD22030 MC_AUXF...

Page 522: ...put time H functions MD22240 MC_AUXFU_F_SYNC_TYPE output time F functions MD22250 MC_AUXFU_D_SYNC_TYPE output time D functions MD22252 MC_AUXFU_DL_SYNC_TYPE output time DL functions Output behavior The following output behaviors can be parameterized MD MC_AUXFU_xx_SYNC_TYPE value Value Meaning 0 Output prior to motion 1 Output during motion 2 Output at block end 3 No output to the PLC 4 Output acc...

Page 523: ...Parameterized output behavior T function Output before the motion MD22220 MC_AUXFU_T_SYNC_TYPE 0 Output time of the T functions M function Output during the motion MD22220 MC_AUXFU_M_SYNC_TYPE 1 Output time of the M functions H function Output at the end of the block MD22230 MC_AUXFU_H_SYNC_TYPE 2 Output time of the H functions Parts program block N10 G01 X100 M07 H5 T5 Time sequence for auxiliary...

Page 524: ...s program The output behavior of the auxiliary functions is parameterized as follows M100 Output duration one OB1 cycle slow acknowledgment Output during motion M200 Output duration one OB1 cycle slow acknowledgment Output prior to motion Programming Comment N10 G94 G01 X50 M100 Output of M100 during the motion Acknowledgement slow N20 Y5 M100 M200 Output of M200 prior to the motion Output of M100...

Page 525: ...unctions Auxiliary Function Output to PLC H2 Function Manual 11 2006 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 37 ORFN QXPEHU D LV D LV 6WUREH IURP 1 DQG DFNQRZOHGJPHQW E EDVLF 3 SURJUDP 3 F FOH WLPH 2 0 FKDQJH 6 0 FKDQJH 6 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 2 0 0 Figure 2 5 Example of auxiliary function output ...

Page 526: ...uxiliary functions Part program instruction QU Specific to auxiliary functions MD22035 MC_AUXFU_ASSIGN_SYNC MD22080 MC_AUXFU_PREDEF_SYNC Group specific MD11110 MC_AUXFU_GROUP_SPEC Lowest Not defined Default output behavior Output duration one OB1 cycle Area Output relative to motion The following rules apply to output relative to motion Priority Output behavior Defined via Highest Specific to auxi...

Page 527: ...values of the auxiliary functions are within the following data range in the NC PLC interface Change signals for auxiliary function transfer from NC channel DB21 DBB58 DBB67 Transferred M and S functions DB21 DBB68 DBB112 Transferred T D and DL functions DB21 DBB116 DBB136 Transferred H and F functions DB21 DBB140 DBB190 Decoded M signals M0 M99 DB21 DBB194 DBB206 dynamic M functions References A ...

Page 528: ...e address extension and value parameters can also be specified symbolically The symbolic name for the address extension must then be stated in brackets Example Symbolic programming of the auxiliary function M3 spindle right for the first spindle Programming syntax Meaning DEF SPINDEL_NR 1 1 spindle in the channel DEF DREHRICHTUNG 3 Clockwise rotation N100 M SPINDEL_NR DREHRICHTUNG in accordance wi...

Page 529: ...ion one OB40 cycle quick acknowledgment Output prior to motion or Output during motion there may be drops in velocity in continuos path mode short traverse paths and high velocities This the system has to wait for acknowledgment of the auxiliary function by the PLC toward the end of the block To avoid these velocity drops the block change can be made irrespective of whether such auxiliary function...

Page 530: ...ary functions mentioned is parameterization of a user defined auxiliary function Only M is allowed as a type parameter of the user defined auxiliary function Parameterization Association of a user defined auxiliary function with one of the predefined auxiliary functions mentioned is set in the following machine data MD22254 MC_AUXFU_ASSOC_M0_VALUE additional M function for program stop MD22256 MC_...

Page 531: ...nge in the following machine data may require corresponding adjustment of the PLC user program MD22254 MC_AUXFU_ASSOC_M0_VALUE additional M function for program stop MD22256 MC_AUXFU_ASSOC_M1_VALUE additional M function for conditional stop Specific NC PLC interface signals The following specific NC PLC interface signals are available DB21 DBX318 5 associated M00 M01 active feedback signal DB21 DB...

Page 532: ...erized for each M function via the following machine data MD10713 MN_M_NO_FCT_STOPRE M function with feed stop Preprocessing stop with M function M88 The user defined M function M88 is intended to trigger a preprocessing stop Parameterization MD10713 MN_M_NO_FCT_STOPRE 0 88 M function with feed stop Application Parts program extract N100 G0 X10 M88 Traverse movement and implicit preprocessing stop...

Page 533: ...ore function Possible applications include Addition of auxiliary functions after block search Restoring the initial state to position a part program Types of auxiliary functions that can be overstored The following types of auxiliary functions can be overstored M special function S spindle speed T tool number H aux function D tool offset number DL additive tool offset F feed Duration of validity A...

Page 534: ...ation This behavior does not affect the display and does not affect variables AC_AUXFU_M_STATE n AC_AUXFU_M_VALUE n and AC_AUXFU_M_EXT n The auxiliary function is always regarded as collected after a block search even though it is not output to the PLC An auxiliary function that is not output after a block search also overwrites an auxiliary function whose Bit 8 is not set during collection The us...

Page 535: ...ion on the block search please refer to References FB1 Function Manual Basic Functions Mode Group Channel Program Operation K1 2 12 2 Output suppression of spindle specific auxiliary functions Function For example with a tool change it may be necessary not to output the spindle specific auxiliary functions collected during the block search in action blocks but to delay output for example until aft...

Page 536: ...e 40 P_SEARCH_SPOS n Accumulated spindle position Value range 0 MD30330 MA_MODULO_RANGE size of the module range Accumulated traversing path Value range 100 000 000 P_SEARCH_SPOSMODE n Accumulated position approach mode Value range 0 For later output of the spindle specific auxiliary functions the system variables can be read in an ASUB for example and output after the action blocks are output DB2...

Page 537: ...gram N05 M3 S200 Spindle 1 N10 G4 F3 N15 SPOS 111 Spindle 1 is positioned to 111 degrees in the ASUB N20 M2 4 S2 300 Spindle 2 N25 G4 F3 N30 SPOS 2 IC 77 Spindle 2 traverses incrementally by 77 degrees N55 X10 G0 Destination block N60 G4 F10 N99 M30 ASUB PROC ASUP_SAVE MSG Output of the spindle functions DEF INT SNR 1 AUSG_SPI M SNR P_SEARCH_SGEAR SNR Output gear level S SNR P_SEARCH_S SNR Output ...

Page 538: ... position 111 degrees while spindle 2 is repositioned at position 77 degrees If a different response is required the program sequence for block search for example N05 M3 S and N30 SPOS 2 IC requires special treatment Whether block search is active can be ascertained in the ASUB via the system variable P_SEARCH P_SEARCH 1 Block search active In the case of incremental positioning after speed contro...

Page 539: ...e system variable P_SEARCH_SDIR is assigned default value 5 at the start of the block search This value has no effect on output This ensures that the last spindle operating mode is retained for a block search across program section in which spindles are not programmed with a direction of rotation positioning or axis mode The programming of M19 SPOS and SPOSA is collected as M 19 internal M19 in th...

Page 540: ...ary functions must be managed in the PLC and thus in the user program itself Therefore it is up to the PLC programmer to program the acknowledgement of these auxiliary functions He has to know which auxiliary functions in which group have to be acknowledged Default M auxiliary functions that are not managed by means of the PLC are identified by the NC as output and transferred to the PLC There is ...

Page 541: ...is output from NCK to PLC Inverted Auxiliary function has been transferred from NCK to PLC and transport acknowledgement has taken place Black font on gray background Auxiliary function is managed by the PLC and has been directly applied by the PLC Black font on gray background Auxiliary function is managed by the PLC and the function acknowledgement has taken place Black font on gray background D...

Page 542: ...LUE n Address extension of the collected or output M auxiliary function of the n 1 group INT AC_AUXFU_M_EXT n Output status of the M auxiliary function of the n 1 group INT AC_AUXFU_M_STATE n 0 No auxiliary function 1 M auxiliary function was collected via a search 2 M auxiliary function has been output to the PLC 3 M auxiliary function has been output to the PLC and the transport acknowledgement ...

Page 543: ...tool change default 6 MD22560 MC_TOOL_CHANGE_M_CODE auxiliary function for tool change If no address extension is programmed the auxiliary function refers to the master spindle or the master tool holder of the channel Definition of the master spindle MD20090 MC_SPIND_DEF_MASTER_SPIND Part program instruction SETMS Definition of the master tool holder MD20124 MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TOOLHOLDER Part prog...

Page 544: ...ept for the following parameters Bit0 Output duration one OB1 cycle normal acknowledgment Bit1 Output duration one OB40 cycle quick acknowledgment Auxiliary functions M17 or M2 M30 end of subroutine In its own parts program block If one of the auxiliary functions M17 M2 or M30 is programmed as the only auxiliary function in a part program block and an axis is still in motion the auxiliary function...

Page 545: ...s output to the PLC A quick acknowledgement is ineffective because M01 is permanently assigned to the first auxiliary function group and is therefore always output at the end of the block 1 1 The auxiliary function M01 conditional stop is only output to the PLC if the function Programmed stop is activated via the HMI user interface In the case of a quick acknowledgement the M1 is output to the PLC...

Page 546: ...Supplementary conditions 3 2 Output behavior Basic logic functions Auxiliary Function Output to PLC H2 58 Function Manual 11 2006 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 ...

Page 547: ...unctions Task Parameterization of the auxiliary function specific machine data for a machine with the following configuration Spindles Spindle 1 Master spindle Spindle 2 Second spindle Gear stages Spindle 1 5 gear stages Spindle 2 No gear stages Switching functions for cooling water on off Spindle 1 ON M50 OFF M51 Spindle 2 ON M52 OFF M53 ...

Page 548: ...otion The auxiliary functions for gear changeover M40 to M45 and M1 40 to M1 45 ninth auxiliary function group should have the following output behavior Output duration one OB1 cycle normal acknowledgment Output prior to motion Spindle 2 Only one M function for directional reversal may be programmed in one block The direction of rotation last programmed is to be output after block search The follo...

Page 549: ...MC_AUXFU_ASSIGN_TYPE 0 M Description of auxiliary function 1 M40 MC_AUXFU_ASSIGN_EXTENSION 0 0 MC_AUXFU_ASSIGN_VALUE 0 40 MC_AUXFU_ASSIGN_GROUP 0 9 and analogously for aux functions 2 to 5 MC_AUXFU_ASSIGN_TYPE 5 M Description of auxiliary function 6 M45 MC_AUXFU_ASSIGN_EXTENSION 5 0 MC_AUXFU_ASSIGN_VALUE 5 45 MC_AUXFU_ASSIGN_GROUP 5 9 MC_AUXFU_ASSIGN_TYPE 6 M Description of auxiliary function 7 M1...

Page 550: ... 17 S2 all values MC_AUXFU_ASSIGN_EXTENSION 16 2 MC_AUXFU_ASSIGN_VALUE 16 1 MC_AUXFU_ASSIGN_GROUP 16 11 MN_AUXFU_GROUP_SPEC 11 H21 Specification of auxiliary function group 12 MC_AUXFU_ASSIGN_TYPE 17 M Description of auxiliary function 18 M50 MC_AUXFU_ASSIGN_EXTENSION 17 0 MC_AUXFU_ASSIGN_VALUE 17 50 MC_AUXFU_ASSIGN_GROUP 17 12 MC_AUXFU_ASSIGN_TYPE 18 M Description of auxiliary function 19 M51 MC_...

Page 551: ...l setting after part program start 20112 START_MODE_MASK Definition of control initial setting after powerup and on RESET or at end of part program 20270 CUTTING_EDGE_DEFAULT Basic setting of tool cutting edge without programming 20800 SPF_END_TO_VDI Subprogram end to PLC 22000 AUXFU_ASSIGN_GROUP Auxiliary function group 22010 AUXFU_ASSIGN_TYPE Type of auxiliary function 22020 AUXFU_ASSIGN_EXTENSI...

Page 552: ...TYPE Output timing of F functions 22250 AUXFU_D_SYNC_TYPE Output timing of D functions 22252 AUXFU_DL_SYNC_TYPE Output timing of DL functions 22254 AUXFU_ASSOC_M0_VALUE Additional M function for program stop 22256 AUXFU_ASSOC_M1_VALUE Additional M function for conditional stop 5 2 Signals 5 2 1 Signals to channel DB number Byte Bit Description 21 30 5 Activate associated M01 5 2 2 Signals from cha...

Page 553: ...function 1 real 21 104 105 Extended address of S function 2 binary 21 106 109 S function 2 real 21 110 111 Extended address of S function 3 binary 21 112 115 S function 3 real 21 116 117 Extended address of T function 1 binary 21 118 119 T function 1 integer 21 120 121 Extended address of T function 2 binary 21 122 123 T function 2 integer 21 124 125 Extended address of T function 3 binary 21 126 ...

Page 554: ...f F function 5 binary 21 184 187 F function 5 real format 21 188 189 Extended address of F function 6 binary 21 190 193 F function 6 real format 21 194 Dynamic M function M00 M07 21 195 Dynamic M function M08 M15 21 196 Dynamic M function M16 M23 21 197 Dynamic M function M24 M31 21 198 Dynamic M function M32 M39 21 199 Dynamic M function M40 M47 21 200 Dynamic M function M48 M55 21 201 Dynamic M ...

Page 555: ...ic functions Auxiliary Function Output to PLC H2 Function Manual 11 2006 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 67 5 2 4 Signals from axis spindle DB number Byte Bit Description 31 86 87 M function for spindle binary 31 88 91 S function for spindle real ...

Page 556: ...Data lists 5 2 Signals Basic logic functions Auxiliary Function Output to PLC H2 68 Function Manual 11 2006 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 ...

Page 557: ... Auxiliary functions M17 or M2 M30 56 DL additive tool offset 55 Maximum number of auxiliary functions per part program block 55 Part program blocks without traverse movement 57 Spindle replacement 55 Synchronized actions 56 Tool management 55 Constraints 41 51 Constraints Thread cutting 56 Continuous path mode 41 D D functions 11 DB21 DBB116 DBB136 39 DBB140 DBB190 39 DBB194 DBB206 39 DBB58 DBB67...

Page 558: ...252 11 34 38 MD22254 17 42 43 MD22256 17 42 43 MD22560 17 MD22560 55 MD26008 17 MD30330 48 N Normal acknowledgment 20 O Output after motion 23 Output behavior 34 Output duration one OB1 cycle 20 Output duration one OB40 cycle 21 41 Output during motion 22 41 Output prior to motion 22 Output prior to motion 41 Overstorage of auxiliary functions 46 P Parameter Value 19 31 Parameterized output behavi...

Page 559: ...C5397 0BP10 2BA0 Valid for Control SINUMERIK 840D sl 840DE sl SINUMERIK 840Di sl 840DiE sl SINUMERIK 840D powerline 840DE powerline SINUMERIK 840Di powerline 840DiE powerline SINUMERIK 810D powerline 810DE powerline Software Version NCU system software for 840D sl 840DE sl 1 3 NCU system software for 840D sl DiE sl 1 0 NCU system software for 840D 840DE 7 4 NCU system software for 840Di 840DiE 3 3...

Page 560: ...ommissioning and operation of a device system may only be performed by qualified personnel Within the context of the safety notes in this documentation qualified persons are defined as persons who are authorized to commission ground and label devices systems and circuits in accordance with established safety practices and standards Prescribed Usage Note the following Warning This device may only b...

Page 561: ...after block search 41 2 5 2 3 Spindle functions after block search 42 2 5 3 Automatic start of an ASUB after block search 43 2 5 4 Cascaded block search 44 2 5 5 Examples of block search with calculation 46 2 6 Block search Type 5 SERUPRO 50 2 6 1 REPOS 58 2 6 1 1 Continue machining after SERUPRO search target found 58 2 6 1 2 Repositioning on contour with controlled REPOS 69 2 6 2 Acceleration me...

Page 562: ... with implicit preprocessing stop 142 2 8 2 Single block stop Suppression using SBLOF 142 2 8 3 Single block stop inhibit according to situation 145 2 8 4 Single block behavior in mode group with type A B 146 2 9 Program control 147 2 9 1 Function selection via operator panel front or PLC 148 2 9 2 Activation of skip levels 149 2 9 3 Adapting the size of the interpolation buffer 150 2 9 4 Program ...

Page 563: ...al machine data 211 5 1 1 1 HMIspecific machine data 211 5 1 1 2 NC specific machine data 211 5 1 2 Channelspecific machine data 212 5 1 2 1 Basic machine data 212 5 1 2 2 Block search 213 5 1 2 3 Reset response 214 5 1 2 4 Auxiliary function settings 214 5 1 2 5 Transformation definitions 215 5 1 2 6 Memory settings 216 5 1 2 7 Program runtime and workpiece counter 217 5 1 3 Axis spindlespecific ...

Page 564: ...Table of contents Basic logic functions Mode group channel program operation reset response K1 6 Function Manual 11 2006 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 ...

Page 565: ...roup are always in the same mode at a particular time e g AUTOMATIC MDA or JOG This is ensured through the NC internal mode logic A mode group can be regarded as an independent multi channel NC Channel gaps When channels are configured placeholder channels can be provided in order to create as uniform a configuration as possible over machines in a series Only the channels that are actually used ar...

Page 566: ...s is referred to as program operation During execution the program sequence can be controlled by PLC interface signals and commands Initial settings can be specified in channelspecific machine data for each channel These initial settings affect for example G groups and auxiliary function output A part program can be selected only if the relevant channel is in the Reset state Furthermore all furthe...

Page 567: ...LL and executed from an external memory e g from the HMI Advanced hard disk Reset response Machine data can be used to change the control system response for particular system settings for functions such as G codes tool length compensation transformation coupled axis groupings tangential follow up and programmable synchronous spindle for certain system settings following Power up POWER ON RESET pa...

Page 568: ...Brief description Basic logic functions Mode group channel program operation reset response K1 10 Function Manual 11 2006 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 ...

Page 569: ... group A mode group combines NC channels with axes and spindles to form a machining unit A mode group contains the channels that are required to run simultaneously in the same mode from the point of view of the machining sequence Note This description assumes one mode group and one channel Functions requiring several channels e g axis replacement are described in References FB2 Function Manual Ext...

Page 570: ...ollows Geometry axes can be operated in the path grouping Using the master spindle they can perform functions such as G96 G961 G331 G332 etc Channel axes that are not defined as geometry axes can be moved as path axes synchronous axes positioning axes PLC axes and command axes Special axes have no geometric relationship with one another Master spindle geometry axes can perform functions using the ...

Page 571: ...monitored and controlled from the PLC or NCK The following table lists all mode groupspecific interface signals Modegroup signals PLC NCK Modegroup signals NCK PLC Mode group Reset Mode strobe JOG MDA AUTOMATIC Mode group Stop axes plus spindles Machine function strobe REF REPOS TEACH IN Mode group Stop All channels 1 to 10 max in Reset state Mode change Mode group Ready Operating mode JOG MDA AUT...

Page 572: ... in the control Series machines with similar designs can be kept uniform during configuration Only the channels that can actually be used by the machine tool are activated channels with mode group number greater than 0 Special case Channel 1 must always be available If MD10010 MN_ASSIGN_CHAN_TO_MODE_GROUP 0 0 is specified the following is automatically set by the control MD10010 MN_ASSIGN_CHAN_TO_...

Page 573: ...on preprocessing is stopped All axes and spindles are decelerated to zero speed according to their acceleration curves without contour violation Any auxiliary functions not yet output to the PLC are no longer output The preprocessing pointers are set to the interruption point and the block pointers are set to the beginning of the appropriate part programs All initial settings e g G function initia...

Page 574: ... group can be active at the same time JOG in Automatic JOG in AUTOMATIC is an extension of AUTOMATIC mode intended to simplify use JOG can be executed without leaving AUTOMATIC mode if boundary conditions so permit JOG Jogging manual axis traversal The axes can be traversed manually with the handwheel or the traversing keys Channelspecific signals and interlocks are effective in ASUBs and when a m...

Page 575: ...soft keys on the operator interface This selection AUTOMATIC MDA or JOG is forwarded on interfaces signals DB11 DBX4 0 to DBX4 2 strobe mode in the PLC but not yet activated Activation and priorities The desired mode of the mode group is activated via the interface signals DB11 DBX0 0 to DBX0 2 mode If several modes are selected at the same time the following priority is in effect JOG 1st priority...

Page 576: ...olled REPOS Within MDA mode Within MDA mode one of the following machine functions can be selected REF reference point approach References FB1 Function Manual Basic Function Reference Point Approach R1 REPOS repositioning References BEMsl Operator s Guide TEACHIN teach in of axis positions References BEMsl Operating Instructions HMI Embedded and BEM Operating Instructions HMI Embedded TEACH IN REP...

Page 577: ...ns in the modes Operating modes are supplemented through userspecific functions These functions are not related to any particular technology or machine A subset of the available functions can be selected in each mode depending on the operating state These functions are categorized as follows NCKspecific functions Mode groupspecific functions Channel specific functions The individual functions can ...

Page 578: ...iprocating axis Note The jog capable property is independent of the JOG in AUTOMATIC function Activation The JOG in AUTOMATIC function can be activated using machine data MD10735 MN_JOG_MODE_MASK 1 Before POWER ON the machine data MD10735 MN_JOG_MODE_MASK Bit 0 must be set 2 The user switches to AUTO PLC user interface DB11 DBX0 0 0 1 edge JOG in AUTOMATIC is then active if the NCK previously had ...

Page 579: ...and the appropriate HMI softkey initiates a block search If JOG movement is active the NCK is internally in JOG mode and thus a block search request is refused and a Start cannot start the part program Start starts any remaining increment or has no effect While a mode group axis is being traversed in JOG mode the mode group remains internally in JOG mode Remark This phase can begin with the JOG mo...

Page 580: ...in and selects AUTO mode again The internal mode change is delayed until the movement is complete This avoids unnecessary multiple switching operations e g when using the handwheel The PLC can only rely on the Internal JOG active PLC signal The NCK will then switch to Internal JOG if the axis is not enabled 2 2 1 Monitoring functions and interlocks of the individual modes Channel status determines...

Page 581: ...de transitions are possible and how these are executed can be configured in the PLC program on a machine specific basis Note The mode is not changed internally until the signal Channel status active is no longer pending For error free mode change however all channels must assume a permissible operating mode Possible mode changes The following table shows possible mode changes for one channel Table...

Page 582: ...START is rejected and Alarm 16952 is issued 2 3 Channel Assignment of programs Part programs are assigned to channels Programs of different channels are largely independent of each other Channel properties A channel constitutes an NC in which one part program can be executed at a time Machine axes geometry axes and positioning axes are assigned to the channels according to the machine configuratio...

Page 583: ...l functions for each channel These functions with the exception of the display functions are controlled and checked by the PLC with interface signals Channels in the same mode group always have to be operated in the same mode AUTOMATIC JOG MDA Channel configuration The channels can be assigned individual channel names via machine data MD20000 MC_CHAN_NAME channel name The various axes are then ass...

Page 584: ... local axis from the perspective of one of the channels belonging to the NCU to which the axis is not physically connected The assignment between the link axes and a channel is implemented as follows For permanent assignment using machine data Allow the direct logic machine axis image to show link axes For dynamic assignment Allow the axis container slot machine data to show link axes For more inf...

Page 585: ...e spindle started by the PLC becomes active in the channel that is handling the spindle when the start command is received For more information about the special spindle interface see References FB1 Function Manual Basic Functions Spindles S1 Autonomous singleaxis operations It is possible to decouple a particular axis spindle in the main run from the channel behavior triggered by the NC program r...

Page 586: ... status is transmitted to the HMI NC Start disable and global Start disable have the same effect on the internal counter for starts that have been sent but not executed OPI variable startRejectCount Bypassing global Start disable The interface signal DB21 DBX7 5 PLC NCK allows the PLC to temporarily bypass a global Start disable 0 Global Start disable is effective 1 Global Start disable is tempora...

Page 587: ...ram test status a part program is executed without the output of axis or spindle setpoints The parts porgram in the active program test function through the interface signal DB21 DBX7 1 NC start can be started and processes i e by means of auxiliary function outputs wait times G function outputs etc The safety functions such as software limit switch working area limits continue to be valid No axis...

Page 588: ...m test Display The appropriate field on the operator interface is reversed and the interface signal in the PLC as a checkback of the active program test DB21 DBX33 7 program test active is set Caution The signals for exact stop DB31 DBX60 6 60 7 exact stop coarse fine mirror the actual status on the machine They are only canceled during program testing if the axis is pushed out of its set position...

Page 589: ...unctionality The part program can be started via interface signal DB21 DBX7 1 NC Start When the Single block function is activated the part program stops executing after every program block If tool cutter radius compensation or a tool nose radius correction is selected processing stops after every intermediate block inserted by the control The program status switches to Program status stopped The ...

Page 590: ...these do not trigger actions Action single block is the initial setting For selecting the single block operation see References BEM Operator s Guide HMI Embedded Caution In a series of G33 G34 G35 blocks a single block is only operative if dry run feed is selected Calculation blocks are not processed in single step mode only if single decoding block is active SBL2 is also ineffective with G33 G34 ...

Page 591: ...ogram status interrupted is set Control options For certain sequences continuous program execution can be desirable despite the selection of single block mode Machine data MD10702 MN_IGNORE_SINGLEBLOCK_MASK specifies which operations are to be processed without interruption Internal ASUPs User ASUBs Intermediate blocks Block search group blocks action blocks Init blocks Subroutines with DISPLOF No...

Page 592: ...e value also replaces the programmed revolutional feedrate in program blocks with G95 Use Danger Workpieces may not be machined when dry run feedrate is active because the altered feedrates might cause the permissible tool cutting rates to be exceeded and the workpiece or machine tool could be damaged Selection Dry run feedrate mode is selected via the operator interface in the Program control men...

Page 593: ...he minimum of the programmed feedrate and setting data SD42101 3 Dry run feedrate is setting SD42101 regardless of the programmed feedrate A dry run feedrate can be selected in the automatic modes and activated on interruption of an automatic mode or end of a block For more information on feedrate control refer to References FB1 Function Manual Basic Functions Feeds V1 Display Active dry run feedr...

Page 594: ...ip blocks N40 and N50 during processing Figure 2 1 Skipping part program blocks Selection The skip function is selected via the operator interface in the Program control menu This selection sets interface signal DB21 DBX26 0 Skip block selected This does not activate the function In addition a slash must be placed before the blocks to be skipped Activation This function is activated via interface ...

Page 595: ...approached in any situation On NC Start the start position of the target block or the end position of the block before the target block is approached This is traversed up to the end position Processing is true to contour Type 4 Block search with calculation at block end point Block search with calculation at block end point is used to enable a target position e g tool change position to be approac...

Page 596: ...m Search target found 2 5 1 Sequence for block search of Type 1 2 and 4 Time sequence The block search Types 1 2 and 4 proceeds as follows 1 Activate search via input in HMI Advanced or HMI Embedded 2 Search target found or alarm if target cannot be found 3 NC Start for output of action blocks 4 NC Start for program continuation Block search active DB21 DBX33 4 Action block active DB21 DBX32 3 Blo...

Page 597: ... accumulated up to the search target using setting data SD42444 SC_TARGET_BLOCK_INCR_PROG Action blocks Action blocks contain the actions accumulated during Block search with calculation such as auxiliary function outputs and tool T D spindle S and feedrate programming commands During block search with calculation contour or block end point actions such as M function outputs are accumulated in soc...

Page 598: ...hronization of the channel axes With the start of an ASUB after block search with calculation the actual positions of all channel axes are synchronized during preprocessing Effects System variable P_EP programmed end position In the ASUB the system variable provides P_EP programmed end position the current actual position of a channel axes in the work piece coordinate system P_EP current actual po...

Page 599: ...PLC actions after block search To allow activation of PLC actions starting of ASUBs call up of PLC functions after the end of the block search at a defined point there is the NCK PLC interface signal DB21 DB32 6 last action block active 1 This means that all action blocks are processed and that actions are possible by the PLC ASUB FC or the operator overstoring mode change after JOG REPOS This all...

Page 600: ...ARCH_SPOS P_SEARCH_SPOSMODE System variables The spindle specific auxiliary functions are always stored in the following system variables on block search irrespective of the programming described above System variables Description P_SEARCH_S n Collected spindle speed value range 0 Smax P_SEARCH_SDIR n Collected spindle rotation direction value range 3 4 5 5 19 70 P_SEARCH_SGEAR n Collected spindle...

Page 601: ...iary spindle functions after block search 2 5 3 Automatic start of an ASUB after block search Activation The automatic ASUB start after block search is configured in the existing machine data MD11450 MN_SEARCH_RUN_MODE with bit 1 1 TRUE Bit 1 1 Automatic start of user program _N_CMA_DIR _N_PROG_EVENT_SPF as an ASUB When the last action block is activated user program _N_CMA_DIR _N_PROG_EVENT_SPF i...

Page 602: ...nctionality The Cascaded block search function can be used to start another block search from the status Search target found The cascading can be continued after each located search target as often as you want and is applicable to the following block search functions Type 1 block search without calculation Type 2 block search with calculation at contour Type 3 block search with calculation at bloc...

Page 603: ...target specifications and block search function prior to each block search start Example Sequence with cascaded block search RESET Block search up to search target 1 Block search up to search target 2 Cascaded block search NC Start for output of the action blocks Alarm 10208 NC Start Continue program execution Block search active DB21 DBX33 4 Action block active DB21 DBX32 3 Block search starting ...

Page 604: ...1 Function Manual Basic Functions Basic PLC Program P3 3 Load and select part program WORKPIECE_1 4 Search to block end point block number N220 5 HMI signals Search target found 6 NC Start for output of action blocks 7 With the PLC signal DB21 DB32 6 last action block active the PLC starts ASUB BLOCK_SEARCH_END via FC9 References FB1 Function Manual Basic Function Basic PLC Program P3 8 After the ...

Page 605: ... 0BP10 2BA0 47 Y X 100 200 0 300 100 200 300 400 Approach point 170 30 Tool change point 450 300 Approach movement Target block N220 Figure 2 4 Approach movement for search to block end point target block N220 Note Search to contour with target block N220 would generate an approach movement to the tool change point start point of the target block ...

Page 606: ...ck number N260 5 to 10 Same as example for Type 4 block search Y X 100 200 0 300 100 200 300 400 Approach point Tool change point 450 300 Approach movement N260 Figure 2 5 Approach movement for search to contour target block N260 Note Search to block end point with target block N260 would result in Alarm 14040 circle end point error Part programs for Type 4 and Type 2 PROC WORKPIECE_1 Main program...

Page 607: ...NR_VORWAHL Read T number of preselected tool Execute tool change only if tool is not yet active N540 IF TNR_AKTIV TNR_VORWAHL GOTOF ENDE N550 G0 G40 G60 G90 SUPA X450 Y300 Z300 D0 Approach tool change position N560 M6 Execute tool change END M17 PROC SUCHLAUF_ENDE SAVE ASUB for calling the tool change routine after block search N1000 DEF INT TNR_AKTIV Variable for active T number N1010 DEF INT TNR...

Page 608: ...tween a channel and synchronized actions or between several channels can take place within an NCU Channels In combination with the HMI SERUPRO is provided for the following channels For the current SERUPRO channel only 1 For all channels with the same workpiece name as the SERUPRO channel 2 For all channels with the same mode group as the SERUPRO channel 3 For all channels of the NCU 4 The scope o...

Page 609: ...mposed motion interpolation Travel to fixed stop Synchronous spindle grouping On reaching the beginning of the target block see Time sequence of SERUPRO below the user can activate a SERUPRO ASUB Special points should be noted during SERUPRO ASUB with regard to Reference point approach Tool management Spindle ramp up Other functions after search target was found such as Continue machining after SE...

Page 610: ...mand WAITM WAITE WAITMC will wait for the partner channels involved This waiting occurs if the partner channels are In SERUPRO mode In Program test more or are actually running 5 Selection of program test and dry run feedrate is rejected with corresponding Alarm 16935 6 The NC stops at the beginning of the target block deselects Program test internally and displays the Stop condition Search target...

Page 611: ...only several channels then this can be simulated by SERUPRO in each channel For machine data setting MD10708 MN_SERUPRO_MASK Bit 1 0 Alarm 16942 Channel 1 Start program command action 2 ALNX not possible aborts the simulation if part program command START is used Machine data MD10707 MN_SERUPRO_TEST_MASK allows program testing to be deactivated in the stopped state without the SERUPRO operation be...

Page 612: ...ts the search phase during part program START Bit 1 1 The alarm is suppressed In channel i a program uses the part program command Start j per the following sequence In channel j the preselected program is started Channel j begins to actually start with moving axes In channel j program test can be preselected by the user Channel j will now not select a search target Bit 2 Reserved SERUPRO not ende...

Page 613: ... special chance for the SERUPRO operation with MD22621 MC_ENABLE_START_MODE_MASK_PRT to select a deviating basic setting at the normal start of the part program The new setting must be stored in the machine data MD22620 MC_START_MODE_MASK_PRT The meaning of the bits of MD22620 is identical to those of MD20112 Example The synchronous spindle coupling at the beginning of the SERUPRO operation is ret...

Page 614: ...in item 7 the following must be observed Stopped status acc to point 6 Machine data MD11602 MN_ASUP_START_MASK and MD11604 MN_ASUP_START_PRIO_LEVEL allow the NCK to start the ASUB from stopped status automatically via the FC9 block Acknowledgement of FC9 only after completion of REPOS block The ASUB can only be signaled as complete from the FC9 block with ASUB Done if the REPOS block has also been...

Page 615: ...PRO approach after the following sequence 1 The SERUPRO operation has been performed completely 2 The user presses Start 3 Automatic ASUB start 4 The NCK stops automatically before the REPOS part program command and Alarm 10208 Press NC Start to continue the program appears 5 The user presses Start again 6 The NCK executes the REPOS movement and continues the part program at the target block Note ...

Page 616: ...nue machining after the interruption However with a SERUPRO approach a program section has to be recovered This is the case when SERUPRO has ended the simulation and is to travel to the target block again SERUPRO refers to the existing REPOS function which the user can adapt as necessary SERUPRO approach The user can change the REPOS behavior of individual axes at specific times to reposition cert...

Page 617: ... repositioning of individual axes using VDI signals Bit 3 1 Reposition positioning axes in the approach block during block search via program test SERUPRO Bit 4 1 Positioning axes in approach block on every REPOS Bit 5 1 Modified feedrates and spindle speeds are valid immediately in the residual block Otherwise not until the next block Bit 6 1 After SERUPRO neutral axes and positioning spindles in...

Page 618: ...dual axes can also be controlled via VDI signals and is enabled with MD11470 MN_REPOS_MODE_MASK BIT 2 1 Path axes cannot be influenced individually For all other axes that are not geometry axes repositioning of individual axes can be prevent temporarily and also delayed VDI signals can be used to subsequently reenable or to continue blocking individual channel axes that REPOS would like to travers...

Page 619: ...r the interruption In the example the NC moves to 16 instead of 32 A Start axes individually The REPOS behavior for SERUPRO approach with several axes is selected with MD11470 MN_REPOS_MODE_MASK BIT 3 1 The NC commences SERUPRO approach with a block that moves all positioning axes to the programmed end and the path axis to the target block The user starts the individual axes by selecting the appro...

Page 620: ...cancels the REPOS movement Bit 7 1 The level of interface signal DB31 DBX10 0 REPOSDELAY is read if REPOSA is interpreted Axes which are neither geometry nor orientation axes are then excluded by REPOS and are not moved Note REPOSDELAY is changed from edge to level evaluation Delayed approach of axis with REPOS offset With the axial level triggered VDI signal axis spindle PLC NCK DB31 DBX10 0 REPO...

Page 621: ...s relate to the current block in the main run There are two different cases Case A One repositioning block of a currently active REPOS operation is contained in the main run The active REPOS operation is aborted restarted and the REPOS offsets controlled via the signals DB21 DBX31 0 31 2 REPOSPATHMODE0 to 2 and DB31 DBX10 0 REPOSDELAY Case B No repositioning block of a currently active REPOS opera...

Page 622: ...os Path Mode Ackn0 to 2 is extinguished NCK has not yet acknowledged the PLC signal If the level of the signals DB21 DBX31 REPOSMODEEDGE 4 1 and DB21 DBX319 0 REPOSMODEEDGEACKN 0 and a RESET occurs in this situation then from the NCK DB21 DBX319 0 REPOSMODEEDGEACKN 0 and DB21 DBX319 1 319 3 Repos Path Mode Ackn0 to 2 is deleted Controlling SERUPRO approach with VDI signals The SERUPRO approach can...

Page 623: ...This axial interface does not affect machine axes that form a path DB31 DBX72 0 REPOSDELAY axis spindle These signals are available in the respective DB of the HMI or PLC REPOS acknowledgement signals The following VDI signals can be used to acknowledge from the NCK functions that control the REPOS response via PLC DB21 DBX319 0 REPOSMODEEDGEACKN channel specific DB21 DBX319 1 319 3 Repos Path Mod...

Page 624: ...POSMODEEDGEACKN a RESET in this situation cause the program to abort and the REPOS that is to be used to control the REPOSPATHMODE can no longer take place A REPOSMODE specified by the PLC is acknowledged by the NCK with the interface signals DB21 DBX319 1 319 3 Repos Path Mode Ackn0 to 2 and DB31 DBX10 0 Repos Delay with DB31 DBX70 2 Repos Delay Ackn in the following way A part program is stopped...

Page 625: ...nals from NCK NCK sets acknowledgement again Phase with REPOSPATHMODE still active residual block of the program stopped at Time 2 is not yet completely executed As soon as the REPOS repositioning motion of the ASUB is executed the NCK sets the Repos Path Mode Ackn again Time 5 If no REPOSPATHMODE has been preselected via a VDI signal the programmed REPOS mode is displayed Repos Path Mode Ackn is ...

Page 626: ... JOG mode with a mode change The user applies the REPOS offset manually with JOG in order to set the IS DB31 DBX70 0 REPOS offset to the value 0 In the scope the axis can also be moved via FC18 where the IS DB31 DBX70 0 REPOS offset is constantly updated Displaying the range of validity The range of validity of the REPOS offset is indicated with interface signal DB31 DBX70 1 REPOS offset valid It ...

Page 627: ...hange Subsequent status changes are ignored Once the SERUPRO operation is ended with Search target found the IS DB31 DBX76 4 path axis is relative to the target block 2 6 1 2 Repositioning on contour with controlled REPOS Approach modes Influence path axes individually During SERUPRO approach a REPOS operation is initiated in order to reposition to the contour A large number of axes which the user...

Page 628: ...B Position reached using JOG key after the SERUPRO operation C SERUPRO approach moves from B after C as C is the point next to B in target block 2 3 A part program with the blocks 1 2 2 3 3 4 A B C 1 2 3 4 Figure 2 7 SUREPRO approach under RMN Application and procedure SUREPRO approach with RMN offers the oppotunity of using the application shown in the figure If a program abort is forced by RESET...

Page 629: ... are overwritten and the current program is valid The interface signal responds to the level of the corresponding mode Note RMN is a general REPOS extension and it is not restricted to SERUPRO For SERUPRO RMI and RMB are identical With DB21 DBX31 0 31 2 REPOSPATHMODE0 to 2 the path as a whole is controlled The path axes cannot be changed individually The behavior of the other axis types can be cha...

Page 630: ... MC_SERUPRO_SPEED_MODE is effective for the following channel axes in the main run throughout the entire SERUPRO operation PLC axes Command axes Positioning axes Reciprocating axes The functions of MD22600 MC_SERUPRO_SPEED_MODE and MD22601 MC_SERUPRO_SPEED_FACTOR apply only to SERUPRO and not to program testing In this case no axes spindles are moved Caution The NC as a discrete system generates a...

Page 631: ...mp up On starting a SERUPRO ASUB G74 reference point approach If statement G74 reference point approach is programmed between the program start and the search target this will be ignored by the NC SERUPRO approach does not take this G74 statement into account Tool management If tool management is active the following setting is recommended Set MD18080 MA_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK BIT 20 0 The tool mana...

Page 632: ... TNR_AKTUELL Variable for active T number N510 DEF INT TNR_VORWAHL Variable for preselected T number Determine current tool N520 STOPRE In program testing N530 IF P_ISTEST from the program context N540 TNR_AKTUELL P_TOOLNO the current tool is read N550 ELSE Otherwise the tool of the spindle is read out N560 TNR_AKTUELL TC_MPP6 9998 1 Read tool T number on the spindle N570 ENDIF N580 GETSELT TNR_VO...

Page 633: ...ead T number determined by search run i e that tool determines the current tool offset N1050 GETSELT TNR_VORWAHL Read T number of preselected tool N1060 IF TNR_SPINDEL TNR_SUCHLAUF GOTOF ASUP_ENDE1 N1070 T TC_TP2 TNR_SUCHLAUF T selection by tool name N1080 L6 Call tool change routine N1085 ASUP_ENDE1 N1090 IF TNR_VORWAHL TNR_SUCHLAUF GOTOF ASUP_ENDE N1100 T TC_TP2 TNR_VORWAHL Restore T preselectio...

Page 634: ...block The user presses START The spindle accelerates to the target block state if the spindle was not programmed differently in the ASUB Note Modifications for REPOS of spindles The transitions of speed control mode and positioning mode must be taken into consideration in the event of modifications in SERUPRO approach and spindle functionality For further information about operating mode switchove...

Page 635: ...30 of the part program The channel is now in Reset state again A SERUPRO approach does not not take place Starting a group of channels If a group of channels is only started with SelfActing SERUPRO then all channels are ended with RESET Exceptions A channel waits for a partner channel that has not been started at all A cross channel block search can be carried out as follows Via the HMI the user s...

Page 636: ...ssing The last block processed before the search suppressed target area is used as a search pointer Input program section The IPTRLOCK and IPTRUNLOCK language commands mark search suppressed sections of the program These language commands cannot be used in synchronized actions IPTRLOCK Start of search suppressed program section IPTRUNLOCK End of search suppressed program section IPTRLOCK Freezes t...

Page 637: ...ins search suppressed IPTRUNLOCK in particular has no effect in subroutine 2 Examples of nesting with two program levels Nesting of search suppressed program sections in 2 program levels Interpretation of the blocks in an illustrative sequence Subprogram1 is prepared for the block search N10010 IPTRLOCK Program level 1 N10020 R1 R1 1 N10030 G4 F1 hold block of the search suppressed program section...

Page 638: ... search suppressed program section N100 G4 F1 Main program is continued An interruption in a search suppressed program section of the above program always returns N10030 G4 F1 block An interruption at N100 provides N100 again in SPARPRI On one program level Nesting of IPTRLOCK and IPTRUNLOCK on one program level Interpretation of the blocks in an illustrative sequence Subprogram1 is prepared for t...

Page 639: ...ic interrupt pointer is not active for couplings that were activated or deactivated via synchronized actions Example To declare axial master value coupling as search suppressed N100 G0 X100 N200 EGON Y NOC X 1 1 search suppressed program section starts N300 LEADON A B 1 N400 EGOFS Y N500 LEADOF A B search suppressed program section ends N600 G0 X200 A program abort within search suppressed program...

Page 640: ...S motion on approach of SERUPRO Example 1 Position a Z axis by specifying an X axis setpoint When block G1 F100 Z AA_IM X is interpreted the preceding STOPRE block ensures synchronization with the main run The correct setpoint of the X axis is thus read via AA_IM to move the Z axis to the same position Example 2 Read and correctly calculate external zero offset N10 G1 X1000 F100 N20 G1 X1000 F500 ...

Page 641: ... DELETE command in a sequence of such commands Part program command EXTCALL Part program command GETSELT GETEXET Tool change and active fine tool offset FTOCON 3 On the following commands executions Finishing of Type 1 search Search without calculation and Type 2 search with calculation Search at contour end point Note Type 2 search Block search at contour start point has the same behavior 2 6 6 2...

Page 642: ...and TRAILOF Traverse gantry axis couplings Tangential control Tangential followup of individual axes Axis functions Axis enable Autonomous axis operations Axis transfer Gear stage change During program test not fully automatically Overlaid movements Superimposed motion interpolation For more information about these functions see the following subsections 2 6 8 1 Travel to fixed stop FXS FXS The fu...

Page 643: ...anging torque characteristic cannot be implemented with FOC REPOS Example A program moves axis X from 0 to 100 and activates FOC every 20 increments for 10 increments at a time This torque characteristic is usually generated with nonmodal FOC and cannot therefore be traced by FOCREPOS FOCREPOS will traverse axis X from 0 to 100 with or without FOC according to the last programming Note For further...

Page 644: ...0708 MA_SERUPRO_MASK Specifications for coupled axes The SERUPRO operation simulates coupled axes always assuming that they are setpoint couplings In this way the end points are calculated for all axes that are used as target points for SERUPRO approach The coupling is also active with Search target found The path from the current point to the end point is carried out for SERUPRO approach with the...

Page 645: ... to be coupled with the desired link status NCK variables Description P_SEARCH_MASLD X Slave Position offset between slave and master axis when the link is closed P_SEARCH_MASLC X Slave Current status of a master slave link was changed during block search AA_MASL_STAT X Slave Current status of a master slave link active Slave for slave axis identifier Note This block search for the master slave li...

Page 646: ...vatable master slave link as long as activation and deactivation is not selective Note If the following axes of the master axis are in another channel any attempt to accelerate the processing speed by setting MD22601 MC_SERUPRO_SPEED_FACTOR positive Coupled motion The motion synchronous action for coupled motion of an axis grouping with TRAILON TRAILOF is supported by SERUPRO For further informati...

Page 647: ...ve It is possible via the interface signal PLC NCK DB31 DBX3 7 program test axis spindle enable to do this enabling If the real servo enable is missing during program testing or SERUPRO the effect on the axes spindles is as follows As soon as the simulated program run intends to move an axis spindle the message Waiting for axis enable or Waiting for spindle enable is displayed and the simulation i...

Page 648: ...REPOS The axis interpolates without a path context even it was last programmed as a path axis In this scenario the velocity results from MD32060 MA_POS_AX_VELO After SERUPRO approach this axis is again neutral Neutral axes that are however not allowed to be repositioned must receive the axial VDI signal REPOSDELAY This deletes the REPOS movement Example After SERUPRO one axis is deliberately moved...

Page 649: ...at the target block In other cases the automatic gear stage change is denied with an alarm if for example the axis was involved in a transformation or coupling between the gear stage change and the target block Note For further information about gear stage changes in DryRun Program test and SERUPRO see References FB1 Function Manual Basic Functions Spindle Programming S1 2 6 8 7 Superimposed motio...

Page 650: ...set is displayed with the axial VDI interface bit DB31 DBX70 1 REPOS offset valid Value 0 DB31 DBX70 0 REPOS offset has not been calculated as valid Value 1 DB31 DBX70 0 REPOS offset has been calculated as valid 2 6 8 9 Making the initial settings more flexible Initial setting initial SERUPRO setting Machine data MD20112 MC_START_MODE_MASK defines the initial setting of the control for part progra...

Page 651: ...ARCHL reliably detects SERUPRO AC_SEARCH is not supplied by the SERUPRO operation Note P_SEARCHL is set at the beginning of the SERUPRO operation and reset on RESET As a result P_SEARCHL continues to be set in the SERUPRO ASUB and in the residual part program and can continue to be evaluated In contrast the P_ISTEST variable is set only in the SERUPRO operation and is thus suitable for searchspeci...

Page 652: ... SERUPRO must be active or inactive is then made correctly Additional variable for interpretation during simulation search In JOG and MDA modes NC variable selectedWorkPProg can be used to select whether the previously selected program or the program to be simulated is to be displayed in the HMI during the simulation e g with SERUPRO For more information refer to References LIS2 Lists Book 2 Secti...

Page 653: ...of these signals is given under data lists in this Description of Functions Status messages Each channel reports its current program operation status to the PLC with interface signals These signals are in turn divided up into mode groupspecific and channelspecific signals 2 7 1 Initial settings Machine data Defined conditions can be set via machine data for the program operation or certain impleme...

Page 654: ...tart or in Reset until it is deselected by a G command from the same G group Via the MD22510 MC_GCODE_GROUPS_TO_PLC G codes which are output to interface NCK PLC after block change RESET the output of the G codes to the PLC interface can be activated A list of G groups with the associated G functions is available in References PG Programming Manual Fundamentals Basic configurations of the NC langu...

Page 655: ... alarm 12550 Name not defined or option function not available This setting is intended especially for SINUMERIK 802D sl but can also be used for others Note Option free functions also have the status enable option If only certain functions activated are 3 All the language commands are known Non activated functions are already recognized at the beginning of the program interpretation and result in...

Page 656: ...mber coded return value three digit Number coding of the basic information 1st digit from the left 000 Name is unknown programming is denied with Alarm 12550 100 Name is known but cannot be programmed triggers alarm 12533 200 Name symbol is known but interpretation is not possible 2xx Name symbol is known the command can be programmed if xx 0 Definition for name symbol Name Any STRING that is chec...

Page 657: ...can be selected only if the relevant channel is in the Reset state Start command channel status There are two possible START commands for initiating processing of a part program or part program block The channel specific interface DB21 DBX7 1 NC Start which is usually controlled from the machine control panel key NC Start starts program execution in the same channel With the NC instruction START p...

Page 658: ...ent DB21 DBX7 3 NC Stop must not be present DB21 DBX7 4 NC Stop axes plus spindle must not be present DB21 DBX7 7 Reset must not be present DB10 DBX56 1 EMERGENCY STOP must not be present No axis or NCK alarm must be active For descriptions of the individual signals see Chapter 5 Execution of command The parts program or the parts program block is automatically executed and the IS DB21 DBX35 5 cha...

Page 659: ...program instructions see Reference PG Programming Guide Fundamentals see Li st of Instructions Execution of command After execution of the STOP command the IS DB21 DBX35 3 program status interrupted is set Processing of the interrupted program can continue from the point of interruption with the command START The following actions are executed when the STOP command is triggered Part program execut...

Page 660: ...el 2 7 4 RESET command Command priority Channel status The RESET command can be executed in every channel state This command is aborted by another command Commands RESET commands The following Reset commands are available DB11 DBX0 7 mode group reset DB21 DBX7 7 Reset For a further explanation of the individual interface signals please see References FB1 Function Manual Basic Functions NC PLC inte...

Page 661: ...ram status Interface information The status of the selected program is displayed in the interface for each channel The PLC can then trigger certain responses and interlocks configured by the manufacturer depending on the status The program status is only displayed in the AUTOMATIC and MDA modes In all other modes the program status is aborted or interrupted Program statuses The following program s...

Page 662: ...se signals are set assumption status before the signal is set Program status running Table 2 3 Effect on program status Commands Program execution statuses Aborted Interrupted Stopped Wait Running IS Reset X IS NC Stop X IS NC stop at block limit X IS NC stop axes and spindles X IS Read in disable X IS Feed stop channelsp X IS Feed stop axissp X Feed override 0 X IS Spindle stop X M02 M30 in a blo...

Page 663: ...the individual signals see Chapter 5 The effect of commands signals The channel status can be modified through the activation of various commands or interface signals The following table shows the resulting channel status when these signals are set assumed status before the signal is set Channel status active The Channel status active signal is obtained when a part program or part program block is...

Page 664: ... operator or program actions Situation Channel status Program status Active mode Operator or program action Situation after the action R V A N V S W A A M J 1 x x x RESET 4 2 x x x RESET 5 3 x x x RESET 6 4 x x x NC Start 13 Mode change 5 or 6 5 x x x NC Start 14 Mode change 4 or 6 6 x x x Direction key 15 Mode change 4 or 5 7 x x x NC Start 14 8 x x x NC Start 15 9 x x x NC Start 13 Mode change 1...

Page 665: ...ence Sequence Command Conditions must be satisfied before the command Comments 1 Load program via the operator interface or part program 2 Select AUTOMATIC mode 3 Program preselection Channel preselected Preselected channel in RESET state User ID sufficient for program preselection 4 NC start for preselected channel NC start disable not available Reference point approached in all axes 5 Program ex...

Page 666: ...H 6 HHG 6723 6 6SLQGOH FRQWUROOHU HQDEOH 6 6SLQGOH 6723 6 3URJUDP VWDWXV UXQQLQJ 6 3URJUDP VWDWXV LQWHUUXSWHG 6 3URJUDP VWDWXV VWRSSHG IURP 1 6 3URJUDP VWDWXV DERUWHG IURP 1 6 7UDYHO FRPPDQG D LV IURP 1 6 DFW VWRS ILQH IURP 1 6 6SLQGOH VWDWLRQDU IURP 1 6 6SLQGOH LQ VHWSRLQW UDQJH IURP 1 6SLQGOH UDPS XS LV UXQQLQJ 3URJUDP 1 0 6 0 I 1 0 I LQN YLD 3 XVHU SURJUDP X 0 IURP 3 XVHU SURJUDP FRPSOHWHG L H ...

Page 667: ...ation on labels please see References PG Programming Manual Fundamentals Program Jumps and Program Repetitions Definition options of part program sections The program repetition offers various options for defining a part program section that is supposed to be repeated A single part program block A part program section after a start label A part program section between a start label and end label A...

Page 668: ...y once After the last repetition the part program is continued with the part program block N160 following the REPEATBinstruction N100 N120 START_1 Label START_1 N130 N140 N150 REPEATB START_1 P n Repetition after START_1 N160 Note Label search direction The part program block identified by the label can appear before or after the REPEATB statement The search initially commences toward the start of...

Page 669: ...r of times up to the part program block that contains the REPEATinstruction N150 If P is not specified the part program section N120 N140 is repeated exactly once After the last repetition the part program is continued with the part program block N160 following the REPEATinstruction N100 N120 START_1 Start label START_1 N130 N140 N150 REPEAT START_1 P n Repetition after START_1 N160 Note Label sea...

Page 670: ...lowing the REPEATinstruction N100 N120 START_1 Start label START__1 N130 N140 END_1 End label END_1 N150 N160 REPEAT START_1 END_1 P n Repetition START_1 until END_1 N170 Note Label search direction The program section marked with the Start and End labels can come before or after the REPEATinstruction The search initially commences toward the start of the program If the Start label is not found a ...

Page 671: ...am is continued with the part program block N170 following the REPEATinstruction N100 N120 START_1 Start label START__1 N130 N140 ENDLABEL End label Keyword ENDLABEL N150 N160 REPEAT START_1 END_1 P n Repetition START_1 until END_1 N170 Note Label search direction The program section marked with the Start and End labels can come before or after the REPEATinstruction The search initially commences ...

Page 672: ... of the NC control The user program can be saved under the permanent path _N_CMA_DIR _N_PROG_EVENT_SPF or a different program name can be specified in MD11620 MN_PROG_EVENT_NAME Other program name In MD11620 MN_PROG_EVENT_NAME program name of PROG_EVENT a name is specified The system then searches for the user program in the directories _N_CUS_DIR for user cycles _N_CMA_DIR for manufacturer cycles...

Page 673: ...TO and overstoring or MDA or TEACHIN Initial state specification Channel in Reset status mode AUTO or AUTO and overstoring or MDA or TEACHIN Select channel and mode Channel in reset status and mode as per selection 2 NC Start None NCK start 3 MD20112 MC_START_MODE_MASK Initialization sequence with evaluation Initialization sequence with evaluation of MD20112 4 _N_CMA_DIR _N_PROG_ EVENT_SPF or name...

Page 674: ...hannel in active status and mode as per selection 2 NC Start Block with end of part program Block is changed 3 MD20110 MC_ RESET_MODE_MASK MD20150 MC_ GCODE_RESET_VALUES MD20152 MC_ GCODE_RESET_MODE Control activated Reset sequence with evaluation Control enabled Reset sequence with evaluation of MD 20110 and MD 20150 and MD 20152 4 _N_CMA_DIR _N_PROG_ EVENT_SPF or name from MD11620 as an ASUB Imp...

Page 675: ... state 2 Reset 3 MD20110 MC_ RESET_MODE_MASK MD20150 MC_ GCODE_RESET_VALUES MD20152 MC_ GCODE_RESET_MODE Control activated Reset sequence with evaluation Control activated Reset sequence with evaluation of MD20110 and MD20150 and MD20152 4 _N_CMA_DIR _N_PROG_ EVENT_SPF or name from MD11620 as an ASUB Implied call of the path name as an ASUB 5 MD20110 MC_ RESET_MODE_MASK MD20150 MC_ GCODE_RESET_VAL...

Page 676: ... GCODE_RESET_MODE Control activated after ramp up Reset sequence with evaluation After power up control enables the reset sequence with evaluation of MD 20110 and MD 20150 and MD 20152 3 _N_CMA_DIR _N_PROG_ EVENT_SPF or name from MD11620 as an ASUB Implied call of the path name as an ASUB 4 MD20110 MC_ RESET_MODE_MASK MD20150 MC_ GCODE_RESET_VALUES MD20152 MC_ GCODE_RESET_MODE Control activated Re...

Page 677: ...gram state and channel state in the processing of a parts program with event controlled program call during part program start and part program end running DBX35 0 stopped DBX35 2 Part program Start Part program End _N_PROG_ EVENT_SPF active aborted DBX35 4 _N_PROG_ EVENT_SPF End _N_PROG_ EVENT_SPF End Program status DB21 30 active DBX35 5 interrupted DBX35 6 Reset DBX35 7 Channel status DB21 30 F...

Page 678: ...ator panel front reset Program status DB21 30 active DBX35 5 interrupted DBX35 6 Reset DBX35 7 Channel status DB21 30 Figure 2 10 Time sequence of the interface signals for program status and channel status 2 The chronological sequences from SW 6 3 and higher are shown Note DB21 DBX35 4 Program status aborted and DB21 DBX35 7 Channel status reset is are only received if _N_PROG_EVENT_SPF has been ...

Page 679: ...in program _N_PROG_EVENT_SPF which channel is currently being processed Note Power up is an event that takes place in all channels Each time MD20108 MC_PROG_EVENT_MASK is reconfigured _N_CMA_DIR _N_PROG_EVENT_SPF must be loaded or enabled Otherwise the alarm 14011 Program _N_PROG_EVENT_SPF does not exist or not enabled for execution is output The display can be suppressed in the current block disp...

Page 680: ... properties Machine data MD20109 MC_PROG_EVENT_MASK_PROPERTIES can be used to define further properties of event driven program calls for specific channels in SW 6 3 and higher Bit0 0 An ASUB started from the RESET channel state is followed by an event driven program call as in earlier versions Bit0 1 An ASUB started from the RESET channel state is not followed by an event driven program call When...

Page 681: ...art program end and operator panel reset Power up PROC PROG_EVENT DISPLOF Sequence for part program start IF P_PROG_EVENT 1 N 10 MY_GUD_VAR 0 Initialize GUD variable N 20 M17 ENDIF Sequence for part program end and operator panel reset IF P_PROG_EVENT 2 OR P_PROG_EVENT 3 N10 DRFOF Deactivate DRF offsets N20 IF MC_CHAN_NAME CHAN1 N30 CANCEL 2 Delete modal synchronized action 2 N40 ENDIF N50 M17 END...

Page 682: ...rogram _N_PROG_ENENT_SPF default Control with MD PROG_EVENT_IGN_INHIBIT If the following machine data settings exist CHANDAT 3 MC_PROG_EVENT_IGN_INHIBIT H04F MC_PROG_EVENT_MASK H04F The program started with the RESET key is executed right up to the end independently of a possibly set read in disable Note Block search SSL By setting MD11450 MN_SEARCH_RUN_MODE Bit 1 TRUE Search parameterization The ...

Page 683: ...yed Stop even a short term stop takes place after the stop delay area Is known as a soft stop event Alarm 16954 Program is aborted because illegal program commands have been used in the stop delay area Alarm 16955 Program is resumed because an illegal action has taken place in the stop delay area Alarm 16957 The program area stop delay area enclosed by DELAYFSTON and DELAYFSTOF could not be activa...

Page 684: ...tions apply while a stop delay area is being processed A change in the feed is ignored while in the stop delay area A feed disable is thus not effective until the program area has been exited and is stopped None of the main run axes such as command axes and positioning axes which are traversed with POSA is stopped Part program command G4 is permitted in the stop delay area Other part program comma...

Page 685: ... prog WAITM WAITE Alarm 16954 NC prog WAITE INIT_SYNC Alarm 16954 NC prog INIT with parameter S MMCCMD Alarm 16954 NC prog MMC STRING CHAR PROGMODESLASHON delayed IS DB21 DBB26 Activate switch over skip block PROGMODESLASHOFF delayed IS DB21 DBB26 deactivate skip block PROGMODEDRYRUNON delayed IS DB21 DBX0 6 Activate DryRun PROGMODEDRYRUNOFF delayed IS DB21 DBX0 6 Deactivate DryRun BLOCKREADINHIBI...

Page 686: ...rrupt routines or ASUBs Note Interrupt routines can be called if the mode group is in program operation mode i e in cases where part program blocks are being processed in either AUTOMATIC or in MDA mode This restriction is reduced in Calling the ASUB outside program operation 100 N120 M30 M17 N20 X Y N10 R1 34 ABHEB_Z N80 N30 Main program subroutine Interrupt routine N10 SETINT N20 N40 N50 N60 N70...

Page 687: ...eral interrupt routines exist they have to be given different levels of priority so that incoming activation signals arriving at the same time can be placed in a certain order Interrupt routines can be activated from the PLC program by means of a Function call Interrupt signals A total of 8 interrupt signals are available All inputs can be controlled via the PLC The first four interrupt signals ar...

Page 688: ...D21200 MC_LIFTFAST_DIST Displacement during fast retraction from contour In case of parameterized LIFTFAST fast retraction the maximum axis accelereation for positioning operations is reduced by MD32300 MA_MAX_AX_ACCEL axis acceleration by the factor specified in the machine data MD20610 MC_ADD_MOVE_ACCEL_RESERVE acceleration reserve for overlaid motions Activation of interrupt routine Interrupt r...

Page 689: ...art program PROGNAME N10 N20 Y20 N30 X60 N40 N50 M30 Interrupt routine INTER N101 N102 N103 N104 REPOSL M17 N20 N30 N40 N104 N101 Point of interruption Standard with G90 Path with REPOSL Traversing distance of interrupt routine End point of interrupt routine Standard with G91 Figure 2 13 End of interrupt routine Flexible programming SAVE command If the SAVE command has been used to define the inte...

Page 690: ...lling the ASUB outside program operation ASUB activation states ASUBs interrupt routines can also be enabled in the program states or operating modes listed below in addition to AUTOMATIC mode and MDA JOG JOG REF MDA Teach In MDA Teach In REF MDA Teach In JOG MDA REF MDA JOG AUTOMATIC stopped ready Not referenced be activated If an interrupt routine is activated in JOG or REF mode it will interrup...

Page 691: ...ority level The priority specified in this machine data covers all priority levels from 1 up to the specified level Effect of VDI signals on mode group channels Machine data MD11600 MN_BAG_MASK definition of mode group can be set to control the effect of mode group signals mode group reset mode group stop axes and spindles mode change disable on mode group channels in which interrupt routines are ...

Page 692: ...vement can be initiated with the Start key Start key Once the ASUB has been executed processing of the interrupted program is resumed Manual mode Channel stopped Interrupt PLC Control system assumes the status internal program execution mode for the addressed channel not evident externally and then activates the ASUB The selected operating mode remains valid The original status is resumed after ex...

Page 693: ...more than needed 4 SETINT 1 PRIO 1 SYNCASUP Define input as ASUB trigger 5 IDS 1 EVERY AC_PATHN 0 5 DO A_OUT_ 9 1 References FBSY Synchronized Actions ASUB with or without REPOS ASUB sequences may be generated for which there is no unambiguous return to an interruption point in the block processing sequence System variable P_REPINF can be used to scan the ASUB to determine whether a REPOS is possi...

Page 694: ...the situation described above the signal Asup Done is not yet set by PLC function block FC9 When an ASUB is completed without REPOS the signals Asub Done and NST DB21 DBX318 0 ASUP is stopped together in time Starting ASUBs in spite of active read in disable and or IPO single block SBL1 To start ASUPs despite active read in disable DB21 DBX6 1 1 read in disable or IPO single block SBL1 the machine...

Page 695: ...ion of the RET and REPOS functions They can be replaced by ASUBs written by the machine tool manufacturer The following points are handled for better management of these routines Activation of user defined system routines as replacement of the systme routine Installation of user system ASUBs Detection of the reason why an ASUP was activated Defining the protection levels of the user routines Activ...

Page 696: ...n of user system ASUBs One routine named _N_ASUP_SPF can be loaded in directory _N_CUS_DIR You must implement the actions desired by the user for RET for Value 1 in MD11610 REPOS for Value 2 in MD11610 Reason for activation of an ASUP and its significance The reason that led to the activation is specified in bit code through the AC_ASUP system variable and can be read in part program and synchroni...

Page 697: ...repeat Continuation With system ASUB REPOS 6 Activation of decoder single block Continuation With system ASUB REPOS 7 Activation of delete distance to go Continuation With system ASUB RET 8 Activation of axis synchronization Continuation With system ASUB REPOS 9 Operating mode switchover Continuation On system ASUB REPOS or RET depending on MD11610 10 Program continuation during TEACHIN or after T...

Page 698: ...12 MN_ASUP_EDIT_PROTECTION_LEVEL protection level of the user specific ASUP program For further information about protection levels refer to References IADC Commissioning Manual Protection Level Concept Single block processing Bit 0 in machine data MD10702 MN_IGNORE_SINGLEBLOCK_MASK prevent single block stop determines whether internal ASUPs or the described user ASUPs are to be executed without i...

Page 699: ...d or repositioning is not possible MD10702 bits 6 and 7 If a stop occurs in a block at the end of block which cannot be reorganized and or repositioned in this situation Jog mode cannot be selected 2 Example Change after JOG operation to a STOPRE block MD10702 bits 6 and 7 If AUTO mode is changed to Jog mode while a STOPRE block is active in addition to system ASUB2 a continuation start will be fo...

Page 700: ...es preprocessing of part program blocks and maintains the relationship between the current block display and the variable values display Note This variant of SBL2 does not maintain an accurate contour In other words as a result of the preprocessing stop a different contour may be generated from the one created without single block mode or with SBL1 Application Debug mode for testing part programs ...

Page 701: ...N50 R10 90 N60 SBLON Reactivate single block N70 M110 N80 Asynchronous subprograms The asynchronous subroutines ASUP1 SYF and ASUP2 SYF started system internally in REORG REPOS can process the system ASUP in one step through the programming of SBLOF Example ASUP SPF N10 SBLOF N20 IF AC_ASUP H200 N30 RET No REPOS on mode change N40 ELSE N50 REPOSA REPOS in all other cases N60 ENDIF N70 RET Constrai...

Page 702: ... ENDIF N150 G1 G91 Z R10 F R11 N160 M17 CYCLE1 is processed for an active single block i e the Start key must be pressed once to process CYCLE1 Example 2 An ASUB which is started by the PLC in order to activate a modified zero offset and tool offsets is to be executed invisibly N100 PROC ZO SBLOF DISPLOF N110 CASE P_UIFRNUM OF 0 GOTOF _G500 1 GOTOF _G54 2 GOTOF _G55 3 GOTOF _G56 4 GOTOF _G57 DEFAU...

Page 703: ...ue to REORG 11 at a Tool selection block 12 At a GET block 13 During a single block type 2 Sequence If an ASUB is activated during the single block for example execution of the ASUB is completed The deceleration movement does not take place until after the end of the ASUB or the first IPO block in which single block suppression is not activated If the velocity is too large for the deceleration to ...

Page 704: ...hannels KA via interface signal Type A or type B single block behavior can be selected for KA channels Type A determines Stop analogous to STOP key Type B determines Stop analogous to stop at block limit Channel classification In one channel KS in a mode group the user should select single block NST DB21 DBX0 4 activate single block Single block type A or B refers to other channels KA of a mode gr...

Page 705: ... the end of the block Channels KA receive a STOPATEND analogous to NST DB21 DBX7 2 NC stop at the block limit All channels are stopped at a block limit at some point in time 2 9 Program control Options 1 Function selection via operator interface or PLC 2 Activation of skip levels 3 Adapting the size of the interpolation buffer 4 Program display modes via an additional basic block display 5 Executi...

Page 706: ...nals are to be set directly Feedback The activated functions are partly signaled back to the PLC from the NCK Table 2 11 Program control Interface signals Function Selection signal Activation signal Feedback signal SKP skip block 0 to 7 SKP skip block 8 to 9 DB21 DBX26 0 26 7 DB21 DBX27 0 27 1 DB21 DBX2 0 2 7 DB21 DBX31 6 31 7 DRY dry run feedrate DB21 DBX24 6 DB21 DBX0 6 DB21 DBX318 6 ROV Rapid t...

Page 707: ...gram test blocks block skipped DB21 DBX2 0 1st skip level N005 block skipped DB21 DBX2 0 1 0 N005 block skipped DB21 DBX2 0 1 1 N010 block skipped DB21 DBX2 1 2 2 N020 block skipped DB21 DBX2 2 3 3 N030 block skipped DB21 DBX2 3 4 4 N040 block skipped DB21 DBX2 4 5 5 N050 block skipped DB21 DBX2 5 6 6 N060 block skipped DB21 DBX2 6 7 7 N070 block skipped DB21 DBX2 7 8 skip level 8 N080 block skipp...

Page 708: ... SC_MAX_BLOCKS_IN_IPOBUFFER max number of blocks in the IPO buffer Values of setting data SD42990 SC_MAX_BLOCKS_IN_IPOBUFFER Value Effect 0 No interpolation buffer limit active The max possible interpolation buffer as set in MD 28060 MM_IPO_BUFFER_SIZE is activated or 1 The minimum permissible interpolation buffer with 2 blocks is activated MM_IPO_BUFFER_SIZE The interpolation buffer is activated ...

Page 709: ...ain on defined events a so called event driven program must be created to do this For example this setting data could always be set to a predefined value on RESET Application The IPO buffer limitation can be used whenever the number of blocks between block preparation and interpolation must be minimized e g when actual positions in the part program must be read and processed for other purposes Exa...

Page 710: ...ds on the number of prepared blocks in the NCK preprocessing buffer in the relevant processing state If a preprocessing stop is processed the number of display blocks is reduced to zero and increases again after the stop is acknowledged In the case of REORG events e g mode change ASUB start the display blocks stored for Look Ahead are deleted and preprocessed again afterwards Processed values Valu...

Page 711: ...UNIT 0 to MD17200 MN_GMMC_INFO_UNIT 3 allowing them to be accessed from the NCK Activating The basic block display is activated by MD 28400 MC_MM_ABSBLOCK by means of Power On If MD28400 MC_MM_ABSBLOCK is set to 1 a channelspecific display buffer FIFO is created during power up Size of display buffer FIFO MD28060 MC_MM_IPO_BUFFER_SIZE MD28070 MC_MM_NUM_BLOCKS_IN_PREP multiplied by 128 bytes This c...

Page 712: ...se values for measurements in radius diameter according to G code group 29 can be manipulated using the following options G code DIAMCYCOF expansion of channel specific diameter programming This G code deactivates the channel specific diameter programming during the cycle execution In this way computations in the cycle can always be done in the radius The position display and the basic block displ...

Page 713: ...de of the active compressor The second contains the string as character for missing display blocks Example G0 X10 Y10 Z10 Block to be preprocessed for the basic block display COMPCAD Compressor for optimized surface quality CAD prog A string as character for missing display blocks To avoid bottlenecks in the NCK performance the basic block display is deactivated automatically As a sign that the di...

Page 714: ...xpanded Skip identifiers and comments are omitted Block number and labels are transferred from the original block but omitted if DISPLOF is active The number of decimal places is defined in display machine data MD 9004 MD 9010 and MD 9011 via the HMI HMI display machine data Access in NCK machine data MD9004 MM_DISPLAY_RESOLUTION MD17200 MN_GMMC_INFO_NO_UNIT 0 MD9011 MM_DISPLAY_RESOLUTION_INCH MD1...

Page 715: ...dress extension are displayed in the form din_address constant Original block Display block N410 DEF REAL FEED 1 5 N420 F FEED N420 F1 5 The following applies for H functions Each programmed value is displayed irrespective of the output type for the PLC M22110 MC_AUXFU_H_TYPE_INT For Tool selection by tool command display information is generated in the form T value or T string If an address exten...

Page 716: ...T A display block is always generated for part program lines in which the addresses F and FA appear including for MD22240 MC_AUXFU_F_SYNC_TYPE 3 Original block Display block N630 F1000 N630 F1000 N640 X100 N640 X100 The display blocks generated for the block display are derived directly from the programmed part program blocks If intermediate blocks e g tool radius compensation G41 G42 radius chamf...

Page 717: ...MI Advanced HMI Embedded and the acquired options external program memories may be stored on the following data carriers CompactFlash card USB drive Network drive Local hard disk Note Execution from external source via USB interface with SINUMERIK solution line If external programs are to be transferred from an external USB drive via a USB interface only the interface via X203 named TCU_1 can be u...

Page 718: ...c NC memory for executing a program in the Executing from external mode main program or subroutine Size of FIFO buffer The size of the FIFO buffer is set in the machine data MD18360 MN_MM_EXT_PROG_BUFFER_SIZE FIFO buffer size for processing from external Default 30 kbyte Number of the FIFO buffer One FIFO buffer must be provided each for all programs main run or subroutine that are executed simult...

Page 719: ... in the Execution from external source mode with the help of the EXTCALL part program instruction Preconditions The following preconditions are applicable to the execution from external subroutines The subroutines must be accessible via the directory structure of the operator interface A reloading memory FIFO buffer must be reserved for each subprogram in the dynamic NC memory Parameterization The...

Page 720: ...program execution is cancelled EXTCALL call with relative path name without path name In the event of an EXTCALL call with a relative path name or without a path name the available program memories are searched as follows 1 If a path name is preset in SD42700 the data specified in the EXTCALL call program name or with relative path name is searched for first starting from this path The absolute pa...

Page 721: ...AIN N020 N030 EXTCALL ROUGHING N040 N050 M30 The _N_ROUGHING_SPF subprogram to be reloaded is stored on the local hard disk in the directory _N_WKS_DIR _N_WST1 The subprogram path is preset in SD42700 SD42700 SC_EXT_PROG_PATH _N_WKS_DIR _N_WST1 N010 PROC ROUGHING N020 G1 F1000 N030 X Y Z N040 N999999 M17 2 Execution from network drive Systems SINUMERIK solution line powerline with HMI sl HMI Advan...

Page 722: ...ing after Reset part program start MD20150 MC_GCODE_RESET_VALUES RESET position of G groups and its extension MD20152 MC_GCODE_RESET_MODE defining the initial controller setting during Reset and MD20112 MC_START_MODE_MASK defining initial controller setting after part program start For certain applications e g grinding it is advisable not to capture the reset position of individual functions until...

Page 723: ...revolutional feedrate off and setting for path and synchronous axes reset to master spindle Geometry axis assignment in MD 20050 AXCONF_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB Master value coupling is no longer active Basic frame is deselected Electronic gear is no longer active Master spindle Initial setting in MD 20090 SPIND_DEF_MASTER_SPIND Master toolholder Initial setting in MD 20124 TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TOOLHOLDER Tran...

Page 724: ...VVXPHV HLWKHU LWV 5HVHW VHWWLQJ RU UHWDLQV WKH FXUUHQW VHWWLQJ VHH WDEOHV EHORZ 7KH FXUUHQW VHWWLQJV DUH UHWDLQHG 7KH VHWWLQJV DFWLYDWHG YLD 5 6 7 DUH DSSOLHG FRGHV LQ 0 7RRO OHQJWK FRPSHQVDWLRQ RII 7UDQVIRUPDWLRQ RII RXSOHG PRWLRQ RII 7DQJHQWLDO IROORZ XS RII 6 QFKURQRXV VSLQGOH RII HRPHWU D LV DVVLJQPHQW LQ 0 0DVWHU YDOXH FRXSOLQJ RII LDO UHYROXWLRQDO IHHGUDWH RII UHVHUYHG EDVLF IUDPH RII 0DVWHU...

Page 725: ...0120 MC_TOOL_RESET_VALUE MD20121 MC_TOOL_PRESEL_RESET_VALUE and MD20130 MC_CUTTING_EDGE_RESET_VALUE if Bits 2 and 6 in MD20110 1 the tool length compensations selected on Power On otherwise WLK according to MD20120 MD20121 MD20130 G Codes according to MD20150 MC_GCODE_RESET_VALUES No coupled axis groups active No tangential follow on active nonconfigured Synchronous spindle coupling is switched of...

Page 726: ...e after POWER ON no effect when tool management active Use active tool or tool offset from last program terminated before program testing activated Plane according to MD20150 MC_GCOD E_ RESET_ VALUES in SW 5 and higher replaced by MD 20152 index 5 see below Frame according to MD20150 MC_GCOD E_ RESET_ VALUES in SW 5 and higher replaced by MD 20152 index 7 see below WZK according to MD20120 MC_TOOL...

Page 727: ...g of the master spindle is retained The current setting of the master tool holder is retained Bit 13 0 Bit 14 0 Bit 15 0 Bit 16 0 Bit 17 0 Guide value coupling is separated Basic frame is deselected The active electronic gears are retained Initial setting for the master spindle according to MD20090 Initial setting for the master tool holder according to MD20124 RESET response of master spindle Up ...

Page 728: ... 0 1 MD20150 MC_GCODE_RESET_VALUES i The value stored in MD20150 is active The last active current value is active Note The previous setting option in machine data MD20110 MC_RESET_MODE_MASK is omitted The corresponding bits of this MD are tagged as reserved Write operations involving these bits are automatically redirected to the corresponding array elements of MD20150 MC_GCODE_RESET_MODE and Ala...

Page 729: ..._CUTTING_ EDGE_RESET_VALUE Output of D T M to PLC depending on bit 1 Transformatio n according to MD20140 MC_TRAFO_ RESET_VALU E Bit 1 0 Bit 2 0 Bit 3 0 Bit 4 0 Bit 5 0 Bit 6 0 Bit 7 0 D T M output on tool selection with active tool management irrelevant Reserved Reserved Current plane is retained Current settable frame is retained Active tool length offset is retained Active transformation is ret...

Page 730: ...ned Note In MD20110 MC_RESET_MODE_MASK bits set to 1 cause settings to be retained In MD20112 MC_START_MODE_MASK bits set to 0 cause settings to be retained Significance of the machine data The channelspecific machine data in the table has the following significance Details are specified in section NO TAG MD20120 MC_TOOL_RESET_VALUE Restart tool length compensation Definition of tool T No whose to...

Page 731: ... Assignment of geometry axis to channel axis affects Bit 12 in MD 20110 20112 MD20118 MC_GEOAX_CHANGE_RESET Allow automatic geometry axis change affects Bit 12 in MD20110 20112 Example 1 Activate RESET setting on RESET MD20110 H01 Bit 0 MD20112 0 2 Transformation remains active on RESET part program start MD20110 H81 Bit 0 Bit 7 MD20112 0 3 Tool length compensation remains active on RESET part pro...

Page 732: ...sation selection Spindle related functions are defined for synchronous spindle coupling Gear stage change automatic change or direct gear stage Spindle positioning with SPOS SPOSA and M19 For further information refer to Chapter M Function Replacement and Replacement of Tool Programming as well as Spindle related Replacements in Synchronous Mode Replacement of M T D DL auxiliary functions The repl...

Page 733: ...0 _N_CMA_DIR default value MD15702 1 _N_CUS_DIR MD15702 2 _N_CST_DIR Call time of the replacement subroutine While replacing the tool programming the call time of the replacement subroutine depends on the set Bit 1 and Bit 2 of machine data MD10719 MN_D_NO_FCT_CYCLE_MODE Note The M T and D DL values transferred to the replacement subroutine have not yet been executed and must be reprogrammed in th...

Page 734: ...If the M function configured with MD10715 MC_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE is programmed in a part program block the appropriate subroutine is called at the end of the part program block If the M function is programmed again within the called subroutine the M function is not replaced again In addition other M function expansions configured with MD10715 MC_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE or MD10716 MC_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME are not ...

Page 735: ...iary Function Outputs to PLC H2 M functions can be defined for specific tasks using the following machine data Through this they receive a fixed meaning and therefore must not be used to call subroutines Machine data Specific tasks MD10714 MN_M_NO_FCT_EOP M function for spindle active after RESET MD10804 MN_EXTERN_CHAN_M_NO_SET_INT M function for ASUB activation external mode MD10806 MN_EXTERN_CHA...

Page 736: ...r DL can be defined with the MD11717 MN_D_NO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME n UP name for T function replacement The call timing for T and D or DL function replacement can be set with the MD10719 MN_D_NO_FCT_CYCLE_MODE Bit 1 and Bit 2 parameterization of T function replacement Assigning subroutines The machine data MD10717 MN_T_NO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME is used to assign a subroutine to the T command MD11717 MN_D_NO_FCT_...

Page 737: ... the tool change are no longer processed Timing of the call at block start and at block end M10719 Bit 2 1 The replacement program is called twice Note Which replacements are to be performed at the block start and which are to be performed at the block end is up to the user Configuration of transfer of D or DL function to the replacement cycle The T function replacement permits the use of machine ...

Page 738: ...ction replacement for tool change Calling a tool change program with M function The following machine data are used to configure M function replacement for calling the tool change program MD10715 MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE M function to be replaced by a subroutine MD10716 MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME Name of the subroutine for M function MD10718 MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE_PAR M function replacement with parameters The in...

Page 739: ...avior is applicable in case of a conflict i e T and M function for tool change are in one block The T function replacement does not take place Instead the T value is made available to the M function replacement via the appropriate C_T system variables The programming of the address T in the M function subroutine does not result in another replacement Note Configuration of MD10718 MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE...

Page 740: ... not be transferred to the replacement subroutine In a part program line only one of the above mentioned replacement subroutines can be processed at a time In case of multiple replacements of the T D DL addresses and the M Function for the call of the tool change program only one of the replacement subroutines is always active even under different names As described above all the required paramete...

Page 741: ...identifier string with tool management only C_D_PROG TRUE if address D has been programmed C_D Value of address D C_DL_PROG TRUE if address DL has been programmed C_DL Value of address DL C_M_PROG TRUE if M function was programmed for tool change C_M Value of replaced address M integer There are two different cases 1 The replacement subroutine for the tool change configured with MD10718 MN_M_NO_FC...

Page 742: ... MY_T_CYCLE T replacement cycle N310 D1 N320 G90 G0 X100 Y100 Z50 D1 is active N330 D2 X110 Z0 T5 D2 is activated D2 is not transferred to the T replacement cycle as a variable N340 M6 T5 is activated Example also with parameter transfer on tool change with M6 active and MD10719 1 A replacement cycle for T and M6 has been configured In addition MD10718 MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE_PAR M Function replacement ...

Page 743: ...her address T has been programmed N120 T C_TE C_T Execute T selection N130 ENDIF N140 M C_ME 6 Execute tool change N150 IF C_D_PROG TRUE Scan whether address D has been programmed N160 D C_D Execute D selection N170 ENDIF N190 M17 Replacement of T address and D or DL addresses at block start Example Tool change occurs with address T thus without M code Tool management not active B axis as indexing...

Page 744: ...0 D C_D Select offset D selection N4320 ENDIF N4400 IF C_DL_PROG TRUE Scan whether address DL has been programmed N4410 Replacement for address DL N4420 D C_DL Select insert offset N4430 ENDIF N9999 RET This causes the part program line N410 G01 F1000 X10 T1 5 D1 to execute the following program N1000 PROC D_T_SUB_PROG DISPLOF SBLOF Replacement subroutine N4100 IF C_T_PROG TRUE Scan whether addres...

Page 745: ...configured with different names Replacement Configuration of replacement subroutines For Address D and DL MD11717 MN_FCT_CYCLE_NAME D_SUB_PROG For Address T MD10717 MN_FCT_CYCLE_NAME T_SUB_PROG For the call of the tool change program MD10716 MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME 0 M6_SUB_PROG MD10715 MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE 0 6 for the M function MD10718 MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE_PAR 0 Parameterization MD22550 MC_TOOL_CHANGE_...

Page 746: ...POSA and M19 The automatic gear stage change takes place in speed programming based on the spindle speed S of the leading spindle and active M40 Note The replacement is executed only if the programmed spindle is active as the leading spindle of a synchronous spindle coupling and the leading and following spindles are located in the same channel How the synchronous spindle coupling was activated is...

Page 747: ... line that led to the calling of the subroutine is processed after the subroutine is processed The parts to be replaced from the replacement subroutine are not processed any more Call at block end During call at block end the part program line that lead to the calling of the subroutine is called first The parts to be replaced in the replacement subroutine are processed The subroutine is called fin...

Page 748: ..._LANG_SUB_MASK Bit 0 1 The system variable P_SUB_AXFCT delivers a bit mask that corresponds to machine data MD30465 MA_AXIS_LANG_SUB_MASK A set bit provides information about the spindle related replacement that is currently active Call time of the replacement subroutine While programming the gear stage change with M41 to M45 the output response of this auxialiary function to the PLC depends on bi...

Page 749: ...the active coupling delivers the axis identifier of the leading spindle of the active coupling that triggered the replacement operation Outside the replacement operation the variable terminates the program processing P_SUB_CA Following spindle of the active coupling delivers the axis identifier of the following spindle of the active coupling that triggered the replacement operation Outside the rep...

Page 750: ... Activate synchronous spindle coupling N1200 ENDIF N9999 RET Example of replacement subroutine for gear stage change Using the system variables P_SUB_LA and P_SUB_CA N1000 PROC LANG_SUB DISPLOF SBLOF N1010 DEF AXIS _LA Auxiliary memory for leading axis leading spindle N1020 DEF AXIS _CA Auxiliary memory for following axis following spindle N1030 DEF INT _GEAR Auxiliary memory for gear stage N1100 ...

Page 751: ...ine data MD30465 MA_AXIS_LANG_SUB_MASK A set bit provides information about the spindle related replacement that is currently active Call time of the replacement subroutine The call of the replacement subroutine during spindle positioning with SPOS or SPOSA always takes place at the block start The programming of M19 depends on the call time on Bit 5 6 7 of the machine data MD22080 MC_AUXFU_PREDEF...

Page 752: ...UB_SPOSIT SPOS SPOSA position Delivers the the programmed position to the configured NC language replacement If this variable is called outside this replacement operation the program processing is cancelled with Alarm 14055 P_SUB_SPOSMODE Position travel mode Delivers the position travel mode for the spindle position delivered by P_SUB_SOPSIT to the configured NC language replacement 0 DC 1 AC 2 I...

Page 753: ...ing spindle N2210 IF P_SUB_SPOS TRUE OR P_SUB_SPOSA TRUE N2220 Position spindle with SPOS N2230 CASE P_SUB_SPOSMODE OF 0 GOTO LABEL_DC 1 GOTO LABEL_IC 2 GOTO LABEL_AC 3 GOTO LABEL_DC 4 GOTO LABEL_ACP 5 GOTO LABEL_ACN DEFAULT GOTOF LABEL_ERR LABEL_DC SPOS 1 DC P_SUB_SPOSIT SPOS 2 DC P_SUB_SPOSIT GOTOF LABEL_CONT LABEL_IC DELAYFSTOF SPOS 1 IC P_SUB_SPOSIT SPOS 2 IC P_SUB_SPOSIT DELAYFSTON GOTOF LABE...

Page 754: ...of the leading spindle temporarily N2180 _CSPI AXTOSPI _LA Save the number of the following spindle temporarily N2185 DELAYFSTON Start Stop Delay Area N2190 COUPOF _CA _LA Deactivate synchronous spindle coupling N2200 Position leading and following spindle N2210 IF P_SUB_SPOS TRUE OR P_SUB_SPOSA TRUE N2220 Position spindle with SPOS N2230 CASE P_SUB_SPOSMODE OF 0 GOTO LABEL_DC 1 GOTO LABEL_IC 2 GO...

Page 755: ...SUB_NAME is called The system variables P_SUB_AXFCT delivers 1 for gear stage change P_SUB_STAT also delivers the value 1 for replacement subroutine is active call at block start 2 Transfer of the required data in replacement subroutine The programmed gear stage M41 to M45 or the calculated gear stage in the replacement subroutine is queried during automatic gear stage change M40 S in the replacem...

Page 756: ...routine The positioning command to be replaced can be determined with P_SUB_SPOS P_SUB_SPOSA or P_SUB_M19 System variables P_SUBPOSIT or P_SUBPOSMODE are used to query the start position or path and the position travel mode that must be used P_SUB_LA delivers the axis identifier of the leading spindle and P_SUB_CA delivers the axis identifier of the first following spindle involved in the coupling...

Page 757: ... subroutine end at the PLC Bit0 Return jump with RET No stop at end of subroutine If the replacement cycle has the DISPLOF attribute the program line that has resulted in the replacement cycle call is displayed as the current block in the block display With DELAYFSTON and DELAYFSTOF areas or even the entire replacement cycle can be protected against interruptions such as NC Stop read in disable et...

Page 758: ... spindle coupling It is detected by the system only if the leading spindle is located in the channel in which the coupling was closed If the leading spindle is changed to another channel then a gear stage change or a repositioning of this spindle does not lead to the desired call in the replacement cycle Only the actions required for the respective replacements can be performed in the replacement ...

Page 759: ...technological processes via system variable NC specific system variable The following NC specific system variables are available Names Significance Description AN_SETUP_TIME Time since the last control powerup with default values Cold start in min Count the time since the last control system run up with default values Is reset automatically in case of each control system run up with default values...

Page 760: ...alled in the Automatic mode It is reset automatically with each control system run up AC_CYCLE_TIME Runtime of the selected NC program in s always only one active per channel The runtime between the NC Start and the end of program NC reset is measured in the selected NC program It is reset automatically when a new NC program is started AC_CUTTING_TIME Tool operating time in s The runtime of the pa...

Page 761: ...the measurement for the total runtime and the tool action time measurement also with program test MC_PROCESSTIMER_MODE H25 2 12 3 Workpiece counter Functionality The Workpiece counter function makes available various channel specific system variables specifically for counting workpieces AC_REQUIRED_PARTS Number of workpieces to be completed setpoint workpieces AC_TOTAL_PARTS Number of completed wo...

Page 762: ...MCODE 0 AC_TOTAL_PARTS 1 8 1 AC_ACTUAL_PARTS is active 0 With M2 M30 AC_ACTUAL_PARTS 1 9 1 Equality under M function of MC_PART_COUNTER_MCODE 1 AC_ACTUAL_PARTS 1 12 1 AC_SPECIAL_PARTS is active 0 With M2 M30 AC_SPECIAL_PARTS 1 13 1 Equality under M function of MC_PART_COUNTER_MCODE 2 AC_SPECIAL_PARTS 1 MD27882 MC_PART_COUNTER_MCODE Index workpiece counting via user specific M function Index Signif...

Page 763: ...TAL_PARTS 1 Note MC_PART_COUNTER_MCODE 0 has no significance Activation of workpiece counter AC_ACTUAL_PARTS MD27880 MC_PART_COUNTER H300 MD27882 MC_PART_COUNTER_MCODE 1 17 For each M17 AC_ACTUAL_PARTS 1 Activation of workpiece counter AC_SPECIAL_PARTS MD27880 MC_PART_COUNTER H3000 MD27882 MC_PART_COUNTER_MCODE 2 77 For each M77 AC_SPECIAL_PARTS 1 Deactivation of workpiece counter AC_ACTUAL_PARTS ...

Page 764: ...Detailed description 2 12 Program runtime workpiece counter Basic logic functions Mode group channel program operation reset response K1 206 Function Manual 11 2006 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 ...

Page 765: ...Basic logic functions Mode group channel program operation reset response K1 Function Manual 11 2006 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 207 Supplementary conditions 3 There are no supplementary conditions to note ...

Page 766: ...Supplementary conditions Basic logic functions Mode group channel program operation reset response K1 208 Function Manual 11 2006 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 ...

Page 767: ...ctions Mode group channel program operation reset response K1 Function Manual 11 2006 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 209 Examples 4 The examples appear with the descriptions in the individual sections of the function descriptions ...

Page 768: ...Examples Basic logic functions Mode group channel program operation reset response K1 210 Function Manual 11 2006 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 ...

Page 769: ... Channel valid in mode group 10280 PROG_FUNCTION_MASK Compare commands and compatible to SW 6 3 10700 PREPROCESSING_LEVEL Program preprocessing level 10702 IGNORE_SINGLEBLOCK_MASK Prevent single block stop 10707 PROG_TEST_MASK Program test modes 10708 SERUPRO_MASK Block change modes 10710 PROG_SD_RESET_SAVE_TAB Setting data to be updated 10713 M_NO_FCT_STOPRE M function with preprocessing stop 107...

Page 770: ...OG_BUFFER_SIZE FIFO buffer size for one program level 18362 MM_EXT_PROG_NUM Number of external program levels DRAM 5 1 2 Channelspecific machine data 5 1 2 1 Basic machine data Number Identifier MC_ Description 20000 CHAN_NAME Channel name 20050 AXCONF_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB Assignment of geometry axis to channel axis 20060 AXCONF_GEOAX_NAME_TAB Geometry axis name in channel 20070 AXCONF_MACHAX_USED Mac...

Page 771: ...h constant velocity 20600 MAX_PATH_JERK Pathrelated maximum jerk 20610 ADD_MOVE_ACCEL_RESERVE Acceleration reserve for overlaid movements 20700 REFP_NC_START_LOCK NC start disable without reference point 20750 ALLOW_GO_IN_G96 G0 logic in G96 20800 SPF_END_TO_VDI Subprogram end to PLC 21000 CIRCLE_ERROR_CONST Circle end point monitoring constant 21010 CIRCLE_ERROR_FACTOR Circle end point monitoring...

Page 772: ...at special NC Start after power up and at RESET 5 1 2 4 Auxiliary function settings Number Identifier MC_ Description 22000 AUXFU_ASSIGN_GROUP Auxiliary function group 22010 AUXFU_ASSIGN_TYPE Auxiliary function type 22020 AUXFU_ASSIGN_EXTENSION Auxiliary function extension 22030 AUXFU_ASSIGN_VALUE Auxiliary function value 22200 AUXFU_M_SYNC_TYPE Output timing of M functions 22210 AUXFU_S_SYNC_TYPE...

Page 773: ...tion 5 in channel 24432 TRAFO_AXES_IN_5 Axis assignment for transformation 5 24434 TRAFO_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB_5 Assignment between GEO axis and channel axis for transformation 5 24440 TRAFO_TYPE_6 Definition of transformation 6 in channel 24442 TRAFO_AXES_IN_6 Axis assignment for transformation 6 24444 TRAFO_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB_6 Assignment between GEO axis and channel axis for transformation 6 24450 TRA...

Page 774: ... Description 25000 REORG_LOG_LIMIT Percentage of IPO buffer for log file enable 28000 MM_REORG_LOG_FILE_MEM Memory size for REORG DRAM 28010 MM_NUM_REORG_LUD_MODULES Number of blocks for local user variables for REORG DRAM 28020 MM_NUM_LUD_NAMES_TOTAL Number of local user variables DRAM 28030 MM_NUM_LUD_NAMES_PER_PROG Number of local user variables per program DRAM 28040 MM_LUD_VALUES_MEM availabl...

Page 775: ...ate the runtime measurement 27880 PART_COUNTER Activate the workpiece counter 27882 PART_COUNTER_MCODE Workpiece counting via M command 5 1 3 Axis spindlespecific machine data Number Identifier MA_ Description 30465 AXIS_LANG_SUB_MASK Substitution of NC language commands 30550 AXCONF_ASSIGN_MASTER_CHAN Reset position of channel for axis change 30600 FIX_POINT_POS Fixed value positions of axes with...

Page 776: ...read 42010 THREAD_RAMP_DISP Starting and deceleration distance of feed axis in thread cutting 42100 DRY_RUN_FEED Dry run feedrate 42200 SINGLEBLOCK2_STOPRE Activate debug mode for SBL2 42444 TARGET_BLOCK_INCR_PROG Continuation mode after block search with calculation 42700 EXT_PROG_PATH Name of an external program path for subroutine call EXTCALL 42750 ABSBLOCK_ENABLE Enable basic block display 42...

Page 777: ...1 Signals to NC DB number Byte Bit Description 10 56 1 EMERGENCY STOP 5 3 2 Signals to NC DB number Byte Bit Description 10 56 1 EMERGENCY STOP 5 3 3 Signals to NC DB number Byte Bit Description 10 56 1 EMERGENCY STOP 5 3 4 Signals to NC DB number Byte Bit Description 10 56 1 EMERGENCY STOP 5 3 5 Signals to NC DB number Byte Bit Description 10 56 1 EMERGENCY STOP ...

Page 778: ...e K1 220 Function Manual 11 2006 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 5 3 6 Signals to NC DB number Byte Bit Description 10 56 1 EMERGENCY STOP 5 3 7 Signals from axis spindle DB number Byte Bit Description 31 70 0 REPOS offset 31 70 1 REPOS offset valid 31 70 2 REPOS Delay Ack 31 72 0 REPOSDELAY 31 76 2 Path axis ...

Page 779: ...calculation in program test mode SERUPRO type 5 33 without calculation type 1 33 Block search SERUPRO 46 Automatic interrupt pointer 71 Conditions for axis functions 79 Control REPOS with VDI interface signals 57 Coupled axes 78 Definition SERUPRO ASUB 48 Definition SERUPRO operation 48 Delayed approach of axis with REPOS offset 55 Gear stage change 80 Initial setting 82 Master slave 77 Overlaid m...

Page 780: ...6 19 DBX0 1 16 DBX0 2 16 DBX0 5 14 DBX0 6 14 DBX0 7 14 91 DBX07 7 88 DBX1 0 17 DBX1 1 17 DBX1 2 17 DBX1 6 129 DBX1 7 129 DBX26 4 20 DBX26 5 20 DBX4 0 16 DBX4 1 16 DBX4 2 16 DBX4 4 88 DBX46 4 20 DBX46 5 20 DBX5 0 17 DBX5 1 17 DBX5 2 17 DBX6 0 16 19 DBX6 1 16 19 DBX6 2 16 19 DBX6 3 14 DBX6 4 20 DBX6 5 20 DBX6 7 14 DBX7 0 17 19 DBX7 1 17 19 DBX7 2 17 20 DB21 D35 5 89 DBB35 47 104 DBX0 4 29 DBX0 6 31 ...

Page 781: ...103 Part program end 102 Part program start 102 Startup 104 Eventcontrolled program sequences 101 Part program start and part program end 104 Execute external subroutine 140 EXT_ZERO_POINT 112 External program memory 140 F Feed stop 93 FIFO Buffer 141 Function selection via operator panel front or PLC 130 G G groups 85 Gap 14 H Hold block 69 I ID check 180 Implicit preprocessing stop 73 INIT_SYNC ...

Page 782: ...8 152 MD20120 152 MD20121 152 MD20130 152 MD20140 152 MD20150 23 85 144 152 MD20152 144 152 MD20610 114 MD21200 114 MD21202 114 MD21330 152 MD22080 155 167 170 MD22254 156 MD22256 156 MD22510 85 MD22550 159 162 163 MD22560 157 161 MD22600 63 MD22601 64 78 MD22620 50 82 MD22621 49 MD22680 71 MD26008 157 MD26012 157 MD27800 24 MD27860 179 MD27880 180 181 MD27882 180 181 MD28060 132 135 MD28400 135 M...

Page 783: ...repetition 96 99 100 PROGRESETREPEAT 111 R Rapid traverse 179 Reaching simulated target point for LEAD with JOG 77 Read in disable 93 Reorganizing 115 Replace system ASUB via user ASUB 121 Replacement of addresses T and D DL at block start 163 Replacement of NC language commands 165 Replacement subroutines Call time during gear stage change M41 to M45 167 Call time during M19 gear stage change 170...

Page 784: ...cement subroutine and path 166 Stop events Classification 110 Evaluation 110 Influencing 110 Stop criteria 111 STOP_ALARM 112 STOPALL 111 STOPATEND_ALARM 112 STOPATIPOBUF_EMPTY_ALARM_REORG 112 STOPATIPOBUFFER_ISEMPTY_ALARM 112 STOPPROG 111 STOPPROGATASUPEND 112 STOPPROGATBLOCKEND 111 STOPRUN 112 Subroutine call Replacement subroutine for gear stage change 167 Replacement subroutine for spindle pos...

Page 785: ...7 0BP10 2BA0 Valid for Control SINUMERIK 840D sl 840DE sl SINUMERIK 840Di sl 840DiE sl SINUMERIK 840D powerline 840DE powerline SINUMERIK 840Di powerline 840DiE powerline SINUMERIK 810D powerline 810DE powerline Software Version NCU system software for 840D sl 840DE sl 1 3 NCU system software for 840D sl DiE sl 1 0 NCU system software for 840D 840DE 7 4 NCU system software for 840Di 840DiE 3 3 NCU...

Page 786: ...ommissioning and operation of a device system may only be performed by qualified personnel Within the context of the safety notes in this documentation qualified persons are defined as persons who are authorized to commission ground and label devices systems and circuits in accordance with established safety practices and standards Prescribed Usage Note the following Warning This device may only b...

Page 787: ...Reference points in working space 35 2 2 2 Position of coordinate systems and reference points 37 2 3 Coordinate systems 38 2 3 1 Overview 38 2 3 2 Machine coordinate system MCS 40 2 3 3 Basic coordinate system BCS 42 2 3 4 Additive offsets 44 2 3 5 Basic zero system BZS 47 2 3 6 Settable zero system SZS 49 2 3 7 Workpiece coordinate system WCS 51 2 4 Frames 52 2 4 1 Overview 52 2 4 2 Frame compon...

Page 788: ...frames 107 2 4 7 Predefined frame functions 108 2 4 7 1 Inverse frame 108 2 4 7 2 Additive frame in frame chain 112 2 4 8 Functions 113 2 4 8 1 Setting zeros workpiece measuring and tool measuring 113 2 4 8 2 Zero offset external via system frames 114 2 4 8 3 Toolholder 114 2 4 9 Subroutine return with SAVE 126 2 4 10 Data backup 127 2 4 11 Positions in the coordinate system 128 2 4 12 Control sys...

Page 789: ...frames K2 Function Manual 11 2006 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 5 5 2 Setting data 152 5 2 1 Channelspecific setting data 152 5 3 System variables 153 5 4 Signals 155 5 4 1 Signals from channel 155 5 4 2 Signals to axis spindle 155 5 4 3 Signals from axis spindle 155 Index 157 ...

Page 790: ...Table of contents Basic logic functions Axes coordinate systems frames K2 6 Function Manual 11 2006 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 ...

Page 791: ...stem the basic coordinate system BCS By using FRAMES offset rotation scaling mirroring it is possible to image geometry axes of the workpiece coordinate system WCS on the BCS Special axes In contrast to geometry axes no geometrical relationship is defined between the special axes Path axes Path axes are interpolated together all the path axes of a channel have a common path interpolator All the pa...

Page 792: ...he channel axis in the channel MD10000 MN_AXCONF_MACHAX_NAME_TAB machine axis name MD35000 MA_SPIND_ASSIGN_TO_MACHAX assignment of spindle to machine axis Replaceable geometry axes The Replaceable geometry axes function allows the geometry axes in a grouping to be replaced by other channel axes Axes that are initially configured as synchronous special axes in a channel can replace any selected geo...

Page 793: ... entry in a circular buffer location contains A local axis Or A link axis The axis container function is described in References FB2 Function Manual Expansion Functions Multiple Operator Panels on Multiple NCUs Distributed Systems B3 1 2 Coordinate systems MCS The machine coordinate system MCS has the following properties It is defined by the machine axes The machine axes can be perpendicular to e...

Page 794: ... translated rotated scaled or mirrored with FRAMES TRANS ROT SCALE MIRROR Multiple translations rotational movements etc are also possible Zero offset external The zero offset external has the following properties At a time defined in the PLC a predefined additional zero offset between the basic and the workpiece coordinate systems is activated The magnitudes of the offsets can be set by the follo...

Page 795: ...1 1 FRAME components A FRAME consists of the following components FRAME components Programmable with Rough offset TRANS ATRANS additive translation component CTRANS zero offset for multiple axes G58 axial zero offset Offset Fine offset CFINE G59 axial zero offset Rotation ROT ROTS AROT AROTS CROTS Scaling SCALE ASCALE Mirroring MIRROR AMIRROR Features in relation to axes The rough and fine offsets...

Page 796: ...Rough offset with G58 G58 changes only the absolute translation component rough offset for the specified axis the total of additively programmed translations fine offset is retained Fine offset with G59 G59 is used for axial overwriting of the additively programmed translations for the specified axes that were programmed with ATRANS Frame rotations Orientations in space are defined via frame rotat...

Page 797: ...cording to the formula below P_ACTFRAME P_PARTFRAME P_SETFRAME P_EXTFRAME P_ISO1FRAME P_ISO2FRAME P_ISO3FRAME P_ACTBFRAME P_IFRAME P_TOOLFRAME P_WPFRAME P_TRAFRAME P_PFRAME P_ISO4FRAME P_CYCFRAME Frames with G91 Incremental programming with G91 is defined such that the compensation value is traversed additively to the incrementally programmed value when a zero offset is selected The behavior depen...

Page 798: ... 16 NCU global basic frames Global frames can be used to apply offsets scale factors and mirroring operations to channel and machine axes All basic frames up to 16 global and 16 channel specific are chained to produce total basic frame The standard configuration is designed in such a way that there is at least one basic frame per channel Settable frames can be defined as either NCU global or chann...

Page 799: ...PPDQG D HV 5HFLSURFDWLQJ D HV 3 D HV 6 QFKURQR XVBD HV LQHDU D HV 5RWDU D HV HRPHWU D HV 6SHFLDO D HV K D Q Q H O D H V 3DWK D HV LQHPDWLF WUDQVIRUPDWLRQ 0 D F K L Q H D H V 6SLQGOH D HV DQWU D HV RXSOHG PRWLRQ D HV XLGH YDOXH FRXSOLQJ D HV HHGUDWH GHWHU PLQHG SDWK D HV 5283 2ULHQWDWLRQ D HV Figure 2 1 Relationship between geometry axes special axes and machine axes ...

Page 800: ...2 1 Axes Basic logic functions Axes coordinate systems frames K2 16 Function Manual 11 2006 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 0 D F K L Q H D H V RFDO PDFKLQH D LV LQN D LV YLD 1 8 OLQN Figure 2 2 Local and external machine axes link axes ...

Page 801: ...ic functions Axes coordinate systems frames K2 Function Manual 11 2006 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 17 2 1 2 Machine axes Meaning Machine axes are the axes that actually exist on a machine tool Figure 2 3 Machine axes X Y Z B S on a Cartesian machine ...

Page 802: ...ach special axis is assigned to a channel Geometry axes and additional axes are always traversed in their channel 2 1 4 Geometry axes Meaning The three geometry axes always make up a fictitious rectangular coordinate system By using FRAMES offset rotation scaling mirroring it is possible to image geometry axes of the workpiece coordinate system WCS on the BCS Application Geometry axes are used to ...

Page 803: ... the Z axes can be programmed as the geometry axis in response to an instruction in the part program Activation Axis replacement is activated by the program command GEOAX n channel axis name n 0 Removes an axis from the geometry axis grouping n 1 2 3 Index of the geometry axis GEOAX Establishes the basic setting defined via MD for the assignment of channel axes to geometry axes Channel axis name N...

Page 804: ... Any active DRF offset or zero offset external will remain operative They both act on channel axes The channel axis assignment is not affected by the replacement of geometry axes Replacement of geometry axes All frames protection zones and working area limitations are deleted They may need to be reprogrammed after the replacement operation The system response to replacement of geometry axes is the...

Page 805: ...Value Significance 0 The current configuration of the geometry axes remains unchanged on reset and program start With this setting the response is identical to older software versions without geometry axis replacement 1 The configuration of the geometry axis remains unchanged during reset or parts program end as a function of machine data MD20110 MC_RESET_MODE_MASK and during parts program start a...

Page 806: ...transformation is active Activation of a transformation deletes the programmed geometry axis configuration and replaces it by the geometry axis assignment stored in the machine data of the activated transformation The initial setting defined through MD for the geometry axis configuration becomes effective after deactivating the transformation Should it be necessary to modify the geometry axis assi...

Page 807: ... unchanged G17 G2 X20 I10 F1000 Semicircle in the X Y plane Channel axes XX and V traverse GEOAX 2 W Channel axis W becomes the second geometry axis The first and third geometry axes remain unchanged G17 G2 X20 I10 F1000 Full circle in the X Y plane Channel axes XX and W traverse GEOAX The geometry axis assignment defined via the machine data MD AXCONF_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB is effective i e XX YY and Z...

Page 808: ...ication Typical special axes are Rotary axes Machine tool axes Tool revolver axes Loader axes 2 1 7 Path axes Meaning Path axes are interpolated together all the path axes of a channel have a common path interpolator All the path axes of one channel have the same acceleration phase constant travel phase and delay phase The feedrate programmed under address F path feedrate applies to all the path a...

Page 809: ...s and positioning axes have reached their block end points POSA Block change takes place when the path axes have reached their end of block position Positioning axes continue to traverse beyond block limits to their block end point Concurrent positioning axes differ from positioning axes in that they Only receive their block end points from the PLC Can be started at any time not at block limits Do...

Page 810: ...xis interpolated by the main axis reacts in terms of NC STOP Alarm handling Program control End of program RESET Note The response at the end of the program varies The axis movement need not always be completed and therefore may carry on beyond the end of the program Application Certain axes in the main run can be decoupled at the channel response triggered by the NC program sequence and controlle...

Page 811: ... Synchronous axes take the same time to cover the programmed path as the path axes FGROUP command The command FGROUP specifies whether the axis is a feed defining path axis used to calculate the path velocity or a synchronous axis not used to calculate the path velocity Example N05 G00 G94 G90 M3 S1000 X0 Y0 Z0 N10 FGROUP X Y Axes X Y are path axes Z is a synchronous axis N20 G01 X100 Y100 F1000 P...

Page 812: ...C5397 0BP10 2BA0 Application In the case of helical interpolation FGROUP can be programmed to determine whether The programmed feedrate should be valid on the path all 3 programmed axes are path axes The programmed feedrate should be valid on the circuit 2 axes are path axes and the infeed axis is a synchronous axis ...

Page 813: ...individual axis types MD are used for assignment KDQQHO KDQQHO JHRPHWU D LV JHRPHWU D LV JHRPHWU D LV KDQQHO KDQQHO KDQQHO KDQQHO FKDQQHO D LV FKDQQHO D LV FKDQQHO D LV FKDQQHO D LV FKDQQHO D LV FKDQQHO D LV FKDQQHO D LV FKDQQHO D LV KDQQHO KDQQHO PDFKLQH D LV PDFKLQH D LV PDFKLQH D LV PDFKLQH D LV PDFKLQH D LV PDFKLQH D LV PDFKLQH D LV PDFKLQH D LV 0 01B 21 B0 B1 0 B7 0 0 B63 1 B 66 1B72B0 0 0 B ...

Page 814: ...A machine axis local or link axis need not be assigned to every channel axis according to MD20080 MC_AXCONF_CHANAX_NAME_TAB channel axis name in the channel through MD20070 MC_AXCONF_MACHAX_USED machine axis number valid in channel If the existing concrete machine has a machine axis which has been specifically assigned to a certain channel axis then references to the logical machine axis image MD1...

Page 815: ...alid in channel References FB2 Function Manual Extension Functions Several Control Panels on Multiple NCUs Decentralized Systems B3 Example In the example below a machine tool channel axis is specified without a real machine axis RFDO PDFKLQH D HV DS LQN D LV RQWDLQHU OLQN D HV RQWDLQHU RJLFDO PDFKLQH D LV LPDJH PDFKLQH D LV PDFKLQH D LV PDFKLQH D LV PDFKLQH D LV PDFKLQH D LV PDFKLQH D LV PDFKLQH ...

Page 816: ... number valid in the channel triggers alarms 4346 or 4347 2 1 12 Link axes Significance Link axes are axes which are physically connected to another NCU and whose position is controlled from this NCU Link axes can be assigned dynamically to channels of a different NCU From the perspective of a particular NCU link axes are non local axes The axis container concept is used for the dynamic modificati...

Page 817: ...buted Systems B3 Note The link axis functionality is currently not available with the SINUMERIK 840Di Axis container An axis container is a circular buffer data structure in which local axes and or link axes are assigned to channels The entries in the circular buffer can be shifted cyclically In addition to the direct reference to local axes or link axes the link axis configuration in the logical ...

Page 818: ...V RFDO PDFKLQH D LV VVLJQHG WR 1 8 1 8 0 D LV RFDO PDFKLQH D LV LV FRQWDLQHU VORW 1 8 JOREDO LQ OLQN PHPRU LUFXODU EXIIHU ORFDWLRQ VORW LV FRQWDLQHU LUFXODU EXIIHU ORFDWLRQ VORW LV FRQWDLQHU LUFXODU EXIIHU ORFDWLRQ VORW LV FRQWDLQHU LV FRQWDLQHU VORW RJLFDO PDFKLQH D LV LPDJH LQN D LV ZLWKRXW FRQWDLQHU Figure 2 7 Mapping of channel axes onto axis containers via logical machine axis image Axis cont...

Page 819: ...is obtained from the coordinate axes and the constructive characteristics of the machine The zero of the coordinate system is obtained by defining a suitable reference point on the machine in its neutral position The position of the coordinate systems MCS BCS BZS SZS WCS is determined by means of zeros Zero points Reference points M Machine zero R Reference point W Workpiece zero T Toolholder refe...

Page 820: ...encoders the reference point must be approached every time the control power is switched on The control can only then work with the measuring system and transfer all position values to the coordinate systems Toolholder reference point T The toolholder reference point T is located on the toolholder locator By entering the tool lengths the control calculates the distance between the tool tip TCP Too...

Page 821: ...nce point must be approached each time the control is activated so that the control can transfer all position values to the coordinate system 0 0 0DFKLQH FRRUGLQDWH V VWHP 0 6 0DFKLQH HUR 6SLQGOH RUNSLHFH OHQJWK RUNSLHFH FRRUGLQDWH V VWHP 6 RUNSLHFH HUR Figure 2 8 Position of coordinate systems by machine zero M and workpiece zero W 0DFKLQH HUR 5HIHU HQFH SRLQW 7RROKROGHU 7RROKROGHU UHIHUHQFH SRLQ...

Page 822: ...nate system is related to the workpiece and programming takes place independently of whether the tool or the workpiece is being traversed When programming it is always assumed that the tool traverses relative to the coordinate system of the workpiece which is intended to be stationary Figure 2 10 Right hand rule r HV SHUSHQGLFXODU WR RQH DQRWKHU 5RWDU D HV URWDWLQJ DERXW Figure 2 11 Clockwise rect...

Page 823: ...4 G599 ENS is derived from the BNS The WCS which is the basis for programming is defined by the programmable FRAME UDPH IRU F FOHV SURJUDPPDEOH IUDPH WUDQVIRUPDWLRQV RPH SRVLWLRQ RIIVHW UDPH FKDLQ 6 6 6HWWDEOH HUR 6 VWHP 6 DVLF HUR 6 VWHP 6 RUNSLHFH RRUGLQDWH 6 VWHP 6 DVLF RRUGLQDWH 6 VWHP 0 6 0DFKLQH RRUGLQDWH 6 VWHP KDLQHG V VWHP IUDPHV IRU 3 527 35 6 7 VFUDWFKLQJ HUR RIIVHW H WHUQDO KDLQHG ILHO...

Page 824: ... systems frames K2 40 Function Manual 11 2006 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 2 3 2 Machine coordinate system MCS Machine coordinate system MCS The machine coordinate system MCS is made up of all physically available machine axes Figure 2 13 MCS with machine axes X Y Z B C 5axis milling machine ...

Page 825: ...BA0 41 0 Figure 2 14 MCS with machine axes X Z turning machine Axial preset offset The Preset function can be used to redefine the control zero in the machine coordinate system The preset values act on machine axes Axes do not move when Preset is active Note After Preset the reference points are invalid If possible do not use this function ...

Page 826: ...ndicular axes geometry axes as well as other special axes which are not interrelated geometrically Machine tools without kinematic transformation BCS and MKS always coincide when the BCS can be mapped onto the MCS withouth kinematic transformation e g TRANSMIT face transformation 5 axis transformation and up to three machine axes On such machines machine axes and geometry axes can have the same na...

Page 827: ...H FRRUGLQDWH V VWHP 0 6 LQHPDWLFBWUDQV IRUPDWLRQ 6 6 6 0 6 0 6 Figure 2 16 Kinematic transformation between the MCS and BCS Machine kinematics The workpiece is always programmed in a two or threedimensional rightangled coordinate system WCS However such workpieces are being programmed ever more frequently on machine tools with rotary axes or linear axes not perpendicular to one another Kinematic t...

Page 828: ...QDWH V VWHP 6 DVLF HUR V VWHP 6 HURBRIIVHWBH WHUQDO Figure 2 17 Zero offset external between BCS and BZS Setting the offset values The offset values are set PLC By describing system variables Via the operator panel From menu Current zero offsets NC Program By assigning to system variable AA_ETRANS axis Activation of the offset values The 0 1 edge of the following PLC signal activates the previousl...

Page 829: ...chine data MD28082 MC_MM_SYSTEM_FRAME_MASK System frames SRAM Programming Setting a new offset via the axis specific system variables AA_ETRANS axis Ri The instruction below reads the axisspecific active offset value Ri AA_ETRANS axis Note The read value can then differ from the previously set value if the set value has not yet been activated The read value corresponds to a value set previously if...

Page 830: ...e after RESET with the following machine data setting MD24006 MC_CHSFRAME_RESET_MASK Bit 1 1 The external zero offset in the active system frame is deleted in the data management through the following machine data setting MD24006 MC_CHSFRAME_RESET_MASK Bit 1 0 The following frames are active after RESET System frame for MD24006 MC_CHSFRAME_RESET_MASK Bit 4 1 workpiece reference point MD24006 MC_CH...

Page 831: ...is the basic coordinate system with a basic offset DVLF FRRUGLQDWH V VWHP 6 DVLF HUR V VWHP 6 DVLF RIIVHW Figure 2 18 Basic offset between BCS and BZS Basic offset The basic offset describes the coordinate transformation between BCS and BZS It can be used for example to define the palette window zero The basic offset comprises Zero offset external DRF offset Superimposed motion Chained system fram...

Page 832: ...e basic offset The following settings apply The user can change the basic offset from the part program by means of an operator action and from the PLC If the basic offset is to take effect immediately an ASUB can be started via the PLC using FC9 in order to execute the appropriate G code Note Recommendation to the machine manufacturer Use the 3rd basic offset onwards for your own applications The ...

Page 833: ...e settable zero system SZS is the workpiece coordinate system WCS with a programmable frame viewed from the perspective of the WCS The workpiece zero is defined by the settable FRAMES G54 to G599 6HWWDEOH HUR V VWHP 6 6 DVLF HUR V VWHP 6 Figure 2 20 Settable FRAME G54 G599 between BNS and ENS Programmable offsets act on the settable zero system All programmable offsets refer to the settable zero s...

Page 834: ...ugh the machine data MD9424 MM_MA_COORDINATE_SYSTEM coordinate system for actual value display Value Significance 0 Actual value display in relation to the WCS 1 Actual value display in relation to the SZS Note Display of the current coordinate system When Actual value display in relation to the SZS is active the WCS is still displayed on the HMI operator interface as the coordinate system to whic...

Page 835: ...ion Manual 11 2006 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 51 2 3 7 Workpiece coordinate system WCS Workpiece coordinate system WCS The workpiece coordinate system WCS is the programming basis 6HWWDEOH HUR V VWHP 6 6 RUNSLHFH FRRUGLQDWH V VWHP 6 3URJUDPPDEOHB 5 0 ZLWKB 3B3 5 0 Figure 2 21 Programmable FRAME between SZS and WCS ...

Page 836: ...ine offset rotation only for geometry axes scaling and mirroring TRANS FINE ROT MIRROR SCALE x 10 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 Y 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 z 0 0 0 0 45 0 0 1 chx 10 0 0 1 0 1 chy 0 0 0 0 1 1 chz 0 0 0 0 0 1 a 2 0 0 1 0 2 b 0 0 0 0 1 1 In global frames this is valid for all machine axes TRANS FINE MIRROR SCALE ax1 10 0 0 1 0 1 ax2 0 0 0 0 1 1 ax3 0 0 0 0 0 1 ax4 2 0 0 1 0 2 ax5 0 0 0 0 1 1 Activating a fram...

Page 837: ...nction Manual 11 2006 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 53 2 4 2 Frame components 2 4 2 1 Translation Programming The program commands below are used to program the translation Command Comment P_UIFR 1 CTRANS x 10 y 10 P_UIFR 1 x tr 10 Frame components TRANS x 10 y 10 Prog frame only 7UDQVODWLRQ LQH RIIVHW ...

Page 838: ...rse and fine offset add up to the total offset P_UBFR CTRANS x 10 CFINE x 0 1 CROT x 45 P_UIFR 1 CFINE x 0 5 y 1 0 z 0 1 Access to the individual components of the fine offset is achieved through component specification FI finex P_UIFR P_UIFRNUM x FI Fine offestting can be programmed only if MD18600 MN_FRAME_FINE_TRANS 1 if this is not the case then each assignment of a fine offset to a settable f...

Page 839: ... of rotation about the coordinate axes is determined by means of a right hand rectangular coordinate system with axes X Y and Z Rotations If the rotary motion is in a clockwise direction when looking in the positive direction of the coordinate axis the direction of rotation is positive A B and C identify rotations whose axes are parallel to X Y and Z 5LJKW KDQG UHFWDQJXODU FRRUGLQDWH V VWHP ...

Page 840: ...tion in frame is parameterized through the machine data MD10600 MN_FRAME_ANGLE_INPUT_MODE rotation sequence in FRAME Value Significance 1 RPY notation 2 Euler angle RPY angles Rotations with a RPY angle are carried out in the order Z Y X 5RWDWLRQ DERXW 5RWDWLRQ DERXW 5RWDWLRQ DERXW The angles are only defined ambiguously in the following ranges 180 x 180 90 Y 90 180 z 180 ...

Page 841: ...tations that are larger than the specified angles are entered these are converted to a mode of representation that does not exceed the specified range limits RPY example P_UIFR 1 crot x 10 y 90 z 40 returns on reading back P_UIFR 1 crot x 0 y 90 z 30 P_UIFR 1 crot x 190 y 0 z 200 delivers during reading P_UIFR 1 crot x 170 y 0 z 160 On writing and reading frame rotation components these limits sho...

Page 842: ... to now a rotation in the plane could not be programmed Parameter INT 0 Rotation in the active plane 1 Rotation around z 2 Rotation around y 3 Rotation around x REAL Angle of rotation in degrees RPY 180 x 180 90 y 90 180 z 180 Euler 180 x 180 0 y 180 180 z 180 The user must keep to the named angles in the interests of a unique backward calculation If the limits are violated a unique backward calcu...

Page 843: ...0BP10 2BA0 59 2 4 2 4 Scaling 6 F D O L Q J Programming The program commands below are used to program the scaling P_UIFR 1 CSCALE x 1 y 1 SCALE x 1y 1 P_UIFR 1 x sc 1 2 4 2 5 Mirroring 0LUURULQJ Programming The program commands below are used to program a mirroring P_UIFR 1 CMIRROR x 1 y 1 MIRROR x 1y 1 P_UIFR 1 x mi 1 ...

Page 844: ...ROR CSCALE A spindle can only be assigned to one rotary axis at a time The CROT function can therefore not be programmed withSPI as only geometry axes are permitted forCROT The channel axis identifier or machine axis identifier of the axis belonging to the spindle is always output when decompiling frames even when axis identifiers have been programmed in the part program with SPI If the spindle is...

Page 845: ...V Position vector in BCS V Position vector in WCS 2 4 3 Frames in data management and active frames 2 4 3 1 Overview There are various types of frame system frames basic frames settable frames and the programmable frame Apart from the programmable frame all types have a frame in the data management and an active frame The programmable frame is only active Frames in the data management are stored i...

Page 846: ...UDPHV DVLF IUDPHV 5HVHW WUDQVIRUPDWLRQ FKDQJH 2 FWLYH WRWDO IUDPH KDLQ RI DOO DFWLYH IUDPHV 0 6WDWLF 1 PHPRU 1 8 1 1 WR 3B8 5 3B8 5 Q 3B 5 Q WR 3 B6 78 7 1 8 3B 5 3B75 5 0 3B 3 5 3B722 5 3B 7 5 3B6 7 5 3B3 57 5 3B 5 3B1 5 3B1 5 Q 3B 62 5 0 3B 5 0 3B3 5 0 3B 3 5 0 3B75 5 0 3B 7 5 0 3B 5 0 3B722 5 0 3B 62 5 0 3B 62 5 0 3B 62 5 0 3B3 57 5 0 3B6 7 5 0 3B 7 5 0 3B 7 5 0 ...

Page 847: ...50 MC_FRAME_SAA_MODE save and activate data management frames Bit Significance 0 Data management frames are activated only by programming the P_CHBFRMASK P_NCBFRMASK and P_CHSFRMASK bitmasks G500 G599 activate only the corresponding settable frame The reset response is independent of this 1 Data management frames are not implicitly described by system functions such as TOROT PAROT zero offset exte...

Page 848: ...fined user frames SRAM If the value of this machine data is greater than zero there are no channel specific settable frames The following machine data becomes irrelevant then and is not evaluated MD28080 MC_MM_NUM_USER_FRAMES number of settable frames SRAM The number of global basic frames is parameterized through the following machine data MD18602 MN_MM_NUM_GLOBAL_BASE_FRAMES number of global bas...

Page 849: ...0 3B3 5 0 3B 62 5 0 3B 5 0 3B722 5 0 3B 3 5 0 3B 5 0 3B 7 5 0 WCS Workpiece Coordinate System SZS Settable Zero System BZS Basic Zero System BCS Basic Coordinate System MCS Machine Coordinate System PCS Part Coordinate System ACS Adjustable Coordinate System FCS Foot Coordinate System BCS Basic Coordinate System MCS Machine Coordinate System The current complete frame is calculated according to th...

Page 850: ...ption Cycles utilize frames in the frame chain to perform their functions They input translations or rotations into either the programmable frame or the cycle system frame The WCS is therefore modified by cycles A user who uses Stop to interrupt a cycle however does not wish to traverse in the cycle coordinate system but in the programmed WCS This is why the SZS is used for the display For reasons...

Page 851: ...ng machine data can be used to set whether the ENS is with or without the programmable frame the transformation frame and P_ISO4FRAME MD24030 MC_FRAME_ACS_SET setting of the ENS coordinate system As default the value 1 is set Reconfiguring the SZS affects all SZS actual value displays and the AA_IEN axis system variables Traversing geometry axes in JOG mode in the SZS also depends on the configura...

Page 852: ... system Previously geometry axes have been traversed manually in JOG mode in the WCS In addition there is also the option to carry out this manual operation in the SZS coordinate system The AC_JOG_COORD variable enables the user to switch between manual traversing in the WCS and SZS The user can now select if he wants to traverse in the SZS or the WCS 3B75 5 0 3B3 5 0 3B 5 0 16 ...

Page 853: ...tive settable frame G153 Nonmodal suppression of the following frames System frame for cycles Programmable frame System frame for TOROT and TOFRAME workpieces Active settable frame All channel specific and NCU global basic frames System frames for PAROT PRESET scratching ext ZO SUPA Implicit preprocessing stop and non modal suppression of frames analog G153 and additional handwheel offsets DRF ext...

Page 854: ...arameterization Frame suppressions SUPA G153 and G53 lead to the WCS SZS and possibly the BZS jumping when frame suppression is active This characteristic for position display and pre defined position variables can be changed through the following machine data MD24020 MC_FRAME_SUPPRESS_MODE Positions during frame suppression Bit Significance 0 Positions for display BTSS are without frame suppressi...

Page 855: ... execution of a G500 G54 to G599 instruction For NCU global frames the changed frame only becomes active in those channels of the NCU which execute a G500 G54 to G599 instruction The variable is used primarily for storing write operations from HMI or PLC These frame variables are saved by the data backup Current settable frame P_IFRAME The predefined frame variable P_IFRAME can be used to read and...

Page 856: ...multaneously when writing to the predefined P_UBFR variable but rather activation only takes place on execution of a G500 G54 G599instruction For NCU global frames the changed frame only becomes active in those channels of the NCU which execute a G500 G54 G599instruction The variable is used primarily for storing write operations to the basic frame on HMI or PLC The variable can also be read and w...

Page 857: ...ame is not activated Instead the activation takes place only after a G500 G54 G599instruction is executed If the modified frame is to be active in every channel of the NCU every channel must execute a G500 G54 G599instruction The variable is used primarily for storing write operations to the basic frame on HMI or PLC These frame variables are saved by the data backup Current NCU global basic frame...

Page 858: ...usly modified Example P_NCBFR 0 CTRANS ax1 10 P_NCBFR 0 CTRANS x 10 P_NCBFR 0 ax1 FI 0 1 P_NCBFR 0 x FI 0 1 Rotations cannot be used on global frames The programming of a rotation is denied with alarm 18310 Channel 1 Block 2 Frame rotation not allowed is displayed It is not possible to program chaining of global frames and channel specific frames and any attempt at this is rejected with the alarm ...

Page 859: ...frame The variables can only be programmed in the program and read via the operator panel interface The value of the variables is interpreted as a bit mask and specifies which basic frame array element of P_ACTBFRAME is included in the calculation P_CHBFRMASK can be used to define which channelspecific basic frames are included and P_NCBFRMASK can be used to define which NCU global basic frames ar...

Page 860: ...r there is the option to clearly display the mirroring of an axis A mirroring is then not mapped to the mirroring of a reference axis and rotation of other axes This setting can be configured through the machine data setting MD10610 MN_MIRROR_REF_AX 0 MIRROR and AMIRROR are used to expand the programming of the programmable frame Previously the specified value of the coordinate axis e g the value ...

Page 861: ...8 X20 Total translations X25 Y15 Z10 G59 X10 Y10 Total translations X30 Y20 Z10 G58 and G59 can be used only if machine data MD24000 MC_FRAME_ADD_COMPONENTS Frame components for G58 G59 is TRUE otherwise Alarm 18311 Channel 1 Block 2 Frame instruction not permissible is output The function can also only be used in conjunction with a configured fine offset for the programmable frame If G58 or G59 i...

Page 862: ...pace Per channel each system frame occupies approx 1 KB SRAM und approx 6 KB DRAM The system frame for PRESET and scratching and the system frame for cycles are the default Channel specific system frames are configured as bit codes in accordance with the table below Bit Default System frame 0 1 PRESET and scratching 1 0 Zero offset external via system frames 2 0 TCARR and PAROT with an orientation...

Page 863: ...o a non configured system frame are rejected with the alarm Channel 1 block 2 name 3 not defined or option not available System frames in the data management are either activated directly with the system function TOROT PAROT etc or with aG500 G54 to G599 instruction Active system frames The active system frames are the frames which are active in the main run An appropriate current system frame exi...

Page 864: ...part program the variable P_TRAFRAME can be used to read and write the current system frame for transformations The variable returns a zero frame if the system frame is not configured through MD28082 P_ISO1FRAME P_ISO2FRAME P_ISO3FRAME P_ISO4FRAME One can read and write the current system frames for special ISO language commands in the parts program through the variables The variable returns a zer...

Page 865: ...to the formula below P_ACTFRAME P_PARTFRAME P_SETFRAME P_EXTFRAME P_ISO1FRAME P_ISO2FRAME P_ISO3FRAME P_ACTBFRAME P_IFRAME P_TOOLFRAME P_WPFRAME P_TRAFRAME P_PFRAME P_ISO4FRAME P_CYCFRAME 2 4 5 8 P_ACTFRAME The resulting current complete frame P_ACTFRAME is now a chain of all system frames basic frames the current settable frame and the programmable frame The current frame is always updated whenev...

Page 866: ...e for the new geometry axes The aspects described in the chapter Frames for selection and deselection of transformations are relevant to TRANSMIT TRACYL and TRAANG References FB1 Description of Functions Basic Machine Axes Coordinate System Frames K2 Chapter Frame for selection and deselection of transformations MD10602 MN_FRAME_GEOAX_CHANGE_MODE 2 The current complete frame is calculated again wh...

Page 867: ...annel axis is to become a geometry axis x through geo axis substitution The substitution is to give the programmable frame a translation component of 10 in the x axis The current settable frame is to be retained MD10602 MN_FRAME_GEOAX_CHANGE_MODE 1 P_UIFR 1 CROT x 10 y 20 z 30 Frame is retained after geo axis substitution G54 Settable frame becomes active TRANS a10 Axial offset of a is also substi...

Page 868: ...AXCONF_CHANAX_NAME_TAB 3 A MC_AXCONF_CHANAX_NAME_TAB 4 B MC_AXCONF_CHANAX_NAME_TAB 5 C MC_AXCONF_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB 0 1 MC_AXCONF_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB 1 2 MC_AXCONF_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB 2 3 MC_AXCONF_GEOAX_NAME_TAB 0 X MC_AXCONF_GEOAX_NAME_TAB 1 Y MC_AXCONF_GEOAX_NAME_TAB 2 Z MC_TRAFO_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB_1 0 4 MC_TRAFO_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB_1 1 5 MC_TRAFO_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB_1 2 6 MC_TRAFO_AXES_IN_1 0 4 MC_TRAFO_AXES_...

Page 869: ...z 45 TRAFOOF P_PFRAME ctrans x 1 y 2 z 3 a 4 b 5 c 6 crot x 10 y 20 z 30 2 4 6 2 Frame for selection and deselection of transformations This function is available with NCK 51 00 00 and higher Transformations TRANSMIT TRACYL and TRAANG are supported As a rule the assignment of geometry axes to channel axes changes when selecting and deselecting transformations It is not possible to uniquely assign ...

Page 870: ...be entered by compensating the oblique position of a workpiece in a frame within a frame chain As a rule this offset can also be included in the transformation as an offset in the rotary axis A c axis offset as in the figure above then leads to corresponding x and y values MD24905 MC_TRANSMIT_ROT_AX_FRAME_1 2 MD24905 MC_TRANSMIT_ROT_AX_FRAME_2 2 With this setting the axial offset of the rotary axi...

Page 871: ...rence to an axial frame The geometric value results from the rotation of a rotary axis All other geometry axes accept their axial components when the transformation is selected Translations On selecting transmit translations of the virtual axis are deleted Translations of the rotary axis can be taken into account in the transformation Rotations Rotations before the transformation are taken over Mi...

Page 872: ...ter switchover of the geo axis MC_RESET_MODE_MASK H4041 Basic frame is not deselected after RESET MC_RESET_MODE_MASK H41 Basic frame is deselected after RESET MC_GCODE_RESET_VALUES 7 2 G54 is the default setting MC_GCODE_RESET_VALUES 7 1 G500 is the default setting MN_MM_NUM_GLOBAL_USER_FRAMES 0 MN_MM_NUM_GLOBAL_BASE_FRAMES 3 MC_MM_NUM_USER_FRAMES 10 from 5 to 100 MC_MM_NUM_BASE_FRAMES 3 from 0 to...

Page 873: ... 1 MC_TRAFO_AXES_IN_1 1 6 MC_TRAFO_AXES_IN_1 2 3 MC_TRAFO_AXES_IN_1 3 0 MC_TRAFO_AXES_IN_1 4 0 MA_ROT_IS_MODULO AX6 TRUE MC_TRAFO_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB_1 0 1 MC_TRAFO_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB_1 1 6 MC_TRAFO_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB_1 2 3 MC_TRANSMIT_BASE_TOOL_1 0 0 0 MC_TRANSMIT_BASE_TOOL_1 1 0 0 MC_TRANSMIT_BASE_TOOL_1 2 0 0 MC_TRANSMIT_ROT_AX_OFFSET_1 0 0 MC_TRANSMIT_ROT_SIGN_IS_PLUS_1 TRUE MC_TRANSMIT_ROT_AX_FRAME_...

Page 874: ...O_AXES_IN_2 0 1 MC_TRAFO_AXES_IN_2 1 6 MC_TRAFO_AXES_IN_2 2 2 MC_TRAFO_AXES_IN_2 3 0 MC_TRAFO_AXES_IN_2 4 0 MC_TRAFO_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB_2 0 1 MC_TRAFO_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB_2 1 6 MC_TRAFO_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB_2 2 2 MC_TRANSMIT_BASE_TOOL_2 0 4 0 MC_TRANSMIT_BASE_TOOL_2 1 0 0 MC_TRANSMIT_BASE_TOOL_2 2 0 0 MC_TRANSMIT_ROT_AX_OFFSET_2 19 0 MC_TRANSMIT_ROT_SIGN_IS_PLUS_2 TRUE MC_TRANSMIT_ROT_AX_FRAME_2 1 ...

Page 875: ...pproach start position N920 G0 X20 Z10 N930 N940 if P_BFRAME CTRANS X 10 Y 20 Z 30 C 15 N950 setal 61000 N960 endif N970 if P_BFRAME P_CHBFR 0 N980 setal 61000 N990 endif N1000 if P_IFRAME CTRANS X 1 Y 2 Z 3 C 4 CROT X 10 Y 20 Z 30 CMIRROR X C N1010 setal 61000 N1020 endif N1030 if P_IFRAME P_UIFR 1 N1040 setal 61000 N1050 endif N1060 if P_ACTFRAME CTRANS X 11 Y 22 Z 33 C 19 CROT X 10 Y 20 Z 30 CM...

Page 876: ...ROR X C N1250 setal 61001 N1260 endif N1270 N1280 N1290 P_UIFR 1 x tr 11 N1300 P_UIFR 1 y tr 14 N1310 N1320 g54 N1330 Set frame N1350 ROT RPL 45 N1360 ATRANS X 2 Y10 N1370 Four edge roughing N1390 G1 X10 Y 10 G41 OFFN 1 allowance 1 mm N1400 X 10 N1410 Y10 N1420 X10 N1430 Y 10 N1440 Change tool N1460 G0 Z20 G40 OFFN 0 N1470 T3 D1 X15 Y 15 N1480 Z10 G41 N1490 Square finishing N1510 G1 X10 Y 10 N1520...

Page 877: ... N1730 if P_ACTFRAME TRANS X 21 Y 0 Z 22 CAZ 33 C 19 CROT X 10 Y 20 Z 30 CMIRROR X C N1740 setal 61001 N1750 endif N1760 N1770 TRAFOOF N1780 N1790 if P_BFRAME CTRANS X 10 Y 20 Z 30 C 15 N1800 setal 61000 N1810 endif N1820 if P_BFRAME P_CHBFR 0 N1830 setal 61000 N1840 endif N1850 if P_IFRAME TRANS X 11 Y 2 Z 3 C 4 CROT X 10 Y 20 Z 30 CMIRROR X C N1860 setal 61000 N1870 endif N1880 if P_IFRAME P_UIF...

Page 878: ...N2040 TRANS x10 y20 z30 N2041 ATRANS y200 N2050 G0 X20 Y0 Z10 N2051 if P_IFRAME CTRANS X 1 Y 0 Z 3 CAY 2 N2052 setal 61000 N2053 endif N2054 if P_ACTFRAME CTRANS X 11 Y 20 Z 33 CAY 2 CFINE Y 200 N2055 setal 61002 N2056 endif N2060 TRAFOOF N2061 if P_IFRAME P_UIFR 1 N2062 setal 61000 N2063 endif N2064 if P_ACTFRAME CTRANS X 11 Y 2 Z 33 CFINE Y 0 N2065 setal 61002 N2066 endif ...

Page 879: ...and y values MD24805 MC_TRACYL_ROT_AX_FRAME_1 2 MD24855 MC_TRACYL_ROT_AX_FRAME_2 2 With this setting the axial offset of the rotary axis is taken account of in the transformation up to the SZS The axial offsets of the rotary axis included in the SZS frames are entered into the transformation frame as offsets on the sheath surface This setting is only effective if the transformation frame has been ...

Page 880: ...deleted Translations of the rotary axis can be taken into account in the transformation Rotations Rotations before the transformation are taken over Mirrorings Mirrorings of the virtual axis are deleted Mirrorings of the rotary axis can be taken into account in the transformation Scalings Scalings of the virtual axis are deleted Scalings of the rotary axis can be taken into account in the transfor...

Page 881: ...er switchover of the geo axis MC_RESET_MODE_MASK H4041 Basic frame is not deselected after RESET MC_RESET_MODE_MASK H41 Basic frame is deselected after RESET MC_GCODE_RESET_VALUES 7 2 G54 is the default setting MC_GCODE_RESET_VALUES 7 1 G500 is the default setting MN_MM_NUM_GLOBAL_USER_FRAMES 0 MN_MM_NUM_GLOBAL_BASE_FRAMES 3 MC_MM_NUM_USER_FRAMES 10 from 5 to 100 MC_MM_NUM_BASE_FRAMES 3 from 0 to ...

Page 882: ...ASSIGN_TAB_3 2 3 MC_TRACYL_BASE_TOOL_1 0 0 0 MC_TRACYL_BASE_TOOL_1 1 0 0 MC_TRACYL_BASE_TOOL_1 2 0 0 MC_TRACYL_ROT_AX_OFFSET_1 0 0 MC_TRACYL_ROT_SIGN_IS_PLUS_1 TRUE MC_TRACYL_ROT_AX_FRAME_1 1 Part program Simple traversing test with groove side offset N450 G603 N460 Frame settings N500 P_UIFR 1 ctrans x 1 y 2 z 3 b 4 N510 P_UIFR 1 P_UIFR 1 crot x 10 y 20 z 30 N520 P_UIFR 1 P_UIFR 1 cmirror x b N53...

Page 883: ... 33 B 19 CROT X 10 Y 20 Z 30 CMIRROR X B N740 setal 61000 N750 endif N760 Transformation ON N780 TRACYL 40 N790 N800 if P_BFRAME CTRANS X 10 Y 0 Z 30 CAY 20 B 15 N810 setal 61000 N820 endif N830 if P_CHBFR 0 CTRANS X 10 Y 0 Z 30 CAY 20 B 15 N840 setal 61000 N850 endif N860 if P_IFRAME TRANS X 1 Y 0 Z 3 CAY 2 B 4 CROT X 10 Y 20 Z 30 CMIRROR X B N870 setal 61000 N880 endif N890 if P_UIFR 1 TRANS X 1...

Page 884: ...tal 61000 N1120 endif N1130 if P_ACTFRAME TRANS X 21 Y 0 Z 33 CAY 22 B 19 CROT X 10 Y 20 Z 30 CMIRROR X B N1140 setal 61001 N1150 endif N1160 Transformation off N1180 TRAFOOF N1190 N1200 if P_BFRAME CTRANS X 10 Y 20 Z 30 B 15 N1210 setal 61000 N1220 endif N1230 if P_BFRAME P_CHBFR 0 N1240 setal 61000 N1250 endif N1260 if P_IFRAME TRANS X 11 Y 2 Z 3 B 4 CROT X 10 Y 20 Z 30 CMIRROR X B N1270 setal 6...

Page 885: ...are only valid for the machine data MD10602 MN_FRAME_GEOAX_CHANGE_MODE 1 MD10602 MN_FRAME_GEOAX_CHANGE_MODE 2 Translations On selecting traang translations of the virtual axis are retained Rotations Rotations before the transformation are taken over Mirrorings Mirrorings of the virtual axis are taken over Scalings Scalings of the virtual axis are taken over Example Machine data for TRAANG ...

Page 886: ... geo axis MC_RESET_MODE_MASK H4041 Basic frame is not deselected after RESET MC_RESET_MODE_MASK H41 Basic frame is deselected after RESET MC_GCODE_RESET_VALUES 7 2 G54 is the default setting MC_GCODE_RESET_VALUES 7 1 G500 is the default setting MN_MM_NUM_GLOBAL_USER_FRAMES 0 MN_MM_NUM_GLOBAL_BASE_FRAMES 3 MC_MM_NUM_USER_FRAMES 10 from 5 to 100 MC_MM_NUM_BASE_FRAMES 3 from 0 to 8 MN_NCBFRAME_RESET_...

Page 887: ...IGN_TAB_1 2 3 MC_TRAANG_ANGLE_1 85 MC_TRAANG_PARALLEL_VELO_RES_1 0 MC_TRAANG_PARALLEL_ACCEL_RES_1 0 MC_TRAANG_BASE_TOOL_1 0 0 0 MC_TRAANG_BASE_TOOL_1 1 0 0 MC_TRAANG_BASE_TOOL_1 2 0 0 TRAANG is 2nd transformer MC_TRAFO_TYPE_2 1024 MC_TRAFO_AXES_IN_2 0 4 MC_TRAFO_AXES_IN_2 1 3 MC_TRAFO_AXES_IN_2 2 0 MC_TRAFO_AXES_IN_2 3 0 MC_TRAFO_AXES_IN_2 4 0 MC_TRAFO_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB_2 0 4 MC_TRAFO_GEOAX_ASSIGN_...

Page 888: ...10 N930 N940 if P_BFRAME CTRANS X 10 Y 20 Z 30 B 40 C 15 N950 setal 61000 N960 endif N970 if P_BFRAME P_CHBFR 0 N980 setal 61000 N990 endif N1000 if P_IFRAME TRANS X 1 Y 2 Z 3 B 4 C 5 CROT X 10 Y 20 Z 30 CMIRROR X C N1010 setal 61000 N1020 endif N1030 if P_IFRAME P_UIFR 1 N1040 setal 61000 N1050 endif N1060 if P_ACTFRAME TRANS X 11 Y 22 Z 33 B 44 C 20 CROT X 10 Y 20 Z 30 CMIRROR X C N1070 setal 61...

Page 889: ... C 20 CROT X 10 Y 20 Z 30 CMIRROR X CAX C N1250 setal 61001 N1260 endif N1270 N1280 N1290 P_UIFR 1 x tr 11 N1300 P_UIFR 1 y tr 14 N1310 N1320 g54 N1330 Set frame N1350 ROT RPL 45 N1360 ATRANS X 2 Y10 N1370 Four edge roughing N1390 G1 X10 Y 10 G41 OFFN 1 allowance 1 mm N1400 X 10 N1410 Y10 N1420 X10 N1430 Y 10 N1440 Change tool N1460 G0 Z20 G40 OFFN 0 N1470 T3 D1 X15 Y 15 N1480 Z10 G41 N1490 Square...

Page 890: ...ndif N1700 if P_IFRAME P_UIFR 1 N1710 setal 61000 N1720 endif N1730 if P_ACTFRAME TRANS X 21 Y 34 Z 33 CAX 11 B 44 C 20 CROT X 10 Y 20 Z 30 CMIRROR X CAX C N1740 setal 61001 N1750 endif N1760 N1770 TRAFOOF N1780 N1790 if P_BFRAME CTRANS X 10 Y 20 Z 30 B 40 C 15 N1800 setal 61000 N1810 endif N1820 if P_BFRAME P_CHBFR 0 N1830 setal 61000 N1840 endif N1850 if P_IFRAME TRANS X 1 Y 14 Z 3 B 4 C 5 CROT ...

Page 891: ...0 MC_FRAME_ADAPT_MODE Bitmask for adapting the active frames with reference to the axis constellation The following settings apply Bit 0 Rotations in active frames which rotate coordinate axes with no geometry axes are deleted from the active frames Bit 1 Shear angles in the active frames are orthogonalized Bit 2 Scalings of all geometry axes in the active frames are set to value 1 With machine da...

Page 892: ...ed frame should be entered into any desired frame within the frame chain the calculations below should be used The new complete frame is a chain of the old complete frame and the calculated frame P_ACTFRAME P_ACTFRAME AC_MEAS_FRAME The new frame in the frame chain is therefore Target frame is P_SETFRAME P_SETFRAME P_ACTFRAME AC_MEAS_FRAME INVFRAME P_ACTFRAME P_SETFRAME Target frame is nth channel ...

Page 893: ...e SETFRAME is calculated accordingly by means of frame inversions DEF INT RETVAL DEF FRAME TMP TC_DP1 1 1 120 Type TC_DP2 1 1 20 0 TC_DP3 1 1 10 z length compensation vector TC_DP4 1 1 0 y TC_DP5 1 1 0 x TC_DP6 1 1 2 Radius T1 D1 g0 x0 y0 z0 f10000 G54 P_CHBFRAME 0 crot z 45 P_IFRAME x tr sin 45 P_IFRAME y tr sin 45 P_PFRAME z rt 45 Measure corner with four measuring points AC_MEAS_VALID 0 Approac...

Page 894: ...4 y1 Store measuring point 4 AC_MEAS_LATCH 3 1 Set position setpoint of the corner AA_MEAS_SETPOINT x 0 AA_MEAS_SETPOINT y 0 AA_MEAS_SETPOINT z 0 Define setpoint angle of intersection AC_MEAS_CORNER_SETANGLE 90 AC_MEAS_WP_SETANGLE 30 Measuring plane is G17 AC_MEAS_ACT_PLANE 0 Select tool AC_MEAS_T_NUMBER 1 AC_MEAS_D_NUMBER 1 Set measuring type on corner 1 AC_MEAS_TYPE 4 Start measuring process RET...

Page 895: ...EAS_CORNER_ANGLE endif Transform measured frame and write in accordance with P_SETFRAME in such a way that a complete frame is produced as a result of the old complete frame being chained with the measuring frame P_SETFRAME P_ACTFRAME AC_MEAS_FRAME INVFRAME P_ACTFRAME P_SETFRAME Describe system frames in data management P_SETFR P_SETFRAME Approach the corner g1 x0 y0 Retract the rectangle rotated ...

Page 896: ...e FRAME Additively measured or calculated frame Strings for current frames P_CYCFRAME P_ISO4FRAME P_PFRAME P_WPFRAME P_TOOLFRAME P_IFRAME P_CHBFRAME 0 16 P_NCBFRAME 0 16 P_ISO1FRAME P_ISO2FRAME P_ISO3FRAME P_EXTFRAME P_SETFRAME P_PARTFRAME Strings for data management frames P_CYCFR P_ISO4FR P_TRAFR P_WPFR P_TOOLFR P_UIFR 0 99 P_CHBFR 0 16 P_NCBFR 0 16 P_ISO1FR P_ISO2FR P_ISO3FR Parameter 2 Type ST...

Page 897: ...frame can be written to system frame SETFRAME The position setpoint of an axis in the WCS can be altered when the actual value memory is preset Scratching means workpiece and tool measuring The position of the workpiece in relation to an edge a corner or a hole can be measured To determine the zero position of the workpiece or the hole position setpoints can be added to the measured positions in t...

Page 898: ...zed and the current system frame is written and activated with the axis value of AA_ETRANS axis The system frame in the data management is also described The offset is then first applied and the interrupted motion is continued With G91 and machine data setting MD42440 MC_FRAME_OFFSET_INCR_PROG 0 the zero offset external is also applied with the approach block Special treatment when programming inc...

Page 899: ...s not changed As in case T only the tool can be rotated the position of the rotary axes used for the calculation is dependent on the G code TCOFR TCOABS and determined from the rotation component of an active frame or from the entries TC_CARRn Activation of a frame changes the position in the workpiece coordinate system accordingly without compensating movement by the machine itself The ratios are...

Page 900: ...der corresponding to the table Up to and including SW P6 1 the rotation activated by PAROT is calculated in the programmable frame P_PFRAME thus changing its rotation component With SW P6 2 and higher the entire programmable frame remains unchanged including its rotation component The rotation component which describes the rotation of the tool table is then entered into system frame PARTFR if bit ...

Page 901: ...rations a frame defining the oblique plane is active but the tool cannot be set exactly perpendicularly because an indexed toolholder Hirth tooth system prevents free setting of the tool orientation In these cases it is then necessary contrary to the actually requested motion perpendicular to the plane to drill in tool direction as the drill would otherwise not be guided in the direction of its lo...

Page 902: ...If in a block with MOVT the tool orientation is changed simultaneously e g active 5axis transformation by means of simultaneous interpolation of the rotary axes the orientation at the start of the block is decisive for the direction of movement of MOVT With an active 5 axis transformation the path of the tool center point TCP is not affected by the change of orientation i e the path remains a stra...

Page 903: ...tations 2EOLTXH SODQH For this reason the language commands ROTS AROTS and CROTS are used with which the rotations can be immediately described as solid angles The orientation of a plane in space is defined unambiguously by specifying two solid angles The third solid angle is derived from the first two Therefore a maximum of 2 solid angles may be programmed e g in the form ROTS X10 Y15 If a third ...

Page 904: ...axis lies in the old ZX plane When programming Z and X the new Z axis lies in the old YZ plane When programming Y and Z the new Y axis lies in the old XY plane If the required coordinate system does not correspond to this basic setting then an additional rotation must be performed with AROT On programming the solid angles they are converted into the equivalent RPY or Euler angles depending on mach...

Page 905: ...e frame is processed further elsewhere In new systems it is recommended that only the intended system frame is used for frames produced by G codes in group 53 Example TRANS is programmed after TOROT TRANS without specified parameters deletes the programmable frame In the variant without a system frame this also deletes the frame component of the programmable frame produced by TOROT but if the TORO...

Page 906: ... position on the X and Y axis until the desired setting is reached Setting 3 is achieved by executing a rotation whose value is the exact mean of these two angles However this only applies for the case that the old and new Z direction enclose an angle of less than 90 degrees With variant 1 both the old and new X axes form an angle of under 90 degrees with variant 2 the same is true of the Y axis t...

Page 907: ...lue in setting data SD42980 SC_TOFRAME_MODE in N90 In the figure below the situation for setting data setting SD42980 SC_TOFRAME_MODE 1 is shown The old and new X axes X and X coincide in the projection in the direction of the old Z axis The old and new Y axes Y and Y form an angle of 8 13 degrees right angles are generally not retained in the projection For setting data setting SD42980 SC_TOFRAME...

Page 908: ...ARR and PAROT describe that system frame otherwise the basic frame identified by machine data MD20184 MC_TOCARR_BASE_FRAME_NUMBER is described With kinematics systems of the types P and M TCARR will enter the table offset of the orientational toolholder zero offset resulting from the rotation of the table as a translation into the system frame PAROT converts the system frame such that a partorient...

Page 909: ...s of 1st axis N100 TC_CARR8 1 0 Y components of 1st axis N110 TC_CARR9 1 0 Z components of 1st axis N120 TC_CARR10 1 0 X components of 2nd axis N130 TC_CARR11 1 1 Y components of 2nd axis N140 TC_CARR12 1 0 Z components of 2nd axis N150 TC_CARR13 1 30 Angle of rotation of 1st axis N160 TC_CARR14 1 30 Angle of rotation of 2nd axis N170 TC_CARR15 1 0 X components of 3rd offset vector N180 TC_CARR16 ...

Page 910: ...lled is reactivated response as now The new response can be deactivated by setting bit 0 in machine data MD10617 MN_FRAME_SAVE_MASK Basic frames P_CHBFR and P_NCBFR The active total basic frame is retained on return from a subroutine The new response can be deactivated by setting bit 1 in machine data MD10617 MN_FRAME_SAVE_MASK Programmable frame The programmable frame is recreated when the subrou...

Page 911: ...M_DATAFRAME_MASK can be used to configure data management frames for the system frames If you do not want a data management frame for a system frame the frame does not have to be saved With G500 G54 to G599 the active frame is retained A separate data block _N_NC_UFR is used to archive global frames The block requested by the HMI is created if the machine data MD18601 MN_MM_NUM_GLOBAL_USER_FRAMES ...

Page 912: ...turers can define on the PLC side which coordinate system corresponds to the workpiece coordinate system on their machines The HMI requests the appropriate actual values from the NCK AA_IM axis The setpoints in the machine coordinate system can be read for each axis using the variables AA_IM axis AA_IEN axis The setpoints in the settable zero system SZS can be read for each axis using the variable...

Page 913: ...mes Retained Depending on MD24008 MC_CHSFRAME_POWERON_MASK individual system frames can be deleted on POWER ON Deletion of system frame is executed in the data management on first priority Zero offset external Permanent but has to be activated again The system frame is retained DRF offset Deleted 2 4 12 2 Mode change System frames System frames are retained and remain active when the operating mod...

Page 914: ...used to configure the activation of individual system frames MD24006 MC_CHSFRAME_RESET_MASK active system frames after Reset Bit Significance 0 System frame for actual value setting and scratching is active after RESET 1 System frame for zero offset external is active after RESET 2 Is not evaluated 3 Is not evaluated 4 System frame for workpiece reference point is active after RESET 5 System frame...

Page 915: ...position of G groups MD20110 Significance Bit 0 0 TCARR and PAROT system frames are retained as before the RESET MD20152 MC_GCODE_RESET_MODE 51 0 MD20150 MC_GCODE_RESET_VALUES 51 1 PAROTOF MD20150 MC_GCODE_RESET_VALUES 51 2 PAROT MD20152 MC_GCODE_RESET_MODE 51 1 TCARR and PAROT system frames are retained as before the RESET MD20152 MC_GCODE_RESET_MODE 52 0 MD20150 MC_GCODE_RESET_VALUES 52 1 TOROTO...

Page 916: ...d into the chained complete basic frame MD10613 MN_NCBFRAME_RESET_MASK Bit 0 1 1 8th NCU global basic frame is calculated into the chained complete basic frame Bit 0 1 and bit 14 1 Bit 7 1 8 8th NCU global basic frame is calculated into the chained complete basic frame Frame conditions after RESET parts program end Frame condition after RESET part program end Programmable frame Deleted Settable fr...

Page 917: ...ved for TOROT and TOFRAME see MD20150 MC_GCODE_RESET_VALUES 4 System frame for workpiece reference points is deleted during RESET 5 System frame for cycles is deleted during RESET 6 Reserved RESET response depends on MD20110 MC_RESET_MODE_MASK 7 System frame for P_ISO1FR is deleted during RESET 8 System frame for P_ISO2FR is deleted during RESET 9 System frame for P_ISO3FR is deleted during RESET ...

Page 918: ...EARCH_RUN_RESTORE_MODE can be used to configure that all data management frames are set to the value they had before the block search Bit Significance 0 All frames in the data management are restored In case of cascaded block searches the frames are set to the status of the previous block search SERUPRO The SERUPRO function is not supported 2 4 12 6 REPOS There is no special treatment for frames I...

Page 919: ...ram Active plane Settable frame G54 G57 Kinematic transformation Active tool offset To change between work coordinate system and machine coordinate system via the user interface To change the work coordinate system by operator action e g changing the settable frame or the tool offset 2 5 2 Use of workpiecerelated actual value system Requirements basic settings The settings described in the previou...

Page 920: ...V IRU 3 527 35 6 7 VFUDWFKLQJ HUR RIIVHW H WHUQDO KDLQHG ILHOG RI EDVLF IUDPHV FKDQQHO VSHF DQG RU 1 8 JOREDO WR VHWWDEOH IUDPH FKDQQHO VSHF RU 1 8 JOREDO 6 VWHP IUDPH IRU 72527 72 5 0 ZRUNSLHFHV 6 6 6 6 6 0 6 DQGZKHHO 5 RIIVHW VXSHULPSRVHG PRYHPHQW HUR RIIVHW H WHUQDO LQHPDWLF WUDQVIRUPDWLRQ Figure 2 23 Interrelationship between coordinate systems References PG Programming Guide Fundamentals FB1 ...

Page 921: ... the values for Active frame zero offsets Parameters operating area and Active tool length compensation Parameters operating area one of the following actions is used to activate these changes in the display Press the RESET key Reselect Zero offset by the part program Tool offset by the part program Reset Zero offset by overstoring Tool offset by overstoring Part program start MD9440 If the HMI ma...

Page 922: ... offsets are added to the MCS Kinematic transformation DRF offset zero offset external Active frame Active tool offset of the current tool Switchover by PLC The actual values can be displayed in the WCS SZS BZS or MCS via the PLC The PLC can define which coordinate system corresponds to the workpiece coordinate system on a machine On MMC poweron the MCS is preset With the signal DB19 DBB0 7 MCS WC...

Page 923: ...Basic logic functions Axes coordinate systems frames K2 Function Manual 11 2006 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 139 Supplementary conditions 3 There are no supplementary conditions to note ...

Page 924: ...Supplementary conditions Basic logic functions Axes coordinate systems frames K2 140 Function Manual 11 2006 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 ...

Page 925: ...axis X1 Linear axis 2 Machine axis Y1 Linear axis 3 Machine axis Z1 Linear axis 4 Machine axis B1 Rotary table for turning for multiface machining 5 Machine axis W1 Rotary axis for tool magazine tool revolver 6 Machine axis C1 Spindle 1 Geometry axis X 1 channel 2 Geometry axis Y 1 channel 3 Geometry axis Z 1 channel 1 Special axis B 1 channel 2 Special axis WZM 1 channel 1 spindle S1 C 1 channel ...

Page 926: ...D10000 AXCONF_MACHAX_NAME_TAB 1 Y1 MD10000 AXCONF_MACHAX_NAME_TAB 2 Z1 MD10000 AXCONF_MACHAX_NAME_TAB 3 B1 MD10000 AXCONF_MACHAX_NAME_TAB 4 W1 MD10000 AXCONF_MACHAX_NAME_TAB 5 C1 MD20050 AXCONF_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB 0 1 MD20050 AXCONF_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB 1 2 MD20050 AXCONF_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB 2 3 MD20060 AXCONF_GEOAX_NAME_TAB 0 X MD20060 AXCONF_GEOAX_NAME_TAB 1 Y MD20060 AXCONF_GEOAX_NAME_TAB 2 Z MD20070 AXC...

Page 927: ...ANAX_NAME_TAB 2 Z MD20080 AXCONF_CHANAX_NAME_TAB 3 B MD20080 AXCONF_CHANAX_NAME_TAB 4 WZM MD20080 AXCONF_CHANAX_NAME_TAB 5 S1 MD30300 IS_ROT_AX 3 1 MD30300 IS_ROT_AX 4 1 MD30300 IS_ROT_AX 5 1 MD30310 ROT_IS_MODULO 3 1 MD30310 ROT_IS_MODULO 4 1 MD30310 ROT_IS_MODULO 5 1 MD30320 DISPLAY_IS_MODULO 3 1 MD30320 DISPLAY_IS_MODULO 4 1 MD20090 SPIND_DEF_MASTER_SPIND 1 MD35000 SPIND_ASSIGN_TO_MACHAX AX1 0 ...

Page 928: ...F_MACHAX_NAME_TAB 4 MD10000 MN_AXCONF_MACHAX_NAME_TAB 5 X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 MD18602 MN_MM_NUM_GLOBAL_BASE_FRAMES 1 MD28081 MC_MM_NUM_BASE_FRAMES 1 Machine data for channel 1 Value Machine data for channel 1 Value MC_AXCONF_CHANAX_NAME_TAB 0 MC_AXCONF_CHANAX_NAME_TAB 1 MC_AXCONF_CHANAX_NAME_TAB 2 X Y Z MC_AXCONF_CHANAX_NAME_TAB 0 MC_AXCONF_CHANAX_NAME_TAB 1 MC_AXCONF_CHANAX_NAME_TAB 2 X Y Z MC_AXCONF...

Page 929: ...NC global basic frame N130 P_NCBFRAME 0 CROT X 45 Activation of the NC global basic frame with rotation alarm 18310 since rotations of NC global frames are not permitted Part program in second channel Code excerpt Comment N100 P_NCBFR 0 CTRANS x 10 The NCU global basic frame is also active in second channel N510 G500 X10 Activate basic frame N520 P_CHBFRAME 0 CTRANS x 10 Current frame of second ch...

Page 930: ...s to give the programmable frame a translation component of 10 in the X axis The current settable frame is to be retained FRAME_GEOX_CHANGE_MODE 1 P_UIFR 1 CROT x 10 y 20 z 30 Frame is retained after geo axis substitution G54 Settable frame becomes active TRANS a10 Axial offset of a is also substituted GEOAX 1 a a becomes x axis P_ACTFRAME CROT x 10 y 20 z 30 CTRANS x10 Several channel axes can be...

Page 931: ...ted The most common application will be that the geometry axes do not change before and after the transformation and that the frames are to stay as they were before the transformation Machine data MN_FRAME_GEOAX_CHANGE_MODE 1 MC_AXCONF_CHANAX_NAME_TAB 0 CAX MC_AXCONF_CHANAX_NAME_TAB 1 CAY MC_AXCONF_CHANAX_NAME_TAB 2 CAZ MC_AXCONF_CHANAX_NAME_TAB 3 A MC_AXCONF_CHANAX_NAME_TAB 4 B MC_AXCONF_CHANAX_N...

Page 932: ...20 z 30 TRAORI Geo axis 4 5 6 sets transformer P_NCBFRAME 0 ctrans x 4 y 5 z 6 cax 1 cay 2 caz 3 P_ACTBFRAME ctrans x 8 y 10 z 12 cax 2 cay 4 caz 6 P_PFRAME ctrans x 4 y 5 z 6 cax 1 cay 2 caz 3 crot x 10 y 20 z 30 P_IFRAME ctrans x 4 y 5 z 6 cax 1 cay 2 caz 3 crot z 45 TRAFOOF Geo axis 1 2 3 sets transformation deactivation P_NCBFRAME 0 ctrans x 1 y 2 z 3 a 4 b 5 c 6 P_CHBFRAME 0 ctrans x 1 y 2 z ...

Page 933: ... 9248 USER_CLASS_BASE_ZERO_OFF_MA Availability of basic offset in Machine operating area 9249 USER_CLASS_VERT_MODE_SK Provide protection for vertical area soft keys 9400 TOOL_REF_GEO_AXIS1 Absolute dimension tool length compensation geometry axis 1 9401 TOOL_REF_GEO_AXIS2 Absolute dimension tool length compensation geometry axis 2 9402 TOOL_REF_GEO_AXIS3 Absolute dimension tool length compensation...

Page 934: ...10610 MIRROR_REF_AX Reference axis for FRAME element mirroring 10612 MIRROR_TOGGLE Toggle mirroring 10613 NCBFRAME_RESET_MASK RESET response of global basic frame 10615 NCBFRAME_POWERON_MASK POWER ON response of global basic frames 10617 FRAME_SAVE_MASK Response of frames to subroutine return jump with SAVE 10650 IPO_PARAM_NAME_TAB Name of interpolation parameters 10660 INTERMEDIATE_POINT_NAME_TAB...

Page 935: ...M_CODE M code for transformation changeover 24000 FRAME_ADD_COMPONENTS Separate programming modification of additively programmable frame components 24002 CHBFRAME_RESET_MASK RESET response of channelspecific basic frames 24004 CHBFRAME_POWERON_MASK POWER ON response of channelspecific basic frames 24006 CHSFRAME_RESET_MASK RESET response of channelspecific system frames 24007 CHSFRAME_RESET_CLEAR...

Page 936: ...cription 32074 FRAME_OR_CORRPOS_NOTALLOWED FRAME or HL offset is not permitted 35000 SPIND_ASSIGN_TO_MACHAX Assignment spindle to machine axis 5 2 Setting data 5 2 1 Channelspecific setting data Number Identifier SC_ Description 42440 FRAME_OFFSET_INCR_PROG Zero offsets are traversed on incremental programming 42980 TOFRAME_MODE Determination of the direction of X and Y axes for frame definition ...

Page 937: ...or activating system frames in data management P_CYCFR System frame for cycles P_CYCFRAME Current system frame for cycles P_EXTFR System frame for zero offset external in data management P_EXTFRAME Current system frame for zero offset external P_IFRAME Current settable frame P_ISO1FR System frame for ISO G51 1 mirroring P_ISO2FR System frame for G68 2DROT ISO P_ISO3FR System frame for G68 3DROT IS...

Page 938: ...ansformations P_UBFR Basic frame in channel activated after G500 G54 to G599 Corresponds to P_CHBFR 0 P_UIFR n Settable frames activated via G500 G54 to G599 P_UIFRNUM Number of active frame P_UIFR P_WPFR System frame for workpiece reference points P_WPFRAME Current system frame for workpiece reference points AA_ETRANS X AA_ETRANS X is an axisspecific system variable of the DOUBLE type The default...

Page 939: ... function modification 21 62 0 D function modification 21 118 119 T function 21 129 D function 21 208 Number of active function G group 1 21 209 Number of active function G group 2 21 230 Number of active function G group 29 5 4 2 Signals to axis spindle DB number Byte Bit Description 31 3 0 Accept zero offset external 5 4 3 Signals from axis spindle DB number Byte Bit Description 31 60 0 Spindle ...

Page 940: ...Data lists 5 4 Signals Basic logic functions Axes coordinate systems frames K2 156 Function Manual 11 2006 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 ...

Page 941: ...interpolation 26 K Kinematic transformation 40 L Loader axes 23 M Machine axes 16 Machine coordinate system MCS 9 Machine coordinate systems MCS 38 Machine tool axes 23 Machine zero M 33 Main axes 24 MD10000 8 27 MD10002 28 32 MD10600 52 109 111 MD10602 77 78 80 88 93 MD10610 12 72 MD10612 72 MD10613 121 MD10615 119 MD10617 117 MD11640 28 MD18600 50 MD18601 61 67 118 MD18602 61 69 118 MD20050 8 29...

Page 942: ...115 118 MD28560 123 MD32074 119 MD35000 8 57 MD42440 105 MD9424 47 MD9440 60 126 P Path axes 23 POS 23 POSA 23 Position of coordinate systems and reference points 34 Positioning axes 23 R Reference point R 33 Reference points 33 Replaceable geometry axes 18 Rotary axes 23 Rough offset 11 S SD42440 13 SD42980 112 113 114 Special axes 22 Synchronized axes 25 T TCP Tool Center Position 34 Tool revolv...

Page 943: ...alid for Control SINUMERIK 840D sl 840DE sl SINUMERIK 840Di sl 840DiE sl SINUMERIK 840D powerline 840DE powerline SINUMERIK 840Di powerline 840DiE powerline SINUMERIK 810D powerline 810DE powerline Software Version NCU system software for 840D sl 840DE sl 1 3 NCU system software for 840D sl DiE sl 1 0 NCU system software for 840D 840DE 7 4 NCU system software for 840Di 840DiE 3 3 NCU system softwa...

Page 944: ...ommissioning and operation of a device system may only be performed by qualified personnel Within the context of the safety notes in this documentation qualified persons are defined as persons who are authorized to commission ground and label devices systems and circuits in accordance with established safety practices and standards Prescribed Usage Note the following Warning This device may only b...

Page 945: ...t standards 7 2 2 Emergency stop control elements 8 2 3 Emergency stop sequence 9 2 4 Emergency stop acknowledgement 11 3 Restrictions 13 4 Examples 15 5 Data lists 17 5 1 Machine data 17 5 1 1 Drive specific machine data 17 5 1 2 Axis spindlespecific machine data 17 5 2 Signals 17 5 2 1 Signals to NC 17 5 2 2 Signals from NC 18 5 2 3 Signals to BAG 18 Index 19 ...

Page 946: ...Table of contents Basic logic functions Emergency Stop N2 4 Function Manual 11 2006 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 ...

Page 947: ...e emergency stop request to the NC is transmitted via the NC PLC interface on the PLC In response to an emergency stop command the NC decelerates all axes and spindles as quickly as possible with setpoint value 0 i e braking at the current limit of the drives In the case of an emergency stop all machine functions controlled by the PLC can be brought to a safe state that can be set by the machine m...

Page 948: ...Brief Description Basic logic functions Emergency Stop N2 6 Function Manual 11 2006 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 ...

Page 949: ... a function that Is intended to prevent or diminish developing or existing risks to operating personnel and damage to the machine or machined materials Is triggered by a single human action in cases where the normal stop function is not suitable Hazards In the terms of EN 418 risks may arise from Functional irregularities machine malfunctions unacceptable properties of the material to be machined ...

Page 950: ...y with the machine manufacturer 2 2 Emergency stop control elements EN standard In accordance with EN 418 emergency stop control elements must be designed so that they latch mechanically on their own and are easy for the operator and others to actuate in the event of an emergency The following list includes some possible types of control elements Mushroomhead pushbutton switches Wires cables cords...

Page 951: ...functions implemented to obtain the emergency stop state is as follows in the control system 1 Part program execution is interrupted All machine axes are braked in the relevant axis specific parameterized time MD36610 MA_AX_EMERGENCY_STOP_TIME time of braking ramp in event of errors The maximum brake ramp that can be achieved is defined by the maximum brake current of the respective drive The maxi...

Page 952: ...articular state or voltage level in the event of an emergency stop the machine manufacturer must implement this in the PLC user program The fast digital outputs of the NCK I O system are not influenced by the emergency stop sequence in the NC If individual outputs must assume a specific state in the case of emergency stop the machine manufacturer must transmit the desired state to the NC in the PL...

Page 953: ...ly reset by hand Emergency stop acknowledgement 1 Interface signal DB10 DBX56 2 1 Acknowledge emergency stop 2 Interface signal DB11 DBX0 7 1 mode group reset Note The two interface signals DB10 DBX56 2 Acknowledge emergency stop and DB21 DBX7 7 Reset must both remain set at least until the interface signal is reset DB10 DBX106 1 Emergency stop active The emergency stop state cannot be reset only ...

Page 954: ...on control active Set interface signals DB11 DBX6 3 Mode group ready Reset interface signal DB10 DBX106 1 Emergency stop active Alarm 3000 Emergency Stop is cleared Part program processing is interrupted in all channels of the NC PLC and NCK I Os The PLC user program must switch the PLC and NCK I Os back to the state for operation of the machine POWER OFF ON supply off on The emergency stop state ...

Page 955: ...Basic logic functions Emergency Stop N2 Function Manual 11 2006 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 13 Restrictions 3 No supplementary conditions apply ...

Page 956: ...Restrictions Basic logic functions Emergency Stop N2 14 Function Manual 11 2006 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 ...

Page 957: ...Basic logic functions Emergency Stop N2 Function Manual 11 2006 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 15 Examples 4 No examples are available ...

Page 958: ...Examples Basic logic functions Emergency Stop N2 16 Function Manual 11 2006 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 ...

Page 959: ...on 1404 PULSE_SUPPRESSION_DELAY Time for pulse suppression 5 1 2 Axis spindlespecific machine data Number Identifier MA_ Description 36610 AX_EMERGENCY_STOP_TIME Length of the braking ramp for error states 36620 SERVO_DISABLE_DELAY_TIME Cutout delay servo enable 5 2 Signals 5 2 1 Signals to NC DB number Byte Bit Description 10 56 1 EMERGENCY STOP 10 56 2 Acknowledge EMERGENCY STOP ...

Page 960: ...c functions Emergency Stop N2 18 Function Manual 11 2006 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 5 2 2 Signals from NC DB number Byte Bit Description 10 106 1 EMERGENCY STOP active 5 2 3 Signals to BAG DB number Byte Bit Description 11 0 7 Mode group RESET ...

Page 961: ...BA0 19 Index D DB 31 DBB60 5 12 DB10 DBB4 10 DBB5 10 DBB6 10 DBB7 10 DBX 56 1 10 DBX106 1 9 11 12 DBX56 1 8 10 12 DBX56 2 8 11 DB11 DBX0 7 11 DBX6 3 9 12 DB21 DBX7 7 11 E EMERGENCY STOP Acknowledgment 11 Interface 8 Sequence 9 Emergency stop key 8 M MD36610 9 MD36620 9 R Reset 11 ...

Page 962: ...Index Basic logic functions Emergency Stop N2 20 Function Manual 11 2006 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 ...

Page 963: ...2BA0 Valid for Control SINUMERIK 840D sl 840DE sl SINUMERIK 840Di sl 840DiE sl SINUMERIK 840D powerline 840DE powerline SINUMERIK 840Di powerline 840DiE powerline SINUMERIK 810D powerline 810DE powerline Software Version NCU system software for 840D sl 840DE sl 1 3 NCU system software for 840D sl DiE sl 1 0 NCU system software for 840D 840DE 7 4 NCU system software for 840Di 840DiE 3 3 NCU system ...

Page 964: ...ommissioning and operation of a device system may only be performed by qualified personnel Within the context of the safety notes in this documentation qualified persons are defined as persons who are authorized to commission ground and label devices systems and circuits in accordance with established safety practices and standards Prescribed Usage Note the following Warning This device may only b...

Page 965: ...ef description 5 2 Detailed Description 7 2 1 Defining a geometry axis as transverse axis 7 2 2 Dimensional information for transverse axes 9 3 Supplementary conditions 15 4 Examples 17 5 Data lists 19 5 1 Machine data 19 5 1 1 Channelspecific machine data 19 5 1 2 Axis spindlespecific machine data 19 Index 21 ...

Page 966: ...Table of contents Basic logic functions Transverse axes P1 4 Function Manual 11 2006 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 ...

Page 967: ... can be active for different transverse axes several transverse axes in a channel Functional decoupling of diameter programming and reference axis Programming and display in the diameter Reference axis for G96 G961 G962 Comment Geometry axis Linear channel axes Geometry axis Permitted axis type one m of 3 m of n one one of 3 Selection in the channel Channel MC_MD 20100 Axis MA_MD3460 BASE_FUNCTION...

Page 968: ...at refer to the workpiece coordinate system are displayed as diameter values System variables for setpoints and actual values that refer to the workpiece coordinate system contain diameter values Offsets are entered programmed and displayed in radius format Programmed end positions are converted to radius values internally The absolute interpolation parameters e g I J K for circular interpolation ...

Page 969: ...ition of a transversing axis in the channel The definition of a geometry axis as a transverse axis is done using machine data MD20100 MC_DIAMETER_AX_DEF geometry axis with transverse axis function For this axis diameter programming and assigning a constant cutting speed with G96 G961 G962 are both permitted Definition of several transversing axes in the channel The machine data MD30460 MA_BASE_FUN...

Page 970: ...nel specific basic position after power up RESET The channel specific basic position after power up or RESET or end of parts program of the G group 29 DIAMON DIAM90 DIAMOF DIAMCYCOF define the MD20150 MC_GCODE_RESET_VALUE and independently of MD20110 MC_RESET_MODE_MASK bit0 the MD20152 MC_GCODE_RESET_MODE The user can set the respective desired status via an event controlled program call prog even...

Page 971: ...ogramming is done via the modally active parts program statements of the G group 29 DIAMON Diameter programming ON DIAMOF Diameter programming OFF in other words radius programming ON DIAM90 Diameter or radius programming depending on the reference mode Diameter programming ON in connection with absolute dimensioning G90 Radius programming ON in connection with incremental dimensioning G91 DIAMCYC...

Page 972: ...n additional transverse axis is accepted in the new channel during axis replacement using RELEASE axis Axis replacement in synchronized actions For axis replacement in synchronized actions a transverse axis takes the status of the axis specific diameter programming with it into the new channel if the following applies to the transverse axis with MD30460 bit2 1 axis specific diameter programming is...

Page 973: ...orkpiece coordinate system WCS AA_MW Transverse axis System variable of the measuring functions MEAS measuring with delete distance to go and MEAW measuring without delete distance to go P_EP Transverse axis AA_IW Transverse axis DIAM90 DIAM90A AX After activation of the reference mode dependent diameter programming the following data are always displayed in relation to diameter regardless of the ...

Page 974: ...ameter programming In JOG mode Inc a PLC axis is subordinate to the channel status If diameter programming is active and MD20624 MC_HANDWH_CHAN_STOP_COND bit15 0 only half the path of the specified increment is transversed Radius programming from MD20100 MC_DIAMETER_AX_DEF and MD30460 MA_BASE_FUNCTION_MASK bit2 is dependent upon MD20360 MC_TOOL_PARAMETER_DEF_MASK taken into consideration as follow...

Page 975: ...as a diameter 6 Actual values of the transverse axis as a diameter 7 Display of actual values of the transverse axis as a diameter value 10 Tool portion of an active tool carrier that can be oriented if no tool is active 11 Evaluation of TC_DP6 as a diameter 12 Evaluation of TC_DP15 as wear of the tool diameter Work offset P_EXTFRAME and frames Bit3 1 For all transverse axes work offsets in frames...

Page 976: ...in the diameter N80 X50 Y100 dimension X in the radius G91 Y in the diameter N85 G90 X100 U200 dimension X in the diameter U in the radius N90 DIAMCHANA Y Y accepts the channel status DIAM90 N95 G91 X100 Y100 Dimension X and Y in the radius G91 N100 G90 X200 Y200 Dimension X and Y in diameter Example with axle replacement Transverse axes with diameter specification applied as in the previous examp...

Page 977: ...Basic logic functions Transverse axes P1 Function Manual 11 2006 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 15 Supplementary conditions 3 There are no supplementary conditions to note ...

Page 978: ...Supplementary conditions Basic logic functions Transverse axes P1 16 Function Manual 11 2006 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 ...

Page 979: ...Basic logic functions Transverse axes P1 Function Manual 11 2006 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 17 Examples 4 No examples are available ...

Page 980: ...Examples Basic logic functions Transverse axes P1 18 Function Manual 11 2006 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 ...

Page 981: ...ASK Definition of control basic setting after powerup and RESET part program end 20112 START_MODE_MASK Definition of the control basic settings for NC start 20150 GCODE_RESET_VALUES n Reset G groups 20152 GCODE_RESET_MODE n G code basic setting at RESET end of parts program 20360 TOOL_PARAMETER_DEF_MASK Definition of tool parameters 20624 HANDWH_CHAN_STOP_COND Definition of the behavior of traveli...

Page 982: ...Data lists 5 1 Machine data Basic logic functions Transverse axes P1 20 Function Manual 11 2006 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 ...

Page 983: ...s during handwheel traveling 13 M MD20100 7 13 MD20110 8 10 MD20112 8 MD20150 8 10 MD20152 8 10 MD27100 12 MD30460 7 9 10 13 P PLC axes 12 Position of the transverse axis in the machine coordinate system 7 R Radius related data 11 Reference axis for RESET end of parts program or start of parts program retained 8 S Several transverse axes Acceptance of the additional transverse axis 10 Axis identif...

Page 984: ...Index Basic logic functions Transverse axes P1 22 Function Manual 11 2006 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 Work offset external 13 ...

Page 985: ...BA0 Valid for Control SINUMERIK 840D sl 840DE sl SINUMERIK 840Di sl 840DiE sl SINUMERIK 840D powerline 840DE powerline SINUMERIK 840Di powerline 840DiE powerline SINUMERIK 810D powerline 810DE powerline Software Version NCU system software for 840D sl 840DE sl 1 3 NCU system software for 840D sl DiE sl 1 0 NCU system software for 840D 840DE 7 4 NCU system software for 840Di 840DiE 3 3 NCU system s...

Page 986: ...ommissioning and operation of a device system may only be performed by qualified personnel Within the context of the safety notes in this documentation qualified persons are defined as persons who are authorized to commission ground and label devices systems and circuits in accordance with established safety practices and standards Prescribed Usage Note the following Warning This device may only b...

Page 987: ...rties of PLC CPUs 31 2 5 3 Interface on 810D and 840D with integrated PLC 32 2 5 4 Diagnostic buffer on PLC 34 2 6 Interface structure 36 2 6 1 General 36 2 6 2 PLC NCK interface 36 2 6 3 Interface PLC HMI 42 2 6 4 PLC MCP HHU interface 45 2 7 Structure and functions of the basic program 49 2 7 1 General 49 2 7 2 Startup and synchronization of NCK PLC 51 2 7 3 Cyclic operation OB1 51 2 7 4 Time al...

Page 988: ...olled section 182 2 12 13 FC 7 TM_REV Transfer block for tool change with revolver 185 2 12 14 FC 8 TM_TRANS transfer block for tool management 189 2 12 15 FC 9 ASUB startup of asynchronous subprograms 197 2 12 16 FC 10 AL_MSG error and operating messages 200 2 12 17 FC 12 AUXFU call interface for user with auxiliary functions 202 2 12 18 FC 13 BHGDisp display control for handheld unit 203 2 12 19...

Page 989: ...r FB 273 2 14 3 2 General 275 2 14 3 3 Use of POINTER and ANY in FC if POINTER or ANY is available as parameter 275 2 14 3 4 Use of POINTER and ANY in FB if POINTER or ANY is available as parameter 277 2 14 4 Multiinstance DB 278 2 14 5 Strings 280 2 14 6 Determining offset addresses for data block structures 281 3 Supplementary conditions 283 4 Examples 285 5 Data lists 287 5 1 Machine data 287 5...

Page 990: ...Table of contents Basic logic functions PLC Basic program powerline P3 pl 6 Function Manual 11 2006 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 ...

Page 991: ...ram at the start of the PLC cycle OB1 This ensures that the signals from the NCK remain constant throughout the cycle Event driven signal exchange NCK PLC PLC functions that have to be executed as a function of the workpiece program are triggered by auxiliary functions in the workpiece program If the auxiliary functions are used to start execution of a block the type of auxiliary function determin...

Page 992: ...unction block FB or function call FC The associated FBs Function Blocks and FCs Function Calls are supplied together with the basic program Messages User messages are acquired and conditioned by the basic program A defined bit field is used to transfer the message signals to the basic program The signals are evaluated there and entered in the PLC diagnostics buffer on the occurrence of the message...

Page 993: ...for user and basic program 64 96 128 KB 64 96 128 160 192 224 256 288 KB dependent on option 96 160 224 288 352 416 480 kByte dependent on option Data block memory Like user memory Like user memory Up to 96 KB Memory submodule no no no Bit memories 2048 2048 2048 4096 with PLC operating system 03 10 13 or later Timers 128 128 128 Counters 64 64 64 Clock memories 8 8 8 Program data blocks OB FB FC ...

Page 994: ...grammable block communication PBK no no yes Consistent Data to standard slave via SFC 14 15 N A 26 26 1 Subrack 0 is integrated in the NC Subracks 1 to 3 are available for I O devices I O expansion 810D 840D 810D 840D 810D 840D PLC CPU MLFB Integrated PLC CPU314 Integrated PLC CPU315 2DP 6ES7 315 2AF00 0AB0 Integrated PLC CPU315 2DP master slave 6ES7 315 2AF01 0AB0 I O modules 24 24 24 PROFIBUS DP...

Page 995: ... I O devices from I O byte 0 onwards from PI PO byte 272 onwards Through optional configuring of I O devices from I O byte 0 onwards from PI PO byte 272 onwards Processing time Bit commands I O Word commands 0 3 ms kA 1 4 ms kA 0 3 ms kA 1 4 ms kA 0 1 ms kA 0 25 1 2 ms kA PDIAG Alarm S SQ Yes Yes Yes PROFIBUS Master Master Slave Master Slave Number of PROFIBUS slaves Max 64 SDB 2000 32 KB Max 64 S...

Page 996: ...0 21 32 35 40 55 57 80 82 85 87 100 121 122 0 2048 0 2048 1 2048 Max length of data block 32 KB 32 KB Max block length FC FB 64 KB 64 KB Inputs outputs 1 address capacity in bytes digital analog incl reserved area process image Note The inputs outputs above 4096 are reserved for integrated drives 4096 4096 8192 8192 256 256 4096 4096 8192 8192 256 256 Inputs outputs 2 addressing digital analog Thr...

Page 997: ... also access the information from SDB2000 can continue to be transferred to the NCK and the PLC basic program in conditioned form CPI interface This is necessary for controlling the drives and PROFIsafe modules on Profibus A memory area defined by the PLC is available for these data structures Its size is limited by the maximum number of slots This means that during loading SDBs with fewer slaves ...

Page 998: ...display The PLC module the PLC operating system version and the module code appear in the last line of the HMI version display Example PLC module PLC operating system version Module code S7 PLC_315 2DP system 03 10 23 1200 Module codes The table below shows the relationship between the module code and the corresponding PLC module the suitable PLC operating system and its current software version M...

Page 999: ... 840Di 810D 840D Number N A N A 1 PLC basic program functions 840Di 810D 840D Axes spindles channels Mode groups 1 1 1 5 2 1 31 10 10 Status control signals M decoders M00 99 G group decoders Aux function distributors Interrupt driven output of auxiliary functions Move axes spindles from PLC Async subprogram interface Error operating messages MCP and handheld unit signals via NCK Reading writing o...

Page 1000: ...DB 1 DB 62 DB 71 DB 89 1 The data blocks for channels axes spindles and tool management functions that are not activated may be assigned as required by the user PLC 317 2DP PLC CPU PLC 317 2DP are reserved for further number bands for SIEMENS applications referring to FC FB DB and I O areas FC FB and DB Component Reserved range Functions FC 1000 FC 1023 Function blocks FB 1000 FB 1023 Data blocks ...

Page 1001: ...ion The notices below must be observed STEP7 Version 3 With STEP7 Version 3 and higher the hardware configuration of the SINUMERIK components must be defined via the entries in SIMATIC RACK 300 The install or setup program of the basic program on the tool box diskettes is required for this purpose STEP7 Version 5 1 SP2 and Toolbox 6 03 02 With STEP7 V5 1 SP2 and Toolbox 6 03 02 or later the SINUME...

Page 1002: ...PLC314 SINUMERIK 840D NCU 572 6FC5 357 0BA21 0AE0 6ES7 315 2AF00 0AB0 840D with PLC3152AF00 SINUMERIK 840D NCU 572 6FC5 357 0BA21 1AE0 6ES7 315 2AF00 0AB0 840D with PLC3152AF00 SINUMERIK 840D NCU 572 2 export version with PROFIBUS DP 6FC5 357 0BA21 1AE1 6ES7 315 2AF01 0AB0 810D 840D with PLC3152AF01 SINUMERIK 840D DE NCU 572 2 without system software 6FC5 357 0BB21 0AE0 6ES7 315 2AF01 0AB0 810D 84...

Page 1003: ... with PLC314 SINUMERIK 840D NCU 573 with PROFIBUS DP 6FC5 357 0BA32 0AE1 6ES7 315 2AF00 0AB0 840D with PLC3152AF00 SINUMERIK 840D NCU 573 export version with PROFIBUS DP 6FC5 357 0BY32 0AE1 6ES7 315 2AF00 0AB0 840D with PLC3152AF00 SINUMERIK 840D NCU 573 with PROFIBUS DP 6FC5 357 0BA33 0AE0 6ES7 315 2AF00 0AB0 840D with PLC3152AF00 SINUMERIK 840D NCU 573 export version with PROFIBUS DP 6FC5 357 0B...

Page 1004: ...C315 2AF03 SINUMERIK 840D NCU 573 3 6FC5 357 0BB33 0AE2 6ES7 315 2AF01 0AB0 810D 840D with PLC3152AF01 SINUMERIK 840D NCU 573 3 6FC5 357 0BB33 0AE2 with operating system 12 30 07 6ES7 315 2AF03 0AB0 810D 840D with PLC315 2AF03 as of STEP7 V5 0 and Toolbox 05 03 05 SINUMERIK 840D NCU 572 4 6FC5 357 0BB23 0AE0 6ES7 314 6CF00 0AB0 810D 840D with PLC314C 2DP SINUMERIK 840D NCU 573 4 6FC5 357 0BB34 0AE...

Page 1005: ...ed into this subrack Slot 2 The integrated PLC PLC 314 or PLC 315 2DP Slot 3 An IM 360 Slot 4 The FM NCU With PLC 314 NC software version 3 5 and higher the FM NCU must also be defined if further MPI C bus devices are included in subrack 1 to subrack 3 e g FM modules with C bus connection The properties of the FM NCU must not be changed as process interrupts e g auxiliary functions of the NCU may ...

Page 1006: ...m for the basic program hardware selection in STEP7 SINUMERIK 810D 840D option package and the NC Var Selector To start the installation run setup exe in the main CD directory You can then choose which components to install After the installation you can select the basic program library directly from STEP 7 gp8x0d61 61 is the main basic program version The concrete version of the basic program can...

Page 1007: ...h the same name GP840Dxy S7A must be deleted beforehand STEP7 V2 x 3 x The basic program is stored as a compressed file with the name GP840D EXE in directory S7V2 840 or S7V2 810 or S7V2 on the basic program diskette The basic program GP840D exe must be copied to subcatalog S7LIBS of STEP7 V2 step7_v2 or subsequent versions thereof and then called The library structure required for the basic progr...

Page 1008: ...ic program blocks FCs FBs DBs OBs SFCs SFBs and UDTs File Manage Project menu in the Step7 program editor 2 File GPOB840D AWL or GPOB810D AWL or GPOBFMNC AWL and other STL AWL files if appropriate must also be copied from the basic program catalog into the CPU program The OBs contained in this file are the basis for the user program with the associated basic program calls Existing user blocks must...

Page 1009: ...ns and sequences on the machine The interface signals to the NC are also controlled in this program More complex communication functions with the NC e g read write NC data tool management acknowledgments etc are activated and executed via basic program FCs and FBs The machine program can be created in different creation languages e g STL LAD CSF S7 HIGRAPH S7GRAPH SCL The complete machine program ...

Page 1010: ... 6 PLC series startup PLC archives Generate series archive Once the blocks have been loaded into the PLC CPU a series archive can be generated via the HMI operator interface for data backup on the machine To ensure data consistency this backup must be created immediately after block loading when the PLC is in the Stop state It does not replace the SIMATIC project backup as the series archive saves...

Page 1011: ...pty This initiates a check of the correct Step7 version and path name in Autoexec The functions are enabled with a return parameter of 0 Return parameter 1 incorrect STEP 7 version Return parameter 2 no entry in Autoexec bat Function Magic bstrVal As String As Long Function MakeSeriesStartUp FileName As String Option As Long Container As S7Container As Long Option parameter 0 Normal series startup...

Page 1012: ...ew basic program when a new NC software version is installed The basic programs blocks must be loaded into the user project for this purpose OB 1 OB 40 OB 100 FC 12 and DB 4 should not be loaded if these blocks are already included in the user project These blocks may have been modified by the user The new basic program must be linked with the user program To do this proceed as follows 1 Generate ...

Page 1013: ...oftware version even earlier versions The variables can also be selected from the latest list for earlier NC software versions The data content in DB 120 default DB for variables does not depend on the software version i e selected variables in an older software version must not be reselected when the software is upgraded 2 4 8 I O modules FM CP modules Special packages for STEP7 are generally req...

Page 1014: ...eneral reset A system data block SDB 0 has been loaded with a modified MPI address This has caused an MPI bus conflict due to dual assignment of addresses Disconnect all MPI cables to other components Create the link Direct_PLC with the programmer Correct the MPI address 3 All four LEDs on the PLC flash DI disaster A system error has occurred in the PLC Measures The diagnostic buffer on the PLC mu...

Page 1015: ...above table or in Catalog FT70 2 5 2 Properties of PLC CPUs SINUMERIK 810D 840D 840Di PLC CPUs are based on standard SIMATIC CPUs in the S7 300 family As a result they generally possess the same functions Functional deviations are shown in the table above Owing to differences in their memory system as compared to the S7 CPU certain functions are not available e g blocks on memory card project on m...

Page 1016: ...P and handheld unit HHU on the 840D via the operator panel interface OPI the COM module being responsible for data transport All devices specified above can also be operated on the multipoint interface MPI in the case of the 840 D With the 810D data communication with the operator panel OP machine control panel MCP and handheld unit HHU takes place only via the MPI The programming device is connec...

Page 1017: ...alarm driven however they are transferred directly to the user interface Where a G function is evaluated at several points in the PLC program differences in the information of the G function within one PLC cycle may arise In the case of NC actions triggered and assigned with parameters by the PLC e g traverse concurrent axes triggering and parameter assignment is performed using FCs and FBs not in...

Page 1018: ...l The diagnostic buffer on the PLC which can be read out using STEP 7 displays diagnostic information about the PLC operating system Moreover through the basic program and the function Alarms messages are made available via the FC10 entries in the diagnostic buffer These alarms and messages are displayed in the diagnostic buffer as event with the Event ID ID without explanatory text Meaning of dis...

Page 1019: ...upplementary information 2 16 0200 0000 0020 All values must be converted to decimal values and lined up in order of alarm or message number Event ID 46 hex 70 dec Supplementa ry information 1 00 hex 00 dec Supplementa ry information 2 20 hex 32 dec Alarm number BM 1 70 00 32 1 Controlled by DB2 DBX184 0 BM operational message As such the event with the event ID 16 B046 and the mentioned additiona...

Page 1020: ... The advantage of this approach is that the minimum amount of PLC RAM required for the current machine configuration is used 2 6 2 PLC NCK interface General The PLC NCK interface comprises a data interface on one side and a function interface on the other The data interface contains status and control signals auxiliary functions and G functions while the function interface is used to transfer jobs...

Page 1021: ...ORFDWLRQV LV VSLQGOH 6LJQDOV IURP D LV 6LJQDOV WR D LV LV VSLQGOH KDQQHO 6LJQDOV IURP FKDQQHO 6LJQDOV WR FKDQQHO KDQQHO 6LJQDOV IURP 00 6LJQDOV WR 00 6LJQDOV IURP 1 FRPSLOH F FOHV 6LJQDOV WR 1 FRPSLOH F FOHV 6LJQ IURP PRGH JU 6LJQDOV WR 0HVVDJHV 3 XVHU SURJUDP LV VSLQGOH GULYH 1 FKDQQHO 6LJQDOV IURP 1 6LJQDOV WR 1 LV VSLQGOH KDQQHO 7RRO PDQDJHPHQW 7RRO PDQDJHPHQW D W D L Q W H U I D F H 7RRO PDQDJ...

Page 1022: ...ram and entered in the machine axisspecific interface WH 1 3 00 HFRGLQJ KDQG ZKHHO VHOHFWLRQ H WHUQDO RXWSXWV 6HWSRLQWV IRU DQDORJ 1 RXWSXWV H WHUQDO LQSXWV FWXDO YDOXHV IRU DQDORJ 1 LQSXWV H WHUQDO RXWSXWV 6HWSRLQWV IRU GLJLWDO 1 RXWSXWV WHUQDO LQSXWV FWXDO YDOXHV IRU GLJLWDO 1 LQSXWV WHUQDO RXWSXWV RQWURO RI DQDORJ 1 RXWSXWV WHUQDO LQSXWV RQWURO RI DQDORJ 1 LQSXWV WHUQDO RXWSXWV RQWURO RI GLJLWD...

Page 1023: ...LC even if there is no hardware for this channel on the NCK side The values transferred by the NCK can be overwritten by the PLC Signals and values from the PLC can also be output directly via the NCK I O devices Note When implementing digital and analog NCK I Os you must observe the information in the following references References FB2 Function Manual Extended Functions Digital and Analog NCK I ...

Page 1024: ...the associated interface bits set for the duration of one cycle M signals M0 M99 are transferred from the NCK with extended address 0 In the case of the G functions the group is additionally decoded and the G functions which are active in the relevant group are entered in the interface data block S values are also entered together with the related M signals M03 M04 M05 in the spindlespecific inter...

Page 1025: ...UDYHUVH VLJQDOV 3URJUDP FRQWURO Figure 2 6 PLC NC channel interface PLC axis spindle drive signals The axis specific and spindle specific signals are divided into the following groups Shared axis spindle signals Axis signals Spindle signals Drive signals The signals are transmitted cyclically at the start of OB1 with the following exceptions Exceptions include INC Mode of HMI axial F value M S val...

Page 1026: ...OV ULYH VLJQDOV LV VLJQDOV LPLW VZLWFK RQWURO VLJQDOV 6SLQGOH VLJQDOV 6KDUHG D LV VSLQGOH VLJQDOV 1 PRGH 7UDYHUVH VLJQDOV RQWURO VLJQDOV HHGUDWH VSLQGOH RYHUULGH 3 0 3 Figure 2 7 Interface between PLC and axes spindles drives 2 6 3 Interface PLC HMI General The following groups of functions are required for the PLC HMI interface Control signals Machine operation PLC messages PLC status display Con...

Page 1027: ...m stop are also entered with a time stamp in a diagnostic buffer circular buffer in the chronological order of their occurrence The events entered in the diagnostic buffer are automatically transmitted to human machine interface systems via the MPI or via the OPI through the COM module once these have issued a ready signal message service Transfer to the node ready is a function of the PLC operati...

Page 1028: ...uffer for incoming and outgoing messages The HMI software maintains an uptodate log of existing operating messages using the identifiers operating message arrived and operating message gone Error messages are used to display error states on the machine which generally lead to a machine stoppage Where several errors occur in rapid succession it is important to be able to distinguish their order of ...

Page 1029: ...LQGOH Q HHGUDWH VSLQG OH GLVDEOH 0HVVDJH DFTXLVLWLRQ LDJQRV WLFV EXIIHU 0HVVDJH VHUYLFH 3DUDPHWHUV FTXLVLWLRQ URXS VLJQDOV IRU FKDQQHO DQG D LV URXS VLJQDOV GLVDEOH VLJQDOV LW ILHOGV KDQJH VLJQDOV Figure 2 8 Acquisition and signaling of PLC events 2 6 4 PLC MCP HHU interface General On the SINUMERIK 840D 810D the machine control panel MCP is connected on the same bus that connects the OP with the ...

Page 1030: ...The basic program of the PLC enters the incoming signals in the input image The NC related signals are generally distributed by the basic program to the VDI interface This can be modified by the user if required The signals displays from the PLC to the MCP displays are transferred in the opposite direction The signals of the handheld unit HHU are transferred either via the operator panel interface...

Page 1031: ...int Interface of the AS 300 The transmission rate in this configuration is 187 5 Kbps The PLC operating system copies the incoming signals straight to the user interface e g input image at the cycle control point Transfer to the VDI interface is performed as on the 840D by the user program or by a standard routine of the basic program NEG 6 EXV 3 EXV 2S V V 3 1 8 23 0 3 8 8VHU NH V GLVSOD V Figure...

Page 1032: ...terface 15 setting via DIP fix COM module 31 13 Programming device PC e g for startup fixed 0 PLC bus segment Bus station Setting range Default setting Comment PLC 31 2 COM module Fixed depending on PLC address 3 Programming device PC e g for startup fixed 0 MCP interface in the PLC The signals from the machine control panel are routed via the I O area by default A distinction is made between NC a...

Page 1033: ...HUULGH 1 PRGH 0RGH JURXSV LJKW HPLWWLQJ GLRGHV V H VLJQDOV S R 0RGH JURXS 1 D LV VSLQGOH LQWHUIDFH 4 P Q Figure 2 11 Interface to and from machine control panel 2 7 Structure and functions of the basic program 2 7 1 General General The program is modular in design i e it is structured according to NCK functions In the operating system a distinction is made between the following levels of execution...

Page 1034: ... 2BA0 70B LU 70B7UDQV 3B35 0 3B 7 0 3B 0 3URFHVV LQWHUUXSW FOLF SURFHVVLQJ 6WDUW XS KDQQHO LV 6SLQGOH 8VHU SURJUDP 8VHU SURJUDP 8VHU SURJUDP JURXS GLVWULEXWRU RQ HV VSLQGOHV 5HDG ZULWH YDU 3 VHUYLFHV ROG UHVWDUW UURU DQG VWDWXV PHVVDJHV 6WDU GHOWD 8 LVSOD FRQWURO 70 0 3 68 0 3 8 2 2 2 7RRO PDQDJH PHQW QRW 0 1 0RGH JURXS 1 3 2 Figure 2 12 Structure of the PLC program ...

Page 1035: ...and always commences cyclic execution at the start of OB 1 Synchronization The PLC is synchronized with the HMI and NCK during power up Sign of life After a proper initial start and the first complete OB1 cycle initial setting cycle the PLC and NCK continuously exchange sign of life signals If the signoflife signal from the NCK fails to arrive the PLC NCK interface is neutralized and the signal NC...

Page 1036: ...ange Data type 1 Value 2 Value 1 Value 2 Value 1 Value 2 Value G function G function 2551 Byte M word M group M word 99 99 999 999 Word DWord S word Spindle no S word 6 Floating point2 Word DWord T word Magazine no T word 99 65535 Word Word D word D word 99 255 Byte Byte H word H group H word 99 Floating point Word DWord F word Axis No F word 18 Floating point Word DWord 1 relative number transfer...

Page 1037: ...erminated or aborted Note During system startup all G group bytes are initialized with the value 0 M S F distributor The M S F distributor is used to enter spindlespecific M words M 1 6 3 4 5 S words and F words for axial feeds in the appropriate spindle and axis data blocks The criterion for distribution is the extended address which is passed to the PLC for M words S words and axial F words MCP ...

Page 1038: ... base settings are required for OB 35 the stop can be prevented by programming OB 80 with at least the program command BE 2 7 5 Process interrupt processing OB 40 General A process interrupt OB 40 interrupt can for example be triggered by appropriately configured I Os or by certain NC functions Due to the different origin of the interrupt the PLC user program must first interpret the cause of the ...

Page 1039: ...re also reset Auxiliary function values Auxiliary function values are retained so that it is possible to trace the last functions triggered by the NCK G function values G function values are reset i e initialized with the value 0 PLC NCK signals The signals sent by the PLC to the NCK are divided into control signals and tasks that are transferred by FCs to the NCK Control signals The control signa...

Page 1040: ...se a function call FCs FBs of basic program These are FCs and FBs which are controlled by a trigger signal e g via parameter Req Start etc and which supply an execution acknowledgment as an output parameter e g via parameter Done NDR Error etc A variable compiled of other signals which produce the trigger for the function call should be set Start conditions may be reset only as a function of the s...

Page 1041: ...V KHHO2Y QFK LV1R 6WDUW QSXW SDUDPHWHUV 2XWSXW SDUDPHWHUV ASUBs Asynchronous subprograms ASUBs can be used to activate any selected function in the NC Before an asynchronous subprogram can be started from the PLC it must be ensured that it is available and prepared by the NC program or by FB 4 PI services ASUB ASUBs can only be started in MDA or Automatic mode with running parts program Once prepa...

Page 1042: ...n be selected from a table which is also supplied The selected variables are first collected in a second projectrelated list Command Generate DB creates a AWL file which must be linked to the program file for the machine concerned and compiled together with the machine program 1 to 8 values can be read or written with a read or write job If necessary the values are converted e g NCK floating point...

Page 1043: ...T2 DB 2 Alarms messages UDT10 DB10 NCK signals UDT11 DB11 Mode group signals UDT19 DB19 HMI signals UDT21 DB21 to DB30 Channel signal UDT31 DB31 to DB61 Axis spindle signals UDT71 DB71 Tool management Load unload locations UDT72 DB72 Tool management Change in spindle UDT3 DB73 Tool management Change in revolver To symbolically program the interface signals the interface data blocks must first be s...

Page 1044: ...of FB1 ListMDecGrp number of M groups for decoding up to 256 M functions with extended address can be decoded by the basic program The assignment of the M function with extended address and the bit to be set in the signal list is defined in the decoding list The signals are grouped for this purpose The signal list contains 16 groups with 16 bits each as decoded signals There is only one decoding l...

Page 1045: ...FF WR OLVW 3 EDVLF SURJUDP 5HDG LQ GLVDEOH 5HDG LQ GLVDEOH 6LJQDOV WR 1 1 SDUW SURJUDP KDQQHO 1 SDUW SURJUDP KDQQHO Figure 2 13 M decoding acc to list Activation of the function The number of groups to be evaluated decoded is indicated in the basic program parameter ListMDecGrp when FB 1 is called in OB 100 see also FB 1 description M decoding is activated if this value is between 1 and 16 Before ...

Page 1046: ... from the first M function MFirstAdr to the last M function MLastAdr from bit 0 up to maximum bit 15 for each group Each entry in the decoding lists consists of 3 parameters each of which is assigned to a group Assignment of groups Group Extended M address First M address in group Last M address in group 1 MSigGrp 1 MExtAdr MSigGrp 1 MFirstAdr MSigGrp 1 MLastAdr 2 MSigGrp 2 MExtAdr MSigGrp 2 MFirs...

Page 1047: ...s Group Decoding list DB 75 Signal list Extended M address First M address in group Last M address in group DB 76 1 2 1 5 DBX0 0 to DBX0 4 2 3 12 23 DBX2 0 to DBX3 3 3 40 55 55 DBX4 0 DATA_BLOCK DB 75 TITLE VERSION 0 0 STRUCT MSigGrp ARRAY 1 16 OF STRUCT MExtAdr INT MFirstAdr DINT MLastAdr DINT END_STRUCT END_STRUCT BEGIN MSigGrp 1 MExtAdr 2 MSigGrp 1 MFirstAdr L 1 MSigGrp 1 MLastAdr L 5 MSigGrp 2...

Page 1048: ...ollowed by a restart During the restart the basic program sets up DB76 signal list If the NC program is started at this point and the expanded M function e g M3 17 is processed by the NCK this M function will be decoded and bit 2 5 set in DB 76 see decoding list DB 75 At the same time the basic program sets the read in disable and the processing of the NC program is halted in the corresponding NC ...

Page 1049: ...ram during powerup only when user machine data are used i e sum of GP parameters UDInt UDHex and UDReal is greater than zero The size of the individual areas and thus also the total length of DB20 is set by PLC machine data MD14504 MAXNUM_USER_DATA_INT MD14506 MAXNUM_USER_DATA_HEX MD14508 MAXNUM_USER_DATA_FLOAT is set and specified to the user in the GP parameters UDInt UDHex and UDReal The data i...

Page 1050: ...art Explanation DB length is not the same as the required DB length Response Interrupt display and PLC Stop To correct or avoid errors Delete DB 20 followed by RESET Continuation After cold restart Example The project in the example requires 4 integer values 2 hexadecimal fields with bit information and 1 real value Machine data MD14510 USER_DATA_INT 0 123 MD14510 USER_DATA_INT 1 456 MD14510 USER_...

Page 1051: ...e structure of the machine data used is specified in a UDT TYPE UDT 20 STRUCT UDInt ARRAY 0 3 OF INT UDHex0 ARRAY 0 15 OF BOOL UDReal ARRAY 0 0 OF REAL Description as field for later expansions END_STRUCT END_TYPE Note ARRAY OF BOOL are always sent to even numbered addresses For this reason an array range of 0 to 15 must generally be selected in the UDT definition or all Boolean variables specifie...

Page 1052: ...n the symbol table to allow data access in symbolic form Symbol Operand Data type UData DB 20 UDT 20 Access operations in user program list includes only symbolic read access L UData UDInt 0 L UData UDInt 1 L UData UDInt 2 L UData UDInt 3 U UData UDHex0 0 U UData UDHex0 1 U UData UDHex0 2 U UData UDHex0 3 U UData UDHex0 4 U UData UDHex0 5 U UData UDHex0 6 U UData UDHex0 7 U UData UDHex0 15 L UData...

Page 1053: ...ned The default time settings for timeout and cyclic forced retriggering do not have to be changed Activation Each component is activated either via the number of machine control panels parameter MCPNum or in the case of the handheld unit parameter BHG 2 BHG 1 corresponds to a link via the MPI interface in conjunction with an SDB210 Whether a component is to be linked to the OPI or the MPI is dete...

Page 1054: ... parameter MCP1Stop or MCP2Stop or BHGStop 0 4 Communication with the new component is taking place when the checkback in DB10 byte 104 relevant bits 0 1 2 is set to 1 As described in Section Control signals all parameters must be programmed according to data type Switching off flashing MCP With MCP firmware V5 01 02 and higher flashing can be suppressed in offline mode No communication takes plac...

Page 1055: ...nction of the NC type used is given below In each case the parameter set of FB1 and the valid status information relevant for the respective data transmission method are specified If an error is detected due to a timeout monitor a corresponding entry is made in the diagnostic buffer of the PLC CPU errors 400260 to 400262 In this case the input signals from the MCP or from the handheld unit MCP1In ...

Page 1056: ...e out MCP1StatRec MCP2StatRec BHGStatRec 10 Receiver Time out An error entry is also made in the PLC diagnostic buffer for timeouts bits 10 and 27 resulting in the following error messages on the operator interface 400260 MCP 1 failure 400261 MCP 2 failure 400262 HHU failure An MSTT or BHG failure is detected immediately after a cold restart even if no data have yet been exchanged between the MSTT...

Page 1057: ... are made via the relevant parameters in FB1 BHG 1 transfer via SDB210 BHGIn as parameterized in SDB210 BHGOut as parameterized in SDB210 BHGStatRec as parameterized in SDB210 BHGTimeout as parameterized in SDB210 Status information MCP1 and MCP2 see table Status information Available in Bit No Description BHGStatRec 10 Receiver Time out An error entry is also made in the PLC diagnostic buffer for...

Page 1058: ...ers FB1 MCP HHU MCPNum 1 or 2 number of MCPs BHG 2 transfer via COM module MCP1In MCP2In BHGIn MCP1Out MCP2Out BHGOut MCP1StatSend MCP2StatSend BHGStatSend MCP1StatRec MCP2StatRec BHGStatRec MCP1BusAdr MCP2BusAdr BHGInLen MCP1Timeout MCP2Timeout BHGOutLen MCP1Cycl MCP2Cycl BHGTimeout MCPMPI TRUE MPI BHGCycl MCP1Stop MCP2Stop BHGRecGDNo MCPBustype 0 BHGRecGBZNo BHGRecObjNo BHGSendGDNo BHGSendGBZNo ...

Page 1059: ...r entry is also made in the PLC diagnostic buffer for timeouts bits 10 and 27 resulting in the following error messages on the operator interface 400260 MCP 1 failure Or 400261 MCP 2 failure 400262 HHU failure An MSTT or BHG failure is detected immediately after a cold restart even if no data have yet been exchanged between the MSTT BHG and PLC The monitoring function is activated as soon as all t...

Page 1060: ...StatRec MCP2StatRec BHGStatRec 10 Receiver Time out An error entry is also made in the PLC diagnostic buffer for timeouts resulting in the following error messages on the operator interface 400260 MCP 1 failure 400261 MCP 2 failure 400262 HHU failure An MCP HHU failure is only detected following a cold restart if the unit has already been involved in data exchange The first exchange of data with t...

Page 1061: ...MCP2StatRec n r BHGStatRec MCP1BusAdr MCP2BusAdr BHGInLen MCP1Timeout n r MCP2Timeout n r BHGOutLen MCP1Cycl n r MCP2Cycl n r BHGTimeout MCPMPI FALSE BHGCycl MCP1Stop n r MCP2Stop n r BHGRecGDNo MCPBusType 3 BHGRecGBZNo BHGRecObjNo BHGSendGDNo BHGSendGBZNo BHGSendObjNo BHGMPI FALSE BHGStop MCP failure switches the PLC to the STOP state If this is undesirable OB 82 OB 86 can be used to avoid a stop...

Page 1062: ... is comprehensively described in References LIS Lists 2 9 2 Assignment FB FC FB number FC number Meaning 1 Basic program 2 29 Reserved for Siemens 1 Reserved for Siemens 2 29 Reserved for Siemens 30 35 See below ShopMill ManualTurn 30 127 siehe Note 1 User area 30 127 see Note User area Note The actual upper limit of the block number FB FC depends on the active PLC CPU which is located in the sele...

Page 1063: ...or 2 1 2D milling machines in the workshop environment The above FCs and DBs can be used provided that the machine to be configured is not a milling machine for 2 1 2D machining operations However if you intend to use your machine for applications of this type then the FCs and DBs should not be used 2 9 3 Assignment DB Note Only as many data blocks as are required according to the NC machine data ...

Page 1064: ...r 810D 840D ManualTurn ManualTurn uses FC30 to 35 and DB81 to 89 ManualTurn is an operating system for conventional cyclecontrolled turning machines The above FCs and DBs can be used provided that the machine to be configured is not a turning machine with a maximum of two axes and one spindle If your machine is of this type and if you might require conventional operating methods in addition to CNC...

Page 1065: ...ic and optional functions The basic functions include cyclic signal exchange between the NC and PLC The options include for example the FCs which can be used if required The table below lists the memory requirements for the basic functions and the options The data quoted represent guide values the actual values depend on the current software version Memory requirements of blocks with SINUMERIK 840...

Page 1066: ...talled 1358 1160 FC 26 Transfer of MCP signals HPU variant Must be loaded for HPUs 1358 1160 FC 14 MPI OPI transfer Must be loaded if MCPNum 0 942 802 Handheld unit FC 13 Display control HHU Can be loaded for handheld units 1264 1044 Error operating messages FC 10 Acquisition FM BM Load when FM BM is used 1572 1350 ASUB FC 9 ASUB start Load when PLC ASUBs are used 656 538 Basic program options Con...

Page 1067: ...l management option 530 430 FC 8 Transfer function Load for tool management option 1002 834 FC 22 Direction selection Load if direction selection is required 404 300 DB 71 Loading locations Generated by BP as a function of NC MD 30 B 30 B DB 72 Spindles Generated by BP as a function of NC MD 48 Sp 48 Sp DB 73 Turret Generated by BP as a function of NC MD 44 R 44 R DB 74 Basic function Generated by...

Page 1068: ...38 See above Concurrent axis For 2 turrets 674 560 See above PLC NC communication 1 x read variable and 1 x write variable 8070 6388 See above Tool management 2 turrets with one loading point each 3430 2854 See above Compile cycles 472 436 Total 34512 27898 2 11 Supplementary conditions and NC VAR selector 2 11 1 Supplementary conditions 2 11 1 1 Programming and parameterizing tools Basics Hardwar...

Page 1069: ...on of modifications and additions ON and OFF line Transfer of blocks from programming device to the PLC and vice versa Parameterizing Parameterizing tool HW Config for CPU and I O device parameterization Communication Configuration configuration tool for setting the CPU communication parameters Output of system data such as hardware and software version memory capacity I O expansion assignment Tes...

Page 1070: ...n SIMATIC catalogs and STEP 7 documentation 2 11 1 2 SIMATIC documentation required References SIMATIC S 7 System Overview S7 300 CPU 314 CPU 315 2DP Operation List Programming with STEP 7 STEP 7 User s Guide STEP 7 Programming Manual Designing User Programs STEP 7 Reference Manual STL Instruction List STEP 7 Reference Manual LAD Ladder Diagram STEP 7 Reference Manual Standard and System Functions...

Page 1071: ...erred these AWL STL files must be compiled with STEP 7 The PC application NC VAR selector fetches the addresses of required NC variables and processes them for access in the PLC program FB 2 FB 3 This enables the programmer to select NC variables from the entire range of NC variables to store this selection of variables to edit them by means of a code generator for the STEP 7 compiler and finally ...

Page 1072: ...near mdb Machine data of the 611D drive Performance 2 ncv_611d_P2 mdb Machine data of the 611D linear drive Performance 2 ncv_611d_P2Linear mdb Machine data of the hydraulic drive ncv_Hydraulics mdb The user can also transfer variables to a second list separate window This latter selection of variables can then be stored in an ASCII file or edited as a STEP 7 source file awl and stored Once he has...

Page 1073: ...capable of processing all previous NC software versions It is not therefore necessary to install different versions of the NC VAR selector in parallel System features supplementary conditions The PC application NC VAR selector requires Windows 95 or later operating system The assignment of names to variables is described in References LIS Lists Chapter Variables or in the Variables Help file integ...

Page 1074: ...The NC VAR selector is used to generate a list of selected variables from a list of variables and then to generate an awl file that can be compiled by the STEP 7 compiler Note A awl file contains the names and alias names of the NC variables as well as information about their address parameters Any data block generated from this file will only contain the address parameters 10 bytes per parameter ...

Page 1075: ...2 21 Basic display with basic menu Project menu item All operator actions associated with the project file file of selected variables are performed under this menu item Terminating the application The application can be terminated by selecting the End option under the Project menu item Creating a new project A new project new file for selected variables can be set up under the Project menu item A ...

Page 1076: ...ting project Select Open under the Project menu item to open an existing project variables already selected A file selection window is displayed allowing the appropriate project with extension var to be selected Figure 2 23 Selection window for existing projects If after selection of the project new variables are to be added a complete list of NCK variables must be selected see Selecting complete ...

Page 1077: ...nt Setting menu item The default setting is 77 lines Edit menu item The following operator actions are examples of those which can be carried out directly with this menu item Transfer variables Delete variables change alias names Find variables These actions can also be canceled again under Edit Undoing actions Operator actions relating to the creation of the project file transfer variables delete...

Page 1078: ... 94 Function Manual 11 2006 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 Figure 2 24 Window with selected Complete List The field variables e g axis area T area data etc are indicated by means of brackets Additional information must be specified here When the variables are transferred to the project list the additional information required is requested ...

Page 1079: ...criteria for displaying list of variables There are three options Display all data Input area block and name incl combinations Display MD SE data number The following wildcards can also be used To extend the search criterion as required Example search criteria Name search criterion CHAN Found CHAN_NAME chanAlarm chanStatus channelName chanAssignment Selecting variables A variable is selected by me...

Page 1080: ...hich are too long When a variable is selected the length of the STEP 7 name to be used is therefore checked If the name is longer than 24 characters the user must enter an additional name which is then used as the alias In this case the user must ensure that the alias name is unambiguous Alias input can always be activated by the user in the Options menu An alias name can then be entered every tim...

Page 1081: ...ET the optional parameters UnitX ColumnX and LineX must be filled with the necessary information Figure 2 27 Entry field for line column and block no Delete variables Variables are deleted in the window of selected variables by selecting the appropriate variables single mouse click and pressing the Delete key No deletion action is taken with the doubleclick function It is possible to select severa...

Page 1082: ... window Figure 2 28 Window for project path and name of file to be stored Code generation This menu item contains three selection options 1 Settings input of data block number to be generated and other settings 2 Generate create data block 3 In the STEP 7 project transferring the data block to a STEP 7 project Settings Under this menu item the DB number and the symbol for this DB number for which ...

Page 1083: ...m path and compiled Furthermore the symbol can also be transferred This function will be available as of STEP7 Version 5 1 and NCVar Selector 6 04 05 This process take some time due to the time require by STEP7 Before transferring a new AWL file the file window of the AWL file must be closed in the LAD FUP AWL Editor Option menu item The following can be selected under the Option menu item The cur...

Page 1084: ...ram The PLC 314 and PLC 315 2DP only know the start up type cold restart A warm restart is not provided i e following system initialization the operating system runs organization block OB100 and always commences cyclic execution at the start of OB1 Users need only supply the FB parameters that are relevant to their applications The preset values in the associated instance DB 7 do not need to be as...

Page 1085: ...ut POINTER Start addr MCP 2 output signals MCP2StatSend POINTER Status DW for sending MCP 2 MCP2StatRec POINTER Status DW for receiving MCP 2 MCP2BusAdr INT MCP2Timeout S5TIME S5T 700MS MCP2Cycl S5TIME S5T 200MS MCPMPI BOOL FALSE MCP1Stop BOOL FALSE MCP2StopI BOOL FALSE MCP1NotSend BOOL FALSE MCP2NotSend BOOL FALSE MCPSDB210 BOOL FALSE MCPCopyDB77 BOOL FALSE MCPBusType BYTE 0 HHU INT Handheld unit...

Page 1086: ...OOL FALSE MMCToIF BOOL TRUE HWheelMMC BOOL TRUE Handwheel selection via HMI MsgUser INT 10 Number of user areas in DB 2 UserIR BOOL FALSE User programs in OB 40 Observe local data expansion IRAuxfuT BOOL FALSE Evaluate T function in OB 40 IRAuxfuH BOOL FALSE Evaluate H function in OB 40 IRAuxfuE BOOL FALSE Evaluate DL function in OB 40 UserVersion POINTER Pointer to string variable indicated in ve...

Page 1087: ...8000000 Time out otherwise 0 MCP1StatRec MCP2StatRec I POINTER Q0 0 to Q124 0 F0 0 to F252 0 or DBn DBX0 0 to DBXm 0 Start address for status double word for data reception by machine control panel DW 16 00000400 Time out otherwise 0 MCP1BusAdr MCP2BusAdr I INT 1 15 Bus address of machine control panel MCP1Cycl MCP2Cycl I S5time Recommendation 200 ms Time reference for cyclic updating of signals t...

Page 1088: ... DBX0 0 to DBXm 0 Start address for status double word for receiving data from HHU DW 16 00000400 Time out otherwise 0 BHGInLen I BYTE HHU default B 16 6 6 Byte Quantity of data received from handheld unit BHGOutLen I BYTE HHU default B 16 14 20 Byte Quantity of data transmitted to handheld unit BHGTimeout I S5time Recommendation 700 ms Cyclic sign of life monitoring for handheld unit BHGCycl I S5...

Page 1089: ... HMI signals to interface modes program control etc TRUE Active HWheelMMC I BOOL TRUE Handwheel selection via MMC HMI FALSE Handwheel selection via user program MsgUser I INT 0 32 Number of user areas for messages DB 2 UserIR I BOOL Local data expansion OB 40 required for processing of signals from user IRAuxfuT I BOOL Evaluate T function in OB 40 IRAuxfuH I BOOL Evaluate H function in OB 40 IRAux...

Page 1090: ... A INT Number of real machine data in DB 20 Note Explanations of formal parameters of this function for FM NC For signals MCP1 StatRec machine control panel MCP2 StatRec machine control panel BHGStatRec handheld unit the start addresses apply for the status doubleword for reception of DW 16 00000400 MCP1 Timeout machine control panel MCP2 Timeout machine control panel 700 ms recommended cyclic lif...

Page 1091: ...e operator interface 400260 MCP 1 failure or 400261 MCP 2 failure 400262 HHU failure In this case the input signals from the MCP or from the handheld unit MCP1In MCP2In or BHGIn are initialized with 0 If it is possible to resynchronize the PLC and MCP HHU communication is resumed automatically and the error message reset by the BP Call example for SINUMERIK 810D An example call for the FB 1 in OB ...

Page 1092: ...in OB 100 appears below This example is part of the diskette with basic program for 840D ORGANIZATION_BLOCK OB 100 VAR_TEMP OB100_EV_CLASS BYTE OB100_STRTUP BYTE OB100_PRIORITY BYTE OB100_OB_NUMBR BYTE OB100_RESERVED_1 BYTE OB100_RESERVED_2 BYTE OB100_STOP WORD OB100_RESERVED_3 WORD OB100_RESERVED_4 WORD OB100_DATE_TIME DATE_AND_TIME END_VAR BEGIN CALL FB 1 DB 7 MCPNum 1 MCP1In P E0 0 MCP1Out P A0...

Page 1093: ...e in a data block A name must then be assigned to this DB in the symbol table DB name S7 name is transferred as the actual parameter of the NCK variable address Addr1 to Addr8 when FB 2 is called Variable addressing For some NC variables it is necessary to select area no and or line or column from the NC VAR selector A basic type can be selected for these variables i e area column line are preset ...

Page 1094: ... 3 to 10 as illustrated as examples in the above table in groups 1 and 2 Note Especially when reading several long strings the number of usable variables can be less than 8 Declaration of the function FUNCTION_BLOCK FB 2 VAR_INPUT Req BOOL NumVar INT Addr1 ANY Unit1 BYTE Column1 WORD Line1 WORD Addr2 ANY Unit2 BYTE Column2 WORD Line2 WORD Addr3 ANY Unit3 BYTE Column3 WORD Line3 WORD Addr4 ANY Unit...

Page 1095: ...on Manual 11 2006 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 111 Column6 WORD Line6 WORD Addr7 ANY Unit7 BYTE Column7 WORD Line7 WORD Addr8 ANY Unit8 BYTE Column8 WORD Line8 WORD FMNCNo INT 1 END_VAR VAR_OUTPUT Error BOOL NDR BOOL State WORD END_VAR VAR_IN_OUT RD1 ANY RD2 ANY RD3 ANY RD4 ANY RD5 ANY RD6 ANY RD7 ANY RD8 ANY END_VAR ...

Page 1096: ...1 to Addr8 Number of variables to be read Addr1 to Addr8 I ANY DBName VarName Variable identifiers from NC Var selector Unit1 to Unit8 I BYTE Area address optional for variable addressing Column1 to Column8 I WORD Column address optional for variable addressing Line1 to Line8 I WORD Line address optional for variable addressing Error A BOOL Negative acknowledgment of job or execution of job imposs...

Page 1097: ...mat conversion error Error on conversion of var type double Var is not within S7 REAL area 0 6 FIFO full Job must be repeated since queue is full 0 7 Option not set BP parameter NCKomm is not set 1 to 8 8 Incorrect target area RD RD1 to RD8 may not be local data 0 9 Transmission occupied Job must be repeated 1 to 8 10 Error in variable addressing Unit or column line contains value 0 0 11 Address o...

Page 1098: ...Call example Reading of three channel specific machine data from channel 1 whose address specifications are stored in DB120 Select data with NC VAR selector and store in file DB120 VAR then create file DB120 AWL range Block Name Type No Byte S7 Name C 1 M GND MD20070 AXCONF_MACHAX_USED 1 char 20070 1 C1AxConfMachAxUsed1 C 1 M GND MD20070 AXCONF_MACHAX_USED 2 char 20070 1 C1AxConfMachAxUsed2 C 1 M ...

Page 1099: ...00 0 Terminate job CALL FB 2 DB 110 Req M 100 0 NumVar 3 Read 3 variables Addr1 NCVAR C1AxConfMachAxUsed1 Addr2 NCVAR C1AxConfMachAxUsed2 Addr3 NCVAR C1SpindDefMasterSpind Error M102 0 NDR M100 1 State MW104 RD1 P DB99 DBX0 0 BYTE 1 RD2 P DB99 DBX1 0 BYTE 1 RD3 P M110 0 INT 1 Example Variable addressing Reading of two R parameters of channel 1 whose address specifications are stored in DB 120 as t...

Page 1100: ...1 Addr2 NCVAR C1_RP_rpa0_0 Line2 W 16 2 FMNCNo 1 Error M 1 0 NDR M 1 1 State MW 2 RD1 P M 4 0 REAL 1 RD2 P M 24 0 REAL 1 Data types The data types of the NCK are listed in the NC VAR selector with the variables The tables below give the assignments to the S7 data types Classification of data types NCK data type S7 data type double REAL float REAL long DINT integer DINT uint_32 DWORD int_16 INT uin...

Page 1101: ...s lasts for several PLC cycles normally 1 2 The block can be called up in cyclic mode only Any errors are indicated by Error and State In order to reference the NC variables all required variables are first selected with the NC VAR selector tool and generated as STL source in a data block A name must then be assigned to this DB in the symbol table DB name S7 name is transferred as the actual param...

Page 1102: ... only if basic program parameter NCKomm 1 has been set in OB 100 FB 1 DB 7 The call is permitted only in cyclic program OB 1 When channel specific variables are read in a task FB 3 call via Addr1 to Addr8 only the variables of exactly one channel may be addressed In areas V and H different logic axis numbers must not be assigned in one job Failure to observe this rule results in Error TRUE State W...

Page 1103: ...ddr1 ANY Unit1 BYTE Column1 WORD Line1 WORD Addr2 ANY Unit2 BYTE Column2 WORD Line2 WORD Addr3 ANY Unit3 BYTE Column3 WORD Line3 WORD Addr4 ANY Unit4 BYTE Column4 WORD Line4 WORD Addr5 ANY Unit5 BYTE Column5 WORD Line5 WORD Addr6 ANY Unit6 BYTE Column6 WORD Line6 WORD Addr7 ANY Unit7 BYTE Column7 WORD Line7 WORD Addr8 ANY Unit8 BYTE Column8 WORD Line8 WORD END_VAR VAR_OUTPUT Error BOOL Done BOOL S...

Page 1104: ...mVar I INT 1 to 8 corresponds to use of Addr1 to Addr8 Number of variables to be written Addr1 to Addr8 I ANY DBName VarName Variable identifiers from NC Var selector Unit 1 to Unit 8 I BYTE Area address optional for variable addressing Column 1 to Column 8 I WORD Column address optional for variable addressing Line 1 to Line 8 I WORD Line address optional for variable addressing Error Q BOOL Nega...

Page 1105: ... Data areas or data types do not match or string is empty Check data to be written in SD1 to SD8 in high byte number of the Var in which error occurred 0 6 FIFO full Job must be repeated since queue is full 0 7 Option not set BP parameter NCKomm is not set 1 to 8 8 Incorrect target area SD SD1 to SD8 may not be local data 0 9 Transmission occupied Job must be repeated 1 to 8 10 Error in variable a...

Page 1106: ... Positive acknowledgment variables have been written 3 Reset function activation after receipt of acknowledgment 4 Signal change by means of FB 5 If function activation is reset prior to receipt of acknowledgment the output signals are not updated without the operational sequence of the activated function being affected 6 Negative acknowledgment Error has occurred error code in output parameter st...

Page 1107: ...ype NCVAR DB120 DB 120 File DB120 AWL must be compiled and transferred to the PLC Call and parameterization of FB 3 with instance DB 111 DATA_BLOCK DB 111 Unassigned user DB as instance for FB 3 FB 3 BEGIN Function FC VariablenCall VOID END_DATA_BLOCK U I 7 7 Unassigned machine control panel key S M 100 0 Activate req U M 100 1 Done completed message R M 100 0 Terminate job U I 7 6 Manual error ac...

Page 1108: ...number is parameterized via parameter LineX DATA_BLOCK DB 120 VERSION 0 0 STRUCT C1_RP_rpa0_0 STRUCT SYNTAX_ID BYTE B 16 82 area_and_unit BYTE B 16 41 column WORD W 16 1 line WORD W 16 0 block type BYTE B 16 15 NO OF LINES BYTE B 16 1 type BYTE B 16 F length BYTE B 16 8 END_STRUCT END_STRUCT BEGIN END_DATA_BLOCK CALL FB 3 DB 122 Req M 10 0 NumVar 2 Addr1 NCVAR C1_RP_rpa0_0 Line1 W 16 1 Addr2 NCVAR...

Page 1109: ...data types Addr1 to Addr4 for strings WVar1 to WVar 10 for integer or word variables A job is started when FB 4 is called by means of a positive edge change at control input Req Successful execution of the job is displayed by means of a logical 1 in status parameter Done Any errors are indicated by Error and State The PI data block DB16 contains internal descriptions of the possible PI services A ...

Page 1110: ...he function PI_SERV Signal Ty pe Type Value range Remark Req I BOOL Job request PIService I ANY DBName VarName Default is PI VarName PI service description1 Unit I INT 1 Area number Addr1 to Addr4 I ANY DBName VarName Reference to strings specification according to selected PI service WVar1 to WVar10 I WORD 1 Integer or word variables Specification according to selected PI service Error Q BOOL Neg...

Page 1111: ...ESET 6 FIFO full Job must be repeated since queue is full 7 Option not set BP parameter NCKomm is not set 9 Transmission occupied Job must be repeated Pulse diagram RQH 5HT UURU 1 Activation of function 2 Positive acknowledgment PI service has been executed 3 Reset function activation after receipt of acknowledgment 4 Signal change by means of FB 5 If function activation is reset prior to receipt ...

Page 1112: ...ck search LOGIN Activate password LOGOUT Reset password NCRES Trigger NC RESET SELECT Select program for processing for one channel SETUDT Sets the current user data to active PI service Tool management function CRCEDN Create new cutting edge CREACE Create cutting edge CREATO Generate tool SETUFR Activate user frames DELECE Delete a cutting edge DELETO Delete tool MMCSEM Semaphores for various PI ...

Page 1113: ...ion of path and program names Parameterization Signal Type Value range Meaning PIService ANY PI ASUP Assign interrupt Unit INT 1 to 10 Channel WVar1 WORD 1 to 8 Interrupt number WVar2 WORD 1 to 8 Priority WVar3 WORD 0 1 LIFTFAST WVar4 WORD 0 1 BLSYNC Addr1 STRING Path name Addr2 STRING Program name Note The SETINT instruction is also used to make the assignment The ASUP PI service may only be exec...

Page 1114: ... at block limit An FB 4 error checkback message is output if these conditions are not fulfilled state 3 Parameterization Signal Type Value range Meaning PIService ANY PI CONFIG Reconfiguration Unit INT 1 WVar1 INT 1 Classification PI service DIGION Function Digitalize On Selecting digitizing in the specified channel Parameterization Signal Type Value range Meaning PIService ANY PI DIGION Digitizin...

Page 1115: ...roviding a collisionfree approach path Parameterization Signal Type Value range Meaning PIService ANY PI FINDBL Block search Unit INT 1 to 10 Channel WVar1 WORD x Preprocessing mode x Describes the preprocessing mode x 1 without calculation x 2 with calculation x 3 with main block observation PI service LOGIN Create function Keyword Transfers the parameterized password to the NCK The passwords gen...

Page 1116: ...m stored on the NCK is selected for processing for one channel This is possible only if the file may be executed The path name and program name must be entered as described in the Programming Manual Job Planning File and Program Management Section Program Memory Please also refer to example of FB 4 for notation of path and program names Possible block types Block types Workpiece directory WPD Main...

Page 1117: ...e Meaning PIService ANY PI SETUDT Activate user data Unit INT 1 to 10 Channel WVar1 WORD 1 to 5 User data type 1 active tool offset 2 active basic frame 3 active settable frame 4 active global basic frame 5 active global settable frame WVar2 WORD 0 Standby WVar3 WORD 0 Standby PI service SETUFR Activate function user frames User frames are loaded to the NCK All necessary frame values must be trans...

Page 1118: ...E Create cutting edge CREATO Generate tool SETUFR Activate user frames DELECE Delete a cutting edge DELETO Delete tool MMCSEM Semaphores for various PI services TMCRTO Create tool TMFDPL Empty location search for loading TMFPBP Empty location search TMMVTL Prepare magazine location for loading unload tool TMPOSM Position magazine location or tool TMPCIT Set increment value for workpiece counter TM...

Page 1119: ...ight extend from 00001 to 31999 The new cutting edge is set up with the specified D number If the specified cutting edge already exists then the PI service is aborted in both cases Parameterization Signal Type Value range Meaning PIService ANY PI CRCEDN Create new cutting edge Unit INT 1 2 TOA WVar1 INT T number of tool for which cutting edge must be created A setting of 00000 states that the cutt...

Page 1120: ...n existing tool is specified in parameter T number in the PI service then a cutting edge is deleted for this particular tool in this case parameter D number number of cutting edge to be created has a value range of 00001 00009 If a positive T number is specified as a parameter and the tool for the T number entered does not exist then the PI service is aborted If a value of 00000 is entered for the...

Page 1121: ...ctions for the MMC PLC By setting the semaphore for the corresponding function number several MMC PLC units can be synchronized with it in cases where a function contains a critical section with respect to data to be fetched by the NCK Semaphores are managed by the MMC PLC A semaphore value of 1stipulates a Test Set operation for the semaphore of the specified function number The return value of t...

Page 1122: ... 2 TMFDPL search for empty location for loading 3 TMMVTL prepare magazine location for loading unload tool 4 TMFPBP search for location 5 TMGETT search for tool number 6 TSEARC search for tool 7 10 Reserved WVar2 SemaphorValue 0 Reset semaphore 1 Test and set semaphore Parameterization Signal Type Value range Meaning PIService ANY PI MMCSEM Set semaphore Unit INT 1 2 to 10 Channel WVar1 INT 1 to 1...

Page 1123: ...UE block if one is present The TD block contains the identifier duplo number and number of cutting edges 1 for the T number that is entered optionally or allocated by the NCK If a TU block exists it will contain the data set for the tool After execution of the PI the T number of the tool created is available in the TV block under TnumWZV Note Before and after this PI service the MMCSEM PI service ...

Page 1124: ... Location_number_ID and magazine_number_ID can be set as search criteria or not 1 The PI is acknowledged positively or negatively depending on the search result Location_number_to Location_number Magazine_number_to Magazine_number The specified location is checked to confirm that it is free to be loaded with the specified tool Location_number_ID and magazine_number_ID can be set as search criteria...

Page 1125: ...ation within buffer storage The following variables from the TM block are used to monitor case 1 3 4 5 magCmd area no TO unit line magazine number magCmdState acknowledgment The following variables from the TMC block are used to monitor case 2 6 magCBCmd area no TO unit magCBCmdState acknowledgment Load function Prepares the specified real magazine for the specified channel for loading i e travers...

Page 1126: ...ing free in the TP block The tool can be specified either via a T number or by means of the location and magazine numbers The value 1 is entered at unused specification points Note Before and after this PI service the MMCSEM PI service must be called with the associated parameter WVar1 for this PI service See PI service MMCSEM for more information Parameterization Signal Type Value range Meaning P...

Page 1127: ...ber of the tool The location where the tool is positioned traverses the parameter tool identifier duplo number location number_from and magazine number_from parameters are irrelevant i e values 0001 0001 0001 Or Tool identifier and duplo number The location where the tool is positioned traverses the parameters T number location number_from and magazine number_from are irrelevant i e value 0001 eac...

Page 1128: ...main spindle WVar2 WORD 0 max Increment value indicates the number of spindle revolutions after which the workpiece counter is incremented PI service TMRASS Function Reset the active status Resetting the active status on worn tools This PI service is used to search for all tools with the tool status active and disabled The active status is then canceled for these tools Potentially appropriate time...

Page 1129: ...e ANY PI TRESMO Reset monitoring values Unit INT 1 to 10 TO area WVar1 WORD max max ToolNumber 0 Applies to all tools 0 Applies only to this tool 0 Applies to all sister tools of the specified T No WVar2 WORD 0 max D number 0 Monitoring of specified edge of specified tools is reset 0 Monitoring of all edges of specified tools is reset WVar3 WORD 0 15 Monitoring types Type of monitoring to be reset...

Page 1130: ...rs of the PI service the properties of the required tools are first defined via variable service in the TF block To do this in the block TF in the operand screens parMaskT the relevant comparison criteria which tool data are to be compared are highlighted Comparison operator data parDataT are filled with the corresponding comparison types to be done and the comparison values are entered in the ope...

Page 1131: ...ocations are searched For a symmetric search see parameter SearchDirection the search domain may stretch only over a single magasine cases 2 and 5 from the table given above If another search domain is specified the service will malfunction a reference location must be specified in the parameters MagNrRef and PlaceNrRef with respect to which the symmetric search is done The reference location is a...

Page 1132: ...he symmetrical search is to be performed this parameter is only relevant with a symmetrical search direction WVar6 INT PlaceNrRef Location number of location in magazine MagNrRef with reference to which the symmetrical search is to be performed This parameter is only relevant with a symmetrical search direction WVar7 INT 1 2 3 SearchDirection specifies the required search direction 1 Forwards from...

Page 1133: ...CK DB 124 struct PName string 32 _N_TEST_MPF Path string 32 _N_MPF_DIR Main program PName_WST string 32 _N_ABC_MPF Path_WST string 32 _N_WKS_DIR _N_ZYL_WPD Workpiece program end_struct BEGIN END_DATA_BLOCK Function FC PICall VOID U I 7 7 Unassigned machine control panel key S M 0 0 Activate req U M 1 1 Done completed message R M 0 0 Terminate job U I 7 6 Manual error acknowledgment U M 1 0 Error p...

Page 1134: ...2 see table of block parameters When parameter CnvtToken is activated a variable pointer token can be generated for this GUD variable as an option This pointer is generated via the VAR selector for system variables of the NC Only this method of generating pointers is available for GUD variables Once a pointer has been generated for the GUD variable then it is possible to read and write via FB 2 an...

Page 1135: ...e KNOW_HOW_PROTECT VERSION 3 0 VAR_INPUT Req BOOL Addr ANY Variables name string Area BYTE Area NCK 0 channel 2 Unit BYTE Index1 INT Field index 1 Index2 INT Field index 2 CnvtToken BOOL Conversion into 10 byte token VarToken ANY Struct with 10 bytes for the variable token FMNCNo INT in FMNC only END_VAR VAR_OUTPUT Error BOOL Done BOOL State WORD END_VAR VAR_IN_OUT RD ANY END_VAR BEGIN END_FUNCTIO...

Page 1136: ...ress 0 NCK variable 2 Channel variables Unit I BYTE NCK area Unit 1 Channel area Channel no Index1 I INT Field index 1 of variable Variable has the value 0 if no field index is used Index2 I INT Field index 2 of variable Variable has the value 0 if no field index is used CnvtToken I BOOL Activate generation of a variable token VarToken I ANY Address to a 10byte token see example FMNCNo on FMNC onl...

Page 1137: ...y Check data to be read in RD 0 6 FIFO full Job must be repeated since queue is full 0 7 Option not set BP parameter NCKomm is not set 0 8 Incorrect target area SD RD may not be local data 0 9 Transmission occupied Job must be repeated 0 10 Error in addressing Unit contains value 0 0 11 Address of variable invalid Check Addr or variable name area unit Configuration steps To be able to read a GUD v...

Page 1138: ...sequence of the activated function being affected 6 Negative acknowledgment Error has occurred error code in output parameter state Call example Reading of a GUD variable with the name GUDVAR1 as an integer variable see also table in FB 2 Assignment of NC data type in SIMATIC data type Call and parameterization of FB 5 with instance DB 111 DATA_BLOCK DB GUDVAR Assignment to symbol table STRUCT GUD...

Page 1139: ...l VOID U I 7 7 Unassigned machine control panel key S M 100 0 Activate req U M 100 1 Done completed message R M 100 0 Terminate job U I 7 6 Manual error acknowledgment U M 102 0 Error pending R M 100 0 Terminate job CALL FB 5 DB 111 Req M 100 0 Starting edge for reading Addr GUDVAR GUDVar1 Area B 16 2 Channel variable Unit B 16 1 Channel 1 Index1 0 No field index Index2 0 No field index CnvtToken ...

Page 1140: ...6 are defined in VAR_INPUT FB4 has WVar1 to WVar10 All other parameters are identical to FB 4 This PI server can be used for all PI services previously implemented with FB 4 In addition the PI services listed below can only be handled with FB 7 Declaration of the function FUNCTION_BLOCK FB 7 Var_INPUT Req BOOL PIService ANY Unit INT Addr1 ANY Addr2 ANY Addr3 ANY Addr4 ANY WVar1 WORD WVar2 WORD WVa...

Page 1141: ...ification according to selected PI service WVar1 to WVar16 I WORD 1 Integer or word variables Specification according to selected PI service FMNCNo FMNC only I INT 0 1 2 0 1 1 NCU 2 2 NCUs Error A BOOL Negative acknowledgment of job or execution of job impossible Done Q BOOL Job successfully executed State Q WORD See error identifiers Overview of additional PI services The following additional PI ...

Page 1142: ...ationNumber_From MagazineNumber_To LocationNumber_To MagazinNu mber_From LocationNu mber_From MagazineN umber_To LocationNu mber_To Search area WVar1 WVar2 WVar3 WVar4 M1 P1 M1 P1 Only location P1 in magazine M1 is checked M1 P1 M2 P2 Locations starting at magazine M1 location P1 up to magazine M2 location P2 are searched M1 1 M1 1 All locations in magazine M1 and no others are searched M1 1 1 1 A...

Page 1143: ...neNumber_To Magazine number of magazine at which search must end WVar4 INT LocationNumber_To Location number of location in magazine MagazineNumber_To at which search must end WVar5 INT MagazineNumber_Ref WVar6 INT LocationNumber_Ref WVar7 INT 0 1 7 Number of required half locations to left WVar8 INT 0 1 7 Number of required half locations to right WVar9 INT 0 1 7 Number of required half locations...

Page 1144: ...is the M N Interface in the data block DB 19 see FB2 Function Manual Extended Functions Chapter Data lists Signal description FB 9 uses the signals of these interfaces Apart from initialization sign of life monitoring and error routines the following basic functions are also performed by the block for operating unit switchover Tabulated overview of functions Basic function Meaning MMC call waiting...

Page 1145: ... the operator panel and MCPEnable is set to TRUE The MSTT of the passive MMC is deactivated so that there is only ever one active MCP on an NCU at one time Boot condition To prevent the previously selected MCP being reactivated when the NCU is restarted input parameters MCP1BusAdr 255 address of 1st MCP and MCP1STOP TRUE deactivate 1st MCP must be set when FB1 is called in OB 100 Releases When one...

Page 1146: ...upported Control panel switchover Interlocking via MMCx_SHIFT_LOCK in DB 19 MCPEnable BOOL TRUE Activate MCP switchover END_VAR VAR_OUTPUT Alarm1 BOOL Interrupt Error in HMI bus address bus type Alarm2 BOOL Interrupt No confirmation MMC_1 offline Alarm3 BOOL Interrupt MMC_1 is not going offline Alarm4 BOOL Interrupt No confirmation MMC_2 offline Alarm5 BOOL Interrupt MMC_2 is not going offline Ala...

Page 1147: ...TT switchover TRUE MSTT is switched over with operator panel front FALSE MCP is not switched over with operator panel front This can be used to permanently link an MCP See also MMCx_MCP_SHIFT_LOCK in DB 19 Alarm1 Q BOOL Alarm Error in MMC bus address bus type Alarm2 Q BOOL Alarm No confirmation MMC 1 offline Alarm3 Q BOOL Alarm MMC 1 is not going offline Alarm4 Q BOOL Alarm No confirmation MMC 2 o...

Page 1148: ... parameter MCPEnable must also be set to TRUE to enable MSTT switchover The default value of these parameters is set in this way and need not be specially assigned when the function is called Alarm error The output parameters Alarm1 to Alarm6 and Report can be transferred to the DB2 areas for MMC alarm and error messages If execution of an MMC function has failed for which an appropriate error mes...

Page 1149: ...4 Feed override interface T EB 28 Buffer storage freely assignable input or memory byte wei1 U M 100 2 Switchover takes place O DB10 DBX 104 0 MCP1Ready JCN smth2 U DB10 DBX 104 0 MCP1Ready FP M 100 1 Edge trigger flag 2 JC smth2 U M 100 2 Switchover takes place R M 100 2 Reset auxiliary flag 1 JC smth2 U M GND 100 3 Comparison has taken place JC MCP Call MCP program Guide the stored override to t...

Page 1150: ...utputs are activated again without delay if inputs In1 to In3 take the value 1 and a positive edge change is detected at one of the acknowledgement inputs Ack1 Ack2 To bring the outputs to their basic setting values 0 after booting the parameter FirstRun must be configured as follows The parameter FirstRun must be switched to the value TRUE via a retentive data memory bit bit in data block on the ...

Page 1151: ...Detailed description 2 12 Block descriptions Basic logic functions PLC Basic program powerline P3 pl Function Manual 11 2006 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 167 ...

Page 1152: ... TRUE Input 3 Ackn1 BOOL Ack 1 signal Ackn2 BOOL Ack 2 signal TimeValue1 TIME T 0ms TimeValue for output 1 TimeValue2 TIME T 0ms TimeValue for output 2 TimeValue3 TIME T 0ms TimeValue for output 3 END_VAR VAR_OUTPUT Out0 BOOL Output without delay Out1 BOOL Delayed output to false by timer 1 Out2 BOOL Delayed output to false by timer 2 Out3 BOOL Delayed output to false by timer 3 END_VAR VAR_INOUT ...

Page 1153: ...wledge input 1 Ackn2 I BOOL Acknowledge input 2 TimeValue1 I TIME Time value 1 for OFF delay TimeValue2 I TIME Time value 2 for OFF delay TimeValue3 I TIME Time value 3 for OFF delay Out0 A BOOL Output instantaneous no delay Out1 A BOOL Output delayed by TimeValue1 Out2 A BOOL Output delayed by TimeValue2 Out3 A BOOL Output delayed by TimeValue3 FirstRun I O BOOL Activation of initial state Note T...

Page 1154: ... brake test the enable signals of the parameterized axis must be set to Enable e g the servo disable feedrate enable signals Further the signal to axis spindle DB31 DBX28 7 PLC controls axis is to be set to state 1 by the user program during the complete test Before activating the signal DB31 DBX28 7 PLC controls axis the axis is to be switched as neutral axis e g the DB31 is DB8 0 8 3 assign NC a...

Page 1155: ...X62 5 1 TV_FXShold Deselect brake test open brake DBX71 0 0 TV_BTactiv Issue Test O K Declaration of the function Function_BLOCK FB 11 VAR_INPUT Start BOOL Start of brake test Ack BOOL Acknowledge error Bclosed BOOL Brake closed input single channel PLC Axis INT Testing axis no TimerNo TIMER Timer from user TV_BTactiv S5TIME TimeValue brake test active TV_Bclose S5TIME TimeValue close brake TV_Fee...

Page 1156: ...ber of axis to be tested TimerNo I TIMER Timer from user program TV_BTactiv I S5TIME Monitoring time value brake test active check of axis signal DBX71 0 TV_Bclose I S5TIME Monitoring time value close brake Check of input signal Bclosed after output CloseBrake has been set TV_FeedCommand I S5TIME Monitoring time value issue travel command Check travel command after MoveAxis has been set TV_FXSrech...

Page 1157: ...o travel command output e g axis motion has not been started 5 Fixed end stop will not be reached axis reset was initiated 6 Traversing inhibit approach too slow fixed end stop cannot be reached TV FXSreached monitoring timeout 7 Brake is not holding at all end position is reached approach velocity too high 8 Brake opens during the holding period 9 Error in brake test deselection 10 Internal error...

Page 1158: ...xt step R DBX 8 4 S DBX 28 7 Request PLC monitored axis U DBX 63 1 Checkback signal axis monitored by PLC U M 110 5 FP M 110 2 R M 110 5 S M 111 0 Start brake test for FB CALL FB 11 DB 211 Brake test block Start M 111 0 Start brake test Ack I 3 7 Acknowledge error with RESET key Bclosed I 54 0 Checkback message close brake controlled Axis 3 Axis number of axis to be tested Axis Z axis TimerNo T 11...

Page 1159: ...28 7 Request PLC monitored axis UN DBX 63 1 Checkback signal axis monitored by PLC U M GND 111 0 Start brake test for FB U M GND 110 7 Brake test is running FP M GND 110 4 R M GND 111 0 Start brake test for FB R M 110 7 Brake test is running CALL SpinCtrl Traverse Z axis Start M 111 2 Start traversing motion Stop FALSE Funct B 16 5 Mode Axis mode Mode B 16 1 Procedure Incremental AxisNo 3 Axis num...

Page 1160: ...iagnostics FB is called several times in the same OB 1 cycle the NewCycle parameter must be set to FALSE for the second and subsequent calls This prevents a new number of OB 1 cycles from being calculated The ring buffer specified by the user must have an ARRAY structure specified as in the source code The array can have any number of elements A size of 250 elements is recommended The ClearBuf par...

Page 1161: ...No function 1 Signal recorder 2 Data trigger Signal_1 BOOL Start of brake test Signal_2 BOOL Signal_3 BOOL Signal_4 BOOL Signal_5 BOOL Signal_6 BOOL Signal_7 BOOL Signal_8 BOOL NewCycle BOOL Var1 BYTE Var2 INT VAR INT BufDB INT ClearBuf BOOL DataAdr POINTER Area pointer to testing word TestVal WORD Value for triggering AndMask WORD AND mask to the testing word END_VAR VAR_OUTPUT TestIsTrue BOOL EN...

Page 1162: ...fer TITLE Ring buffer DB for FB 29 VERSION 1 0 STRUCT Field ARRAY 0 249 OF STRUCT can be any size of this struct Cycle INT Delta cycle to last storage in buffer Signal_1 BOOL Signal names same as FB 29 Signal_2 BOOL Signal_3 BOOL Signal_4 BOOL Signal_5 BOOL Signal_6 BOOL Signal_7 BOOL Signal_8 BOOL Var1 BYTE Var2 WORD Var3 WORD END_STRUCT END_STRUCT BEGIN END_DATA_BLOCK ...

Page 1163: ...ete ring buffer DB and reset pointer BufAddr BufAddr I O INT Target area for read data Parameters for function 2 DataAdr I POINTER Pointer to word to be tested TestVal I WORD Comparison value AndMask I WORD See description TestIsTrue A BOOL Result of comparison Configuration steps Select function of diagnostics block Define suitable data for the recording as signal recorder or data triggering Find...

Page 1164: ... 10 4 Signal_6 M 100 5 Signal_7 M 100 6 Signal_8 M 100 7 NewCycle TRUE Var1 MB 100 BufDB 81 ClearBuf M 50 0 END_FUNCTION 2 12 11 FC 2 GP_HP Basic program cyclic section Description of Functions The complete processing of the NCKPLC interface is carried out in cyclic mode In order to minimize the execution time of the basic program only the control status signals are transmitted cyclically transfer...

Page 1165: ...N_BLOCK OB 1 VAR_TEMP OB1_EV_CLASS BYTE OB1_SCAN_1 BYTE OB1_PRIORITY BYTE OB1_OB_NUMBR BYTE OB1_RESERVED_1 BYTE OB1_RESERVED_2 BYTE OB1_PREV_CYCLE INT OB1_MIN_CYCLE INT OB1_MAX_CYCLE INT OB1_DATE_TIME DATE_AND_TIME END_VAR BEGIN CALL FC 2 Call basic program as first FC INSERT USER PROGRAM HERE CALL FC 19 MCP signals to interface BAGNo B 16 1 Mode group no 1 ChanNo B 16 1 Channel no 1 SpindleIFNo B...

Page 1166: ...terface NC process interrupts If the interrupt is triggered by the NC possible in each IPO cycle a bit in the local data of OB 40 GP_IRFromNCK is set by the basic program only when the FB 1 parameter UserIR is TRUE This data is not set on other events process interrupts through I Os This information makes it possible to branch into the associated interrupt routine in the user program in order to i...

Page 1167: ...change signals and function value are available to the user in the associated channel DB The change signal for this interruptdriven function is reset to zero in the cyclic basic program section after the execution of at least one full OB1 cycle max approx two OB1 cycles Tool change With the tool management option the tool change command for revolver and the tool change in the spindle is supported ...

Page 1168: ..._CLASS BYTE OB40_STRT_INF BYTE OB40_PRIORITY BYTE OB40_OB_NUMBR BYTE OB40_RESERVED_1 BYTE OB40_MDL_ID BYTE OB40_MDL_ADDR INT OB40_POINT_ADDR DWORD OB40_DATE_TIME DATE_AND_TIME Assigned to basic program GP_IRFromNCK BOOL Interrupt by NCK for user GP_TM BOOL Tool management GP_InPosition ARRAY 1 3 OF BOOL Axis oriented for positioning indexing axes spindles GP_AuxFunction ARRAY 1 10 OF BOOL Channel ...

Page 1169: ... Output parameter Ready is set to the value TRUE when the job has been executed correctly The user must then set the Start parameter to FALSE or not call the block again If the Ready parameter is set to FALSE the error code in the Error parameter must be interpreted If the error code 0 then this job must be repeated in the next PLC cycle e g Start remains set to TRUE This means that the transfer j...

Page 1170: ...on in the sequence In this case the following parameterization of the asynchronous transfer is needed via FC 8 TaskIdent 4 TaskIdentNo channel NewToolMag Magazine number of the revolver NewToolLoc Original location of the tool OldToolMag Magazine no buffer storage spindle 9998 OldToolLoc Buffer storage number of the spindle Status 1 This action also causes the same T command to be resent to the to...

Page 1171: ...0 No error has occurred 1 No revolver present 2 Illegal revolver number in parameter ChgdRevNo 3 Illegal job interface active signal for selected revolver FALSE Pulse diagram 5HDG 6WDUW UURU 1 Activation of function by means of a positive edge 2 Positive acknowledgment Tool management has been transferred 3 Reset function activation after receipt of acknowledgment 4 Signal change using FC 5 This s...

Page 1172: ...nagement transfer of block for revolver Start m 20 5 Start 1 transfer trigger ChgdRevNo DB61 DBB 1 Ready m 20 6 Error DB61 DBW 12 u m 20 6 Poll ready r m 20 5 Reset start spb m001 Jumps if everything OK l db61 dbw 12 Error information ow w 16 0 Evaluate error JC error Jumps to troubleshooting if 0 m001 Start of another program error r m 20 5 Reset start if an error has occurred ...

Page 1173: ...t positions of the old tool The NCK knows where the old and the new tool have been located until the position change In the case of a transfer without a socalled old tool e g on loading the value 0 is assigned to parameters OldToolMag OldToolLoc Block FC TM_TRANS may be started only with Start parameter TRUE if an activation signal for the appropriate interface DB 71 DB 72 DB 73 in word 0 for this...

Page 1174: ...rameterized in the TaskIdentNo parameter The previous position of the tool is specified in parameters OldToolMag OldToolLoc the current position of the tool is specified in parameters NewToolMag NewToolLoc Status 1 must be specified With status 5 the specified tool remains at location OldToolMag OldToolLoc This location must be a buffer e g spindle The real magazine and location must be specified ...

Page 1175: ... the TM_TRANS function Signal Type Type Value range Remark Start I BOOL 1 Start of transfer TaskIdent I BYTE 1 5 Interface or tank identifier 1 Loading unloading location 2 Spindle change position 3 Revolver change position 4 Asynchronous transfer 5 Asynchronous transfer with location reservation TaskIdentNo I BYTE 1 Number of associated interface or channel number The upper nibble can specify the...

Page 1176: ...heckback 0 No error has occurred 1 Unknown TaskIdent 2 Unknown TaskIdentNo 3 Illegal task signal Interface SS active of selected revolver FALSE Other values The number corresponds to the error message of the tool management function in the NCK caused by this transfer Pulse diagram 5HDG 6WDUW UURU 1 Activation of function by means of a positive edge 2 Positive acknowledgment Tool management has bee...

Page 1177: ...Mag and OldToolLoc correspond to the current tool positions 3 In the case of Change spindle or revolver the tools addressed in the interface have now reached the required target addresses The tool change operation is thus completed Status 2 The new tool cannot be made available This status is only admissible in conjunction with the Prepare Change command When this status is applied the PLC must be...

Page 1178: ...Positioning to load point If the bit in the interface in DB 71 DBX n 0 3 positioning to load point is enabled only status 5 not status 1 may be used for terminating the function Status 6 The WZV job has been completed This status has the same function as status 1 but in addition a reservation of the source location is carried out This status is only permitted when reloading The command is ended an...

Page 1179: ...e and to improve the search strategy for subsequent commands Status 105 The specified buffer has been reached by all tools involved standard case if the operation has not yet been completed The tools are in the specified tool positions parameters NewToolMag NewToolLoc OldToolMag OldToolLoc Status definition A general rule for the acknowledgment status is that the state information 1 to 7 leads to ...

Page 1180: ...DBB 0 TaskIdentNo DB61 DBB 1 NewToolMag DB61 DBW 2 Current position of new tool NewToolLoc DB61 DBW 4 OldToolMag DB61 DBW 6 Current position of old tool OldToolLoc DB61 DBW 8 Status DB61 DBW 10 Status Ready m 20 6 Error DB61 DBW 12 u m 20 6 Poll ready r m 20 5 Reset start spb m001 Jumps if everything OK l DB61 dbw 12 Error information ow w 16 0 Evaluate error JC error Jumps to troubleshooting m001...

Page 1181: ... 9s within one PLC cycle the ASUBs are started in the sequence in which they are called The start parameter must be set to logic 0 by the user once the ASUB has been terminated Done or if an error has occurred For the purpose of job processing every FC ASUB requires its own WORD parameter Ref from the global user memory area This parameter is for internal use only and must not be changed by the us...

Page 1182: ...ror BOOL StartErr BOOL END_VAR VAR_IN_OUT Ref WORD END_VAR Description of formal parameters The table below lists all formal parameters of the ASUB function Signal Type Type Value range Remark Start I BOOL ChanNo I INT 1 10 No of the NC channel IntNo I INT 1 8 Interrupt No Active A BOOL 1 Active Done A BOOL 1 ASUB completed Error A BOOL 1 Interrupt switched off StartErr A BOOL 1 Interrupt number n...

Page 1183: ...ion after receipt of acknowledgment 5 Signal change using FC 6 Not permitted If function activation is reset prior to receipt of acknowledgment the output signals are not updated without the operational sequence of the activated function being affected 7 Negative acknowledgment Error has occurred Call example CALL FC 9 Start an asynchronous subprogram in channel 1 interrupt number 1 Start I 45 7 C...

Page 1184: ...signals are transferred to the user interface directly from the status information in DB 2 irrespective of an alarm acknowledgment 1 If parameter ToUserIF is set to FALSE signals are not transferred to the user interface In this case the user must take measures in his PLC program to ensure that these signals are influenced in the interface 2 If parameter ToUserIF is set to TRUE all signals listed ...

Page 1185: ...presentation FUNCTION FC 10 VOID NAME AL_MSG VAR_INPUT ToUserIF BOOL Ack BOOL END_VAR END_FUNCTION Description of formal parameters The table below lists all formal parameters of the AL MSG function Signal I O Type Value range Remark ToUserIF I BOOL 1 Transfer signals to user interface every cycle Ack I BOOL 1 Acknowledge error messages Call example CALL FC 10 Error and operational messages ToUser...

Page 1186: ... basic program In this case the basic program supplies parameter Chan with the channel number The PLC user knows which channel has new auxiliary functions available The new auxiliary functions can be determined by the auxiliary function change signals in the channel concerned Declaration of the function FUNCTION FC 12 VOID Event control of auxiliary functions VAR_INPUT Chan BYTE END_VAR BEGIN BE E...

Page 1187: ...haracters is shown in the parameter table By setting parameter Row to 0 it is possible to suppress the display e g if several variables in one or several PLC cycles need to be entered in the string without any display output Signals Byte 1 is supplied by the output signals of the HHU and the character specifications are supplied by the module These may not be written by the PLC user program Additi...

Page 1188: ...NG 32 line 1 line 2 32 characters are defined END_STRUCT BEGIN END_DATA_BLOCK FUNCTION FC 13 VOID VAR INPUT Row BYTE Display line see table ChrArray STRING Transfer at least string 32 Convert BOOL Activate numerical conversion Addr POINTER Points to the variable being converted DataType BYTE Data type of the variables StringAddr INT Right justified string address 1 to 32 Digits BYTE Number of deci...

Page 1189: ...Convert I BOOL Activation of numerical conversion Addr I POINTER Points to the variable to be converted DataType I BYTE 1 8 Data type of variable 1 BOOL 1 character 2 BYTE 3 characters 3 CHAR 1 character 4 WORD 5 characters 5 INT 6 characters 6 DWORD 7 characters 7 DINT 8 characters 8 REAL 9 characters see parameter Digits StringAddr I INT 1 32 Address within variable ChrArray Digits I BYTE 1 4 Re...

Page 1190: ...o 9999999 DINT 9999999 to 9999999 REAL Digits 1 999999 9 to 999999 9 REAL Digits 2 99999 99 to 99999 99 REAL Digits 3 9999 999 to 9999 999 REAL Digits 4 999 9999 to 999 9999 Call example CALL FC 13 Row MB 26 ChrArray strdat disp DB with name strdat in the symbol table data element disp is declared as String 32 and completely assigned with sign Convert M 90 1 Addr P M 20 0 Number to be converted Da...

Page 1191: ...ess in the FC can be omitted Activation through the PLC user program is executed in the corresponding axis interface in byte 8 After return of the check the axis can again be programmed by the NC program Note Rotary axes can be positioned by the shortest possible route through the programming of a negative feed value in absolute programming mode In incremental mode parameter IC TRUE the traversing...

Page 1192: ...or Stop TRUE must be called cyclically until the signal state of output parameter Active or InPos changes from 1 to 0 Error identifiers If a function could not be executed this is indicated by the Error status parameter being set to logical 1 The error cause is coded at block output State For listing of error identifiers see table in the chapter Block description FC 18 SpinCtrl Spindle control Dec...

Page 1193: ...de Pos I REAL 0 1469368 I 38 to 0 1701412 I 39 Position of linear axis mm Rotary axis Degr FRate I REAL 0 1469368 I 38 to 0 1701412 I 39 Feedrate of linear axis mm Min Rotary axis deg min InPos A BOOL 1 In position Active A BOOL 1 Active StartErr A BOOL Axis cannot be started Error A BOOL Error during traversing 1 1 Error evaluation by user in the PLC Timing diagram 6WDUW FWLY Q3RV UURU 6WDUW UU 1...

Page 1194: ...W UU UURU 6WDUW Q3RV FWLY 1 Activation of function by means of a positive edge 2 Negative acknowledgment Error has occurred 3 Reset function activation after receipt of acknowledgment 4 Signal change using FC Call example CALL FC 15 Start TRUE AxisNo 5 IC incr e g local variable Inch FALSE HWheelOv FALSE Pos MD160 FRate MD164 InPos Q 36 0 Active Q 36 1 StartErr Q 36 2 Error Q 36 3 ...

Page 1195: ...n also request the check for the PLC prior to calling FC PART_AX By calling this function several times in succession a better response reaction by the spindle axis can be obtained as the changeover process in the FC can be omitted Activation through the PLC user program is executed in the corresponding axis interface in byte 8 After return of the check the axis can again be programmed by the NC p...

Page 1196: ...cked by conditional calls in the user program The conditional call of a started block parameter Start or Stop TRUE must be called cyclically until the signal state of output parameter Active or InPos changes from 1 to 0 Declaration of the function FUNCTION FC 16 VOID PART_AX VAR_INPUT Start BOOL AxisNo INT IC BOOL DC BOOL Minus BOOL Movement in the negative direction Plus BOOL Movement in the posi...

Page 1197: ...BOOL 0 specified direction 1 shortest path when DC 1 the parameters IC Minus Plus must be 0 Minus I BOOL 0 Rotary axis motion as for linear axis 1 Motion in negative direction with rotary axes Plus I BOOL 0 Rotary axis motion as for linear axis 1 Motion in positive direction with rotary axes Pos I INT 0 to 32767 No of indexing position FRate I REAL 0 1469368 E 38 to 0 1701412 E 39 Feedrate of line...

Page 1198: ...sitioning axes active 3 Positive acknowledgment Position reached 4 Reset function activation after receipt of acknowledgment 5 Signal change using FC 6 Reset function activation after receipt of active signal Timing diagram fault scenario 6WDUW UU UURU 6WDUW Q3RV FWLY 1 Activation of function by means of a positive edge 2 Negative acknowledgment Error has occurred 3 Reset function activation after...

Page 1199: ...ng This block may be used only for digital main spindle drives and must be called separately for each spindle The changeover operation is implemented via 2 separate contactors in a sequence involving 4 steps Step 1 Deleting the interface signal DB31 DBX21 5 Motor selection done in the related axis DB and register the changeover process via A with DB31 DBX21 3 Motor selection Step 2 As soon as the ...

Page 1200: ...ar adjustments FB1 Function Manual Basic functions Velocities Actual Set point system Regulation G2 Error message If the parameter SpindleIFNo is not in the permissible range the PLC is stopped with output of interrupt message number 401702 Special features When parameterizing TimeVal with the value 0 a default value of 100 ms is used With a value of less than 50 ms the minimum setting of 50 ms is...

Page 1201: ...ive are deactivated In case of rotating spindle and activated position controller the spindle with NST DB31 DBX61 5 position controller active is changed over from star to delta then it leads to the alarm 25050 Contour monitoring Once the star delta changeover has been initiated with FC17 it cannot be delayed by the user e g by waiting until the star delta contactors change over during the course ...

Page 1202: ... edge of the signal initiates the changeover operation SpindleIFNo I INT 1 Number of the axis interface declared as a spindle TimeVal I S5time 0 Switchover time TimerNo I INT 10 Timer for programming the wait time Y Q BOOL Energizing of star contactor Delta Q BOOL Energizing of delta contactor Ref I O WORD Instance for status information Internal use Call example CALL FC 17 YDelta I 45 7 Star delt...

Page 1203: ...ontrol an axis or spindle via the PLC it must be activated for the PLC This can for example be achieved by calling the FC SpinCtrl with activation of the Start or Stop parameter In this case the FC SpinCtrl requests control over the spindle axis from the NC The NC feeds back the status of this axis in byte 68 in the associated spindle axis interface DB 31 see lists Book 2 Interface signals power l...

Page 1204: ...n For the function Rotate spindle as also for Oscillate spindle the meaning of the parameter InPos is defined as follows Set speed is output Function started without error Reaching the desired spindle speed must be evalated via the spindle interface Simultaneity Several axes can be traversed simultaneously or subject to a delay by the blocks FC 15 16 and 18 The upper limit is defined by the maximu...

Page 1205: ...e spindle The following signals are relevant Start Initiation signal for start rotation Stop Initiation signal for stop rotation Funct 2 Rotate spindle Positioning mode 5 direction of rotation M4 Mode Positioning mode 5 direction of rotation M3 AxisNo Number of machine axis FRate Spindle speed InPos Function has started without an error Error With positioning error 1 State Error code 3 Oscillate s...

Page 1206: ... Pos 4 Oscillation with gear stage change M44 Pos 5 Oscillatio n Pos 5 Oscillation with gear stage change M45 4 Traverse indexing axis The following signals are relevant Start Initiation signal Funct 4 Indexing axis Note With Funct 4 Indexing axis The modulo conversion can be compared with approaching the indexing position via POS AX CIC value in the part program Mode Positioning mode 0 1 2 3 4 Ax...

Page 1207: ...al for stop rotation Funct 9 Rotate spindle with gear stage selection Mode Positioning mode 5 direction of rotation M4 Positioning mode 5 direction of rotation M3 AxisNo Number of machine axis FRate Spindle speed InPos Setpoint speed is output Error With positioning error 1 State Error code 10 11 Rotate spindle with constant cutting rate The Constant cutting rate function must be activated by the ...

Page 1208: ...sic program powerline P3 pl 224 Function Manual 11 2006 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 Declaration of the function FUNCTION FC 18 VOID SpinCtrl VAR_INPUT Start BOOL Stop BOOL Funct BYTE Mode BYTE AxisNo INT Pos REAL FRate REAL END_VAR VAR_OUTPUT InPos BOOL Error BOOL State BYTE END_VAR ...

Page 1209: ... I BYTE 0 to 5 0 Pos to absolute pos 1 Pos incrementally 2 Pos shortest path 3 Pos absolute positive approach direction 4 Pos absolute negative approach direction 5 Rotational direction as for M4 AxisNo I INT 1 31 No of axis spindle to be traversed Pos I REAL 0 1469368 I 38 to 0 1701412 I 39 Rotary axis Degrees Indexing axis Indexing position Linear axis mm or inches FRate I REAL 0 1469368 I 38 to...

Page 1210: ... described in the Diagnostics Manual SINUMERIK 840D 840Di 810D 100 corresponds to alarm number 16830 105 corresponds to alarm number 16770 106 corresponds to alarm number 22052 107 corresponds to alarm number 22051 108 corresponds to alarm number 22050 109 corresponds to alarm number 22055 110 Velocity speed is negative 111 Setpoint speed is zero 112 Invalid gear stage 115 Programmed position has ...

Page 1211: ...ignal edge with start or stop 2 Positive acknowledgment Function executed Position reached 3 Reset function activation after receipt of acknowledgment 4 Signal change using FC Timing diagram fault scenario 6WDUW UU UURU 6WDUW Q3RV 1 Activation of function by means of a positive signal edge with start or stop 2 Negative acknowledgment Error has occurred 3 Reset function activation after receipt of ...

Page 1212: ...ith T12 start U M113 0 Error U I 6 4 Key T12 R M 100 0 Start Start with T13 U I 6 3 Key T13 AN F 112 0 Restart only when InPos or Error 0 AN F 113 0 S M 100 0 CALL FC 18 Start M100 0 Stop FALSE Funct B 16 1 Position spindle Mode B 16 2 Shortest path AxisNo 5 Pos MD104 FRate MD108 InPos M112 0 Error M113 0 State MB114 2 Start spindle rotation CALL FC 18 Start M100 0 Stop FALSE Funct B 16 2 Rotate s...

Page 1213: ...te MD108 InPos M112 0 Error M113 0 State MB114 4 Traverse indexing axis CALL FC 18 Start M100 0 Stop FALSE Not used Funct B 16 4 Traverse indexing axis Mode B 16 0 Position absolutely AxisNo 4 Pos MD104 Default setting in REAL 1 0 2 0 FRate MD108 InPos M112 0 Error M113 0 State MB114 5 Position axes CALL FC 18 Start M100 0 Stop FALSE Not used Funct B 16 5 Position axes Mode B 16 1 Position increme...

Page 1214: ...ride axis travel keys and INC keys depending on the active mode or on the coordinate system selected Feed override The feed override is transferred to the interface of the selected channel and to the interface of the axes The feed override signals are transferred in addition to interface byte Rapid traverse override DBB 5 to the NC channel if MMC signal Feed override for rapid traverse effective i...

Page 1215: ...the channel signals are not processed The INC selections are transferred to the mode group interface This results in runtime improvements This specification is activated via the DB10 DBX57 0 INC inputs active in the BAG range through this block once after power up Machine control panels can still be handled in parallel by this module The module 2 call for the 2nd machine control panel in OB1 cycle...

Page 1216: ...direction keys The compatibility mode is preset with axis numbers 1 to 9 for both MCPs and the restriction for the configured number of axes Declaration of the function FUNCTION FC 19 VOID NAME MCP_IFM VAR_INPUT BAGNo BYTE ChanNo BYTE SpindleIFNo BYTE END_VAR VAR_OUTPUT FeedHold BOOL SpindleHold BOOL END_VAR BEGIN END_FUNCTION Description of the formal parameters The table below shows all formal p...

Page 1217: ...hine functions Source MCP key Destination Interface DB parameter ModeGroupNo AUTOMATIC DB11 DBX0 0 MDA DB11 DBX0 1 JOG DB11 DBX0 2 REPOS DB11 DBX1 1 REF DB11 DBX1 2 TEACH IN DB11 DBX1 0 INC 1 10 000 INC Var starting from SW 5 DB11 DBB2 Bit 0 to 5 Source MCP key Destination Interface DB parameter ChanNo INC 1 10 000 INC Var till SW 4 DB21 DBB13 Bit 0 to 5 INC 1 10 000 INC Var till SW 4 DB21 DBB17 B...

Page 1218: ...ride DB21 DBX12 5 Direction key DB21 DBX16 7 Direction key DB21 DBX16 6 Rapid traverse override DB21 DBX16 5 Direction key DB21 DBX20 7 Direction key DB21 DBX20 6 Rapid traverse override DB21 DBX20 5 Source MCP key Destination Interface DB all axis DBs Direction key DB31 DBX4 7 Direction key DB31 DBX4 6 Rapid traverse override DB31 DBX4 5 Override Source MCP Switch Destination Interface DB paramet...

Page 1219: ...Destination FC output parameters Feed stop Feed enable Parameter FeedHold latched LEDs are driven Spindle stop Spindle enable Parameter SpindleHold latched LEDs are driven Checkback signals from user interface for controlling displays Operating modes and machine functions Destination MCP LED Source Interface DB parameter ModeGroupNo AUTOMATIC DB11 DBX6 0 MDA DB11 DBX6 1 JOG DB11 DBX6 2 REPOS DB11 ...

Page 1220: ...lled by operating the relevant pushbutton switch Call example CALL FC 19 Machine control panel M variants signals to interface BAGNo B 16 1 Mode group no 1 ChanNo B 16 1 Channel no 1 SpindleIFNo B 16 4 Spindle interface number 4 FeedHold m22 0 Feed stop signal modal SpindleHold db2 dbx151 0 Spindle stop modal in message DB With these parameter settings the signals are sent to the 1st mode group th...

Page 1221: ...ed to the key selection identified by an axis number 2 After FC 19 has been called the information RLO relating to the LED identified by the axis number is transferred to the LED of the new axis selection key and the RLO of the previous axis LED is then deleted Example The spindle is defined as the 4th axis and must be selected via axis key 9 STL extract u i 5 2 Selection of ninth axis e 4 2 Selec...

Page 1222: ...ock FC 21 is processed only when Enable 1 The following functions for the data exchange between PLC and NCK are supported 1 Signal synchronized actions at the NCK channel 2 Signals synchronized actions from NCK channel 3 Fast data exchange PLC NCK Read function in NCK 4 Fast data exchange PLC NCK Write function in NCK 5 Update control signals to NCK channel 6 Update control signals to axes data by...

Page 1223: ... A INT Depends on Funct Functions 1 Signals for synchronized actions to channel 2 Signals for synchronized actions from channel Synchronized actions can be disabled or enabled by the PLC The data area is stored on the user interface in DB21 to DB30 DBB 300 307 to channel and DBB 308 315 from channel The parameter S7Var is not evaluated for this function but must be assigned an actual parameter see...

Page 1224: ...WORK Deactivate synchronized actions with ID3 ID10 and ID31 in NC channel 1 SYAK TO DB21 SET S DBX300 2 ID3 S DBX301 1 ID10 S DBX303 6 ID31 L B 16 1 T MB11 SPA TRAN Synchronized actions from NCK channel SYVK L B 16 2 T MB11 TRAN CALL FC 21 Enable M 10 0 if True FC 21 is active Funct MB 11 S7Var myAny Not used IVAR1 1 Channel no IVAR2 0 Error M 10 1 ErrCode MW 12 END_FUNCTION Functions 3 4 Rapid PL...

Page 1225: ...ly ensured for 1 and 2 byte access in the NCK and in the PLC For the 2 byte consistency this is true only for the data type WORD or INT but not for the data type BYTE In the case of longer data types or transfer of fields which should be transferred consistently a semaphore byte must be programmed in parameter IVAR2 that can be used by FC 21 to determine the validity or consistency of a block This...

Page 1226: ...functions PLC Basic program powerline P3 pl 242 Function Manual 11 2006 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 6HPDSKRUH 6HPDSKRUH 6HPDSKRUH 6HPDSKRUH UU RGH UURU UU RGH UURU XQFW UU RGH UURU UU RGH UURU XQFW M Q M Q ZULWH 7UDQVIHU GDWD IURP 3 WR 1 7UDQVIHU GDWD IURP 1 WR 3 UHDG ...

Page 1227: ... The following signals are relevant Signal Type Type Value range Remark Enable I BOOL FC 21 active Funct I BYTE 3 4 3 Read data 4 Write data S7Var I ANY S7 data area except local data Source destination data storage area IVAR1 I INT 0 1023 Position offset IVAR2 I INT 1 1023 Semaphore byte Transfer without semaphore 1 Error A BOOL ErrCode A INT 20 Alignment error 21 Illegal position offset 22 Illeg...

Page 1228: ...LL FC 21 Enable M 10 0 if TRUE FC 21 active Funct B 16 3 Read data S7Var P M 100 0 DWORD 1 IVAR1 4 IVAR2 0 Error M 10 1 ErrCode MW12 UN M10 1 Enable while 1 until value is read R F10 0 Examples of NCK programming from synchronized actions Data transfer from NC to PLC with data written via synchronized actions Byte 0 serves as the semaphore ID 1 WHENEVER A_DBB 0 0 DO A_DBR 4 AA_IM X A_DBB 0 1 Data ...

Page 1229: ...e outside the PLC cycle The following signals are relevant Signal Type Type Value range Remark Enable I BOOL 1 FC 21 active Funct I BYTE 5 5 Control signals to channel S7Var I ANY S7 data storage area Not used IVAR1 I INT 1 Max channel Channel number Error A BOOL ErrCode A INT 1 Funct invalid 10 Channel no invalid 6 Update control signals to axes The purpose of function 6 is to transmit important ...

Page 1230: ... cyclic data transfers The data byte 4 of application interface DB31 to DB61 is transferred to the NC The transfer is performed for all activated axes This function can be used for example to transfer a feed stop outside the PLC cycle The following signals are relevant Signal Type Type Value range Remark Enable I BOOL 1 FC 21 active Funct I BYTE 7 7 Control signals to axes S7Var I ANY S7 data stor...

Page 1231: ...oint pos special pos 1 neg modulo locations The new setpoint position corresponds to the location number at which the magazine must be positioned so that the setpoint position requested by the user corresponds to the location number of the special position The directional optimization is active both with and without special positioning The block must be called once with the appropriate parameter s...

Page 1232: ...ment also with regard to PLC refer to the Description of Functions Tool Management Furthermore PI services are provided for tool management via the FB 4 FC 7 and FC 8 see also the corresponding Sections in this documentation Declaration of the function STL representation FUNCTION FC 22 VOID NAME TM_DIR VAR_INPUT MagNo INT ReqPos INT ActPos INT Offset BYTE Start BOOL END_VAR VAR_OUTPUT Cw BOOL Ccw ...

Page 1233: ...tart I BOOL Start of calculation Cw Q BOOL 1 Move magazine clockwise Ccw Q BOOL 1 Move magazine counterclockwise InPos Q BOOL 1 In position Diff Q INT 0 Differential path shortest path Error Q BOOL 1 error Call example CALL FC 22 Tool management direction selection MagNo 2 Magazine number ReqPos mw 20 Target position ActPos mw 22 Current position Offset b 16 0 Offset for special positioning Start ...

Page 1234: ...de The feed override is transferred to the interface of the selected channel and to the interface of the axes The feed override signals are transferred in addition to interface byte Rapid traverse override DBB 5 to the NC channel if MMC signal Feed override for rapid traverse effective is set exception Switch setting Zero Rapid traverse override effective is also set with this MMC signal Machine f...

Page 1235: ... that the channel signals are not processed The INC selections are transferred to the mode group interface This results in runtime improvements This specification is activated via the DB10 DBX 57 0 INC inputs active in the BAG range through this block once after power up Machine control panels can still be handled in parallel by this module The module 2 call for the 2nd machine control panel in OB...

Page 1236: ...STT The default setting is 0 corresponding to the maximum number of configured axes The axis numbers and the limit can also be adapted dynamically Afterwards a new axis must be selected on FC 19 Axis numbers may not be switched over while the axes are traversing the relevant direction keys The compatibility mode is preset with axis numbers 1 to 6 for both MCPs and the restriction for the configure...

Page 1237: ...indle stop from machine control panel modal SpindleDir Q BOOL Spindle direction 0 equals counterclockwise 1 equals clockwise Call example CALL FC 24 Slim machine control panel M variants signals to interface BAGNo B 16 1 Mode group no 1 ChanNo B 16 1 Channel no 1 SpindleIFNo B 16 4 Spindle interface number 4 FeedHold m22 0 Feed stop signal modal SpindleHold db2 dbx151 0 Spindle stop modal in messa...

Page 1238: ...f the axes The feed override signals are transferred in addition to interface byte Rapid traverse override DBB 5 to the NC channel if MMC signal Feed override for rapid traverse effective is set exception Switch setting Zero Rapid traverse override effective is also set with this MMC signal Machine functions for INC and axis travel keys When the MCS is selected the signals are transferred to the i...

Page 1239: ...t is now provided by the MSTT blocks for use of two MCPs which are operated simultaneously in particular for an application using two channels and two mode groups The module call for the 2nd machine control panel in OB1 cycle must come after the call of the 1st Note that the axis numbers are also specified in the parameterized mode group number of the MCP block in the axis tables of the relevant M...

Page 1240: ...e formal parameters The table below shows all formal parameters of the MCP_IFT function Signal Type Type Value range Remark BAGNo I BYTE 0 b 16 0A and b 16 10 b 16 1A No of mode group to which the mode signals are transferred BAGNo b 16 10 means access to the second machine control panel ChanNo I BYTE 0 B 16 0A Channel no for the channel signals SpindleIFNo I BYTE 0 31 B 16 1F Number of the axis i...

Page 1241: ... FC 26 HPU_MCP Transfer of HPU HT6 signals to the interface 2 12 28 1 FC 26 HPU_MCP Transfer of HPU HT6 signals to the interface Description of Functions With FC HPU_MCP machine control panel signals of the handheld terminal the following are transferred from the machine control panel MCP to the corresponding signals of the NCK PLC interface Mode groups WCS MCS switchover Traversing keys Override ...

Page 1242: ...n be implemented e g using the appropriate input signals in FC 10 AL_MSG The associated LEDs are activated at the same time In the case of machine control panel failure the signals it supplies are set to zero Multiple calls of FC 26 or FC 19 FC 24 FC 25 are permitted in a single PLC cycle In this case the first call in the cycle drives the LED displays Moreover all actions of the parameterized blo...

Page 1243: ...permissible to enter a value of 0 in the axis table No check is made for illegal axis numbers and an incorrect entry can thus lead to a PLC stop With FC 26 it is possible to restrict the number of axes using 0 values in the axis table The axis numbers can also be adapted dynamically Axis numbers may not be switched over while the axes are being traversed via the relevant direction keys The compati...

Page 1244: ... the channel signals 2 12 28 2 MCP selection signals to the user interface Operating modes and machine functions Source MCP key Destination Interface DB parameter ModeGroupNo representation for mode group 1 AUTOMATIC DB11 DBX0 0 MDA DB11 DBX0 1 JOG DB11 DBX0 2 REPOS DB11 DBX1 1 REF DB11 DBX1 2 TEACH IN DB11 DBX1 0 INC 1 10 000 INC Var starting from SW 5 DB11 DBB2 Bit 0 to 5 Source MCP key Destinat...

Page 1245: ...1 DBX16 6 Rapid traverse override DB21 DBX16 5 Direction key DB21 DBX20 7 Direction key DB21 DBX20 6 Rapid traverse override DB21 DBX20 5 Source MCP key Destination Interface DB 6 allocated axis DBs Direction key DB31 DBX4 7 Direction key DB31 DBX4 6 Rapid traverse override DB31 DBX4 5 Override Source MCP Setting Destination Interface DB parameter ChanNo Feedrate override DB21 DBB4 Source MCP Sett...

Page 1246: ... parameter ModeGroupNo representation for mode group 1 AUTOMATIC DB11 DBX7 0 MDA DB11 DBX6 1 JOG DB11 DBX6 2 REPOS DB11 DBX7 1 REF DB11 DBX7 2 TEACH IN DB11 DBX7 0 WCS MCS output is operated through key actuation Call example CALL FC 26 Machine control panel of the HPU HT6 signals to interface BAGNo B 16 1 Mode group no 1 ChanNo B 16 1 Channel no 1 With these parameter settings the signals from th...

Page 1247: ...ransferred to this spindle interface The input parameters are checked for incorrect parameterization Output parameters FeedHold and SpindleHold are generated from the 4 feed spindle disable and feed spindle enable keys and are returned with logical 1 for disable Information for the next cycle is stored in DB8 bytes 0 to 3 or bytes 62 to 65 depending on the machine control panel number This informa...

Page 1248: ...e spindle override into the interface configured via SpindleIFNo The axis network transfers the feedrate override to the selected axis interface The direction keys are assigned to the selected axis spindle If an axis has been selected previously the direction information is set to 0 The INC checkback of the selected axis is displayed The output parameters are prepared and the LED signals of the IN...

Page 1249: ...nction description where the signals are described References LIS2 Lists Volume 2 The NCK signals that are evaluated by the basic program and transferred in conditioned form to the user interface are presented in the following sections 2 13 2 Decoded M signals General The M functions programmed in the part program ASUB or synchronized actions are channel specifically transferred from the NC to the...

Page 1250: ...DBX 201 0 7 M_Fkt_M56 M63 Bool M signals M56 M63 DBX 202 0 7 M_Fkt_M64 M71 Bool M signals M64 M71 DBX 203 0 7 M_Fkt_M72 M79 Bool M signals M72 M79 DBX 204 0 7 M_Fkt_M80 M87 Bool M signals M80 M87 DBX 205 0 7 M_Fkt_M88 M95 Bool M signals M88 M95 DBX 206 0 3 M_Fkt_M96 M99 Bool M signals M96 M99 Note The M02 M30 auxiliary function output to the PLC does not state that the part program has been termin...

Page 1251: ...R_1 BYTE 0 Active G function of group 1 DBB 209 G_FKT_GR_2 BYTE 0 Active G function of group 2 DBB 210 G_FKT_GR_3 BYTE 0 Active G function of group 3 DBB 211 G_FKT_GR_4 BYTE 0 Active G function of group 4 DBB 212 G_FKT_GR_5 BYTE 0 Active G function of group 5 DBB 213 G_FKT_GR_6 BYTE 0 Active G function of group 6 DBB 214 G_FKT_GR_7 BYTE 0 Active G function of group 7 DBB 215 G_FKT_GR_8 BYTE 0 Acti...

Page 1252: ...29 BYTE 0 Active G function of group 29 DBB 237 G_FKT_GR_30 BYTE 0 Active G function of group 30 DBB 238 G_FKT_GR_31 BYTE 0 Active G function of group 31 DBB 239 G_FKT_GR_32 BYTE 0 Active G function of group 32 DBB 240 G_FKT_GR_33 BYTE 0 Active G function of group 33 DBB 241 G_FKT_GR_34 BYTE 0 Active G function of group 34 DBB 242 G_FKT_GR_35 BYTE 0 Active G function of group 35 DBB 243 G_FKT_GR_3...

Page 1253: ...on has been modified FB1 MsgUser DB2 DB3 must be deleted Channel areas in DB2 Area Address Message number Channel 1 DBX0 0 DBX11 7 510 000 510 231 Channel 1 geo axes DBX12 0 DBX17 7 511 100 511 315 Channel 2 DBX18 0 DBX29 7 520 000 520 231 Channel 2 geo axes DBX30 0 DBX35 7 521 100 521 315 Channel 3 DBX36 0 DBX47 7 530 000 530 231 Channel 3 geo axes DBX48 0 DBX53 7 531 000 531 315 Channel 4 DBX54 ...

Page 1254: ... 0 DBX155 7 600 600 600 615 Axis spindle 7 DBX156 0 DBX157 7 600 700 600 715 Axis spindle 8 DBX158 0 DBX159 7 600 800 600 815 Axis spindle 9 DBX160 0 DBX161 7 600 900 600 915 Axis spindle 10 DBX162 0 DBX163 7 601 000 601 015 Axis spindle 11 DBX164 0 DBX165 7 601 100 601 115 Axis spindle 12 DBX166 0 DBX167 7 601 200 601 215 Axis spindle 13 DBX168 0 DBX169 7 601 300 601 315 Axis spindle 14 DBX170 0 ...

Page 1255: ...BX244 0 DBX251 7 700 800 700 863 User area 9 DBX252 0 DBX259 7 700 900 700 963 User area 10 DBX260 0 DBX267 7 710 000 701 063 User area 11 DBX268 0 DBX275 7 710 100 701 163 User area 12 DBX276 0 DBX283 7 710 200 701 263 User area 13 DBX284 0 DBX291 7 710 300 701 363 User area 14 DBX292 0 DBX299 7 710 400 701 463 User area 15 DBX300 0 DBX307 7 710 500 701 563 User area 16 DBX308 0 DBX315 7 710 600 ...

Page 1256: ...r the high speed copying of data from one DB into another it is recommended for larger data quantities to use the system function SFC BLKMOV or SFC FILL because here a high speed copying takes place the routine given below is for smaller data quantities because the supply of ANY parameter to the SFCs consumes additional time The following is an example of how to copy data at high speed from one DB...

Page 1257: ...er must now be chosen from a selection list for transfer to another FB FC This can only be done by means of an ANY in VAR_TEMP 1 to 4 can be set in parameter WhichAny in order to select Addr1 to Addr4 Note Address register AR2 is used in the block However this address register AR2 is also used for multiinstance DBs For this reason this FB should not be declared as multi instance DB FUNCTIONBLOCK F...

Page 1258: ...B 101 DB 100 ANYPAR Temp_addr ANYPAR is data type ANY Example 2 transfer an ANY parameter constructed earlier to another FB FC An ANY parameter that has already been compiled must be transferred to another FB FC This can be done only by means of an ANY stored in VAR_TEMP FUNCTIONBLOCK FB 100 Comment VAR_INPUT DBNumber INT DBOffset INT Data type INT Number INT END_VAR VAR_TEMP dbchr WORD Temp_addr ...

Page 1259: ...method of programming can be used 2 14 3 3 Use of POINTER and ANY in FC if POINTER or ANY is available as parameter Description of Functions FC 99 has inputs parameters that are defined as POINTER or ANY The example shows a body program via which the subcomponents of the POINTER or ANY can be accessed In this case the DB parameterized with POINTER or ANY is opened and the address offset stored as ...

Page 1260: ..._TEMP dbchr WORD Number WORD type BYTE END_VAR BEGIN NETWORK TITLE POINTER L P Addr LAR1 Retrieve pointer L W AR1 P 0 0 Retrieve DB number T dbchr L D AR1 P 2 0 Offset part of pointer LAR1 AUF DB dbchr Open DB of variables L B AR1 P 40 0 Retrieve byte value using pointer with address offset 40 ANY L P Addr1 LAR1 Retrieve ANY L B AR1 P 1 0 Retrieve type T typ L W AR1 P 2 0 Retrieve amount T Amount ...

Page 1261: ...ER ANY This access operation is described at the end of the relevant program sequence in the example With data type ANY it is also possible to execute a check or branch when the variable is accessed based on the data type and the number of elements involved Example in FB if POINTER or ANY are present as parameters FUNCTIONBLOCK FB 99 Comment VAR_INPUT Row BYTE Convert BOOL Activate numerical conve...

Page 1262: ... Note When complex programs are implemented in multiinstance FBs that use a pointer and address register it is important for the programmer to observe certain rules With multiinstance DBs the start address of the variable VAR_INPUT VAR_OUTPUT VAR_IN_OUT VAR is transferred with the DI data block register and address register AR2 When variables are accessed within the multiinstance FB the compiler i...

Page 1263: ...END_VAR BEGIN L P variable1 Pointer at start of ARRAY The value 8500 0010 is now in the accumulator and a cross area pointer is in the AR2 If cross area processing is to take place then an area should be skipped when these two pointers are added AD DW 16 00FF_FFFF Skipping of an area LAR1 Load into AR1 TAR2 AR1 AR2 AR2 instance offset to be added The ARRAY of variable1 can now be accessed indirect...

Page 1264: ...is e g 32 With this method the STEP7 compiler generates a string length corresponding to the input Two bytes more than prescribed by the definition are always stored for variables of the STRING data type The STEP 7 compiler stores the maximum possible number of characters in the 1st byte The 2nd byte contains the number of characters actually used Normally the useful length of the assigned STRINGs...

Page 1265: ...ents of the ARRAY or STRUCTURE via an address register One way of loading the address register symbolically is to use an FC whose input parameter is a pointer The address of the ARRAY or STRUCTURE is then assigned symbolically to the input parameter of this FC in the program The program code in the FC now determines the offset address from the input parameter and passes the offset address in the a...

Page 1266: ...Detailed description 2 14 Programming tips with STEP 7 Basic logic functions PLC Basic program powerline P3 pl 282 Function Manual 11 2006 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 ...

Page 1267: ...Basic logic functions PLC Basic program powerline P3 pl Function Manual 11 2006 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 283 Supplementary conditions 3 There are no supplementary conditions to note ...

Page 1268: ...Supplementary conditions Basic logic functions PLC Basic program powerline P3 pl 284 Function Manual 11 2006 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 ...

Page 1269: ...Basic logic functions PLC Basic program powerline P3 pl Function Manual 11 2006 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 285 Examples 4 No examples are available ...

Page 1270: ...Examples Basic logic functions PLC Basic program powerline P3 pl 286 Function Manual 11 2006 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 ...

Page 1271: ...AXNUM_USER_DATA_FLOAT Number of user data FLOAT 14510 USER_DATA_INT User data INT 14512 USER_DATA_HEX User data HEX 14514 USER_DATA_FLOAT n User data FLOAT Machine data in integer hex format is operated in the NC as DWORD Machine data in floating comma format are operated in the NC as FLOAT IEEE 8 byte They are stored in the NC PLC interface and can be read by the PLC user program during PLC power...

Page 1272: ...Data lists 5 1 Machine data Basic logic functions PLC Basic program powerline P3 pl 288 Function Manual 11 2006 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 ...

Page 1273: ...4 E Eventdriven signal exchange 7 8 F FB 10 Safety relay 166 FB 11 Brake test 170 FB 2 Read GET NC variable 109 FB 29 Signal recorder and data trigger diagnostics 176 FB 3 PUT write NC variables 117 FB 4 Assign interrupt 129 PI_SERV General PI services 125 Tool management services 134 FB 5 GETGUD read GUD variable 150 FB 7 PI_SERV2 General PI services 156 FB 9 Operating unit switchover 100 FB 9 M ...

Page 1274: ...r 87 Startup installation 99 NC variables 93 P PI services Overview 128 PLC CPUs properties 31 PLC messages 43 PLC NCK interface 36 PLC_CYCLIC_TIMEOUT 287 Process interrupt processing 54 Programming and parameterizing tools 84 Programming devices or PCs 84 Programming tips with STEP 7 272 ANY and POINTER 275 Multiinstance DB 278 POINTER or ANY variable 273 STRINGs 280 Use of ANY and POINTER in FB ...

Page 1275: ...0 2BA0 Valid for Control SINUMERIK 840D sl 840DE sl SINUMERIK 840Di sl 840DiE sl SINUMERIK 840D powerline 840DE powerline SINUMERIK 840Di powerline 840DiE powerline SINUMERIK 810D powerline 810DE powerline Software Version NCU system software for 840D sl 840DE sl 1 3 NCU system software for 840D sl DiE sl 1 0 NCU system software for 840D 840DE 7 4 NCU system software for 840Di 840DiE 3 3 NCU syste...

Page 1276: ...ommissioning and operation of a device system may only be performed by qualified personnel Within the context of the safety notes in this documentation qualified persons are defined as persons who are authorized to commission ground and label devices systems and circuits in accordance with established safety practices and standards Prescribed Usage Note the following Warning This device may only b...

Page 1277: ...on 840D with integrated PLC 27 2 5 4 Diagnostic buffer on PLC 30 2 6 Interface structure 31 2 6 1 PLC NCK interface 31 2 6 2 Interface PLC HMI 38 2 6 3 PLC MCP HHU interface 43 2 7 Structure and functions of the basic program 46 2 7 1 Startup and synchronization of NCK PLC 48 2 7 2 Cyclical mode OB 1 48 2 7 3 Time interrupt processing OB 35 51 2 7 4 Process interrupt processing OB 40 51 2 7 5 Diag...

Page 1278: ...ogram diagnostic alarm and module failure 180 2 12 14 FC 7 TM_REV Transfer block for tool change with revolver 182 2 12 15 FC 8 TM_TRANS transfer block for tool management 186 2 12 16 FC 9 ASUB startup of asynchronous subprograms 194 2 12 17 FC 10 AL_MSG error and operating messages 197 2 12 18 FC 12 AUXFU call interface for user with auxiliary functions 199 2 12 19 FC 13 BHGDisp Display control f...

Page 1279: ...ANY in FB if POINTER or ANY is available as parameter 256 2 14 3 4 POINTER or ANY variable for transfer to FC or FB 257 2 14 4 Multiinstance DB 259 2 14 5 Strings 261 2 14 6 Determining offset addresses for data block structures 261 2 14 7 Calling function blocks FBs 262 3 Supplementary conditions 265 4 Examples 267 5 Data lists 269 5 1 Machine data 269 5 1 1 NC specific machine data 269 5 1 2 Cha...

Page 1280: ...Table of contents Basic logic functions PLC basic program solution line P3 sl 6 Function Manual 11 2006 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 ...

Page 1281: ...at the start of the PLC cycle OB1 This ensures for example that the signals from the NCK remain constant throughout a cycle Event driven signal exchange NCK PLC PLC functions that have to be executed as a function of the workpiece program are triggered by auxiliary functions in the workpiece program If the auxiliary functions are used to start execution of a block the type of auxiliary function de...

Page 1282: ...re acquired and conditioned by the basic program A defined bit field is used to transfer the message signals to the basic program where they are evaluated and if message events occur entered in the PLC s interrupt buffer by means of the ALARM S SQ function Where an HMI e g HMI embedded is provided the messages are transferred to and displayed on the HMI PLC HMI data exchange In this type of data e...

Page 1283: ...CPU317 2DP master slave 6FC5 317 2AJ10 0AB0 Memory for user and basic program 128 to 768KB 128 to 768KB Data block memory Max of 256KB Max of 256KB Memory submodule no no Bit memories 32768 32768 Timers 512 512 Meters 512 512 Clock memories 8 8 Program data blocks OB FB FC DB 1 10 20 21 32 35 40 55 57 80 82 85 87 90 100 121 122 0 2048 0 2048 1 2048 1 10 20 21 32 35 40 55 57 80 82 85 87 90 100 121 ...

Page 1284: ...al configuring of I O devices from I O byte 0 onwards from PI PO byte 288 onwards Profibus only Processing time Bit commands I O Word commands 0 03 ms kA 0 1 ms kA 0 03 ms kA 0 1 ms kA PDIAG Alarm S SQ Yes Yes Profibus Master Slave Master Slave Number of PROFIBUS slaves Max 125 Max 125 Max number of PROFIBUS slots 512 512 DP master system no DP 1 1 DP master system no MPI DP 2 2 DP master system n...

Page 1285: ...ually a slave module or the slave itself Only on a module with both I and Q areas does one module count as 2 slots It is therefore not possible to specify the size of SDB 2000 exactly It cannot be determined whether the configuration is legal until the SDB container has been loaded to the CPU The values shown above must be taken as guide values only If the configuration is not permissible the alar...

Page 1286: ...ating system SW version ID 201x PLC 317 2DP with IBC32 6ES7 317 2AJ10 0AB0 FW 2 1 20 70 31 MCI 2 840Di 211x PLC 317 2DP with IBC32 6ES7 317 2AJ10 0AB0 FW 2 1 20 70 31 PLC basic program functions 840Di 840D sl interfaces MPI 1 1 Ethernet 2 1 Functions of basic program Scope Axes spindles Channels Mode groups See catalog 6 6 31 10 10 Functions Status control signals M decoders M00 99 G group decoder...

Page 1287: ...Meters No reservation FC FB DB FC0 to FC29 and FB0 to FB29 are reserved for the basic program The number range between 1000 and 1023 is also reserved for FCs and FBs DB1 to DB62 DB71 to DB80 are reserved for data blocks The number range 1000 to 1099 is also reserved in addition for DB The data blocks of channels axes spindles and tool management functions that are not activated may be assigned as ...

Page 1288: ...modules can be changed if needed Prerequisites In order to be able to select SINUMERIK components from the hardware catalog you must run the Toolbox setup program first Hardware expansions for STEP7 and Starter The current version of the hardware expansion for STEP7 can also be found under eSupport Example of current hadrware allocations PLC to NCU Table 2 1 Hardware expansions NCU MLFB Comparable...

Page 1289: ... of the NCK must not be changed as process interrupts e g auxiliary functions of the NCK to PLC may in this case no longer function Slot 5 the integrated Ethernet CP 840D sl Slot 6 the integrated HMI 840D sl The integrated drive is linked on the internal PCI bus PROFIBUS protocol Currently this bus does not support I O access and SFCs are not supported for this bus If you are using a different NCU...

Page 1290: ...p hardware configuration of PLC CPUs Basic logic functions PLC basic program solution line P3 sl 16 Function Manual 11 2006 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 Figure 2 1 Hardware configuration on the SINUMERIK 840D sl and SINAMICS Properties dialog box ...

Page 1291: ... default setting Telegram type 106 features the longest possible user data length of an NC axis The message frame type in the NC machine data may not tally at all with this setting In the context of an NC axis message frame type 106 means 2 encoders DSC Object 7 contains the ALM via which for example enables have to be activated by the PLC user program Object 8 contains the Dev0 Device 0 Axis expa...

Page 1292: ...ardware expansion for STEP7 option package for SINUMERIK 840D sl and NC Var selector components as well as for other tools To start the installation run setup exe in the main CD directory You can then choose which components to install After the installation you can select the basic program library directly from STEP7 bp7x0_14 14 is the main basic program version 1 4 The concrete version of the ba...

Page 1293: ...oject and the procedure for creating projects and user programs are described in the relevant SIMATIC documentation Procedure The basic program blocks are copied using the SIMATIC Manager and File Open Library The following components must be copied from the library From the block container FCs FBs DBs OBs SFC SFB UDT Source_files from the source container GPOB840D Possibly MDECLIST HHU_DB and oth...

Page 1294: ... the logic operations and sequences on the machine The interface signals to the NC are also controlled in this program More complex communication functions with the NCK e g read write NC data tool management acknowledgments etc are activated and executed via basic program FCs and FBs The machine program can be created in various STEP7 creation languages e g AWL KOP FUP S7 HIGRAPH S7GRAPH SCL The c...

Page 1295: ...ny future upgrade The source programs of all organization blocks and all instance data blocks should always be available 2 4 6 PLC series start up PLC archives Once the blocks have been loaded to the PLC CPU a series archive can be generated via the HMI operator interface to back up data on the machine To ensure data consistency this backup must be created immediately after block loading when the ...

Page 1296: ...erExt Call S7Ext Magic Functions Function Magic bstrVal As String As Long Function MakeSeriesstart up FileName As String Option As Long Container As S7Container As Long Description Function Magic bstrVal As String As Long Call gives access to certain functions The function must be called once after server instantiation The value of bstrVal can be empty This initiates a check of the correct STEP7 v...

Page 1297: ...oj1 s7 Projects new set S7Prog Nothing Set s7prog Proj1 Programs Item 1 if there is only one program For Each cont In s7prog Next If Cont ConcreteType S7BlockContainer Then Check block container Exit For End if Cont Nothing Next Error S7Ext MakeSerienIB f dh arc dir PLC arc 0 Cont Now error analysis The For Each Next Block programmed above can be programmed in the Delphi programming language as fo...

Page 1298: ...e project for a description see Subsection Application of basic program 3 All user programs awl must then be recompiled in the correct order See also the Machine program section 4 This newly compiled machine program must then be loaded to the PLC CPU using STEP 7 However it is normally sufficient to recompile the organization blocks OB and the instance data blocks of the machine program This means...

Page 1299: ...O modules FM CP modules Special packages for STEP7 are generally required for more complex I O modules Some of these special packages include support blocks FC FB stored in a STEP7 library The blocks contain functions for operating the relevant module which are parameterized and called by the user program In many cases the FC numbers for the CP and FM module handling blocks are also included in th...

Page 1300: ... general reset A system data block SDB 0 has been loaded with a modified MPI address This has caused an MPI bus conflict due to dual assignment of addresses Disconnect all MPI cables to other components Create the link Direct_PLC with the programmer Correct the MPI address 3 All four LEDs on the PLC flash DI disaster A system error has occurred in the PLC Measures The diagnostic buffer on the PLC ...

Page 1301: ... shown in the table above Owing to differences in their memory system as compared to the SIMATIC CPU certain functions are not available e g save blocks on memory card save project on memory card Note With the current SIMATIC CPUs the PLC is not automatically started after voltage failure and recovery when a PLC Stop is initiated via software operation In this instance the PLC remains in the Stop ...

Page 1302: ...SINUMERIK 840D data exchange with the machine control panel MCP and handheld unit HHU is determined by the interface setup of the MCP HHU Possible connection paths include MPI Profibus Ethernet Programming devices should preferably be connected directly to the PLC on the Ethernet bus via the internal CP or via the MPI Multi Point Interface EXV 6XEVW FRPP ZRUNV EXV 1 ಱ 3 VOರ 3 6 6 6 7 5LVF 23 0 3 6...

Page 1303: ...ary functions is enabled directly in OB 40 so that block execution is only marginally influenced by the transfer to the PLC The evaluation and enabling of the G functions transferred from the NCK are also alarm driven however they are transferred directly to the user interface Where a G function is evaluated at several points in the PLC program differences in the information of the G function with...

Page 1304: ... interface The basic program parameters FB1 DB7 define the operand areas e g I O and the start addresses Interface MCP PLC Profibus link MCP PLC data exchange takes place via the PLC s Profibus The MCP s I O addresses must be set in the PLC s process image area and via HW configuration in STEP7 The MCP In MCP Out pointer variables must be set to the same addresses The selected DP slave number must...

Page 1305: ...s that the minimum amount of PLC RAM required for the current machine configuration is used 2 6 1 PLC NCK interface General The PLC NCK interface comprises a data interface on one side and a function interface on the other The data interface contains status and control signals auxiliary functions and G functions while the function interface is used to transfer jobs from the PLC to the NCK Data int...

Page 1306: ...XUUHQW D LV VSLQGOH 6WDUW 68 XQFWLRQ LQWHUIDFH DWD LQWHUIDFH 7RRO PDQDJHPHQW 7RRO PDQDJHPHQW RE IRU VSLQGOH DQG WXUUHW RE IRU ORDGLQJ XQORDGLQJ ORFDWLRQV LV VSLQGOH 6LJQDOV IURP D LV 6LJQDOV WR D LV LV VSLQGOH KDQQHO 6LJQDOV IURP FKDQQHO 6LJQDOV WR FKDQQHO KDQQHO 0RGH JURXS 0 6LJQDOV IURP 0 6LJQDOV WR 0 0 1 6LJQDOV IURP 1 FRPSLOH F FOHV 6LJQDOV WR 1 FRPSLOH F FOHV 6LJQDOV IURP PRGH JURXS 6LJQDOV W...

Page 1307: ...e PLC This can mean that data is not always consistent PLC NCK signals The group of signals from the PLC to NCK includes Signals for modifying the digital and analog I O signals of the NCK Keyswitch and emergency stop signals RQWURO RI GLJLWDO 1 RXWSXWV WH RQWURO RI GLJLWDO 1 LQSXWV RQ ERDUG LQSXWV RQ ERDUG RXWSXWV LV WDEOHV H VZLWFK HPHUJHQF 6723 FWXDO YDOXHV IRU GLJLWDO 1 LQSXWV RQ ERDUG LQSXWV ...

Page 1308: ...Inputs All input signals or input values of the NCK are also transferred to the PLC The transfer of signals to the NC parts program can be suppressed by the PLC Instead a signal or value can be specified by the PLC The PLC can also transfer a signal or value to the NCK even if there is no hardware for this channel on the NCK side Outputs All signals or values to be output are also transferred to t...

Page 1309: ... transmitted cyclically at the start of OB1 The signals entered in the channelspecific interface by the HMI HMI signals are entered by the PLC operating system are also transferred at this time if they have been defined on the HMI operator panel not on the MCP Auxiliary functions and G functions are entered in the interface data blocks in two ways First they are entered with the change signals M s...

Page 1310: ...asynchronous subprogram ASUB Read write NC variables Update magazine and tool movement Some of the above functions are described in their own function documentation 3URJUDP FRQW URO 7UDYHUVH VLJQDOV 2 D HV WHV 3URJUDP FRQW URO IURP 0 3URJUDP FKDQQHO 6WDWXV HR D HV VWDWXV 0 6 7 9DOXHV HFRGHG 0 VLJQDOV 0 0 FWLYH IXQFWLRQV 0 GHFRGHU 0 3 0 1 KDQQHO JURXS GHFRGHU 0 6 LVWULEXWRU LV VSLQGOH QWHUIDFH RQWU...

Page 1311: ...c program if it is transferred to the PLC during the NC machining process The M and S value are also entered via the M S F distributor of the basic program if one or both values require processing WHV 1 6WDWXV VLJQDOV ULQGLQJ 7HFKQRORJ RQWURO VLJQDOV 5HVHUYH YDOXHV RI 0 6 DQG GLVWULEXWRUV RI EDVLF SURJUDP LV VSLQGOH GULYH 6WDWXV VLJQDOV 0 6 YDOXH 6WDWXV VLJQDOV 6HW JHDU VWHS LDO YDOXH 6WDWXV VLJQD...

Page 1312: ...y disable etc These are exchanged with the HMI via a separate interface data block DB19 Machine operation All operator inputs which lead to response actions on the machine are monitored by the PLC Operator actions are usually performed on the machine control panel MCP However it is also possible to perform some operator actions on the HMI e g mode selection The PLC operating system enters the oper...

Page 1313: ...he interrupt buffer The associated message texts must be stored on the OP or HMI An FC FC 10 for message acquisition is prepared in conjunction with the basic program This FC records events subdivides them into signal groups and reports them to the HMI via the interrupt buffer The message acquisition structure is shown in the figure Acquisition and signaling of PLC events The features include Bit ...

Page 1314: ... to distinguish their order of occurrence for troubleshooting purposes This is indicated on the one hand by the order in which they are entered in the diagnostic buffer and on the other by the time stamp which is assigned to every entry If the cause of the error disappears the associated interrupt message is only deleted if the user has acknowledged it e g by pressing a key on the MCP In response ...

Page 1315: ...cyclic program section and set or reset the bit fields in DB2 All further necessary measures are implemented by the basic program and HMI 50B6 50B64 6 0 23 3 HHG GLVDEOH 5HDG LQ GLVDEOH 1 VWDUW GLVDEOH KDQQHO KDQQHO Q LV VSLQGOH LV VSLQGOH Q HHGUDWH VSLQG OH GLVDEOH 0HVVDJH DFTXLVLWLRQ QWHUUXSW EXIIHU 0HVVDJH VHUYLFH FTXLVLWLRQ RI JURXS VLJQDOV IRU FKDQQHO DQG D LV URXS VLJQDOV GLVDEOH VLJQDOV LW ...

Page 1316: ...F together with the related message bits as group signals As such the previous cumbersome handling of the signals is omitted The alarms messages also get the 16 bit integer additional value Z parameter in the alarm text in addition to the alarm number for the user area 0 The user must write the 16 bit integer values in the DB 2 in the Array variable ZInfo0 parallel to setting an alarm bit An integ...

Page 1317: ...l MCP and the handheld unit HHU This is in part due to the history of the MCP and HHU This description focuses primarily on the connection of the Ethernet components On SINUMERIK 840 D the machine control panel MCP or HT8 MCP and handheld unit HT1 HT2 HHU are connected via the Ethernet bus which also links the TCU to the NCU The advantage of this is that only one bus cable is required to connect t...

Page 1318: ...he user interface e g input image at the cycle control point As on the SINUMERIK 840 D transfer to the VDI interface is performed by the user program or by standard blocks of the basic program e g FC19 Bus addresses On Ethernet components MAC and IP addresses or logic names are determining factors in respect of communication The control system s system programs convert logic names into MAC or IP a...

Page 1319: ...ciated status signals which are routed to the MCP interface For this purpose FC 19 or the other blocks mentioned above must be called in the user program Customized keys which can be used to trigger a wide range of machine functions must be evaluated directly by the user program The user program also routes the status signals to the output area for the LEDs Q P R S 5HFHLYH GDWD PRQLWRULQJ 0RQLWRUL...

Page 1320: ...al The program is modular in design i e it is structured according to NCK functions In the operating system a distinction is made between the following levels of execution Startup and synchronization OB 100 Cyclic mode OB 1 Process interrupt handling OB 40 Diagnostic interrupt module failure processing OB 82 OB 86 Each section of the basic program as illustrated in the figure below must be called ...

Page 1321: ... 2BA0 47 70B LU 70B7UDQV 3B35 0 3B 7 0 3B 0 3URFHVV FOLF PDFKLQLQJ 6WDUW XS KDQQHO LV VSLQGOH X LOLDU IXQFWLRQV 8VHU SURJUDP 8VHU SURJUDP 8VHU SURJUDP JURXSV 70 352 VDIH X LOLDU IXQFWLRQV RQ HV VSLQGOHV 5HDG ZULWH YDU 3 VHUYLFHV 5HVWDUW UURU DQG VWDWXV PHVVDJHV 6WDU GHOWD 8 LVSOD FRQWURO 70 0 3 68 0 3 8 2 2 2 70 1 3 2 6DIHW Figure 2 12 Structure of the basic program ...

Page 1322: ...d always commences cyclic execution at the start of OB 1 Synchronization The PLC is synchronized with the HMI and NCK and CP during powerup Sign of life After a correct initial start and the first complete OB1 cycle initial setting cycle the PLC and NCK continuously exchange sign of life signals If the signoflife signal from the NCK fails to arrive the PLC NCK interface is neutralized and the sign...

Page 1323: ... values Data type 1 Value 2 Value 1 Value 2 Value 1 Value 2 Value G function G function 2551 Byte M word M group M word 99 99 999 999 Word DWord S word Spindle no S word 6 Floating point2 Word DWord T word Magazine no T word 99 65535 Word Word D word D word 99 255 Byte Byte H word H group H word 99 Floating point Word DWord F word Axis No F word 18 Floating point Word DWord 1 relative number trans...

Page 1324: ...nel DBs The entered G functions are retained even after the NC program has terminated or aborted Note During system startup all G group bytes are initialized with the value 0 M S F distributor The M S F distributor is used to enter spindlespecific M words M 1 6 3 4 5 S words and F words for axial feeds in the appropriate spindle and axis data blocks The criterion for distribution is the extended a...

Page 1325: ...ral A process interrupt OB 40 interrupt can for example be triggered by appropriately configured I Os or by certain NC functions Due to the different origin of the interrupt the PLC user program must first interpret the cause of the interrupt in OB 40 The cause of the interrupt is contained in the local data of OB 40 For more information please also refer to the SIMATIC STEP7 description or the ST...

Page 1326: ...MI via the corresponding SZL functions of the PLC operating system via the communication channels to the PLC This saves the relatively large block in the PLC and reduces also the PLC cycle time Since the FB 125 works under interrupt disable during its processing OBs with a higher priority can be executed more quickly Note Till the HMI software version with the diagnostic display for the Profibus b...

Page 1327: ...re also reset Auxiliary function values Auxiliary function values are retained so that it is possible to trace the last functions triggered by the NCK G function values G function values are reset i e initialized with the value 0 PLC NCK signals The signals sent by the PLC to the NCK are divided into control signals and tasks that are transferred by FCs to the NCK Control signals The control signa...

Page 1328: ...a function call FCs FBs of basic program These are FCs and FBs which are controlled by a trigger signal e g via parameter Req Start etc and which supply an execution acknowledgment as an output parameter e g via parameter Done NDR Error etc A variable compiled of other signals which produce the trigger for the function call should be set Start conditions may be reset only as a function of the stat...

Page 1329: ...WDUW 6WRS XQFW Q3RV UURU 6WDWH 6SLQ WUO 3RV LV1R 0RGH 5DWH Figure 2 13 FC 18 input output parameters ASUBs Asynchronous subprograms ASUBs can be used to activate any function in the NCK Before an asynchronous subprogram can be started from the PLC it must be ensured that it is available and prepared by the NC program or by FB 4 PI services ASUB Once prepared in this way it can be started at any ti...

Page 1330: ...can be selected from a table which is also supplied The selected variables are first collected in a second projectrelated list Command Generate DB creates a AWL file which must be linked to the program file for the machine concerned and compiled together with the machine program 1 to 8 values can be read or written with a read or write job If necessary the values are converted e g NCK floating poi...

Page 1331: ...he signal sequence for the parameter ACT is currently displayed wrongly ACT must be TRUE as long as an event is reported in DONE or ERROR When using the functions AG_SEND AG_RECV a data transport to the other point takes place via the Ethernet Bus of the CP The other point is configured normally in STEP 7 in NetPro The special feature in the call of the functions lies in the specification of the p...

Page 1332: ...1 72 73 are used The assignments have been made as follows UDT assignments UDT number Assignment to interface DB Significance UDT 2 DB 2 Interrupts Messages UDT 10 DB 10 NCK signals UDT 11 DB 11 Mode group signals UDT 19 DB 19 HMI signals UDT 21 DB 21 to DB 30 Channel signal UDT 31 DB 31 to DB 61 Axis spindle signals UDT 71 DB71 Tool management Load unload locations UDT 72 DB 72 Tool management Ch...

Page 1333: ...nds and absolute addresses can be viewed by means of a STEP 7 editor command when the UDT block is opened Note Unused bits and bytes are listed for example with the designation f56_3 56 Byte address of the relevant data block 3 Bit number in this byte 2 7 9 M decoding acc to list Description of functions When the M decoding according to list function is activated via the GP parameter of FB1 ListMD...

Page 1334: ...f the M decoding according to list 1 0 1 0 ฺ ฺ 8VHU SURJUDP 5HDG LQ GLVDEOH 5HDG LQ GLVDEOH 6LJQDO OLVW HFRGLQJ OLVW 6WDWXV FRQWURO VLJQDOV 3URFHVVLQJ 0 GHFRGLQJ DFF WR OLVW 3 EDVLF SURJUDP 5HDG LQ GLVDEOH 5HDG LQ GLVDEOH 6LJQDOV WR 1 1 SDUW SURJUDP KDQQHO 1 SDUW SURJUDP KDQQHO Figure 2 14 M decoding acc to list Activation of the function The number of groups to be evaluated decoded is indicated i...

Page 1335: ...ly from the first M function MFirstAdr to the last M function MLastAdr from bit 0 up to maximum bit 15 for each group Each entry in the decoding lists consists of 3 parameters each of which is assigned to a group Assignment of groups Group Extended M address First M address in group Last M address in group 1 MSigGrp 1 MExtAdr MSigGrp 1 MFirstAdr MSigGrp 1 MLastAdr 2 MSigGrp 2 MExtAdr MSigGrp 2 MFi...

Page 1336: ...ers Group Decoding list DB 75 Signal list Extended M address First M address in group Last M address in group DB 76 1 2 1 5 DBX0 0 to DBX0 4 2 3 12 23 DBX2 0 to DBX3 3 3 40 55 55 DBX4 0 DATA_BLOCK DB 75 TITLE VERSION 0 0 STRUCT MSigGrp ARRAY 1 16 OF STRUCT MExtAdr INT MFirstAdr DINT MLastAdr DINT END_STRUCT END_STRUCT BEGIN MSigGrp 1 MExtAdr 2 MSigGrp 1 MFirstAdr L 1 MSigGrp 1 MLastAdr L 5 MSigGrp...

Page 1337: ...is reset once the user has reset and therefore acknowledged all the bits output by this channel in the signal list DB 76 2 7 10 PLC machine data General The user has the option of storing PLCspecific machine data in the NCK The user can then process these machine data after the power up of the PLC OB 100 This enables for example user options machine expansion levels machine configurations etc to b...

Page 1338: ...f PLC machine data used is increased later then DB20 must be deleted beforehand To prevent such extensions in use having any effect on the existing user program the data in DB20 should be accessed in symbolic form wherever possible e g by means of a structure definition in the UDT Interrupts 400120 Delete DB 20 in PLC and restart Explanation DB length is not the same as the required DB length Resp...

Page 1339: ...A_INT 2 789 MD14510 USER_DATA_INT 3 1011 MD14512 USER_DATA_HEX 0 12 MD14512 USER_DATA_HEX 1 AC MD14514 USER_DATA_FLOAT 0 123 456 GP Parameter OB 100 CALL FB 1 DB 7 MCPNum 1 MCP1In P E0 0 MCP1Out P A0 0 MCP1StatSend P A8 0 MCP1StatRec P A12 0 MCP1BusAdr 6 MCP1Timeout S5T 700MS MCP1Cycl S5T 200MS NCCyclTimeout S5T 200MS NCRunupTimeout S5T 50S BP parameters to scan runtime l gp_par UDInt 4 l gp_par U...

Page 1340: ...eal ARRAY 0 0 OF REAL Description as field for later expansions END_STRUCT END_TYPE Note ARRAY OF BOOL are always sent to even numbered addresses For this reason an array range of 0 to 15 must generally be selected in the UDT definition or all Boolean variables specified individually Although only a REAL value is used initially in the example a field with one element has been created for the varia...

Page 1341: ... in the symbol table to allow data access in symbolic form Symbol Operand Data type UData DB 20 UDT 20 Access operations in user program list includes only symbolic read access L UData UDInt 0 L UData UDInt 1 L UData UDInt 2 L UData UDInt 3 U UData UDHex0 0 U UData UDHex0 1 U UData UDHex0 2 U UData UDHex0 3 U UData UDHex0 4 U UData UDHex0 5 U UData UDHex0 6 U UData UDHex0 7 U UData UDHex0 15 L UDa...

Page 1342: ... 1 stores its parameters in the associated instance DB DB 7 symbolic name gp_par Separate parameter sets are provided for each machine control panel and the handheld unit The input output addresses of the user must be defined in these parameter sets These input and output addresses are also used in FC 19 FC 24 FC 25 FC 26 and FC 13 Further the addresses for status information Profibus or Ethernet ...

Page 1343: ...m An overview of the various coupling mechanisms appears below Mixed operation can also be configured If an error is detected due to a timeout monitor an entry is made in the alarm buffer of the PLC CPU interrupts 400260 to 400262 In this case the input signals from the MCP or from the handheld unit MCP1In MCP2In or BHGIn are reset to 0 If it is possible to resynchronize the PLC and MCP HHU commun...

Page 1344: ...imeout n r MCPMPI FALSE BHGCycl n r MCP1Stop MCP2Stop BHGRecGDNo MCP1 NotSend MCP2 NotSend BHGRecGBZNo n r BHGRecObjNo n r MCPBusType b 16 55 via CP 840D sl BHGSendGDNo n r BHGSendGBZNo n r MCPSDB210 FALSE BHGSendObjNo n r MCPCopyDB77 FALSE BHGMPI FALSE BHGStop BHG NotSend An error entry is also made in the PLC alarm buffer for timeouts resulting in the following error messages on the HMI 400260 M...

Page 1345: ...e the address of the direct control key module TCU index or the MCP address can also be changed After resetting the Stop signal a connection to the new address is established In the interface signals from NCK DB10 DBX104 3 OP1Key ready and DB10 DBX104 4 OP2Key ready the status of the respective direct control key interface can be read Address Direct Control Keys For the parameter Op1 2KeyBusAdr th...

Page 1346: ...U index at the parameter IdentMcpBusAdr is activated by the user program together with setting of the Strobe signal The input parameter IdentMcpProfilNo is normally to be set to the value 0 This parameter is to be set to the value 1 only in the identification of the direct control keys The parameter IdentMcpBusType currently has no signifcance for a user program and is to be left in its default va...

Page 1347: ...E B 16 81 MCP 310 B 16 82 MCP OEM B 16 83 MCP DMG B 16 84 HT8 B 16 85 TCU_DT Direct control keys B 16 86 MCP_MPP B 16 87 HT2 B 16 88 OP08T direct control keys B 16 89 840D Profibus connection With an MCP Profibus connection these components must be considered in the STEP 7 hardware configuration The MCP may only be interfaced with the standard DP bus on the PLC not on MPI DP The addresses must be ...

Page 1348: ... FALSE BHGCycl n r MCP1Stop MCP2Stop BHGRecGDNo MCPBusType b 16 33 BHGRecGBZNo n r BHGRecObjNo n r MCPSDB210 FALSE BHGSendGDNo n r MCPCopyDB77 FALSE BHGSendGBZNo n r BHGSendObjNo n r BHGMPI FALSE BHGStop MCP failure normally switches the PLC to the STOP state If this is undesirable OB 82 OB 86 can be used to avoid a stop The basic program has by default the OB 82 and OB 86 call FC5 is called in th...

Page 1349: ... components parameter setting 1 This function is available only on Ethernet variants This stop or activation of communication can be applied in the current cycle However the change in value must be implemented through the symbolic notation of the parameters and not by means of another FB 1 call Example of stopping transfer from the first machine control panel SET S gp_par MCP1Stop Setting paramete...

Page 1350: ...PLC interface The assignment of the NC PLC interface for SINUMERIK 840D is described in detail in References LIS2 Lists Book2 2 9 2 Assignment FB FC Number Significance FB 15 Basic program FB 1 FC2 FC 3 FC5 Basic program FC 0 29 Reserved for Siemens FB 0 29 Reserved for Siemens FC 30 999 1 Free for user assignment FB 30 999 1 Free for user assignment FC 1000 1023 Reserved for Siemens FB 1000 1023 ...

Page 1351: ...13 14 Reserved for basic program 15 Basic program 16 PI Service definition 17 Version identifier 18 Reserved for basic program 19 HMI interface 20 PLC machine data 21 30 CHANNEL 1 n Interface NC channels BP BP 31 61 AXIS 1 m Interfaces for axes spindles or free for user assignment 62 70 Free for user assignment 71 74 Tool management BP 75 76 M group decoding 77 Data block for MCP signals 78 80 Res...

Page 1352: ...LC program for SINUMERIK 840D General The basic program consists of basic and optional functions The basic functions include cyclic signal exchange between the NC and PLC The options include for example the FCs which can be used if required The table below lists the memory requirements for the basic functions and the options The data quoted represent guide values the actual values depend on the cu...

Page 1353: ...ransfer of MCP signals slim variant Must be loaded when slim variant of MCP is installed 100 FC26 Transfer of MCP signals HT8 variant Must be loaded for HT8 68 Handheld unit FC13 Display control HHU Can be loaded for handheld units 144 Error operating messages FC10 Acquisition FM BM Load when FM BM is used 66 ASUB FC9 ASUB start Load when PLC ASUBs are used 128 Basic program options Star delta cha...

Page 1354: ...ted FB10 Safety relay Load with Safety option 74 FB11 Brake test Load with Safety option 76 DB18 Safety data DB for Safety 226 Tool management FC7 Transfer function turret Load for tool management option 84 FC8 Transfer function Load for tool management option 132 FC22 Direction selection Load if direction selection is required 138 DB71 Loading locations Generated by BP as a function of NC MD 40 3...

Page 1355: ...nfiguration 1 spindle 2 axes and T MCP See above Basic program base 54688 Interface DBs 1612 MCP 92 Total 56392 Block size bytes Block type no Function Remark Working memory Maximum configuration 2 channels 4 spindles 4 axes T MCP See above Basic program base 54688 See above Interface DBs 2768 See above MCP 92 See above Error operating messages 66 See above ASUBs 1 ASUB initiation 128 See above Co...

Page 1356: ...l STEP7 version 5 3 SP2 or higher The required version of STEP7 can be installed on equipment meeting the above requirements in cases where the package has not already been supplied with the programming device The following functions are possible with this package Programming Editors and compilers for STL complete scope of the language incl SFB SFC calls LAD FBD Creation and editing of assignment ...

Page 1357: ... individual or all blocks Allocation of symbolic names also for variables in data blocks Input and output of comments within each block Printout of test and diagnostics displays Hardcopy function Cross reference list Program overview Assignment plan I O M T Z D Archiving of utility routines Allocation of the output statuses of individual blocks Comparison of blocks Rewiring STEP 5 STEP 7 converter...

Page 1358: ...anual STEP 7 Standard and system functions Manual STEP 7 Conversion of STEP5 Programs STEP7 General Index CPU 317 2DP Manual 2 11 1 3 Relevant SINUMERIK documents References IADC Commissioning Manual SINUMERIK 840D 810D PLC Commissioning Operating components Device manual HW SINUMERIK 840D 840Di 810D Function Manuals SINUMERIK 840D 810D FB1 Function Manual Basic functions FB2 Function manual Exten...

Page 1359: ... the Windows Explorer with any catalog name The selected data of the NC VAR selector data VAR and data AWL files must be stored in this catalog Therafter the AWL file is to be transferred and compiled via the menu option Code in STEP7 Project The Daten AWL STL data file must then be inserted into the STEP 7 machine project via Insert External Source in the STEP 7 Manager The source container must ...

Page 1360: ...ata mdb Machine data for 611D drive ncv_611d mdb Machine data for 611D linear drive ncv_611dLinear mdb Machine data of the 611D drive Performance 2 ncv_611d_P2 mdb Machine data of the 611D linear drive Performance 2 ncv_611d_P2Linear mdb Machine data of the hydraulic drive ncv_Hydraulics mdb SINUMERIK 840D solution line NC variables including machine and setting data ncv_NcData mdb Parameters of t...

Page 1361: ...les GUD variables defined by the user These variables are processed by the function block FB 5 in the basic program Note The latest version of the NC VAR selector is capable of processing all previous NC software versions It is therefore not necessary to install different versions of the NC VAR selector in parallel System features supplementary conditions The PC application NC VAR selector require...

Page 1362: ... The NC VAR selector is used to generate a list of selected variables from a list of variables and then to generate an awl file that can be compiled by the STEP 7 compiler A awl file contains the names and alias names of the NC variables as well as information about their address parameters Any data block generated from this file will only contain the address parameters 10 bytes per parameter The ...

Page 1363: ...tarted the basic display with all input options upper menu bar appears on the screen All other displayed windows are placed within the general window Figure 2 20 Basic display with basic menu Project menu item All operator actions associated with the project file file of selected variables are performed under this menu item Terminating the application The application can be terminated by selecting...

Page 1364: ... NEW is selected The file selection for the NC variable list is then displayed after a prompt applies only if the NC variable list is not already open Figure 2 21 Window with selected variables for new project The selected variables are displayed in a window Opening an existing project Select Open under the Project menu item to open an existing project variables already selected A file selection w...

Page 1365: ...d Printing a project The Print command under the Project menu item can be selected to print a project file The number of lines per page is selected under the Print Setting menu item The default setting is 77 lines Edit menu item The following operator actions are examples of those which can be carried out directly with this menu item Transfer variables Delete variables change alias names Find vari...

Page 1366: ...list of all the NC variables for an NC version can now be selected and displayed via the NC Variable List Select menu item Figure 2 23 Window with selected Complete List The field variables e g axis area T area data etc are indicated by means of brackets Additional information must be specified here When the variables are transferred to the project list the additional information required is reque...

Page 1367: ...riteria for displaying list of variables There are three options Display all data Input area block and name incl combinations Display MD SE data number The following wildcards can also be used To extend the search criterion as required Example search criteria Name search criterion CHAN Found CHAN_NAME chanAlarm chanStatus channelName chanAssignment Selecting variables A variable is selected by mea...

Page 1368: ...hich are too long When a variable is selected the length of the STEP7 name to be used is therefore checked If the name is longer than 24 characters the user must enter an additional name which is then used as the alias In this case the user must ensure that the alias name is unambiguous Alias input can always be activated by the user in the Options menu An alias name can then be entered every time...

Page 1369: ...nd GET the optional parameters UnitX ColumnX and LineX must be filled with the necessary information Figure 2 26 Entry field for line column and block no Delete variables Variables are deleted in the window of selected variables by selecting the appropriate variables single mouse click and pressing the Delete key No deletion action is taken with the doubleclick function It is possible to select se...

Page 1370: ... window Figure 2 27 Window for project path and name of file to be stored Code generation This menu item contains three selection options 1 Settings input of data block number to be generated and other settings 2 Generate create data block 3 In the STEP7 project transferring the data block to a STEP7 project Settings Under this menu item the DB number and the symbol for this DB number for which th...

Page 1371: ...ect program path and compiled Furthermore the symbol can also be transferred This function is available from STEP 7 version 5 1 onwards This process takes a longer time owing to the call of STEP 7 Before transferring a new AWL file the file window of the AWL file is to be closed in the KOP FUP AWL Editor Option menu item The following can be selected under the Option menu item The current language...

Page 1372: ...until the other has caught up This is automatically managed by the basic program The integrated PLC only supports cold starts A warm restart is not provided i e following system initialization the operating system runs organization block OB 100 and always commences cyclic execution at the start of OB 1 Users need only supply the FB 1 parameters that are relevant to their applications The preset va...

Page 1373: ...OINTER Start addr output signals MCP 2 MCP2StatSend POINTER Status DW for sending MCP 2 MCP2StatRec POINTER Status DW for receiving MCP 2 MCP2BusAdr INT MCP2Timeout S5TIME S5T 700MS MCP2Cycl S5TIME S5T 200MS MCPMPI BOOL FALSE MCP1Stop BOOL FALSE MCP2Stop BOOL FALSE MCP1NotSend BOOL FALSE MCP2NotSend BOOL FALSE MCPSDB210 BOOL FALSE MCPCopyDB77 BOOL FALSE MCPBusType BYTE B 16 0 HHU INT 0 Handheld un...

Page 1374: ...ser areas in DB 2 UserIR BOOL FALSE User programs in OB 40 Observe local data expansion IRAuxfuT BOOL FALSE Evaluate T function in OB 40 IRAuxfuH BOOL FALSE Evaluate H function in OB 40 IRAuxfuE BOOL FALSE Evaluate DL function in OB 40 UserVersion POINTER Pointer to string variable indicated in version screen display OpKeyNum INT Op1KeyIn POINTER Op1KeyOut POINTER Op1KeyBusAdr INT Op2KeyIn POINTER...

Page 1375: ... panel MCP1Out MCP2Out I POINTER Q0 0 to Q120 0 or F0 0 to F248 0 or DBn DBX0 0 to DBXm 0 Start address for output signals of relevant machine control panel MCP1StatSend MCP2StatSend I POINTER Q0 0 to Q124 0 F0 0 to F252 0 or DBn DBX0 0 to DBXm 0 Currently no significance MCP1StatRec MCP2StatRec I POINTER Q0 0 to Q124 0 F0 0 to F252 0 or DBn DBX0 0 to DBXm 0 Currently no significance MCP1BusAdr MC...

Page 1376: ...ddress PLC transmit data to HHU BHGStatSend I POINTER Q0 0 to Q124 0 F0 0 to F252 0 or DBn DBX0 0 to DBXm 0 Available owing to compatibility BHGStatRec I POINTER Q0 0 to Q124 0 F0 0 to F252 0 or DBn DBX0 0 to DBXm 0 Available owing to compatibility BHGInLen I BYTE HHU default B 16 6 6 Byte Available owing to compatibility BHGOutLen I BYTE HHU default B 16 14 20 Byte Available owing to compatibilit...

Page 1377: ...services FB 2 3 4 5 7 Put Get PI_SERV GETGUD TRUE active MMCToIF I BOOL Transmission of HMI signals to interface modes program control etc TRUE active HWheelMMC I BOOL TRUE Handwheel selection via HMI FALSE Handwheel selection via user program ExtendAlMsg I BOOL Activation extension of the FC10 see Section Structure and Functions of the basic program MsgUser I INT 0 32 Number of user areas for mes...

Page 1378: ...TCU Index Op1KeyStop Op2KeyStop I BOOL 0 Start transfer of direct control key signals 1 Stop transmission of direct control key signals Op1KeyNotSend Op2KeyNotSend I BOOL 0 Send and receive operation activated 1 Receive direct control key signals only OpKeyBusType I BYTE b 16 55 b 16 55 Ethernet IdentMcpBusAdr I INT 1 254 only IE devices IdentMcpProfilNo I BYTE 0 1 Profile of a device 0 complete d...

Page 1379: ...105 Signal Type Type Range of values Remark UDInt Q INT Quantity of integer machine data in DB20 UDHex Q INT Quantity of hexadecimal machine data in DB20 UDReal Q INT Quantity of Real machine data in DB 20 IdentMcpType A BYTE Type HT2 HT8 IdentMcpLengthIn A BYTE Length info input data in PLC IdentMcpLengthO ut A BYTE Length info output data in PLC ...

Page 1380: ...HU communication is resumed automatically and the error message reset by the GP 840D example call An example call for the FB 1 in OB 100 appears below This example is part of the diskette with basic program for 840D ORGANIZATION_BLOCK OB 100 VAR_TEMP OB100_EV_CLASS BYTE OB100_STRTUP BYTE OB100_PRIORITY BYTE OB100_OB_NUMBR BYTE OB100_RESERVED_1 BYTE OB100_RESERVED_2 BYTE OB100_STOP WORD OB100_RESER...

Page 1381: ...ta block A name must then be assigned to this DB in the symbol table DB name S7 name is transferred as the actual parameter of the NCK variable address Addr1 to Addr8 when FB 2 is called Variable addressing For some NC variables it is necessary to select area no and or line or column from the NC VAR selector A basic type can be selected for these variables i e area column line are preset to 0 The ...

Page 1382: ...ls 3 to 10 as illustrated as examples in the above table in groups 1 and 2 Note Especially when reading several long strings the number of usable variables can be less than 8 Declaration of the function FUNCTION_BLOCK FB 2 VAR_INPUT Req BOOL NumVar INT Addr1 ANY Unit1 BYTE Column1 WORD Line1 WORD Addr2 ANY Unit2 BYTE Column2 WORD Line2 WORD Addr3 ANY Unit3 BYTE Column3 WORD Line3 WORD Addr4 ANY Un...

Page 1383: ...ANY RD3 ANY RD4 ANY RD5 ANY RD6 ANY RD7 ANY RD8 ANY END_VAR Description of formal parameters The table below list all formal parameters of the GET function Signal Typ e Type Range of values Remark Req I BOOL Job start with positive signal edge NumVar I INT 1 8 corresponds to use of Addr1 to Addr8 Number of variables to be read Addr1 to Addr8 I ANY DBName VarName Variable identifiers from NC Var se...

Page 1384: ... Access error In high byte number of Var in which error occurred 0 2 Error in job Incorrect compilation of Var in a job 0 3 Negative acknowledgment job not executable Internal error try NC RESET 1 8 4 Insufficient local user memory available Read var is longer than specified in RD1 to RD8 in high byte number of var in which error occurred 0 5 Format conversion error Error on conversion of var type...

Page 1385: ...agram 1 5 5HT UURU 1 Activation of function 2 Positive acknowledgment Receive new data 3 Reset function activation after receipt of acknowledgment 4 Signal change by means of FB 5 Not permissible 6 Negative acknowledgment Error has occurred error code in output parameter state Call example Reading of three channelspecific machine data from channel 1 whose address specifications are stored in DB120...

Page 1386: ...and transferred to the PLC Parameterization of FB 2 with instance DB 110 DATA_BLOCK DB 110 Unassigned user DB as instance for FB 2 FB 2 BEGIN END_DATA_BLOCK Function FC VariablenCall VOID U I 7 7 Unassigned machine control panel key S M 100 0 Activate req U M 100 1 NDR completed message R M 100 0 Terminate job U I 7 6 Manual error acknowledgment U M 102 0 Error pending R M 100 0 Terminate job CALL...

Page 1387: ...eter number is parameterized via parameter LineX DATA_BLOCK DB 120 VERSION 0 0 STRUCT C1_RP_rpa0_0 STRUCT SYNTAX_ID BYTE B 16 82 area_and_unit BYTE B 16 41 column WORD W 16 1 line WORD W 16 0 block type BYTE B 16 15 NO OF LINES BYTE B 16 1 type BYTE B 16 F length BYTE B 16 8 END_STRUCT END_STRUCT BEGIN END_DATA_BLOCK CALL FB 2 DB 110 Req M 0 0 NumVar 2 Addr1 NCVAR C1_RP_rpa0_0 Line1 W 16 1 Addr2 N...

Page 1388: ...le Every FB 3 call must be assigned a separate instance DB from the user area When FB 3 is called with a positive signal edge change at control input Req a job is started to overwrite the NC variables referenced by Addr1 to Addr8 with the data of the PLC operand areas locally referenced by SD1 to SD8 Successful completion of the write process is indicated by a logical 1 in status parameter Done Th...

Page 1389: ...ocess is described in the IADC Commissioning Manual Protection level concept or PGA Job Planning Programming Manual Define protection levels for user data GUD Notice FB 3 can only write NC variables if basic program parameter NCKomm has been set to 1 in OB 100 FB 1 DB 7 The call is permitted only in cyclic program OB1 An assignment for all parameters with Req 0 is also permitted in OB100 When chan...

Page 1390: ... Addr1 ANY Unit1 BYTE Column1 WORD Line1 WORD Addr2 ANY Unit2 BYTE Column2 WORD Line2 WORD Addr3 ANY Unit3 BYTE Column3 WORD Line3 WORD Addr4 ANY Unit4 BYTE Column4 WORD Line4 WORD Addr5 ANY Unit5 BYTE Column5 WORD Line5 WORD Addr6 ANY Unit6 BYTE Column6 WORD Line6 WORD Addr7 ANY Unit7 BYTE Column7 WORD Line7 WORD Addr8 ANY Unit8 BYTE Column8 WORD Line8 WORD END_VAR VAR_OUTPUT Error BOOL Done BOOL...

Page 1391: ...ge NumVar I INT 1 to 8 corresponds to use of Addr1 to Addr8 Number of variables to be written Addr1 to Addr8 I ANY DBName VarName Variable identifiers from NC Var selector Unit 1 to Unit 8 I BYTE Area address optional for variable addressing Column 1 to Column 8 I WORD Column address optional for variable addressing Line 1 to Line 8 I WORD Line address optional for variable addressing Error A BOOL...

Page 1392: ... to SD8 in high byte number of the Var in which error occurred 0 6 FIFO full Job must be repeated since queue is full 0 7 Option not set BP parameter NCKomm is not set 1 8 8 Incorrect target area SD SD1 to SD8 may not be local data 0 9 Transmission occupied Job must be repeated 1 8 10 Error in variable addressing Unit or column line contains value 0 0 11 Variable addr invalid or var is read only C...

Page 1393: ... 2006 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 119 Pulse diagram RQH 5HT UURU 1 Activation of function 2 Positive acknowledgment variables have been written 3 Reset function activation after receipt of acknowledgment 4 Signal change by means of FB 5 Not permissible 6 Negative acknowledgment Error has occurred error code in output parameter state ...

Page 1394: ...Data type NCVAR DB 120 DB 120 File DB120 AWL must be compiled and transferred to the PLC Call and parameterization of FB 3 with instance DB 111 DATA_BLOCK DB 111 Unassigned user DB as instance for FB 3 FB 3 BEGIN Function FC VariablenCall VOID END_DATA_BLOCK U I 7 7 Unassigned machine control panel key S M 100 0 Activate req U M 100 1 Done completed message R M 100 0 Terminate job U I 7 6 Manual e...

Page 1395: ...r number is parameterized via parameter LineX DATA_BLOCK DB 120 VERSION 0 0 STRUCT C1_RP_rpa0_0 STRUCT SYNTAX_ID BYTE B 16 82 area_and_unit BYTE B 16 41 column WORD W 16 1 line WORD W 16 0 block type BYTE B 16 15 NO OF LINES BYTE B 16 1 type BYTE B 16 F length BYTE B 16 8 END_STRUCT END_STRUCT BEGIN END_DATA_BLOCK CALL FB 3 DB 122 Req M 10 0 NumVar 2 Addr1 NCVAR C1_RP_rpa0_0 Line1 W 16 1 Addr2 NCV...

Page 1396: ...input variables with varying data types Addr1 to Addr4 for strings WVar1 to WVar 10 for integer or word variables A job is started when FB 4 is called by means of a positive edge change at control input Req Successful execution of the job is displayed by means of a logical 1 in status parameter Done Any errors are indicated by Error and State The PI data block DB16 contains internal descriptions o...

Page 1397: ...006 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 123 Declaration of the function FUNCTION_BLOCK FB 4 VAR_INPUT Req BOOL PIService ANY Unit INT Addr1 ANY Addr2 ANY Addr3 ANY Addr4 ANY WVar1 WORD WVar2 WORD WVar3 WORD WVar4 WORD WVar5 WORD WVar6 WORD WVar7 WORD WVar8 WORD WVar9 WORD WVar10 WORD END_VAR VAR_OUTPUT Error BOOL Done BOOL State WORD END_VAR ...

Page 1398: ...ce Error A BOOL Negative acknowledgment of job or execution of job impossible Done A BOOL Job successfully executed State A WORD See error identifiers 1 See README file on basic program diskette supplied Error identifiers If it was not possible to execute a job the failure is indicated by logic 1 on status parameter error The error cause is coded at the block output State State Significance Note 3...

Page 1399: ...06 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 125 Pulse diagram RQH 5HT UURU 1 Activation of function 2 Positive acknowledgment PI service has been executed 3 Reset function activation after receipt of acknowledgment 4 Signal change by means of FB 5 Not permissible 6 Negative acknowledgment Error has occurred error code in the output parameter State ...

Page 1400: ... Reset password x NCRES Trigger NC RESET x SELECT Select program for processing for one channel x SETUDT Sets the current user data to active x SETUFR Activate user frame x PI service Tool management function CRCEDN Create new cutting edge x CREACE Create cutting edge x CREATO Generate tool x DELECE Delete a cutting edge x DELETO Delete tool x MMCSEM Semaphores for various PI services x TMCRTO Cre...

Page 1401: ...ation of path and program names Parameterization Signal Type Value range Meaning PIService ANY PI ASUP Assign interrupt Unit INT 1 to 10 Channel WVar1 WORD 1 to 8 Interrupt number WVar2 WORD 1 to 8 Priority WVar3 WORD 0 1 LIFTFAST WVar4 WORD 0 1 BLSYNC Addr1 STRING Path name Addr2 STRING Program name Note The SETINT instruction is also used to make the assignment The ASUP PI service may only be ex...

Page 1402: ...op at block limit An FB 4 error checkback message is output if these conditions are not fulfilled state 3 Parameterization Signal Type Value range Meaning PIService ANY PI CONFIG Reconfiguration Unit INT 1 WVar1 INT 1 Classification PI service DIGION Function Digitalize On Selecting digitizing in the specified channel Parameterization Signal Type Value range Meaning PIService ANY PI DIGION Digitiz...

Page 1403: ... providing a collisionfree approach path Parameterization Signal Type Value range Meaning PIService ANY PI FINDBL Block search Unit INT 1 to 10 Channel WVar1 WORD x Preprocessing mode x Describes the preprocessing mode x 1 without calculation x 2 with calculation x 3 with main block observation PI service LOGIN Create function Keyword Transfers the parameterized password to the NCK The passwords g...

Page 1404: ...ram stored on the NCK is selected for processing for one channel This is possible only if the file may be executed The path name and program name must be entered as described in the Programming Manual Job Planning File and Program Management Section Program Memory Please also refer to example of FB 4 for notation of path and program names Possible block types Block types Workpiece directory WPD Ma...

Page 1405: ...nge Meaning PIService ANY PI SETUDT Activate user data Unit INT 1 to 10 Channel WVar1 WORD 1 to 5 User data type 1 active tool offset 2 active basic frame 3 active settable frame 4 active global basic frame 5 active global settable frame WVar2 WORD 0 Standby WVar3 WORD 0 Standby PI service SETUFR Activate function user frames User frames are loaded to the NCK All necessary frame values must be tra...

Page 1406: ...te tool x DELECE Delete a cutting edge x DELETO Delete tool x MMCSEM Semaphores for various PI services x TMCRTO Create tool x TMFDPL Empty location search for loading x TMFPBP Empty location search x TMGETT T number for the specified tool identifier with duplo number x TMMVTL Prepare magazine location for loading unload tool x TMPOSM Position magazine location or tool x TMPCIT Set increment value...

Page 1407: ...ing edge is set up with the specified D number If the specified cutting edge already exists then the PI service is aborted in both cases Parameterization Signal Type Range of values Significance PIService ANY PI CRCEDN Create new cutting edge Unit INT 1 10 TOA WVar1 INT T number of tool for which cutting edge must be created A setting of 00000 states that the cutting edge should not refer to any p...

Page 1408: ... of an existing tool is specified in parameter T number in the PI service then a cutting edge is deleted for this particular tool in this case parameter D number number of cutting edge to be created has a value range of 00001 00009 If a positive T number is specified as a parameter and the tool for the T number entered does not exist then the PI service is aborted If a value of 00000 is entered fo...

Page 1409: ...ons for the HMI PLC By setting the semaphore for the corresponding function number several HMI PLC units can be synchronized with it in cases where a function contains a critical section with respect to data to be fetched by the NCK Semaphores are managed by the HMI PLC A semaphore value of 1stipulates a Test Set operation for the semaphore of the specified function number The return value of the ...

Page 1410: ...2 TMFDPL search for empty location for loading 3 TMMVTL prepare magazine location for loading unload tool 4 TMFPBP search for location 5 TMGETT search for tool number 6 TSEARC search for tool 7 10 Reserved WVar2 SemaphorValue 0 Reset semaphore 1 Test and set semaphore Parameterization Signal Type Range of values Significance PIService ANY PI MMCSEM Set semaphore Unit INT 1 2 to 10 Channel WVar1 IN...

Page 1411: ...ck if one is present The TD block contains the identifier duplo number and number of cutting edges 1 for the T number that is entered optionally or allocated by the NCK If a TU block exists it will contain the data set for the tool After execution of the PI the T number of the tool created is available in the TV block under TnumWZV Note Before and after this PI service the MMCSEM PI service must b...

Page 1412: ...on_number_ID and magazine_number_ID can be set as search criteria or not 1 The PI is acknowledged positively or negatively depending on the search result Location_number_to Location_number Magazine_number_to Magazine_number The specified location is checked to confirm that it is free to be loaded with the specified tool Location_number_ID and magazine_number_ID can be set as search criteria or not...

Page 1413: ...in the variable TnumWZV in the block TV If the specified tool does not exist then the T number 0001 is returned Since the PI service returns a result in the variable TnumWZV the service is to be stored with the semaphore mechanism PI service _N_MMCSEM with the function number for _N_TMGETT Note Before and after this PI service the MMCSEM PI service must be called up with the associated parameter W...

Page 1414: ...ses the magazine to the selected location for loading at the specified loading point station location_number_from magazine_number_from and inserts the tool When location_number_to 1 an empty location for the tool specified by a T number is first sought in the specified magazine and the magazine then traversed After execution of the PI the number of the location found is listed in the TM area in co...

Page 1415: ...ice The PI service makes a magazine location which can be qualified in various ways traverse in front of a specified load location The load location must be specified in the PI parameters location number_from and magazine number_from compulsory The magazine location to be traversed can be qualified by the following T number of the tool The location where the tool is positioned traverses the tool i...

Page 1416: ...ce counter Unit INT 1 10 TOA WVar1 WORD 0 max Spindle number corresponds to the type index in the location data with spindle location type of the buffer magazine in channel 000 main spindle WVar2 WORD 0 max Increment value indicates the number of spindle revolutions after which the workpiece counter is incremented PI service TMRASS Function Reset the active status Resetting the active status on wo...

Page 1417: ...rvice ANY PI TRESMO Reset monitoring values Unit INT 1 10 TO area WVar1 WORD max max ToolNumber 0 Applies to all tools 0 Applies only to this tool 0 Applies to all sister tools of the specified T No WVar2 WORD 0 max D number 0 Monitoring of specified edge of specified tools is reset 0 Monitoring of all edges of specified tools is reset WVar3 WORD 0 15 Monitoring types Type of monitoring to be rese...

Page 1418: ...meters of the PI service the properties of the required tools are first defined via variable service in the TF block For this in the block TF in the operand masks parMaskT the relevant comparison criteria which tool data is to be compared are highlighted comparison operator data parDataT filled with the corresponding comparison types to be executed and the comparison values are entered in the oper...

Page 1419: ...tions are searched For a symmetric search see parameter SearchDirection the search area may stretch over only a single magazine cases 2 and 5 from the above table If another search domain is specified the service will malfunction a reference location must be entered in the parameters MagNrRef and PlaceNrRef with respect to which the symmetric search is done The reference location is a buffer locat...

Page 1420: ...etrical search is to be performed this parameter is only relevant with a symmetrical search direction WVar6 INT PlaceNrRef Location number of location in magazine MagNrRef with reference to which the symmetrical search is to be performed This parameter is only relevant with a symmetrical search direction WVar7 INT 1 2 3 SearchDirection specifies the required search direction 1 Forwards from the fi...

Page 1421: ...LOCK DATA_BLOCK DB 124 struct PName string 32 _N_TEST_MPF Path string 32 _N_MPF_DIR Main program PName_WST string 32 _N_ABC_MPF Path_WST string 32 _N_WKS_DIR _N_ZYL_WPD Workpiece program end_struct BEGIN END_DATA_BLOCK Function FC PICall VOID U I 7 7 Unassigned machine control panel key S M 0 0 Activate req U M 1 1 Done completed message R M 0 0 Terminate job U I 7 6 Manual error acknowledgment U ...

Page 1422: ...fied in parameters Area Unit Index1 and Index2 see table of block parameters When parameter CnvtToken is activated a variable pointer token can be generated for this GUD variable as an option This pointer is generated via the VAR selector for system variables of the NC Only this method of generating pointers is available for GUD variables Once a pointer has been generated for the GUD variable then...

Page 1423: ...B 5 Server name KNOW_HOW_PROTECT VERSION 3 0 VAR_INPUT Req BOOL Addr ANY Variables name string Area BYTE Area NCK 0 channel 2 Unit BYTE Index1 INT Field index 1 Index2 INT Field index 2 CnvtToken BOOL Conversion into 10 byte token VarToken ANY Struct with 10 bytes for the variable token END_VAR VAR_OUTPUT Error BOOL Done BOOL State WORD END_VAR VAR_IN_OUT RD ANY END_VAR BEGIN END_FUNCTION_BLOCK ...

Page 1424: ...I BYTE Area address 0 NCK variables 2 Channel variables Unit I BYTE NCK area Unit 1 Channel area Channel no Index1 I INT Field index 1 of variable Variable has the value 0 if no field index is used Index2 I INT Field index 2 of variable Variable has the value 0 if no field index is used CnvtToken I BOOL Activate generation of a variable token VarToken I ANY DBName VarName Address to a 10byte token...

Page 1425: ... full 0 7 Option not set BP parameter NCKomm is not set 0 8 Incorrect target area SD RD may not be local data 0 9 Transmission occupied Job must be repeated 0 10 Error in addressing Unit contains value 0 0 11 Address of variable invalid Check Addr or variable name area unit 1 8 13 0x0d ANY data reference incorrect String NcVar data required has not been parameterized 0 15 0x0f String more than 32 ...

Page 1426: ...r has occurred error code in output parameter State Call example Reading of a GUD variable with the name GUDVAR1 as an integer variable see also table in FB 2 Assignment of NC data type in SIMATIC data type Call and parameterization of FB 5 with instance DB 111 DATA_BLOCK DB GUDVAR Assignment to symbol table STRUCT GUDVar1 STRING 32 GUDVAR1 Name is defined by user GUDVar1T STRUCT SYNTAX_ID BYTE ar...

Page 1427: ...one completed message R M 100 0 Terminate job U I 7 6 Manual error acknowledgment U M 102 0 Error pending R M 100 0 Terminate job CALL FB 5 DB 111 Req M 100 0 Starting edge for reading Addr GUDVAR GUDVar1 Area B 16 2 Channel variable Unit B 16 1 Channel 1 Index1 0 No field index Index2 0 No field index CnvtToken TRUE Conversion into 10 byte token VarToken GUDVAR GUDVar1T Error M102 0 Done M100 1 S...

Page 1428: ...f WVar1 and subsequent parameters These are defined in FB 7 from WVar1 to WVar16 FB 4 in the VAR_INPUT from WVar1 to WVar10 All other parameters are identical to FB 4 This PI server can be used for all PI services previously implemented with FB 4 In addition the PI services listed below can only be executed with FB 7 Declaration of the function FUNCTION_BLOCK FB 7 Var_INPUT Req BOOL PIService ANY ...

Page 1429: ... strings specification according to selected PI service WVar1 to WVar10 I WORD 1 Integer or word variables Specification according to selected PI service Error A BOOL Negative acknowledgment of job or execution of job impossible Done A BOOL Job successfully executed State A WORD See error identifiers Overview Additional PI services supplementary to the FB 4 PI services The following section provid...

Page 1430: ...From LocationNumber_From MagazineNumber_To LocationNumber_To MagazinNu mber_From LocationNu mber_From MagazineN umber_To LocationNu mber_To Search area WVar1 WVar2 WVar3 WVar4 M1 P1 M1 P1 Only location P1 in magazine M1 is checked M1 P1 M2 P2 Locations starting at magazine M1 location P1 up to magazine M2 location P2 are searched M1 1 M1 1 All locations in magazine M1 and no others are searched M1...

Page 1431: ...gazineNumber_To Magazine number of magazine at which search must end WVar4 INT LocationNumber_To Location number of location in magazine MagazineNumber_To at which search must end WVar5 INT MagazineNumber_Ref WVar6 INT LocationNumber_Ref WVar7 INT 0 1 7 Number of required half locations to left WVar8 INT 0 1 7 Number of required half locations to right WVar9 INT 0 1 7 Number of required half locat...

Page 1432: ... are also performed by the block for control unit switchover Tabulated overview of functions Basic function Significance HMI queuing HMI wants to go online with an NCU HMI coming HMI is connecting to an NCU HMI going HMI is disconnecting from an NCU Forced break HMI must break connection with an NCU Operating focus changeover to server mode Change operating focus from one NCU to the other Active p...

Page 1433: ...rameters MCP1BusAdr 255 address of 1st MCP and MCP1STOP TRUE deactivate 1st MCP must be set when FB1 is called in OB100 Approvals When one MCP is switched over to another any active feed or axis enables will be retained Note Keys actuated at the moment of switchover remain operative until the new MCP is activated by the HMI which is subsequently activated The override settings for feedrate and spi...

Page 1434: ..._VAR Description of formal parameters The table below lists all formal parameters of the M N function Formal parameters of M N function Signal Type Type Remark Ack I BOOL Acknowledge interrupts OPMixedMode I BOOL Mixed operation deactivated for OP without M N capability ActivEnable I BOOL Function is not supported Control panel switchover Interlocking via MMCx_SHIFT_LOCK in DB 19 MCPEnable I BOOL ...

Page 1435: ...ters is set in this way and need not be specially assigned when the function is called Interrupts errors The output parameters Alarm1 to Alarm6 and Report exist as information in the PLC and are output in the event of M N errors visualized on the HMI by the appearance of alarms 410900 410906 If execution of an HMI function has failed and an appropriate error message cannot be displayed status para...

Page 1436: ...BB 4 Feed override interface T EB 28 Buffer storage freely assignable input or memory byte wei1 U M 100 2 Switchover takes place O DB10 DBX 104 0 MCP1Ready JCN smth2 U DB10 DBX 104 0 MCP1Ready FP M 100 1 Edge trigger flag 2 JC smth2 U M 100 2 Switchover takes place R M 100 2 Reset auxiliary flag 1 JC smth2 U M 100 3 Comparison has taken place SPB MCP Call MCP program Route the stored override to t...

Page 1437: ... outputs are activated again without delay if inputs In1 to In3 take the value 1 and a positive edge change is detected at one of the acknowledgement inputs Ack1 Ack2 To bring the outputs to their basic setting values 0 after booting the parameter FirstRun must be configured as follows The parameter FirstRun must be switched to the value TRUE via a retentive data memory bit bit in data block on th...

Page 1438: ...OL TRUE Input 3 Ackn1 BOOL Ack 1 signal Ackn2 BOOL Ack 2 signal TimeValue1 TIME T 0ms TimeValue for output 1 TimeValue2 TIME T 0ms TimeValue for output 2 TimeValue3 TIME T 0ms TimeValue for output 3 END_VAR VAR_OUTPUT Out0 BOOL Output without delay Out1 BOOL Delayed output to false by timer 1 Out2 BOOL Delayed output to false by timer 2 Out3 BOOL Delayed output to false by timer 3 END_VAR VAR_INOU...

Page 1439: ...nowledge input 1 Ackn2 I BOOL Acknowledge input 2 TimeValue1 I TIME Time value 1 for OFF delay TimeValue2 I TIME Time value 2 for OFF delay TimeValue3 I TIME Time value 3 for OFF delay Out0 A BOOL Output instantaneous no delay Out1 A BOOL Output delayed by TimeValue1 Out2 A BOOL Output delayed by TimeValue2 Out3 A BOOL Output delayed by TimeValue3 FirstRun I O BOOL Activation of initial state Note...

Page 1440: ...he brake test the enable signals of the parameterized axis must be set to enable e g the controller inhibit feed enable signals Furthermore the signal to the axis spindle DB31 DBX28 7 PLC controls axis is to be set to 1 by the user program for the entire duration of the test Before activating the signal DB31 DBX28 7 PLC controls axis the axis is to be switched as neutral axis e g the DB31 DBX8 0 8...

Page 1441: ... Function_BLOCK FB 11 VAR_INPUT Start BOOL Start of brake test Ack BOOL Acknowledge error Bclosed BOOL Brake closed input single channel PLC Axis INT Testing axis no TimerNo TIMER Timer from user TV_BTactiv S5TIME TimeValue brake test active TV_Bclose S5TIM TimeValue close brake TV_FeedCommand S5TIME TimeValue force FeedCommand TV_FXSreached S5TIME TimeValue fixed stop reached TV_FXShold S5TIME Ti...

Page 1442: ...ake MoveAxis A BOOL Request initiate traversing motion Done A BOOL Test successfully completed Error A BOOL Error has occurred State A BYTE Error status Fault IDs State Significance 0 No error 1 Start conditions not fulfilled e g the axis is not in closed loop control brake closed axis inhibited 2 When the brake test is selected no NC feedback in the brake test active signal 3 No Brake applied che...

Page 1443: ...0 1 R M GND 110 6 S M GND 110 5 Next step R DBX 8 4 S DBX 28 7 Request PLC monitored axis U DBX 63 1 Checkback signal axis monitored by PLC U M GND 110 5 FP M GND 110 2 R M GND 110 5 S M GND 111 0 Start brake test for FB CALL FB 11 DB 211 Brake test block Start M 111 0 Start brake test Ack I 3 7 Acknowledge error with RESET key Bclosed I 54 0 Checkback message Close brake activated Axis 3 Axis num...

Page 1444: ...ccurred FP M GND 110 3 R DBX 28 7 Request PLC monitored axis AN DBX 63 1 Checkback signal axis monitored by PLC U M GND 111 0 Start brake test for FB U M GND 110 7 Brake test running FP M GND 110 4 R M GND 111 0 Start brake test for FB R M GND 110 7 Brake test running CALL SpinCtrl Traverse Z axis Start M 111 2 Start traversing motion Stop FALSE Funct B 16 5 Mode Axis mode Mode B 16 1 Procedure In...

Page 1445: ... diagnostics FB is called several times in the same OB 1 cycle the NewCycle parameter must be set to FALSE for the second and subsequent calls This prevents a new number of OB 1 cycles from being calculated The ring buffer specified by the user must have an ARRAY structure specified as in the source code The array can have any number of elements A size of 250 elements is recommended The ClearBuf p...

Page 1446: ...0 No function 1 Signal recorder 2 Data trigger Signal_1 BOOL Start of brake test Signal_2 BOOL Signal_3 BOOL Signal_4 BOOL Signal_5 BOOL Signal_6 BOOL Signal_7 BOOL Signal_8 BOOL NewCycle BOOL Var1 BYTE Var2 INT VAR INT BufDB INT ClearBuf BOOL DataAdr POINTER Area pointer to testing word TestVal WORD Value for triggering AndMask WORD AND mask to the testing word END_VAR VAR_OUTPUT TestIsTrue BOOL ...

Page 1447: ...uffer TITLE Ring buffer DB for FB 29 VERSION 1 0 STRUCT Field ARRAY 0 249 OF STRUCT can be any size of this struct Cycle INT Delta cycle to last storage in buffer Signal_1 BOOL Signal names same as FB 29 Signal_2 BOOL Signal_3 BOOL Signal_4 BOOL Signal_5 BOOL Signal_6 BOOL Signal_7 BOOL Signal_8 BOOL Var1 BYTE Var2 WORD Var3 WORD END_STRUCT END_STRUCT BEGIN END_DATA_BLOCK ...

Page 1448: ...te 1 Signal recorder 2 Data trigger Parameters for function 1 Signal_1 to Signal_8 I BOOL Bit signals checked for change NewCycle I BOOL See the Signal recorder description above Var1 I BYTE Additional value Var2 I INT Additional value VAR I INT Additional value BufDB I INT Ring buffer DB no ClearBuf I BOOL Delete ring buffer DB and reset pointer BufAddr BufAddr I O INT Target area for read data P...

Page 1449: ...iagnostics FB with parameters in the user program In function 1 it is advisable to clear the ring buffer with the ClearBuf parameter When the recording phase with function 1 is completed read out the ring buffer DB in STEP7 with the function opening the data block in the data view The content of the ring buffer DB can now be analyzed Call example FUNCTION FC 99 VOID TITLE VERSION 0 0 BEGIN NETWORK...

Page 1450: ...gram must be executed before the user program It is therefore called first in OB 1 The following example contains the standard declarations for OB 1 and the calls for the basic program FC2 the transfer of the MCP signals FC19 and the acquisition of error and operating messages FC10 ORGANIZATION_BLOCK OB 1 VAR_TEMP OB1_EV_CLASS BYTE OB1_SCAN_1 BYTE OB1_PRIORITY BYTE OB1_OB_NUMBR BYTE OB1_RESERVED_1...

Page 1451: ...he application to issue a read disable to the NC The G Functions are evaluated immediately and passed to the application interface NC process interrupts If the interrupt is triggered by the NC possible in each IPO cycle a bit in the local data of OB 40 GP_IRFromNCK is set by the basic program when the FB 1 parameter UserIR TRUE This data is not set on other events process interrupts through I Os T...

Page 1452: ... channel The change signals and function value are available to the user in the associated channel DB The change signal for this interruptdriven function is reset to zero in the cyclic basic program section after the execution of at least one full OB1 cycle max approx two OB1 cycles Tool change With the tool management option the tool change command for revolver and the tool change in the spindle ...

Page 1453: ...B 40 VAR_TEMP OB40_EV_CLASS BYTE OB40_STRT_INF BYTE OB40_PRIORITY BYTE OB40_OB_NUMBR BYTE OB40_RESERVED_1 BYTE OB40_MDL_ID BYTE OB40_MDL_ADDR INT OB40_POINT_ADDR DWORD OB40_DATE_TIME DATE_AND_TIME Assigned to basic program GP_IRFromNCK BOOL Interrupt by NCK for user GP_TM BOOL Tool management GP_InPosition ARRAY 1 3 OF BOOL Axis oriented for positioning Indexing axes spindles GP_AuxFunction ARRAY ...

Page 1454: ...B 1 must be connected to the DP1 Bus Declaration FUNCTION FC 5 VOID VAR_INPUT PlcStop BOOL TRUE END_VAR Call example As far as timing is concerned the basic program can be executed after other user programs This is advisable since the FC5 circuitry will place the PLC in Stop mode This example contains the standard declarations for OB 82 and OB 86 and the call of the basic program block ORGANIZATIO...

Page 1455: ...OOL OB82_PROC_FLT BOOL OB82_EPROM_FLT BOOL OB82_RAM_FLT BOOL OB82_ADU_FLT BOOL OB82_FUSE_FLT BOOL OB82_HW_INTR_FLT BOOL OB82_RESERVED_3 BOOL OB82_DATE_TIME DATE_AND_TIME END_VAR BEGIN CALL FC 5 PlcStop FALSE END_ORGANIZATION_BLOCK ORGANIZATION_BLOCK OB 86 VAR_TEMP OB86_EV_CLASS BYTE OB86_FLT_ID BYTE OB86_PRIORITY BYTE OB86_OB_NUMBR BYTE OB86_RESERVED_1 BYTE OB86_RESERVED_2 BYTE OB86_MDL_ADDR WORD ...

Page 1456: ...on Output parameter Ready is set to the value TRUE when the job has been executed correctly The user must then set the Start parameter to FALSE or not call the block again If the Ready parameter is set to FALSE the error code in the Error parameter must be interpreted If the error code 0 then this job must be repeated in the next PLC cycle e g Start remains set to TRUE This means that the transfer...

Page 1457: ...tion in the sequence In this case the following parameterization of the asynchronous transfer is needed via FC 8 TaskIdent 4 TaskIdentNo channel NewToolMag Magazine number of the revolver NewToolLoc Original location of the tool OldToolMag Magazine no buffer storage spindle 9998 OldToolLoc Buffer storage number of the spindle Status 1 This action also causes the same T command to be resent to the ...

Page 1458: ...k 0 No error has occurred 1 No revolver present 2 Illegal revolver number in parameter ChgdRevNo 3 Illegal job interface active signal for selected revolver FALSE Pulse diagram 5HDG 6WDUW UURU 1 Activation of function by means of a positive edge 2 Positive acknowledgment Tool management has been transferred 3 Reset function activation after receipt of acknowledgment 4 Signal change using FC 5 This...

Page 1459: ...management transfer of block for revolver Start m 20 5 Start 1 transfer trigger ChgdRevNo DB61 DBB 1 Ready m 20 6 Error DB61 DBW 12 u m 20 6 Poll ready r m 20 5 Reset start spb m001 Jumps if everything OK l db61 dbw 12 Error information ow w 16 0 Evaluate error JC error Jumps to troubleshooting if 0 m001 Start of another program error r m 20 5 Reset start if an error has occurred ...

Page 1460: ... parameter in the following text are also transmitted for this transfer function Note FC8 informs the NCK of the current positions of the old tool The NCK knows where the old and the new tool have been located until the position change In the case of a transfer without a socalled old tool e g on loading the value 0 is assigned to parameters OldToolMag OldToolLoc Block FC TM_TRANS may be started on...

Page 1461: ...only reserved if the tool has been transported from a real magazine to a buffer storage A relevant NC channel must be parameterized in the TaskIdentNo parameter The previous position of the tool is specified in parameters OldToolMag OldToolLoc the current position of the tool is specified in parameters NewToolMag NewToolLoc Status 1 must be specified With status 5 the specified tool remains at loc...

Page 1462: ...unction Manual 11 2006 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 Declaration of the function STL representation FUNCTION FC 8 VOID NAME TM_TRANS VAR_INPUT Start BOOL TaskIdent BYTE TaskIdentNo BYTE NewToolMag INT NewToolLoc INT OldToolMag INT OldToolLoc INT Status INT END_VAR VAR_OUTPUT Ready BOOL Error INT END_VAR BEGIN END_FUNCTION ...

Page 1463: ... g B 16 12 1st interface 2nd channel NewToolMag I INT 1 0 Current magazine number of new tool 1 Tool remains at its location NewToolLoc any value Only permissible if TaskIdent 2 NewToolLoc I INT 0 to max location number Current location number of new tool OldToolMag I INT 1 0 Current magazine number of new tool 1 Tool remains at its location OldToolLoc any value Only permissible if TaskIdent 2 Old...

Page 1464: ...rmally the specified target position of the tools of the associated WZV interface see also Explanations of the formal parameters 1 In the case of loading unloading reloading the tool has arrived at the required target address If the bit in the interface in DB 71 DBX n 0 3 position at loading point is enabled status 1 cannot be used for the function termination Status 5 must be used for correct ter...

Page 1465: ...er the specified magazine position in the next command But this is done only when this position is free Parameters NewToolMag and NewToolLoc are not taken into account Status 5 The operation is complete The new tool is in the position specified in parameters NewToolMag NewToolLoc In this case the specified tool is not really in this position but is still in the same magazine location However this ...

Page 1466: ...ject the new tool e g in case of MD20310 MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK bit 4 1 for the possibility request changed parameter from PLC once again The tool positions have remained unchanged This status is thus necessary when the processing is to be continued in the NCK without an unnecessary stop References FBW Description of Functions Tool Management Status 104 The new tool is in the position specified i...

Page 1467: ...his interface remains at 1 Further processing is required by the user program in the PLC e g continuation of magazine positioning This item of status information is generally used to transfer changes in position of one or both tools while the operation is still in progress Call example CALL FC 8 Tool management transfer block Start m 20 5 Start 1 transfer trigger TaskIdent DB61 DBB 0 TaskIdentNo D...

Page 1468: ...FC 9s within one PLC cycle the ASUBs are started in the sequence in which they are called The start parameter must be set to logic 0 by the user once the ASUB has been terminated Done or if an error has occurred For the purpose of job processing every FC ASUB requires its own WORD parameter Ref from the global user memory area This parameter is for internal use only and must not be changed by the ...

Page 1469: ...Error BOOL StartErr BOOL END_VAR VAR_IN_OUT Ref WORD END_VAR Description of formal parameters The table below lists all formal parameters of the ASUB function Signal Type Type Value range Remark Start I BOOL ChanNo I INT 1 10 No of the NC channel IntNo I INT 1 8 Interrupt No Active A BOOL 1 Active Done A BOOL 1 ASUB completed Error A BOOL 1 Interrupt switched off StartErr A BOOL 1 Interrupt number...

Page 1470: ...ation after receipt of acknowledgment 5 Signal change using FC 6 Not permitted If function activation is reset prior to receipt of acknowledgment the output signals are not updated without the operational sequence of the activated function being affected 7 Negative acknowledgment Error has occurred Call example CALL FC 9 Start an asynchronous subprogram in channel 1 interrupt number 1 Start I 45 7...

Page 1471: ...channel interfaces The group signals are transferred to the user interface directly from the status information in DB 2 irrespective of an interrupt acknowledgment 1 If parameter ToUserIF is set to FALSE signals are not transferred to the user interface In this case the user must take measures in his PLC program to ensure that these signals are influenced in the interface 2 If parameter ToUserIF i...

Page 1472: ...DB of the PLC user interface Note In DB 2 a 1 signal must be present for several OB1 cycles to ensure that a message can also be displayed on the HMI There is an upper limit for the number of interrupts and messages that can be pending at the same time This upper limit is dependent on the PLC CPU On PLC 317 2DP the upper limit for messages pending simultaneously is 60 Declaration of the function S...

Page 1473: ...e channel DBs This mechanism permits auxiliary functions to be processed on a jobdriven basis FC AUXFU is supplied as a compiled empty block in the basic program In this case the basic program supplies parameter Chan with the channel number The PLC user knows which channel has new auxiliary functions available The new auxiliary functions can be determined by the auxiliary function change signals i...

Page 1474: ...f 32 characters is therefore required for this string when the data block is created Variable components within this string can be inserted by means of the optional numerical converter For the numeric converter the parameter Convert must be set to TRUE The variable to be displayed is referenced via the pointer Addr Parameter DataType contains the format description of this parameter see parameter ...

Page 1475: ...input signal from the HHU to the PLC Acknowledgment digital display DB m 5 7 for parameter Convert In this way it can be ensured that the most recent numerical information is displayed Only the string is processed if the value 0 is entered in the Row parameter The function is therefore not linked to the display control function for BHG HT2 and can be used as a conversion routine in a string If Row...

Page 1476: ... conversion Addr I Pointer Points to the variable to be converted DataType I BYTE 1 8 B 16 13 Data type of variable 1 BOOL 1 character 2 BYTE 3 characters 3 CHAR 1 character 4 WORD 5 characters 5 INT 6 characters 6 DWORD 7 characters 7 DINT 8 characters 8 REAL 9 characters see parameter Digits B 16 13 String up to 32 characters Addr must be a pointer to a STRING StringAddr I INT 1 32 Address withi...

Page 1477: ...0 9999999 DINT 9999999 to 9999999 REAL Digits 1 999999 9 to 999999 9 REAL Digits 2 99999 99 to 99999 99 REAL Digits 3 9999 999 to 9999 999 REAL Digits 4 999 9999 to 999 9999 Call example CALL FC 13 Row MB 26 ChrArray strdat disp DB with name strdat in the symbol table Data element disp is declared as String 32 and completely assigned with sign Convert M 90 1 Addr P M 20 0 Number to be converted Da...

Page 1478: ...B31 DBX21 5 Motor selection done in the related axis DB and register the changeover process via A with DB31 DBX21 3 Motor selection Step 2 As soon as the return message NST DB31 DBX93 7 Pulse enabled and the acknowledgment of the announced motor selection from the drive have appeared the currently energized contactor drops out Step 3 The other contactor is energized after the time period set by th...

Page 1479: ...s initiates a process which contains closed loop control sequences Since the closed loop control system supports automatic star delta changeover certain restrictions should be noted Owing to the automatic deactivation of the pulse in the drive simultaneously with the NST DB31 DBX93 7 Pulse enabled the NST DB31 DBX61 7 current regulator active and DB31 DBX61 6 speed regulator active are deactivated...

Page 1480: ...f formal parameters The table below lists all formal parameters of the YDelta function Signal Type Type Value range Remark YDelta I BOOL star delta The changeover edge of the signal initiates the changeover operation SpindleIFNo I INT 1 Number of the axis interface declared as a spindle TimeVal I S5time 0 Switchover time TimerNo I INT 10 Timer for programming the wait time Y Q BOOL Energizing of s...

Page 1481: ...be able to control an axis or spindle via the PLC it must be activated for the PLC This can for example be achieved by calling the FC SpinCtrl with activation of the Start or Stop parameter In this case the FC SpinCtrl requests control over the spindle axis from the NC The NC feeds back the status of this spindle axis in byte 68 in the associated spindle axis interface DB 31 see interface lists On...

Page 1482: ...ation For the function Rotate spindle and also for Oscillate spindle the significance of the parameter InPos is defined as follows Setpoint speed is output function started without errors Reaching the desired spindle speed must be evaluated via the spindle interface Simultaneity Several axes can be traversed simultaneously or subject to a delay by FC 18 blocks The upper limit is defined by the max...

Page 1483: ... positioning error 1 State Error code 2 Rotate spindle The following signals are relevant Start Initiation signal for start rotation Stop Initiation signal for stop rotation Funct 2 Rotate spindle Positioning mode 5 direction of rotation M4 Mode Positioning mode 5 direction of rotation M3 AxisNo Number of machine axis FRate Spindle speed InPos Function has started without an error Error With posit...

Page 1484: ...th gear stage change M43 Pos 4 Oscillatio n Pos 4 Oscillation with gear stage change M44 Pos 5 Oscillatio n Pos 5 Oscillation with gear stage change M45 4 Traverse indexing axis The following signals are relevant Start Initiation signal Funct 4 Indexing axis Note With Funct 4 Indexing axis The modulo conversion can be compared with approaching the indexing position via POS AX CIC value in the part...

Page 1485: ...gnal for stop rotation Funct 9 Rotate spindle with gear stage selection Mode Positioning mode 5 direction of rotation M4 Positioning mode 5 direction of rotation M3 AxisNo Number of machine axis FRate Spindle speed InPos Setpoint speed is output Error With positioning error 1 State Error code 10 11 Rotate spindle with constant cutting rate The Constant cutting rate function must be activated by th...

Page 1486: ...values Remark Start I BOOL Start spindle control from PLC Stop I BOOL Stop spindle control from PLC Funct I BYTE 1 to B 16 0B 1 Position spindle 2 Rotate spindle 3 Oscillate spindle 4 Indexing axis 5 Positioning axis metric 6 Positioning axis inch 7 PosAxis metric with handwheel override 8 PosAxis inch with handwheel override 9 Rotate spindle with automatic gear stage selection A Rotate spindle wi...

Page 1487: ...ate I REAL 0 1469368 I 38 to 0 1701412 I 39 Rotary axis and spindle rev min See under table containing info about FRate InPos Q BOOL 1 Position reached or function executed Error A BOOL 1 error State Q BYTE 0 to 255 Error code FRate The feed rate in FC 18 can also be specified as 1 Cutting rate with unit m min or feet min 2 Constant grinding wheel surface speed in m s or feet s These alternative v...

Page 1488: ...0 B 16 64 Corresponds to interrupt number 16830 105 B 16 69 Corresponds to interrupt number 16770 106 B 16 6a Corresponds to interrupt number 22052 107 B 16 6b Corresponds to interrupt number 22051 108 B 16 6c Corresponds to interrupt number 22050 109 B 16 6d Corresponds to interrupt number 22055 110 B 16 6e Velocity speed is negative 111 B 16 6f Setpoint speed is zero 112 B 16 70 Invalid gear sta...

Page 1489: ...signal edge with start or stop 2 Positive acknowledgment Function executed Position reached 3 Reset function activation after receipt of acknowledgment 4 Signal change using FC Timing diagram fault scenario 6WDUW UU UURU 6WDUW Q3RV 1 Activation of function by means of a positive signal edge with start or stop 2 Negative acknowledgment Error has occurred 3 Reset function activation after receipt of...

Page 1490: ...t with T12 start U M113 0 Error U I 6 4 Key T12 R M 100 0 Start Start with T13 U I 6 3 Key T13 AN F 112 0 Restart only when InPos or Error 0 AN F 113 0 S M 100 0 CALL FC 18 Start M100 0 Stop FALSE Funct B 16 1 Position spindle Mode B 16 2 Shortest path AxisNo 5 Pos MD104 FRate MD108 InPos M112 0 Error M113 0 State MB114 2 Start spindle rotation CALL FC 18 Start M100 0 Stop FALSE Funct B 16q Rotate...

Page 1491: ...Rate MD108 InPos M112 0 Error M113 0 State MB114 4 Traverse indexing axis CALL FC 18 Start M100 0 Stop FALSE Not used Funct B 16 4 Traverse indexing axis Mode B 16 0 Position absolutely AxisNo 4 Pos MD104 Default setting in REAL 1 0 2 0 FRate MD108 InPos M112 0 Error M113 0 State MB114 5 Position axes CALL FC 18 Start M100 0 Stop FALSE Not used Funct B 16 5 Position axes Mode B 16 1 Position incre...

Page 1492: ...erred to the NC channel in addition to the Rapid traverse override DBB 5 interface byte if the Feed override for rapid traverse effective HMI signal is set exception Switch setting Zero Rapid traverse override effective is also set with this HMI signal Machine functions for INC and axis travel keys When the MCS is selected the signals are transferred to the interface of the selected machine axis W...

Page 1493: ...f axis selections with identical assignments on two MCPs Flexible axis configuration It is possible to be flexible in the assignment of axis selections or direction keys for machine axis numbers Better support is now provided by the MCP blocks for the use of two MCPs which are to run in parallel in particular for an application using two channels and two mode groups Note that the axis numbers are ...

Page 1494: ...serve free key on MCP Evaluate this key as a flipflop Evaluate the flipflop output as pos and neg edge For pos edge write one set of axis numbers in the axis table DB10 and switch on LED via this key For neg edge write one set of axis numbers in the axis table DB10 and switch on LED via this key Declaration of the function FUNCTION FC 19 VOID NAME MCP_IFM VAR_INPUT BAGNo BYTE ChanNo BYTE SpindleIF...

Page 1495: ...BYTE 0 B 16 0A Channel no for the channel signals SpindleIFNo I BYTE 0 31 B 16 1F Number of the axis interface declared as a spindle FeedHold A BOOL Feed stop from MCP modal SpindleHold A BOOL Spindle stop from MCP modal MCP selection signals to the user interface Key operated switch Source MCP Switch Destination Interface DB Position 0 DB10 DBX56 4 Position 1 DB10 DBX56 5 Position 2 DB10 DBX56 6 ...

Page 1496: ...ide DB21 DBX12 5 Direction key DB21 DBX16 7 Direction key DB21 DBX16 6 Rapid traverse override DB21 DBX16 5 Direction key DB21 DBX20 7 Direction key DB21 DBX20 6 Rapid traverse override DB21 DBX20 5 Source MCP Key Destination Interface DB all axis DBs Direction key DB31 DBX4 7 Direction key DB31 DBX4 6 Rapid traverse override DB31 DBX4 5 Override Source MCP Switch Destination Interface DB paramete...

Page 1497: ...MCP Keys Destination FC output parameters Feed stop Feed enable Parameter FeedHold latched LEDs are driven Spindle stop Spindle enable Parameter SpindleHold latched LEDs are driven Checkback signals from user interface for controlling displays Operating modes and machine functions Destination MCP LED Source Interface DB parameter BAGNo AUTOMATIC DB11 DBX6 0 MDI DB11 DBX6 1 JOG DB11 DBX6 2 REPOS DB...

Page 1498: ...nnel no 1 SpindleIFNo B 16 4 Spindle interface number 4 FeedHold m22 0 Feed stop signal modal SpindleHold db2 dbx151 0 Spindle stop modal in message DB With these parameter settings the signals are sent to the 1st mode group the 1st channel and all axes In addition the spindle override is transferred to the 4th axis spindle interface The feed hold signal is passed to bit memory 22 0 and the spindl...

Page 1499: ...hange Description of functions When the Transfer block is called data are exchanged between the PLC and NCK according to the selected function code Data are transferred as soon as FC 21 is called not only at the start of the cycle The Enable signal activates the block FC 21 is processed only when Enable 1 The following functions for the data exchange between PLC and NCK are supported 1 Signal sync...

Page 1500: ...ions from channel 3 Read data 4 Write data 5 Control signals to channel 6 7 Control signals to axis S7Var I ANY S7 data storage area Depends on Funct IVAR1 I INT 0 Depends on Funct IVAR2 I INT 1 Depends on Funct Error A BOOL ErrCode A INT Depends on Funct Functions 1 Signals for synchronized actions to channel 2 Signals for synchronized actions from channel Synchronized actions can be disabled or ...

Page 1501: ...AR1 I INT 1 MaxChannel Channel number Error A BOOL ErrCode A INT 1 Funct invalid 10 Channel no invalid Call example FUNCTION FC 100 VOID VAR_TEMP myAny ANY END_VAR BEGIN NETWORK Deactivate synchronized actions with ID3 ID10 and ID31 in NC channel 1 SYAK TO DB21 SET S DBX300 2 ID3 S DBX301 1 ID10 S DBX303 6 ID31 L B 16 1 T MB11 SPA TRAN Synchronized actions from NCK channel SYVK L B 16 2 T MB11 TRA...

Page 1502: ... data consistency is only ensured for 1 and 2 byte access in the NCK and in the PLC For the 2 byte consistency this is true only for the data type WORD or INT but not for the data type BYTE In the case of longer data types or transfer of fields which should be transferred consistently a semaphore byte must be programmed in parameter IVAR2 that can be used by FC 21 to determine the validity or cons...

Page 1503: ...basic program solution line P3 sl Function Manual 11 2006 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 229 6HPDSKRUH 6HPDSKRUH 6HPDSKRUH 6HPDSKRUH UU RGH UURU UU RGH UURU XQFW UU RGH UURU UU RGH UURU XQFW M Q M Q ZULWH 7UDQVIHU GDWD IURP 3 WR 1 7UDQVIHU GDWD IURP 1 WR 3 UHDG Basic structure in NCK ...

Page 1504: ...owing signals are relevant Signal Type Type Value range Remark Enable I BOOL FC 21 active Funct I BYTE 3 4 3 Read data 4 Write data S7Var I ANY S7 data area except local data Source destination data storage area IVAR1 I INT 0 1023 Position offset IVAR2 I INT 1 1023 Semaphore byte Transfer without semaphore 1 Error A BOOL ErrCode A INT 20 Alignment error 21 Illegal position offset 22 Illegal semaph...

Page 1505: ...CALL FC 21 Enable M 10 0 if TRUE FC 21 active Funct B 16 3 Read data S7Var P M 100 0 DWORD 1 IVAR1 4 IVAR2 0 Error M 10 1 ErrCode MW12 UN M10 1 Enable while 1 until value is read R F10 0 Examples of NCK programming from synchronized actions Data transfer from NC to PLC with data written via synchronized actions Byte 0 serves as the semaphore ID 1 WHENEVER A_DBB 0 0 DO A_DBR 4 AA_IM X A_DBB 0 1 Dat...

Page 1506: ...ble outside the PLC cycle The following signals are relevant Signal Type Type Value range Remark Enable I BOOL 1 FC 21 active Funct I BYTE 5 5 Control signals to channel S7Var I ANY S7 data storage area Not used IVAR1 I INT 1 Max channel Channel number Error A BOOL ErrCode A INT 1 Funct invalid 10 Channel no invalid 6 Update control signals to axes The purpose of function 6 is to transmit importan...

Page 1507: ... all output parameters are updated cyclically Changes can be made to input parameters e g position values in subsequent PLC cycles The output signals are undefined when the start signal is at 0 level In the case of direction selection with special positioning input Offset 0 a new setpoint position is calculated from the setpoint and special positions and the number of magazine locations according ...

Page 1508: ...BOOL Diff INT Error BOOL END_VAR BEGIN END_FUNCTION Description of formal parameters The table below shows all formal parameters of the TM_DIR function Signal Type Type Range of values Remark MagNo I INT 1 Magazine number ReqPos I INT 1 Setpoint location ActPos I INT 1 Actual location Offset I BYTE 0 Offset for special positioning Start I BOOL Start of calculation Cw A BOOL 1 Move magazine clockwi...

Page 1509: ...ission of MCP signals to interface Description of Functions With FC MCP_IFM2 M variant slim machine control panel e g MCP 310 the following are transferred from the machine control panel MCP to the corresponding signals of the NCK PLC interface Mode groups Axis selections WCS MCS switchover Traversing keys Overrides or override simulation signals In the basic program FC 2 handwheel selections mode...

Page 1510: ...red to the interface but output modally as a FeedHold or SpindleHold signal The user can link these signals to other signals leading to a feed or spindle stop this can be implemented e g using the appropriate input signals in FC 10 AL_MSG The associated LEDs are activated at the same time The spindle direction is not switched directly either but made available as output parameter SpindleDir permit...

Page 1511: ... in the parameterized mode group number of the MCP block in the axis tables of the relevant MCP For this flexibility there are tables for axis numbers in DB 10 For the 1 Machine control panel MCP the table starts from the byte 8 symbolic name MCP1AxisTbl 1 22 and for the 2 Machine control panel MCP the table starts from the byte 32 symbolic name MCP2AxisTbl 1 22 for the second MCP The machine axis...

Page 1512: ...ers The table below shows all formal parameters of the MCP_IFM2 function Signal Type Type Range of values Remark BAGNo I BYTE 0 b 16 0A and b 16 10 b 16 1A No of mode group to which the mode signals are transferred BAGNo b 16 10 means access to the second machine control panel ChanNo I BYTE 0 B 16 0A Channel no for the channel signals SpindleIFNo I BYTE 0 31 B 16 1F Number of the axis interface de...

Page 1513: ...memory 22 0 and the spindle stop signal to data block DB2 data bit 151 0 The spindle direction feedback signal supplied via parameter SpindleDir can be used as a direction input for an additional FC 18 call 2 12 26 FC 25 MCP_IFT transfer of MCP OP signals to interface Description of Functions With the FC MCP_IFM M variant from the machine control panel a range of 19 inch e g MCP 483 are transferre...

Page 1514: ... or spindle stop this can be implemented e g using the appropriate input signals in FC 10 AL_MSG The associated LEDs are activated at the same time If the machine control panel fails the signals it outputs are preset to zero this also applies to FeedHold and SpindleHold output signals Multiple calls of FC 25 or FC 19 FC 24 FC 26 are permitted in a single PLC cycle In this case the first call in th...

Page 1515: ... table Checks are not made to find impermissible axis numbers meaning that false entries can lead to a PLC Stop The restriction of the possible number of axes at FC 25 is done via the 0 values in the axis table The axis numbers can also be adapted dynamically Axis numbers may not be switched over while the axes are being traversed via the relevant direction keys The compatibility mode is preset wi...

Page 1516: ... 1 SpindleIFNo B 16 4 Spindle interface number 4 FeedHold m22 0 Feed stop signal modal SpindleHold db2 dbx151 0 Spindle stop modal in message data block With these parameter settings the signals are sent to the 1st mode group the 1st channel and all axes In addition the spindle override is transferred to the 4th axis spindle interface The feed hold signal is passed to bit memory 22 0 and the spind...

Page 1517: ...nsferred to the interface but output modally as a FeedHold or SpindleHold signal The user can link these signals to other signals leading to a feed or spindle stop this can be implemented e g using the appropriate input signals in FC 10 AL_MSG The associated LEDs are activated at the same time In the case of machine control panel failure the signals it supplies are set to zero Multiple calls of FC...

Page 1518: ...chine axis numbers must be entered byte by byte here It is permissible to enter a value of 0 in the axis table Checks are not made to find impermissible axis numbers meaning that false entries can lead to a PLC Stop The restriction of the number of axes at FC 26 is done via the 0 values in the axis table The axis numbers can also be adapted dynamically Axis numbers may not be switched over while t...

Page 1519: ...Type Range of values Remark BAGNo I BYTE 0 b 16 0A and b 16 10 b 16 1A No of mode group to which the mode signals are transferred BAGNo b 16 10 means access to the second machine control panel ChanNo I BYTE 0 B 16 0A Channel no for the channel signals 2 12 27 1 MCP selection signals to the user interface Operating modes and machine functions Source MCP Key Destination Interface DB parameter ModeGr...

Page 1520: ... DBX16 6 Rapid traverse override DB21 DBX16 5 Direction key DB21 DBX20 7 Direction key DB21 DBX20 6 Rapid traverse override DB21 DBX20 5 Source MCP Key Destination Interface DB 6 assigned axis DBs Direction key DB31 DBX4 7 Direction key DB31 DBX4 6 Rapid traverse override DB31 DBX4 5 Override Source MCP Setting Destination Interface DB parameter ChanNo Feedrate override DB21 DBB4 Source MCP Settin...

Page 1521: ...DB11 DBX7 0 WCS MCS output is operated through key actuation Call example CALL FC 26 Machine control panel of HT8 signals to interface BAGNo B 16 1 Mode group no 1 ChanNo B 16 1 Channel no 1 With these parameter settings the signals from the first parameterized machine control panel are sent to the 1st mode group the 1st channel and all axes 2 12 28 FC 19 FC 24 FC 25 FC 26 source code description ...

Page 1522: ...dual subtasks In the Input network various parameters are copied to local variables The machine control signals user data for input output area are also copied between locations using the various pointers in DB 7 gp_par These local variables are handled in the block for reasons of efficiency Some values are initialized for the startup MCS WCS switchover with edge evaluation axis selections directi...

Page 1523: ...tion has changed The bit string must be adjusted here 3 3 The branch destination list SPL must be expanded with new jump labels The new jump labels should be inserted in descending order before label m009 The selection information should be extended for the new jump labels as described for labels m009 and m008 The blocks are made available as STL sources if required But they do not match the curre...

Page 1524: ...24 M31 BOOL M signals M24 M31 DBX 198 0 7 M_Fkt_M32 M39 BOOL M signals M32 M39 DBX 199 0 7 M_Fkt_M40 M47 BOOL M signals M40 M47 DBX 200 0 7 M_Fkt_M48 M55 BOOL M signals M48 M55 DBX 201 0 7 M_Fkt_M56 M63 BOOL M signals M56 M63 DBX 202 0 7 M_Fkt_M64 M71 BOOL M signals M64 M71 DBX 203 0 7 M_Fkt_M72 M79 BOOL M signals M72 M79 DBX 204 0 7 M_Fkt_M80 M87 BOOL M signals M80 M87 DBX 205 0 7 M_Fkt_M88 M95 B...

Page 1525: ..._GR_1 BYTE 0 Active G function of group 1 DBB 209 G_FKT_GR_2 BYTE 0 Active G function of group 2 DBB 210 G_FKT_GR_3 BYTE 0 Active G function of group 3 DBB 211 G_FKT_GR_4 BYTE 0 Active G function of group 4 DBB 212 G_FKT_GR_5 BYTE 0 Active G function of group 5 DBB 213 G_FKT_GR_6 BYTE 0 Active G function of group 6 DBB 214 G_FKT_GR_7 BYTE 0 Active G function of group 7 DBB 215 G_FKT_GR_8 BYTE 0 Ac...

Page 1526: ...R_29 BYTE 0 Active G function of group 29 DBB 237 G_FKT_GR_30 BYTE 0 Active G function of group 30 DBB 238 G_FKT_GR_31 BYTE 0 Active G function of group 31 DBB 239 G_FKT_GR_32 BYTE 0 Active G function of group 32 DBB 240 G_FKT_GR_33 BYTE 0 Active G function of group 33 DBB 241 G_FKT_GR_34 BYTE 0 Active G function of group 34 DBB 242 G_FKT_GR_35 BYTE 0 Active G function of group 35 DBB 243 G_FKT_GR...

Page 1527: ...the HMI for each message number References LIS2 Lists Book2 see Section PLC Messages DB 2 IADC Commissioning Manual Alarm and Message texts Alarm text files for HMI Embedded or for HMI Advanced Note The number of user areas can be parameterized via FB 1 After the configuration has been modified FB 1 MsgUser DB 2 3 must be deleted 2 14 Programming tips with STEP 7 2 14 1 General General Some useful...

Page 1528: ...eed from one DB into another Code Comment DB xx AR1 is the source DI yy AR2 is the destination OPEN DB 100 Source DB LAR1 P 20 0 Source start address on data byte 20 OPEN DI 101 Destination DB LAR2 P 50 0 Destination start address on data byte 50 AR1 AR2 DB DI loaded beforehand L 4 Transfer 8 bytes M001 L DBW AR1 P 0 0 Copy word oriented T DIW AR2 P 0 0 AR1 P 2 0 AR2 P 2 0 TAK LOOP M001 2 14 3 ANY...

Page 1529: ...rrays that are addressed via the POINTER ANY This access operation is described at the end of the relevant program sequence in the example With data type ANY it is also possible to execute a check or branch when the variable is accessed based on the data type and the number of elements involved Example in FC if POINTER or ANY are present as parameters FUNCTION FC 99 VOID Comment VAR_INPUT Row BYTE...

Page 1530: ... of the POINTER or ANY can be accessed In this case the DB parameterized with POINTER or ANY is opened and the address offset stored as a crossarea pointer in address register AR1 thus allowing access to data elements of variables generally structures and arrays that are addressed via the POINTER ANY This access operation is described at the end of the relevant program sequence in the example With...

Page 1531: ... 6 0 Offset part of pointer LAR1 OPEN DB dbchr Open DB of variables L B AR1 P 0 0 Retrieve byte value using ANY 2 14 3 4 POINTER or ANY variable for transfer to FC or FB With version 1 or later of STEP7 it is possible to define a POINTER or an ANY in VAR_TEMP The following two examples show how an ANY can be supplied Example 1 Transfer ANY parameter via a selection list to another FB FC Several AN...

Page 1532: ...Any INT Addr1 ANY Observe predetermined order Addr2 ANY Addr3 ANY Addr4 ANY END_VAR VAR_TEMP dbchr WORD Number WORD type BYTE Temp_addr ANY END_VAR BEGIN NETWORK TITLE L WhichAny DEC 1 L P 10 0 10 bytes per ANY I LAR2 L P Addr1 AR2 Add ANY start addresses L P Temp_addr LAR1 Retrieve pointer from VAR_TEMP L DID AR2 P 0 0 Transfer pointer value to VAR_TEM T LD AR1 P 0 0 L DID AR2 P 4 0 T LD AR1 P 4 ...

Page 1533: ..._addr LAR1 Retrieve pointer from VAR_TEMP L B 16 10 ANY identifier T LB AR1 P 0 0 L Data type T LB AR1 P 1 0 L Amount T LW AR1 P 2 0 L DBNumber T LW AR1 P 4 0 L DBOffset SLD 3 Offset is a bit offset T LD AR1 P 6 0 CALL FB 101 DB 100 ANYPAR Temp_addr ANYPAR is data type ANY 2 14 4 Multiinstance DB With version 7 and higher of STEP 7 FBs might have a multiinstance capability i e they might incorpora...

Page 1534: ...d The contents of AR2 must be restored to their original state before an instance variable VAR_INPUT VAR_OUTPUT VAR_IN_OUT VAR is accessed The AR2 register of the instance is to be saved most usefully in a local variable VAR_TEMP The command Load pointer to an instance variable returns a pointer value from the start of the instance data To be able to access this variable via a pointer the offset s...

Page 1535: ...ter are then stored from the 3rd byte onwards String parameters are generally assigned to blocks of the basic program by means of a POINTER or ANY Such assignments must generally by made using symbolic programming methods The data block which contains the parameterizing string must be stored in the symbol list The assignment to the basic program block is then made by means of the symbolic data blo...

Page 1536: ...m in start up itself with the related instance parameters In the start up OB 100 the preassignment of the parameters must be done which can then no longer be changed in the cyclic part OB 1 These fixed parameter values are no longer parameterized in the cyclic call because they have already been written in the Instance DB Example of parameterization of FB 2 with instance DB 110 The following examp...

Page 1537: ... REAL 1 RD2 P M 24 0 REAL 1 Here the call still remaining in OB 1 is displayed CALL FB 2 DB 110 Req M0 0 Error M1 0 NDR M1 1 State MW 2 Note Owing to this measure a shorter cycle time is achieved in OB 1 because the static parameter values need not be copied in the instance DB in each OB 1 cycle The savings of this variant The cyclic copying effort of 3 integer values and 4 ANY parameters with res...

Page 1538: ...Detailed description 2 14 Programming tips with STEP 7 Basic logic functions PLC basic program solution line P3 sl 264 Function Manual 11 2006 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 ...

Page 1539: ...Basic logic functions PLC basic program solution line P3 sl Function Manual 11 2006 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 265 Supplementary conditions 3 There are no supplementary conditions to note ...

Page 1540: ...Supplementary conditions Basic logic functions PLC basic program solution line P3 sl 266 Function Manual 11 2006 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 ...

Page 1541: ...Basic logic functions PLC basic program solution line P3 sl Function Manual 11 2006 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 267 Examples 4 No examples are available ...

Page 1542: ...Examples Basic logic functions PLC basic program solution line P3 sl 268 Function Manual 11 2006 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 ...

Page 1543: ... MAXNUM_USER_DATA_FLOAT Number of user data FLOAT 14510 USER_DATA_INT User data INT 14512 USER_DATA_HEX User data HEX 14514 USER_DATA_FLOAT n User data FLOAT Machine data in integer hex format is operated in the NC as DWORD Machine data in floating comma format are operated in the NC as FLOAT IEEE 8 byte They are stored in the NC PLC interface and can be read by the PLC user program during PLC pow...

Page 1544: ...Data lists 5 1 Machine data Basic logic functions PLC basic program solution line P3 sl 270 Function Manual 11 2006 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 ...

Page 1545: ...s 58 Machine control panel handheld unit 59 Control unit switching for direct control keys 61 Cyclic operation 41 Cyclic signal exchange 7 D Data interface 27 Direct control key address 61 Interrupts 61 OP s at Ethernet Bus 61 E Eventdriven signal exchange 7 8 F FB 1 RUN_UP Basic program startup section 84 FB 10 Safety relay 142 FB 11 Brake test 144 FB 2 Read GET NC variable 93 FB 29 Signal record...

Page 1546: ...NC VAR selector 73 Startup installation 84 NC variables 79 P PLC 24 PLC basic program functions for SINUMERIK 840D sl 840Di 12 PLC versions 11 PLC_CYCLIC_TIMEOUT 237 PLC Basic program PLC Interface in SINUMERIK 840D 24 Process interrupt processing 44 PROFIBUS diagnostics 44 Programming and parameterizing tools 71 Programming devices or PCs 71 Programming tips with STEP 7 222 ANY and POINTER 223 Mu...

Page 1547: ...tware for 840D sl 840DE sl 1 3 NCU system software for 840D sl DiE sl 1 0 NCU system software for 840D 840DE 7 4 NCU system software for 840Di 840DiE 3 3 NCU system software for 810D 810DE 7 4 Brief Description 1 Detailed description 2 Supplementary conditions 3 Examples 4 Data lists 5 SINUMERIK SINUMERIK 840D sl 840Di sl 840D 840Di 810D Basic logic functions Reference Point Approach R1 Function M...

Page 1548: ...ommissioning and operation of a device system may only be performed by qualified personnel Within the context of the safety notes in this documentation qualified persons are defined as persons who are authorized to commission ground and label devices systems and circuits in accordance with established safety practices and standards Prescribed Usage Note the following Warning This device may only b...

Page 1549: ...ronization 30 2 5 5 Phase 2 Travel to fixed stop 31 2 6 Referencing with absolute value encoders 34 2 6 1 Information about calibration 34 2 6 2 Calibration by entering a reference point offset 36 2 6 3 Adjustment by entering a reference point value 37 2 6 4 Automatic calibration with probe 39 2 6 5 Calibration with BERO 41 2 6 6 Reference point approach with absolute encoders 43 2 6 7 Automatic e...

Page 1550: ...1 Machine data 59 5 1 1 NC specific machine data 59 5 1 2 Channelspecific machine data 59 5 1 3 Axis spindlespecific machine data 59 5 2 Signals 61 5 2 1 Signals to BAG 61 5 2 2 Signals from BAG 61 5 2 3 Signals to channel 61 5 2 4 Signals from channel 61 5 2 5 Signals to axis spindle 62 5 2 6 Signals from axis spindle 62 Index 63 ...

Page 1551: ... using the following measuring systems and referencing methods Measuring systems Incremental rotary measuring system with at least one zero mark Incremental linear measuring system Rotary measuring system with distancecoded reference marks supplied by Heidenhain Linear measuring system with distancecoded reference marks supplied by Heidenhain Absolute rotary measuring system Absolute linear measur...

Page 1552: ...int Approach R1 6 Function Manual 11 2006 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 Start The reference point approach of a machine axis can be started manually or via the part program Manual Operation mode JOG and MDA machine function REF Part program Part program command G74 ...

Page 1553: ...chine function REF reference point approach must be selected DB11 DBX1 2 Machine function REF Start reference point approach In axis specific reference point approach each machine axis must be started individually Reference point approach is started with the axis specific traversing keys DB31 DBX4 6 Traversing key minus DB31 DBX4 7 Traversing key plus Direction enable To avoid faulty operation the...

Page 1554: ...he referencing status of the machine axis is reset DB31 DBX60 4 referenced synchronized 1 DB31 DBX60 5 referenced synchronized 2 DB21 DBX36 2 all axes with obligatory reference points are referenced Distance coded measuring systems In distance coded measuring systems reference point approach can be started with any traversing key Sequence The machine operator or machine manufacturer via the PLC us...

Page 1555: ...ther mode group reset or channel reset for the master channel of the machine axis must be activated DB11 DBX0 7 mode group reset DB21 DBX7 7 channel reset All machine axes that have not yet successfully completed reference point approach when the action is cancelled remain in status Not referenced DB31 DBX60 4 referenced synchronized 1 DB31 DBX60 5 referenced synchronized 2 2 2 Channelspecific ref...

Page 1556: ...multaneously Simultaneous reference point approach of several machine axes Several machine axes can be referenced simultaneously depending on the control type SINUMERIK 840D Max 8 machine axes SINUMERIK 810D Max 5 machine axes Start reference point approach Channel specific reference point approach is started with DB21 DBX1 0 activate referencing The status of channel specific reference point appr...

Page 1557: ...ed 1 DB31 DBX60 5 referenced synchronized 2 2 3 Reference point appraoch from part program G74 Referencing of machine axes can be activated for the first time or repeated from the part program Referencing must be repeated for example after converting the actual value of the machine axis PRESETON function Machine axis is parked DB31 DBX1 5 Position measuring system 1 0 DB31 DBX1 6 Position measurin...

Page 1558: ...ng with incremental measurement systems 2 4 1 Chronological sequence Reference point approach with incremental measuring systems can be divided into three phases Phase 1 Traversing to the reference cam Phase 2 Synchronization with the zero mark of the position measuring system encoder zero mark Phase 3 Traversing to the reference point GHFHOHUDWLRQ RI UHIHUHQFH SRLQW DSSURDFK 0RWLRQ FRPPDQG SOXV 0...

Page 1559: ...B326 W Figure 2 2 Phase 1 Traversing to the reference cam Phase 1 Start For information on starting reference point approach refer to Axis specific referencing and Channel specific referencing Phase 1 Sequence In phase 1 depending on the position of the machine axis with reference to the homing cam we distinguish between three cases 1 The machine axis is positioned before the reference cam 2 The m...

Page 1560: ...in Phase 2 at the parameterized reference point creep velocity Phase 1 is now complete Reference point approach is continued with Phase 2 5HIHUHQFH SRLQW DSSURDFK YHORFLW 6WDUWLQJ SRVLWLRQ RI D LV 0LQLPXP GLVWDQFH 5HIHUHQFH SRLQW FDP 9HORFLW 0D LPXP GLVWDQFH WR UHIHUHQFH FDP HUR PDUN LVWDQFH 0 0 B5 3B0 B 0B 67 0 0 B5 3B9 2B6 5 B 0 Figure 2 3 Minimum distance for deceleration Case 2 The machine axi...

Page 1561: ... START are active The machine axis is stopped if the reference cam does not arrive within the parameterized distance MD34030 MA_REFP_MAX_CAM_DIST max distance to reference cam DB31 DBX12 7 reference point approach delay 1 2 4 3 Phase 2 Synchronization with the zero mark Phase 2 Graphic representation 9HORFLW 3KDVH GHFHOHUDWLRQ RI UHIHUHQFH SRLQW DSSURDFK 0RWLRQ FRPPDQG SOXV 0RWLRQ FRPPDQG PLQXV DQ...

Page 1562: ...e Meaning 0 Synchronization with falling reference cam signal edge 1 Synchronization with rising reference cam signal edge Note If the actual velocity of the machine axis at appraoch of the reference cam has not yet reached the target velocity of Phase 2 within the parameterized tolerence limits Phase 1 will be re started MD35150 MA_SPIND_DES_VELO_TOL spindle speed tolerance This will be the case ...

Page 1563: ...cam edge During synchronization with rising reference cam signal edge the machine axis accelerates to the parameterized reference point approach velocity against the parameterized reference point approach direction traversing direction of the phase 1 MD34020 MA_REFP_VELO_SEARCH_CAM Reference point approach velocity MD34010 MA_REFP_CAM_DIR_IS_MINUS Reference point approach in minus direction After ...

Page 1564: ...erature MD34092 MA_ REFP_CAM_SHIFT electronic reference cam offset for incremental measuring systems with equidistant zero marks After a rising or falling reference cam edge is detected the axis is synchronized for the next encoder zero mark only after the cyclically calculated offset path has been covered Because the offset path sshift is calculated by the NC in IPO cycles the following minimum a...

Page 1565: ...lowing factors influence the dynamic response from the arrival of the reference cam to the machine up to the detection of reference cam signals transferred from the PLC user program to the NC Switching accuracy of the reference cam switch Delay of the reference cam switch NC contact Delay at the PLC input PLC cycle time Cycle time for updating the VDI interface Interpolation cycle Position control...

Page 1566: ...ontrol then calculates an incorrect machine zero As a result the machine axis will approach the wrong positions Software limit switches protected areas and working area limitations act on incorrect positions and are therefore incapable of protecting the machine The path difference is of the path covered by the machine axis between 2 zero marks Phase 2 Features Feedrate override is not active Inter...

Page 1567: ...NH SOXV PLQXV DQG UHIHUHQFHG V QFKURQL HG HUR PDUN SRVLWLRQ PHDVXULQJ V VWHP 9HORFLW 5 5 1 32 17 3352 9 2 7 5 5 1 32 17 5 3 9 2 7 5 5 1 32 17 326 7 21 9 2 7 3KDVH W 0 0 B5 3B9 2B6 5 B0 5 5 0 0 B5 3B9 2B326 0 0 B5 3B9 2B6 5 B 0 Figure 2 8 Phase 3 Traversing to the reference point Phase 3 Start At the end of phase 2 the machine axis travels at reference point creep velocity Therefore as soon as phas...

Page 1568: ...sitioning velocity Zero Mark Distance MD34100 MA_REFP_SET_POS 0 1 2 OR 3 MD34080 MA_REFP_MOV_DIST MD34090 MA_REFP_MOVE_DIST_CORR MD34040 MA_REFP_VELO_SEARCH_MARKER MD34070 MA_REFP_VELO_POS MD34020 MA_ REFP_VELO_SEARCH_CAM Figure 2 9 Reference point position When the reference point is reached the machine axis is stopped and the actual value system of the machine axis is synchronized with the refer...

Page 1569: ...e point distance and reference point offset MD34080 MD34090 is smaller than the required breaking distance for stopping from the reference point positioning velocity MD34070 the machine axis initially stops behind the reference point and then travels back to it 5HIHUHQFH SRLQW DSSURDFK YHORFLW RI UHIHUHQFH SRLQW FDP RI UHIHUHQFH SRLQW DSSURDFK 9HORFLW 5HIHUHQFH SRLQW FUHHS YHORFLW HUR 0DUN UHIHUHQ...

Page 1570: ...er POWER OFF Warning During the time in which the measuring system encoder of the machine axis is switched off POWER OFF Parking the axis etc the machine axis may not be further mechanically moved This must be supported by the machine manufacturer with such measures as holding brakes etc and ensured by the user Otherwise the actual value system of the machine axis will no longer be synchronized re...

Page 1571: ...chine axes that do not use the signal cannot be buffered Functional sequence Two different cases apply for automatic referencing which depend on the encoder status Case 1 Encoder status 2 Automatic referencing in parameterized the measuring system has been referenced and the machine axis was switched off in status exact stop fine As a result The actual value system of the machine axis is synchroni...

Page 1572: ...e if the distance between the reference marks is approx 10 mm a traverse path of approx 20 mm is all that is required to reference the machine axis Referencing can be performed from any axis position in the positive or negative direction exception end of travel range 2 5 2 Basic parameter assignment Linear measuring systems The following data must be set to parameterize linear measuring systems Th...

Page 1573: ...olute offset MD34090 MA_REFP_MOVE_DIST_CORR 0 2 Perform reference point approach Note Reference point approach should be performed at a point in the machine where the exact position of the machine axis relative to machine zero can be determined easily with a laser interferometer for example 3 Determine the actual position of the machine axis via the operator interface screen 4 Measure the current ...

Page 1574: ...oint traversing for the machine axis must be carried out once more Referencing methods Referencing with distance coded reference marks can be performed in one of two ways Evaluation of two consecutive reference marks MD34200 MA_ENC_REFP_MODE referencing mode 3 Advantage Short travel path Evaluation of four consecutive reference marks MD34200 MA_ENC_REFP_MODE 8 Advantage Plausibility check by NC is...

Page 1575: ...s can be divided into two phases Phase 1 Travel across the reference marks with synchronization Phase 2 Traveling to a fixed destination point GHFHOHUDWLRQ RI UHIHUHQFH SRLQW DSSURDFK 0RWLRQ FRPPDQG PLQXV DQG WUDYHUVLQJ NH SOXV PLQXV UHIHUHQFHG V QFKURQL HG 9HORFLW 5HIHUHQFH SRLQW FUHHS YHORFLW 5HIHUHQFH SRLQW SRVLWLRQLQJ YHORFLW 3KDVH 3KDVH 5HIHUHQFH PDUNV OLQHDU PHDVXULQJ V VWHP W 0 0 B5 3B9 2B3...

Page 1576: ...system of the machine axis is synchronized to the absolute position calculated by the NC Sequence when starting from the reference cam If the machine axis is at the reference cam at the start of the reference point traversing it accelerates to the parameterized reference point creep velocity against the parameterized reference point approach direction MD34040 MA_REFP_VELO_SEARCH_MARKER reference p...

Page 1577: ...zed reference point creep velocity MD34040 and the search for reference mark is restarted If a faulty reference mark distance is detected again the machine axis is stopped and the reference point traversing is aborted alarm 20003 fault in the measuring system Abort criterion If the parameterized number of reference marks is not detected within the parameterized distance the machine axis is stopped...

Page 1578: ...nt MD34070 MA_REFP_VELO_POS Reference point positioning velocity MD34100 MA_REFP_SET_POS reference point value The machine axis is referenced To identify this the NC sets an interface signal for the measuring system that is currently active DB31 DBX60 4 60 5 Referenced Synchronized 1 2 1 No travel to target position The machine axis is now referenced To identify this the NC sets an interface signa...

Page 1579: ...AX_ MARKER_DIST max distance to the reference mark Special features of rotary measuring systems On rotary distancecoded measuring systems the absolute position can only be determined uniquely within one revolution Depending on the mechanical mounting of the encoder the overtravel of the absolute position in the hardware does not always coincide with the traversing range of the rotary axis Special ...

Page 1580: ...ystem of the machine axis can be immediately synchronized to the determined absolute position Adjustment Adjustment of an absolute encoder involves matching the actual value of the encoder with the machine zero once and then setting it to valid The current adjustment status of an absolute value encoder is displayed in the following axis specific machine data of the machine axis to which it is conn...

Page 1581: ...arm is displayed Alarm 25022 Axis Axis identifier Encoder Number Warning 0 or when addressing the zero mark monitoring only systems with SIMODRIVE 611D Alarm 25020 Axis Axis identifier Zero mark monitoring of the active encoder In all other cases e g PRESETON it is the sole responsibility of the user by resetting the status to 0 encoder not adjusted to show the misalignment of the absolute value e...

Page 1582: ...o the machine zero point via e g position measurement e g laser interferometer Moving the machine axis to a known position e g fixed stop 2 Reading the displayed actual position of the machine axis on the operator interface 3 Calculating the reference point offset difference between the actual positions determined under point 1 and 2 and entering in machine data MD34090 MA_REFP_MOVE_DIST_CORR refe...

Page 1583: ...rence point offset entered in the machine data can be overwritten for example as part of internal overrun offset Checking the actual position Following adjustment of the absolute encoder we recommend that you verify the actual position of the machine axis the next time you power up the controller POWER ON 2 6 3 Adjustment by entering a reference point value Function During adjustment by entering t...

Page 1584: ...zero to the NC as the reference point value MD34100 MA_REFP_SET_POS Position 4 Releasing encoder adjustment MD34210 MA_ENC_REFP_STATE 1 5 Activate NCK Reset for acceptance of the entered machine data values 6 Switch to JOG REF mode 7 Operate the travel key used for referencing in step 2 The machine axis does not move when the traversing key is actuated The NC calculates the reference point offset ...

Page 1585: ... position value is stored in the NC as a reference point value The position is reached when the probe switches and the NC then calculates the reference point offset from the difference between the encoder value and reference point value Note Part program for automatic adjustment The part program for automatic adjustment using a probe must be created by the machine manufacturer user for the specifi...

Page 1586: ...t value 3 Activate NCK Reset for the acceptance of the entered machine data values 4 Start part program 5 After completion of the part program re secure the partial program start for machine axes which are not referenced MD20700 MC_REFP_NC_START_LOCK 1 6 Initiate POWER ON Reset so that the reference point offset written by the part program is permanently active MD34090 MA_REFP_MOVE_DIST_CORR refer...

Page 1587: ... Procedure Proceed as follows for adjustment with BERO 1 Set referencing mode to Referencing with BERO MD34200 MA_ENC_REFP_MODE 2 2 Assign reference point value MD34100 MA_REFP_SET_POS Reference point value 3 Start reference point approach Reference point approach can be started manually in JOG REF mode or in AUTOMATIC or MDA mode from a part program G74 After a successful reference point approach...

Page 1588: ..._TIME_PLUS BERO delay time plus MD31123 MA_BERO_DELAY_TIME_MINUS BERO delay time minus Note Prerequisite for a correct compensation of signal propagation time is drives of type SIMODRIVE 611 digital The compensation times are pre set in delivery condition in such a way that changes are usually not required Creep velocity If with the approach of BERO it is to be proceeded with the parameterized ref...

Page 1589: ...hine axis moves to the reference point position Reference point approach is completed when the reference point position is reached 1 Traversing is not enabled After the activation of the reference point travel the machine axis does not travel and the reference point travel is immediately completed 2 6 7 Automatic encoder replacement detection Function Automatic encoder replacement detection is req...

Page 1590: ...L_NUMBER 0 If the NC now reads zero as the serial number the encoder status is not reset and the serial number indicated in the machine data is kept Example sequence of operation 1 The NC reads the serial number of the absolute encoder for the measuring system of the machine axis in question and the serial number is not equal to zero 2 The absolute encoder is calibrated in the correct manner 3 Whe...

Page 1591: ...s an incremental track and an absolute track If a spindle is driven at a speed above the encoder limit frequency of the incremental track the substantially lower limit frequency of absolute track must be parameterized as the encoder limit frequency MD36300 MA_ENC_FREQ_LIMIT Otherwise an incorrect absolute position would be read because the parameterized encoder limit frequency is not reached when ...

Page 1592: ...SYSCLOCK_TIME_RATIO Factor for interpolator cycle Note The position control switching speed relevant for spindles is set according to the encoder limiting frequency of the absolute value encoder of the spindle MD35300 MA_SPIND_POSCTRL_VELO position control switching speed MD36300 MA_ENC_FREQ_LIMIT Encoder limit frequency 2 6 9 Referencing variants that are not supported The following referencing v...

Page 1593: ...ine axis is designated as referenced DB31 DBB60 4 60 5 referenced synchronized 1 2 1 Advantage When the machine axis switches from an explicitly referenced measuring system to the measuring system referenced by actual value adjustment continuous servo control is assured servo enable active because the matched actual position prevents a sudden change in actual value Note In order to improve positio...

Page 1594: ... axis in any direction because no zero mark reference point cam etc is required Parameterization The following machine data must be parameterized for actual value adjustment to a referenced measuring system Homing mode Actual value adjustment to a referenced measuring system MD34200 MA_ENC_REFP_MODE measuring system 6 Traverse path for backlash recovery MD34080 MA_REFP_MOVE_DIST measuring system r...

Page 1595: ... with distancecoded reference marks 3 Travel movement of the machine axis with the referenced indirect measuring system before measuring system switchover in which the number of reference marks required for referencing are crossed This automatically references the passive direct measuring system Parameterization In addition to the specific machine data required to reference the individual measurin...

Page 1596: ...ference marks can be referenced even when the machine axis is in follow up mode This requires that reference point approach be properly parameterized according to the measuring system in use see Referencing with incremental measuring systems and Referencing with distance coded reference marks When referencing in follow up mode the machine axis is moved not by the NC but by means of an external tra...

Page 1597: ...etween encoder and load a BERO must be mounted on the machine and connected to the relevant drive module SIMODRIVE 611D via a BERO input in order to uniquely specify the reference point The position of the reference point is then derived from the combination of BERO signal and encoder zero mark Zero mark evaluation with BERO must be parameterized as the referencing mode MD34200 MA_ENC_REFP_MODE 5 ...

Page 1598: ... machine axis DB31 DBX1 4 follow up mode 0 DB31 DBX2 1 servo enable 0 2 Take into account activation of follow up mode DB31 DBX61 3 follow up mode active 1 3 Switch to JOG REF mode 4 External movement of machine axis across encoder zero mark or parameterized number of distance coded reference marks The referencing operation is started internally in the NC as soon as the machine axis is moved DB31 ...

Page 1599: ...s part program instruction G74 is processed 6 External movement of machine axis across encoder zero mark or parameterized number of distance coded reference marks 7 The measuring system is referenced after the encoder zero mark or the assigned number of distance coded reference marks have been successfully detected DB31 DBX60 4 60 5 referenced synchronized 1 2 1 8 The block change occurs after the...

Page 1600: ...mbination of BERO signal and encoder zero mark ULYH 3RVLWLRQ 0RWRU HDU RDG 6SLQGOH 0HDVXULQJ V VWHP HUR PDUN 52 Figure 2 13 Zero mark selection with BERO Zero mark evaluation with BERO must be parameterized as the referencing mode MD34200 MA_ENC_REFP_MODE 5 Negative edge evaluation In the case of a referencing operation with a negative edge evaluation of the BERO signal MD34120 MA_REFP_BERO_LOW_AC...

Page 1601: ... of the specific maximum encoder revolutions For example the EQN 1325 rotary absolute encoder by Heidenhain supplies a unique absolute value in the range of 0 to 4 096 encoder revolutions Depending on how the encoder is connected that will result in Rotary axis with encoder on load 4096 load revolutions Rotary axis with encoder on motor 4096 motor revolutions Linear axis with encoder on motor 4096...

Page 1602: ...nteger transmission ratios are permitted We recommend that you parameterize endlessly turning rotary axes with absolute encoders as modulo rotary axes traversing range 0 to 360 degrees MD34220 MA_ENC_ABS_TURNS_MODULO Otherwise the machine axis may require a very long traverse path to reach absolute zero when the measuring system is activated Machine axes with absolute encoders To ensure that the N...

Page 1603: ...Basic logic functions Reference Point Approach R1 Function Manual 11 2006 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 57 Examples 4 No examples are available ...

Page 1604: ...Examples Basic logic functions Reference Point Approach R1 58 Function Manual 11 2006 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 ...

Page 1605: ...ic machine data Number Identifier MA_ Description 30200 NUM_ENCS Number of encoders 30240 ENC_TYP Actual value encoder type 30242 ENC_IS_INDEPENDENT Encoder is independent 30250 ACT_POS_ABS Absolute encoder position at time of deactivation 30270 ENC_ABS_BUFFERING Absolute encoder Traversing range extension 30300 IS_ROT_AX Rotary axis spindle 30310 ROT_IS_MODULO Modulo conversion for rotary axis sp...

Page 1606: ... measurement systems with equidistant zero marks 34093 REFP_CAM_MARKER_DIST Reference cam reference mark distance 34100 REFP_SET_POS Reference point value 34102 REFP_SYNC_ENCS Actual value adjustment to the referencing measurement system 34104 REFP_PERMITTED_IN_FOLLOWUP Enable referencing in followup mode 34110 REFP_CYCLE_NR Axis sequence for channelspecific Homing 34120 REFP_BERO_LOW_ACTIVE Polar...

Page 1607: ...ame 11 0 7 Mode group RESET 11 1 2 Machine function REF 5 2 2 Signals from BAG DB number Byte Bit Name 11 5 2 Active machine function REF 5 2 3 Signals to channel DB number Byte Bit Name 21 1 0 Activate referencing 21 28 7 OEM channel signal HMI PLC REF 5 2 4 Signals from channel DB number Byte Bit Name 21 33 0 Referencing active 21 35 7 Reset 21 36 2 All axes referenced ...

Page 1608: ...e request 31 1 5 1 6 Position measuring system 1 position measuring system 2 31 2 4 2 7 Reference point value 1 to 4 31 4 6 4 7 Traversing keys minus plus 31 12 7 Decelertion of reference point approach 5 2 6 Signals from axis spindle DB number Byte Bit Name 31 60 4 60 5 Referenced synchronized 1 Referenced synchronized 2 31 61 3 Followup mode active 31 64 6 64 7 Traverse command minus plus ...

Page 1609: ...ing with incremental measurement system 12 M Machine zero 5 MD 34080 44 34210 51 34220 51 MD10050 43 MD10070 43 MD11300 8 MD20700 37 38 MD30242 45 MD30250 33 MD30330 31 MD30340 31 MD30455 32 MD30550 9 MD31020 43 MD31122 39 MD31123 39 MD32300 14 MD34000 15 18 31 MD34010 7 13 16 17 29 36 MD34020 14 17 MD34030 15 MD34040 14 16 17 18 28 29 39 MD34050 16 MD34060 20 29 31 MD34070 21 22 30 MD34080 21 22 ...

Page 1610: ...Index Basic logic functions Reference Point Approach R1 64 Function Manual 11 2006 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 R Referencing methods 5 T Traversing movement release 40 ...

Page 1611: ... for Control SINUMERIK 840D sl 840DE sl SINUMERIK 840Di sl 840DiE sl SINUMERIK 840D powerline 840DE powerline SINUMERIK 840Di powerline 840DiE powerline SINUMERIK 810D powerline 810DE powerline Software Version NCU system software for 840D sl 840DE sl 1 3 NCU system software for 840D sl DiE sl 1 0 NCU system software for 840D 840DE 7 4 NCU system software for 840Di 840DiE 3 3 NCU system software f...

Page 1612: ...ommissioning and operation of a device system may only be performed by qualified personnel Within the context of the safety notes in this documentation qualified persons are defined as persons who are authorized to commission ground and label devices systems and circuits in accordance with established safety practices and standards Prescribed Usage Note the following Warning This device may only b...

Page 1613: ...dles 64 2 5 Programming 68 2 5 1 Programming from the part program 68 2 5 2 Programming via synchronized actions 71 2 5 3 Programming spindle controls via the PLC with FC18 72 2 5 4 Special spindle movements via PLC interface 72 2 5 5 Gear step change with DryRun program testing and SERUPRO 81 2 5 6 External programming PLC HMI 84 2 6 Spindle monitoring 85 2 6 1 Speed ranges 85 2 6 2 Axis spindle ...

Page 1614: ...ns Spindles S1 4 Function Manual 11 2006 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 5 2 1 Channelspecific setting data 100 5 2 2 Axis spindle specific setting data 100 5 3 signals 101 5 3 1 Signals to axis spindle 101 5 3 2 Signals from axis spindle 102 Index 103 ...

Page 1615: ...ng SPOS M19 and SPOSA Gear change M40 to M45 Spindleaxis functionality spindle becomes rotary axis and vice versa Thread cutting G33 G34 G35 Tapping with and without compensating chuck G331 G332 Revolutional feedrate G95 Constant cutting rate G96 G961 G97 G971 Programmable spindle speed limits G25 G26 LIMS Position encoder assembly on the spindle or on the spindle motor Spindle monitoring for min ...

Page 1616: ...Brief Description Basic logic functions Spindles S1 6 Function Manual 11 2006 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 ...

Page 1617: ...e spindle can have the following modes Control mode Oscillation mode Positioning mode Synchronous mode synchronous spindle S3 Rigid tapping References PA Programming Guide Fundamentals PAZ Programming Guide Cycles Axis mode The spindle can be switched from spindle mode to axis mode rotary axis if the same motor is used for spindle and axis operation ...

Page 1618: ...p selection M40 in conjunction with a new S value or by M41 to M45 The spindle only changes to oscillation mode if the new gear step is not equal to the current actual gear step Oscillation mode Open loop control mode When the new gear is engaged IS DB31 DBX84 6 Oscillation mode is reset and the spindle is switched to open loop control mode with IS DB31 DBX16 3 Gear changed The last programmed spi...

Page 1619: ...ndle is decelerated in the same way as for M5 position control is activated and the zero parameter set is selected Axis mode Open loop control mode To terminate axis mode M3 M4 or M5 can be used to change to open loop control mode The last programmed spindle speed S value is reactivated Axis mode Oscillation mode To terminate axis mode M41 to M45 can be used to change to oscillation mode only if t...

Page 1620: ... SPCON M70 Position control ON OFF The spindle can be operated with or without position control SPCON Position control ON SPCOF Position control OFF Speed control mode Speed control mode is particularly suitable if a constant spindle speed is required but the position of the spindle is not important e g constant milling speed for even appearance of the workpiece surface Speed control mode is activ...

Page 1621: ...D_ACTIVE_AFTER_RESET is reset When the spindle is reset or at the end of the program the spindle immediately decelerates to a stop at the active acceleration rate The last programmed spindle speed and direction of rotation are deleted MD35040 MA_SPIND_ACTIVE_AFTER_RESET is set On a reset or at the end of the program the last programmed spindle speed S value and the last programmed direction of spi...

Page 1622: ... of Functions Basic Machine Various Interface Signals and Functions A2 Spindle behavior with G96 G961 Constant cutting rate At the start of machining transition from G0 to Gx and after NC stop G60 exact stop modal and G09 exact stop non modal the system waits until the actual speed has reached the speed setpoint tolerance range before starting the path NC PLC IS DB31 DBX83 5 nAct nSet is then set ...

Page 1623: ...p signaled is relevant for selection of the parameter set Once the gear step change GSW has been acknowledged via the PLC DB31 DBX16 3 the spindle is in speed control mode DB31 DBX84 7 1 If a direction of rotation M3 M4 M5 or FC18 Start spindle rotation or a spindle speed S value was programmed before the gear step change then the last speed and direction of rotation will be reactivated after the ...

Page 1624: ...POSA n IC SPOSA n DC identical to SPOSA n M19 or M n 19 SPOS n AC Spindle positioning to an absolute position 0 to 359 999 degrees The positioning direction is determined either by the current direction of spindle rotation spindle rotating or the distancetogo SPOS n IC Spindle positioning to an incremental position 999999 99 degrees in relation to the last programmed position The positioning direc...

Page 1625: ...SPOSA block is increased to the time for output and acknowledgment of the auxiliary functions by the PLC M19 DIN 66025 M19 can be used to position the spindle The position and the position approach mode are read from the following setting data SD43240 M19_SPOS and SD43250 M19_SPOSMODE The positioning options with M19 are identical to those of SPOS approach mode position path M19 is output as an au...

Page 1626: ...eria for all spindles or axes programmed in the current block plus the block change criterion for path interpolation are fulfilled This applies to both part program and technology cycle blocks Further explanations regarding configurable set change time of configurable positioning axes for single axis interpolation can be found under Literature FB2 functions manual Expanding Functions Positioning a...

Page 1627: ...rt of machining at the lastG0 Machining continues On the next traversing command If the spindle speed is reached When MD35510 MA_SPIND_STOPPED_AT_IPO_START 1 path feed enable if spindle stationary In the part program Coordination actions in the part program have the following advantages The part programmer can decide at what point in the program the spindle needs to be up to speed e g in order to ...

Page 1628: ...e Tolerance MD35150 MA_SPIND_DES_VELO_TOL WAITS is terminated and the next block loaded when the first occurrence of the signal is detected This function of WAITS applies in the programmed channel WAITS can be used to wait for all spindles known to this channel although spindles may also have been started in other channels Special cases Tolerance for spindle speed If the machine data setting is MD...

Page 1629: ...d WAITS is stopped too soon To prevent this happening it is strongly recommended to set a WAITM before WAITS M function output Auxiliary function M19 is output to the VDI interface by M n 19 always output to the IS SPOS n Output of M19 to the IS with MD setting MD20850 MC_SPOS_TO_VDI 1 SPOSA n Output of M19 to the IS with MD setting MD20850 MC_SPOS_TO_VDI 1 If M19 is programmed auxiliary function ...

Page 1630: ... when positioning starts SPOS M19 or SPOSA command in the program The following sequence is obtained Case 1 Spindle in speed control mode encoder limit frequency exceeded Case 2 Spindle in speed control mode encoder limit frequency not exceeded Case 3 Spindle in position control mode Case 4 Spindle speed Position control activation speed 6326 UHY PLQ 0 1 B 5 4B 0 7 0 1 B 5 4B 0 7B 2 0 63 1 B326 75...

Page 1631: ...5300 MA_SPIND_POSCTRL_VELO Position control activation speed The spindle is synchronized Phase 2 Spindle speed Position control activation speed With the activation of the command SPOS M19 or SPOSA the deceleration of the spindle begins with the acceleration given in the machine data MD35200 MA_GEAR_STEP_SPEEDCTL_ACCEL up to the position control activation speed The spindle is synchronized once th...

Page 1632: ...exceeded The braking start point calculation identifies when the programmed spindle position can be approached accurately at the acceleration defined in machine data MD35210 MA_GEAR_STEP_POSCTRL_ACCEL Phase 4 Spindle speed Position control activation speed The spindle brakes from the calculated braking point with machine data MD35210 MA_GEAR_STEP_POSCTRL_ACCEL to the end point Spindle speed Positi...

Page 1633: ... Spindle speed Position control activation speed Phase 5 5a The spindle is stationary and has reached the end point Position control is active and holds the spindle in the programmed position NC PLC IS DB31 DBX60 6 Position reached with exact stop coarse and DB31 DBX60 7 Position reached with exact stop fine are set if the distance between the spindle actual position and the programmed position sp...

Page 1634: ... tool change MD31040 MA_ENC_IS_DIRECT 0 Case 2 The spindle is synchronized This is the case if after switching on the control and drive the spindle is to be rotated through a minimum of one revolution with M3 or M4 and then stopped with M5 synchronization with the zero mark before the first positioning action UHY PLQ D D UHY PLQ 6326 0 63 1 B326 75 B9 2 6326 DVH 6SLQGOH QRW V QFKURQL HG 7LPH V HUR...

Page 1635: ...eed defined in machine data MD35300 MA_SPIND_POSCTRL_VELO Positioning speed is reached before the spindle is synchronized the spindle will continue to rotate at the positioning creep speed the spindle is not accelerated further Case 2 Spindle synchronized SPOS M19 or SPOSA will switch the spindle to position control mode The acceleration from the following machine data is active MD35210 MA_GEAR_ST...

Page 1636: ...point calculation identifies when the programmed spindle position can be approached accurately at the acceleration defined in machine data MD35210 MA_GEAR_STEP_POSCTRL_ACCEL At the time identified by the braking start point calculation in phase 1 the spindle brakes to standstill with the acceleration from machine data MD35210 MA_GEAR_STEP_POSCTRL_ACCEL Phase 3 At the point which is determined by t...

Page 1637: ... the acceleration from the following machine data MD35210 MA_GEAR_STEP_ POSCTRL_ACCEL Phase 4 The spindle is stationary and has reached the end point Position control is active and holds the spindle in the programmed position NC PLC IS DB31 DBX60 6 Position reached with exact stop coarse and DB31 DBX60 7 Position reached with exact stop fine are set if the distance between the spindle actual posit...

Page 1638: ...machines with end face machining the spindle not only has to be rotated with M3 M4 and M5 and positioned with SPOS M19 and SPOSA but also addressed as an axis with its own identifier e g C Prerequisites The same spindle motor is used for spindle mode and axis mode The same position measurement system or separate position measurement systems can be used for spindle mode and axis mode A position act...

Page 1639: ...l points to be noted The feed override switch is active NC PLC IS DB21 DBX7 7 Reset does not terminate axis mode as standard NC PLC IS DBB16 to DBB19 and DBB82 to DBB91 in DB31 are of no significance if NC PLC IS DB31 DBX60 0 Axis No spindle is set to zero Axis mode can be activated in all gear steps If the position actual value encoder is installed on the motor indirect measurement system the pos...

Page 1640: ...V_SPEEDCTRL_TIME Equivalent time constant speed control loop for feedforward control MD32910 MA_DYN_MATCH_TIME Time constant for dynamic matching MD36012 MA_STOP_LIMIT_FACTOR Factor for exact stop coarse fine and zero speed control MD36200 MA_AX_VELO_LIMIT Threshold value for velocity monitoring The dynamic limits of the axis stored in the machine data are applicable in axis operation The axis swi...

Page 1641: ...er set Change to spindle mode The interpolation parameter set 1 5 is selected according to the currently valid gear step The feedforward control function is always activated except for tapping with compensating chuck Machine data MD32620 MA_FFW_MODE feedforward control type must always be not equal to 0 Feedforward control should always be operated with the value 100 to avoid alarms being output d...

Page 1642: ...e mode allows configuration of the basic spindle setting following Power On NC START and RESET using machine data MD35020 MA_SPIND_DEFAULT_MODE and MD35030 MA_SPIND_DEFAULT_ACT_MASK 0 63 1 B 8 7B02 0 63 1 B 8 7B 7B0 6 5 6 7 3RZHU 21 1 67 57 6SHHG PRGH Z R SRV FRQWU 6SHHG PRGH ZLWK SRV FRQWU 3RVLWLRQLQJ PRGH LV PRGH 6WDQGDUG VHWWLQJ Figure 2 5 Programmable defaults for spindle operating mode ...

Page 1643: ...ment system of the rotary axis This process is known as homing The sequence of operations required to home an axis is known as homing Only a homed axis can approach a programmed position accurately on the machine Further explanations regarding referencing of round axis can be found under Literature FB1 functions manual Basic Functions Reference Point Travel R1 Installation position of the position...

Page 1644: ...ecessary the direction of motion is inverted prior to positioning If does not make any difference whether the procedure is initiated from the part program FC 18 or synchronized actions Crossing the zero mark in JOG mode by means of direction keys in speed control mode Note During synchronization of the spindle all four possible reference point values and reference point offsets are effective as ap...

Page 1645: ...REFP_VELO_SEARCH_MARKER is also effective when homing in operating mode JOG REF and through the part program with G74 Setting MD34200 MA_ENC_REFP_MODE 2 executes position synchronization without specifying a specific velocity speed Note The overriding of the signal propagation delay by the NC requires the use of type 611D drives Signal propagation delays are preset on delivery so that the content ...

Page 1646: ...he spindle SPCON Spindle positioning SPOS M19 and SPOSA Thread cutting G33 G34 G35 Tapping without compensating chuck G331 G332 Revolutional feedrate G95 Constant cutting rate G96 G961 G97 G971 Spindle actual speed display Axis mode Synchronous spindle setpoint value linkage NC PLC IS DB31 DBX16 4 Resynchronize spindle In the following cases the spindle position measurement system must be resynchr...

Page 1647: ...ring machine data MD35010 MA_GEAR_STEP_CHANGE_ENABLE Gear step change is possible determines the gear step change type as follows 0 Spindle motor installed directly 1 1 or with a nonvariable transmission ratio 1 Spindle motor with up to 5 gear steps The gear step change is executed in oscillation mode 2 Spindle motor with up to 5 gear steps The gear step change is executed at the configured fixed ...

Page 1648: ...by means of the programmed spindle speed for M40 without S or by means of programming with M41 to M45 By the PLC using function module FC 18 By synchronized actions with M40 and S or M41 to M45 In the reset state by writing to the VDI interface In particular after a power on the NC can be informed of the latest gear step In the reset state in the event of NC stop In the case of a manual gear step ...

Page 1649: ...B0 B9 2 0RWRU VSHHG 6SLQGOH VSHHG UHY PLQ 0D PRWRU VSHHG HDU VWHS HDU VWHS Q WKH FDVH RI DXWRPDWLF JHDU VWHS VHOHFWLRQ WKLV VSHHG UDQJH LV QRW XWLOL HG WR IXOO DGYDQ WDJH LQ JHDU VWHS 0D LPXP VSLQGOH VSHHG IRU JHDU VWHS 0LQLPXP VSLQGOH VSHHG IRU JHDU VWHS DXWRPDWLF JHDU VWHS VHOHFWLRQ 0D LPXP VSLQGOH VSHHG IRU JHDU VWHS DXWRPDWLF JHDU VWHS VHOHFWLRQ 0D LPXP VSLQGOH VSHHG IRU JHDU VWHS 0LQLPXP VSLQ...

Page 1650: ...e the spindle is programmed For further instructions on control and on servo parameter sets see Literature FB1 Function Manual Basic Functions Speeds Setpoint Actual Value System Control G2 PGA Programming Manual Work Preparation Programmable Servo Parameter Set The interpolation parameters specify gear steps 1 to 5 at the VDI interface for DB31 DBX82 0 82 2 Set gear step A to C The appropriate se...

Page 1651: ...mber of gear steps 1 to 5 used by this second data set is determined with the machine data MD35092 MA_NUM_GEAR_STEPS2 The second data set of gear step set is deactivated if zero is entered in this machine data as in the standard case With an active M40 the selection of the gear step is then carried out through the first data set as before Note The number of gear steps in the second data set can va...

Page 1652: ...T_CHANGE_ENABLE 0 or 1 0 The parameter sets cannot be controlled 1 The servo parameter set is defined primarily by the internal NC switchover at the VDI interface If the parameter sets cannot be controlled For axes the 1st parameter set with the index 0 is always the one that is applicable For spindles the 2nd to the 6th parameter set plus one is always active depending on the gear step selected B...

Page 1653: ...cillation When the new gear step is engaged the NC PLC interface signals DB31 DBX16 0 16 2 actual gear step A to C and DB31 DBX16 3 Gear changed are set by the PLC program End of gear step change The gear step change is considered completed oscillation spindle mode is deselected and the spindle is switched to the servo and interpolation parameter set of the new actual gear step NC PLC IS DB31 DBX8...

Page 1654: ... alarm 22000 Gear change not possible is output Automatic selection with active M40 The gear step is automatically selected by the control The control checks which gear step is possible for the programmed spindle speed S value If a gear step is found which is not equal to the current actual gear step the following NC PLC interface signals are then set DB31 DBX82 3 change over gear stage DB 31 DBX8...

Page 1655: ... JHDU FKDQJH 0D LPXP VSHHG RI JHDU VWHS 0D LPXP VSHHG IRU JHDU FKDQJH 0LQLPXP VSHHG IRU JHDU FKDQJH 0LQLPXP VSHHG IRU JHDU VWHS 0LQLPXP VSHHG IRU JHDU FKDQJH UHY PLQ HDU VWHS 0LQLPXP VSHHG IRU JHDU VWHS HDU VWHS Figure 2 7 Example for two gear steps with overlapping speed ranges for automatic gear step change M40 Note An active reduction gear is not considered in the selection for the automatic ge...

Page 1656: ... set remains active until the gear step change is aborted by PLC Same effect as if NC PLC IS DB21 DBX6 1 Read in enable is set Specification of gear step via PLC with FC18 The gear step change can also be performed by function block FC18 during a part program in the reset state or in all operating modes If the speed and direction of rotation is specified with FC18 the NC can be requested to select...

Page 1657: ...r step A to C changes These three bits must be set continuously during operation Successful transfer is acknowledged with NC PLC IS DB31 DBX82 0 82 2 Set gear step A to C to the PLC NC PLC IS DB31 DBX16 3 Gear changed must not be set If position control is active when a new gear step is specified by the PLC with NC PLC IS DB31 DBX16 0 16 2 Actual gear step A to C it is disabled throughout the gear...

Page 1658: ...be observed on gear step change The gear step change is not terminated by selecting NC PLC IS DB31 DBX20 1 Ramp up switchover to V f mode Setpoint 0 is output The acknowledgment of the gear step change is carried out as usual by the NC PLC IS DB31 DBX16 3 Gear changed The Rampfunction generator rapid stop signal must be reset by the PLC before the gear step change is completed by the PLC The gear ...

Page 1659: ...nchronized 1 or 2 is reset for the relevant measuring system 2 3 2 Intermediate gear Application and functions A configured intermediate gear can be used to adapt a variety of rotating tools The intermediate gear on the tool side has a multiplicative effect on the motor load gearbox It is set via machine data MD31066 MA_DRIVE_AX_RATIO2_NUMERA Intermediate gear numerator MD31064 MA_DRIVE_AX_RATIO2_...

Page 1660: ...he user to stop within the appropriate period in order to make changes to the machine data when required and then activate a NewConfig Switchover Switchover to a new transmission ratio is performed immediately by means of NewConfig From a technological viewpoint the associated mechanical switchover process takes some time since in mechanical terms a different intermediate gear with rotating tool i...

Page 1661: ...chine data MD10192 MN_GEAR_CHANGE_WAIT_TIME determines how long the control waits before executing the gear step change If this time elapses without the gear step change being completed the NC responds with an alarm The following events have an analog response User ASUB Mode change Delete distance to go Axis replacement Activate PI user data Enable PI service machine data Switch over skip block sw...

Page 1662: ...ation is determined in the following machine data MD35410 MA_SPIND_OSCILL_ACCEL DB31 DBX18 5 oscillation speed The spindle is in oscillation mode if a new gear step was defined using automatic gear step selection M40 or M41 to M45 DB31 DBX82 3 Change gear is set NC PLC IS DB31 DBX82 3 Change gear is only enabled when a new gear step is defined that is not the same as the current actual gear step I...

Page 1663: ...ine data MD35400 MA_SPIND_OSCILL_DES_VELO oscillation speed Start direction is defined through the following machine data MD35430 MA_SPIND_OSCILL_START_DIR Start direction with oscillation The time t1 or t2 is started according to which start direction is given in the machine data MD35430 MA_SPIND_OSCILL_START_DIR The time and not the fact that the oscillation speed is reached is always decisive P...

Page 1664: ...LC user need not set NC PLC IS DB31 DBX4 3 Spindle stop The spindle is brought to a standstill internally by the control when a gear step change is requested The gear step change should always be terminated with NC PLC IS DB31 DBX16 3 Gear changed NC PLC IS DB31 DBX18 5 Oscillation speed should be used to support mechanical engagement of the gear It has no effect on the internal control mechanism ...

Page 1665: ...lemented Deceleration of the spindle The braking action corresponds to an M5 movement Output of VDI interface signals DB31 DBX84 6 Oscillation mode DB31 DBX82 3 Change gear DB31 DBX82 0 82 2 Set gear step A to C If position control has been enabled it is disabled DB31 DBX61 5 0 The load gearbox can now disengage NC PLC IS DB31 DBX18 5 Oscillation enable can be set by the PLC The spindle motor then...

Page 1666: ... mode with NC PLC IS DB31 DBX82 3 Change gear the processing of the part program remains suspended A new block is not executed If oscillation mode is terminated with NC PLC IS DB31 DBX16 3 Gear changed the processing of the part program is resumed A new block is executed UHY PLQ 6SLQGOH VSHHG 7LPH V 6 HDU FKDQJHG ORFN FKDQJH RFFXUV KHUH Figure 2 8 Block change following oscillation mode ...

Page 1667: ...LOODWLRQ VSHHG PXVW EH HQDEOHG EHIRUH WLPH W 7KH QHZ JHDU VWHS LV HQJDJHG 7KH 3 XVHU WUDQVPLWV WKH QHZ DFWXDO JHDU VWHS WR WKH 1 DQG VHWV 6 HDU FKDQJHG W WKLV SRLQW WKH 1 FDQFHOV 6 KDQJH JHDU WHUPLQDWHV RVFLOODWLRQ UHOHDVHV WKH QH W SDUW SURJUDP EORFN IRU PDFKLQLQJ DQG DFFHOHUDWHV WKH VSLQGOH WR WKH QHZ 6 YDOXH 6 3URJUDPPHG 6 YDOXH VW JHDU VWHS HQJDJHG QG JHDU VWHS HQJDJHG QWHUQDO IHHG GLVDEOH 6SL...

Page 1668: ...configuration MD35010 MA_GEAR_STEP_CHANGE_ENABLE 2 runs the following sequence Positioning of the spindle from standstill or movement across the position configured in machine data MD35012 MA_GEAR_STEP_CHANGE_POSITION If the gear step change is performed out of a movement then the current direction of rotation is maintained The spindle is in positioning mode during the positioning action NC PLC IS...

Page 1669: ...olled operation is not possible it can be disabled by resetting Servo enable DB31 DBX2 1 0 Mechanical switchover of the gear step on the machine No oscillation motion is required from the drive NC PLC IS DB31 DBX18 5 Oscillation enable and DB31 DBX18 4 Oscillation via PLC should not be set In principle oscillation movement is still possible at this point Writing of NC PLC IS DB31 DBX16 0 16 2 Actu...

Page 1670: ...HW JHDU VWHS 6 6SLQGOH LQ VHWSRLQW UDQJH 6 6SLQGOH VWDWLRQDU 6 FWXDO JHDU VWHS 6 DFW VWRS ILQH 6 3RVLWLRQLQJ PRGH W WKLV SRLQW WKH 1 FDQFHOV WKH KDQJH JHDUV UHOHDVHV WKH QH W SDUW SURJUDP EORFN IRU PDFKLQLQJ DQG DFFHOHUDWHV WKH VSLQGOH WR WKH QHZ 6 YDOXH 6 7KH SURJUDPPLQJ RI 6 LQGLFDWHV D QHZ JHDU VWHS JHDU VWHS WR WKH 1 ZKLFK VHWV 6 3RRVLWLRQLQJ PRGH DQG GLVDEOHV PDFKLQLQJ IRU WKH QH W SDUW SURJU...

Page 1671: ...rtest path corresponds to DC If no reference is available and the spindle is in stillstand e g after Power On then the direction of travel is determined by the following machine data MD35350 MA_SPIND_POSITIONING_DIR If an adjustable gear step change position is required then this can be achieved by writing the machine data and by a subsequent NewConfig The change of the MD value can be achieved by...

Page 1672: ...the gear step change a value appropriate for the machining should be reset The part program instruction FA Sn does not change the positioning speed during gear step change acceleration The acceleration values are determined through the gear step dependent machine data MD35200 MA_GEAR_STEP_SPEEDCTRL_ACCEL and MD35210 MA_GEAR_STEP_POSCTRL_ACCEL The acceleration can be changed proportionally by progr...

Page 1673: ... gear step has been changed by the PLC DB31 DBX16 3 End of gear step change Once the gear step change has been completed the spindle returns to open loop control mode and will automatically change to the controller mode defined by SPCON or SPCOF All gearspecific limit values min max speed of gear step etc correspond to the check back values of the actual gear step Constraints The spindle must have...

Page 1674: ...d for a spindle whereby it is irrespective in which channel the spindle is actively handled The channel spindles can be switched over because an intermediate level is introduced between the logical spindle numbers used in the part program and the physical spindles existing in the channel The setting data table SD42800 SC_SPIND_ASSIGN_TAB Spindle number converter assigns each logical spindle used i...

Page 1675: ...ssigned to the channel by means of configuration If spindles which are presently active in another channel are designated for switchover either the AutoGet function is triggered for the physical spindle or alarm 16105 Assigned spindles do not exist is output depending on the configuration variant If the setting data SD42800 SC_SPIND_ASSIGN_TAB is specified by the PLC or from HMI then the channel w...

Page 1676: ...ACHAX AX4 1 MD35000 MA_SPIND_ASSIGN_TO_MACHAX AX5 2 MD35000 MA_SPIND_ASSIGN_TO_MACHAX AX6 3 MD35000 MA_SPIND_ASSIGN_TO_MACHAX AX7 5 Applying a machine axis in the channel MD20070 MC_AXCONF_MACHAX_USED 0 4 MD20070 MC_AXCONF_MACHAX_USED 1 5 MD20070 MC_AXCONF_MACHAX_USED 2 6 MD20070 MC_AXCONF_MACHAX_USED 3 7 Specifying the master spindle MD20090 MC_SPIND_DEF_MASTER_SPIND 1 Spindle number converter MD...

Page 1677: ...ndle 3 Caution physical spindle 3 has now been assigned twice When programming logical spindles 2 and 3 physical spindle 3 is always addressed In the basic machine displays both spindles rotate SETMS 2 SD42800 SC_SPIND_ASSIGN_TAB 0 2 defined internally by NCK M5 Master spindle address extension 2 spindle number M3 5 The physical spindle configured with number 3 stops GET S4 Alarm 16105 as logical ...

Page 1678: ...ramming M3 M4 M5 S SPOS M19 SPOSA M40 M41 to M45 and WAITS without entering the spindle number SETMS n The current master spindle setting can be retained via RESET and START The setting is made in machine data MD20110 MC_RESET_MODE_MASK and MD20112 MC_START_MODE_MASK References FB1 Descriptions of Functions Basic Machine Mode Group Channel Program Operation K1 M3 M1 3 Direction of spindle rotation...

Page 1679: ... mark if no reference is available or if a new one has been requested via an interface signal M19 M n 19 Spindle positioning for the master spindle or the spindle with number n to the position entered in setting data SD43240 SA_M19_SPOS The block change is only performed when the spindle is in position M70 M1 70 Bring spindle to standstill and activate position control select zero parameter set ac...

Page 1680: ... acceleration capacity of spindle n in SPI n Axis functions for a spindle with SPI n spino are converted into the data type AXIS according to machine data MD35000 MA_SPIND_ASSIGN_TO_MACHAX SPIis used if axis functions are programmed using the spindle number The following instructions are possible with SPI Frame instructions with SPI CTRANS CFINE CMIRROR CSCALE Velocity and acceleration values for ...

Page 1681: ...ersa When programming S values with M40 automatic gear step change is effective separately for synchronized actions and the part program For synchronized actions M40 is deactivated after POWER ON The gear step is not adjusted if an S value is specified from a synchronized action An M40 command programmed using synchronized actions always remains active for synchronized actions modal and is not res...

Page 1682: ...le via an axial PLC interface as an alternative to the FC18 The simplicity of the settings results in slightly restricted functionality This functionality can be used preferably for simple control applications Functionality Special VDI interface signals are provided to start and stop spindles outside a running part program In this regard the channel status and the program status need not be in the...

Page 1683: ...l is statically at 1 Conditions for the acceptance status Outside a running part program spindles can be started and stopped using the special VDI interface signals NCK PLC For this the channel status in Interrupted mode DB21 DBX35 6 1 or Reset DB21 DBX35 7 1 and the program status must be in Interrupted mode DB21 DBX35 6 1 or Aborted DB21 DBX35 4 1 These states will occur on RESET and in JOG mode...

Page 1684: ...ng the setting data SD43200 SA_SPIND_S the following conditions apply Programming through Conditions for programming Speed programming MD35035 MA_SPIND_FUNCTION_MASK Bit 4 1 must be set Constant cutting rate G96 G961 must not be active NC PLC IS DB31 DBX84 0 0 constant cutting speed must be set Direct programming in the part program A programmed S value and the value of the directly written SD can...

Page 1685: ...SD43200 SA_SPIND_S Setpoint speed MD35035 MA_SPIND_FUNCTION_MASK Bit 5 1 The content from setting data SD43200 SA_SPIND_S is used as the setpoint speed You can use the JOG keys to operate the spindle at the speed defined in setting data SD43200 SA_SPIND_S Constant cutting speed MD35035 MA_SPIND_FUNCTION_MASK Bit 8 1 Read from setting data SD43202 SA_SPIND_CONSTCUT_S Specifications for the constant...

Page 1686: ...ame time the following order of priority is defined Spindle stop M5 1 Priority Spindle start Positioning mode M3 2 Priority Spindle start Positioning mode M4 3 Priority Spindle start Positioning mode M19 4 Priority Acknowledgment spindle start stop A spindle start can be detected at the VDI interface based on traversing commands output DB31 DBX64 6 1 Traversing command minus or DB31 DBX64 7 1 Trav...

Page 1687: ...e of the start signal DB31 DBX30 1 Spindle start CW and DB31 DBX30 2 Spindle start CCW Note Rewriting of the setting data is not activated until the next positive edge of the start signals DB31 DBX30 1 Spindle start CW and DB31 DBX30 2 Spindle start CCW for the current spindle speed The content of the setting data is only accepted with the next spindle start signal Gear step change and effect on s...

Page 1688: ...d The content of the setting data is only accepted with the next spindle start signal Supplementary condition To ensure that constant cutting rate settings are active the spindle concerned must be a master spindle in the channel handling the spindle This condition is met when NC PLC IS DB31 DBX84 0 1 Constant cutting rate active is set on the axial VDI interface Writing from the part program When ...

Page 1689: ...e type will determine how the S value is interpreted analogously to the part program Reading from part program and synchronized actions The programmed cutting rate value can be determined both in the part program and in synchronized actions by reading system variables P_CONSTCUT_S and AC_CONSTCUT_S The programmed cutting rate value can also be read via the OPI interface System variables RV Defined...

Page 1690: ...mmed speed and cutting rate including settings Bit 4 1 The programmed speed including speed specifications are accepted in setting data SD43200 SA_SPIND_S through FC18 and synchronized actions Bit 5 1 The content of setting data SD43200 SA_SPIND_S serves as the setpoint speed in JOG mode You can use the JOG keys to operate the spindle at the speed defined in SD43200 If the content is zero other JO...

Page 1691: ...even with the DryRun function active for part program blocks with M40 M41 to M45 or via FC18 and synchronized action programming response Bit 0 1 Gear step change for blocks with M40 M41 to M45 or via FC18 and synchronized actions are suppressed with DryRun Program testing and SERUPRO Bit 1 0 Gear steps are activated even with the Program Test function active for part program blocks with M40 M41 t...

Page 1692: ... in the part program which may not have been output to the PLC System variable AC_SGEAR can be used to read the last active gear step from the part program synchronized actions and operator panel interface The DryRun function can be deselected within a running part program Once it has been deselected the correct gear step requested by the part program must be identified and selected It cannot be a...

Page 1693: ...C spindle FC18 If the gear step cannot be activated because the spindle is in position or axis mode or a link is active alarm 22011 Channel 1 block 3 spindle Change to programmed gear step not possible is signaled Example Gear step change in DryRun 1 Activate 1st gear step GS for output state N00 M3 S1000 M41 1 GS is selected M0 Part program stops PI service Activate dry run feedrate DryRun Config...

Page 1694: ...rol in JOG mode The following settings can be made via the setting data 0 The machine axis number of the rotary axis spindle from which the revolutional feedrate shall be derived 1 The revolutional feedrate is derived from the master spindle of the channel in which the axis spindle is active in each case 0 Function is deselected FPRAON S2 Revolutional feedrate for spindle S2 ON derived from the ma...

Page 1695: ...ndle 6SLQGOH VSHHG 0D LPXP HQFRGHU OLPLW IUHTXHQF 0D LPXP VSLQGOH VSHHG 0LQLPXP VSLQGOH VSHHG IRU FXUUHQW JHDU VWHS 6 LV 6SLQGOH VWDWLRQDU Q Q PLQ 6SHHG UDQJH RI VSLQGOH RU VSLQGOH FKXFN 0D LPXP VSLQGOH VSHHG IRU FXUUHQW JHDU VWHS 3URJUDPPDEOH VSLQGOH VSHHG OLPLW 06 3URJUDPPDEOH PLQLPXP VSLQGOH VSHHG 6SHHG UDQJH RI FXUUHQW JHDU VWHS 6SHHG UDQJH RI FXUUHQW JHDU VWHS OLPLWHG E DQG 6SHHG UDQJH RI FXU...

Page 1696: ...city speed Axis spindle stationary and no longer generates any setpoints is it possible to perform certain functions on the machine such as tool change open machine doors path feed enable etc If the spindle is stationary NC PLC IS DB31 DBX61 4 axis spindle stationary is set to 1 The next machining block is released and machine data MD35510 MA_SPIND_STOPPED_AT_IPO_START is set to 0 Exception MD3551...

Page 1697: ...on or deceleration phase In spindle control mode the setpoint speed programmed speed spindle offset including active limitations is compared with the actual speed If the actual speed deviates from machine data MD35150 MA_SPIND_DES_VELO_TOL by more than the spindle speed tolerance Axial NC PLC IS DB31 DBX83 5 Spindle in setpoint range is set to 0 The next machining block is not enabled Machine data...

Page 1698: ...et speed limited or DB31 DBX83 2 S Set speed increased and does not prevent the axis reaching the speed tolerance range If the spindle lies inside the tolerance range axial NC PLC IS DB31 DBX83 5 Spindle in setpoint range is set to 1 at the VDI interface Special case If the speed tolerance is set to 0 axial NC PLC IS DB31 DBX83 5 Spindle in setpoint range is permanently set to 1 and no path contro...

Page 1699: ...e and can only be undershot by Spindle override 0 M5 S0 NC PLC IS DB31 DBX4 3 Spindle stop Withdraw NC PLC IS DB31 DBX2 1 Controller enable NC PLC IS DB21 DBX7 7 Reset NC PLC IS DB31 DBX2 2 Delete distance to go Spindle reset NC PLC IS DB31 DBX18 5 Oscillation speed NC PLC IS DB21 DBX7 4 NC STOP axes plus spindles NC PLC IS DB31 DBX1 3 Axis Spindle disable NC PLC IS DB31 DBX16 7 Delete S value Max...

Page 1700: ...synchronization is lost The spindle continues to rotate but with reduced functionality With the following functions the spindle speed is reduced until the active measurement system is operating below the encoder limit frequency again Thread cutting G33 G34 G35 Tapping without compensating chuck G331 G332 Revolutional feedrate G95 Constant cutting rate G96 G961 G97 G971 SPCON position controlled sp...

Page 1701: ...ximum encoder frequency cannot be exceeded Spindle positioning mode axis mode Thread cutting G33 G34 G35 Tapping without compensating chuck G331 G332 does not apply to G63 Revolutional feedrate G95 Constant cutting rate G96 G961 G97 G971 SPCON 2 6 6 End point monitoring End point monitoring During positioning the spindle is in positioning mode the system monitors the distance from the spindle with...

Page 1702: ... and DB31 DBX60 6 position reached with exact stop coarse fine The two limit values defined by machine data MD36000 MA_STOP_LIMIT_COARSE Exact stop limit coarse and MD36010 MA_STOP_LIMIT_FINE Exact stop limit fine are output to the PLC using NC PLC IS DB31 DBX60 7 Position reached with exact stop coarse and DB31 DBX60 6 Position reached with exact stop fine Block change for SPOS and M19 When posit...

Page 1703: ...Basic logic functions Spindles S1 Function Manual 11 2006 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 93 Constraints 3 No supplementary conditions apply ...

Page 1704: ...Constraints Basic logic functions Spindles S1 94 Function Manual 11 2006 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 ...

Page 1705: ...lue P_SEARCH_DIR Collected direction of rotation P_SEARCH_GEAR Collected gear step Collected S value Direction of rotation Gear step 0 last speed 5 40 last GS N05 G94 M40 M3 S1000 1000 3 40 N10 G96 S222 222 3 40 N20 G97 f PlanAxPosPCS 3 40 N30 S1500 1500 3 40 N40 SPOS 0 1500 19 40 N50 M19 1500 19 40 N60 G94 G331 Z10 S300 300 19 40 N70 M42 300 19 42 N80 M4 300 4 42 N90 M70 300 70 42 N100 M3 M40 300...

Page 1706: ...Examples 4 1 Example of automatic gear step selection M40 Basic logic functions Spindles S1 96 Function Manual 11 2006 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 ...

Page 1707: ...60 OVR_SPIND_IS_GRAY_CODE Spindle override with Gray coding 12070 OVR_FACTOR_SPIND_SPEED Evaluation of spindle speed override switch 12080 OVR_REFERENCE_IS_PROG_FEED Override reference velocity 5 1 2 Channelspecific machine data Number Identifier MC_ Description 20090 SPIND_DEF_MASTER_SPIND Initial setting for master spindle on channel 20092 SPIND_ASSIGN_TAB_ENABLE Enabling disabling of spindle co...

Page 1708: ... for dynamic matching 34040 REFP_VELO_SEARCH_MARKER Reference point creep speed 34060 REFP_MAX_MARKER_DIST Monitoring of zero mark distance 34080 REFP_MOVE_DIST Reference point distance destination point for distancecoded system 34090 REFP_MOVE_DIST_CORR Reference point offset absolute offset distancecoded 34100 REFP_SET_POS Reference point value 34200 ENC_REFP_MODE Homing mode 35000 SPIND_ASSIGN_...

Page 1709: ...R Positioning direction of rotation for a nonsynchronized spindle 35400 SPIND_OSCILL_DES_VELO Oscillation speed 35410 SPIND_OSCILL_ACCEL Oscillation acceleration 35430 SPIND_OSCILL_START_DIR Oscillation start direction 35440 SPIND_OSCILL_TIME_CW Oscillation time for M3 direction 35450 SPIND_OSCILL_TIME_CCW Oscillation time for M4 direction 35500 SPIND_ON_SPEED_AT_IPO_START Feed enable with spindle...

Page 1710: ...940 TOOL_LENGTH_CONST Retain the assignment of tool length components when changing the machining plane G17 to G19 5 2 2 Axis spindle specific setting data Number Identifier SA_ Description 43200 SPIND_S Specification of the spindle speed 43202 SPIND_CONSTCUT_S Specification of the constant cutting rate for the master spindle 43210 SPIND_MIN_VELO_G25 Progr Spindle speed limitation G25 43220 SPIND_...

Page 1711: ... 31 16 6 no n monitoring with gear change 31 16 7 Delete S value 31 17 0 Feedrate override for spindle valid 31 17 4 Resynchronize spindle during positioning 1 31 17 5 Resynchronize spindle during positioning 2 31 17 6 Invert M3 M4 31 18 4 Oscillation via PLC 31 18 5 Oscillation enable oscillation speed 31 18 6 Oscillation rotation direction clockwise Set rotation direction clockwise 31 18 7 Oscil...

Page 1712: ...Set gear step A to C 31 82 3 Change gear 31 83 0 Speed limit exceeded 31 83 1 Setpoint speed limited 31 83 2 Setpoint speed increased 31 83 5 Spindle in setpoint range 31 83 7 Actual direction of rotation clockwise 5 3 2 Signals from axis spindle DB number Byte bit Description 31 84 3 Rigid tapping active 31 84 4 active spindle mode synchronous mode 31 84 5 Active spindle positioning mode 31 84 6 ...

Page 1713: ... 0 76 DBX30 1 76 DBX30 2 77 78 DBX30 3 76 DBX30 4 76 DBX4 3 54 89 DBX60 0 29 DBX60 2 90 DBX60 3 90 DBX60 4 90 DBX60 4 60 5 49 54 55 58 59 DBX60 5 90 DBX60 6 16 23 27 92 DBX60 7 23 27 63 92 DBX61 4 12 43 76 86 87 DBX61 5 10 11 55 59 DBX64 6 76 DBX64 7 76 DBX68 0 68 3 73 DBX7 7 89 DBX82 0 82 2 40 43 44 46 47 51 55 58 61 DBX82 3 43 44 46 52 55 56 58 61 DBX83 1 12 23 44 46 88 89 DBX83 2 88 89 DBX83 5 ...

Page 1714: ...31 MD32800 30 MD32810 30 MD32910 30 MD34040 35 MD34060 25 MD34080 34 MD34090 34 MD34100 34 MD34200 35 MD35000 64 66 70 MD35010 37 52 55 58 63 MD35012 41 58 61 MD35020 32 MD35030 32 MD35035 74 75 80 81 MD35040 11 27 MD3510 63 MD35110 41 MD35120 41 MD35130 41 46 89 MD35140 41 89 MD35150 17 18 87 MD35200 10 21 25 28 41 62 MD35210 11 21 22 25 26 28 41 62 MD35300 19 21 22 25 26 62 70 MD35310 58 61 MD35...

Page 1715: ... 15 16 69 SD43250 15 16 SD43300 84 Special spindle interface 72 Specify gear step 38 Specify gear step from the PLC 42 46 Speed default 77 SPI n 70 Spindle commands 75 Spindle job 73 Spindlespecific functions 80 SPOS n 14 Star delta switchover with FC17 48 T Tolerance range for setpoint speed 88 ...

Page 1716: ...Index Basic logic functions Spindles S1 106 Function Manual 11 2006 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 ...

Page 1717: ...Valid for Control SINUMERIK 840D sl 840DE sl SINUMERIK 840Di sl 840DiE sl SINUMERIK 840D powerline 840DE powerline SINUMERIK 840Di powerline 840DiE powerline SINUMERIK 810D powerline 810DE powerline Software Version NCU system software for 840D sl 840DE sl 1 3 NCU system software for 840D sl DiE sl 1 0 NCU system software for 840D 840DE 7 4 NCU system software for 840Di 840DiE 3 3 NCU system softw...

Page 1718: ...ommissioning and operation of a device system may only be performed by qualified personnel Within the context of the safety notes in this documentation qualified persons are defined as persons who are authorized to commission ground and label devices systems and circuits in accordance with established safety practices and standards Prescribed Usage Note the following Warning This device may only b...

Page 1719: ...rate control 32 2 3 1 General 32 2 3 2 Feedrate disable and feedrate spindle stop 33 2 3 3 Feedrate override on machine control panel 34 2 3 4 Programmable feedrate override 40 2 3 5 Dry run feedrate 41 2 3 6 Multiple feedrate values in one block 43 2 3 7 Fixed feedrate values 840D 810D 49 2 3 8 Feedrate for chamfer rounding FRC FRCM 50 2 3 9 Non modal feedrate FB 52 2 3 10 Programmable singleaxis...

Page 1720: ...le of contents Basic logic functions Feeds V1 4 Function Manual 11 2006 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 5 3 Signals 68 5 3 1 Signals to channel 68 5 3 2 Signals from channel 68 5 3 3 Signals to axis spindle 69 Index 71 ...

Page 1721: ...ical applications turning milling drilling etc Rapid traverse feedrate G0 Inverse time feedrate G93 Linear feedrate G94 Revolutional feedrate G95 Constant cutting rate G96 G961 Constant speed G97 G971 Feedrate with thread cutting G33 G34 G35 Feedrate for tapping with compensating chuck G63 Feedrate for rigid tapping G331 G332 Feedrate for chamfer rounding FRC FRCM Non modal feedrate FB Programmabl...

Page 1722: ...nts The following assignments are supported Separate feedrates for working plane and infeed axis Variable axis assignment for path feedrate Feedrate for positioning axes Feedrate control The programmed feedrate can be modified for adaptation to changes in technological conditions during machining or for test purposes Via the machine control panel Via the operator panel Via the PLC Via a program co...

Page 1723: ... the F address is missing in a block the last F value programmed is used instead FPO The F address syntax F FPO designates the feedrate response over a polynomial from the current value to the end of the block in which it has been programmed The end value then applies as a modal value Machine data MD20172 MC_COMPRESS_VELO_TOL supports the definition of a tolerance for the path feedrate if FLIN and...

Page 1724: ...n be changed directly via the programming Percentage acceleration correction ACC in the part program and in synchronized actions Programmable movement end criterion FINEA Exact stop fine COARSEA Exact stop coarse IPOENDA Interpolator stop in the part program and in synchronized actions Programmable servo parameter set SCPARA in the part program and in synchronized actions ...

Page 1725: ...drate F determines the machining speed and is observed in every type of interpolation even where allowance is made for tool offsets The value programmed under the address F remains in the program until a new F value or a new type of feedrate is programmed Value range for path feedrate F Reference PG Fundamentals Programming Guide FB1 Function Manual Basic Functions Velocities Setpoint Actual Value...

Page 1726: ...ear or rotary axes involved MD32000 MA_MAX_AX_VELO i e the axis with the lowest maximum velocity determines the maximum path velocity This cannot be exceeded If G0 is programmed traversing is at the path velocity resulting from the MD32000 MA_MAX_AX_VELO limitation Limit velocity for path axes In addition the FL x command can be used to program a limit velocity for path axes geometry and synchroni...

Page 1727: ...s FB2 Function Manual Extended Functions Jog With Without Handwheel H1 Reciprocal feedrate G93 applies only to 840D 810D The inverse time feedrate is used when it is easier to program the duration rather than the feedrate for retraction of a block The inverse time feedrate is calculated from the following formula Y PLQ V F Inverse time feedrate v Required path velocity in mm min or inch min Where ...

Page 1728: ...o the following formula 9 Q V Path velocity n Master spindle speed Where F Programmed revolutional feedrate Note The programmed F value is deleted when the system switches between the feedrate types G93 G94 and G95 In JOG mode the response of the axis spindle also depends on the setting data SD41100 SN_JOG_REV_IS_ACTIVE revolutional feed rate for JOG active If this setting data is active an axis s...

Page 1729: ... 2 1 3 Type of feedrate G96 G961 G962 G97 G971 Constant cutting rate G96 G961 The constant cutting rate is used on turning machines to keep the cutting conditions constant independently of the work diameter of the workpiece This allows the tool to be operated in the optimum cutting performance range and therefore increases its service life Selection of G96 G961 When programming G96 G961 the corres...

Page 1730: ...the HMI operator interface in the diameter Assignment of the specified reference axis with SCC AX for a constant cutting rate G96 G961 G962 References FB1 Function Manual Basic Functions Transverse Axes P1 Example Example SG96 230 m min where r 0 2 m n 183 12 rpm where r 0 1 m n 366 24 rpm The smaller the workpiece diameter the higher the speed For G96 G961 or G962 a geometry axis must be defined ...

Page 1731: ...l Note G96 G961 is only active during workpiece machining G1 G2 G3 spline interpolation etc where feedrate F is active The response of the spindle speed for active G96 G961 and G0blocks can be defined in the channelspecific machine data MD20750 ALLOW_G0_IN_G96 G0 logic for G96 G961 When constant cutting rate G96 G961 is selected no gear stage change can take place The spindle speed override switch...

Page 1732: ...tched off depending on the machine data MD10710 PROG_SD_RESET_SAVE_TAB n setting data to be updated When G96 G961 G97 are reactivated this spindle speed limitation is also activated The maximum permissible spindle speed defined by means of G26 or setting data SD43220 SA_SPIND_MAX_VELO_G26 maximum spindle speed cannot be exceeded In the event of incorrect programming that would cause one of the spe...

Page 1733: ...6SLQGOH ZRUNLQJ DUHD DIWHU VSHHG FDOFXODWLRQ DQG IHHGUDWH RYHUULGH EVROXWH VSHHG OLPLW Figure 2 1 Spindle speed limitations The various spindle speed limits are illustrated in the figure above For more information and for information on the effect of the setting data see References FB1 Function Manual Basic Functions Spindles S1 Section Spindle Monitoring Functions Setting Data Master spindle swit...

Page 1734: ...for constant cutting rate is output 2 1 4 Feedrate with G33 G34 G35 thread cutting 2 1 4 1 General Application of G33 The function G33 can be used to machine threads with constant lead of the following type References PA Programming Guide Fundamentals PAZ Programming Guide Cycles Speed S feedrate F thread lead A revolutional feedrate mm revolution is used for G33 threads The revolutional feedrate ...

Page 1735: ...fter completion of thread chaining All subsequent G33 blocks and the first subsequent nonG33 block are traversed like a single block Premature abortion without destruction Thread cutting can be aborted without destruction before the end point is reached This can be done by activating a retraction motion Thread cutting with ROT frame With ROT frame and G33 G34 G35 alarm 10607 Thread with frame not ...

Page 1736: ...eration ramp leading to the risk of collision between the workpiece and the tool edge The tool braking ramp can be set shorter via DITE Due to the inertia of the mechanical system however a collision can nevertheless occur Remedy Program a shorter thread reduce the spindle speed The programmed runin and runout path only increases the rate of acceleration on the path If one of the two paths is set ...

Page 1737: ...ead run up deceleration distance is specified To avoid technology alarm 22280 the acceleration limits of the axis must be observed in case of very small run in and run out paths Note DITE acts at the end of the thread as a rounding clearance This achieves a smooth change in the axis movement Compatibility Machine data MD20650 MC_THREAD_START_IS_HARD is dispensed with and is replaced by SD42010 SC_...

Page 1738: ...a SD42010 SC_THREAD_RAMP_DISP 0 1 In the event of RESET the setting data SD42010 SC_THREAD_RAMP_DISP 0 1 is set to 1 2 1 4 3 Linear progressive degressive thread lead change with G34 and G35 Application G34 G35 The functions can be used to produce selfshearing threads Functionality The thread lead increase G34 defines the numerical increase in the lead value A larger pitch results in a larger dist...

Page 1739: ... thread lead change to be programmed mm rev2 ke Thread lead of axis target point coordinate thread axis mm rev ka Initial thread lead programmed under I J or K mm rev lG Thread length mm The absolute value of F must be applied to G34 or G35 according to the desired lead increase or lead decrease When the thread length lG lead change F and initial lead ka are known the lead increase at the end of b...

Page 1740: ...e during block preparation Alarm 10604 Thread lead increase too high or alarm 10605 Thread lead decrease too high are output if bit 10 in machine data MD11410 SUPPRESS_ALARM_MASK is not set During thread cutting certain practical applications require a correction of the spindle speed In this case the operator will base his correction on the permissible velocity of the thread axis The output of the...

Page 1741: ...rect parameters Alarm 16740 No geometry axis programmed If the spindle speed is too high when G33 G34 G35 are active e g spindle override set to 200 alarm 22270 Spindle speed for thread cutting too high is output Alarm 22270 is output when the rapid traverse speed of the thread axis is exceeded It is possible to reduce the spindle speed using the spindle override switch to prevent serious alarms R...

Page 1742: ...ources can initiate a retraction motion during thread cutting Fast inputs programming with SETINTLIFTFAST for LIFTFAST option NC Stop Alarms that implicitly initiate the NC stop 6WDUW SRVLWLRQ 7KUHDG FXWWLQJ 7DUJHW SRVLWLRQ 7KUHDG FXWWLQJ LV VWDQGVWLOO 5HWUDFWLRQ FRPSOHWHG WKUHDG FXWWLQJ VWRSSHG 1 BVWRSBVWDUWBUHWU DFWLRQBPRWLRQ Figure 2 3 Interruption of G33 through retraction motion Retraction pa...

Page 1743: ...etraction plane is independent of the path tangent This allows a fast lift to be programmed parallel to the axis These G functions can always be programmed The default setting for NC Reset and or NC Start is specified in machine data MD20150 GCODE_RESET_VALUES In the plane of the retraction movement ALF is used as before to program the direction in discrete steps of 45 degrees With LFTXT retractio...

Page 1744: ...7 Enable fast retraction for thread cutting Retraction path 10 mm Retraction plane Z X due to G18 Retraction direction X with ALF 3 retraction direction X N71 G33 Z55 X15 N72 G1 Deactivate thread cutting If thread cutting N69 IF AC_LIFTFAST GOTOB MM_THREAD was aborted N90 MSG N70 M30 N55 M3 S500 G90 G0 X0 Z0 N87 MSG tapping N88 LFOF Deactivate fast retraction before tapping N89 CYCLE Thread drilli...

Page 1745: ... can be used to tap a thread without a compensating chuck rigid tapping if the spindle is technically capable of operating in position control mode Speed S feedrate F thread lead A revolutional feedrate mm revolution is used for G331and G332 The revolutional feedrate is defined by programming the thread lead increase mm revolution The speed of the axes for the thread length is calculated from the ...

Page 1746: ...g axes Syntax FA positioning axis feedrate value Functionality The velocity of a positioning axis is programmed with axisspecific feedrate FA Effectiveness Modal Special points to be noted No more than 5 axis specific feedreates can be programmed in each part program block The feedrate is always G94 If no axial feedrate FA is programmed the axial default MD32060 MA_POS_AX_VELO initial setting for ...

Page 1747: ...um axis velocity is not exceeded MD32000 MA_MAX_AX_VELO maximum axis velocity F function output to the NC PLC interface Output of the F functions to the NC PLC interface is not recommended Activating the output of F functions to the NC PLC interface can cause a drop in velocity in continuous path mode The output of F functions to the NC PLC interface can be suppressed MD22240 MC_AUXFU_F_SYNC_TYPE ...

Page 1748: ...5 B581B U UXQ IHHGUDWH HHGUDWH RYHUULGH PDFKLQH FRQWURO SDQHO B 6SLQGOH RYHUULGH PDFKLQH FRQWURO SDQHO 3URJUDPPHG IHHGUDWH RYHUULGH 6WRUHG 6 YDOXH RU 6 YDOXH 0LQLPXP 3RVLWLRQLQJ RU SDWK YHORFLW 6SLQGOH VSHHG VHWSRLQW 6 DFWLYDWH GU UXQ IHHGUDWH FWXDO VSLQGOH VSHHG 6SLQGOH SRVLWLRQ FRQWURO 6 UDSLG RYHUULGH DFWLYH 6 IHHGUDWH RYHUULGH DFWLYH 6 RYHUULGH DFWLYH 0D LPXP TXDO WR 3URJUDPPHG 6 YDOXH 3URJUDP...

Page 1749: ...34 G35 active Not effective If G63 active Effective If G331 G332 active Effective Feed stop DB21 DBX12 3 geometry axes Interface signals Feed stop DB21 DBX12 3 and the following signals for geometry axes 1 2 and 3 stop the geometry axes of a channel in JOG mode Feed stop DB31 DBX4 3 axisspecific The axis specific Feed stop interface signal DB31 DBX4 3 is used to stop the relevant machine axis In a...

Page 1750: ...rride values An override between 0 and 200 can be programmed for the path feedrate The rapid traverse override switch is used to reduce the traversing velocity when testing a part program An override between 0 and 100 can be programmed for the rapid traverse The feedrate can be changed axisspecifically for positioning axes The override can be between 0 and 200 The spindle override can be used to m...

Page 1751: ...ed are used to define whether binary or Gray coding is active The following permanent assignment applies to binary coding Code Override factor 00000000 0 00 0 00000001 0 01 1 00000010 0 02 2 00000011 0 03 3 00000100 0 04 4 01100100 1 00 100 11001000 2 00 200 With Gray coding the override factors corresponding to the switch setting are entered in machine data MD12030 OVR_FACTOR_FEEDRATE n analysis ...

Page 1752: ...interface signal of the rapid traverse override DB21 DBB5 Activation of channel specific feedrate and rapid traverse override If G33 G34 G35 active Not effective If G63 active Not effective If G331 G332 active Not effective Reference speed for path feedrate override The reference velocity for the path feedrate override specified via the machine control panel can be set to a value other than the de...

Page 1753: ...0 0 04 4 01100100 1 00 100 11001000 2 00 200 With Gray coding the override factors corresponding to the switch setting are entered in machine data MD12010 OVR_ FACTOR_AX_ SPEED n analysis of axis feedrate override switch Activation of axis specific feedrate override If G33 G34 G35 active Not effective If G63 active Not effective the override is set to a fixed value of 100 in the NC If G331 G332 ac...

Page 1754: ...is Graycoded is used to define whether binary or Gray coding is active The following permanent assignment applies to binary coding Code Override factor 00000000 0 00 0 00000001 0 01 1 00000010 0 02 2 00000011 0 03 3 00000100 0 04 4 01100100 1 00 100 11001000 2 00 200 With Gray coding the override factors corresponding to the switch setting are entered in machine data MD12070 OVR_FACTOR_SPIND_SPEED...

Page 1755: ...acts as a feedrate disable Override inactive When the override is inactive i e the above interface signals are set to 0 the override factor 1 is used internally on the NC i e the override is 100 In this case the value entered in the PLC interface has no effect Exceptions are the zero setting for a binary interface and the 1st switch setting for a Gray coded interface In these cases the override fa...

Page 1756: ...sitioning feedrate FA The programmable range is between 0 and 200 The default setting is 100 Effectivity Interface signals Rapid traverse and feedrate override DB21 DBB6 and Axis specific override active DB31 DBX1 7 do not apply to the programmable feedrate override The programmable feedrate override remains active when these signals are deactivated The active override is calculated from the produ...

Page 1757: ...h G94 The dry run feedrate also takes precedence over the feedrates for G93 G95 and G33 G34 G35 In this case the programmed feedrate is compared to the dry run feedrate in SD42100 DRY_RUN_FEED and the axis is then traversed at the higher of the two feedrates Dry run feedrate change Dry run feedrate active DB21 DBX318 6 The dry run feedrate SD42100 DRY_RUN_FEED 1 can be changed via the operator pan...

Page 1758: ...33 G34 G35 and tapping G33 G34 G35 These functions are executed as programmed 11 As for configured value 1 except for thread cutting G33 G34 G35 and tapping G33 G34 G35 These functions are executed as programmed 12 As for configured value 2 except for thread cutting G33 G34 G35 and tapping G33 G34 G35 These functions are executed as programmed A dry run feedrate can be selected in the automatic mo...

Page 1759: ...erent feedrate values of an NC block a dwell time or a retraction motion synchronously depending on the external digital and or analog inputs Retraction Retraction by the programmed amount is initiated in the IPO cycle Signals The HW input signals are combined in one input byte for the function Multiple feedrate in one block A permanent functional assignment applies within the byte Table 2 1 Input...

Page 1760: ...tion can be used to define the response on loss of the highest priority input in each case F2 F7 The endofblock criterion is satisfied when The programmed end position is reached The retraction motion ends SR The dwell time elapses ST Delete distance to go A retraction motion or dwell time causes the distancetogo to be deleted Hardware assignment The channel specific machine data MD21220 MULTFEED_...

Page 1761: ...LW QG E WH VWE WH LW LW LJLWDO LQSXW E WH RU FRPSDUDWRU LQSXW E WH LJLWDO LQSXW E WH RU FRPSDUDWRU LQSXW E WH QYHUVLRQ PDVN QSXW ELW QYHUVLRQ PDVN QSXW E WH IRU 6HYHUDO IHHGUDWHV LQ RQH EORFN Figure 2 5 Signal routing for Multiple feeds in one block The assignment of the digital input bytes and parameterization of the comparators are described in References FB1 Function Manual Basic Functions Vari...

Page 1762: ...Programming axial motion The axial feedrates are programmed under address FA and remain valid until an input signal is present They act modally FMA 2 x to FMA 7 x can be used to program up to 6 further feedrates per axis in the block The first expression in square brackets indicates the bit number of the input that activates the feedrate when changed The second expression indicates the axis to whi...

Page 1763: ...h refers to the current valid unit of measurement mm or inch The reverse stroke is always made in the opposite direction to the current motion SR SRA always programs the value for the reverse stroke No sign is programmed It is also possible to poll the status of an input for synchronous commands of various axes Look Ahead is also active for multiple feedrates in one block In this way the current f...

Page 1764: ...ition of the infeed axis but also by the calipers 5LQJ DOLSHUV ULQGLQJ GLVF Figure 2 6 Calipers Part program 67 65 5HWUDFWLRQ 6SDUNLQJ RXW WLPH HHGUDWH ILQH ILQLVKLQJ HHGUDWH DLU JULQGLQJ HHGUDWH URXJKLQJ HHGUDWH ILQLVKLQJ QLWLDO VHWWLQJ Note The axial feedrate path feedrate F value is the 100 feedrate Feedrates smaller than or equal to the axial feedrate path feedrate can be implemented with Mult...

Page 1765: ...ate Behavior in JOG mode The fixed feedrate selected via the interface signal is applied during travel instead of the JOG velocities set The travel direction is specified via the interface signal The following MDs and interface signals can be used to select fixed feedrates for path geometry axes and for machine data MD12202 MN_PERMANENT_FEED n fixed feedrates for linear axes MD12204 MN_PERMANENT_R...

Page 1766: ...ontour elements therefore need their own optimized feedrate values in order to achieve the required surface finish Function You can program the feedrate for the chamfer rounding with FRC non modal or FRCM modal The feedrate value is interpreted according to the type of feedrate active G94 G961 G971 Feedrate in mm min inch min or o min G95 G96 G97 Revolutional feedrate in mm rev or inch rev The FRC...

Page 1767: ...straints Feedrate interpolation FLIN and FCUB is not possible for chamfer rounding FRC FRCM has no effect if a chamfer is being machined with G0 the command can be programmed according to the F value without error message FRC is only effective if a chamfer rounding is programmed in the same block or if RNDM has been activated FRC overwrites the F or FRCM value for chamfer rounding in the current b...

Page 1768: ...te in mm min inch min or o min G95 G96 G97 Revolutional feedrate in mm rev or inch rev Constraints The programmed value of FB value must be greater than zero If no traversing motion is programmed in the block e g computation block FB has no effect If no explicit feedrate for chamfering rounding is programmed then the value of FB also applies for any contour element chamfering rounding in this bloc...

Page 1769: ...hronized actions using FA Axis Modifiable from the PLC by entering FRate or overwriting the axial override The acceleration value MD32300 MAX_AX_ACCEL Programmable indirectly in the part program by overwriting the machine data with subsequent NewConfig or directly using a percentage acceleration override ACC Axis Modifiable indirectly in synchronized actions by overwriting the MD no NewConfig poss...

Page 1770: ... n Parameter set n for 0 to 5 For more information about parameter sets and programming please refer to References FB1 Function Manual Basic Functions Velocities Setpoint Actual Value Systems Closed Loop Control G2 PG Programming Guide Fundamentals Path Response and Feedrate Control Dynamic criteria and feedforward control With dynamic response criteria it must be distinguished from where they wer...

Page 1771: ...ontent MD32300 MAX_AX_ACCEL Axis ACC Axis 100 MD 32320 DYN_LIMIT_RESET_MASK can be used to control maintaining the ACC value in the event of channel RESET M30 Note The acceleration offset programmed with ACC is always considered as specified above for the output in AA_ACC However AA_ACC is not output in the part program at the same time as in a synchronized action The value described in the part p...

Page 1772: ...tral axes Note Depending on whether AA_ACC is programmed in a part program or in a synchronized action the ACC value is output for the NC axes or the main run axes Variable AA_ACC must always be queried in the mode in which the acceleration was written either part program or synchronized action Examples In the part program N80 G01 POS X 100 FA X 1000 ACC X 90 IPOENDA X Or via a synchronized action...

Page 1773: ... FINEA Axis Exact stop fine COARSEA Axis Exact stop coarse IPOENDA Axis Interpolator stop IPO stop Axis Channel axis name X Y spindle S1 The end of motion criterion set will affect how quickly or slowly part program blocks and technology cycle blocks with singleaxis movements are completed The same applies for PLC positioning instructions via FC15 16 18 The set end of motion criterion can be scann...

Page 1774: ...eviously this could only be done via the PLC Axis Channel axis name X Y spindle S1 SCPARA Axis value Wher e Value Desired parameter set 1 value 6 DB3n DBB9 bit3 To prevent conflicts between the PLC user request and NC user request a further bit is defined on the PLC NCK interface DB3n DBB9 bit3 Parameter set selection by SCPARA disabled The PLC user is thereby able to set up a structured sequence ...

Page 1775: ...the event of a RESET the last programmed value remains for the part program specifications The settings for main run interpolations do not change Block search The last end of motion criterion programmed for an axis is collected and output in an action block The last block with a programmed end of motion criterion that was processed in the search run serves as a container for all programmed end of ...

Page 1776: ...Detailed description 2 3 Feedrate control Basic logic functions Feeds V1 60 Function Manual 11 2006 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 ...

Page 1777: ...ming Unit of measurement The applicable unit of measurement for feedrates is based on the value entered in machine data MD12240 SCALING_SYSTEM_IS_METRIC standard control system metric imperial and the type of axis entered in machine data MD30300 IS_ROT_AX rotary or linear axis Standard setting for feedrate type G94 is displayed on the screen as the standard setting The initial setting standard pro...

Page 1778: ...active following a RESET Programmed path feedrate F Programmed feedrate change for path feedrate OVR Programmed positioning feedrate FA Programmed feedrate change for positioning feedrate OVRA U For more detailed information about syntax please see References PG Programming Guide Fundamentals Position spindle If G95 G96 G961 G97 G971 G33 G34 G35 is active spindle positioning should not be performe...

Page 1779: ... CHF 2 Chamfer N20 N30 with F 100 mm min N30 Y10 CHF 4 Chamfer N30 N40 with FRC 200 mm min N40 X20 CHF 3 FRC 200 Chamfer N40 N60 with FRCM 50 mm min N50 RNDM 2 FRCM 50 N60 Y20 Modal rounding N60 N70 with FRCM 50 mm min N70 X30 Modal rounding N70 N80 with FRC 100 mm min N80 Y30 CHF 3 FRC 100 Chamfer N80 N90 with FRCM 50 mm min modal N90 X40 Modal rounding N90 N100 with F 100 mm min deselect FRCM N1...

Page 1780: ... CHF 4 FRC 120 Chamfer N30 N40 with FRC 120 mm min N40 X20 CHF 3 FRC 200 Chamfer N40 N60 with FRC 200 mm min N50 RNDM 2 FRCM 50 N60 Y20 Modal rounding N60 N70 with FRCM 50 mm min N70 X30 Modal rounding N70 N80 with FRCM 50 mm min N80 Y30 CHF 3 FRC 100 Chamfer N80 N90 with FRC 100 mm min modal N90 X40 Modal rounding N90 N100 with FRCM 50 mm min N100 Y40 FRCM 0 Modal rounding N100 N120 with F 100 mm...

Page 1781: ...itch Graycoded 12030 OVR_FACTOR_FEEDRATE Evaluation of the path feed override switch 12040 OVR_RAPID_IS_GRAY_CODE Rapid traverse override switch Graycoded 12050 OVR_FACTOR_RAPID_TRA Evaluation of the rapid traverse override switch 12060 OVR_SPIND_IS_GRAY_CODE Spindle override switch Graycoded 12070 OVR_FACTOR_SPIND_SPEED Evaluation of the spindle override switch 12080 OVR_REFERENCE_IS_PROG_FEED Ov...

Page 1782: ...LTFEED_ASSIGN_FASTIN Assignment of input bytes of NCK I Os for Multiple feeds in one block 21230 MULTFEED_STORE_MASK Store input signals for the Multiple feeds in one block function 22240 AUXFU_F_SYNC_TYPE Output timing of F functions 22410 F_VALUES_ACTIVE_AFTER_RESET F function active after RESET 5 1 3 Axis Spindle specific machine data Number Identifier MA_ Description 30300 IS_ROT_AX Rotary axi...

Page 1783: ...FEED Dry run feed 42101 DRY_RUN_FEED_MODE Dry run feed mode 42110 DEFAULT_FEED Default value for path feed 42600 JOG_FEED_PER_REV_SOURCE In the JOG mode revolutional feedrate for geometry axes on which a frame with rotation acts 43300 ASSIGN_FEED_PER_RES_SOURCE Revolutional feedrate for positioning axes 5 2 2 Axis spindle specific setting data Number Identifier SA_ Description 43210 SPIND_MIN_VELO...

Page 1784: ...Feed override active 21 12 3 Feed stop geometry axis 1 21 16 3 Feed stop geometry axis 2 21 20 3 Feed stop geometry axis 3 5 3 2 Signals from channel DB number Byte Bit Description 21 24 6 Dry run feed selected 21 25 3 Feed override for rapid traverse selected 21 29 0 29 1 29 2 29 3 Activate fixed feedrate 1 for path geometry axes Activate fixed feedrate 2 for path geometry axes Activate fixed fee...

Page 1785: ...d spindle override 31 1 7 Override active 31 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 5 Activate fixed feedrate 1 for machine axis Activate fixed feedrate 2 for machine axis Activate fixed feedrate 3 for machine axis Activate fixed feedrate 4 for machine axis 31 4 3 Feed stop spindle stop 31 62 2 Revolutional feedrate active 31 81 F function for positioning axis 31 83 1 Programmed speed too high ...

Page 1786: ...Data lists 5 3 Signals Basic logic functions Feeds V1 70 Function Manual 11 2006 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 ...

Page 1787: ...ynchronized action 52 F Feed disable 31 Feedrate disable DB21 DBX6 0 32 Feedrate FB Non modal 47 Feedrate for chamfer rounding 46 Feedrate override switch 33 Feedrate spindle stop 31 Feedrates Dry run feedrate 38 Feed disable 31 Feed override 33 37 Feedrate control 30 Feedrate spindle stop 31 feedrates in one block 40 G93 G94 G95 11 Path feedrate F 9 Rigid tapping G331 G332 28 Spindle override 36 ...

Page 1788: ...iterion 52 Programmable runin and runout paths 19 Programmable servo parameter set In the part program synchronized action 53 Programmable singleaxis dynamic response 7 48 R Rapid traverse override switch 33 Reference axis for G96 G961 G962 13 Revolutional feedrate G95 11 IS revolutional feedrate active 12 Run in and run out paths programmable 19 Run up axes 51 S SD41100 12 SD42010 19 20 21 SD4210...

Page 1789: ...A0 Valid for Control SINUMERIK 840D sl 840DE sl SINUMERIK 840Di sl 840DiE sl SINUMERIK 840D powerline 840DE powerline SINUMERIK 840Di powerline 840DiE powerline SINUMERIK 810D powerline 810DE powerline Software Version NCU system software for 840D sl 840DE sl 1 3 NCU system software for 840D sl DiE sl 1 0 NCU system software for 840D 840DE 7 4 NCU system software for 840Di 840DiE 3 3 NCU system so...

Page 1790: ...ommissioning and operation of a device system may only be performed by qualified personnel Within the context of the safety notes in this documentation qualified persons are defined as persons who are authorized to commission ground and label devices systems and circuits in accordance with established safety practices and standards Prescribed Usage Note the following Warning This device may only b...

Page 1791: ...rameter 2 40 2 3 4 Geometry tool length compensation tool parameters 3 to 5 42 2 3 5 Geometry tool radius compensation tool parameters 6 to 11 44 2 3 6 Wear tool length compensation tool parameters 12 to 14 46 2 3 7 Wear tool radius compensation tool parameters 15 to 20 46 2 3 8 Base dimension adapter dimension tool length compensation tool parameters 21 to 23 47 2 3 9 Technology tool clearance an...

Page 1792: ...OOL_LENGTH 134 2 8 3 Mirror wear lengths SD42920 SC_WEAR_SIGN_CUTPOS 135 2 8 4 Tool length and plane change SD42940 SC_TOOL_LENGTH_CONST 136 2 8 5 Tool type SD42950 SC_TOOL_LENGTH_TYPE 138 2 8 6 Temperature offsets in tool direction SD42960 SC_TOOL_TEMP_COMP 139 2 8 7 Tool lengths in the WCS allowing for the orientation 139 2 8 8 Tool length offsets in tool direction 139 2 9 Sum offsets and setup ...

Page 1793: ...ary table 186 4 1 3 Basic tool orientation example 189 4 1 4 Calculation of compensation values on a location specific and workpiece specific basis 189 4 2 Examples 3 6 SETTCOR function for tool environments 192 5 Data lists 199 5 1 Machine data 199 5 1 1 NC specific machine data 199 5 1 2 Channelspecific machine data 200 5 1 3 Axis spindlespecific machine data 201 5 2 Setting data 202 5 2 1 Chann...

Page 1794: ...Table of contents Basic logic functions Tool Offset W1 6 Function Manual 11 2006 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 ...

Page 1795: ...ius compensation Selection and deselection strategy configurable Normal or contourrelated Compensation active for all interpolation types Linear Circle Helical Spline Polynomial Involute Compensation at outer corners selectable Transition circle ellipse G450 or equidistant intersection G451 Parameterdriven adaptation of G450 G451 functions to the contour Free traversing on outer corners with G450 ...

Page 1796: ...of the description data direct from the current frame Note Please refer to the following documentation for further information on tools and tool compensations and a full technical description of the general and specific programming features for tool compensation TLC and TRC References PG Programming Manual Fundamentals Flat Unique D number structure Compensations can be selected via unique D numbe...

Page 1797: ...radius G462 If no intersection is possible between the last TRC block and a previous block the control calculates an intersection by inserting a straight line at the end point of the last block with tool radius compensation the block is extended by its end tangent Changing from G40 to G41 42 The change from G40 to G41 G42 and vice versa is no longer treated as a tool change for tools with relevant...

Page 1798: ...Short description Basic logic functions Tool Offset W1 10 Function Manual 11 2006 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 ...

Page 1799: ...th M function The new tool is changed immediately with the T function This setting is used mainly for turning machines with tool revolver Change tool with M06 MD22550 MC_TOOL_CHANGE_MODE 1 new tool compensation with M function The new tool is prepared for changing with the T function This setting is used mainly on milling machines with a tool magazine in order to bring the new tool into the tool c...

Page 1800: ...r RESET TP end Value range of T The T function accepts the following whole numbers From T0 no tool To T32000 tool number 32000 Tool cutting edge Each tool can have up to 9 cutting edges The 9 tool cutting edges are assigned to the D functions D1 to D9 7 Figure 2 1 Example of a tool T with 9 cutting edges D1 to D9 D function The tool cutting edge is programmed with D1 edge 1 to D9 edge 9 The tool c...

Page 1801: ... be activated at different times Tool length compensation TLC is performed on the first traversing motion of the axis on which the TLC is to act This traversing motion must be a linear interpolation G0 G1 POS POSA or polynomial interpolation POLY If the POS POSA axis is one of the active geometry axes the tool length compensation is applied with the first axis motion in which the WLK is supposed t...

Page 1802: ...gram using system variables Note The tools T1 to T32000 do not have to be stored in ascending order or contiguously in the tool compensation memory and the first tool does not have to be assigned number T1 Tool cutting edges Each tool can have up to 9 cutting edges D1 to D9 The first cutting edge D1 is set up automatically when a new tool is loaded in the tool compensation memory Other cutting edg...

Page 1803: ...bove compensation block is to be calculated in the NC Part program call Dn 2 1 4 Address extension for NC addresses T and M MD20096 Whether also with tool management not activated the address extension of T and M is to be interpreted as spindle number can be set through the machine data MD20096 MC_T_M_ADDRESS_EXT_IS_SPINO spindle number as address extension The same rules then apply to the referen...

Page 1804: ...ogrammed T values are displayed as programmed active regardless of the programmed address extension Only the T value programmed in relation to the master spindle is shown as programmed active when MD20096 MC_T_M_ADDRESS_EXT_IS_SPINO TRUE spindle number as address extension Example The example below shows the effect of MD20096 Two spindles are considered Spindle 1 is the master spindle M6 was defin...

Page 1805: ...D numbers are assigned to each T number The maximum number of D numbers was previously limited to 9 Functions Expansions to functions when assigning D numbers The maximum permitted D numbers are defined via the machine data MD18105 MN_MM_MAX_CUTTING_EDGE_NO Max value of the D numbers DRAM The default value is 9 in order to maintain compatibility with existing applications The number of cuts or the...

Page 1806: ...ion selection during a tool change only available via the OPI The cutting edge number CE is defined with system variable TC_DPCE t d t stands for the internal T number d stands for the D number Write accesses are monitored for collisions i e all cutting edge numbers of a tool must be different The variable TC_DPCE is a component of the cutting edge parameter data set TC_DP1 to TC_DP25 It is only p...

Page 1807: ...lue FALSE is returned Syntax errors generate an alarm The D number cannot be set explicitly to 0 GETACTTD Determines the associated T number for an absolute D number There is not check for uniqueness If several D numbers within a TO unit are the same the T number of the first tool found in the search is returned This command is not suitable for use with flat D numbers because the value 1 is always...

Page 1808: ...value of the D numbers DRAM A maximum of one compensation can be defined per tool with D number 1 Note When the Flat D numbers function is active only one D compensation can be defined in the TO unit MD18105 MN_MM_MAX_CUTTING_EDGE_NO 9999 Tools can be assigned unique D numbers For example D numbers 1 2 3 are assigned to T number 1 D numbers 10 20 30 40 50 are assigned to T number 2 D numbers 100 2...

Page 1809: ...nition of a second cutting edge for a tool MD18106 MN_MM_MAX_CUTTING_EDGE_PERTOOL 12 A maximum of 12 cutting edges can be defined per tool Programming examples Renaming a D number The D number of cutting edge CE 3 is to be renamed from 2 to 17 The following specifications apply Internal T number T 1 D number 2 Tool with one cutting edge with TC_DP2 1 2 120 TC_DP3 1 2 5 5 TC_DPCE 1 2 3 Cutting edge...

Page 1810: ...il valid D numbers are again available in the NCK The D numbers must be reassigned using the SETDNO command The following tools must be defined all with cutting edge number 1 T1 D1 D no of cutting edge CE 1 T2 D10 D no of cutting edge CE 1 T3 D100 D no of cutting edge CE 1 The following command is then programmed DZERO If one of the compensations is now activated e g with T3 D100 an alarm is gener...

Page 1811: ...rance DZERO All D numbers of the TO unit are tagged as invalid One or more loops over the locations of the magazine s to check the tools and their cutting edge numbers If a tool is found which is still enabled TC_TP8 and has the required cutting edge number CE GETDNO the new D number is allocated to the cutting edge SETDNO Loading and unloading operations are performed It is possible to work with ...

Page 1812: ...CK see machine data MD20270 MC_CUTTING_EDGE_DEFAULT MD22550 MC_TOOL_CHANGE_MODE 1 T T no Tool preparation M06 Change tool the number of the tool change M code can be changed i e when M06 is programmed a new D compensation becomes active in the NCK see machine data MD20270 MC_CUTTING_EDGE_DEFAULT The following problems can occur if tool management is not active D compensation data set missing Error...

Page 1813: ...06 programming MD22550 1 In this case an error is detected in the NC block containing the tool preparation T programming however this error is to be ignored initially Processing continues until the tool change request usually M06 is executed The program is to stop at this point The programmed T address can contain any number of program lines ahead of the M06 command or the two instructions can app...

Page 1814: ... via the appropriate alarm 17191 Note In order to enable program correction it stops immediately at the faulty Txx block The program text operation is also stopped when machine data MD22562 MC_TOOL_CHANGE_ERROR_MODE Bit0 1 response on errors in tool change 2 1 7 Definition of the effect of the tool parameters MD20360 The effect of the tool parameters on the transverse axis in connection with diame...

Page 1815: ...set by axis 2 2 Flat D number structure 2 2 1 General Simple tool management Simple tool management no replacement tools no magazines using D numbers is possible for turning machines The function is available in the basic level of tool management without tool management function activated Grinding tools cannot be defined using this function Activation Which type of D number management is valid may...

Page 1816: ...is activated Flat D number function inactive TC_DPx t d value where t T number d D number A D number can only be assigned once for each tool i e each D number stands for exactly one compensation data block A new data block is stored in the NCK memory when a D number that does not exist is created for the first time The maximum number of D or offset data blocks max 600 is set via the machine data M...

Page 1817: ... at a given time Direct absolute programming Programming in the part program is carried out as before Only the value range of the programmed D number is increased Example 1 MD22550 MC_TOOL_CHANGE_MODE 0 new tool compensation with M function MD18102 MN_MM_TYPE_OF_CUTTING_EDGE 1 type of D number programming MD20270 MC_CUTTING_EDGE_DEFAULT 1 Basic setting of tool cutting edge without programming D92 ...

Page 1818: ...D22550 MC_TOOL_CHANGE_MODE new tool compensation with M function is 0 Spindle No 2 is not the master spindle Part program Action T4 Tool change command NCK outputs the value 4 as T auxiliary function PLC evaluates it and provides the associated absolute D numbers in the VDI The PLC only does this if the address extension received is the number of the master spindle A simple communication protocol ...

Page 1819: ...ry the next D number request from the NCK waits until the counter value has changed The VDI then contains the new D number table which belongs to the previously programmed value Note D can only be programmed without an address extension D always refers to the master spindle T can be programmed with an address extension PLC only has to write the D compensations to VDI for T values or M6 commands wi...

Page 1820: ...LUE tool cutting edge length compens During ramp up MD20121 MC_TOOL_PRESEL_RESET_VALUE Preselected tool at RESET MD22550 MC_TOOL_CHANGE_MODE new tool compensation with M function MD22560 MC_TOOL_CHANGE_M_CODE M function for tool change MD20110 MC_RESET_MODE_MASK Determination of control default settings after RESET TP end MD20112 MC_START_MODE_MASK Definition of the control default settings in cas...

Page 1821: ...t is M6 An address extension of M6 is interpreted as a spindle number Example Two spindles are defined spindle 1 and spindle 2 and the following applies MD20090 2 Spindle no 2 is the master spindle M6 Tool change desired command refers implicitly to the master spindle M1 6 No tool change since spindle no 2 is the master spindle M2 6 Tool is changed since spindle no 2 is the master spindle 2 2 6 Pr...

Page 1822: ...t it only makes sense to employ tool management when specific tools have been defined and these are to be utilized by the NCK Flat D number Flat D number means that tool management is carried out outside the NCK and there is no reference made to T numbers No mixture of tool management and flat D no It does not make sense to mix or distribute the tool management functions over the NCK and PLC since...

Page 1823: ...nological description and the tool type are mapped to tool parameters for each tool cutting edge Milling cutter types 111 120 121 130 155 156 and 157 are given special treatment for 3D face milling by evaluating tool parameters 1 23 For more information about the different tool types please refer to References FB1 Description of Function Manual Basic Functions Tool Compensation W1 Chapter Section ...

Page 1824: ...old angle for 3D face milling with 2D TRC contour tool 11 Angle 2 minimum threshold angle for 3D face milling with 2D TRC contour tool Wear tool length compensation 12 Length 1 13 Length 2 14 Length 3 Wear tool radius compensation 15 Radius 1 Length 1 for 3D face milling 16 Length 2 for 3D face milling 17 Radius 1 for 3D face milling 18 Radius 2 for 3D face milling 19 Angle 1 minimum limit angle f...

Page 1825: ...ype tool parameters Significance A 3digit number is used to define the tool type The selection of this tool type determines further components such as geometry wear and tool base dimensions in advance The tool type has no significance in the turning tool groups Nonlisted numbers are also permitted in particular with grinding tools 400 499 ...

Page 1826: ...ZLWK FRUQHU URXQGLQJ DQJOH KHDG FXWWHU DQJOH KHDG FXWWHU ZLWK FRUQHU URXQGLQJ IDFH PLOO WKUHDG PLOO VLGH PLOO WUXQFDWHG FRQH PLOO WZLVW GULOO VROLG ELW GULOOLQJ URG FHQWHU GULOO FRXQWHUVLQN SLORWHG FRXQWHUERUH WDS GULOO UHJXODU WKUHDG WDS GULOO ILQH WKUHDG WDS GULOO KLWZRUWK WKUHDG UHDPHU JULQGLQJ WRROV DQG WXUQLQJ WRROV SHULSKHUDO JULQGLQJ ZKHHO SHULSKHUDO JULQGLQJ ZKHHO ZLWK PRQLWRULQJ ZLH DEHU ...

Page 1827: ...fined Tool compensation data for slotting saw type The following compensation data TOA data can be specified for the slotting saw tool type type 700 Geometry Wear Base Einheit Length compensation Length 1 TC_DP3 TC_DP12 TC_DP21 mm Length 2 TC_DP4 TC_DP13 TC_DP22 mm Length 3 TC_DP5 TC_DP14 TC_DP23 mm Saw blade compensation Diameter d TC_DP6 TC_DP15 mm Slot width b TC_DP7 TC_DP16 mm Projection k TC_...

Page 1828: ... compensation right 2 3 3 Cutting edge position tool parameter 2 Tool radius compensation for turning tools The control also needs the following parameters in order to calculate the tool radius compensation for turning tools tool type 5xx Cutting edge position tool parameter 2 Cutting edge radius tool parameter 8 5 3 6 7RRO KROGHU UHIHUHQFH SRLQW 5 XWWLQJ HGJH UDGLXV WRRO UDGLXV 6 XWWLQJ HGJH FHQW...

Page 1829: ...n to the cutting edge center point S The cutting edge position is entered in tool parameter 2 shown as P2 in the figure 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 6 3 3 3 6 Figure 2 6 Tool parameter 2 P2 Machining behind the turning center 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 6 3 3 3 6 Figure 2 7 Tool parameter 2 P2 Machining in front of the turning center 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 6 3 3 3 6 Figure 2 8 Tool parameter 2 P2 Cutting edge position for vertic...

Page 1830: ...ed as a minimum for each tool type Tool type 12x 140 145 150 Tool length 1 Tool type 13x Tool length 1 to 3 depending on plane G17 G19 Tool type 2xx Tool length 1 Tool type 5xx Tool length 1 to 3 Note All three tool parameters 3 to 5 tool length 1 to 3 are always calculated in the three geometry axes irrespective of the tool type If more tool lengths than the minimum required are entered in tool p...

Page 1831: ...200 with tool length tool parameter 3 Special points to be noted The active size of the tool is only defined when the geometry tool length compensation tool parameters 3 to 5 and the wear tool length compensation tool parameters 12 to 14 are added together The base dimension adapter dimension tool length compensation is also added in order to calculate the total tool length compensation in the geo...

Page 1832: ...rmations Section Three four and five fold transformations TRAORI Otherwise On SINUMERIK 840D 810D only tool parameter 6 tool radius 1 is used as standard from tool parameters 6 to 11 For 2D TRC with contour tools additionally to the tool parameters 10 and 11 a minimum or maximum limit angle can be defined for the cutting edge compensation when using multiple tool cutting edges Please refer to the ...

Page 1833: ...position tool parameter 2 also has to be entered for turning tools tool type 5xx Tool radius 2 Not used Tool angle 1 Not used Tool angle 2 Not used 2D TRC with contour tools For the definition of contour tools with multiple tool cutting edges the minimum and maximum limit angle can be entered Both limit angles each relate to the vector of the cutting edge center point to the cutting edge reference...

Page 1834: ...ensation tool parameters 3 to 5 and the wear tool length compensation tool parameters 12 to 14 are added together geometry tool length 1 is added to wear tool length 1 etc to arrive at the size of the active tool 2 3 7 Wear tool radius compensation tool parameters 15 to 20 Meaning While geometry tool radius compensation tool parameters 6 to 11 is used to define the shape of the tool wear tool radi...

Page 1835: ...measured separately but are installed on the machine in one unit the tool size and adapter size are entered separately in a cutting edge The tool is used in a second tool fixture located in another position e g vertical and horizontal spindle The tool fixtures of a tool turret are located at different positions HQJWK HQJWK 7XUQLQJ FHQWHU HQJWK HQJWK 7RROKROGHU UHIHUHQFH SRLQWV 7RROKROGHU UHIHUHQFH...

Page 1836: ...Note Please refer to the following documentation for more information about base dimension adapter dimension tool length compensation References PG Programming Manual Fundamentals 2 3 9 Technology tool clearance angle tool parameter 24 Meaning Certain turning cycles in which traversing motions with tool clearance are generated monitor the tool clearance angle of the active tool for possible contou...

Page 1837: ...d face machining two cutting edges must be entered for different tool clearance angles 7RRO FOHDUDQFH DQJOH IRU ORQJLWXGLQDO PDFKLQLQJ 7RRO FOHDUDQFH DQJOH IRU IDFH PDFKLQLQJ Figure 2 13 Tool clearance angle for longitudinal and face machining Note If a tool clearance angle tool parameter 24 of zero is entered relief cutting is not monitored in the turning cycles Please refer to the following docu...

Page 1838: ...rsection points with the approach and retraction block The difference between the tool edge reference point and the tool edge center point is superimposed on this movement For approach and or retraction with KONT the movement is superimposed in the linear subblock of the approach or retraction movement Therefore the geometric conditions for tools with or without relevant tool point direction are i...

Page 1839: ...ool edge reference point to the tool edge center point can no longer be performed by means of a simple zero offset Tools with a relevant tool point direction are therefore not permitted for 3D peripheral milling an alarm is output Note The subject is irrelevant with respect to face milling as only defined tool types without relevant tool point direction are permitted for this operation anyway A to...

Page 1840: ...WDQW SDWK RUNSLHFH FRQWRXU Figure 2 15 Workpiece contour geometry with equidistant path TRC on the plane TRC is active on the current plane G17 to G19 for the following types of interpolation Linear interpolation G0 G1 Circular interpolation G2 G3 CIP Helical interpolation G2 G3 Spline interpolation ASPLINE BSPLINE CSPLINE Polynomial interpolation POLY 2 4 2 Selecting the TRC G41 G42 Direction of ...

Page 1841: ...pensation selection Tool radius compensation is not selected with a tool cutting edge tool compensation of D0 If only one geometry axis is programmed on the plane when tool radius compensation is selected the second axis is automatically added on the plane last programmed position If no geometry axis is programmed for the current plane in the block with the tool radius compensation selection no se...

Page 1842: ... Q IURQW RI FRQWRXU 3 3 3 3 5 5 5 RQWRXU 2 DPSOH RI VHOHFWLQJ 75 ZLWK 1250 EHKLQG WKH FRQWRXU DPSOH RI VHOHFWLQJ 75 ZLWK 217 EHKLQG WKH FRQWRXU DQG RQWRXU YLRODWLRQ 3 3 3 3 Figure 2 16 Example for selecting TRC with KONT or NORM in front of and behind the contour KONT and G450 G451 corner behavior at outer corners has a general effect and determines the approach and retraction behavior with TRC Wh...

Page 1843: ... KONTC can produce undesired contours Axes The continuity condition is observed in all three axes It is thus possible to program a simultaneous path component perpendicular to the compensation plane for approach retraction Only linear blocks are permitted for the original approach and retraction blocks with KONTT KONTC These programmed linear blocks are replaced in the control by the corresponding...

Page 1844: ... Y0 Z60 N50 M30 Explanation In this example a full circle with a radius of 70 mm is machined in the X Y plane Since the tool has a radius of 10 mm the resulting tool center point path describes a circle with a radius of 60 mm The start end points are at X0 Y0 Z60 with the result that a movement takes place in the Z direction at the same time as the approach retraction movement in the compensation ...

Page 1845: ...therefore moves along a circular path with radius 40 mm The end point of the approach blocks is at X40 Y30 The transition between the circular block and the retraction block is at the zero point Due to the extended continuity of curvature associated with KONTC the retraction block first executes a movement with a negative Y component This will often be undesired This response does not occur with t...

Page 1846: ...ions Tool Offset W1 58 Function Manual 11 2006 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 2177 217 Figure 2 19 Differences between KONTT and KONTC Note The figure shows that a straight line bordering on the contour quadrant e g to X20 Y 20 would be violated with KONTC on retraction approach to X0 Y0 ...

Page 1847: ...ters The two functions smooth approach and smooth retraction are largely symmetrical The following section is therefore restricted to a detailed description of approach special reference is made to differences affecting retraction Sub movements There are maximum 4 sub movements in case of soft retraction and approach with the following positions Start point of the movement P0 Intermediate points P...

Page 1848: ...ed G147 Approach with a straight line G148 Retraction with a straight line G247 Approach with a quadrant G248 Retraction with a quadrant G347 Approach with a semicircle G348 Retraction with a semicircle 3 ZKHQ DSSURDFKLQJ ZLWK D VWUDLJKW OLQH 3 ZKHQ DSSURDFKLQJ ZLWK D TXDGUDQW 3 ZKHQ DSSURDFKLQJ ZLWK D VHPLFLUFOH 7RRO FHQWHU SRLQW SDWK 7RRO FHQWHU SDWK 7RRO FHQWHU SDWK 7RRO 7RRO RQWRXU RQWRXU RQWR...

Page 1849: ... the approach and retraction side is determined as if the tool radius were positive G141 Approach contour from left or retract to the left G142 Approach contour from right or retract to the right G143 Automatic determination of the approach direction i e the contour is approached from the side where the start point is located relative to the tangent at the start point of the following block P4 Not...

Page 1850: ...nd point P4 a helix is inserted instead of a circle Point P2 is not defined or coincides with P3 The circle plane or the helix axis is determined by the plane which is active in the SAR block G17 G19 i e the projection of the start tangent is used by the following block instead of the tangent itself to define the circle The movement from point P0 to point P3 takes place along two straight lines at...

Page 1851: ... An alarm is output on approach and retraction with circles If the radius of the circle generated internally is zero or negative If DISR is not programmed If the radius value 0 DISCL DISCLspecifies the distance from point P2 from the machining plane If the position of point P2 is to be specified by an absolute reference on the axis perpendicular to the circle plane the value must be programmed in ...

Page 1852: ...of end point P4 to be greater than that of start point P0 Programming the end point P4 or P0 for retraction generally with X Y Z Possible ways of programming the end point P4for approach End point P4 can be programmed in the actual SAR block P4 can be determined by the end point of the next traversing block Further blocks dummy blocks can be inserted between the SAR block and the next traversing b...

Page 1853: ...We distinguish between the following situations 1 No geometry axis is programmed in the SAR block In this case the contour ends at point P2 or at point P1 if P1 and P2 coincide The position in the axes which describe the machining plane is determined by the retraction contour end point of the straight line or arc The axis component perpendicular to this is defined by DISCL If in this case DISCL 0 ...

Page 1854: ...P0 already directly defines the position of the tool center point at the end of the complete contour The start and end points of the SAR contour P0 and P4 can coincide on approach and retraction Velocity of the preceding block typically G0 All movements from point P0 to point P2 are performed at this velocity i e the movement parallel to the machining plane and the part of the infeed movement up t...

Page 1855: ...TC_DP6 1 1 7 Tool with 7mm radius N10 G90 G0 X0 Y0 Z20 D1 T1 N20 G41 G341 G247 DISCL AC 5 DISR 13FAD 500 X40 Y 10 Z 0 F2000 N30 X50 N40 X60 Programming feed F This feed value is effective from point P3 or from point P2 if FAD is not programmed If no F command is programmed in the SAR block the speed of the preceding block is valid The velocity defined by FAD is not used for following blocks ...

Page 1856: ...O SURJUDPPHG 2QO SURJUDPPHG DQG SURJUDPPHG 9HORFLW RI SUHFHGLQJ EORFN ROG FRPPDQG QIHHG YHORFLW SURJUDPPHG ZLWK 1HZ PRGDO YHORFLW SURJUDPPHG ZLWK 5DSLG WUDYHUVH LI LV DFWLYH RWKHUZLVH ZLWK WKH ROG RU QHZ FRPPDQG 3 3 3 3 3 Figure 2 22 Velocities in the SAR subblocks on approach with G340 1R YHORFLW SURJUDPPHG 2QO SURJUDPPHG 2QO SURJUDPPHG DQG SURJUDPPHG 9HORFLW RI SUHFHGLQJ EORFN ROG FRPPDQG QIHHG ...

Page 1857: ...k always applies for the path from P4 to P2 G0 has no effect in these blocks Traversing from P2 to P0 takes place with the F command programmed in the SAR block or if no F command is programmed with the modal F command from a preceding block This applies on the condition that G0 is not active If rapid traverse is to be used on retraction in the blocks from P2 to P0 G0 must be activated before the ...

Page 1858: ...contain traversing information for geometry axes It is always output however because further actions e g single axes may have to be executed in this block At least two blocks must always be taken into consideration The SAR block itself The block which defines the approach or retraction direction Further blocks can be programmed between these two blocks The number of possible dummy blocks is limite...

Page 1859: ... 4 4 6 Examples Example 1 The following conditions must be true Smooth approach is activated in block N20 X 40 end point Y 0 Z 0 Approach movement performed with quadrant G247 Approach direction not programmed G140 is valid i e because TRC is active G42 and compensation value is positive 10 the contour is approached from the right Approach circle generated internally SAR contour has radius 20 so t...

Page 1860: ...dius of the tool center path is equal to DISR 10 The end point of the circle is obtained from N30 since only the Z position is programmed in N20 Infeed movement From Z20 to Z7 DISCL AC 7 with rapid traverse Then on to Z0 with FAD 200 Approach circle in X Y plane and following blocks with F1500 In order that this velocity becomes effective in the following blocks the active G code G0 in N30 must be...

Page 1861: ...0 DISCL AC 7 DISR 10 F1500 FAD 200 P3app N30 G1 X30 Y 10 P4app N40 X40 Z2 N50 X50 P4ret N60 G248 G340 X70 Y0 Z20 DISCL 6 DISR 5 G40 F10000 P3ret N70 X80 Y0 P0ret N80 M 30 Note The contour generated in this way is modified by tool radius compensation which is activated in the SAR approach block and deactivated in the SAR retraction block The tool radius compensation allows for an effective radius o...

Page 1862: ...metry axis is programmed in the block with the tool radius compensation deselection then the compensation is deselected even if it is not on the current plane 2 4 6 Compensation at outside corners G450 G451 The G functions G450 G451 can be used to control the response with discontinuous block transitions at outside corners Command Significance G450 Discontinuous block transitions with transition c...

Page 1863: ... see DISC DISC The G450 transition circle does not produce sharp outside contour corners because the path of the tool center point through the transition circle is controlled so that the cutting edge stops at the outside corner programmed position When sharp outside corners are to be machined with G450 the DISC instruction can be used to program an overshoot Thus the transition circle becomes a co...

Page 1864: ...HUVH RYHUVKRRW 5 UDGLXV RQWRXU DQJOH GHJUHHV 6 6 5 6 Figure 2 29 Overshoot with DISC depending on contour angle G451 intersection If G function G451 is active the position intersection resulting from the path lines straight line circle or helix only located at a distance of the tool radius to the programmed contour center point path of the tool is approached Spines and polynomials are never extend...

Page 1865: ...tem switches automatically from G451 intersection to G450 transition circle with DISC where appropriate when outside corners are very pointed The threshold angle contour angle for this automatic switchover intersection point transition circle can be specified in the machine data MD20210 MC_CUTCOM_CORNER_LIMIT Max angle for compensation blocks with tool radius compensation RQJ LGOH SDWKV RQWRXU DQJ...

Page 1866: ...th 5 axis machining is that this would impose restrictions on speed in contouring mode G64 Therefore the system switches automatically from G450 transition circle with DISC where appropriate to G451 intersection when outside corners are very flat The threshold angle contour angle for this automatic switchover transition circle intersection point can be specified in the machine data MD20230 MC_CUTC...

Page 1867: ...nside corner an attempt is made to find a point at which the two equidistant paths intersect If an intersection is found the programmed contour is shortened to the intersection first block shortened at end second block shortened at beginning 6KRUWHQHG FRQWRXU Figure 2 32 Example of a shortened contour No intersection In certain cases no intersection is found between two consecutive blocks for insi...

Page 1868: ... blocks defined via machine data has been reached MD20240 MC_CUTCOM_MAXNUM_CHECK_BLOCKS blocks for predictive contour calculation for TRC If no intersection is found within the number of blocks defined for the check program execution is interrupted and an alarm is output 1 6 1 1 Figure 2 33 If there is no intersection between N30 and block N40 the intersection between block N30 and block N50 is ca...

Page 1869: ...11 2006 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 81 QWHUVHFWLRQV 6 DQG 6 DUH QRW DSSURDFKHG 6 6 6 Figure 2 34 Example Inside corner with TRC without contour violation predicting 3 blocks Special points to be noted Where multiple intersections with the next block are found the intersection nearest the start of the next block applies ...

Page 1870: ...ion detection OFF CDOF2 Collision detection OFF With CDOF the search for an intersection initially examines two consecutive blocks Other blocks are not included in the search If an intersection is found between adjacent blocks no further blocks are examined With outside corners an intersection can always be found between two consecutive blocks Predictive examination of more than two adjacent block...

Page 1871: ...N_SUPPRES_ALARM_MASK Mask for suppressing special alarm outputs Special points to be noted When the intersections of non consecutive blocks are checked it is not the programmed original contours that are examined but the associated calculated equidistant paths This can result in a bottleneck being falsely detected at outside corners The reason for this is that the calculated tool path does not run...

Page 1872: ...riable compensation value Supplementary conditions A variable compensation value is permissible for all types of interpolation including circular and spine interpolation It is also permitted to change the sign and therefore the compensation side 7RRO FHQWHU SDWK 3URJUDPPHG FRQWRXU 1 1 1 1 1 Figure 2 36 Tool radius compensation with variable compensation value ...

Page 1873: ...FHQWHU SDWK 1 1 1 Figure 2 37 Intersection calculation with variable compensation value Restrictions If during machining on the inside of the circle the compensation radius becomes geater than the programmed circle radius then the machining is rejected with the following alarm Alarm 10758 Curvature radius with variable compensation value too small Maintain stability of closed contour If a radius o...

Page 1874: ... circumferential milling Normal case Tool radius compensation is normally active before the compensation suppression and is still active when the compensation suppression is deactivated again In the last traversing block before CUTCONON the offset point in the block end point is approached All following blocks in which compensation suppression is active are traversed without compensation However t...

Page 1875: ...adius N40 N50 X0 Y0 Z0 G1 G17 T1 D1 F10000 N60 N70 X20 G42 NORM N80 X30 N90 Y20 N100 X10 CUTCONON Activate compensation suppression N110 Y30 KONT On deactivation of contour suppression insert bypass circle if necessary N120 X 10 CUTCONOF N130 Y20 NORM No bypass circle on deactivation of TRC N140 X0 Y0 G40 N150 M30 RQWRXU ZLWKRXW 75 RQWRXU ZLWK 75 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Figure 2 38 Sample program for cont...

Page 1876: ...he contour with CUTCONOF the 17th G code group approach and retraction behavior with tool compensation NORM KONT is evaluated i e a bypass circle is inserted if necessary for KONT A bypass circle is inserted under the same conditions as for activation of tool radius compensation with G41 or G42 The number of blocks with suppressed tool radius compensation is restricted MD20252 MC_CUTCOM_MAXNUM_SUP...

Page 1877: ...the end of the block currently being interpolated if Look Ahead is active once the axes have come to a stop Alarms for preprocessing stop and active tool radius compensation Tool radius compensation generally requires at least one of the following traversing blocks even more for bottlenecks to determine the end point of a block Since the preprocessing stop of such a block is not available traversi...

Page 1878: ...lynomials Either a conic is inserted to bypass the corner Or The curves involved are extrapolated to form an intersection If no intersection is found with G451 activated or if the angle formed by the two curves is too steep switchover to insert mode is automatic The intersection procedure for polynomials is released with the machine data MD20256 MC_CUTCOM_INTERS_POLY_ENABLE Intersection process po...

Page 1879: ...0 Y0 N10 X0 N20 Y10 N30 G40 X50 Y50 HQWHU SRLQW SDWK ZLWK 7RRO UDGLXV FRPSHQVDWLRQ 3URJUDPPHG FRQWRXU 7RRO UDGLXV 1 1 1 Figure 2 39 Retraction behavior with G460 The last block with active tool radius compensation N20 is so short that an intersection no longer exists between the offset curve and the preceding block or a previous block for the current tool radius An intersection between the offset ...

Page 1880: ...U X LOLDU FXUYH 1 1 1 Figure 2 40 Retraction behavior with G461 The control attempts to cut this circle with one of the preceding blocks If CDOF is active the search is terminated when an intersection is found i e the system does not check for more intersections with even earlier blocks If CDON is active the search for more intersections continues after the first intersection is found An intersect...

Page 1881: ...in the sample program is not machined to the full extent actually possible with the tool used However this behavior may be necessary if the part contour as distinct from the programmed contour to the left of N20 in the example is not permitted to be violated even with y values greater than 10 mm If KONT is active travel round contour at start or end point behavior will differ according to whether ...

Page 1882: ... circle still has to be traversed An intersection calculation is no longer required for the linear section of the retraction block In the second case if no intersection is found between the inserted contour element and the preceding blocks the intersection between the retraction straight line and a preceding block is approached Therefore when G461 or G462 is active behavior deviating from G460 can...

Page 1883: ... following requirements must be met if the control is to take tool compensations into account for toolholders with orientation capability Tool data geometry wear etc Toolholder data data for the geometry of the toolholder with orientation capability Toolholder selection A toolholder defined in the control must be specified for the Toolholder with orientation capability function The NC program comm...

Page 1884: ...ion capability Example Cardan toolholder with two axes for the tool orientation 9DULDQW 9DULDQW Figure 2 42 Cardan toolholder with two axes Processing toolholder data blocks Two options are available Explicit entry in the toolholder data block from the part program Automatic acceptance of certain values angles from a frame A requirement for this is that TCOFR Tool Carrier Orientation FRame is also...

Page 1885: ...ensation components Angles in the toolholder data The programmed angles of rotation stored in the toolholder data are not affected by the angle of rotation defined by the frames When changing from TCOFR to TCOABS the original programmed angles of rotation in the toolholder data are reactivated Tool compensation types TRC takes account of the current tool orientation when CUT2D or CUT3DFS is active...

Page 1886: ...ry angle pairs Of these two the control selects the setting with which the rotary angle is as close as possible to the programmed rotary angle Storing angles in the toolholder data In virtually any case where ambiguities may arise it is necessary to store the approximate angle expected from the frame in the toolholder data Parameter sets A complete set of parameters for a toolholder with orientati...

Page 1887: ... 14153 Channel 1 block 2 unknown tool carrier type 3 Rotary axis parameters TC_CARR24 to TC_CARR33 The system variables in TC_CARR24 to TC_CARR33 can be used to define offsets angle compensations Hirth tooth system and axis limits Note The system variables are available with and without active tool management Components and presetting of the chain data block The values TC_CARR1 to TC_CARR20 and TC...

Page 1888: ... REAL 0 z component of rotary axis v2 TC_CARR12 REAL 0 Angle of rotation α1 in degrees TC_CARR13 REAL 0 Angle of rotation α2 in degrees TC_CARR14 REAL 0 x component of offset vector l3 TC_CARR15 REAL 0 y component of offset vector l3 TC_CARR16 REAL 0 z component of offset vector l3 TC_CARR17 REAL 0 x component of offset vector l4 TC_CARR18 REAL 0 y component of offset vector l4 TC_CARR19 REAL 0 z ...

Page 1889: ...ARR40 REAL 0 x comp fine offset of offset vector l1 TC_CARR41 REAL 0 y comp fine offset of offset vector l1 TC_CARR42 REAL 0 z comp fine offset of offset vector l1 TC_CARR43 REAL 0 x comp fine offset of offset vector l2 TC_CARR44 REAL 0 y comp fine offset of offset vector l2 TC_CARR45 REAL 0 z comp fine offset of offset vector l2 TC_CARR46 REAL 0 x comp fine offset of offset vector l3 TC_CARR55 RE...

Page 1890: ...icitly programmed or calculated from the active frame must then also be zero since the direction of the rotating axis is not defined If this condition is not satisfied an alarm is produced when the toolholder is activated Less than two rotating axes The option not to define a rotating axis makes sense when the toolholder to be described can only rotate the tool in one plane A sensible minimum data...

Page 1891: ... Machine with rotary tool On machines with rotary tool there is no change in the definition of the kinematics compared to older software versions The newly introduced vector l4 in particular has no significance Should the contents of l4 not be zero this is ignored The term Toolholder with orientation capability is actually no longer really appropriate for the new kinematic types with which the tab...

Page 1892: ...LQH UHIHUHQFH SRLQW 5HIHUHQFH SRLQW RI WKH WRRO WDEOH O Y Y O O Figure 2 44 Kinematic chain to describe a rotary table Vectors which describe offsets in the rotary table are positive in the direction from the machine reference point to the table The following kinematic type is defined for machines with a rotary workpiece TC_CARR23 using letter P Note On machines with rotary workpiece it is general...

Page 1893: ...ROKROGHU 7RRO RULHQWDWLRQ 5HIHUHQFH SRLQW RI WKH WRRO 0DFKLQH UHIHUHQFH SRLQW 5HIHUHQFH SRLQW RI WKH WRRO WDEOH O O Y O O Y Figure 2 45 Kinematic sequence with extended kinematics The following kinematic type is defined for machines with a rotary tool and rotary workpiece TC_CARR23 using letter M extended kinematics Note On machines with extended kinematics it is generally useful as with machines ...

Page 1894: ...TC_CARR65 available for the fine offset see References PGA Programming Manual Work Preparation Tool Compensations Activation The following setting adds the fine offset values to the basic values SD42974 SC_TOCARR_FINE_CORRECTION 1 fine offset TCARR on off Supplementary conditions The amount is limited to the permissible fine offset The maximum permissible value is defined For With machine data The...

Page 1895: ...α1 and α2 are zero is as in the default case G17 Parallel to Z G18 Parallel to Y for G19 Parallel to X Assigning data to the toolholder Example of a machine with rotary toolholder The following settings are obtained at the mill head shown for a machine with toolholder with orientation capability of kinematic type T Component of the offset vector l1 200 0 0 Component of the offset vector l2 0 0 0 C...

Page 1896: ...a Suitable assumptions were made for the following values in the data block The two rotary axes intersect at one point All components of l2 are therefore zero The first rotary axis lies in the x z plane the second rotary axis is parallel to the x axis These conditions define the directions of v1 and v2 the lengths are irrelevant provided that they are not equal to zero The reference point of the t...

Page 1897: ... y component of rotary axis v1 TC_CARR8 0 z component of rotary axis v1 TC_CARR9 0 x component of rotary axis v2 TC_CARR10 1 y component of rotary axis v2 TC_CARR11 0 z component of rotary axis v2 TC_CARR12 1 Angle of rotation α1 in degrees TC_CARR13 0 Angle of rotation α2 in degrees TC_CARR14 0 x component of offset vector l3 TC_CARR15 100 y component of offset vector l3 TC_CARR16 0 z component o...

Page 1898: ...axes describes an extension of the concept of toolholders with orientation capability and applies this concept to machines with a rotary table on which the orientation of tool and table can be changed simultaneously The Inclined machining with 3 2 axes function is used to machine surfaces with any rotation with reference to the main planes X Y G17 Z X G18 and Y Z G19 It is possible to produce any ...

Page 1899: ... The remaining two values are variable and are used to specify the orientation The constant values describe offsets and directions and setting options for the rotary axes the variable values describe the angles of the rotary axes 2 5 4 Machine with rotary work table System variables To date the angles stored in TC_CARR13 and TC_CARR14 were used for the calculation of the active tool length with TC...

Page 1900: ... frame the increments are scaled after determination of the angle from the active frame rotation If the requested orientation is not possible due to the machine kinematic the machining is aborted with an alarm This also applies if the target orientation is very close to an achievable orientation In particular the alarm in such situations cannot be prevented through the angle approximation TCARR fr...

Page 1901: ...egrees about the Y axis The coordinate system is not rotated relative to the actual environment marked in the figure with Position of the coordinate system after TCARR but is rotated by 45 degrees relative to the defined coordinate system position after PAROT If this coordinate system is defined with ROT Y 45 for example and if the toolholder is then selected with active TCOFR an angle of 45 degre...

Page 1902: ...hen no longer required for the zero offset MD20184 MC_TOCARR_BASE_FRAME_NUMBER Number of the basic frames for taking the table offset Activation of kinematic type M With kinematics of type M tool and table are each rotary around one axis the activation of a toolholder with TCARR simultaneously produces a corresponding change in the effective tool length if a tool is active and the zero offset Rota...

Page 1903: ...OROT take into account the overall change in orientation in cases where the table or the tool are oriented with two rotary axes With mixed kinematics only the corresponding component caused by a rotary axis is considered It is thus possible for example when using TOROT to rotate a workpiece such that an oblique plane lies parallel to the XY plane fixed in space whereby rotation of the tool must be...

Page 1904: ...scription of Functions Extended Functions Memory Configurations S7 2 Zero setting of toolholder data You can use the command TC_CARR1 0 0 to zero all values of all data sets Individual toolholder data sets can be deleted selectively with the NC command DELTC or the PI service _N_DELTCAR 3 Accessing the data of a toolholder Part program TC_CARRn m value This describes the previous value of the syst...

Page 1905: ... ABSolute Tool orientation is determined explicitly if the corresponding values are entered in system variable TC_CARR13 or TC_CARR14 and G code TCOABS is activated in G code group 42 Frame tool orientation TCOFR Tool Carrier Orientation FRame Tool orientation can also be determined automatically from the current orientation of an active frame when selecting a tool if one of the following G codes ...

Page 1906: ...9 which is active at the time TOFRAME is called determines the tool orientation If no toolholder is active or if a toolholder is active but does not cause the tool orientation to change the Z direction in the new frame is The same as the old Z direction with G17 The same as the old Y direction with G18 The same as the old X direction with G19 These directions are modified accordingly for rotating ...

Page 1907: ... as before The two remaining G codes of group 22 CUT3DC and CUT3DF are not affected by the toolholder functionality because the tool orientation information in these cases is made available by the active kinematic transformation Two rotary axes Two general solutions exist for two rotary axes The control itself chooses these two solution pairs such that the orientation angles resulting from the fra...

Page 1908: ...t values Limit angles software limits can be specified for each rotary axis in the system variable set TC_CARR30 to TC_CARR33 used to describe the toolholder with orientation capability These limits are not evaluated if both the minimum and maximum value is zero If at least one of the two limits is not equal to zero the system checks whether the previously calculated solution is within the permiss...

Page 1909: ...olholder data set is already defined read with value TC_CARRn m Value must be a REAL variable The toolholder dataset number must lie in the range which is defined by the machine data MD18088 MN_MM_NUM_TOOL_CARRIER Total number of toolholder datasets that can be defined This number of toolholder data sets divided by the number of active channels can be defined for a channel Exception If settings wh...

Page 1910: ...ed from the various possible angles Note For more explanations on the programming of tool compensations with toolholder kinematic and for the system variables see References PGA Programming Manual Work Preparation 2 5 7 Supplementary conditions and control system response for orientation Full orientation For a given data set that describes a certain kinematic all the conceivable special orientatio...

Page 1911: ... initial control system settings at NC START References FB1 Function Manual Basic Functions Mode Group Channel Program Operation Reset Response K1 SW 6 3 and higher If TCOABS was active for the last selection before reset the behavior is unchanged compared to previous versions A different active G code causes the toolholder with orientation capability to be activated with the frame that was active...

Page 1912: ...xes required to define the kinematics are not perpendicular to each other This applies if fewer than two rotary axes are defined and is the case With kinematic type T with rotary tool if the tool axis which defines the tool direction is not perpendicular to the second axis With kinematic types M and P with rotary workpiece if the tool axis which defines the tool direction is not perpendicular to t...

Page 1913: ...l compensation with incremental programming Scratch workpiece with tool tip Save the actual position in the basic frame set actual value after reducing it by the tool compensation Traverse incrementally from the zero position Activation With setting data SD42442 SC_TOOL_OFFSET_INCR_PROG it is possible to define whether a changed tool length is traversed with FRAME and incremental programming of an...

Page 1914: ...during oblique machining operations but the tool cannot be set exactly perpendicular because an indexed toolholder Hirth tooth system is restricting the setting of the tool orientation In these cases it is then necessary contrary to the motion actually requested perpendicular to the plane to drill in the tool direction as the drill would otherwise not be guided in the direction of its longitudinal...

Page 1915: ...with G17 in Z direction with G18 in Y direction and with G19 in X direction This applies both where no toolholder with orientation capability is active and for the case of a toolholder with orientation capability without rotary tool or with a rotary tool in its basic setting MOVT acts similarly for active orientation transformation 345axis transformation If in a block with MOVT the tool orientatio...

Page 1916: ... variable Description of tool orientation Format Preassignment TC_DPV t d Tool cutting edge orientation INT 0 TC_DPV3 t d L1 component of tool orientation REAL 0 TC_DPV4 t d L2 component of tool orientation REAL 0 TC_DPV5 t d L3 component of tool orientation REAL 0 Indexing Same as tool system variable TC_DPx t d t T number of cutting edge d D number of cutting edge Identifiers TC_DPV3 to TC_DPV5 ...

Page 1917: ...ls G18 Milling tools G17 The active tool orientation is unchanged in these cases and is equivalent to the original settings in TC_DPVx t d The basic orientation is always the direction perpendicular to the plane in which tool radius compensation is performed With turning tools in particular the tool orientation generally coincides with the longitudinal tool axis The setting data specified below ar...

Page 1918: ...o be performed in order to interchange the components of the tool length vector on a change of plane The basic orientation is also rotated when an adapter transformation is active If the following setting data is not equal to zero the tool orientation is not rotated on a change of plane SD42940 SC_TOOL_LENGTH_CONST change of tool length components on change of planes Tool length components The com...

Page 1919: ...TC_DPV t d Milling tools Turning tools 0 or 6 TC_DPV5 t d TC_DPV4 t d TC_DPV3 t d TC_DPV3 t d TC_DPV5 t d TC_DPV4 t d 1 0 0 V 0 V 0 2 0 V 0 0 0 V 3 V 0 0 V 0 0 4 0 0 V 0 V 0 5 0 V 0 0 0 V 6 V 0 0 V 0 0 Turning tools in this context are any tools whose tool type TC_DP1 t d is between 400 and 599 All other tool types refer to milling tools If all three values TC_DPV3 t d TC_DPV4 t d TC_DPV5 t d are ...

Page 1920: ...ompensations with evaluation of sign for tool length with wear and temperature fluctuations The following are taken into account Tool type Transformations for tool components Assignment of tool length components to geometry axes independently of tool type 2 8 Special handling of tool compensations 2 8 1 Relevant setting data SD42900 42960 Setting data SD42900 SD42940 can be used to make the follow...

Page 1921: ...Programming Manual Fundamentals Tool Compensations Required setting data SD42900 SC_MIRROR_TOOL_LENGTH mirroring of tool length components and components of the tool base dimension SD42910 SC_MIRROR_TOOL_WEAR mirroring of wear values of tool length components SD42920 SC_WEAR_SIGN_CUTPOS sign evaluation of the wear components SD42930 SC_WEAR_SIGN inverts the sign of the wear dimensions SD42940 SC_T...

Page 1922: ...e sign Tool lengths TC_DP3 TC_DP4 TC_DP5 Tool base dimensions TC_DP21 TC_DP22 TC_DP23 Mirroring is performed for all tool base dimensions whose associated axes are mirrored Wear values are not mirrored Mirror wear values The following setting data should be set in order to mirror the wear values SD42910 SC_MIRROR_TOOL_WEAR 0 Sign change tool wear when mirroring Inverting the sign mirrors the wear ...

Page 1923: ...erted Inverted 4 Inverted 5 6 7 Inverted 8 Inverted 9 In the case of tool types without a relevant cutting edge position the wear length is not mirrored Note The mirroring sign inversion in one or more components can cancel itself through a simultaneous activation of the functions Tool length mirroring SD42900 0 And Tool length mirroring SD42920 0 SD42930 SC_WEAR_SIGN Setting data not equal to zer...

Page 1924: ...1 1 1 Wear dimension of tool radius 1 mm resulting tool radius 101 mm N100 T1 D1 G41 X150 Y20 N150 G40 X300N10 N200 SC_WEAR_SIGN 1 Sign inversion for all wear values the new radius of 99 mm is activated on a new selection D1 Without D1 the radius would continue to be 101 mm N300 D1 G41 X350 Y 20 N310 The same applies in the event that the resulting tool length is modified due to a change in the mi...

Page 1925: ... X 17 X Y Z 18 Z X Y 19 Y Z X Each value not equal to 0 which is not equal to one of the six listed values is evaluated as value 18 The following table shows the assignment of tool length components to geometry axes for all other tools tool types 400 or 599 Layer Length 1 Length 2 Length 3 Z Y X 18 Y X Z 19 X Z Y 17 Z X Y 18 Y Z X 19 X Y Z Each value not equal to 0 which is not equal to one of the...

Page 1926: ... with orientation capability always allows for a tool with its total resulting length tool length wear tool base dimension The calculation of the resulting total length allows for all modifications caused by the setting data Note When toolholders with orientation capability are used it is common to define all tools for a non mirrored basic system even those which are only used for mirrored machini...

Page 1927: ...x y or z direction according to the working plane Allowance is made for a programmed toolholder These tool dimensions are not altered when traversing without a transformation 2 8 8 Tool length offsets in tool direction Temperature compensation in real time On 5axis machines with a moving tool temperature fluctuations can occur in the machining heads These can result directly in expansion fluctuati...

Page 1928: ...annot be applied in the axis This does not have any effect on other axes In this case an alarm is not output Applicability Temperature compensation in the tool direction is operative only with generic 5axis transformations with Transformation type 24 Two axes rotate the tool Transformation type 56 One axis rotates the tool the other axis rotates the workpiece without temperature compensation In ge...

Page 1929: ...pensation value higher than this limit is specified it will be limited without an alarm SD42960 The three temperature compensation values together form a compensation vector and are contained in setting data SD42960 SC_TOOL_TEMP_COMP 0 Temperature compensation with reference to tools To SD42960 SC_TOOL_TEMP_COMP 2 The setting data are userdefined e g using synchronized actions or from the PLC The ...

Page 1930: ...re compensation value for an axis is reduced to zero interpolatively for example when it ceases to be a geometry axis after a transformation change Conversely any temperature compensation value for an axis which changes over to geometry axis status is applied immediately Examples Temperature compensation in tool direction Example of a 5axis machine with rotating tool on which the tool can be rotat...

Page 1931: ...RAFO_AXES_IN_1 1 2 Second axis of the transformation MD24110 TRAFO_AXES_IN_1 2 3 Third axis of the transformation MD24110 TRAFO_AXES_IN_1 3 5 Fifth axis of the transformation MD24110 TRAFO_AXES_IN_1 4 4 Fourth axis of the transformation MD24120 TRAFO_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB_1 0 1 Geo axis for channel axis 1 MD24120 TRAFO_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB_1 1 2 Geo axis for channel axis 2 MD24120 TRAFO_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB_1 ...

Page 1932: ...11 00 N60 x0 y0 z0 b0 c0 0 30 0 00 1 00 N70 m30 With the exception of block N40 temperature compensation always acts in the original directions as the tool is pointing in the basic orientation direction This applies particularly in block N50 The tool is actually still pointing in the direction of the X axis because the B axis is still at 90 degrees However because the transformation is already dea...

Page 1933: ...um offsets are intended for general use i e with active or inactive tool management or with the flat D number function Machine data are used to classify the sum offsets into Sum offset fine Sum offset coarse setup offset Setup offset The setup offset is the compensation to be entered by the setup engineer before machining These values are stored separately in the NCK The operator subsequently only...

Page 1934: ...mbers to be assigned to a D number Define whether the sum offsets fine coarse are to be saved during data backup Define the sum offset to be activated if A new cutting edge compensation is activated An operator panel front RESET is performed An operator panel front START is performed The end of the program has been reached The name is oriented to the logic of the corresponding machine data for too...

Page 1935: ...0 slotting saw TC_DP9 TC_DP18 Length 5 TC_DP10 TC_DP19 Angle 1 angle between face of tool and torus surface TC_DP11 TC_DP20 Angle 2 angle between tool longitudinal axis and upper end of torus surface Tool base dimension adapter dimension TC_DP21 Adapter length 1 TC_DP22 Adapter length 2 TC_DP23 Adapter length 3 Technology System variable Clearance angle TC_DP24 The clearance angle is stored here f...

Page 1936: ...3 TC_ECP53 TC_ECP63 The numbers in bold 1 2 6 designate the parameters of a maximum of six location dependent or similar compensations that can be programmed with DL 1 to 6 for the parameter specified in column one TC_DP12 TC_DP4 Length 2 TC_SCP14 TC_SCP24 TC_SCP34 TC_SCP44 TC_SCP54 TC_SCP64 TC_ECP14 TC_ECP24 TC_ECP34 TC_ECP44 TC_ECP54 TC_ECP64 TC_DP13 TC_DP5 Length 3 etc TC_DP14 Radius compensati...

Page 1937: ...r A sum offset data set requires 8 bytes 9 parameters 72 bytes A setup data set requires an equal amount of memory A certain number of bytes is also required for internal administration data 2 9 3 Activation Function The function must be activated via the machine data MD18108 MN_MM_NUM_SUMCORR sum offsets in TO area System variables TC_ECPx and TC_SCPx and setup and sum offsets fine defined via th...

Page 1938: ...r The sum offset is deselected with the command DL 0 Note DL0 is not allowed If compensation is deselected D0 and T0 the sum offset also becomes ineffective Programming a sum offset that does not exist triggers an alarm similar to programming a D compensation that does not exist Thus only the defined wear remains part of the compensation defined in system variables TC_DP12 to TC_DP20 Programming a...

Page 1939: ... by TC_SCPx RIIVHW 6XP RIIVHW 6XP RIIVHW 7 B6 3 W 7 B6 3 W 7 B6 3 W 7 B6 3 W 7 B 3 W 7 B 3 W 7 B 3 W 7 B 3 W Figure 2 50 MD18112 MN_MM_KIND_OF_SUMCORR bit 4 0 Tool T t is active With the data in the figure the following is programmed D2 Cutting edge offsets i e TC_DP3 to TC_DP11 wear TC_DP12 to TC_DP20 adapter dimension DL 1 Sum offset 1 is added to the previous D2 compensations i e TC_SCP13 to TC...

Page 1940: ...RIIVHW 6XP RIIVHW ILQH 6HWXS RIIVHW RIIVHW 7 B 3 W 7 B 3 W 7 B 3 W 7 B 3 W 7 B 3 W 7 B 3 W 7 B 3 W 7 B 3 W 7 B6 3 W 7 B6 3 W 7 B6 3 W 7 B6 3 W 7 B 3 W Figure 2 51 MD18112 MN_MM_KIND_OF_SUMCORR bit 4 1 setup offsets sum offsets fine Tool T t is active With the data in the figure the following is programmed D2 Cutting edge compensations i e TC_DP3 to TC_DP11 wear TC_DP12 to TC_DP20 adapter dimension...

Page 1941: ...dge d on tool t R6 TC_SCP21 t d Sets the value of the R parameter to the value of the last component of sum offset 1 for cutting edge d on tool t R50 TC_SCP23 t d Sets the value of the R parameter to the value of the first component of sum offset 2 for cutting edge d on tool t TC_SCP43 t d 1 234 Sets the value of the first component of sum offset 4 for cutting edge d on tool t to the value 1 234 T...

Page 1942: ...itten with the TC_SCPx system variables Note When working with setup offsets the data set for the setup offset is created when a data set is created for sum offset fine if a data set did not already exist for t d Creating a new setup offset If the compensation data set x does not yet exist it is created on the first write operation to one of its parameters y TC_ECPxy t d r r The value r r is assig...

Page 1943: ...of tool t are deleted If d and t are not specified all sum offsets for the cutting edges on all tools of the TO unit are deleted for the channel in which the command is programmed When working with setup offsets the DELDL command deletes both the setup offset and the sum offsets fine of the specified cutting edge s Note The memory used for the data sets is released after deletion The deleted sum o...

Page 1944: ...ool compensation number D is to be activated after PowerOn the last active DL number is then no longer active MD20110 MC_RESET_MODE_MASK definition of initial control system settings after RESET TP End 2 9 4 Examples Example 1 That no compensation and no sum offset will come into effect must be defined during tool change via the machine data MD20270 MC_CUTTING_EDGE_DEFAULT 0 Basic setting of tool ...

Page 1945: ...ensation D2 sum offset 2 are activated D1 Compensation D1 sum offset 1 are activated 2 9 5 Upgrades for Tool Length Determination 2 9 5 1 Taking the compensation values into account location specifically and workpiece specifically Composition of the effective tool length For a tool compensation without active kinematic transformation the effective tool length consists of up to 8 vectors Tool lengt...

Page 1946: ...r the geometry axis components How the three vector components of partial totals of the vectors involved are distributed over the three geometry axis components is determined by the following quantities Influencing quantity dependencies Active processing level G17 X Y direction G18 Z X direction G19 Y Z direction Infeed plane Z Y X Tool type Milling tools drilling tools grinding tools turning tool...

Page 1947: ...or operator compensations Minor compensations however must also be modified during the normal production mode The reasons for this are e g Tool wear Clamping errors Temperature sensitivity of the machine These compensations are defined as follows Definition Wear components Wear TC_DP12 TC_DP14 Total offsets fine TC_SCPx3 TC_SCPx5 Sum offsets coarse or setup offsets TC_ECPx3 TC_ECPx5 In particular ...

Page 1948: ...he setting data SD42935 SC_WEAR_TRANSFORM transformation of wear values With the setting data in its initial state all wear values are transformed The setting data is considered in the following functions Wear values in the machine coordinate system Part program instruction TOWMCS Wear values in the workpiece coordinate system Part program instruction TOWWCS LQHPDWLF WUDQVIRUPDWLRQ 7RRO FDUULHU ZL...

Page 1949: ... T TOWKCS Wear values in tool coordinate system for kinematic transformation KCS of tool head Coordinate systems for offsets in tool length G codes TOWMCS TOWWCS TOWBCS TOWTCS and TOWKCS can be used e g to measure the wear tool length component in five different coordinate systems 1 Machine coordinate system MCS 1 Basic Coordinate System BCS 1 Workpiece coordinate system WCS 1 Tool coordinate syst...

Page 1950: ...her tool length components The resulting total tool length is then used in further calculations In the case of an active toolholder with orientation capability The wear values are subjected to the appropriate rotation TOWMCS Wear data in the MCS machine coordinate system In the case of an active rotation by means of a toolholder with orientation capability The toolholder only rotates the vector of...

Page 1951: ...c coordinate system If a toolholder with orientation capability is active the tool vector is calculated as for TOWMCS without taking the wear into account The wear data are interpreted in the workpiece coordinate system The wear vector in the basic coordinate system is converted to the workpiece coordinate system and added to the tool vector Nonlinear transformation If a nonlinear transformation i...

Page 1952: ...the kinematic transformation and added to the tool vector G code change when a tool is active Changing the G code in the group TOWSTD TOWMCS TOWWCS TOWBCS TOWTCS and TOWKCS does not affect an already active tool and does not become effective until the next tool is selected A new G code of this group will also come into effect if it is programmed in the same block in which a tool is selected Evalua...

Page 1953: ... for evaluating the wear components On a plane change the assignment between the nontransformed wear components and the geometry axes is retained i e these are not interchanged as with other length components The assignment of components depends on the active plane for tool selection Example Let s assume a milling tool is used where only the wear value TC_DP12 assigned to length L1 is not equal to...

Page 1954: ...OLENV memory function is used to save any current states needed for the evaluation of tool data stored in the memory The individual data are as follows The active G code of group 6 G17 G18 G19 The active G code of group 56 TOWSTD TOWMCS TOWWCS TOWBCS TOWTCS TOWKCS The active transverse axis Machine data MD18112 MN_MM_KIND_OF_SUMCORR Properties of sum offsets in the TO area Machine data MD20360 MC_...

Page 1955: ... and DL number of the active tool are also stored so that the tool can be accessed later in the same environment as the TOOLENV call without having to name the tool again Not in the tool environment The value of the machine data determines whether the adapter length or the tool base dimension is included in the tool length calculation MD18104 MN_MM_NUM_TOOL_ADAPTER tool adapter in TO area Since a ...

Page 1956: ... effective length of different tool can be calculated assuming that it would be used under the same conditions as the tool for which the status was saved TOOLENV function Saving a tool environment The TOOLENV function is a predefined subprogram It must therefore be programmed in a separate block Syntax Status TOOLENV _NAME Value parameter Status INT 0 Function OK 1 No memory reserved for tool envi...

Page 1957: ... Syntax There are two call formats Status DELTOOLENV Status DELTOOLENV _NAME Value parameter Status INT 0 Function OK 1 No memory reserved for tool environments MD18116 MN_MM_NUM_TOOL_ENV 0 number of tool environments in TO area i e the tool environments functionality is not available 2 A tool environment with the specified name does not exist _NAME STRING Name of data set to be deleted The first ...

Page 1958: ...ed even if no tool environments are possible MD18116 0 In this case the return value is 0 Syntax _N P_TOOLENVN Data type _N INT Number of defined TOOLENV P_TOOLENV This system variable returns the number of the nth data set for describing a tool environment The assignment of numbers to data sets is not fixed but can be changed as a result of deleting or creating data sets The data sets are numbere...

Page 1959: ..._ENV 0 number of tool environments in TO area i e the tool environments functionality is not available 2 A tool environment with the name specified in _NAME does not exist _NAME STRING Name of the tool environment from which the T D and DL numbers can be read _TDDL 3 INT This integer array contains in _TDDL 0 the T number of the tool in _TDDL 1 the D number of the tool in _TDDL 2 the DL number of ...

Page 1960: ...e exception of the first parameter _LEN Value parameter Status INT 0 Function OK 1 No memory reserved for tool environments MD18116 MN_MM_NUM_TOOL_ENV 0 number of tool environments in TO area i e the tool environments functionality is not available 2 A tool environment with the name specified in _STAT does not exist 3 Invalid string in parameter _COMP Causes of this error can be invalid characters...

Page 1961: ...plicate to the geometry axes depends on the active plane in the tool environment i e with G17 the abscissa is parallel to X with G18 it is parallel to Z etc Components LEN 6 to LEN 10 contain the additional parameters which can be used to specify the geometry description of a tool e g TC_DP7 to TC_DP11 for the geometry and the corresponding components for wear or sum and setup offsets These 5 addi...

Page 1962: ...chever of the two alternative components is active for the tool in use E Setup offsets G Geometry K Kinematic transformation is only evaluated for generic 3 4 and 5 axis transformation S Sum offsets T Toolholder with orientation capability W Wear If the first substring is empty except for white spaces the complete tool length is calculated allowing for all components This applies even if the _COMP...

Page 1963: ...the D number of the tool environment is also read otherwise the D number of the currently active tool is read _DL INT Number of the local compensation If this parameter is not specified the DL number used is based on the source of the T number If the T number from the tool environment is used the D number of the tool environment is also read otherwise the D number of the currently active tool is r...

Page 1964: ...ed with the factor 0 5 This weighting is reflected in the tool length returned by GETTCOR Example MD20360 MC_TOOL_PARAMETER_DEF_MASK 3 definition of tool parameters MD20100 MC_DIAMETER_AX_DEF X Geometry axis with face axis funtion X is diameter axis standard turning machine configuration N30 TC_DP1 1 1 500 N40 TC_DP2 1 1 2 N50 TC_DP3 1 1 3 0 Geometry L1 N60 TC_DP4 1 1 4 0 N70 TC_DP5 1 1 5 0 N80 TC...

Page 1965: ...ith this 5 axis transformation in the software versions used up to now the following vector is equivalent to the sum of the two vectors l1 and l3 for a toolholder with orientation capability type M MD24560 24660 MC_TRAFO5_JOINT_OFFSET_1 2 vector of kinematic offset of the first second 5 axis transformation in the channel Only the sum is relevant for the transformation in both cases The way in whic...

Page 1966: ... the active tool without allowing for the length components of an active kinematic transformation Output in the basic coordinate system GETTCOR _LEN M Testenv1 3 Calculates the complete tool length in the machine coordinate system for the tool stored in the tool environment named Testenv1 The calculation is performed for cutting edge number D3 regardless of the cutting edge number stored Compatibi...

Page 1967: ...x Status LENTOAX _AXIND _MATRIX _COORD The first two parameters must always be programmed the last parameter can be omitted Value parameter Status INT 0 Function OK information in _AXIND sufficient for description all tool length components are parallel to the geometry axes 1 Function is OK however the content of _MATRIX must be evaluated for a correct description the tool length components are no...

Page 1968: ...ays valid in the matrix even if the geometry axis belonging to the coordinate axis is not available i e if the corresponding entry in _AXIND is 0 _COORD STRING Specifies the coordinate system used for the assignment MCS or M The tool length is represented in the machine coordinate system BCS or B The tool length is represented in the basic coordinate system WCS or W The tool length is represented ...

Page 1969: ...is active and the following setting data is activated SD42900 SC_MIRROR_TOOL_LENGTH Sign change tool length when mirroring If not all length components are parallel or antiparallel to the geometry axes the index of the axis which contains the largest part of a tool length component is returned in _AXIND In this case if the function does not return an error for a different reason the return value i...

Page 1970: ...inate and applicate A frame rotation of Z through 60 degrees is now programmed with G17 active e g rot Z60 The direction of the applicate Z direction remains unchanged the main component of L2 now lies in the direction of the new X axis the main component of L1 now lies in the direction of the negative Y axis The return axis is thus 1 and _AXIND contains the values 2 3 1 In this case the associate...

Page 1971: ...ponse from the PLC I have written the D number With block search without calculation this process of synchronization must be deactivated until the first valid T number has been output again That means that the NCK must not wait on D programming Note At what point the auxiliary functions can be output to PLC after block search is complete can be controlled with the machine data MC_AUXFU_AT_BLOCK_SE...

Page 1972: ...n Manual 11 2006 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 3 2 SD42935 expansions SD42935 Which of the wear components are to be transformed and which are not to be transformed in conjunction with the functions TOWMCS and TOWWCS can be defined via the setting data SD42935 SC_WEAR_TRANSFORM transformation of wear values ...

Page 1973: ...and length 20 mm Block N90 defines a rotation of 37 degrees about the Y axis Block N120 activates the tool radius compensation and all settings are made to describe the compensation in the following blocks with a rotation of 37 degrees about the Y axis N10 Definition of toolholder 1 N20 TC_CARR8 1 1 Component of the first rotary axis in the Y direction N30 N40 Definition of tool compensation memor...

Page 1974: ...on capability with rotary table N10 TC_DP1 1 1 120 N20 TC_DP3 1 1 13 Tool length 13 mm Definition of toolholder 1 N30 TC_CARR1 1 0 X component of 1st offset vector N40 TC_CARR2 1 0 Y component of 1st offset vector N50 TC_CARR3 1 0 Z component of 1st offset vector N60 TC_CARR4 1 0 X component of 2nd offset vector N70 TC_CARR5 1 0 Y component of 2nd offset vector N80 TC_CARR6 1 15 Z component of 2nd...

Page 1975: ...lues in TC_CARR13 and TC_CARR14 are ignored i e the axis position A0 B45 is used for the rotation The rotation of the 4th offset vector length 15 mm in Z direction around the B axis causes an offsetting of the zero point by X10 607 15 sin 45 and Z 4 393 15 1 This zero offset is taken into account by an automatically written basic or system frame so that the position X10 607 Y10 000 Z8 607 is appro...

Page 1976: ... actual position of the toolholder with orientation capability is made to match that used in N340 The position approached by the three linear axes is dependent on this position however In N360 solid angles are used to define a plane whose intersecting lines in the XZ and in the YZ plane each form an angle of 45 degrees or 45 degrees with the X or Y axis The plane defined in such a way therefore ha...

Page 1977: ... result of the tool length the machine positions X0 Y0 Z10 are thus obtained in this block In N80 an incremental traversing motion is performed from 10 into tool direction The resulting axis positions are thus X7 071 Y0 Z17 071 4 1 4 Calculation of compensation values on a location specific and workpiece specific basis Tool with adapter A tool with adapter and toolholder with orientation capabilit...

Page 1978: ...99 7 Magazine type buffer N220 TC_MAP2 9999 buffer Magazine identifier N230 TC_MAP3 9999 17 Status of magazine N240 TC_MAP6 9999 1 Dimension line N250 TC_MAP7 9999 1 Dimension column 1 position N260 TC_MPP1 9999 1 2 Location type N270 TC_MPP2 9999 1 9 Location types N280 TC_MPP4 9999 1 2 Location state N290 TC_MPP5 9999 1 1 Spindle no 1 N300 TC_MDP2 1 1 0 Distance from spindle to mag 1 Definition ...

Page 1979: ...he active workpiece coordinate system In block N370 a rotation through 30 degrees is activated about the X axis The original compensation value of 1 01 in the Z direction thus yields a new Z component of 0 875 1 01 cos 30 and a new Y component of 0 505 1 01 sin 30 This yields the dimension specified in the program comment when added to the sum of the tool length sum offset and adapter dimension pr...

Page 1980: ...MP is 2 therefore the compensation effective in the Z direction is entered in the geometry component the old value is overwritten and the wear value is deleted The resulting total tool length is thus L1 0 333 0 0 0 333 Example 4 N10 def real _CORVAL 3 N20 TC_DP1 1 1 120 Milling tool N30 TC_DP3 1 1 10 0 Geometry L1 N40 TC_DP12 1 1 1 0 Wear L1 N50 _CORVAL 0 0 333 N60 t1 d1 g17 g0 N70 r1 settcor _COR...

Page 1981: ...C_DP5 Example 6 N10 def real _CORVAL 3 N20 TC_DP1 1 1 500 Turning tool N30 TC_DP3 1 1 10 0 Geometry L1 N40 TC_DP4 1 1 15 0 Geometry L2 N50 TC_DP12 1 1 10 0 Wear L1 N60 TC_DP13 1 1 0 0 Wear L2 N70 _CORVAL 0 5 0 N80 rot y 30 N90 t1 d1 g18 g0 N100 r1 settcor _CORVAL GW 0 3 1 N110 t1 d1 x0 y0 z0 MCS position X24 330 Y0 000 Z17 500 N120 M30 The tool is a turning tool A frame rotation is activated in N8...

Page 1982: ... 1 Tool length compensation example 6 If the sample program is continued after N110 with the following instructions N120 _CORVAL 0 0 0 N130 r1 settcor _CORVAL GW 0 3 0 N140 t1 d1 x0 y0 z0 MCS position X24 330 Y0 000 Z17 500 The remaining wear is included completely in the geometry because the compensation is now effective in the Z axis parameter _GEOAX is 0 Since the new compensation value is 0 th...

Page 1983: ...this case all wear components of the tool are set to zero immediately after the first call of SETTCOR in N100 Example 7 N10 def real _CORVAL 3 N20 TC_DP1 1 1 500 Turning tool N30 TC_DP3 1 1 10 0 Geometry L1 N40 TC_DP4 1 1 15 0 Geometry L2 N50 TC_DP12 1 1 10 0 Wear L1 N60 TC_DP13 1 1 0 0 Wear L2 N70 _CORVAL 0 5 0 N80 rot y 30 N90 t1 d1 g18 g0 N100 r1 settcor _CORVAL GW 3 3 N110 t1 d1 x0 y0 z0 MCS p...

Page 1984: ... TRUE N100 _CORVAL 0 10 0 N110 _CORVAL 1 15 0 N120 _CORVAL 2 5 0 N130 rot y 30 N140 t1 d1 g18 g0 N150 r1 settcor _CORVAL W 1 1 N160 t1 d1 x0 y0 z0 MCS position X7 990 Y25 000 Z31 160 In N90 the setting data is enabled SD42930 SC_WEAR_SIGN sign of wear i e the wear must be valued with a negative sign The compensation is vectorial _CORCOMP 1 and the compensation vector must be added to the wear _COR...

Page 1985: ...metry L1 unchanged TC_DP4 1 1 15 000 Geometry L2 unchanged TC_DP5 1 1 10 000 Geometry L3 unchanged TC_DP12 1 1 2 010 Wear L1 10 15 cos 30 10 sin 30 TC_DP13 1 1 16 160 Wear L2 15 sin 30 10 cos 30 TC_DP14 1 1 5 000 Wear L3 The effect of setting data SD42930 on the L3 component in the Y direction can be recognized without the additional complication caused by the frame rotation Example 9 2 tool lengt...

Page 1986: ...e tool length is to be 1 mm in each axis N80 to N100 1 mm is thus added to the original length in lengths L2 and L3 Twice the compensation value 2 mm is added to the original tool length in L1 in order to change the total length by 1 mm as required If the positions approached in blocks N110 and N130 are compared it can be seen that each axis position has changed by 1 mm ...

Page 1987: ...evaluated by the CC 18100 MM_NUM_CUTTING_EDGES_IN_TOA Tool compensations per TOA module 18102 MM_TYPE_OF_CUTTING_EDGE Activate flat D number management 18105 MM_MAX_CUTTING_EDGE_NO Address extension interpreted as spindle number 18106 MM_MAX_CUTTING_EDGE_PERTOOL Maximum number of cutting edges per tool 18108 MM_NUM_SUMCORR Number of all sum offsets in NCK 18110 MM_MAX_SUMCORR_PER_CUTTEDGE Maximum ...

Page 1988: ...er for selecting sum offset 20140 TRAFO_RESET_VALUE Definition of transformation set which is selected during powerup or on reset or parts program end as a function of machine data MD20110 RESET_MODE MASK 20180 TOCARR_ROT_ANGLE_INCR i Value of the minimum incremental step with toolholder with orientation capability 20182 TOCARR_ROT_ANGLE_OFFSET i Offset of the rotary axis with toolholder with orie...

Page 1989: ...mum temperature compensation for tool length 20610 ADD_MOVE_ACCEL_RESERVE Acceleration reserve for overlaid movements 21080 CUTCOM_PARALLEL_ORI_LIMIT Limit angle between path tangent and tool orientation with 3D tool radius compensation 22530 TOCARR_CHANGE_M_CODE M code for change of toolholder 22550 TOOL_CHANGE_MODE New tool compensations with M function 22560 TOOL_CHANGE_M_CODE M function for to...

Page 1990: ... in blocks without travel information 42496 CUTCOM_CLSDT_CONT Maintain stability of approach retraction behavior for tool radius compensation in blocks 42900 MIRROR_TOOL_LENGTH Mirror tool length compensation 42910 MIRROR_TOOL_WEAR Mirror wear values of tool length compensation 42920 WEAR_SIGN_CUTPOS Mirror wear values of machining plane 42930 WEAR_SIGN Invert sign of all wear values 42935 WEAR_TR...

Page 1991: ...nals from channel DB number Byte Bit Name 21 61 0 T function 1 change 21 62 0 D function 1 change 21 116 119 T function 1 21 128 129 D function 1 21 214 Active G function of group 7 21 223 Active G function of group 16 21 224 Active G function of group 17 21 225 Active G function of group 18 21 230 Active G function of group 23 ...

Page 1992: ...Data lists 5 3 Signals Basic logic functions Tool Offset W1 204 Function Manual 11 2006 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 ...

Page 1993: ...ing edge number 17 D D functions 12 D number structure flat without tool management 26 D numbers Allocation of free 17 DELTOOLENV 151 Description of a rotation 98 Direction vector 116 DISC 70 E Evaluation of individual wear components 147 F Flat D number structure 26 D number programming 27 Frame change 89 Frame rotation 101 G G40 50 G41 50 G42 50 G450 G451 69 G451 71 G460 84 G461 8 84 G462 8 85 G...

Page 1994: ...MD20188 97 MD20190 97 MD20202 66 MD20204 59 MD20210 72 MD20220 70 MD20230 72 MD20240 74 75 MD20250 50 MD20252 81 MD20256 82 MD20270 13 23 28 29 31 140 MD20272 134 140 MD20360 25 149 157 176 MD20390 126 128 129 MD20392 127 MD22530 111 MD22550 11 23 24 28 29 30 31 MD22560 11 30 31 MD22562 24 25 MD24100 128 MD24110 128 MD24120 129 MD24550 158 MD24558 158 MD24560 158 MD24570 129 MD24572 129 MD24650 15...

Page 1995: ...RC 49 Tool type 35 Undercut angle 46 Wear 43 Tool change D function 12 Offset memory 13 Tool compensation Calculation 14 Tool compensation types 89 Tool environments 148 Tool length compensation 40 Tool radius compensation 2D approach and retraction behavior 51 2D collision detection 75 2D compensation at inside corners 73 2D compensation at outside corners 69 2D deselection 69 2D intersection G45...

Page 1996: ...Index Basic logic functions Tool Offset W1 208 Function Manual 11 2006 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 ...

Page 1997: ...l SINUMERIK 840D sl 840DE sl SINUMERIK 840Di sl 840DiE sl SINUMERIK 840D powerline 840DE powerline SINUMERIK 840Di powerline 840DiE powerline SINUMERIK 810D powerline 810DE powerline Software Version NCU system software for 840D sl 840DE sl 1 3 NCU system software for 840D sl DiE sl 1 0 NCU system software for 840D 840DE 7 4 NCU system software for 840Di 840DiE 3 3 NCU system software for 810D 810...

Page 1998: ...ommissioning and operation of a device system may only be performed by qualified personnel Within the context of the safety notes in this documentation qualified persons are defined as persons who are authorized to commission ground and label devices systems and circuits in accordance with established safety practices and standards Prescribed Usage Note the following Warning This device may only b...

Page 1999: ... 67 2 2 4 Signals from axis spindle DB31 68 2 3 Continuouspath mode exact stop and LookAhead B1 69 2 3 1 Signals from channel DB21 69 2 3 2 Signals from axis spindle DB31 69 2 4 Acceleration B2 70 2 5 Diagnostic tools D1 70 2 6 Travel to fixed stop F1 71 2 6 1 Signals to axis spindle DB31 71 2 6 2 Signals from axis spindle DB31 73 2 7 Velocities Setpoint Actual Value Systems Closed Loop Control G2...

Page 2000: ...2 14 Reference point approach R1 111 2 14 1 Signals to channel DB21 111 2 14 2 Signals from channel DB21 112 2 14 3 Signals to axis spindle DB31 112 2 14 4 Signals from axis spindle DB31 113 2 15 Spindles S1 115 2 15 1 Signals to axis spindle DB31 115 2 15 2 Signals from axis spindle DB31 123 2 16 Feeds V1 130 2 16 1 Signals to channel DB21 130 2 16 2 Signals to axis spindle DB31 137 2 16 3 Signal...

Page 2001: ...ption 1 The section entitled NC PLC interface signals includes a detailed description of NC PLC interface signals relevant to function PLC messages DB2 NC DB10 Mode group DB11 OP DB19 NCK channel DB21 DB30 Axis spindle DB31 DB61 Loading unloading a magazine DB71 Spindle as change point DB72 Tool turret DB73 ...

Page 2002: ...Brief description Basic logic functions NC PLC interface signals Z1 6 Function Manual 11 2006 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 ...

Page 2003: ...n the machine control panel or from the PLC user program Only one interface signal may be set in each case If several positions are set simultaneously interface signals then they are no longer valid and key operated switch position 3 is automatically set by the control The allocation between the lockable data areas and the key operated switch positions is made by HMI machine data for protection st...

Page 2004: ...mponents spare parts DB10 DBX103 6 PCU Temperature limit Edge evaluation no Signal s updated cyclic Signal status 1 or edge change 0 1 The environment conditions of the limit value are in the permitted tolerance range of 5 to 55 degree C Signal status 0 or edge change 1 0 The temperature limit was either fallen below or exceeded The temperature monitor has responded and the PCU is disabled DB10 DB...

Page 2005: ...ram Status signals from the NCK to the PLC user interface are deleted cleared Change signals for the help functions are deleted Cyclic processing of the user interface PLC to NCK is terminated Application example s Individual PLC outputs can for example be set to a defined state from the PLC user program References DA Diagnostic Guide FB1 Functions Manual Basic Functions PLC Basic Program P3 DB10 ...

Page 2006: ...d All the voltages in the control have been established The control is in the cyclic mode Signal state 0 or edge change 1 0 The control is not ready The relay contact NC Ready is open The following faults will cause NC Ready to be canceled Undervoltage and overvoltage monitoring function has responded Individual components are not ready NCK CPU Ready NC CPU watchdog If the signal NC Ready goes to ...

Page 2007: ...g function of the NCU 573 has not responded DB10 DBX109 6 Air temperature alarm Edge evaluation no Signal s updated cyclic Signal state 1 or edge change 0 1 The ambient temperature or fan monitoring function has responded This could be due to the following The temperature monitoring has identified an ambient temperature that is too high approx 60 C Alarm 2110 NCK temperature alarm is output The sp...

Page 2008: ...ables machine data Measure Refer to additional References When the control ran up it was identified that the battery voltage was below the pre warning limit range 2 6 V Alarm 2102 NCK battery alarm is output NC ready and mode group ready are not issued Effects Some of the batterybuffered data may already have been lost Measure Refer to additional References Signal state 0 or edge change 1 0 The ba...

Page 2009: ...s blanked The screen is switched to bright again screen blanking off the next time a key on the operator panel is pressed Application example s Screen saver Special cases errors Notice If the interface signal Darken screen DB19 DBX0 1 darken screen 1 then the keyboard of the operator panel remains operational We therefore recommend that this is disabled using the interface signal DB19 DBX0 2 key d...

Page 2010: ...e 0 or edge change 1 0 Clear error key on the machine control panel is not pressed Application example s Applies to HMI Advanced only Corresponding to DB19 DBX20 4 recall alarm cleared DB19 DBX0 7 Actual value in WCS Edge evaluation no Signal s updated cyclic Signal state 1 or edge change 0 1 The PLC selects the display of actual values in the workpiece coordinate system WCS This means that when t...

Page 2011: ...9 DBX7 0 DBX7 7 Analog spindle 2 utilization in percent Edge evaluation no Signal s updated cyclic DB19 DBX8 0 DBX8 7 Channel number of the machine control panel to HMI Edge evaluation no Signal s updated cyclic DB19 DBX10 0 Programming area selection Edge evaluation no Signal s updated cyclic Signal state 1 or edge change 0 1 Program area selection active Signal state 0 or edge change 1 0 Program...

Page 2012: ...clic Signal state 1 or edge change 0 1 COM2 active Signal state 0 or edge change 1 0 COM2 inactive Application example s Valid for HMI Embedded a file transfer can be initiated via RS 232 C DB19 DBX12 3 COM1 Edge evaluation no Signal s updated cyclic Signal state 1 or edge change 0 1 COM1 active Signal state 0 or edge change 1 0 COM1 inactive Application example s Valid for HMI Embedded a file tra...

Page 2013: ...gnal state 1 or edge change 0 1 RS 232 C off active Signal state 0 or edge change 1 0 RS 232 C off inactive Application example s Valid for HMI Embedded a file transfer can be initiated via RS 232 C DB19 DBX12 7 RS232C on Edge evaluation no Signal s updated cyclic Signal state 1 or edge change 0 1 RS232C on active Signal state 0 or edge change 1 0 RS232C on inactive Application example s Valid for...

Page 2014: ...file transfer can be initiated using the hard disk DB19 DBX14 0 DBX14 6 PLC index Edge evaluation no Signal s updated cyclic Description This byte for control of the V24 interface describes the PLC index for the standard control file which specifies the axis channel or TO number This file is handled from the PLC HMI correspondling to the contract which is in DB19 DBB12 Application example s Valid ...

Page 2015: ...b list This file is handled from the PLC HMI correspondling to the contract which is in DB19 DBB12 Application example s Valid for HMI Advanced with reference to DB19 DBB13 Dependent on DB19 DBX14 7 0 Act FS PLC index for the standard control file DB19 DBX14 7 1 Pas FS PLC index for the user control file DB19 DBX16 7 Active or passive file system Edge evaluation no Signal s updated cyclic Signal s...

Page 2016: ...s updated cyclic DB19 DBX45 2 FC9 Out Error Edge evaluation no Signal s updated cyclic DB19 DBX45 3 FC9 Out StartError Edge evaluation no Signal s updated cyclic 2 1 5 Signals from operator control panel DB19 DB19 DBX20 1 Screen is dark Edge evaluation no Signal s updated cyclic Signal state 1 or edge change 0 1 The screen is darkened Signal state 0 or edge change 1 0 The screen is not darkened Ap...

Page 2017: ...lic Signal state 1 or edge change 0 1 Recall alarm deleted inactive Signal state 0 or edge change 1 0 Recall alarm deleted inactive DB19 DBX20 6 Simulation selected Edge evaluation no Signal s updated cyclic Signal state 1 or edge change 0 1 On entry to simulation 1 Signal state 0 or edge change 1 0 On exit from simulation 0 Application example s Can be evaluated by machine manufacturer in order t...

Page 2018: ... the changeover becomes effective Corresponding to DB19 DBX0 7 actual value in WCS DB19 DBX22 0 DBX22 7 displayed channel number from HMI Edge evaluation no Signal s updated cyclic DB19 DBX24 0 Error status RS 232 C from PLC Edge evaluation no Signal s updated cyclic Signal state 1 or edge change 0 1 Error status active Signal state 0 or edge change 1 0 Error status inactive Application example s ...

Page 2019: ...nt byte DB19 DBB24 Corresponding to Applies to HMI Embedded DB19 DBX24 4 RS 232 C stop status RS 232 C from PLC Edge evaluation no Signal s updated cyclic Signal state 1 or edge change 0 1 RS 232 C stop active Signal state 0 or edge change 1 0 RS 232 C stop inactive Application example s The actual status of the RS 232C is sent to the PLC in acknowledgment byte DB19 DBB24 Corresponding to Applies ...

Page 2020: ...pplication example s The actual status of the RS 232C is sent to the PLC in acknowledgment byte DB19 DBB24 Corresponding to Applies to HMI Embedded DB19 DBX25 0 DBX25 7 Error RS232C Edge evaluation no Signal s updated cyclic Description 0 no error 1 invalid number for the control file value in DB19 DBB14 127 or invalid 2 DB19 DBB15 could not be read 3 control file BD DIR PLC_IN_OUT_xxx TEA not fou...

Page 2021: ...t 0 Edge evaluation no Signal s updated cyclic Signal state 1 or edge change 0 1 Transfer completed with error Signal state 0 or edge change 1 0 Transfer correctly completed Corresponding to Valid for HMI Advanced DB19 DBX26 3 Active job list selection from PLC status Edge evaluation no Signal s updated cyclic Signal state 1 or edge change 0 1 Job in progress Signal state 0 or edge change 1 0 No t...

Page 2022: ...for HMI Advanced DB19 DBX27 0 DBX27 7 Data transfer error Edge evaluation no Signal s updated cyclic Meaning 0 no error 1 invalid number for control file value in DB19 DBB16 127 or invalid 2 DB19 DBB17 could not be read 3 control file BD DIR PLC_IN_OUT_xxx TEA not found value in DB19 DBB16 invalid 4 invalid index in control file value in DB19 DBB17 incorrect 5 selected job list in control file cou...

Page 2023: ... their distancetogo deleted setpoint actual value difference Any remaining following error is not removed The next program block is then started IS Delete distancetogo channelspecific is therefore ignored by positioning axes Note IS Delete distancetogo does not influence the running dwell time in a program block with dwell time Signal state 0 or edge change 1 0 No effect Signal irrelevant for Posi...

Page 2024: ...s Guide DB21 DBX36 7 NCK alarm with processing stop present Edge evaluation no Signal s updated cyclic Signal state 1 or edge change 0 1 At least one NCK alarm which is causing a processing stop of the part program running in this channel is active Signal state 0 or edge change 1 0 There is no alarm active in this channel that is causing a processing stop Application example s With this alarm a pr...

Page 2025: ...ns closed and the remaining following error is reduced to zero If an axis is moved with axis disable the actual value position display shows the setpoint position and the actual velocity value display shows the setpoint velocity even though the machine axis is not actually moving With a RESET the position actual value display is set to the real actual value of the machine Travel commands continue ...

Page 2026: ...are not effective regarding braking the axis spindle The axis spindle can however be brought into the follow up or hold state refer to DB31 DBX1 4 followup mode Notes This signal inhibits setpoint output to the drive A brief pulse can bring a traversing axis to a standstill The axis will not move again in this block but only when the next block is reached Resynchronization takes place automaticall...

Page 2027: ... 1 Various interface signals and functions A2 Basic logic functions NC PLC interface signals Z1 Function Manual 11 2006 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 31 DB31 DBX1 3 Axis spindle disable Corresponding to DB21 DBX33 7 program test active ...

Page 2028: ...by issuing controller enable so that the previous setpoint position is restored Then all the other axis movements start from the setpoint position valid before controller enable was removed When the position control is switched in again the axis may make a speed setpoint jump Zero speed monitoring or clamping monitoring is still active In order to disable switch out the zero speed monitoring when ...

Page 2029: ...that the following features are valid Both position measuring systems are inactive There is no actual value acquisition The position measuring system monitoring functions are disabled among others cable connection of a measured value encoder The reference point has no effect DB31 DBX60 4 5 referenced synchronized has the signal condition 0 As soon as an axis is parked the interface signals DB31 DB...

Page 2030: ...ms does not take place and alarm 25100 Measuring system switchover not possible is triggered Parking axis i e no PMS is active If the encoder has to be removed e g if a rotary table has to be removed from the machine the position measuring system monitoring is switched off in the parking position The mounted axis spindle encoder turns so quickly in certain applications that it can no longer mainta...

Page 2031: ...enable will be is removed The procedure for removing controller enable depends on whether the axis spindle or an axis of the geometry grouping is stationary or traversing at this point in time Axis spindle stationary Position control loop of axis is opened When IS Follow up mode 1 the position actual value is switched to the position setpoint i e the setpoint position is corrected to the actual va...

Page 2032: ... measuring system or the control Corresponding to DB31 DBX61 3 follow up mode active DB31 DBX1 4 follow up mode DB31 DBX61 5 position controller active DB31 DBX61 6 speed controller active DB31 DBX61 7 current controller active MD36620 MA_SERVO_DISABLE_DELAY_TIME switchoff delay controller enable MD36610 MA_AX_EMERGENCY_STOP_TIME braking ramp time when errors occur DB31 DBX2 2 Delete distancetogo ...

Page 2033: ...1 DBX6 2 delete distance to go channel specific Additional references FB1 Functions Manual Basic Functions Spindles S1 DB31 DBX9 0 DBX9 2 Controller parameter set switchover request requested parameter set Edge evaluation no Signal s updated On request Signal state 1 or edge change 0 1 Signal state 0 or edge change 1 0 Signal irrelevant for MD35590 MA_PARAMSET_CHANGE_ENABLE 0 Application example s...

Page 2034: ...e V f operation MD1125 MD_UF_MODE_RAMP_TIME_1 ramp up time 1 for V f mode MD1126 MD_UF_MODE_RAMP_TIME_2 ramp up time 2 for V f mode Additional references FBA SIMODRIVE 611D Functions Manual Drive Functions DB31 DBX20 1 Rampfunction generator fast stop Edge evaluation no Signal s updated cyclic Signal state 1 or edge change 0 1 A fast stop is triggered by the PLC for the drive 611D Speed setpoint 0...

Page 2035: ...ctive Additional references IAD SINUMERIK 840D Startup Guide Chapter SIMODRIVE 611D DB31 DBX20 3 Speed setpoint smoothing Edge evaluation no Signal s updated cyclic Signal state 1 or edge change 0 1 The PLC requests a filter to smooth the speed setpoint value In the drive module the interface signal is only effective under the following conditions Speed setpoint filter 1 is active in the drive spe...

Page 2036: ...eed setpoint filter Speed monitoring data As soon as the new drive parameter becomes effective the drive signals this to the PLC using the interface signals DB31 DBX93 0 1 and 2 active parameter set Application example s Drive parameter switchover can be used for the following Changing the gear stage Changing over the measuring circuit Special cases errors In principle it is possible to switch ove...

Page 2037: ...etected the drive cancels the pulse enable feedback signal using the interface signal DB31 DBX93 3 and 4 active motor Using the motor selection it is possible for example to choose mode 1 as star connected operation and mode 2 as delta connection operation for the main spindle drive MSD The drive signals the currently selected motor back to the PLC using the interface signals DB31 DBX93 3 and 4 ac...

Page 2038: ...ing to DB31 DBX93 3 and 4 active motor DB31 DBX21 3 and 4 motor selection A B Additional references IAD SINUMERIK 840D Startup Guide Chapter SIMODRIVE 611D DB31 DBX21 6 Speed controller integrator disable Edge evaluation no Signal s updated cyclic Signal state 1 or edge change 0 1 The interface signal is used by the 611D 611U to disable the integrator of the speed controller The speed controller i...

Page 2039: ...ndle as a result of an EMERGENCY STOP the axis spindle only coasts to rest Corresponding to DB31 DBX93 7 pulses enabled Additional references IAD SINUMERIK 840D Startup Guide Chapter SIMODRIVE 611D or IAC SINUMERIK 810D Installation and Start up Guide 2 1 9 Signals from axis spindle DB31 DB31 DBX61 0 Drive test travel request Edge evaluation no Signal s updated cyclic Signal state 1 or edge change...

Page 2040: ...op control mode IS Controller enable 1 Corresponding to DB31 DBX2 1 controller enable DB31 DBX1 4 follow up mode Additional references DA Diagnostics Guide DB31 DBX61 4 Axis spindle stops Edge evaluation no Signal s updated cyclic Signal state 1 or edge change 0 1 The current speed of the axis or the actual number of rotations of the spindle lies under the limit given by the machine data MD36060 M...

Page 2041: ...xample s If the position control is active the axis spindle is kept in position by the position controller Any brakes or clamps can thus be opened The interface signal DB31 DBX61 5 position controller active can be used as feedback signal for the interface signal DB31 DBX2 1 controller enable The holding brake of a vertical axis must be activated as soon as the position control is no longer active...

Page 2042: ...er active is also set for simulation axes as soon as MD30350 MA_SIMU_AX_VDI_OUTPUT output of the axis signals for simulation axes 1 Corresponding to DB31 DBX61 5 position controller active DB31 DBX61 7 Current controller active Edge evaluation no Signal s updated cyclic Signal state 1 or edge change 0 1 The control signals that the current controller is closed for the axis or spindle Signal state ...

Page 2043: ...lubrication pulse is inverted and the lubrication is started The position measurement is restarted after each Power On Application example s The lubrication pump for the axis spindle can be activated with IS Lubrication pulse Machine bed lubrication therefore depends on the distance traveled Corresponding to MD33050 MA_LUBRICATION_DIST lubrication pulse distance DB31 DBX92 0 Setting up mode active...

Page 2044: ...Installation and Startup Guide Chapter SIMODRIVE 611D DB31 DBX92 2 Torque limit 2 active Edge evaluation no Signal s updated cyclic Signal state 1 or edge change 0 1 Drive 611D sends an acknowledgment to the PLC that torque limit 2 is active in addition to torque limit 1 The particular limit value is defined using the drive parameters Signal state 0 or edge change 1 0 Only torque limit 1 is active...

Page 2045: ... With bit combinations A B and C 8 different drive parameter sets can be selected for the 611D The following assignment applies DFWLYH GULYH SDUDPHWHU VHW Application example s Drive parameter switchover can be used for the following To change the gear stage To change over the measuring circuit Corresponding to DB31 DBX21 0 DBX21 2 drive parameter set selection Additional references DB31 DBX21 0 D...

Page 2046: ...y Edge evaluation no Signal s updated cyclic Signal state 1 or edge change 0 1 Feedback signal from the drive to the PLC that the drive is ready Signal state 0 or edge change 1 0 The drive is not ready The drive might be disabled for the following reasons refer to Fig 53 Enable terminals not energized e g terminal 63 Controller and pulse enable terminal 663 Safe operating stop terminal 64 Setpoint...

Page 2047: ...tion and Startup Guide Chapter SIMODRIVE 611D or IAC SINUMERIK 810D Installation and Start up Guide DB31 DBX93 6 Speed controller integrator disabled Edge evaluation no Signal s updated cyclic Signal state 1 or edge change 0 1 The request from the PLC to disable the integrator of the speed controller using interface signal DB31 DBX21 6 integrator inhibit speed controller is active for the drive mo...

Page 2048: ...has expired MD1404 MD_PULSE_SUPPRESSION_DELAY timer stage pulse suppression the pulses are inhibited If within this time the actual speed reaches the shutdown speed MD1403 MD_PULSE_SUPPRESSION_SPEED pulse suppression then at this time the pulses are inhibited If the speed is less than equal to the speed threshold MD1403 and if the controller enable of the drive is withdrawn then the pulses are imm...

Page 2049: ...andard value 240 s the drive is regeneratively braked and then the pulses are inhibited in the diagram Alarm 300614 is output and the interface signal DB10 DBX108 6 611D ready is withdrawn If the motor temperature rises still further and the shutdown threshold defined in MD1607 MD_MOTOR_TEMP_SHUTDOWN_LIMIT motor temperature shutdown limit default value 155 C is reached the drive is stopped immedia...

Page 2050: ... ZDUQLQJ DUQLQJ WKUHVKROG 6KXWGRZQ OLPLW 7LPH 8 0 7LPH DUQLQJ ODUP DUQLQJ ODUP 0RWRU WHPSHUDWXUH Application example s As soon as Motor temperature prewarning has been signaled the PLC can for example initiate controlled shutdown of the drives Corresponding to DB31 DBX93 5 drive ready MD1602 MD_MOTOR_TEMP_WARN_LIMIT MD1603 MD_MOTOR_TEMP_ALARM_TIME MD1607 MD_MOTOR_TEMP_SHUTDOWN_LIMIT Additional ref...

Page 2051: ...eatsink temperature prewarning has been signaled the PLC can for example initiate controlled shutdown of the drives Additional references DA Diagnostics Guide DB31 DBX94 2 Ramp up completed Edge evaluation no Signal s updated cyclic Signal state 1 or edge change 0 1 The PLC is signaled that after a new speed setpoint has entered the speed actual value has reached the speed tolerance bandwidth MD14...

Page 2052: ... QR VLJQDO 7 7 0 0 B63 B 6B 4B 7B72 6 QDFW QVHW 6SHHG DFWXDO YDOXH QDFW 6SHHG WROHUDQFH EDQGZLGWK 6SHHG VHWSRLQW QVHW 6 5DPS XS FRPSOHWHG 6SHHG Q 7LPH 7LPH 7LPH 7LPH LQDFWLYH DFWLYH 5DPS IXQFWLRQ JHQHUDWRU DFWLYH FRQWURO ZRUG VHUYR Corresponding to DB31 DBX94 6 nact nset DB31 DBX94 3 MD Mdx MD1426 MD_SPEED_DES_EQ_ACT_TOL MD1427 MD_SPEED_DES_EQ_ACT_DELAY Additional references IAD SINUMERIK 840D Ins...

Page 2053: ...old torque is set using the machine data MD1428 MD_TORQUE_THRESHOLD_X threshold torque as a of the actual torque limit value The torque threshold characteristic is speeddependent While ramping up the interface signal DB31 DBX94 2 Md Mdx remains at 1 The signal Md Mdx only becomes active after ramp up has been completed DB31 DBX94 2 ramp up completed 1 and the signal interlocking time for the thres...

Page 2054: ...ULQJ UDPS XS 7 0 0 B72548 B7 5 6 2 B B 7 0 0 B63 B 6B 4B 7B 7 7 7 WKHUHIRUH QR VLJQDO VLJQDO WKDW LV LQWHUORFNHG 7 7 LQWHUORFNHG WR DFWLYH 7KUHVKROG WRUTXH 0 0 B72548 B7 5 6 2 B IRU 0G 0G 7RUTXH VHWSRLQW 0G 7RUTXH 7LPH 6 0G 0G 6SHHG DFWXDO YDOXH QDFW 6SHHG WROHUDQFH EDQG 6SHHG VHWSRLQW QVHW 6 5DPS XS FRPSOHWHG 6SHHG 7LPH 7LPH 7LPH 7LPH LQDFWLYH DFWLYH 5DPS IXQFWLRQ JHQHUDWRU DFWLYH FRQWURO ZRUG VH...

Page 2055: ...D1418 MD_SPEED_THRESHOLD_MIN Signal state 0 or edge change 1 0 The speed actual value is higher than the minimum speed Corresponding to MD1418 MD_SPEED_THRESHOLD_MIN minimum speed nmin for nact nmin Additional references IAD SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Startup Guide Chapter SIMODRIVE 611D or IAC SINUMERIK 810D Installation and Start up Guide DB31 DBX93 5 nact nx Edge evaluation no Signal s upd...

Page 2056: ...ce bandwidth for at least the time defined using machine data MD1427 MD_SPEED_DES_EQ_ACT_DELAY delay time for nset nact signal refer to the diagram If the speed actual value then leaves the tolerance bandwidth then contrary to the signal ramp up completed the interface signal DB31 DBX94 6 nact nset is set to 0 Signal state 0 or edge change 1 0 The conditions described above have not yet been fulfi...

Page 2057: ...tion MD1625 MD_PROG_SIGNAL_ON_DELAY on delay variable signal function MD1626 MD_PROG_SIGNAL_OFF_DELAY off delay variable signal function Monitoring The parameterized variable is monitored to check whether it exceeds a defined threshold In addition a tolerance band hysteresis can be defined which is considered when scanning for violation of the threshold value Further the threshold exceeded signal ...

Page 2058: ...ult in the PLC user program Example The interface signal DB31 DBX94 7 variable signaling function should be set to a 1 if the motor torque exceeds 50 of the rated torque Corresponding to MD1620 MD_PROG_SIGNAL_FLAGS bits variable signal function MD1621 MD_PROG_SIGNAL_NR signal number variable signal function MD1622 MD_PROG_SIGNAL_ADDRESS address variable signal function MD1623 MD_PROG_SIGNAL_THRESH...

Page 2059: ...ng threshold Additional references IAD SINUMERIK 840D Installation and Startup Guide Chapter SIMODRIVE 611digital or IAG SINUMERIK 810D Installation and Start up Guide DB31 DBX95 7 i2t monitoring Edge evaluation no Signal s updated cyclic Signal state 1 or edge change 0 1 The drive signals the PLC that the power unit monitoring has responded The rated current limit of this i2t monitoring function ...

Page 2060: ...n example s This allows protection zones to be released if the current position is within a protection zone alarm 2 present if motion is to be started towards the protection zone limit alarm 1 or 2 present DB21 DBX8 0 DBX9 1 Activate machinespecific protection zone 1 10 Edge evaluation no Signal s updated cyclic Signal state 1 or edge change 0 1 The pre activated machinerelated protection zone 1 1...

Page 2061: ...Application example s Before a synchronous spindle for example is moved into the working range the relevant machine related protection zone can be activated 2 2 2 Signals from channel DB21 DB21 DBX272 0 DBX273 1 Machinerelated protection zone 1 10 pre activated Edge evaluation no Signal s updated cyclic Signal state 1 or edge change 0 1 The machinerelated protection zone 1 10 is preactivated in th...

Page 2062: ...the current JOG movement The pre activated machinerelated protection zone 1 10 would be violated in the current block if it would be activated by the PLC Signal state 0 or edge change 1 0 The activated machinerelated protection zone 1 10 is not violated in the current block The pre activated machinerelated protection zone 1 10 would not be violated in the current block if it would be activated by ...

Page 2063: ... max spindle speed SD43220 SA_SPIND_MAX_VELO_G26 prog spindle speed limiting G26 MD43230 SA_SPIND_MAX_VELO_LIMIT prog spindle speed limiting G96 G961 DB31 DBX12 0 DBX12 1 Hardware limit switches plus and minus Edge evaluation no Signal s updated cyclic Signal state 1 or edge change 0 1 A switch can be mounted at each end of the travel range of a machine axis which will cause a signal hardware limi...

Page 2064: ...MD36110 MA_POS_LIMIT_PLUS 1st software limit switch plus MD36130 MA_POS_LIMIT_PLUS2 2nd software limit switch plus MD36100 MA_POS_LIMIT_MINUS 1st software limit switch minus MD36120 MA_POS_LIMIT_MINUS2 2nd software limit switch minus 2 2 4 Signals from axis spindle DB31 DB31 DBX60 2 DBX60 3 Encoder limit frequency exceeded 1 Encoder limit frequency exceeded 2 Edge evaluation no Signal s updated cy...

Page 2065: ...m the axis was last programmed as a positioning axis or positioning spindle initial setting of supplementary axis Positioning axis the path movement was stopped with NC Stop the spindle is in the closed loop positioncontrolled mode SPCON SPOS instruction and is stationary the axis is switched from closed loop speedcontrolled to closed loop positioncontrolled mode with IS position measuring system ...

Page 2066: ... Signal state 1 or edge change 0 1 Refer to DB31 DBX60 6 position reached with exact stop coarse Signal state 0 or edge change 1 0 Refer to DB31 DBX60 6 position reached with exact stop coarse Signal irrelevant for Rotary axes that are programmed as rounding axes Corresponding to MD36010 MA_STOP_LIMIT_FINE exact stop fine 2 4 Acceleration B2 No signal descriptions required 2 5 Diagnostic tools D1 ...

Page 2067: ...is activated A block change is not executed and the channel message Wait Auxiliary function acknowledgment missing is displayed Meaning after the fixed stop has been reached IS Fixed stop reached DB31 DBX62 5 1 The function is aborted the alarm 20094 axis 1 Function aborted is output Significance when de selecting the function FXS 0 via the part program The torque limiting and the monitoring of th...

Page 2068: ...xed stop 1 Travel to fixed stop is inhibited The axis is stationary at the start position with reduced torque The channel message wait Auxiliary function acknowledgment missing is displayed Meaning before the fixed stop has been reached IS fixed stop reached 0 Travel to fixed stop is aborted The alarm 20094 Axis 1 Function aborted is displayed Meaning after the fixed stop has been reached IS fixed...

Page 2069: ...rque limitation parameterized in the actuator Signal state 0 or edge change 1 0 The Travel to fixed stop function is not active DB31 DBX62 5 Fixed stop reached Edge evaluation no Signal s updated cyclic Signal state 1 or edge change 0 1 The fixed stop was reached after selecting the FXS function This signal is used by analog drives e g to switch the actuator from speedcontrolled to current or torq...

Page 2070: ...ociated M01 help function Corresponding to DB21 DBX 318 5 associated M01 active 2 8 2 Signals from channel DB21 DB21 DBB58 DBB60 DBB65 M S T D H F functions Modification Edge evaluation no Signal s updated Jobcontrolled by NCK Signal state 1 or edge change 0 1 One M S T An D H or F function has been output to the interface with a new value together with the associated change signal at the beginnin...

Page 2071: ...a new value together with the associated change signal at the beginning of an OB1 cycle In this case the additional info Quick indicates the quick help function Signal state 0 or edge change 1 0 The change signals are reset by the PLC basic program at the start of the next OB1 cycle The value of the data involved is not valid DB21 DBB68 DBB97 M functions 1 to 5 Extended address M functions 1 to 5 ...

Page 2072: ... 1 or edge change 0 1 The T function programmed in an NC block is made available here as soon as the T change signal is available Value range of T functions 0 to 99 999 999 integer number The T function remains valid until it is overwritten by a new T function Signal state 0 or edge change 1 0 After the PLC has ramped up All help functions are deleted before a new function is entered Application e...

Page 2073: ... 6 Extended address F functions 1 to 6 Edge evaluation no Signal s updated Jobcontrolled by NCK Signal state 1 or edge change 0 1 Up to 6 F functions one path feed and up to 5 axis specific feeds for positioning axes are made available here simultaneously as soon as the F change signals are available Value range of F function Floating point corresponding to the MC5 format Value range of the extend...

Page 2074: ... evaluation no Signal s updated Signal state 1 or edge change 0 1 This bit indicates that an M00 or M01 help function is active if the appropriate associated M00 and M01 help functions were enabled activated beforehand Signal state 0 or edge change 1 0 No associated M00 M01 help functions active Corresponding to DB 21 DBX30 5 activate associated M01 2 8 3 Signals from axis spindle DB31 DB31 DBD78 ...

Page 2075: ...ating mode changeover inhibit 1 Corresponding to DB11 DBX6 0 active AUTOMATIC mode DB11 DBX0 1 MDA mode Edge evaluation no Signal s updated cyclic Signal state 1 or edge change 0 1 MDA mode is selected by the PLC program Signal state 0 or edge change 1 0 MDA mode is not selected by the PLC program Signal irrelevant for DB11 D0 4 operating mode changeover inhibit 1 Corresponding to DB11 DBX6 1 acti...

Page 2076: ...s activated for all the channels of the mode group The channel status of all the active channels changes to the channel status interrupted All of the channels in channel status reset remain in the channel status reset Programs that are running at this point are immediately interrupted at the earliest possible point even within a block and the program status changes to stopped All the moving axes o...

Page 2077: ... mode group stop plus spindles DB11 DBX0 7 Mode group reset Edge evaluation yes Signal s updated cyclic Signal state 1 or edge change 0 1 A reset is activated for all the channels of the mode group All of the channels are then in the channel status reset All of the current programs are then in the program status aborted All moving axes and spindles are decelerated to zero speed according to their ...

Page 2078: ...eferences BA Operations Guide HMI corresponding to the used software DB11 DBX1 2 Machine function REF Edge evaluation no Signal s updated cyclic Signal state 1 or edge change 0 1 Machine function REF is activated in the JOG mode for the mode group Signal state 0 or edge change 1 0 Machine function REF is not activated Signal irrelevant for If JOG mode is not active Additional references FB1 Functi...

Page 2079: ...ock Channels KA receive a STOP command comparable to the STOP KEY All channels are stopped deceleration phase of all KAs If DB11 DBX1 6 and DB11 DBX1 7 are set simultaneously it is impossible to determine which single block type is required In this case the control assumes no single block across mode groups Signal state 0 or edge change 1 0 If DB11 DBX1 7 is not set and bit DB11 DBX1 6 is set sing...

Page 2080: ...within BAG Signal status 0 or edge change 1 0 The machine function TEACH IN is not selected by HMI Additional References BA Operations Guide HMI corresponding to the used software DB11 DBX5 1 Selected REPOS machine function Edge evaluation no Signal s updated cyclic Signal state 1 or edge change 0 1 The machine function REPOS is selected by HMI within BAG Signal status 0 or edge change 1 0 The mac...

Page 2081: ...nctions Manual Basic Functions Reference Point Travel R1 DB11 DBX6 0 Data block Active mode AUTOMATIC Signal s from the mode group NCK PLC Edge evaluation no Signal s updated cyclic Signal state 1 or edge change 0 1 AUTOMATIK mode is active Signal state 0 or edge change 1 0 AUTOMATIK mode is not active DB11 DBX6 1 Active mode MDA Edge evaluation Signal s updated cyclic Signal state 1 or edge chang...

Page 2082: ...LC to the NCk are brought into an inactive state cleared state Special cases errors An alarm that withdraws the interface signal DB11 DBX6 3 mode group ready ensures that all channels of the mode group are no longer in the reset state In order to switch to another operating mode a mode group reset DB11 DBX0 7 must be made DB11 DBX6 7 All channels in the reset state Edge evaluation no Signal s upda...

Page 2083: ...DB11 DBX7 2 Active machine function REF Edge evaluation no Signal s updated cyclic Signal state 1 or edge change 0 1 Machine function REF is active in the mode group Signal state 0 or edge change 1 0 Machine function REF is not active Further references FB1 Functions Manual Basic Functions Reference Point Travel R1 2 9 3 Signals to channel DB21 DB21 DBX0 4 Activate single block Edge evaluation no ...

Page 2084: ...e end of the block search concluding action blocks are executed DB21 DBX32 3 action block active 1 AND DB21 DBX32 6 last action block active 1 Alarm 10208 Channel Channel Number Issue NC START to continue program notifies the user that he must reactivate NC START to resume the part program starting from the target block If other actions are to be executed by the PLC user program prior to the NC ST...

Page 2085: ...st is not requested Corresponds to DB21 DBX25 7 program test selected DB21 DBX33 7 program test active DB21 DBX2 0 Skip block Edge evaluation no Signal s updated cyclic Signal state 1 or edge change 0 1 Skip blocks marked in the part program with an slash are not processed If there is a series of skip blocks the signal is only active if it is present before the first skip block of the series is de...

Page 2086: ...revents a part program from being started with NC START signal DB21 DBX7 1 NC START 1 Signal state 0 or edge change 1 0 NC START disable is not active Special cases errors The start of a part program selected in the channel by part program command START in another channel program coordination is not prevented by the interface signal DB21 DBX7 0 NC start disable 1 Corresponds to DB21 DBX7 1 NC STAR...

Page 2087: ...no Signal s updated cyclic Signal state 1 or edge change 0 1 AUTOMATIC or MDA mode Processing of the part program active in the channel is stopped The axes not spindles are brought to a standstill within the assigned acceleration parameters Program status stopped Channel status interrupted JOG mode In JOG mode incompletely traversed incremental paths INC are retracted at the next NC START Note The...

Page 2088: ...l status changes to Channel status reset Signal state 0 or edge change 1 0 No effect Corresponds to DB11 DBX0 7 mode group reset DB21 DBX35 7 channel status reset DB21 DBX31 0 DBX31 2 REPOS mode REPOSPATHMODE Edge evaluation no Signal s updated cyclic REPOS mode specified by HMI Bit 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 no REPOS mode active 0 0 1 1 Re approach to block start RMB 0 1 0 2 Re approach to interruption point ...

Page 2089: ...ogram with Block search with computation on contour is active as with Block search with computation on block end point no approach block is created of its own The axes are automatically positioned on the collected search position if ASUP exits with REPOSA during Block search with computation on contour Signal status 0 or edge change 1 0 The search target is found during Block search with computati...

Page 2090: ...change 0 1 The last action block is being executed This means that all the action blocks on the side of NC have been processed and the actions on the side of PLC ASUP FC or the operator such as overstore mode change according to JOG REPOS are possible In this way the PLC for example can still perform a tool change before the start of movement Signal state 0 or edge change 1 0 The last action block...

Page 2091: ...is block Additional references FB1 Functions Manual Basic Functions K1 Channel Program Operation Reset Response DB21 DBX33 5 M02 M30 active Edge evaluation no Signal s updated cyclic Signal state 1 or edge change 0 1 NC block with M02 or M30 or M17 if a subroutine was started is completely processed if traversing motions are also programmed in this block the signal is only output when the target p...

Page 2092: ...B21 DBX33 6 Transformation active Edge evaluation no Signal s updated cyclic Signal state 1 or edge change 0 1 The NC command TRAORI activate transformation is programmed in the NC part program This block has been processed by the NC and the transformation is now activated Signal state 0 or edge change 1 0 No transformation active Additional references PGA Programming Manual Advanced DB21 DBX33 7 ...

Page 2093: ... program was started with the interface signal DB21 DBX7 1 NC start and is running Special cases errors The interface signal DB21 DBX35 0 program status running does not change to 0 if workpiece machining is stopped due to the following events A feed disable or spindle disable was output DB21 DBX6 1 read in disable Feed correction to 0 The spindle and axis monitoring functions respond Position set...

Page 2094: ...status interrupted Edge evaluation no Signal s updated cyclic Signal state 1 or edge change 0 1 When the operating mode changes from AUTOMATIC or MDA in stopped program status to JOG the program status changes to Interrupted The program can be continued at the point of interruption in AUTOMATIC or MDA mode when NC start is issued Signal state 0 or edge change 1 0 Program status aborted is not pres...

Page 2095: ...nge 0 1 The NC part program in AUTOMATIC or MDA mode or a traversing motion in JOG mode can be interrupted by DB21 DBX7 3 NC stop DB21 DBX7 4 NC stop axes plus spindles DB21 DBX7 2 NC stop at the block limit Programmed M00 or M01 Or Single block mode After an NC start the part program or the interrupted traversing movement can be continued Signal state 0 or edge change 1 0 DB21 DBX35 3 Channel sta...

Page 2096: ...rrent program status of the concerned channels Signal status 0 or edge change 1 0 The concerned channel is not ready for a part program processing of machine axes geometry axes and positioning axes corresponds to MD11600 MN_BAG_MASK DB21 DBX37 6 Read in disable is ignored Edge evaluation Signal s updated The following machine data are used to specify that the read in disable DB21 DBX6 1 is to be i...

Page 2097: ...ate 0 Single block is not active DB21 DBB0 4 0 OR single block is active DB21 DBX0 4 1 AND part program block is single block operative Corresponds to Read in disable is ignored DB21 DBX37 6 read in disable is ignored DB21 DBB208 DBB271 Active G function of groups 1 to 60 Edge evaluation no Signal s updated cyclic Signal state 0 A G function or mnemonic identifier of the G group is active The acti...

Page 2098: ... RI DQ 68 ZLWK 5 326 EORFN VLJQDOV 68 RQH 3DWK RI WKH SDUWV SURJUDP RQWURO V VWHP VWRSSHG 68 LV WKHQ VWDUWHG E WKH YHQW WKDW EULQJV WKH FRQWURO LQWR WKH VWRSSHG VWDWXV RFFXUV DPSOH 6WRS NH 68 ZLWK 5 326 ASUB with REPOSA is triggered in the status AUTOMATIC mode stopped If the interrupt routine is ended with REPOSA then the following sequence is typical The part program is stopped using the stop ke...

Page 2099: ...X31 4 REPOSMODEEDGE is acknowledged with the interface signal DB21 DBX319 0 REPOSMODEEDGEACKN if level signals from DB21 DBX31 0 DBX31 2 REPOSMODE0 2 and from DB31 DBX10 0 REPOSDELAY are taken over in the NC The levels relate to the current block in the main run Signal state 0 or edge change 1 0 SERUPRO ASUP stopped automatically before the REPOS and NST DB21 DBX319 REPOSMODEEDGE does not affect S...

Page 2100: ... NCK 5 3263 7 02 5 32602 W 5 32602 1 5HSRV 3DWK 0RGH FNQ 1 1 1 7KH UHPDLQLQJ EORFN LV ILQLVKHG 2XWSXW 68 RPPDQG LV VWDUWHG ZLWK 683 5H DSSURDFK IURP 5 326 KDV EHHQ FRPSOHWHG 7KH UHPDLQLQJ EORFN VWDUWV 3UHVHOHFW 501 6WRS SDUW SURJUDP 6WDUW SDUW SURJUDP Corresponds to DB21 DBX31 0 DBX31 2 REPOSPATHMODE0 2 DB21 DBX31 4 REPOSMODEEGGE DB21 DBX319 0 REPOSMODEEGGEACKN DB31 DBX70 2 Repos Delay Ackn Additi...

Page 2101: ...e change 1 0 Miscellaneous Corresponds to DB31 DBX70 0 Repos offset DB21 DBB376 PROG EVENT DISPLAY Edge evaluation no Signal s updated event driven Signal state 1 or edge change 0 1 The event associated with the bit has occurred Signal state 0 or edge change 1 0 The event associated with the bit is no longer pending Bit assignments Bit 0 part program start from channel status RESET Bit 1 end of pa...

Page 2102: ...EPOS offset Edge evaluation no Signal s updated cyclic Signal state 1 or edge change 0 1 A REPOS offset must be applied for the appropriate axis Signal state 0 or edge change 1 0 No REPOS offset need be applied for the appropriate axis Corresponds to DB31 DBX70 1 REPOS offset valid DB31 DBX70 1 REPOS offset valid Edge evaluation no Signal s updated cyclic Signal state 1 or edge change 0 1 The rang...

Page 2103: ...esponds to DB31 DBX10 0 REPOSDELAY DB31 DBX72 0 REPOSDELAY DB31 DBX72 0 REPOSDELAY Edge evaluation no Signal s updated cyclic Signal state 1 or edge change 0 1 After a block search a REPOS offset is applied for this axis However it is not applied using the approach block but rather using the next traversing block in which the axis is programmed Signal state 0 or edge change 1 0 The REPOS offset fo...

Page 2104: ...calculating the total work offset between the basic and workpiece coordinate systems The previous value is still valid Signal irrelevant for AA_ETRANS axis equals zero for all axes Special cases errors Signal zero after ramp up power ON Corresponding to AA_ETRANS axis 2 11 EMERGENCY STOP N2 2 11 1 Signals to NC DB10 DB10 DBX56 1 EMERGENCY STOP Edge evaluation no Signal s updated cyclic Signal stat...

Page 2105: ...STOP active was reset Resetting the EMERGENCY STOP state has the following effects the controller enable is switched in Followup mode is canceled for all axes and position control mode resumed DB31 DBX61 5 set position controller active DB11 DBX6 3 set mode group ready DB10 DBX106 1 reset EMERGENCY STOP active Alarm 3000 is canceled Part program processing is interrupted for all channels 6 DNQRZOH...

Page 2106: ... Signal state 1 or edge change 0 1 The NC is in the EMERGENCY STOP state Corresponding to DB10 DBX56 1 EMERGENCY STOP DB10 DBX56 2 acknowledge EMERGENCY STOP 2 12 Transverse axes P1 No signal descriptions required 2 13 PLC basic program P3 For specifications of the NC PLC interface signals see Literature FB1 Functions Manual Basic Functions PLC Basic Program powerline P3 pl PLC Basic Program solut...

Page 2107: ...FP_CYCLE_NR have reached their reference point the interface signal DB21 DBX36 3 all axes present is set Application example s If the machine axes are to be referenced in a particular sequence there are the following possibilities The operator must observe the correct sequence when starting The PLC must check the sequence when starting or define it itself The function channel specific referencing ...

Page 2108: ... the controller enable withdrawn Signal state 0 or edge change 1 0 One or more axes of the channel have not been referenced Special cases errors The spindles of the channel have no effect on this interface signal Corresponding to DB31 DBX60 4 referenced synchronized 1 DB31 DBX60 5 referenced synchronized 2 2 14 3 Signals to axis spindle DB31 DB31 DBX2 4 DBX2 7 Reference point value 1 to 4 Edge eva...

Page 2109: ... in front of the reference cam An appropriately long reference cam up to the end of the traversing range should be used to prevent the machine axis from being located behind after the referencing cam Corresponding to DB31 DBX2 4 DBX2 7 reference point values 1 to 4 2 14 4 Signals from axis spindle DB31 DB31 DBX60 4 Referenced synchronized 1 Edge evaluation Signal s updated Signal state 1 or edge c...

Page 2110: ...enced and the following interface signal is set DB31 DBX60 5 referenced synchronized 2 depending on which position measuring system is active when referencing Spindles After power on a spindle is synchronized the latest after one spindle revolution 260 degrees the zero mark passed or the Bero responded Signal state 0 or edge change 1 0 The machine axis spindle with position measuring system 2 is n...

Page 2111: ... the following fashion Control mode Spindle stops Program continues to run Spindle continues to run with subsequent M and S program commands Oscillating mode Oscillation is interrupted Axes continue to run Program continues with the actual gearbox stage With the following M value and higher S value it is possible that the IS DB31 DBX83 1 programmed speed high is set Positioning mode Is stopped Axi...

Page 2112: ...rammed spindle speed and the next block in the parts program can be executed The actual gear stage is output in coded format For each of the 5 gear stages there is one set of parameters assigned as follows 3DUDPHWHU VHW 1R 1 3 LQWHUIDFH 0HDQLQJ DWD IRU D LV PRGH DWD IRU VW JHDU VWDJH DWD IRU QG JHDU VWDJH DWD IRU UG JHDU VWDJH DWD IRU WK JHDU VWDJH DWD IRU WK JHDU VWDJH ದ Special cases errors If t...

Page 2113: ... by the NCK as the setpoint gear stage the gear change is still considered to have been successfully completed and the actual gear stage A to C is activated Corresponding to DB31 DBX16 2 DBX16 0 actual gear stage A to C DB31 DBX82 2 DBX82 0 setpoint gear stage A to C DB31 DBX82 3 change over gear stage DB31 DBX18 5 oscillation speed DB31 DBX16 4 DBX16 5 Resynchronizing spindles 2 and 1 Edge evalua...

Page 2114: ...ffect Signal irrelevant for spindle modes other than the positioning mode Application example s The spindle has an indirect measuring system and slippage may occur between the motor and the clamp If the signal 1 when positioning is started the old reference is deleted and the zero mark is searched for again before the end position is approached Corresponding to DB31 DBX60 4 referenced synchronized...

Page 2115: ...th the interface signals DB31 DBX18 6 DBX18 7 setpoint direction of rotation counter clockwise and clockwise The oscillation i e the continuous change of the direction of rotation is performed by the PLC user program using the interface signal setpoint direction of rotation counter clockwise and clockwise oscillation via the PLC Application example s If the new gear stage cannot be engaged in spit...

Page 2116: ...peed is set the spindle starts to oscillate with the oscillation acceleration MD35410 if the interface signal DB31 DBX18 4 oscillation via the PLC is not set then automatic oscillation is executed in the NCK using the IS Oscillation speed The two times for the directions of rotation are entered in the machine data MD35440 MA_SPIND_OSCILL_TIME_CW oscillation time for the M3 direction and MD35450 MA...

Page 2117: ...e signals are set simultaneously enabled no oscillation speed is output If an interface signal is not set then an oscillation speed is not output Corresponding to DB31 DBX18 4 oscillation controlled by the PLC DB31 DBX18 5 oscillation speed DB31 DBX30 0 Spindle stop Edge evaluation yes Signal s updated cyclic Signal state 1 or edge change 0 1 DB31 DBX30 0 spindle stop corresponds to M5 spindle sto...

Page 2118: ...set each is provided for each of the 5 gear stages When changing over to the spindle mode the corresponding parameter set 1 to 5 is selected according to the gear stage engaged A gear stage can be preselected as follows M40 automatically by the programmed spindle speed M41 to M45 permanently by the part program By the PLC using function block FC 18 In the RESET state by writing to the VDI interfac...

Page 2119: ...achine axis is operated as an axis The interface signals to the axis DB31 DBB12 DBB15 and from the axis DB31 DBB74 DBB81 are valid The interface signals to the spindle DB31 DBB16 DBB19 and from the spindle DB31 DBB82 DBB91 are invalid Application example s If a machine axis operates alternatively as a spindle or rotary axis Turning machine Spindle C axis Milling machine Spindle rotary axis for rig...

Page 2120: ...ed through M Function M40 For the previously given set speed gear step change requires DB31 DBX82 3 Change gear 1 DB31 DBX82 0 DBX82 2 Set gear step Set gear step Signal state 1 or edge change 0 1 New set gear stage was specified AND set gear stage actual gear stage Special cases errors Signal is not output if Set gear stage actual gear stage Corresponds to DB31 DBX82 0 DBX82 2 Set gear stage A to...

Page 2121: ...eed and or the complete channel IS DB31 DBX83 5 spindle in set range is processed DB31 DBX83 2 Setpoint speed increased programmed speed too low Edge evaluation yes Signal s updated cyclic Signal state 1 or edge change 0 1 The set speed of the spindle that is specified directly programmed spindle speed or indirectly constant cutting speed would violate the current minimum limit value The set speed...

Page 2122: ... in the channel first with the end of the acceleration phase of the spindle IF DB31 DBX83 5 Spindle in the set range 1 THEN DB21 DBX6 0 Feed disable 0 ELSE DB21 DBX6 0 Feed disable 1 Instruction Axes positioning will also be stopped Corresponds to MD35500 MA_SPIND_ON_SPEED_AT_IPO_START MD35500 MA_SPIND_DES_VELO_TOL spindle speed tolerance DB31 DBX83 7 Actual direction of rotation clockwise Edge ev...

Page 2123: ...uring rigid tapping the thread will be destroyed DB11 DBX0 7 mode group reset 1 DB21 DBX7 7 channel reset 1 DB31 DBX2 1 servo enable 0 DB31 DBX8 3 feed stop 1 DB31 DBX84 5 Active spindle mode Positioning mode Edge evaluation yes Signal s updated cyclic Signal state 1 or edge change 0 1 Positioning mode SPOS or SPOSA is active Corresponds to DB31 DBX84 7 spindle mode control mode DB31 DBX84 6 spind...

Page 2124: ...o its original position in JOG mode then the signal DB31 DBX85 5 Spindle in position is reset The last position selection is maintained A requirement for the sending of NST DB31 DBX30 4 spindle positioning is the reference status of the spindle During a fault free run the reference signal is always active at the end of the positioning movement Signal status 1 or edge change 0 1 A requirement for o...

Page 2125: ... DBB91 S function for spindle Edge evaluation yes Signal s updated cyclic Signal state 1 or edge change 0 1 An S function was output from the NCK to the PLC The output occurs by means of See Corresponds to below The following S functions are output here S as spindle speed in rpm programmed value S as constant cutting speed in m min or ft min The following S functions are not output here S as the p...

Page 2126: ...om the PLC or operator panel When selected from the operator panel front the PLC interface signal DB21 DBX24 6 dry run feed selected is set and transferred from the PLC basic program to the interface signal DB21 DBX0 6 activate dry run feed When selected using the PLC the IS activate dry run feed should be set from the PLC user program Signal state 0 or edge change 1 0 The programmed feed is used ...

Page 2127: ...0 feed changes are possible in accordance with the binary value in the byte The following permanent assignment applies RGH HHG UDWH RYHUULGH IDFWRU ฬ ฬ ฬ ฬ ฬ Binary values 200 are limited to 200 The machine data MD12100 MN_OVR_FACTOR_LIMIT_BIN limit for binary coded override switch can be used to additionally limit the maximum feed rate override With Gray coding the individual switch settings are ...

Page 2128: ...BP10 2BA0 DB21 DBB4 Feed rate override Corresponding to DB21 DBX6 7 feed rate override active MD12030 MN_OVR_FACTOR_FEEDRATE n evaluation of the path feed rate override switch MD12100 MN_OVR_FACTOR_LIMIT_BIN limit for binary coded override switch DB21 DBB5 Rapid traverse override Edge evaluation no Signal s updated cyclic ...

Page 2129: ...to 100 feed changes are possible in accordance with the binary value in the byte The following permanent assignment applies RGH 5DSLG WUDYHUVH RYHUULGH IDFWRU ฬ ฬ ฬ ฬ ฬ Binary values 100 are limited to 100 Using the machine data MD12100 MN_OVR_FACTOR_LIMIT_BIN limit for binary coded override switch the maximum rapid traverse override can be additionally limited With Gray coding the individual swit...

Page 2130: ...f the axis is interpolating in relation to others this also applies to these axes Signal state 0 or edge change 1 0 The feed rate is enabled for all axes of the channel If a travel request travel command exists for an axis or group of axes when the feed disable is canceled then this is executed immediately Application example s Stopping machining by selecting FEED OFF on the machine control panel ...

Page 2131: ...ride factor is entered using the machine data MD12020 MN_OVR_FEED_IS_GRAY_CODE path feed rate override factor gray coded and MD12030 MN_OVR_FACTOR_FEEDRATE n evaluation of the path feed rate override switch Signal state 0 or edge change 1 0 The feed rate override entered at the PLC interface is ignored When the feed rate override is inactive the NC always uses 100 as the internal override factor E...

Page 2132: ...ted Instead of the programmed feed rate the dry run feed rate entered in setting data SD42100 SC_DRY_RUN_FEED is active When activated from the operator panel the dry run feed signal is automatically entered in the PLC interface and transmitted by the PLC basic program to the PLC interface signal DB21 DBX0 6 active dry run feed Signal state 0 or edge change 1 0 Dry run feed rate is not selected Th...

Page 2133: ...is available DB 21 DBX29 0 DBX29 3 Activate fixed feed rate 1 4 for path geometry axes Edge evaluation no Signal s updated cyclic Description These signals are used to select de select the function fixed feed and define which fixed feed should be effective for path geometry axes LW LW LW LW 0HDQLQJ L HG IHHG LV GH VHOHFWHG L HG IHHG LV VHOHFWHG L HG IHHG LV VHOHFWHG L HG IHHG LV VHOHFWHG L HG IHHG...

Page 2134: ...ges are possible in accordance with the binary value in the byte The following permanent assignment applies RGH LV VSHFLILF IHHG UDWH RYHUULGH IDFWRU ฬ ฬ ฬ ฬ ฬ ฬ Binary values 200 are limited to 200 Using the machine data MD12100 MN_OVR_FACTOR_LIMIT_BIN limit for binary coded override switch the maximum axis specific feed rate override can be additionally limited With Gray coding the individual sw...

Page 2135: ...hange 1 0 The existing axisspecific feed rate override or spindle override is not active If the feed rate override is inactive 100 is used as the internal override factor Exceptions are the zero setting for a binary interface and the 1st switch setting for a Graycoded interface In these cases the override factors entered at the PLC interface are used For a binary interface the override factor 0 Fo...

Page 2136: ...e to each other when the feed stop is activated for any one of these path axes In this case all the axes are brought to a stop with adherence to the path contour When the feed stop signal is canceled execution of the interrupted parts program is resumed The position control is retained i e the following error is eliminated If a travel request is issued for an axis with an active feed stop this is ...

Page 2137: ...ndle stop is inactive when G331 G332 are active DB31 DBB19 Spindle override Edge evaluation no Signal s updated cyclic Signal state 1 or edge change 0 1 The spindle override can be defined via the PLC in binary or Gray coding The override value determines the percentage of the programmed speed setpoint that is issued to the spindle With binary coding the override is interpreted in 0 to 200 feed ch...

Page 2138: ...WLRQ RGH 6SLQGOH RYHUULGH IDFWRU VWDQGDUG YDOXHV The factors listed in the table for spindle override are stored in the machine data MD12070 MN_OVR_FACTOR_SPIND_SPEED n The table contains the default settings The number of possible switch settings for standard machine control panels is described in the Configuring Guides for 840D 810D Corresponding to DB 31 DBX1 7 override active MD12070 MN_OVR_FA...

Page 2139: ...ion axes spindles MD32040 MA_JOG_REV_VELO_RAPID revolutional feed rate for JOG with rapid traverse override MD32050 MA_JOG_REV_VELO revolutional feed rate for JOG mode DB31 DBB78 DBB81 F function for positioning axis Edge evaluation no Signal s updated cyclic Signal state 1 or edge change 0 1 The F value of a positioning axis programmed in the current block is entered in the axisspecific PLC inter...

Page 2140: ...Detailed Description 2 17 Tool Offset W1 Basic logic functions NC PLC interface signals Z1 144 Function Manual 11 2006 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 ...

Page 2141: ...83 DBX1 7 83 DBX4 0 83 DBX4 1 84 DBX4 2 84 DBX5 0 84 DBX5 1 84 DBX5 2 85 DBX6 0 85 DBX6 1 85 DBX6 2 86 DBX6 3 86 DBX6 7 86 DBX7 0 86 DBX7 1 87 DBX7 2 87 DB19 DBW2 14 DBW4 15 DBX0 0 12 DBX0 1 12 DBX0 2 13 DBX0 3 13 DBX0 4 14 DBX0 7 14 DBX10 0 15 DBX10 1 15 DBX10 2 15 DBX10 7 16 DBX12 2 16 DBX12 3 16 DBX12 4 16 DBX12 5 16 DBX12 6 17 DBX12 7 17 DBX13 5 17 DBX13 6 17 DBX13 7 18 DBX14 0 DBX14 6 18 DBX1...

Page 2142: ...1 0 110 DBX1 1 65 DBX1 6 88 DBX1 7 89 DBX10 0 DBX11 1 65 DBX12 3 135 DBX16 3 135 DBX2 0 89 DBX20 3 135 DBX24 6 136 DBX25 3 136 DBX272 0 DBX273 1 66 DBX274 0 DBX275 1 66 DBX276 0 DBX277 1 67 DBX278 0 DBX279 1 67 DBX29 0 DBX29 3 137 DBX30 5 74 DBX31 0 DBX31 2 92 DBX31 4 92 DBX318 0 102 DBX318 1 102 DBX318 5 78 DBX318 7 28 DBX319 0 103 DBX319 1 DBX319 3 103 DBX319 5 105 DBX32 3 93 DBX32 4 93 DBX32 5 ...

Page 2143: ... 3 DBX21 4 40 DBX21 5 41 DBX21 6 42 DBX21 7 42 DBX3 0 108 DBX3 1 72 DBX3 2 DBX3 5 139 DBX3 6 68 DBX30 0 121 DBX30 1 121 DBX30 2 122 DBX30 3 122 DBX30 4 122 DBX4 3 140 DBX60 0 123 DBX60 2 DBX60 3 69 DBX60 4 113 DBX60 5 113 DBX60 6 70 DBX60 7 70 DBX61 0 43 DBX61 3 43 DBX61 4 44 DBX61 5 44 DBX61 6 45 DBX61 7 46 DBX62 2 143 DBX62 4 73 DBX62 5 73 DBX69 0 DBX69 2 46 DBX70 0 106 DBX70 1 106 DBX70 2 106 D...

Page 2144: ...tive 93 Associated M01 M00 active 78 ASUB is stopped 102 AT box ready 8 AUTOMATIC mode 79 Axis spindle disable 29 Axis spindle stops 44 Block search active 95 Block search via program test is active 102 Cancel alarm cleared 21 Change gear stage 124 Channel is ready 100 Channel number FC9 ChanNo 26 Channel number of the machine control panel to HMI 15 Channel status active 98 Channel status interru...

Page 2145: ...achine function TEACH IN 82 Machinerelated protection zone preactivated 66 Machinerelated protection zone violated 67 MDA mode 79 Mode change disable 19 Mode changeover inhibit 80 Mode group number 26 Mode group ready 86 Mode group reset 81 Mode group stop 80 Mode group stop axes plus spindles 81 Motor selection A B 40 Motor selection in progress 41 Motor temperature prewarning 53 n act equals n s...

Page 2146: ...d mode TEACH IN 84 Selection 18 25 Sensor for fixed stop 72 Set gear stage A to C 123 Setpoint direction of rotation counter clockwise setpoint direction of rotation clockwise 120 Setpoint speed increased 125 Setpoint speed limited 124 Setting up mode active 47 ShopMill control signal 16 Simulation selected 21 Single block type A 83 Single block type B 83 Skip block 89 Speed controller active 45 S...

Page 2147: ... sl SINUMERIK 840Di sl 840DiE sl SINUMERIK 840D powerline 840DE powerline SINUMERIK 840Di powerline 840DiE powerline SINUMERIK 810D powerline 810DE powerline Software Version NCU system software for 840D sl 840DE sl 1 3 NCU system software for 840D sl DiE sl 1 0 NCU system software for 840D 840DE 7 4 NCU system software for 840Di 840DiE 3 3 NCU system software for 810D 810DE 7 4 ...

Page 2148: ...ommissioning and operation of a device system may only be performed by qualified personnel Within the context of the safety notes in this documentation qualified persons are defined as persons who are authorized to commission ground and label devices systems and circuits in accordance with established safety practices and standards Prescribed Usage Note the following Warning This device may only b...

Page 2149: ... Appendix Function Manual 11 2006 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 3 Table of contents A Appendix 5 A 1 List of abbreviations 5 A 2 Publication specific information 13 A 2 1 Correction sheet fax template 13 A 2 2 Overview 15 Glossary 17 ...

Page 2150: ...Table of contents Basic logic functions Appendix 4 Function Manual 11 2006 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 ...

Page 2151: ...or Information Interchange ASUB Asynchronous subprogram AUXFU Auxiliary Function Auxiliary function B BA Mode Mode group Mode group BCD Binary Coded Decimals Decimal numbers encoded in binary code BERO Proximity limit switch BI Binector Input BICO Binector Connector BIN BINary files Binary files HHU Handheld unit BCS Basic Coordinate System BO Binector Output BOT Boot file SIMODRIVE 611D OPI Opera...

Page 2152: ...block PLC DBB Data block byte PLC DBD Data block double word PLC DBW Data block word PLC DBX Data block bit PLC DIN Deutsche Industrie Norm German Industry Standard DIO Data Input Output Data transfer display DIR DIRectory Directory DO Drive Object DPM Dual Port Memory DPR Dual Port RAM DRAM Dynamic memory non buffered DRF Differential Resolver Function Differential revolver function handwheel DRI...

Page 2153: ...which they were stored FIPO Fine InterPOlator FRAME Coordinate transformation CRC Cutter Radius Compensation FST Feed STop Feed stop FW Firmware G GC Global Control Profibus Broadcast telegram GEO Geometrie e g geometry axis GIA Gear Interpolation dAta Gear interpolation data GND Signal GrouND BP Basic Program PLC GS Gearbox stage GSD Device master file for desribing a Profibus slave GSDML Generic...

Page 2154: ... Emitting Diode Light emitting diode LF Line Feed PMS Position Measuring System LR Position controller LSB Least Significant Bit LUD Local User Data User data local M MAC Media Access Control MB Megabyte MCI Motion Control Interface MCIS Motion Control Information System MSTT Machine Control Panel MD Machine Data MDA Manual Data Automatic Manual input MSGW Message word MCS Machine coordinate syste...

Page 2155: ... outputs PII Process image of inputs PC Personal Computer PCMCIA Personal Computer Memory Card International Association PCU PC Unit PG Programming device PID Parameter identification Part of a PIV PIV Parameter identification Value Parameterizing part of a PPO PLC Programmable Logic Control Adaptive controller PNO PROFIBUS User Organization PO Power On POS Positioning e g POS axis positioning axi...

Page 2156: ...Computer Type of processor with small instruction set and ability to process instructions at high speed ROV Rapid Override Input correction RP R parameter arithmetic parameter predefined user variable RPY Roll Pitch Yaw Rotation type of a coordinate system RTLI Rapid Traverse Linear Interpolation Linear interpolation during rapid traverse motion RTCP Real Time Control Protocol S SBC Safe Brake Con...

Page 2157: ...rminal Board SINAMICS TCP Tool Center Point Tool tip TCP IP Transport Control Protocol Internet Protocol TCU Thin Client Unit TEA Testing Data Active Identifier for machine data TIA Totally Integrated Automation TM Terminal Module SINAMICS TO Tool Offset Tool offset TOA Tool Offset Active Identifier file type for tool offsets TRANSMIT TRANSform Milling Into Turning Coordination transformation for ...

Page 2158: ... Coordinate System T Tool TLC Tool Length Compensation WOP Workshop Oriented Programming WPD Workpiece Directory Workpiece directory TRC Tool Radius Compensation WZ Tool TO Tool offset TM Tool management TC Tool change X XML Extensible Markup Language Z ZOA Zero Offset Active Identifier for zero offsets ZSW Status word of drive ...

Page 2159: ...endix Function Manual 11 2006 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 13 A 2 Publication specific information A 2 1 Correction sheet fax template Should you come across any printing errors when reading this publication please notify us on this sheet Suggestions for improvement are also welcome ...

Page 2160: ...ions Appendix 14 Function Manual 11 2006 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 7R 6 0 16 0 06 3RVWIDFK UODQJHQ D RFXPHQWDWLRQ PDLOWR GRFX PRWLRQFRQWURO VLHPHQV FRP ZZZ VLHPHQV FRP DXWRPDWLRQ VHUYLFH VXSSRUW URP 1DPH RPSDQ HSW 6WUHHW LS FRGH 7RZQ 3KRQH D 6XJJHVWLRQV DQG RU FRUUHFWLRQV ...

Page 2161: ...DFWXUHU 6HUYLFH RFXPHQWDWLRQ 6 180 5 VO 0DQXDO 1 8 6 180 5 VO L VO 0DQXDO 2SHUDWRU RPSRQHQWV 6 180 5 VO RPPLVVLRQLQJ 0DQXDO 1 ಥ 1 3 ULYH ಥ 0 VO ಥ 0 PEHGGHG ಥ 0 GYDQFHG ಥ 6KRS0LOO ಥ 6KRS7XUQ 0DQXIDFWXUHU 6HUYLFH RFXPHQWDWLRQ 6 180 5 VO L VO L XQFWLRQ 0DQXDO ಥ DVLF 0DFKLQH ಥ WHQGHG XQFWLRQV ಥ 6SHFLDO XQFWLRQV 6 180 5 VO L VO L XQFWLRQ 0DQXDO ಥ 6 QFKURQL HG FWLRQV ಥ VR LDOHFWV 6 1 0 6 6 XQFWLRQ 0DQXD...

Page 2162: ...XDO ಥ 6KRS0LOO ಥ 6KRS7XUQ 0DQXIDFWXUHU 6HUYLFH RFXPHQWDWLRQ 6 180 5 VO L VO L XQFWLRQ 0DQXDO ಥ DVLF 0DFKLQH ಥ WHQGHG XQFWLRQV ಥ 6SHFLDO XQFWLRQV ಥ 6 QFKURQL HG FWLRQV ಥ VR LDOHFWV ಥ 0 XLGHOLQHV 6 180 5 L XQFWLRQ 0DQXDO ಥ ULYH XQFWLRQV ಥ 7RRO 0DQDJHPHQW ಥ GUDXOLFV 0RGXOH ಥ QDORJ 0RGXOH 6 180 5 L XQFWLRQ 0DQXDO ಥ 5HPRWH LDJQRVLV ಥ YHQW 6 180 5 VO L VO L 3URJUDPPLQJ 0DQXDO ಥ FOHV ಥ 0HDVXULQJ FOHV 6 1...

Page 2163: ... operator panel in plain text with date and time and the corresponding symbol for the cancel criterion Alarms and messages are displayed separately 1 Alarms and messages in the part program Alarms and messages can be displayed in plain text directly from the part program 2 Alarms and messages from PLC Alarms and messages for the machine can be displayed in plain text from the PLC program No additi...

Page 2164: ...anded right angled coordinate system Rotary axes rotating around X Y and Z are identified using A B and C Additional axes situated parallel to the specified axes can be designated using other letters Axis name See Axis identifier Backlash compensation Compensation for a mechanical machine backlash e g backlash on reversal for ball screws Backlash compensation can be entered separately for each axi...

Page 2165: ...lect any location in the part program at which the program is to be started or resumed Booting Loading the system program after power on C axis Axis around which the tool spindle describes a controlled rotational and positioning movement Channel A channel is characterized by the fact that it can process a part program independently of other channels A channel exclusively controls the axes and spin...

Page 2166: ...ecting cables Connecting cables are pre assembled or user assembled 2 wire cables with a connector at each end This connecting cable connects the CPU to a programming device or to other CPUs by means of a multi point interface MPI Continuous path mode The objective of continuous path mode is to avoid substantial deceleration of the path axes at the part program block boundaries and to change to th...

Page 2167: ...t functions for servicing purposes status alarm and service displays Dimensions specification metric and inches Position and pitch values can be programmed in inches in the machining program Irrespective of the programmable dimensions G70 G71 the controller is set to a basic system DRF Differential Resolver Function NC function which generates an incremental work offset in Automatic mode in conjun...

Page 2168: ...ning program enabling the tool to be quickly retracted from the workpiece contour that is currently being machined The retraction angle and the distance retracted can also be parameterized After fast retraction an interrupt routine can also be executed SINUMERIK 840D Feed override The programmed velocity is overriden by the current velocity setting made via the machine control panel or from the PL...

Page 2169: ...eal for machining internal and external threads using form milling cutters and for milling lubrication grooves The helix comprises two movements Circular movement in one plane A linear movement perpendicular to this plane High level CNC language The high level language offers user defined variables system variables macro techniques High speed digital inputs outputs The digital inputs can be used f...

Page 2170: ...irection referenced to a point already reached See Absolute dimension Intermediate blocks Motions with selected tool offset G41 G42 may be interrupted by a limited number of intermediate blocks blocks without axis motions in the offset plane whereby the tool offset can still be correctly compensated for The permissible number of intermediate blocks which the control reads ahead can be set in syste...

Page 2171: ...hat can be removed in the specified positions Keywords Words with specified notation that have a defined meaning in the programming language for part programs Leading axis The leading axis is the gantry axis that exists from the point of view of the operator and programmer and thus can be influenced like a standard NC axis Leadscrew error compensation Compensation for the mechanical inaccuracies o...

Page 2172: ...e zero Fixed point of the machine tool to which all derived measuring systems can be traced back Machining channel A channel structure can be used to shorten idle times by means of parallel motion sequences e g moving a loading gantry simultaneously with machining Here a CNC channel must be regarded as a separate CNC control system with decoding block preparation and interpolation Macro techniques...

Page 2173: ... m meters Mirroring Mirroring reverses the signs of the coordinate values of a contour with respect to an axis It is possible to mirror with respect to more than one axis at a time Mode group Axes and spindles that are technologically related can be combined into one mode group Axes spindles of a BAG can be controlled by one or more channels The same mode type is always assigned to the channels of...

Page 2174: ...reen It features horizontal and vertical softkeys Oriented spindle stop Stops the workpiece spindle in a specified angular position e g in order to perform additional machining at a particular location Oriented tool retraction RETTOOL If machining is interrupted e g when a tool breaks a program command can be used to retract the tool in a user specified orientation by a defined distance Overall re...

Page 2175: ...path velocity depends on the input resolution For example with a resolution of 0 1 mm the maximum programmable path velocity is 1000 m min PCIN data transfer program PCIN is an auxiliary program for sending and receiving CNC user data e g part programs tool offsets etc via a serial interface The PCIN program can run in MS DOS on standard industrial PCs Peripheral module I O modules represent the l...

Page 2176: ...en the path distance approaches an amount equal to a specifiable delta of the end position Program block Program blocks contain the main program and subroutines of part programs Programmable frames Programmable frames enable dynamic definition of new coordinate system output points while the part program is being executed A distinction is made between absolute definition using a new frame and addi...

Page 2177: ...or any purpose in the program Rapid traverse The highest traverse rate of an axis For example rapid traverse is used when the tool approaches the workpiece contour from a resting position or when the tool is retracted from the workpiece contour The rapid traverse velocity is set on a machine specific basis using a machine data element Reference point Machine tool position that the measuring system...

Page 2178: ...eration on the workpiece Selecting Series of instructions to the NC Control that act in concert to produce a particular workpiece Likewise this term applies to execution of a particular machining operation on a given raw part Serial RS 232 C interface For data input output the PCU 20 has one serial V 24 interface RS232 while the PCU 50 70 has two V 24 interfaces Machining programs and manufacturer...

Page 2179: ...ining parameters The subroutine is called from a main program Every subprogram can be protected against unauthorized read out and display Cycles are a form of subroutines Supply System A network is the connection of multiple S7 300 and other end devices e g a programming device via a connecting cable A data exchange takes place over the network between the connected devices Synchronization Stateme...

Page 2180: ...s without any input from the programmer of a part program It is defined by a data type and the variable name preceded by the character See User defined variable Text editor See Editor TOA area The TOA area includes all tool and magazine data By default this area coincides with the channel area with regard to the reach of the data However machine data can be used to specify that multiple channels s...

Page 2181: ...xis Traversing range The maximum permissible travel range for linear axes is 9 decades The absolute value depends on the selected input and position control resolution and the unit of measurement inch or metric User memory All programs and data such as part programs subroutines comments tool offsets and zero offsets frames as well as channel and program user data can be stored in the shared CNC us...

Page 2182: ...aid of the working area limitation the traversing range of the axes can be further restricted in addition to the limit switches One value pair per axis may be used to describe the protected working area Working memory RAM is a work memory in the CPU that the processor accesses when processing the application program Workpiece Part to be made machined by the machine tool Workpiece contour Set conto...

Page 2183: ...configurable number of settable work offsets are available for each CNC axis The offsets which are selected by means of G functions take effect alternately 2 External In addition to all the offsets which define the position of the workpiece zero an external work offset can be overlaid by means of the handwheel DRF offset or from the PLC 3 Programmable Work offsets can be programmed for all path an...

Page 2184: ...Glossary Basic logic functions Appendix 38 Function Manual 11 2006 6FC5397 0BP10 2BA0 ...

Reviews:

No comments

Related manuals for SINUMERIK 840D sl

Brand: Unitech Pages: 11

Brand: B meters Pages: 10

Brand: Eaton Pages: 288

Brand: UCS Pages: 4

Brand: Harpo Pages: 35

Brand: Hardi Pages: 2

Brand: Parkside Pages: 86

Brand: Watlow Pages: 59

Tekmar WiFi Snow Melting Control 670

Brand: Watts Pages: 48

Brand: Zamel Pages: 2

ArtNet-DMX Mux16

Brand: DMX4ALL Pages: 21

Brand: FEAS Pages: 4

Brand: Fuji Electric Pages: 12

Brand: heat-timer Pages: 36

AQUASNAP 30RA "B"

Brand: Carrier Pages: 36

Brand: Beckhoff Pages: 30

Brand: Festo Pages: 109

Brand: Topworx Pages: 8

Brands by name

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

Popular brands

Load more brands